JP7404669B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is conducted to determine the success or failure of a game , and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means capable of storing the information stored in the storage means. a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on the discriminating means; a display means displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. dynamic display execution means; and an advantageous state that can set an advantageous state in which an advantageous benefit can be given to a player based on the fact that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. and a state setting means, wherein the dynamic display execution means is configured to display a predetermined discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result in a state where the information is stored in at least the storage means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine is configured to dynamically display the identification information to show a new determination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the gaming machine is configured to dynamically display the identification information in order to show the new determination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the gaming machine stores the information in the storage means. A plurality of specific periods including at least a first period and a second period different from the first period as a specific period from the end of the advantageous state in the state where the advantageous state ends until the new identification information is dynamically displayed. Any one of the periods can be determined in response to information regarding a gaming state set based on the specific determination result, regardless of the number of the information stored in the storage means. and a period longer than at least the predetermined period can be determined as the second period, and a response mode corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means is notified at least in the specific period. Even if the amount of the benefit acquired by the player in the predetermined advantageous state configured such that the player can obtain a predetermined amount of the benefit is the predetermined amount, the amount is less than the predetermined amount. Even in such a case, the same period is determined as the specific period.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination is made based on the information stored in the storage means. a display means for displaying identification information to show the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. and an advantageous state setting means capable of setting an advantageous state in which an advantageous benefit can be given to the player based on the fact that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and the dynamic display execution means stops displaying identification information for indicating a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result while at least the information is stored in the storage means. In such a case, the gaming machine is configured to dynamically display the identification information to show the new determination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the gaming machine is configured to dynamically display the identification information in a state where the information is stored in the storage means. Any one of a plurality of periods including at least a first period and a second period different from the first period as a specific period from the end of the advantageous state until dynamically displaying the new identification information. is configured to be able to determine the period of time corresponding to the information regarding the gaming state set based on the specific determination result, regardless of the number of the information stored in the storage means, and the second period As the period, a period longer than at least the predetermined period can be determined, and the configuration is configured such that a response mode corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means is notified at least in the specific period, and the player If the amount of the benefit acquired by the player in the predetermined advantageous state in which the player can acquire a predetermined amount of the benefit is the predetermined amount or is less than the predetermined amount, The configuration is such that the same period is determined as the period.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable prize winning device and a distribution device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable prize winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable prize winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable prize winning device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate of the variable prize winning device and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member of the sorting device in the first round in each jackpot type. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first operating unit in an extended state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member due to rotational displacement of a rotational member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle due to rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. be. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. be. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverting member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 2 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the drive mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; 74 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 73. FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. FIG. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. It is a top view of a middle member, a state switching device, a slide displacement member, and a lower member. (a) is a sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, and lower member taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, and lower member taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78. FIG. 78(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, and lower member taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. (a) and (b) are side views of the slide displacement member and the ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide part. (a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). It is. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the guide elongated hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. (a) and (b) are rear views of the guide elongated hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension part of the transmission gear cam. It is a front perspective view of a 1st decorative rotating member and a 2nd decorative rotating member. (a) and (b) are front schematic diagrams schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhanging decorative part. (a) and (b) are front schematic diagrams schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhanging decorative part. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhanging decorative portion. 86 is a sectional view of the first operating unit taken along the line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 6 is a front view of the second operating unit in an extended state. 95 is a sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. FIG. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversal production device. (a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. It is a schematic diagram of the 3rd operation unit which shows the displacement of a metal rod and an intermediate arm member typically. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit. It is a front view of an outer rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (a) is a back view of the outer rotation member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotation member and the intermediate arm member. It is a front view of a 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of a 3rd operation unit. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along the line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a sectional view of the third operating unit taken along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the third embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. (a) and (b) schematically show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment; schematic diagrams of the third flow path component, the definite variation detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member; FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the definite change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110(a); ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the definite variation detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member along the CXIb-CXIb line. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15; It is a front perspective view of the sorting device in 7th Embodiment. 115 is a sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in FIG. 114. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide slot and the rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide slot and the rotating member in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a first control example. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st example of control. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone effect executed after the end of the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone effect executed after the end of the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of battle mode effects. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of battle mode effects. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of battle mode effects. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of battle mode effects. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of operation effects. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of operation effects. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing the flow of performance from jackpot to jackpot game and after. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the flow of effects from the jackpot to the jackpot game. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the production mode of the operation production. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure which showed the regulation content typically, and (c) is a figure which showed the regulation content of the 1st winning type selection table set to ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the normal table in the first control example. (a) to (e) are diagrams schematically showing the prescribed contents of various data tables included in the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a variation pattern scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. be. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a winning rate selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the press effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 1st control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit related processing by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the round effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the performance mode variable process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the winning effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed prize ball related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the additional presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing a battle variation display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time-saving production mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for the winning rate UP zone executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process after the first time executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final winning rate determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the battle effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. 7 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. It is a flow chart which showed ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the number addition related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. be. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the additional effect selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart showing performance update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect timer update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the additional production mode setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game in the third control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game in the third control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the audio lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart showing the winning effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart showing the round effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which showed additional production mode setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd example of control. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the performance performed during the winning rate UP zone in the 4th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the performance performed during the winning rate UP zone in a 4th control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the audio lamp control device in a 4th example of control. It is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous hit effect setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing performance update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the effect performed during the battle mode in the 5th control example. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the effect performed during the battle mode in the 5th control example. It is a figure which showed typically the flow of production control in a 5th control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the audio lamp control device in a 5th example of control. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time-saving effect mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 5th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing display point setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifth control example. 12 is a flowchart showing count addition related command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a fifth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the performance performed during battle mode in another example of the 5th control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the performance performed during battle mode in another example of the 5th control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the performance performed during battle mode in another example of the 5th control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the performance performed during battle mode in another example of the 5th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the V prize winning device in Embodiment A1. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the V prize winning device in Embodiment A1. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a movable guide member in the A1 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode that does not become a pseudo series displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation mode that does not become a pseudo series displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode of the pseudo series 1 displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating an example of a variation mode of the button performance during pseudo-coupled development displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the variation aspect of the button performance at the time of the pseudo-coupling development displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1st A1 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment are stopped. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation mode when the V attacker opens immediately after the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment is stopped. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram of the special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a normal symbol random number table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the first winning type selection table in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the selection table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the special figure 1 small winning type in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the selection table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the special drawing 2 small winning type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a stipulated content of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a time-saving variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. , is a diagram illustrating each winning type and the operation contents of the winning game in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the jackpot scenario table in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the small win scenario table in the A1 embodiment. , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario a in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the winning scenario b in the A1 embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario c in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. . It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow in 1st A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the small winning V passes in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the small hit V does not pass in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V passes in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V does not pass in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating power-on images in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading process performed by MPU in a main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passing processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing specific jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart that is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (c) is a flowchart showing chance command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart that is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart that is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small winning end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V entrance passing command processing. It is a flowchart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A2. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically a sorting device in a 2nd embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the inside of a sorting device B700 in the A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A3. It is a schematic diagram which typically showed the croon member in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in A4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow path unit in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed on a third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the roulette chance displayed on the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the roulette chance displayed on the third symbol display device in the A4 embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control device in A4th embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the small winning V in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the jackpot V in the A4 embodiment. It is. (a) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small win V does not pass in the A4 embodiment, and (b) shows the roulette display timing when the jackpot V does not pass in the A4 embodiment. This is a timing chart. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition device determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the V prize winning device in A5th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing specific jackpot control processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A5th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing specific jackpot control processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A5th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a sixth control example. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and performance mode of a series of performances in the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the performance mode of the final variation performance in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode of a general figure fluctuation performance. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance mode in which a normal symbol fluctuation performance is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode in which a normal symbol fluctuation performance is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the common symbol winning screen displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example at the time of Toku 2 winning during Toku 1 variation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when Toku 2 winning is in the Toku 1 fluctuation. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode of a special 2 fluctuation performance (challenge game) displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when a small hit is won with the special 2 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode in the sixth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation mode when a jackpot is won during a small win displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example at the time of special 2 winning while special 1 is not changing; It is a figure showing an example of the performance mode when a small hit is won with the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time point when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game per normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode at the time point when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game per normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode when a ball does not enter a second winning hole during a normal symbol winning game displayed on a third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning game, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode in the sixth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode when a ball does not enter a V winning hole during a small winning game displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during a time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode of the time saving final change displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode of the first half of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the sixth control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance mode of the second half of the time saving final variation displayed on the display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode showing the performance result of the second half performance of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the production mode at the time of special 2 winning after the end of the time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when the special 2 hit is displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a result display mode of the time-saving final variation effect displayed on the 3-symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the performance mode which shows the end of a time-saving state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in the 6th control example. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 6th example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the sixth control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 5 table in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table in the sixth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table of 2 random numbers for 2 special symbols in the sixth control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table of 5 random numbers per normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 5 table in the sixth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table in the sixth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 5 table for selecting the type per ordinary figure in the sixth control example, and (b) is the release of the electric accessory based on the type per ordinary figure and the game state. It is a diagram showing the contents of the operation. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 5 table in the 6th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 1 small hit type selection 5 table in the 6th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small winning type selection 5 table in the sixth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general pattern variation pattern selection table in a sixth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 5 table in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 5 table in the sixth control example. be. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the variation pattern 5 table for time saving which is a part of variation pattern selection table in a 6th example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 5 table in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 5 table for time saving final in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart which shows timer interrupt processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passing processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the general pattern pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passing processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows V passing processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command process 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the win related command process 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing small hit related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small win related command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart showing normal small hit processing to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process for a series of effects performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for ordinary figures performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning variation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the performance update process 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the series effect update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing the update process during a game per normal figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the update process during the game in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart showing update processing during a small winning game executed by the MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a seventh control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance mode during the time saving final variation in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in a seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 6 table for selecting the type per normal figure in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the electric role based on the type per normal figure and the gaming state in the seventh control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an object opening operation. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 6 table in a seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the general pattern fluctuation pattern table in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the general pattern fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the regular figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 6 for regular figures performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 7th control example. FIG. 12 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a second modified example of the sixth control example. It is an enlarged view which schematically expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the sixth control example. It is an enlarged view which schematically expanded the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of performance of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the sixth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in a second modification of the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the second modification of the sixth control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 7 table in a second modification example of the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 7 table in the second modification example of the sixth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a table. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a common pattern variation pattern selection 7 table in a second modification of the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the set effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure set production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 6th control example. It is a figure which showed the setting method of a series of effects in the 2nd modification of the 6th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a common map scenario table in an eighth control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 2 per common figure is set as a series of performance scenarios in the 8th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 4 per common figure is set as a series of performance scenarios in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 8 executed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the series performance discrimination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process 8 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal map related command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in an 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 8 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process during constant monitoring performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 8 for ordinary figures performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the series performance prediction setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 8th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final variation effect table in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning final table in the ninth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final table for deviation in a ninth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final effect variable setting table in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning setting table in the ninth control example. . FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a setting table for deviation in a ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 9 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 9 executed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the final prize winning process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 9 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 9th control example. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a right-hit notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a right hit notification screen in a second notification mode displayed on the symbol display device. FIG. 12 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a modification of the seventh control example. It is a figure which showed typically the flow of the performance of the Pachinko machine in the modification of the 7th control example. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in an eleventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the start screen of the time-saving effect A displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the start screen of the time-saving effect A displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. It is a figure showing an example of the start screen of time-saving effect B displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the time saving effect A screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time saving effect A screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving effect B screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a last chance production screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the time-saving effect B screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 11th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state in the eleventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eleventh control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 1st random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 11 table in the 11th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 11 table in the eleventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 1 small hit type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small winning type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving provision table in an eleventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 11 tables of variation patterns in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 11 tables of normal variation patterns in the 11th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time saving variation pattern 11 table in the eleventh control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a small winning scenario 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning scenario a in the 11th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a winning scenario b in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning scenario c in the eleventh control example. It is a figure which showed typically the winning scenario d in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern selection 11 table for final time saving in the 11th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in a main control device in an 11th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 11 executed by MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart showing winning information command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in an eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 11 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 11th control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving provision table in a modification of the eleventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit suggestion production start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit suggestion production start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a screen during a small hit suggestion performance that is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit suggestion production screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a screen during a small hit suggestion performance that is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit suggestion production screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a screen during a small hit suggestion performance that is displayed. It is a figure showing typically the relationship between special figure fluctuation and fluctuation performance in a 12th example of control. It is a figure showing typically the relationship between special figure fluctuation and fluctuation performance in a 12th example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the time saving provision 13 table in the modification of the 13th control example. It is a flow chart which shows start time saving update processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving termination process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 13th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the flow regarding the game state and variable performance in a modified example. It is a diagram schematically showing the flow regarding the game state and variable performance in a modified example. It is a figure showing the flow of performance when the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the second modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production screen in a 2nd modification. FIG. 12 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a fourteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot end screen when there is no reservation in the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 14th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot end screen in the 14th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot end screen when there is a reservation in the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during charge time displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a friend gathering effect screen displayed during charge time. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game after the end of the jackpot game in the 14th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourteenth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a standby regular figure fluctuation pattern selection table in a fourteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. be. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character selection table in a fourteenth control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 14th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 14th control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the standby setting process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 14th control example. It is a flow chart which shows standby processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 14th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process 14 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. 12 is a flowchart showing standby-related command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in a 14th control example. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a fifteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen during the charge time when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 15th control example is 3 seconds, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production screen during the charge time. It is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen 2 during the charge time when the variation time of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 15th control example is 3 seconds. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen at the end of charge time displayed on the third symbol display device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the third symbol display device in the 15th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a time saving effect screen when the second special symbol displayed on the screen is changing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen during the charge time when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 15th control example is 16 seconds, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen during the charge time. It is a figure showing an example of the production screen when fluctuation of the first special symbol starts during the time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the 15th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen when the variation of the first special symbol stops during the time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen It is a figure showing an example of the performance screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in No. 15 control example after the end of time saving. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 15th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 1st winning type selection 15 table in the 15th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 15 table in the 15th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 15 table in the 15th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 15 tables of variation patterns in the 15th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 15 tables of normal variation patterns in the 15th control example. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time-saving variation pattern 15 table in the fifteenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 15 table in the 15th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 15 table in the 15th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 small winning type selection 15 table in the 15th control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a 15 table for selecting common patterns during standby in a 15th control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound ramp control device in a 15th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows time saving update processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 15th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows V passing processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 15th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process 15 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 15th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing standby-related command processing 15 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 15th control example. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a 16th control example. It is an enlarged view of the second area formed in the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the ball flow when a game ball flows down to the left operation winning hole A in the second area in the 16th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the ball flow in the second area in the 16th control example. It is a diagram showing the ball flow when the game ball flows down to the right-acting winning hole B. It is a figure showing the ball flow when the game ball that has flowed down the special route in the second area flows down to the right operation prize opening B in the 16th control example. It is a figure showing an example of the performance screen when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge production screen when a game ball passes the first passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example, and (b) , is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge performance screen when a game ball passes the second passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge production screen when a game ball passes from the second passage sensor to the fourth passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example. , (b) is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge production screen when the game ball passes from the second passage sensor to the fifth passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge production screen when a game ball passes the third passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example, and (b) , is a diagram showing an example of a charge time acquisition challenge performance screen when a game ball passes from the third passage sensor to the fifth passage sensor displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 16th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 16 table in the 16th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 16 table in the 16th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 16 table in the 16th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 1st winning type selection 16 table in the 16th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 small hit type selection 16 table in the 16th control example. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing 16 time-saving provision tables in a 16th control example. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound ramp control device in a 16th example of control. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which shows time saving update processing 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th control example. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th example of control. It is a flow chart showing jackpot start processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. It is a flowchart which shows standby setting processing 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th example of control. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the electric support performance start screen during a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in a modification of the 16th control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the electric support performance start screen in the 16th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the ending screen of electric support performance displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in a modification. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game after the end of the jackpot game in a modification of the 16th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventeenth control example during a jackpot game when acquiring charge time, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventeenth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the performance screen 2 displayed during the jackpot game when the charge time is acquired. It is a figure showing an example of the production screen during the jackpot game when there is no charge time, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the 17th control example, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example of an effect screen displayed during charge time. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventeenth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventeenth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a waiting time selection table in a seventeenth control example. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows waiting time determination processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows standby setting processing 17 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 17th control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 from being visible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window of the base plate 60. It is set up. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured such that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 changes the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state so that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b can be received and guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right center of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are limited to those that deviate from the electric accessory 140a and drift down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right center portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward as it goes toward the back side from the lower end of the front end which is arranged opposite to the front end). The degree to which momentum is lost due to collision can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either in the front or the rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in side view is arranged at the lower front side, thereby making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening/closing plate 65b side. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left and right widths become smaller toward the bottom at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right outward by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the right and left sides of the inclined flow downward surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined downward flow surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner walls of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inner side, and has a front end surface as an inclined surface whose arrangement is shifted rearward as the left and right inner side increases. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, if the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that is swept backward due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening/closing plate 65b (in the front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b will open unintentionally or otherwise malfunction.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b closes by a rising motion. That is, the ball that landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so it does not come close to the left or right position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, but instead lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The balls being ridden are almost always guided to the specific winning hole 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Moreover, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed into a flat shape (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward, and then flows in the left and right direction due to the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will once move backward in parallel, so it is possible to avoid the balls colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b has a horizontally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and a horizontal flow is formed in the rolling ball, the rolling surface on the opening/closing plate 65b is Since the possibility that the movement of the ball will become irregular can be reduced, unintended malfunctions can be prevented.

The receiving member 163 is formed with contact surface portions 163a3 that come into contact with the rotating tips at both left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby increasing the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b. There is. The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right sides, and are designed to have a shape that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact, so that the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized. In addition, by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the ball from flowing downward is disposed on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured so as not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 This is intended to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening/closing plate 65b occurs when the contact surface portion 163a3 has a normal shape, there may be a disadvantage that load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball that is being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be configured to be received by being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball does not match the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming section 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path forming section 336. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged on the right and left sides of the electric accessory 140a. limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to the left and right outer positions than the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure visibility at the left and right inner positions than the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be explained. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG.7 and FIG.8, the state where the structure other than the 1st winning a prize opening 64, the 2nd winning a prize opening 140, and the variable winning a prize device 65 among the structures arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, there are balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). A collection gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-shaped portion facing the base plate 60 is open. By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for the ball that enters the first winning port 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for the ball that enters the second winning port 140. and a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form flow paths for the ball that enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on both the left and right sides, respectively.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left direction, and the second flow path section 152 slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right direction. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending below the general winning a prize opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, although the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the gaming area, the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is , are moved from the center position to the left and right sides by the collecting gutter 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and this space can be used to arrange the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. Note that in FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, and illustrations of other parts are omitted, and illustrations of other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, The base of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, collection gutter 150, and distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

In the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collection gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collection gutter 150, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are, whether the distribution device 300 is provided or the distribution device 300 is not provided. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 can be used in common.

Next, details of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the gaming area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution device 300 constitutes a downstream path through which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the downstream path of the distribution device 300, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member disposed on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive the ball that has passed through the specific prize opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connecting part with the sorting device 300; A state switching device 165 is fastened to and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether electricity is applied or not.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is a flat surface except for the through hole for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific prize opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the back side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the back side inside the thin wall portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 at the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin wall portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through hole of a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be placed is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary part 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate-like shape that is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extended support plates 161b having a substantially T-shape, including a longitudinally elongated plate-like part extending downward at a midway position of the laterally elongated plate-like part.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the rear range of the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support part 161c protrudes from the horizontally long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protrudes from the vertically long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary part 161a. The protruding support portion 161e that protrudes from the top surface of the portion has a function of supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical protruding part 161f protruding in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a contacts the balls flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the balls flowing down. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened parts 161h having internal threads for screwing fastening screws inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary part 161a.

The fastened portion 161i, which has a female thread portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is arranged outside the border portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the border portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, there is a connecting portion between the through hole for passing through the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for passing through the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened portion 161i is disposed.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female screws arranged at positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161, and each having a female threaded portion formed in such a manner that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole 161g can be screwed into. It includes a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c that extend toward the back side and have a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the downward flow path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball riding on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations on both the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inwards, so that the ball flowing on the extending portions 162c is The downstream path can be summarized as the downstream path of the ball riding on the extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling balls are placed (increasing the density of ball placement) compared to the number of falling balls, and to reduce the area where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (where the falling path is (a space that is not constructed) can be secured.

Although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is shown in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by pasting a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 in a geometric pattern, and the groove may be illuminated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent with a plain color or with the above-described decoration added.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, a contact surface portion 163a3, and an auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface part 163a forming a downstream surface on the inside of the frame, a ball passage hole 163b provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface part 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened part 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws arranged in and fastened and fixed to the fastened part 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female threaded part into which the fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and which are located in the left and right center. It includes a pair of fastened parts 163d disposed on the sides, and a plurality of fastened parts 163e each having a female threaded part into which a fastening screw inserted into the state switching device 165 is screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer ends with the left-right center portion as the apex, and an inclined flow that slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower from the left and right outer ends of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so that it can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body part 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downwardly toward the rear, and a fastened part of the receiving member 163 that is formed through the upper side of the main body part 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b into which the fastening screws screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is arranged, and both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened parts 164d formed with female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened part 164d formed through the upper part of the main body part 164a to be fastened with the fixed member 161. It includes an insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LED is arranged facing obliquely forward and upward, and when viewed from the front, the light emitting board 164c is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6), and the second winning prize It is placed directly below the mouth 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of a player who desires to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes at the spot diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-described configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be fixed more firmly than the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the arrangement of the sorting device 300 between the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 and Relative positional displacement can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat radiation. A lower case part 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and an electromagnetic solenoid 165c that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and a rotating portion that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides. It includes a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that a rod-shaped portion can be engaged therein, and a transmission protrusion 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b enters into this recessed portion. engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft portion 65d that forms a rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing plate 65b can be opened/closed in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted. , a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350 is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side, and a substrate 350 is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and changes its state depending on whether or not it is energized. a state switching device 360 that is configured to be able to switch; a slide displacement member 370 that is disposed below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched; An insertion hole is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and is formed through the hole so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough. and a lower member 380 having 381.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which the balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b flow down in the following order: inside the upper member 310, flow path forming parts 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. However, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are configured so that they can be seen by the player, and the way they flow down provides not only a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also provides the player with an effect. It produces an effect related to gaming profits, such as causing a change in profits.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, the position of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to focus on the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It has been devised with the premise of concentration.

Next, details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The upper member 310 is a thin member made of a light-transmissive resin material and has a U-shape when viewed from above, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed through the hole so as to be able to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313 that are pasted as a seal member 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 toward the front side along the outer periphery, and an inner member a plurality of insertion cylinder parts 315 in which through-holes are formed into which fastening screws inserted into the inner member 330 can be inserted; a fastened part 316 having a female thread into which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions that protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and A pair of left and right inner protrusions 318 that are elongated in the left and right direction and are disposed between a pair of front and rear long protrusions 317, and A pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 that are protrudingly provided and elongated in the left and right direction and are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317 and a size that allows the upper part of the board 350 to be placed therein. and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess.

The opening 312 is a passage-like part (tunnel-like part) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b of the variable prize winning device 65 and flows it downward, and the upper front edge is connected to the tilted attitude detection sensor SE1 ( (see FIG. 12) is cut with an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. Thereby, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the board 350 and being visually recognized brilliantly, but the details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the downward flow path of the ball below the upper member 310. A first upper surface part 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface part connected to the front end of the first upper surface part 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. By configuring the left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who views the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface side to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, although the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female threaded portion formed in the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the threaded portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made less noticeable to the player viewing the screw head from diagonally above. Thereby, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from becoming poor due to the fastening screws.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is only formed on the right side is because the insertion tube part 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, so one fastening position is sufficient on the front side, and the screw head is facing downward. The reason for this is that the appearance of the sorting device 300 will be better if the arrangement is omitted if it is unnecessary, even if it is less noticeable. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.

The fastened portion 316 is arranged at a position that avoids the downward path of the balls and minimizes deterioration in the appearance of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

The lower surfaces of the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved with the same location as a reference, and the arrangement becomes lower as the distance from that location increases. Formed as a surface. This curved surface has different shapes for the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, the left and right inner protruding portions 318, and the left and right outer protruding portions 319, and this difference in shape is intended to control the manner in which the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a box-like shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 and forming a downward flow path for the ball; A pair of second flow path forming portions 335 connected to the front end portion of the flow path forming portion 334 to form a flow path for the sphere and recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333; and the second flow path forming portions. A pair of third flow path forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 335 to form a flow path for the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and is formed penetrating the lower bottom of the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for the ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangle formed from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. A pair of alignment protrusions 339 are provided as protrusions.

The rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a downward flow path for the ball, unlike the front side portion that configures a downward flow path for the ball, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a that is formed vertically through the front end of the left and right center portions and is configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed therein, and a through hole that is elongated in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a fastened part 332c and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female screw part at its upper end into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed into a frame shape that is approximately square in top view, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with

The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 are parts that configure the flow path of the ball, and are arranged so that the flow direction of the ball, the inclination angle, etc. are different. The details will be explained later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a gap for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

In addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming part 336 as described above, the partition plate part 338 also functions as a guide part that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, but the details will be described later. The positioning protrusion 339 is a part that is fitted into the protrusion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower side part 353 is longer than the upper side part 352 from side to side, and a recess for positioning is provided at the lower end on the left end side of the lower side part 353. 354.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 for positioning in the left and right direction, and the left and right elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 back and forth. The upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. However, the details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. a sliding portion 362 that is engaged with and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the slide portion 362 slides. , is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion that is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since it is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating part 363 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed into a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connection part, and has a penetrating portion large enough to allow the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted therethrough. A supporting cylinder part 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder part 363b which projects upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a through-hole of the overhang part 362b, and a longitudinal part of the L-shape A lower cylindrical portion 363c is provided that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable about the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized to cause the plunger to slide and the slide portion 362 to be displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted into the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced, and accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is A thin plate part 371 that is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the thin plate part 380, an upper protruding part 376 that protrudes upward from the thin plate part 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper protruding part 376. A recessed portion 378 is provided at the protruding end of the protruding portion that protrudes upward at the portion, and is formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of supported holes 371a penetrating the left and right portions in the rear half portion, and a longitudinally elongated shape with a left and right width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper protruding portion 376 from the front end in the left and right center portions. A recessed part 372, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that protrude downward in the shape of protrusions along the edges of the recessed part 372, and protrusions along the left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 are provided in a strip shape and protrude in both vertical directions, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 is provided in a columnar shape and protrudes downward from the rear end portion and is inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower protrusion portion 373 and the upper and lower protrusion portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion having a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured to suppress displacement in the left-right direction by contacting the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be well guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole elongated in the left-right direction so as to be able to accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-back direction. Ru.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is such that the entire area where the upper protruding part 376 through which the insertion is planned and the protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is located inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like part 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated from side to side, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors on the lower side of the plate-like part 382. It includes a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are open, and the other portions are closed. is formed.

The plate-shaped part 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, similar to the vertical through-hole formed in the sensor holding frame part 389. A protrusion 383 that is elongated and protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of protrusions that protrude left and right away from the front end of the protrusion 383. a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at a position on the rear side of the protrusion 383; A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer positions than , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330. .

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed part 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 is configured such that the protrusion 383 is sandwiched between the recessed part 372. Placed. That is, the protruding portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed such that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are fitted in such a way that they are in contact with the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right sides of the middle member 330 are aligned with respect to the lower member 380. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, by bringing the back surface of the frame front part of the lower member 380 (the part that connects the protrusion part 383 and the protrusion part 383a on the front end side) into contact with the front face of the alignment protrusion part 339, the lower The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid positional deviation between the third flow path forming part 336 as a structure of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in a horizontally elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

Note that even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, it is not a part that would immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, although the guide protrusion 384 is normally designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period of time (for example, 3 years) without damage, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed taking into consideration that they will be used in a state where they collide with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the life span of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the design may be such that the strength of the protrusion 383 can withstand the remaining period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in its shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided to flow down, and the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. Further, the insertion hole 388 is arranged on the left and right outer sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. I can do it.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but by a plurality of members, at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 are guided by the partition plate part 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed part 372 is guided by the protrusion part 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are improperly assembled and the positional deviation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 will be inhibited. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 keep the displacement to a small value as they are parts that continuously constitute the flow path of the ball, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is said to be good, It is possible to guarantee that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the positional deviation of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes too large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced properly. , control can be performed to issue an error notification based on the possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in a poor state, and therefore it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Note that, here, a configuration related to the falling of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration that enters the downstream path of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at the front side position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be explained.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335 that follows, and the third flow path configuration section 336 that follows are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is formed with the flow direction of the balls flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 as a reference. The third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in the left and right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that flows in the same direction as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down on the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the ball increases toward the downstream side. To be more specific, the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the subsequent flow direction at the second flow path forming part 335 does not have a front-rear component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the flow is directed backward, which is opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front and rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow pattern with less influence.

Therefore, for example, unlike a downward flow mode in which the balls consistently flow down in the same direction (for example, to the left) from beginning to end, it is possible to easily prevent the downward speed of the balls from becoming excessive on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to make the falling speed of the ball uniform throughout the channel, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention of the player to the ball, and it is easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming portion 335, but if the second flow path forming portion 335 is formed, clogging of the bulb and backflow can be more easily prevented. When the second flow path configuration section 335 is not formed (when the left-right length of the second flow path configuration section 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 are When connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the direction of the ball's flow is large, and in particular, the speed direction must be reversed back and forth, so it is difficult to flow the ball smoothly, and balls are likely to accumulate, become clogged, or backflow, causing problems. may occur.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the switching angle of the flowing direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), no reversal of the velocity direction of the ball occurs, so that the ball can flow down smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid ball stagnation, clogging, and backflow.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 will be explained. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion located downstream of the ball is further retreated from the path of the ball than a portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f disposed opposite to each other is longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right sides of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow path side surfaces of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (Fig. 17 reference).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that is arranged downward toward the front side is provided so as to protrude upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the ball in a manner that bends the direction in which the ball flows down.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first channel forming section 334, and contacts the side wall section 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the direction of flow, and passing through the second channel forming section 334. The liquid flows down the flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f while flowing down, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed into a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the protruding support portion 161d of the member to be fixed 161. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

The inclination angle and length ratio in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be explained. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third The flow path forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and the common inclination angle is set to be slightly gentler in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 has a front frame part 333 formed in a square shape in top view as an inner side surface, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame part 333. It is formed so that the outer side surface is a large square. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-mentioned large square is 45 mm, so that a flow path with a width of 12 mm is created around the periphery. It is formed.

Therefore, for a normally used ball with a diameter of 11 mm, the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the ball, so the ball will flow down with almost no displacement in the width direction. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Fig. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Fig. 1) is defined as approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance; Can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path configuration part 334 is Since only the constituting curved protrusion 334b is arranged inside (on the front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is connected to the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. It's relatively short.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the channels formed by the second channel forming section 335 and the third channel forming section 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm between sphere centers), and the length is as follows. The length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

From the ratio of the longitudinal inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant. In other words, the time taken to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest path length, is longer than the time required to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, where the inclination angle is gentler and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And it is shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement is moved to the back side, and a portion is hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be quickly displaced to the front side from a state where the visibility of the ball is poor, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move his/her line of sight towards the ball, reducing the burden on the player who focuses on the ball (eyeball movement). eye strain) can be reduced.

When focusing on the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, which have high visibility in this way, the balls flow down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case where the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336, the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is smaller, which reduces the gaming burden on the player who focuses on the ball. , can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are the same. are considered to be equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball in front view is different, as a result, the apparent velocity of the ball (displacement velocity of the ball in front view) is lower than that of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. The ball flowing down is slower than the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335.

The flow path of the ball only changes at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easy to draw attention to, and in other parts, the flow path of the ball changes from each flow path forming part 334 to 336. It is considered common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight naturally tends to concentrate on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, it is possible to effectively reduce the gaming burden on the player who concentrates his/her line of sight in this manner.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the player's view of the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, in this embodiment, an open section 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path forming section 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid the flesh part of the second flow path forming part 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path forming part 336.

Further, in the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the falling ball is formed, and the formation of the shaped portion on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a thickness vertically, the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is less likely to be obstructed by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

Further, the configuration is such that the balls deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and heading toward the outlet 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming part 336, contacts the curved surface part 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow path structure 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path structure 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are visually recognized as being overlapped from front to back, so pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or the ball enters the out port 71 without entering the specific winning port 65a, the ball enters the field of view that focuses on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the ball heads toward the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the configuration of the nails implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), many of the fired balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion that attracts the player's attention) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is located at a position that overlaps in the front-back direction the position where the balls (excluding the balls that entered the ball 64 and 140) gather. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the flowing ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed in a shape similar to a prism to produce a light diffusion effect. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and above and below.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, so while it is possible to make the surface shine brilliantly, it also prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the light. visibility of the rear side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, visibility is poor in a state where light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when no light is irradiated, visibility is at least as low as in a state where light is irradiated. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a blocking object between the light and the light, the shadow of the blocking object will be visually recognized as a black spot, making it easier to determine its position.

Processed surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts. For example, there is a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side of the left and right external protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332, etc. (Fig. 17 reference).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light is diffused on the back side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed to create the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed to the left and right from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes looking at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The ball can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to instantly make it difficult to see.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen, from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 when viewed diagonally from above. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, the light is irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336. , it is possible to further improve attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state can be created in which the shadow of the sphere can be easily recognized as a black spot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, visibility of the ball can be switched between good and bad. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the sunspot, it is possible to create a situation in which the sunspot is hidden by the ball and a situation in which the sunspot is visible without being hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the flow formed by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 consistently It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This can prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. The effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Further, it is possible to prevent the balls from coming into contact with the light-diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the balls from flowing down or being subjected to deceleration effects. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the channel, the visibility of the ball is reduced even while the ball is flowing down the channel formed by the channel components 334 to 336. This can be avoided.

Note that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to produce an effect of light diffusion and an effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the fastening screws is reduced.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used to hide a portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, so that the light is diffused. The visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and its purpose is not only to make it shine brilliantly, but also to protect the substrate 350 disposed on the back side. and causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The board 350 is accommodated in a supported manner in the rear frame-shaped part 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged with a gap between the bottom and the bottom of the rear frame-shaped part 332 at the left and right center parts, and can slide into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

To be more specific, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower part 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame part 332 from the front and back at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 is provided with a thick wall portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, there is a gap due to the lack of this wall thickness. The slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 Visibility in the range can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it can appear as if light is emitting from above and below the specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged at the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the field of view and it will not be good. Since it cannot be visually recognized, sufficient effects can be achieved if it is formed within the arrangement gap of at least one pair of detection sensors SE1.

Note that the lower part 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the sealing member 313 and the part disposed below the sealing member 313 through which the sphere flows, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

19 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 19 and 20, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 that have a common function. The probability change detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is a ball entering sensor that causes a payout of a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind the ball, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls for each detection) are paid out. The money is paid out to the player by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but is used as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the jackpot game by detecting the ball entering. Function.

Note that, as described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to the variable probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not a jackpot will be won next time.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 covers the upper side of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 is The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member, and is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the flow path side concave, the flowing ball can be smoothly directed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. I can do it.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted backward from above the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and is inserted into the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11. Passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, but has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variable jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, details of the control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and sliding portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are placed on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is placed on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the recess of the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the mounting portion 378 to the rear side. This is a normal operating mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraud may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed to the back side, thereby attempting to fraudulently create a state in which the ball can enter the accurate change detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 is arranged below the bottom part of the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18). When passing the thin metal wire through the path forming portion 336 and pressing it against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end of the thin plate portion 371, and the wire must be pressed against the upper protruding portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 has a curved surface shape that releases the load to the left and right sides as described above, so even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load cannot be released to the left and right sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is incorrectly displaced to the rear position.

Furthermore, in addition to the fact that the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but winds in a spiral, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged far from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in many cases, the configuration was such that the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 was maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. However, the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. In contrast, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 to be difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be designed freely. You can increase the degree.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire passed through the third flow path forming section 336, the thin metal wire itself will cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit that the player obtains varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so avoid balls that enter the ball incorrectly as much as possible. It is advisable to avoid it.

Conventional models are usually configured to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the ball entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is permitted, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball enters the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), there is no movable member that restricts the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball does not enter the normal detection sensor SE12 either. This is a configuration that allows for

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls flowing down passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is ensured. In this embodiment, based on this idea, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. Further, since no movable members are disposed, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable members is not required, and the usage life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable members.

On the other hand, as a device other than the movable member, in order to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 were improved. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position is provided in a portion fixedly disposed inside the flow path (i.e., a protrusion). This is achieved by the shape of the mounting portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, we will explain how to improve the shape of the flow path. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction (the partition plate part 338 side) in the transverse direction. (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be similar in angle and direction to the longitudinal direction inclination of the second flow path forming part 335, so that the inclination from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336 is The bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (the bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be placed on the side close to the partition plate part 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate part 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path constituted by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335. Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated inward in the left-right direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be explained. The ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming part 336 is first placed close to the left and right inner protrusions 318 . The left and right inner protruding portion 318 is the smallest of the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is disposed on the front side, it comes into contact with the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 while sliding on the partition plate section 338 without leaking.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as downwardly concave curved surfaces when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is more horizontal than the front end side of the protrusion. It is formed to expand outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and has come into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows downward. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not alone determine whether the downward direction of the ball is downward or outward to the left and right; Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding end portion of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protruding portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the direction of flow of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface that starts from the left and right inner sides and ends at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose ending point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See Figure 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outer sides, and the ball, which is given momentum to the left and right outer sides by contacting with the left and right inner protrusions 318, utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows outward to the left and right, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the ball bouncing, the ball can flow down smoothly. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the downward direction of the ball but to suppress the ball's bounce, its shape is significantly different from the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, and the protruding ends are connected to the probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front side than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right external protrusions 319 When the provided portion 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right externally protruded portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a backward component to the ball, so that the ball does not flow back to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion 376 are retracted to the rear of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, so that the ball is moved closer to the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317. flows in contact with.

The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is located directly behind the position, it is easy to apply a load to the abutting ball with the left and right components suppressed. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely downward to the front because the protruding tip of the longitudinally long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that did not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318 is loaded obliquely forward and downward by the load from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Here, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound to the front side (reverse flow occurs) depending on the impact point at the time of collision with the front-rear long protrusion 317, but in this embodiment, as described above, Since the ball is forced diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the mounting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball will not be able to reach the rear end of the lower bottom of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the ball. , it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the liquid only collides with the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 19) and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the rear position and the ball flows toward the definite variation detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the front position and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced from the left and right inner protrusions 318 toward the left and right outer sides due to the load. This use will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position, and while the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 When 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load will be applied to the ball, and a load will be applied to the ball in a direction (forward) that will cause the flow to flow backward through the third flow path forming part 336. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

Further, the opening operation (movement from the front position to the rear position) of the slide displacement member 370 is not an operation in a direction opposed to the ball, but a movement away from the ball. Even if an action is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that would push the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if the opening operation is controlled to be executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, it is thought that the backflow of the balls will not be likely to occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 performs an opening operation while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the previous rolling. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, which includes the above-mentioned sorting device 300, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be explained. In the following, as an example, cases will be explained in which the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different.

21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly by comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that in FIGS. 21 to 23, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated in imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 disposed at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half disposed on the lower part 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, the sealing member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, so when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the area around the sealing member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. Since the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be drawn to the attention.

Note that on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted (see FIG. 18). Thereby, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processed surface 332e, and the area around the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Note that the light emission control is not limited in any way, but for example, it may be controlled to irradiate the sealing member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third channel forming part 336 during a jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 disposed directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 emits light, while when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 is caused to emit light. When the ball enters the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351, which is usually placed directly above the detection sensor SE12, to emit light, the player can be informed of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a vertically spread range (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming part 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp changes due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is narrower, compared to the direction seen in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the change in the downward flow mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Note that since the placement through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening with a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, the inside of the rear frame portion 332 The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) located in the front panel can be hidden so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize opening 65a during the round game and flow down each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of balls are arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the balls on the back side is obstructed by the balls on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of balls are arranged in the third flow path forming part 336, those balls are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the far side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

Further, when the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side, it flows outward from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right. After the ball comes off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame part 333, so the movement of the ball during the process of coming off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction It is preferable to grasp the flow from the downstream end position (ball P1 position) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (ball P2 position) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a ball (a ball that is slightly displaced from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction), the ball that is in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction is hidden by that ball.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the variable detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether or not the direction of flow of the ball has been switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. This can be done by visually checking, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and right side of the third flow path configuration part 336 The ball is configured to be able to flow down along a path including around the edge (movement from the position of the ball P1 to the position of the ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, a situation may arise in which it is not possible to ascertain whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the balls flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and the balls flowing through the second flow path forming part 335 are clearly separated by the vertical arrangement, so the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball becomes a blindfold. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized when viewed from the direction becomes smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 flows diagonally downward to the right, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then heads toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. The downstream route and the downstream route toward the normal detection sensor SE12 are switched. Therefore, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than when the ball's falling path is switched by either the ball flowing straight down or the ball's flowing direction being switched to the right.

Another possible mode of switching is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball is displaced below the bottom of the third flow path forming part 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the lower bottom upper surface of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is attached to the third flow path forming part 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the ball, the ball is also partially hidden by the front frame portion 333 by displacing the ball to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, the visible area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the player's perspective becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the downstream direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336, , each has its advantages and disadvantages. This allows the player to adjust and select his or her preferred viewing method, rather than requiring the player to play the game in a single-minded way, even when it comes to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

Regarding the directional views in FIGS. 22 and 23, visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, so the thickness of the members allows for transparency. Because there is less light, visibility will be obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 in the directional view in FIG. 23 than in the directional view in FIG. 22. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is difficult to occur (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it is possible to avoid poor visibility of the sorting device 300.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are designed to prevent players looking at the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 from obstructing the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the ball that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65a flows down and flows down towards the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be explained.

22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that flows down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. The ball deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portion 162b and the extended portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 are located below the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 cause each flow path to be It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. , similar to the ball flowing down the second channel forming part 335, has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the gaming area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path forming section 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same (left and right center position), by moving the player's line of sight up and down, the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the constituent parts 336 are visible.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the gaming area can easily enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (or whether the number of wasted balls during the jackpot game can be reduced) may deviate and form the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. 162c (or whether useless balls frequently occur during a jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path configuration section 336 by the balls flowing down. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In the case where the player's line of sight deviates from the inner rail 61, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

Normally, a ball heading toward the out port 71 is considered a waste ball and does not have any effect in the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the player's line of sight is directed toward the ball heading toward the out port 71. It can have a role of guiding the flow path to the third flow path forming part 336.

Note that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming part 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming part 335. There is sex.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 and an electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and a third flow path configuration part 336 is arranged below the left-right middle position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so the ball can be prevented from flowing down the front side of the third channel forming part 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its rear end portion is reduced due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the shape growth of the channel forming parts 334 to 336, but this arrangement is likely to cause this problem. Efforts are being made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming part 336. is formed short.

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the lower rear of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), the player's line of sight frequently occurs diagonally downward to the rear as shown in FIG. 23. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so closely that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a configured to be long on the left and right and passes through the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected at the lower left and right center side of the specific winning a prize opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. Thereby, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left and right direction. In addition, since the structure required as the downward flow path of the ball can be made so that the horizontal length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning a prize opening 65a close to the out opening 71, but instead of having a structure in which the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, the second flow path forming part 335 By adopting a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path forming section 335 by the third flow path forming section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387) An opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. Thereby, the vertical distance between the specific winning a prize opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by being able to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's perspective, it is possible to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370, so that it is possible to Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a can be placed near the lower end of the gaming area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after it enters the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into consideration will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down in order through the first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is approximately 0.3 seconds. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds for it to pass through the second flow path forming part 335, and it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration section 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball will be placed at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 for 0.9 seconds. The ball is configured so that it will never reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, it is possible to design the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 without fear of hitting the ball incorrectly.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winnings to the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in pachinko machines equipped with a V-probability variable attacker, there is a control to release the opening/closing board for a short time at the start of the round game R. control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. As a result, the operation mode of the opening/closing board that opens and closes the specific winning hole becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment where he or she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

Note that the time required for the ball to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth, uneven, etc.).

With reference to FIG. 24, the contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 19", and the jackpot A2 is associated with and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 39" is defined in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot B2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C1 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 140) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140), a 15-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, you can get a larger amount of payout prize balls than if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to increase the motivation for playing the game for drawing No. 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will become large. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, which has the disadvantage that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, the special symbol 2 lottery By setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game. .

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the special symbol 2 lottery will be delayed, so it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (time efficient for paying out prize balls).

Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled according to the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacement operation, and increase the player's interest.

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with good profit balance) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the winning of the normal symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-based changes in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below. In addition, in the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In addition, in this control example, the drive mode differs depending on the jackpot type only in the first round, and the drive mode is common from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be explained.

In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific prize opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As mentioned above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, and that the ball passes through the third flow path forming part. This is set based on the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a, Even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball disposed in the third flow path forming part 336, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry. (See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming conspicuous, and attract attention to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball enters the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and closer to the front side than the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is tends to collect in the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is This makes it easier to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, each of the channel forming parts 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the left and right centers, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on one side of the left and right, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. By paying attention to the rear of the third flow path constituting section 336 on the side that is not being moved, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the falling balls (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the ball. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily visually confirm whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time to allow a plurality of balls to enter in a row on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "entering with consecutive balls").

In this control example, the firing interval of the balls is set at 0.6 second intervals, so even if the falling interval of the balls has not changed from the time of firing, the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. During this time, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 seconds, the next ball passes through each channel forming section 334 before two balls pass through each channel forming section 334 to 336. - 336 can be regulated.

In the case of jackpot B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In addition, in the case of jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B1, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot B2, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. This may reduce the visibility of the ball downstream. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the first The opening/closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, since the opening/closing plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the next ball It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the balls arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher than that of the balls arranged on the upstream side. It is easy to cause a situation where it deteriorates.

In the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Furthermore, in the case of jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 normally It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state. Since the time required to reach the ball is controlled from the structure, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball jamming.

At this time, the appearance of each of the channel components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two balls arranged in each of the channel components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of the ball on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the round game R, so compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the balls tends to become chaotic. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed quickly. In other words, the round end condition (elapse of the round playing time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) of a specified number of pachinko balls. It is easy to meet the winning requirement early, and it is possible to avoid prolonging the jackpot game.

In particular, for the special symbol 2 jackpot, there is a 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while daringly allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in jackpot games.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round round game R ends, the timer means uses an electromagnetic solenoid to keep the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. 165c, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to close the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open the opening/closing plate 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. After the second round, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is ejected (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly to the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced between a closed state and an open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Note that in this control example, a case has been described in which the short opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or it may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to the present control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and each flow is The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 disposed downstream of the path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration part 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball by the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the downstream side of the third flow path forming section 336 can be motivated to devise the manner in which the ball is launched.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, there is a slight interval (for example, 1.0 seconds), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Also good. In this case, a situation is avoided in which the ball is placed in the third flow path forming part 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing when 0.8 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is ejected is set aside, the period until the prescribed number of balls enters the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, at least the first ball is fired to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is fired as a firing mode in which the ball aimed at the specific winning hole 65a is shot to the left and right. All you have to do is shoot the ball to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, the focus is not on the balls flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but on the balls flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the line of sight being obstructed by other balls. At the same time, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid prolonging the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to avoid prolongation of the round game R.

Note that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to ensure that only one ball enters the left channel. In particular, it is only necessary to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left channel components 334 to 336 to one during approximately 0.9 seconds until the number of balls passing through the left channel, and for other periods. In this case, it is sufficient to hit the ball separately so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), the ball enters the path through a small number of paths. Even in the case where the balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In FIG. 2, the nails are arranged asymmetrically, but the nails may be arranged symmetrically.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a back case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the back case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower part of the back case 510. and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, on the inside left side of the rear case 510, there is a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a substrate is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light diffusion process applied to the entire surface. A diffuser decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is located to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 511 of the case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 28, each of the operating units 600 to 800 is shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operating unit 600 of each of the operating units 600 to 800 has changed from a production standby state to an extended state, FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operating unit 700 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In addition, in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the front facing surface of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated with imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, , the view is easily obstructed by the nails provided on the base plate 60, the various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when the operating units 600 to 800 are disposed outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front tends to decrease.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, its role is the same. Furthermore, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape projecting downward on the near side of the third operation unit 800, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86; A circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to protrude from the inner frame side of 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball riding on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from left to right.

In FIGS. 31 and 32, a state in which the third operating unit 800 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the third operating unit 800 is individually combined, and in FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800 A combined state is illustrated.

The displacement that switches between the state in FIG. 31 and the state in FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed while the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, it will cause damage to the surrounding decorative members. Since the decoration members 870 and 880 may collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which it is displaced downward from the performance standby state to a sufficient degree to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative members On the premise that displacements of 870 and 880 are allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details will be explained later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, which is slightly displaced downward from the extended state, are illustrated, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit 35 shows a state in which the third operating unit 800 has been shifted to the production standby state and the first operating unit 600 has been displaced to the extended state from the state shown in FIG. 33. Illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third movement unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first movement unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second movement unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state while the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in the production standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operating unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operating units 600, 800. Visual overlap can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and back positions can be allowed).

In particular, the second operating unit 700 can be seen in a state where it is visible in an extended state closer to the opening 511a, and when it is visible in a state where it is slightly retracted from the opening 511a but close to the third operating unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a presentation device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-like member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It includes a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first performance surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L with reference to the arrow F-B), the third The first point of view from the perspective of a player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86 can see the second decorative rotating member 660. Face directly. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second presentation surface 661b facing straight ahead, the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotation member 660 is improved. can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player according to the arrangement, and also to change the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player. For the purpose of improving the posture, the posture can be changed depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight will be in the front and back direction, making it easier for the player to face the player directly, so visibility can be improved if the performance surface faces forward (in the direction of arrow F). Since the player's line of sight is more likely to be oblique as the player is placed closer to the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by slanting the performance surface to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is also displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 is By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is formed on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 from front to back when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front side of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player an illusion as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 has been expanded.

To be more specific, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member The left edge of the first production surface 661a of 660 and the right edge RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized generally coincide.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the extended decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front side of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it appears as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the area right end RE1. The player can visually recognize the image as if it had been enlarged beyond that point. This makes it possible to realize a surprising performance.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying a polka dot pattern on the third symbol display device 81 and making the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b a similar polka dot pattern; A certain number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative part 652b in the same font as the number variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number for notifying the success or failure of the lottery). An example of how to do this is illustrated below.

As an example of associating the above-described display and decoration, for example, six colors out of seven colors making up the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which a wooden stick is displayed in one color, or a wooden stick arranged with its right end aligned with the right end RE1 of the area on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a manner that the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is reminiscent of ignition.

Note that the presentation mode of the overhanging decoration section 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration section 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, so It is possible to avoid restrictions on the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when expanding the display area.

Moreover, the object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. , the decoration of the overhanging decorative part 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870, the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering part 875, the second covering part 875). (decoration of the installation part 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured with a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is connected to the second decorative rotating member 660. By performing a relative displacement based on the reference value, the configuration is such that the player can see different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 fixes the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 disposed opposite to the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 and the base member 611 disposed on the front side of the base member 611. A front lid member 612 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement part 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement part 613, and a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that includes a mixture of straight parts and curved parts, and its details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle part of the main body part 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction; A circular through hole 624 that is bored as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is brought into contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is brought into contact with the protruding piece of the front cover member 612. The structure is such that a biasing force is generated in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

In addition, in the shaft support of the cylindrical part 622, with the support fastening part 615 inserted into the cylindrical part 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female threaded part formed at the tip of the support fastening part 615. Ru. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be explained later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 that is fixed to a drive shaft that protrudes to the back side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

An arcuate hole 613d is formed in the front cover member 612, and extends through the cylindrical portion 613c along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes into a cylindrical shape is inserted through the cylindrical portion 634a.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member that includes a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending in the outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. A mounting portion 634b is provided.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and the front side of the cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the widths of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading changes in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes an elongated main body part 641, a cylindrical part 642 that projects from the back side of the main body part 641 and has a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A cylindrical portion 643 protruding parallel to the cylindrical portion 642; and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be able to mesh with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643. , a bottomed cylindrical part 645 formed in a large diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed cylindrical part 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending toward the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

Note that with the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. It has an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so as to have the following shape, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and through which the cylindrical support part 651a can be inserted. Note that the details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and the details will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms orthogonal rotation axes, a front rotating member 652 that is pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical part 645, and a front rotating member 652 An illumination board 653 is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and has a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side, and a rear rotating member 654 is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side. A wire receiving member 655 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space for wiring, and a fastening screw is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side. It includes a front decorative part 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is externally fitted and supported by the cylindrical part formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a diametrical position at the tip thereof. A cutout portion 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end, a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid. It is inserted into the guide hole 616 of the member 612, and is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid part C2 into the female threaded part 651b at the tip thereof.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be movable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid part C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of its circumferential part, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch part 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electrical wiring. form.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Other wiring is formed in the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). through the gap) and guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the decorative overhang 652b, and the light from the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 653 lights up or blinks the decorative overhang 652b. It is considered possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical part 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical part 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of their operation will be described later. In addition, the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an illuminated board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and a wiring retaining plate 663 that is fastened and fixed to the tip ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661 (described later) rotates, the illumination board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through the space may be twisted or disorganized, the function of the wiring retaining board 663, which has through holes for temporarily fixing the wiring, prevents the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized. The aim is to avoid being placed in

Note that in this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it may place an excessive burden on electrical wiring or It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring gets twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. Ru.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from coming off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illumination board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illumination board 662, the first presentation surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the front side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. It will be done.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where LEDs are arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third performance surface 661c. can also be illuminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated board 671 on which decorative characters and figures are formed from a light-transmissive resin material so that they can be seen by the player, and which irradiates light diagonally forward to the left from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always diagonally to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be placed.

The lower edge and the right edge of the decorative fixing member 670 are raised toward the back side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge, the left edge, and the front lid member 612. This front-back gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, and FIG. 42 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600. FIG. Note that to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws are not shown.

In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding into the transmission elongated hole 623. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance is not obtained compared to mid-displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. However, as in this embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting displacement.

Further, the same is configured to hold true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions (acting standby state position, extended state position) of the rotating member 620 is the same as that of the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rearward angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are in mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted perpendicularly to the axis of rotation. The signal is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is This is the same rotation angle that occurs between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the performance standby state will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. It should be noted that illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted to facilitate understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the production standby state and the intermediate production state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate production state and the extended production state. is set to .

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third presentation surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end, and a curved line (approximately arcuate shape) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. A curved portion 616b formed in the curved portion 616b.

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operating unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the production standby state and the intermediate production state is a linear displacement along the linear part 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate production state and the extended production state is a linear displacement along the curved part 616a. 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed at the proximal end of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616, displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that is displaced inside the guide elongated hole 616 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effects of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620, and FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b) are FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the support member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values of the numerical values are illustrated as a downward displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. There is.

The guide slot 616 functions as a slot that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide slot 616 is the displacement caused by the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 being displaced as the rotating member 620 rotates. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the active side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is caused by the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the main moving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. This occurs as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be explained. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly due to its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operation unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (midway position of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a curved part 616b is combined below the straight part 616a. Thereby, when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, it is possible to increase the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling forcefully beyond the arrangement in the intermediate presentation state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept in a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement manner as if it were being rotated around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be caused by utilizing the run-up by rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of displacement. The load required for displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts operating can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. The rotating direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main moving part is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). Thereby, as described above, the direction of attitude change of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning motion), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a forceful displacement mode.

Further, even under a situation where the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The effect caused by the curved portion 616b will be explained. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed of only a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate presentation state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by deliberately adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the main driving side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, a direction ( The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided for displacement (leftward).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when vertically displacing the driven side of the supported member 640 from a specific initial position to a terminal position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities will be equal. If the displacement is slow at the beginning, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction, which is shown for comparison in FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. and reaches its maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower end of displacement, the vertical displacement amount of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement, the first movement unit 600 This will have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by employing the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, the term "uniformity" does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes suppressing the magnitude of the speed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the rotating member 620 is tilted, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start side of entering the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven member 640 gradually increases as the rotation member 620 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised). At the start of driving in the case of (operation), the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced, so the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined in accordance with the magnitude of the angle θ.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the first production surface 661a tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c to the right by 45 degrees), so that the change in angle θ Accordingly, each time the state is switched from the intermediate presentation state to the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The presentation surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide elongated hole 616 for regulating the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660 depending on the angle θ.

As a result, even if only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the detection of the second decorative rotating member 660 is performed based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation may be determined by the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extension part 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is activated from that state. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to calculate numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Moreover, thereby, even if the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

The change in the angle θ is approximately the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the production standby state to the intermediate production state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate production state to the extended state is generally larger. It is large (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate presentation state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the presentation standby state to the intermediate presentation state. The angle change is below the level of the previous state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight part 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved part 616b. It becomes noticeably larger when it enters.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate presentation state is reached, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is slightly moved up and down (bounces back) from the driven side arrangement of the supported member 640 in the intermediate presentation state. Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third presentation surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate presentation state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the posture change in the rotation direction increases. It is conspicuously visible. That is, the player can visually perceive that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously being rotated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the supported member 640 is disposed at the lower end of displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 serving as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unstable due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620. Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (in the upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. is configured to suitably impede displacement of the . That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction inclining toward the upper left is the short side direction, and displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from rebounding.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the active side of the supported member 640, and the case where the active side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement The displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 in is different from that in FIG.

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 will be displaced to the lower left along the displacement direction of the main moving side (rotation direction of the rotating member 620), but in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide hole 616, it is swung slightly in the left and right direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the short direction of the guide slot 616. Thereby, displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, when the rotational member 620 starts rotational displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotational member 660. The design is such that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture ( It is placed in a position facing vertically).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The load can be generated in such a manner that the moving member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand the load with a small local elastic displacement by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotational axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in front view, it is possible to more easily avoid a situation where the rotating member 620 is broken or damaged. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand a load that cannot be borne by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even if the change in the arrangement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from the production standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the overhanging state is approximately 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates at approximately 45 degrees. Here, if the overhanging decorative part 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it will feel like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a part that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the supported member 640 is changed from the extended state to the effect standby state. , the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, colliding with other movement units 800, or partially hiding the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. This may have a negative impact on the performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the active side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 extends toward the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 toward the retreating side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be placed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's perspective can be determined from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are The difference between the change and the rotation angle is determined as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it appears to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means different from the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be such that, from the player's perspective, there is a section in which it is a sliding movement, and there is a section in which it is a rotational movement. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's perspective, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640. It is influenced by the side that is dominant.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, it can be visually recognized that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is being rotated, and in a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is It can be visually recognized that the decorative portion 652b is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is rotatably displaceable so as to constitute a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and the case where it is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so that the displacement occurs in the opposite direction at a position midway through the displacement range.

For example, after rotationally displacing the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, control may be performed to return to the performance standby state by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 631. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 on the way down, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stopping position accurate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate effect state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, more of the driving force is distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660, so that the amount of rotation of the rotating member 620 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, it is possible to easily stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the peripheral parts of the up/down reversal performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the up/down reversal performance device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 has a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the back case 510, and a space between the right front plate member 710 and the back case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the back case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to be able to transmit driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 configured such that the distal end of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be guided and can be moved up and down, and a left rear side that is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front support members 760 that are configured as a left and right set and are fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the back case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702 . a blindfold decorative member 768, and an elevation reversal effect device 770 configured to be able to move the elevation plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a manner that combines elevation displacement and longitudinal displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge and forms a gap between the back case 510 and the back case 510. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 are arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) are arranged in a manner that the sensor 713 moves toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined part 714 is formed to be inclined and is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder part 774e of the lifting/lowering reversal production device 770, and a female screw part into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the back case 510 is screwed is formed. A plurality of fastened parts 718 are provided.

In the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged at intervals such that the detection groove is arranged at a position where the detected part 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 respectively detects the position of the detected part 735 in the production standby state of the second operating unit 700, the position of the detected part 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700, and the overhang of the second operating unit 700. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protruding portion 511b that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and is formed into a long plate shape having a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. a support cylinder part 722 which is provided in a cylindrical shape to protrude rearward at the bent part of the main body part 721, and whose inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion part 511b to be inserted therethrough. , a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721; A cylindrical fastened part 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the direction of A cylindrical fastened part 725 that projects in a cylindrical shape and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side and a rear case 510 that is wrapped around the supporting cylinder part 722 in the upward direction (left side) a torsion spring SP2 that provides a biasing force in the direction of lifting the .

A step is formed on the left side of the main body portion 721 so that the arrangement is shifted toward the front side compared to the proximal side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and a support plate is placed in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole part 701a formed so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened part 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the back case 510 toward the front side. This can prevent the rotation arm member 720 from being displaced to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 can be stably supported. be able to.

The right side of the main body part 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming part 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. , a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported at corresponding positions by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the right front plate member 710. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has a detection portion 735 formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion, protruding toward the front side, and formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and a detection portion 735 extending so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding part 736a that protrudes cylindrical from the tip of the extending part 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) based on the output from the detection sensor 713. is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723. be done.

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing this fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It includes horizontally elongated members 742 that are long on the left and right sides and are fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted therethrough, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the back side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the oblong member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 includes an elongated hole 743 that is formed in an elongated oval shape from side to side with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to be inserted therethrough, and an elongated hole 743 on the upper side of the elongated hole 743. A cylindrical part 744 protruding from the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide parts 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right from the cylindrical part 744 as a reference. Be prepared.

A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 becomes a rotating arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by member 720 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to separate the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating/descending reversing effect device 770.

The guide section 745 is composed of a pair of left and right parts, and includes a long plate part 745a in the front and rear, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside. 745b.

The rotary cylinder part 745b rotates when the above-mentioned vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth, and functions as a part that guides the displacement in the front and back direction, but the details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750 is sloped in such a manner that the front side of the right side is tilted toward the front side as it goes upward, similar to the front upper slope part 714 of the right front plate member 710. and a plurality of fastened parts 752 formed with internally threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative part 768a. , is configured so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 that is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761, with the back surface of the plate facing upward. A receiving inclined portion 762 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate part 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw part. This is the board part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714, 751, and by guiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the vertically reversing effect device 770 to this guide path, the vertically reversing device 770 moves in the front and rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. This vertical displacement will be explained below.

52(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 52(a) and 52(b), the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 53(a) and 53(b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 will be explained. In addition, in this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG. 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives rotational direction from the rotating arm member 720. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the lifting/lowering reversing device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the lower side of the center frame 86, and is upwardly displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced toward the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is due to the configuration in which the rotary cylinder part 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751, and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down reversal effect device 770. This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder parts 774e include a receiving slope part 762 and a front upper slope part 714, 751 which are arranged in symmetrical positions (the front upper slope part 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, (see), and by rolling the rotating cylinder part 774e around the cylindrical part 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751. Displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotary cylinder parts 745b that are arranged in the front and back, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged slightly upwardly, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed. The cylindrical portion 774e prevents excessive load from being applied to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotation axis position) of the presentation device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the longitudinal center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c tend to be displaced such that the front side goes down and the rear side goes up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, and is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since a gap is formed between the front rotary cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, stable rolling occurs between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. Since there is a gap between the rear rotary cylinder part 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, it is possible to stably roll the rear rotary cylinder part 745b with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thereby, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guidance. Therefore, the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the vertical reversal performance device 770 is displaced toward the front side, compared to the downward displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement becomes relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required for upwardly displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it has a natural length in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the vertical reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 prevents the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the up/down reversal performance device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up/down reversal performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal when stop control is performed in the same way, the second operation unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and the downward movement due to its own weight will be due to the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, it is possible to move the second operation unit 700 toward the intermediate presentation state and maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when controlling the drive motor 731 from the extended state of the second operating unit 700 and controlling the drive motor 731 to stop so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 When it passes below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, so that it can be easily prevented from being displaced downward to a greater extent than in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state by applying the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Here, the operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable accessories are designed with emphasis on their appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted outside the center frame 86, they attract less attention from players. Appearance was often not considered, based on the assumption that it would not.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming a decorative surface on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is changed from the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. By making the direction of displacement follow a line that spreads out (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, each decorative surface can be easily placed in the player's field of vision. It consists of

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be brought into the player's field of vision without any difficulty. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. The decorations (figures, patterns, characters, pictures, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper side is arranged in the front and back gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 when the second operation unit 700 is in standby state. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a state in which attention is focused on the ball flowing down the gaming area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state in which attention is focused on the display effect developed on the third symbol display device 81. When the player moves his/her line of sight, it is easy to see the player.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the performance standby state so as to be easily recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously drawn to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Furthermore, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the content of the decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state differs. cases can arise.

For example, if the up/down reversal performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if missed or the operating speed is excessively fast), If the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the side, most of the front side of the decorative surface will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, so the player cannot see the contents of the decorative surface displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The user is forced to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention paid to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the content of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up/down reversal performance device 770 in the performance standby state, and the player can visually recognize the decorative surface in the extended state. Through the installation member 787, the player can grasp the contents of the decorations (notification contents, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that were visible to the player.

As a result, for players who have missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the contents notified based on the state of the covering member 787 can be displayed on the decorative surface of the covering member 787 that is visible even in the performance standby state. Continuous notification is possible. Thereby, the attention of the covering member 787 can be maintained at a high level regardless of whether it is in the performance standby state, the extended state, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is such that it moves from being disposed on the back side of the rear end surface of the gaming area to moving forward beyond the rear end surface of the gaming area. The configuration as a displacement will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is placed on the covering member 787 side. A channel forming portion 86a is provided in a protruding manner.

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed so that the ball that jumps into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then the ball enters the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide channel for guiding the balls that have flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once backward, then flowed forward again, and toward the first winning opening 64 provided in the gaming area. (See Figure 9). That is, due to the flow path forming portion 86a, the rear end surface BE1 of the gaming area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

The ball flowing down the channel forming part 86a has a high probability of entering the first prize opening 64, so the channel forming part 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to be focused on the channel forming portion 86a. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), since the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the channel forming part 86a, it is easy to create a state in which the performance device 780 enters the player's field of vision in the performance standby state. I can do it.

In the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), and in the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 The front part is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the front part of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-back position as the front-back position of the gaming area. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is moved up and down, the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction, and the front-back position of the front end surface thereof is in the extended state, and the second decoration in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state. This means that they match, making it easier to visually recognize them as one.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state or production standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operating unit 600 is lower than the arrangement in the extended state. 661 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is cylindrical and protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , is integrally formed with the left and right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 by a pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending up and down. An upper elongated portion 775 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and is arranged from both left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775 to the back side, and is configured to be able to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the production device 780 in the left-right direction. a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fastened and fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the back side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device; a lower elongated portion 772 and an upper elongated portion A light emitting producing means 778 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical part 773 is a part that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a size relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension part 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is oriented in the horizontal direction, and a width larger than the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is oriented in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side, and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d are provided, and a rotary cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend inwardly from the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanding portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, and by abutting against each other, tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward is suppressed. That is, by securing the width and length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be achieved. can be suppressed.

The cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in pairs in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is disposed shifted toward the front compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclinations of the front upper inclined parts 714 and 751 are parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical parts 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclinations of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. Thereby, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and local loads can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in such a manner that the left and right pairs are arranged vertically and have internal threads formed on the inner circumferential side, and the left and right cylindrical portions 776a. A plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b are provided.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b includes insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portions 776a. This is a part that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical part 776a, and functions as a part to prevent the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a pair of insertion holes 777d are formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and fastened to the back side. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and when a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, the cylindrical protrusion 777c pivotally supports the vertically inverting member 781 so that it cannot fall off. It is a part.

A fastening screw screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d, and the fastening screw allows the transmission device holding plate 777 to be inserted into the upper elongated portion 775. It is fastened and fixed.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the transmission device holding plate 777, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can also be improved.

The light emitting device 778 includes two left and right elongated plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, upper and lower, on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-transmitting board 778a arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed from a plastic resin material and has a light diffusion process formed thereon.

The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of detection sensors 778d disposed on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the vertically inverting member 781 of the production device 780 by having an arcuate protrusion 781d arranged in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened parts formed on the back side, and the fastened parts are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated part 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screws are screwed in and fastened and fixed, making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b has insertion holes 778c formed on both left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are inserted into the female threads of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by arranging the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted can be increased.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a long length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the ulnar direction toward the back side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. An arcuate protrusion 781d is provided.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The vertically inverting member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down reversing member 781. That is, the up-and-down reversing member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protrusion portion 781c that is displaced as the up-and-down reversing member 781 is rotated.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission producing means 778. That is, the arcuate protrusion 781d can be placed on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the up-down reversing member 781 can be changed into two postures: one in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and one in between (the pair of detection sensors 778d (a posture in which the arcuate protrusions 781d are not arranged on both detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a bored at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 781c, A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b whose inner circumferential side is formed penetratingly at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side is screwed into the female thread. Thereby, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the up-and-down reversing member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed into a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arcuate plate portion 784b is provided in an arc shape protruding from the center axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, and an elliptical plate portion 784b is provided in an oval shape extending parallel to the left and right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a. a pair of elongated holes 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d arranged vertically and in parallel at positions between the elongate holes 784c and protruding toward the back side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of protrusions 784e are formed as protrusions that protrude from opposing sides and extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that opens toward the back side is provided at the end of the support plate portion 784d on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped joint is formed between a pair of fastened parts 784f in which female threads are formed, an arrangement hole 784g formed through the cylindrical protruding part 784a and the support plate part 784d, and the shaft supporting member 786. A ring holding half part 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half part 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , is provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner circumferential diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female thread is formed on the inner circumferential side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be detached from the cylindrical protrusion 784a. It is pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is arranged in close proximity to the other cylindrical portion 783b so as to face it in the radial direction in the assembled state, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening into which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a has a fastening hole inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b. By screwing in the screws, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In its supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slid along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e is for regulating the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. The details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, and the details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged as a left and right pair and pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed; an end plate member 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a; A ring-shaped metal member 785e is arranged around the metal rod 785a in such a manner as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female thread is formed inside the ring-shaped metal member 785e, which is a portion protruding from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing part 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding portion 784e is inserted into the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding with the protruding portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship that restricts displacement in the left and right direction with respect to the protruding portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the horizontal width of the protrusion portion 784e, and the diameter of the deep groove portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the protrusions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 causes the bevel tooth portion 783c to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. can be assembled into.

In the assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is placed in the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. The displacement toward the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to the non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a The distal end portions are formed in an interference fit dimensional relationship, so that they are fitted and fixed.

Note that the method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be fixed using an adhesive or the like, or a female thread may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female thread. The end plate member 785d may be fastened and fixed to the metal rod 785a, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is can be made to easily coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the disposed metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding member of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 786b and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 is capable of holding a magnet Mg. A magnet holding half part 786c formed in a rectangular box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is inserted into the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extending portions 787c are formed such that their ends abut or are placed close to each other when the covering member 787 is placed close to each other (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion disposed at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emitting producing means 778 when the covering member 787 is disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26), or the upper elongated portion 775 at the upper left and right center. This is a part for visually opening the arcuate plate part, etc., and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these parts.

With the operation of the presentation device 780, the covering member 787 has two states: a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and a state in which the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52); The state can be switched between the decorative surface 787b1 facing the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-and-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) ) shows a state in which the up-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the erect vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in an inverted vertical arrangement state in which the up-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from an upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. Ru.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur will be explained. These displacements do not occur at the same time and to the same extent; there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, an overview will be given. The configuration of the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projection 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projection 781c of the up-down reversing member 781, rotates from the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed. The pair of left and right translational plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b has been displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (see FIG. 55) (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends) Illustrated as

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the attitude change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c is displaced upwardly. ). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as being arranged in an overlapping manner, and this overlapping width is the same as the bevel tooth portion 783c. This is absorbed by elastic deformation between the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

Note that while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear tooth, and the bevel tooth member This is not enough to reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. In other words, the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation by an angle of 30 degrees) quantity).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are made of a resin material, the pressing is not performed. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the posture of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state of FIG. 57(a) to the state of FIG. 57(b). ) is maintained until the state of

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

Furthermore, for the left-hand shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, similar to the right side, while the magnet Mg is placed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See Figure 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotation member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding .

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). Then, when the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the relationship between the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f increases. As the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, which are released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg, are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotational direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the cover member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, so while reducing the burden of control design for the drive motor 782, the effect of the cover member 787 can be adjusted. The effect can be improved.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs can be delayed by the attraction force of the magnet Mg from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attraction force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is applied to the shaft rotating member. It acts effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 can be delayed by the magnetic force regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above, similar effects occur. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the displacement in the left-right direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down reversing member 781 approaches the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so that the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is The amount of rotation increases. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotation operation of the up-and-down reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases first, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. As a result, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the production device 780. In FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c), the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 59(a), the effect device 780 is illustrated with the vertically inverting member 781 in an erect vertical arrangement state, and in FIG. 59(b), the effect device 780 is shown when the vertically inverting member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in an inverted vertical arrangement state of the up-and-down reversing member 781.

The vertical inversion member 781 changes its state from an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the direction of rotation of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the pair of shaft rotating members 785 and the end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right rotates in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the left-hand covering member 787 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the right-hand covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being seen together.

Therefore, the contents of the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be made to be different on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information that the covering member 787 provides to the player can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game can be played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. This also has the effect of making it easier to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the visibility to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is It will be blocked by unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) and the performance device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) becomes easier to enter the player's field of view.

In this manner, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen all together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and By preventing the side from facing the side, it does not attract attention, and is formed as a side that can attract the attention of players in the performance standby state.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed depending on the arrangement, so the presentation performance is excessively low relative to the cost of arranging the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of concealing it well). This makes it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. It is possible to aim for

In this embodiment, the metal member that attracts the Mg magnet is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 involves linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the presentation device 780 that can perform rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, by performing rotational displacement, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member disposed on the left and right 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly disposed on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, thereby making it possible to rotationally displace the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed only when it is determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state based on the output of the detection sensor 713. Executable control is based on the premise that Thereby, rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged, and in this state, are arranged opposite to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 in front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement around the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction before rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension part 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting part between the upper elongate part 775 and the lower elongate part 772, and the extension part 787c and the upper elongate part 775 It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the lower elongated portion 772 collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a small value.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and rotational displacement can be made less noticeable, so each decoration Since the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed without considering their appearance during rotational displacement, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Note that the timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the presentation device 780 remains the same, but the magnet Mg By changing the magnet to a magnet with a large attraction force, it is possible to avoid the collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically to match the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted, it is no longer possible to arrange an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screws are made of metal and do not transmit light, they are easily visible in the dark during light-emitting effects.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c avoiding areas that are made to shine brightly to make them stand out, and as a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is made asymmetrical.

Note that it is naturally permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c laterally symmetrically. In particular, when the decorations on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are the same, there is no disadvantage caused by symmetrically arranging the insertion holes 778c, and the illumination board 778a can be easily designed.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is replaced by the extending portion 787c. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and other mechanical parts are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is The shape is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated parts of the upper elongated part 775 disposed in the upper elongated part 775. Further, the vertical reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disc portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect of the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 26. The third operation unit 800 is disposed above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the performance standby state, and is supported by the tips of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510. This unit is configured to be able to move up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801, and a fixed cylinder to which a cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical part 821 with the cylindrical part 821 inserted into the inner periphery, and a main body part 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery. A rotatably supported outer rotating member 840, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 (five in this embodiment) rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 accommodated in the held member 810. and a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disc-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing part 812 which is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical part 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which an electric wiring is inserted. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protrude from the front side as cylindrical parts that pivotally support the transmission gear 863 in a non-removable manner, and a double cylindrical part that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 in a non-removable manner on the front side. A plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 bored in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting device such as an LED that is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and has a light emitting device such as an LED on the front side. A disk-shaped illumination board 823 and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting plate made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side. It includes a decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical part 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and through this penetrating part, the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 is routed to the front side and arranged behind the illumination board 823. Connected to the connector.

The illumination board 823 has an inner light emitting part 823a arranged as an LED at the vertices of a pentagon and a central position equidistant from these vertices, and an outer light emitting part 823b arranged at 15 places at equal intervals on the circumference. and. The inner light emitting section 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting section 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light emitting section 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b is irradiated onto the plating parts 871a of the first decorative members 870 that are arranged closely to each other at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 will be irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting part 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting part 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since they are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number (in this embodiment, three) of LEDs is always directed to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870. can be irradiated.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the amount of light LD1 irradiated onto the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and an outer diameter side portion configured to be slidable on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. is formed.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion that projects rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 therebetween, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 is prevented. In addition, since the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength, when sliding, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotary member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load that occurs during sliding failure (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 includes a cylindrical main body part 831 having a circular flange-like part 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at a position where the circumference of the main body part 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 are fastened and fixed to the circular flange-like portion 831a in a parallel position, and a plurality of metal rods 832 are formed so that they can be inserted therethrough and are configured to be guided by the metal rods 832 so that they can be linearly displaced. A linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer side of the translation member 833.

The main body portion 831 includes the above-mentioned circular flange-like portion 831a and a plurality of sliding protrusions that extend rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange-like portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (5 locations) between adjacent metal rods 832. A plurality of recessed portions 831c are provided at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, the sliding protrusion 831b is placed at the angular position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840, on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported, is loaded so as to be displaced radially outwardly. Even if the outer rotary member 840 is subjected to a movement, the sliding projection 831b can receive the displacement of the outer rotary member 840, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotary member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotary member 830 is can be maintained at a low level.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The translational member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b arranged at intervals in the translational displacement direction and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a cylindrical shaft portion 833c extending along the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c. A recessed groove 833d is provided.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and allows the overhanging parts 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 to slide. By being fitted externally, the groove functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the translational direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over ¾ of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and the decorative members 870, 880 can be attached by screwing the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841 and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extending outward in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the main body 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842 of the main body portion 841, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 are arranged such that they can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the side rod portion 851 and inserting a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are disposed so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and includes a proximal rod portion 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other portions of the proximal rod portion 851. A thickened part 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end rod part 853 which extends from the front end of the thickened part 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the proximal rod part 851. , and a rotation transmitting part 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod part 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship that allows them to rotate with each other when the cylindrical protrusion 833a is inserted therethrough. A guide hole 854b, which is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a, through which the cylindrical protrusion 833b is inserted and guided, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. A bevel tooth portion 854c is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding part 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive gear 862 that is non-removably supported by the cylindrical protrusion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 are meshed with each other so that driving force can be transmitted through gears 862, a central annular gear 864 is meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a plurality of transmission gears 864 are provided on the front side of the arrangement of the central annular gears 864. A pair of load response gears 865 are arranged offset and pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and a pair of load response gears 865 are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gears 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865 is provided.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

Note that the arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equally spaced, the assembly can be done quickly by matching the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed part 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864. It becomes possible to do so. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Since it is thought that the influence of displacement during assembly is small, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the spacing is uneven, the number of man-hours required to align the central ring gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 before assembling increases by one during the assembly process, but Using this arrangement, the postures of the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

The load response gear 865 is arranged to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is 865 is configured to be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is regulated (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits driving force in one direction is configured as a set with the transmission direction being reversed, and the switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, a decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and illustration of a portion for configuring displacement is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-described inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is fixed to one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton part 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a first covering part 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton part 871. , is provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered part 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, and the surface thereof has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on it. When the front side faces the front side, the pattern etc. can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covered portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like drawn thereon. Therefore, by changing the first covered part 875 that emits strong light through light emission control by the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered part 875, the patterns that attract the attention of players can be made different. can be set.

For example, at the same time when the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that draws attention to which first covered portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side from the player's perspective, the inner rotating member 830 If it is controlled to rotate, the first covering part 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation stops, so that the player can The line of sight can be focused on the first covered portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton part 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covered part 885 so that it cannot fall off.

The second covered part 885 has a metal screw screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the adjacent second covered part 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, it is possible to ensure the integrity of the second covered portion 885 in the combined state (particularly in the continuous combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covered part 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the designs, etc. make it visible to the person.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering parts 885 are grouped by the plurality of (at least two, maximum of five) second covering parts 885. The pattern etc. is configured so that when the five second covering parts 885 form a combined state, each second covering part 885 is shaped like a circle so that it is visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front. It is decorated so that it forms part of the body.

Although the pattern etc. drawn on the second covering part 885 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering part 885 in the serially combined state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. The design is such that there is no big difference even if the arrangement of the two is different. That is, the design does not have clear vertical and horizontal directions as a pattern, but has a design in which the outer shape does not change noticeably even when rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, the more firmly the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be integrated, the better the production performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covered part 885 side is firmly integrated by the adsorption force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that when the second covered part 885 is disposed on the front side, the combined state It is possible to improve the presentation performance in this situation.

In addition, in each second covering part 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed from front to back by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are simply replaced with metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side, and the five second covering portions 885 are Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covered portion 875 does not accommodate a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covered portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this is intended to avoid deterioration in presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

Due to the above-mentioned circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. The state in which it faces is also referred to as the serially combined state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state will be described.

64(a), FIG. 64(b), FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 66(a), FIG. ), FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced as the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840. are illustrated in chronological order.

That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in rear view and front view, and it illustrates how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual combined state (FIG. 64(a), FIG. 66(a)). .

Note that in FIGS. 64 to 67 , the axis of the metal rod 832 is shown as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. Note that the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the translational member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission section 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and is also displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation supported by the rotation transmission section 854 Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position, and the arrangement is not fixed in the circumferential direction. Since the displacement can be maintained, the production effect during the switching rotation operation can be improved compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear displacement in the radial direction (for example, the above-mentioned reversal operation by the second operation unit 700). can be maintained high.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotational movement with high acceleration is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the translational direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the impression that it is fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and a period ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high production effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is likely that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotational axis of the outer rotating member 840 may become misaligned. In the embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the axis of rotation, so that each load cancels out the other. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840, thereby making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to determine the posture of the lifting arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Furthermore, as the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced as described above, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. Displaced and at the same time displaced in the circumferential direction.

As the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to member 834 are rotated about metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the virtual position line 832F in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and since the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ) is set in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integral rotation state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in this embodiment, 180 When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) due to the rotation of ).

That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is twice the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. It does not cause any effect that slows down the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 is lost. No delaying effects occur.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The promptness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 to be non-constant with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can rotate integrally is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F is further rotated by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870 and 880, but due to the above-mentioned configuration, the integral rotation operation is not possible. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the possible state, the load on the drive motor 861 is not excessive when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating. You can avoid it from getting too big.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting the position in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connection surfaces between the first covered portion 875 and the second covered portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870, 880 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side part of the

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extending arm portion 842 that is adjacent to the extending arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that is rotatably supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by arranging the proximal rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be controlled. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, thereby receiving resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (in the front view counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state), If the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the serial combined state) due to rotation in the same direction, the outer A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued to be restricted in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotational operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotational motion").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diametrically expanding direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the third operation unit 800 is on standby. An integral rotation operation can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executable and controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) allows the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to perform the switching rotation operation accompanied by the displacement in the radial direction, and the expanding operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both driving directions, but there is a priority order of operation. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation continues as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. It is possible to perform a rotation operation, and it is possible to perform an integral rotation operation by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, but immediately, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in a front view. cannot be executed.

For example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, If the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be executed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integrated rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

In this way, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed with respect to the rotational direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed for each rotational direction of the drive motor 861. Based on the determination result, it is possible to drive the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal performance and the reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage, or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after setting the third operating unit 800 to the extended state. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed to perform normal performance control. As a result, even if the state of the movable part cannot be determined from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with surrounding decorative members. .

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, drive control during normal performance before reaching the reversal performance will be explained. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally.

Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being moved up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the up and down movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together. The elevating and lowering arm member 801 may be moved up and down while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and this switching of the output can be determined. The audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotary member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of driving time from this initial position, the outer rotary member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop in this position.

Next, drive control during reversal performance will be explained. First, during the reversal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the normal direction until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the driving motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, a series of combined states will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is moved downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in reverse until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in normal rotation. The forward rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has started, the process returns to the normal production mode. The restrictions on the drive control during this normal performance are similar to the restrictions on the drive control explained during the normal performance that was arranged before the above-mentioned reverse performance.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for standard judgment. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced compared to the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation continues or from the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, irrespective of the attitude of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the serial combined state.

Therefore, in the case of controlling to switch to the series combination state at the timing of the jackpot announcement in the motion performance, it is possible to avoid the player guessing whether or not there will be a jackpot announcement based on the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations in the series of combinations are designed so that the contents perceived by the player do not differ greatly depending on the rotational direction arrangement of the second decoration member 880. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotational direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents that the player perceives as a series of combined states at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the series combination state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the series combination state, so the first decorative member in the individual combination state Regardless of the attitude of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the illumination board 823 is arranged. Electric wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to connectors provided on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, so that the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting part 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging part 824a which bulges out to the front side in the central part side of the transparent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated into the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 are illuminated. It works to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) where the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) where the decorative member 880 is placed on the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated part 871a of the first skeleton part 871. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first covering part 875, and the brightness of the first covering part 875 when the light LD1 is irradiated can be favorably increased.

Here, in this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it, so that the illumination direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are different. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by rotating the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 caused by the light LD1 will easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 will be rotated integrally while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to carry out the effect that the user wants.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination board 823. and is designed so that its center is located near the center of the first covered portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that its optical axis is directed in the direction of the outer diameter of the circle in which the outer light emitting part 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating part 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the light LD1 is It advances toward the side, and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with respect to the outer light emitting part 823b. As a result, light can be stably irradiated near the center of the front plate part of the first covered part 875, so that the first covered part 875 can be seen with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covering part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This avoids a situation where the intensity of the light visible outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875. be able to.

The illumination board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so all of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is directed inside. It is not intended to be irradiated.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Moreover, there is a gap between the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885, which are arranged to face the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed which exceeds the area required to avoid this.

Firstly, the gap VA2 is designed to ensure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and to prevent the metal rod 832 from colliding with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 833. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton parts 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical protruding part 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby attaching the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to proceed. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through equally spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visible as a light.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, keeping all lights on), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the integrated state (see FIG. 32), the second skeleton part 881 is entirely formed of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the reflection effect of the second skeleton part 881 on the light LD1.

As a result, the light that is irradiated within the frame of the second covering part 885 can be the light (weak light) that is far from the optical axis of the light LD1, so that the second covering part 885 can be illuminated. It is possible to weaken the degree of On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially exiting from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

The frame of the second covered part 885 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) light-transmissive resin material, and a light diffusion process is formed on the inside. A light-diffusing decorative portion 885c is disposed circumferentially. Therefore, out of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusing decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusing decorative portion 885c to emit light from a surface.

This surface emitting makes it possible to make the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative portions 885c disposed in the circumferential direction uniform, and each of the light-diffusing decorative portions of the five second decorative members 880 885c can be visually recognized as an integral part by the player.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the performance performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. This integration can be achieved by visually recognizing that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covered portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885 is formed in a concave shape to face the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (in contact with) the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 is , protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see FIG. 32), the first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed on the back side is visible to the player. It is possible to reduce the degree of interference, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covered portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the serially combined state, the end surface 885b1 of the second covered portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation can be performed when viewed from an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be seen as a part of the second covering part 885, and the extent to which the first covering part 875 is visible can be reduced. Thereby, in the serially combined state, the second covered part 885 can be made more visible than the first covered part 875, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotary member 830, so that the inner rotary member 830 rotates, while the outer rotary member 840 acts as a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the sliding protrusion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the torque limiter 866 Therefore, the allowable value for load transmission must be increased, which tends to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. To this end, this embodiment has the following features. For example, the only supporting points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 during rotation are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other parts are configured to leave gaps. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the structure can be configured to easily reduce displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress displacement toward the front with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, although the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction that pushes it forward, the sliding member 825 has a plate front surface that contacts the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and back. come into contact with

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter. The protrusion portion 822b that protrudes from the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the protruding portion 822b contacts the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the entire back surface of the short diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. I can do it. Thereby, displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to occur when the weight of the fastening screws increases is reduced accordingly. I can do it.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be explained. In explaining this fixing, reference will be made to FIGS. 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton part 871 into a female screw of the fastened part 876 formed at the rear part of the frame of the first covering part 875. After the first covering part 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton part 871 by screwing into the frame part 871, the overhanging part 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the first skeleton part 871 is screwed into the first covering part 875. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting outward) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton part 881 into a female screw of the fastened part 886 formed at the rear part of the frame of the second covering part 885. After the second covering part 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame part 881 by screwing into the second frame part 881, the overhanging part 883 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the second frame part 881 is screwed into the second covering part 885. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting it outside) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and as the rotating member 834 is linearly displaced or rotated, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member Member 880 can be configured for linear or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging parts 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the translational member 833, thereby changing the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the translational member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832). ) is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton parts 871 and 881 from falling off from the translational member 833.

Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotation The member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the translational member 833.

In this way, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the translational member 833, the parts that define the arrangement of the rotational member 834 on the translational member 833 are fixed to the skeleton parts 871, 881 to which the rotational member 834 is fixed. Therefore, the number of steps for assembly and disassembly can be reduced, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotary member 834 itself.

That is, for example, during disassembly, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeleton parts 871, 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Instead, the regulation of the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 can also be canceled. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each of the operation units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) show an operation unit 500 schematically chronologically explaining examples of combined operations of each operation unit 600 to 800. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering part 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decorations are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a has the word "Normal" written vertically, the second effect surface 661b has the word "activation" written horizontally, and the third effect surface 661c has the word "activation" written horizontally. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the words "Start of War," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the words "A pinch is an opportunity," and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the words "Attack." The characters "Patience!?" are shown on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, respectively.

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a performance standby state (see FIG. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

Further, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate effect state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate effect state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be visually recognized in an integrated manner.

Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700, and display effects related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operating unit 800 to the production standby state while starting at 81, the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotated along the coaxial circle. The player may be able to visually confirm that the player is playing the game. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position to be irradiated with light from the LED through an integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 are both provided with vertically elongated decorations and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the ability to be seen as an integral part.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70(b), the first operation Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally long decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operating unit 700 also has a horizontally long decoration. can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate effect state of the second operating unit 700, if the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. 71(a), the covering member 787 and The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the ability to see them as one unit can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making it appear as if the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanding to the right from the right edge RE1 of the area Even if the second performance surface 661b is arranged closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second performance surface 661b as if it were arranged at the center of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the second main decorative surface 787b1. The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized as one can be enhanced.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second presentation surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second presentation surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are visually recognized as one.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in an effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70(d). In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 Therefore, even if the first operating unit 600 is kept in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the left and right sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are directed to the front side, it has been described above that it can be made in a state where it does not have discrimination ability, but as shown in FIG. 70(d), Furthermore, the player may be able to identify the content by combining different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the content of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the drive of the second operating unit 700 in this state, pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is a loss, the state shown in FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700 by continuing the reversal from the state shown in FIG. 70(d) to the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an effect standby state. Note that above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are written horizontally, so that the player can see them as one unit. Easy to do. In addition, since the content is a series of meanings with "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In the first operation unit 600, in the production standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first production surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as a whole. Furthermore, since the content is a series of meanings with "Normal Time", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In this manner, in this embodiment, each of the presentation surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is made to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It consists of Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an effect standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs an integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is executed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same unified state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so that the switching rotation operation is executed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during symbol fluctuation to notify whether the jackpot has been won or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether or not a jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form decorations that can be viewed individually or in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only in each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration in which each of the operation units 600 to 800 is related to each other.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the change of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state may be performed in any state of the second operating unit 700, and the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to be executed when it is determined that it is in the production standby state. Ru.

The change to the intermediate production state of the first operating unit 600 may be performed as long as the state of the second operating unit 700 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change to the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700 can be performed as long as the state of the first operating unit 600 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and causes the switching rotation operation is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the production standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in the production standby state. be done.

As described above, drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 is not possible at arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

Next, details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be explained. In addition, in the detailed description of the sorting device 300, FIGS. 1 to 25 will be referred to as appropriate. First, an example of decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. In FIG. 72, as a difference from the content shown in FIG. 5 above, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 disposed on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front plate made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the central area of the front plate is wider than the peripheral area. A window portion 162d is formed as a region with high light transmittance.

In this embodiment, a light-transmissive sealing member SL1 having a central region cut out in accordance with the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front and rear thicknesses of the window portion 162d are thinner than the front and rear thicknesses of the area around which the sealing member SL1 is pasted, and the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162 is made different. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window portion 162d can be increased.

The first purpose of the window portion 162d is to improve the visibility of the distribution device 300, considering that when a player looks at the distribution device 300, the player's line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162. The second purpose is to eliminate the dissatisfaction of players who are unable to grasp the manner in which the balls are flowing down inside the distribution device 300. That is, the window portion 162d is formed in a shape and size that takes the shape of the sorting device 300 into consideration.

Note that the means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited at all, and various forms may be exemplified. For example, by arranging a light guide plate on the plate portion of the front design member 162 or by forming a plurality of groove patterns to perform the same function as the light guide plate, the front design may be created for each light emission pattern of a light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or picture may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

Furthermore, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape that extends left and right with the same vertical width, or a shape that omits the portion that extends outward to the left and right so that the left and right width is equal to the left and right width of the upwardly extending range. It may be a pentagonal shape like a home base, or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Further, although the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, it is not limited to this, and various forms may be exemplified. For example, the range with high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of multiple locations partitioned by grid-like parts or ladder-like parts, or the range may be divided by a plurality of small windows arranged in a row, The range may be divided in such a manner that the windows are arranged randomly. Further, the shape of the window portion may be configured to be variable.

Further, the surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, the surface may have many irregularities such as a surface formed by texturing, many grooves or protrusions may be formed on the surface, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

Note that the surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that can ensure higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the forming area of the seal member SL1) may be used. In addition to the surface shape similar to the surface shape of member SL1, various aspects can be adopted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the content shown in FIG. 21 above, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a left-right symmetrical shape, and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window that is formed in a row above the left-right center portion of the main window portion 162d1. 162d2.

In this embodiment, the main window part 162d1 and the sub-window part 162d2 are formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be explained in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path configuration portion 335 and the third flow path configuration portion 336 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passage, and the slope of the second flow path forming portion 335 is It has a V-shape that slopes upward toward the left and right sides.

As a result, the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 can be accommodated inside the main window part 162d1 when viewed from the front. The visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming part 336 can be improved.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming section 334 is not visible through the main window section 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall section 334a is particularly reduced.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a is improved compared to designing the side wall portion 334a on the assumption that it will be visible to the player, such as when a good-looking shape is required. can do.

The outer edge shape of the sub-window portion 162d2 when viewed from the front is designed to have a shape sufficient to ensure visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed into a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

As a result, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third channel forming part 336, the player can grasp the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down. Since the system can be easily configured, it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

74 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as seen in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross section of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 73. It is a diagram. 74 and 75, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162, as a difference from the content shown in FIGS. 23 and 18 above.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from a downward direction (angled direction view), a part of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the front position is located on the opening/closing plate. It is visible below 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening/closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, as long as the upper protruding portion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third channel forming portion 336 will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. can do.

The visibility toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also improved because the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes toward the left and right outward toward the front side. is secured.

That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the balls flowing down the second channel forming portion 335 from bouncing up, and the upper protruding portion 376 is formed by configuring the inner surface 314b1 as an inclined surface. This avoids unnecessary obstruction of the view.

Moreover, the fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 in a downward direction view (angled direction view) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, so that the upper surface portion 314 On the other hand, since the projected area of the upper surface part 314 is large, it is difficult for the player to see the ball flowing below it. The disadvantage is that the area hidden from view may be expanded.

In other words, configuring the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front may work advantageously for light production, but may work against the visibility of the falling ball. .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes toward the left and right outer sides, so that the ball enters the third flow path configuration section 336 from the second flow path configuration section 335. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at certain points, and the visibility of the ball flowing down below the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74, when viewing the sorting device 300 in a downward direction (angled direction), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub-window portion 162d2. In order to visually check the state of the member 313, the player is forced to adjust the position of his eyes and the viewing angle so that the seal member 313 is visible, which may impede a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs the light toward the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and passes through the sub-window portion 162d2. A portion of the light passes through the seal member 313 and then reaches the sub-window portion 162d2. Therefore, it is possible to understand whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not subjected to light diffusion processing, the effect of stopping the progress of the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window portion 162d2. Thereby, when the light emitting means 351 is turned on, red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window part 162d2, thereby making the sub-window part 162d2 glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference between the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window section 162d2 before the light reaches it, and thus the player can easily understand whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not. Note that the sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is disposed) may be provided with a light diffusion process. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the seal member 313 to emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) where it does not overlap with the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming part 336. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a rides.

Furthermore, between the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the ball's flow is inhibited by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so that the range of the ball's flow is limited to the front design member. It is shifted to the left and right outer side than the left and right width of 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 can also be prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, on the straight line LL1, there are balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (for example, the gaming area), balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, balls that have entered the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path forming part 336 ), it is possible to avoid the situation where light is reflected and refracted by the sphere. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window portion 162d2, regardless of the falling direction of the ball.

Note that the arrangement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may lead to the benefit of the player in that the sealing member 313 can remain in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the sealing member 313 unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always visible, the light enters the player's eyes every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, so some players feel dazzled. By arranging it in a difficult manner, it is possible to reduce the glare felt by the player.

In addition, although the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window part 162d2 was demonstrated in this embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, by forming a light diffusion process on the fixed member 161 in a range intersecting with the straight line LL1, it may be configured such that light does not easily reach the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, the configuration is such that it is difficult to ascertain whether or not the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the seal member 313 can be seen directly. I can do it. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, the player can still achieve the goal as long as he maintains the line of sight shown in FIG. 74. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the gaming burden on such players.

In addition, although the case where the sub-window part 162d2 was formed from a smooth surface shape was demonstrated in this embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub-window portion 162d2 may be subjected to a light diffusion process, or a bubble portion may be provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, by diffusing the light that has reached the sub-window section 162d2, it is possible to increase the area of the light that is visually recognized through the sub-window section 162d2. This allows the player to easily notice that the sub-window portion 162d2 is illuminated.

Up to this point, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LED arranged on the straight line LL1, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, has been described. Next, light emitted from a plurality of LEDs arranged at four positions on the left and right at the bottom stage among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351 will be described.

FIG. 76 is a sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inner sides at the lowest stage are referred to as inner light emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the lower left and right outer sides of the light emitting means 351 are referred to as outer light emitting means 351d. .

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processed surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surface 332e formed in the left and right range is illuminated.

This light emitting effect is created by the branch point BP1 where the flow of the ball branches between the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long space on the left and right that is continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) is executed on the back side.

Therefore, in a situation where the inner light emitting means 351c is lit, when a ball flows through the branching point BP1, the part where the ball flowing on the near side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e that emits light in the left and right range is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily understand how the ball has flown by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the longitudinally long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). In addition, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, the arrangement is such that light near the optical axis can pass therethrough, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are visible when viewed in the front-rear and up-down directions. It is curved in shape.

Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front and rear long protrusions 317 and the left and right inner protrusions 318, so that it travels diagonally downward to the front. The light may reach the light diffusing surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed over the entire range of the lower surface of the third flow path forming section 336 (see FIG. 14), by allowing light to reach the light diffusion processed surface 340, the third flow path structure is The visibility of the space below the bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between a ball flowing down inside the third flow path forming part 336 and an out ball passing through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flowing down below the third flow path forming part 336. can do.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is on the outside (upper side) of the light diffusion processed surface 332e and on the inside of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. Placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emitting effect is created by the branch point BP1 where the flow of the ball branches between the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long space on the left and right that is continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) is performed on the top and front side.

Therefore, in a situation where the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, when a ball flows through the branch point BP1, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b will emit light on the upper side or near side of the ball, and the ball will flow through the branch point BP1. Since the ball is hidden by the light-diffusing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it becomes difficult for the player to grasp how the ball flows through the branching point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed to extend vertically, and the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above it (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-back direction, the light-diffusion-processed surface 314c also has the effect of making it difficult to see the light-diffusion-processed surface 314c from the angle of view (see FIG. 74), such as looking into the light-diffusion-processed surface 333b from above. The branch point BP1 can be made difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission.

Further, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed vertically, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion processed surface 340 is provided below the second flow path forming section 335. It is formed even on the side and back surfaces (see Fig. 14). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-back direction, the lower surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is made to emit light, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming part 335, the ball is By creating a shadow by blocking light (light diffused by the light diffusion processed surface 340), it is possible for the player to easily understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is arranged in front of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusing processed surface 333b, the light may be hidden by the sphere, but in this embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d ) is placed outside (above) the range in which the ball flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is blocked by the ball placed at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the falling state of the balls within the sorting device 300, by causing the outer light emitting means 351d to emit light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b can be brightly illuminated. When the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the ball flowing down the second channel forming section 335 (see FIG. 17) disposed in front of it blocks the light and creates a shadow, so the player cannot This makes it easier to understand the manner in which the sphere flows down the flow path forming portion 335.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid the situation where the light is blocked by the ball placed at the branch point BP1, a configuration is adopted to smooth the flow of the ball. Its configuration will be explained.

When the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the rear position (see FIG. 20), the ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows downward flows directly downward and passes through the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 When the ball is placed at the front position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right outside along the slope of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows downward with the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the front position, the through-hole edges 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 that support the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 are located on the left and right outer sides of the probability change detection sensor SE11. It is arranged so as to connect the edge and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow down to the outside in the left-right direction.

This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which a ball that has started flowing down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b flows back to the left and right inside after being bridged by the through hole edge 382a or bounces. This allows the ball to flow smoothly.

Note that the light diffusion processed surface 319a is arranged inside the front and back width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which the sphere is placed on the back side of the light diffusion processed surface 319a cannot occur, so a situation in which the light is hidden by the sphere is prevented regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 319a. Hard to occur.

In this way, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged horizontally shifted, but also have light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and rear positions on the front side thereof. By intentionally designing different arrangement relationships between the light emitting means 351c and 351d with respect to the optical axis, and by making the light diffusing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b, which the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d reaches different, The front and rear positions where the light reaches, is diffused, and is visually recognized can be varied.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light emitting means 351c emits light and the case where the outer light emitting means 351d emits light are explained separately, and the explanation was given on the assumption that the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are turned off. The actual light emission control of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to one side at a time, but may also be controlled such that both sides are turned on or both sides are turned off. The light emission control pattern and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 looks at that time will be described below.

77(a) to FIG. 77(d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the sorting device 300. In FIGS. 77(a) to 77(d), lines as shape lines of the light-diffusion processed surface are omitted for ease of understanding, and the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting means 351c and 351d, respectively, are omitted. A case where the combinations are different is illustrated, and the range that shines brightly due to the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d is illustrated with a hatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) shows a both light-off state in which the light-emitting means 351c and 351d are both turned off, and FIG. 77(b) shows a state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off. An inner lighting state is illustrated, and FIG. 77(c) shows an outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting means 351d is lit. Both lighting states are illustrated in which both lights are on.

When both lights are off, each of the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b is not illuminated, as shown in FIG. 77(a), and although the visibility of the back side is ensured, it gives a dull impression to the player. give to someone. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing above the third flow path forming part 336 and an out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming part 336.

In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path forming part 336 is illuminated, so that the ball flowing above the third flow path forming part 336 is illuminated. The visibility is maintained high, and the visibility of the out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming part 336 is reduced.

Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the ball at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b disposed on the near side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in a non-illuminated state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light.

That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming part 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and since the line of sight that is trying to see the branch point BP1 through the front frame part 333 also passes through, the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the falling manner of the ball in BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated on the points that need attention in order to grasp the falling direction of the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points of interest, and reduce the player's stress while playing the game. can.

A light diffusing surface 333b is formed on the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 and see what is behind the player. It is configured so that

When viewing the rear through the front frame portion 333, the rear is viewed through two of the inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 facing each other in the front and back. Since there are many boards that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to visually recognize the back side.

The same thing can be done when trying to see through the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined diagonally from the left and right inner side to the left and right outer side (a line of sight that is inclined from the front side left and right center position to the normal detection sensor SE12). The same can be said for players who play.

That is, in this embodiment, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular cylinder shape, and on this inclined line of sight, the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plate 338 and a side surface facing the portion 338 are arranged. Therefore, since there are many boards that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to visually recognize the back side.

In this manner, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed in the front-rear direction but also when viewed diagonally.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(c), since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, the ball flowing outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light, so the falling ball visibility is reduced.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed on the back side (lower side) of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 can be improved. I can do it. That is, in the outside lighting state, although there is an effect of improving the attention of the player by improving the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side, the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself becomes low.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide range. The light-illuminated situation is a combination of the internal lighting condition and the external lighting condition, and although both effects can be produced, they do not only supplement each other with beneficial effects.

For example, since the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the characteristic that the ball flowing left and right outward at the branch point BP1 is hidden by light is carried over from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of increasing the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inside lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified as control modes for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game where there is a possibility that a ball may enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), control is performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in other round games, it may be controlled to brighten the entire area by configuring an outside lighting state or a both lighting state.

Further, for example, the control may be performed in such a manner that both lighting states and both lighting off states are alternately switched regardless of the type of round game.

Further, the timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to the round game, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c and 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is erected during symbol fluctuation, or the entry of a ball into the winning openings 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67 may be detected. If so, the light emitting means may be controlled to light up the lights 351c and 351d.

Returning to FIG. 75 from FIG. 73, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the ball near the specific winning opening 65a will be explained in detail again. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b disposed on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in an open state or a closed state, a ball that has deviated to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b and has rested on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b can be moved to the left and right outer sides (the opening/closing plate 65b), it is possible to avoid the ball riding on the extended portion 162b from flowing down through the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can roll on the inner rail 61, so that the occurrence of a situation in which the ball bounces up (bounces high) near the out port 71 can be prevented. can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path forming portion 336 disposed on the back side thereof being hidden by the ball that has jumped up, thereby preventing visibility from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed into a planar shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center side (the partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, as the distance from the opening/closing plate 65b to the second flow path forming part 335 increases as it approaches the left and right center, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming part 335 are separated from each other. It is possible to easily distinguish between the ball flowing toward the third flow path forming portion 336 and the ball flowing toward the third flow path forming portion 336.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening/closing plate 65b has a shape that allows the balls riding on the upper surface to flow into the specific prize opening 65a without leaking, but various shapes have been devised to prevent the flow of the balls from being delayed. has been done.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the ball flowing backward from the upper surface of the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the left and right sides. . The guide plate portion 163a2 is formed not in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction, but in a plate shape extending in a downwardly inclined direction to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical positional displacement of the ball flowing from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

That is, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface such that the left and right inner sides are disposed further rearward, and the opening and closing plate 65b is closer than the vicinity of the left and right outer ends where the ball riding on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact. The left and right inner portions, which are in contact with the ball transferred to the receiving member 163 whose floor surface is lower than the receiving member 163, extend in an inclined direction so that the position is on the lower side.

Thereby, the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (the contact height over the entire length of the ball) can be stabilized, and the ball can be guided smoothly. In addition, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate part 163a2 is designed from the relative relationship with the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that it can come into contact with the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball. Ru.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the upper surface rear end portion (rotation base end side portion) of the opening/closing plate 65b and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, at the horizontal center position where the height position of the lower surface part 163a is highest, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface part 163a slopes downward toward the left and right sides, and the horizontal width It is configured such that its upper and lower sides are reversed at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position for switching the downward flow mode of the ball between the opening and closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, 74) (a position directly above the front frame portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, the ball may roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with less resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b and collides with (the inner rear surface of) the receiving member 163 and bounces forward again, after the ball stops bouncing and starts rolling, It is possible to prevent the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the ball that rolls from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to come into contact with the lower surface portion 163a, the ball rolls toward the left and right outer sides along the left and right slope of the lower surface portion 163a. will be swept away.

Note that the ball is unlikely to fall near the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) restricts the ball from falling, so the structure is such that it is difficult for the ball to bounce. I can say that. However, ball bounce may occur due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range on the left and right outer sides (the side where the ball passing hole 163b is arranged) of the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), from the receiving member 163 due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the rolling surface of the ball. While rolling of the ball toward the opening/closing plate 65b is suppressed, rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 may occur with little resistance. For example, even if the ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a gains forward speed due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the game machine, the ball is prevented from flowing back toward the opening/closing plate 65b. be able to.

To summarize the description regarding the switching position EP1, by limiting the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, the backflow of the ball near the ball passage hole 163b is prevented. By avoiding this and smoothing the flow of the balls, we aim to avoid situations where the balls become stuck.

In addition, the backward rolling of the ball from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling pattern in which the backward flow is completed and then the ball switches to the left and right flow, but instead of the ball rolling backward from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1. The rolling motion occurs along an oblique straight line connecting the range between and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, the flow does not flow along a path that intersects at right angles, such as in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, but rather flows along the oblique line that connects the front-rear straight line and the other end of the left-right straight line, with one end located at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the ball can be shortened (equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides in a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to the case where the ball tends to flow backward across the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, the configuration is such that the ball tends to flow forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 as in the present embodiment. Therefore, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the flow of balls is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the left and right outer ranges of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has a space on the front side in the left and right center range of the pair of switching positions EP1. The upper surface part 163f is formed in a plate shape and slopes upwardly so as to open the space.

The upper surface part 163f is designed to reduce the possibility that the ball will become stuck in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface part 163a, and the upper surface part 163f reduces the space in which the ball is placed. Vertical width can be secured.

This prevents the ball from clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and prevents the ball from getting caught between the opening and closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to close with the ball on it. can be avoided.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f extends left and right in a direction along the inclination angle of the second flow path forming portion 335 (a direction inclined by 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and is configured to roll along the second flow path forming portion 335. It is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball (a position 5.5 mm higher than the bottom of the floor of the second flow path forming part 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position away from the center height of the ball. This allows the ball to roll more smoothly than when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or a load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is generated on the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, if it is acceptable that the visibility of the branch point BP1 is reduced, the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is approximately the same as the full length of the sphere, so that the symmetrical protrusion 161f can be formed at a position away from the center height of the sphere. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the protruding portion 161f comes into contact with the ball.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be explained in detail again. FIG. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In FIG. 78, in order to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown transparently using imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is visible.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337, which is disposed opposite, even in the front position (see FIG. 78). Gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap with a size sufficiently short to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As a result, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the accurate change detection sensor SE11, a situation in which the front end of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 is avoided. can do.

Further, the front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371, is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the arrangement shifts rearward toward the left and right outer sides. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being caught and retained between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

That is, even if the ball is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate part 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, since the front end of the thin plate part 371 is formed as an inclined surface, Since the generated load has a directional component directed outward to the left and right, the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a method for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the player's benefits may vary depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is required to be reproducible (stability) and smooth.

79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, and lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member taken along the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. In addition, in the description of FIG. 79, FIGS. 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper side surface of the thin plate part 371 on the front side of the upper protruding part 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is located lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the ball flows along this inclination. obtain. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the ball rolling on this inclined surface, the slide displacement member 370 is configured to suppress a change in the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 such as a change in the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is supported by not only the left and right end portions but also the lower protruding strip portion 373 in contact with the plate portion 382 of the lower member 380. As a result, each of the pair of ball guide parts 371b, which is divided into right and left parts by the recessed part 372, can be supported on both left and right sides (supported on both sides), so that changes in the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. can.

In other words, even if the loads applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide portions 371b are different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on the ball guide portions 371b), each ball guide portion 371b is supported by both left and right ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress horizontal inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and the slide displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction).

In addition, upward displacement of the edge of the recessed portion 372 is restricted by the partition plate portion 338 being disposed on the upper side. That is, it is possible to suppress the floating movement of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilting displacement in the backward tilting direction.

This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the slide displacement member 370 in an appropriate state, suppresses displacement resistance in the front-rear direction displacement, and prevents malfunction of the slide displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-shaped portion formed to protrude toward the front at the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides. Formed as a surface.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protruding portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in the present embodiment, a pair of hemispherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion 383, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion 383 is configured to make point contact.

Here, as described above, since the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b due to the weight of the ball is It is decomposed into a directional component and a left-right component, and the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the left-right direction (a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370) by the left-right component.

At this time, it is preferable to make the left-right gap between the recessed part 372 and the protruding part 383 of the slide displacement member 370 smaller because it makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide part 371b, but it also makes contact friction more likely to occur. , functional problems may occur.

For example, when displacing the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction with the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, a situation may occur in which the front-rear displacement becomes poor (for example, no displacement occurs). there's a possibility that.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the hemispherical protrusion 372a and the protrusion 383 are configured to make point contact, so the area where frictional force is generated can be reduced, and the contact friction can be kept small. Thereby, even when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the front-back direction favorably.

In particular, the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball is placed on the ball guide portion 371b changes from a state in which the ball cannot enter the definite change detection sensor SE11 to a state in which the ball can enter the definite change detection sensor SE11. Since this is a displacement operation that switches the state to a different state, by properly executing this displacement operation, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, by setting the displacement speed of this displacement operation to be high, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and the ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which a ball is placed on the slide displacement member 370 at the front position, and FIG. 80(b) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear position. In FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), examples of the rotation direction of the sphere are illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the rotation direction of the ball that has rolled backward and reached the slide displacement member 370 is the forward rotation direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the ball is riding on the slide displacement member 370, a load is applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370. acts to reverse the rotational direction (guiding direction) of the ball (backward rotation direction).

As a result, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, making it easier for the ball to fall straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven in a state where the ball is placed on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can be configured to easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The longitudinally long protruding portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the longitudinally long protruding portion 317 does not only have the function of guiding the ball to the variable variation detection sensor SE11, but also guides the ball to the variable displacement detection sensor SE11 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 located upstream of the variable variation detection sensor SE11. It is configured as a suitably guideable profile.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the ball that comes into contact with the longitudinally long protrusion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve at the end of the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 has a substantially arcuate shape which is longer in the longitudinal direction than the vertical width (see FIG. 18), The downward component will give a larger load than the directional component. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball that has come into contact with the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317 rebounds in the longitudinal direction and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the downward direction of the ball is determined by the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curvature.

Here, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, if a ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward by the load at the time of the collision. There is a possibility that the state changes to a state in which the ball can pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected downward by contacting the front-rear elongated protrusion 317 before the ball collides with the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Therefore, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, so that it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

In addition, since the load applied from the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 backward becomes smaller, the biasing force (the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) has) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position is reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved because the biasing force of the return spring can be reduced and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against the biasing force can be reduced.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position with the ball disposed at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the ball.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball on the front side of the front displacement terminal position of the upper protrusion 376, and the force of the ball is directed downward to the left and right outer sides. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the longitudinally long protruding portion 317. As a result, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the arrangement is stabilized by inertia due to its own weight, and the ball is unlikely to flow backwards under the load applied from the slide displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the contact between the ball and the upper protruding part 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position at which it contacts the longitudinally long protruding part 317, but the ball is at a level that allows the ball to come into contact with the upper protruding part 376. In the lowered state (see FIG. 80(a)), the portion that comes into contact with the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, which is located at a lower position than the bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced toward the near side due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protruding portion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to climb up from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a. , the degree of backflow of the ball can be reduced.

Further, the front end of the upper protruding portion 376 on the side of the partition plate portion 338 is formed into an acute angle shape, and the collision mode is not such that the plane collides head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper protruding portion 376 is large in the left-right direction, and small in the front-back direction.

As a result, the ball that has come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 can smoothly flow in the left-right outward direction, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position with the ball placed at the branch point BP1. In this control mode, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the ball is caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 78, FIG. 79(b), and FIG. 79(c). Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 side (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 will be displaced in the forward falling direction due to the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper protruding portion 376, that is, the portion where the upper and lower protruding portions 374 are formed over the front and back on both left and right sides. It is configured such that it can sufficiently secure and come into contact with the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over its front and rear width. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from tilting in the forward tilting direction.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are formed long in the front and back, when a load is applied to tilt and displace the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 is reduced to one point. You can avoid concentrating on Thereby, deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (rigidity can be increased).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at a front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the protruding portion (hereinafter also referred to as the protruding portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is It comes into contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate section 338.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is set at the front side position where the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a abuts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, a light-diffusing processed surface is not formed on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, but a flat surface is formed so as to face the protruding portion 378a in the front and rear and to be able to abut each other. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the front flesh portion of the protruding portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side of the partition plate section 338 through the opening.

In this way, since the position to which the driving force is transmitted is the left-right center portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. In other words, it is possible to easily avoid positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the longitudinal direction.

Further, since the front surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotational direction around the vertical axis. .

Here, when maintaining or returning the posture of the slide displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate part 338 and the hemispherical protrusion part 372a, the contact area between the partition plate part 338 and the hemispherical protrusion part 372a Since this is small, a load may be applied locally and the durability of the hemispherical protrusion 372a may deteriorate.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, before the front surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is caused to have an attitude shift in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even if this occurs, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be resolved in the process in which the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 due to the transmission of the driving force, and the position of the slide displacement member 370 can be corrected. Posture can be corrected.

The partition plate portion 338 with respect to the protruding portion 378a has the purpose of aligning the slide displacement member 370 by coming into contact with it during displacement in the front-rear direction, and also functions as a portion that receives the load in the forward tilting direction applied to the slide displacement member 370. has.

That is, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, when a load is generated in the direction of changing the attitude of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 When the protruding portion 378a begins to be displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the gap allowed by the displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protrusion 378a from the rear side of the partition plate 338, thereby suppressing the displacement of the protrusion 378a, thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the slide displacement member 370. can do.

Next, the details of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800, which have not been explained in detail, will be explained again. First, as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be explained.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is a direction of the arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 6 is a side view of the rotating member 620 when viewed from above.

82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. 82 and 83 illustrate a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is disposed at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetrical shape in view of the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. The details of the rotating member 620 and the effect on the rotating member 620 will be described below.

The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is a side surface formed on the proximal side protruding portion 617a that protrudes from the front lid member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the proximal protrusion 617a). The movable range of the rotary member 620 is defined by restricting the displacement of the first side surface 621a by the proximal protrusion 617a (see FIG. 45 for the movable member 620 at the end position of the movable range). ).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with the distal end protruding portion 617b that protrudes from the front lid member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the distal end protrusion 617b). The movable range of the rotary member 620 is defined by restricting the displacement of the second side surface 621b by the distal end protruding portion 617b (see FIG. 40 for the movable member 620 at the end position of the movable range). .

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a box shape with a substantially rectangular outer shape on the front side of the front lid member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box part 618). By restricting the displacement of the third side surface 621c by the rectangular box portion 618, a movable range of the rotary member 620 is defined (see FIG. 40 for the rotary member 620 at the end position of the movable range).

In this manner, at the end of the displacement of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 comes into contact with the corresponding portion of the front lid member 612, and displacement is restricted. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the end of the displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming a plurality of contact points in this way is to distribute the load in the rotational direction received at the time of contact at multiple points, and to distribute the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at multiple points. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

Examples of the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward falling direction due to receiving the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsion due to inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating. For example, a load in a direction (a load in a rotational direction with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 as an axis) is exemplified.

In particular, since the load in the forward tilting direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum, by considering the moment of force, the farther the abutment position receiving the load is from the cylindrical portion 622, the more The load generated at the contact position becomes smaller. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at a position away from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

The body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d that is recessed in the direction of retreating from the drive motor 631 to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and a range that includes the recessed portion 621d. , an increased thickness portion 621e that is formed as a rotating portion around the cylindrical portion 622 and has an increased thickness including a region that contacts the proximal protrusion portion 617a.

The rotating proximal end side of the rotating member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the recessed portion 621d, so there is a possibility that breakage may occur due to impact load without countermeasures, but the thickened portion 621e By forming the recessed portion 621d, the influence of the recessed portion 621d on strength can be offset. Thereby, breakage of the rotating member 620 can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, by forming the thickened portion 621e in a range that includes a portion where it can come into contact with the proximal protruding portion 617a, impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the proximal protruding portion 617a are reduced. The durability of the rotating member 620 can be improved.

84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. 84 and 85 illustrate a state in which the widthwise end portion of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three times or more longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, forming the extended portion 634b with a sufficiently long width has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

That is, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed in front of the supported member 640. , a load may be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward falling direction, and if no countermeasure is taken, the rotating member 620 may be bent and deformed in the front-rear direction, resulting in malfunction.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the extending portion 634b is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, and is disposed facing the back surface of the fixed means 610. The load applied from the extending portion 634b to the fixed means 610 through the portion 634a in the direction of forward falling of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angular range of the arcuate hole 613d (by increasing the area where the load occurs). (can be secured). Thereby, the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the forward tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while avoiding damage to the extension portion 634b.

In this embodiment, while ensuring a long width of the extension part 634b can produce an advantageous effect structurally, the end of the extension part 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Even if the control mode is such that the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the rotating member 620 is in the initial position (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 may reach the final position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side due to loads such as inertia. The structure has been devised to reach this goal.

For example, first, the inertial force of each member is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 from the initial position to the final position. Not only the inertia force accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotation member 620 itself, but also the inertia force accompanying the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 as they rotate clockwise in rear view about the axis O1. , occurs in the direction in which the rotating member 620 is displaced from the initial position to the final position (the direction in which the rotating member 620 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (this embodiment (same as the center of the overhanging decorative portion 652b) is located at a position left and right away from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear tooth 654a.

Therefore, the dead weight generated in the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of rotating the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a receive a load due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

This load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth 625 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotation member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotation member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotation member 620 from the initial position to the terminal position.

In this way, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load that causes the rotating member 620 to rotate even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized is maintained. Constructed to occur.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, when the extending portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not reached the displacement end position, the drive motor 631 is not energized. Even if it is controlled to disconnect, the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotational member 620 can reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86(a), FIG. 86(b), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 87(b), and FIG. 88 show the elongated guide hole 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the extension portion of the detection sensor KS1, and the transmission gear cam 634. 634b is a rear view.

86(a), FIG. 86(b), FIG. 87(a), FIG. 87(b), and FIG. 88, the rotational operation of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the production standby state of the first operation unit 600 is shown in chronological order. Illustrated in

Note that FIG. 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86(b) corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87(a) corresponds to the state shown in the first operation. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be explained. An electrical wiring 618d whose end is fixed to a connector 618c disposed on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618 is arranged so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of the partition portion 619 that is formed to protrude from the front lid member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39), and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b has a length that takes into consideration the movement locus of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged so as to bend under its own weight between the connector 618c and the opening C2a.

The partition portion 619 includes columnar portions 619a formed at both upper and lower ends, and a plate-like portion 619b protruding in the form of a long plate so as to connect the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619a and the plate upper portion 619b abut against the front side surface of the base member 611.

A female thread is formed inside the columnar part 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening drilled in the base member 611 at a position corresponding to the columnar part 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front cover. The member 612 is fastened and fixed. That is, the partition portion 619 not only has the effect of restricting the arrangement position of the electric wiring 618d, but also has the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be explained, paying particular attention to the movement of the opening C2a. First, explanation will be given focusing on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced downward in the time series of FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and FIG. 88.

In the operation from the production standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the dish-shaped lid While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change much, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition part 619 before the dish-shaped lid part C2 starts a full-scale downward displacement, and the dish-shaped lid part C2 is moved downward. In the process of doing so, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 618d from being caught between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid part C2 and the partition part 619 are closest (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is in a position facing toward the side (downward) from which the electrical wiring 618d is evacuated from the partition part 619. ing.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring 618d is pinched between the partition part 619, so that even if the dish-shaped lid part C2 is designed to be placed close to the partition part 619, the electrical wiring 618d will be disconnected. It is possible to avoid problems such as the following.

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the attitude of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise in rear view. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid part C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618d is intentionally configured to have downward slack. This makes it possible to avoid unnecessary loosening of the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to loosening in the front-rear direction) while ensuring the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself.

Further, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be such that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b during the operation of the first operating unit 600. As a result, even without providing a partition between the extending portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extending portion 634b and receives a load.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid part C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension part 634b is placed away from the connector 618c (with the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as a reference). Since the electrical wiring 618d is placed on the opposite side of the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to secure a large range for arranging the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension part 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electrical wiring 618d. be able to.

Next, explanation will be given focusing on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87(b), 87(a), 86(b), and 86(a).

In the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, from the lower end position of the displacement (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid part C2 approaches the partition part 619 closest, the opening C2a does not face the partition part 619 side, but faces downward. facing. Thereby, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while ensuring the downward slack of the electrical wiring 618d.

The orientation of the opening C2a is such that even after the dish-shaped lid C2 passes the lower end of the partition 619, it is kept facing downward (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is connected to the partition 619) while gradually rotating. 87(a)) is maintained (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid part C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition part 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition part 619 side (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the electrical wiring 618d is sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid part C2 and the partition part 619, causing a disconnection. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the

In other words, by changing the arrangement of the opening C2a in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition part 619 and the dish-shaped lid part C2, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted, and the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted. Since the electric wiring 618d is prevented from being disposed between the dish-shaped lid part C2 and the partition part 619 when the distance between the electric wiring 618d becomes narrow, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, it is possible to design the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid part C2 to be arranged close to each other, so that the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid part C2 is possible. The degree of freedom can be improved.

Further, the restriction on the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d is realized not by using a separate member such as a binding band, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid part C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but also serves to restrict the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a special member such as a binding band for bundling the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike a cable tie, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be placed on the appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid C2, so that the electrical wiring 618d is not stretched or bent. This makes it easier to avoid such situations.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening with a center angle of about 110 degrees. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape adopted as the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electric wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be explained. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In FIG. 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are illustrated, and illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, the illumination board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown in solid lines, and the box is shown for ease of understanding. The shaped member 661 is shown in imaginary lines to make the inside visible.

Further, in FIG. 89, an example of the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is illustrated, and a dish-shaped lid portion C2 is illustrated that includes an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. In the electrical wiring 618d, the wiring connected to the terminal of the illumination board 653 (see FIG. 41) and the wiring connected to the terminal of the illumination board 662 are branched between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. The diagram shows how this is done.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disc-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and has an elongated hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted. A wire insertion elongated hole 663a, and a pair of insertion holes 663b formed on both sides of the elongated insertion hole 663a as through holes into which fastening screws can be inserted.

Since the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) from falling off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663.

The fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed in the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and the function of integrally fixing the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition, the wiring fastening board 663 has a function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes inside the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being pinched. In this embodiment, the rotational movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not a rotational movement of one rotation or more, but a rotational movement of less than half a rotation (a rotational movement of about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction. Therefore, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and the electrical wiring 618d is not twisted.

It is thought that the load (load in the twisting direction) applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates increases near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment Since the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a is formed in the shape of an elongated hole and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held between the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a, displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the elongated hole shape is not allowed. ing.

Therefore, even if an overload occurs in the torsional direction on the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be relieved by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be explained. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation of the dish-shaped lid C2 shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 has Twisting occurs in the direction of rotation. That is, as the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction, twisting occurs in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

With the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also displaced counterclockwise in rear view, so that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to twisting can be reduced ( (The durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.)

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being vertically displaced along the guide elongated hole 616. Here, in the time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state where the slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is large to a state where the slack is small.

Correspondingly, the rotating operation of the illumination board 662 changes from a state in which the terminals of the electrical wiring 618d on the illumination board 662 side are arranged on the back side (on the main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to The operation is configured to change the state to a state where it is disposed on the front side (wiring receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state can be changed such that the electrical wiring 618d is pulled toward the front side.

That is, in the time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d is in a state where the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 has a large amount of slack (a state in which the terminals on the illumination board 662 side are arranged on the back side). ) to a state where the slack is small (a state in which the terminals on the illumination board 662 side are arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship in magnitude of slack is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. Thereby, the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained. do.

In the time-series operations shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise in rear view, while the electrical wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 is The electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed in between is twisted in the rotating direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the side of the illumination board 662)). That is, they are twisted in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be minimized when the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, and the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d is maximized in the extended state. There is.

As a result, even if the electrical wiring 618d is slack between the connector 618c and the opening C2a, it is not likely to cause a problem even if the electrical wiring 618d is slack (acting standby state, see FIG. 86(a)). In a state where it is preferable to reduce the generated load and to reduce the slack of the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88), the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the electrical wiring 618d are It is possible to maximize the twisting caused by the rotational movement of the decorative substrate 662, thereby suppressing the loosening of the electrical wiring 618d (suppressing the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, the twisting is minimized to create sufficient slack, and the twisting reduces the slack to connect the surrounding members (for example, the extension portion 634b) and the electrical It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d and a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

In addition, as another embodiment, in the time-series operations shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 is reversed (bottom view in FIG. 89 (from the side of the illumination board 662 to the insertion hole 663b). It may also be configured in a clockwise direction). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational movement of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d is deformation can be offset.

Next, the characteristics of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be explained. 90(a), FIG. 90(b), FIG. 91(a), FIG. 91(b), and FIG. 92 are front views schematically showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b), and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are schematically illustrated for easy understanding. In order to do this, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 are omitted, and the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 90(a), the arrangement corresponding to the performance standby state (see FIG. 40) of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 90(b), the widthwise end of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is shown. The arrangement corresponding to the state in which the detection sensor KS1 is placed in the detection groove (see FIG. 84) is illustrated, and in FIG. 91(b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is placed at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82); , an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 45) is illustrated.

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is placed to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. Thereby, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be placed outside the player's field of view (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is placed behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, so that the line of sight is likely to be blocked by the outer edge member 73, so the overhanging decorative portion 652b visibility can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the overhanging decorative part 652b is displaced downward while it is placed so far to the right that it overlaps with the rectangular box part 618 when viewed from above, the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618 are displaced. This will collide with the shaped box portion 618, resulting in a problem.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the attitude of the overhanging decorative part 652b is configured to change prior to the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b ( (See FIG. 90(b) and FIG. 91(a)). This attitude change occurs as a rotational movement in the direction of retreat from the rectangular box portion 618 (diagonally upper left direction when viewed from the front, direction of rotation around the axis O1), so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 collisions can be easily avoided.

In this embodiment, after the overhanging decoration part 652b retreats from the upper position of the rectangular box part 618 due to this attitude change (see FIG. 91(a)), the full-fledged dish-shaped lid part C2 and the overhanging decoration The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the axis O1 approaches the rectangular box portion 618 along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 (to the right). ) (see FIG. 91(b)), there is a possibility that the overhanging decorative portion 652b collides with the rectangular box portion 618.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 includes a recessed portion 618a formed along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at a position where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end of the guide elongated hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box part 618 is considered with one purpose of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box part 618.

Furthermore, since the posture of the decorative overhanging portion 652b continues to change with the downward displacement of the axis O1, the decorative overhanging portion 652b can be displaced in the direction of retreating from the rectangular box portion 618. In this embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retreat distance) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. It is designed to be equal to or greater than (equal to or exceed). Thereby, collision between the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

In the states shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement due to the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are left-right opposite directions and cancel each other out. The horizontal displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b was kept small.

On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement due to the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in the same left-right direction. By overlapping each other, the amount of horizontal displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b increases.

As a result, even though the overhanging decorative portion 652b always rotates around the axis O1 as a posture change, the player cannot see that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is different from the one shown in FIG. 90(a). From FIG. 91(b) to FIG. 92, the guide shows vertical displacement with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory), and from FIG. 91(b) to FIG. I can show you.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) that guides the displacement of the decorative overhanging portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the decorative overhanging portion 652b seen by the player. With this, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

In other words, the displacement of the decorative overhanging portion 652b can be shown to the player as if the decorative overhanging portion 652b were protruding from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the left and right areas of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), which are narrow and would not be able to secure sufficient displacement in the left and right direction, it is possible to show the player an unexpected displacement that jumps out in the left and right direction. Therefore, attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be improved.

Note that, for convenience, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b have been compared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a rotation axis of a part of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is configured to be rotatable about this rotation axis and the left-right displacement of the axis O1 are The meaning is the same. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

FIG. 93 is a sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along the line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. In FIG. 93, a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed cylindrical part 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body part 641 from the back side, and an opening 645a is formed and communicated with it. The gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at certain locations.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the wiring retaining plate 663 can restrict the displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the axial direction.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 creates a slight gap between the step portions formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the base end side in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. It is placed empty. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and to stabilize the arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axis direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed in the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged on the rear side compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 2) and are arranged close to each other in the front-back direction. In other words, it is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in which the third symbol display device 81 is arranged in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative decorative portion 652b are arranged apart from each other, the decorative decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. (see FIG. 29), it is possible to easily create an effect that makes the player see (create an illusion) that the display area is expanded to the right.

In particular, when viewing the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the same time (for example, see FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the front side. Since it is easily visible independently of the display on the third symbol display device, on the contrary, the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed close to the third symbol display device 81 from the front side can be used as part of the display by the player. It is possible to emphasize the effect of creating an illusion.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b) can be determined. We are trying to keep the level low. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion formed from a hard resin, and cannot change its shape midway through. The appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling to change the height, etc.).

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as LED arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 The overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area (see FIG. 29), making it easier to create an effect that makes it appear to the player (gives the illusion) that the display area is expanded to the right. be able to.

Next, the details of the second operating unit 700 will be explained again. 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94.

As described above, in the second operation unit 700, in the sliding displacement, the vertical displacement and the longitudinal displacement occur in synchronization (sliding displacement in the diagonally tilted longitudinal direction). The design is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not excessively noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the displacement in the front-back direction when tilted diagonally is not composed of a single displacement, but is a combination of a vertical displacement and a front-back displacement. It is configured.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at its left end so as to move up and down in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702. At the left end, in addition, a left rear plate member 750 and a blindfold decorative member 768 are arranged before and after the elevating plate member 740 to prevent the elevating plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

The right side of the elevating plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720. The right end portion of the elevating plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the back case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (front upper inclined portion 714, 751) via the production device 780. and receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end portion of the elevating plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to restrict the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 to the vertical direction.

The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-back direction. In this way, in realizing the sliding displacement in the front and back direction tilted diagonally, the guidance of the displacement of the elevating plate member 740 and the production device 780 as constituent members is configured to be divided into the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. has been done.

This makes it easier to maintain a low displacement resistance compared to a configuration in which the guide is tilted obliquely in the front-rear direction.

The extended state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a state that can be controlled to perform a displacement (see FIG. 57) that changes the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other states of the overhanging state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 33)), the overhanging state is The second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to cause a displacement that changes the state of the installation member 787.

By controlling in this manner, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are moved to positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when performing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787. Even if the covering member 787 is configured to be disposed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

A contrivance of the configuration of the production device 780 for the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be described. First, a drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force for displacing the state of the covering member 787 is operated at the left-right center position of the presentation device 780 (at the center of the insertion cylindrical part 773 inserted into the cylindrical part 744). (the center is directly above the center).

This not only prevents the presentation device 780 from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 95) that can perform the displacement to change the state of the covering member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 that supports the elevating plate member 740 The left and right positions of are equal to the left and right center position of the presentation device 780, or are set to the right side.

In this way, the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported only by the rotary arm member 720, in which the cylindrical fastened portion 724 serving as a support position can be displaced in the left-right direction. When it is assumed that a change in position or posture is likely to occur, that is, when a displacement is executed to change the state of the covering member 787, the arrangement of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 may be the same as the left-right center position of the presentation device 780, or the position on the right side. By setting, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement and posture of the presentation device 780.

Note that the control for executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 is switched, It is possible to control the state of the two-action unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the production standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to bring the second operating unit 700 into the intermediate production state, the second operating unit 700 must be tensioned once. In the extended state, the covering member 787 is displaced to switch the state, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As illustrated in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed to be long in the left-right direction so as to overlap the inner end portions of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rotating cylinder part 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden from the player's view, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and shape of the rotating cylinder part 774e. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the player understands that the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction.

Further, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusing member 778b is visually recognized as overlapping with the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decoration part 768a in a row from left to right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, over the left and right length of the lower edge.

On the back side of the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a, a substrate to which an LED is fixed on the front side is provided, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED causes the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a to It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect. By this light emitting effect, the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be made to appear as if it is separated by light, or the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be made to appear brighter with light. You can also perform.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has the function of a member that hides the rotary cylinder part 774e (see FIG. 54) and the function of a member that performs a light emitting effect jointly with the three-dimensional decoration part 768a. It can be configured to have both.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally elongated member 742 is a cover that is placed at an interval on the front side in a range behind the three-dimensional decoration part 768a and away from the rear of the light diffusing member 778b (left side range). A mounting cover 742a is provided.

The covering cover 742a is a blinding member formed over the vertical width of the horizontally long member 742, and is disposed so that electric wiring can be passed through the gap between the horizontally long member 742 and the horizontally long member 742. That is, the electric wiring for energizing the presentation device 780 is guided from the rear of the blindfold decorative member 768 to the presentation device 780 side through the gap between the covered cover 742a and the oblong member 742, and is connected to the drive motor 782. , an illumination board 778a, a detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a are arranged in a folded manner, so that the player's line of sight is easily blocked, and the electrical wiring is It is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the player.

In other words, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, are placed in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a blindfold for the electrical wiring. The size of the covering cover 742a required for blindfolding can be suppressed to the minimum size.

In addition, since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a is fixed, it does not overlap with the horizontally long member 742 in the production standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33), and is not used to hide the electrical wiring. Not available.

In consideration of this, in this embodiment, the horizontally long member 742 is formed in a range outside the light diffusing member 778b when viewed from the front. As a result, the electrical wiring can be hidden by the horizontally elongated member 742 and the light diffusion member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 96 shows a horizontally arranged state of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 shows an inverted vertically arranged state of the up-down reversible member 781. (See FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but include a curved portion 783d that is curved upward from the lower surface of the vertically inverted member 781 in the horizontally arranged state. The curved portion 783d is curved so as to protrude in a direction away from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the drive gear 782a when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is schematically illustrated with imaginary lines in order to make the inside visible through the covering member 787.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged near both left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly unite the covering members 787, but acts on each pair of covering members 787 independently.

Thereby, for example, when one covering member 787 malfunctions, it can be avoided that the other covering member 787 also malfunctions.

Further, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction, it is possible to avoid the magnetic force acting in the opposite direction of the left-right displacement. That is, when the up-and-down reversing member 781 starts rotating from an erect vertically disposed state, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnet Mg at the time when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction. Compared to the case where it is necessary to remove the attraction of the magnets, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction, the covering members 787 may vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force, or the covering members 787 may not be displaced. It becomes stable and can easily avoid situations where malfunctions occur.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged vertically opposite to each other on the left and right sides, and the effect thereof will be explained. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, to which a metal screw that is in contact with the magnet Mg and is loaded with magnetic force is fixed, is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side when the up-down reversing member 781 is erected and vertically arranged, 55). Therefore, the direction of the load that is applied to the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front and rear directions on both the left and right sides.

To be more specific, for example, when the up-down reversing member 781 changes from an erect vertically disposed state (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertically disposed state (see FIG. 59(c)), the reversed position on the left side in front view Since the member 787 rotates in the forward rotation direction, as the metal screw placed close to the magnet Mg (placed on the upper side) is displaced forward, the magnet Mg has a forward movement as a reaction to the attraction force. While a load is generated, the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward rotation direction, so that the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (disposed on the lower side) is displaced forward, causing the magnet Mg to rotate in the backward rotation direction. A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction to the adsorption force.

Further, for example, when the vertical inversion member 781 changes from an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 781 on the left side in front view rotates in the backward direction, so as the metal screw placed close to the magnet Mg (placed on the upper side) is displaced backward, the magnet Mg receives a backward load as a reaction to the attraction force. On the other hand, since the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward rotation direction, the metal screw placed close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced backward, causing the magnet Mg to rotate. A backward load occurs as a reaction to the adsorption force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating cover member 787 and the main body member 771 and the translational plate member 784 that maintain the posture and support the cover member 787 is on both the left and right sides. It is constructed so that the front and rear directions are the same.

Here, if a load occurs in the reverse direction on both the left and right sides (for example, the left magnet Mg is placed in the lower position, the left and right magnets Mg are placed in the lower position, and the shaft rotation member 785 on the left side is placed in the lower position, When changing the design so that the rotational position stabilizing part 785f is placed on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the rotational position stabilizing part 785f is raised and lowered by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state. The mode of displacement given to the reversal performance device 770 is a mode in which the vertical reversal performance device 770 is rotated around a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, vibrations in the rotational direction of the vertically extending rotating shaft of the vertically extending production device 770 are likely to occur. In particular, as in this embodiment, the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of removing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c is utilized after the attraction of the magnet Mg is removed. In a configuration in which the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated, it is assumed that vibrations in the rotational direction of the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction are likely to occur in the vertically extending reversal effect device 770.

Furthermore, it becomes difficult to release the load from the up/down reversal effect device 770, and there is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged or the durability of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is reduced. Therefore, in view of the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 over a long period of time, it is considered that countermeasures are necessary.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state, the covering member 787 rotates, and the main body member 771 and the Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 is configured to be the same in the front and rear directions on both the left and right sides, the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state can cause an up/down reversal effect. The mode of displacement given to the device 770 can be a mode in which the up/down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-back direction.

Therefore, it can be easily offset by the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 (displacement having a front-back component), and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state. can be avoided from occurring.

In the second operation unit 700, the direction of sliding displacement of the presentation device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-back component, that is, a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-right direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. The displacement starting direction (horizontal direction) from the state in which the vertically inverting member 781 is placed (the vertically disposed state) is orthogonal.

Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent one displacement from occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when sliding displacement of the presentation device 780 is executed, it is easy to avoid a situation where the covering members 787 unintentionally start to be displaced from the state where they are arranged close to each other (displacement in the direction away from each other). be able to.

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be explained again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be explained. 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the elongated rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is arranged to face the distal end rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and the proximal reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the distal end rod portion 853. , and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out from the front side along the axial direction.

The proximal reinforcing portion 852a is hollowed out like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative amount of thinning out is small and deformation resistance is increased. This prevents the amount of deformation from becoming excessive even if it comes into contact with the tip side rod portion 853 formed on the rotation tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertia force during rotation tends to increase. can do.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the resistance to elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

Curved portions 852c are formed on both sides of the thickened portion 852 in the transverse direction. The curved portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed at the rotation proximal end of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed at the end of the distal end rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state. It is formed from a shape.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the serial combined state is Since the rotation is reversed, which side of the intermediate arm member 850 in the lateral direction is disposed close to the curved portion 854d differs depending on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portions 852c are formed on both side surfaces, the curved portions 854d can be smoothly received in either combined state. Thereby, the state change to the combined state can be smoothly executed.

In addition, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into contact with each other on their surfaces, a locally excessive load is generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of this phenomenon, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the elevating arm member 801, and the direction of the elevating displacement and the start of displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. The direction and are not necessarily perpendicular to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the virtual position line 832F, which is recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834, is set in different directions at 72 degree intervals, so that the displacement starting direction of all the rotating members 834 and , and the direction of the vertical displacement cannot be perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, due to the load and inertia that occur when the third operating unit 800 moves up and down, there is a possibility that rotational movement (integral rotational movement or switching rotational movement) may occur unintentionally. A countermeasure against this malfunction will be explained below.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800 schematically showing the displacement between the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, among the virtual position lines 832F of the metal rods 832, the virtual position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state and the angle between the virtual position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are 0.5 degrees. A virtual position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until it changes is illustrated.

That is, in FIG. 100, the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, at the start of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotation member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotation operation of the rotation member 834. It is configured so that it can be done.

The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which the meshing rotation of the bevel teeth 834a, 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs. .

Here, a backlash (gap) is essential to maintain the meshing of the gear teeth in an upright position, and the degree of rotational responsiveness is determined by setting the size of this gap. Although various modes can be selected for backlash setting, in this embodiment, backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

That is, until the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is only filled, and the meshing rotation is not started. On the other hand, the rotating tip side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 is sliding radially outward of the third operating unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

That is, at the start of the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individual combined state), the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the structure is such that sliding movement mainly occurs along the metal rod 832.

FIG. 101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third operating unit 800 is illustrated in a series-combined state, and the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that create a resistance force against displacement of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated.

Here, the structure is configured such that rotation does not occur in the rotation member 834 to the extent that the inner rotation member 830 slightly rotates relative to the outer rotation member 840 (for example, rotation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)). ing.

As a result, even if the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the combined state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 as in the present embodiment, and the attraction force is generated in the circumferential direction, Since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, it is possible to easily maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate in a direction perpendicular to the direction of magnetic force. 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, it is considered that the magnetic force is likely to disappear. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement at the start of displacement from the combined state of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is limited to the displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (metal rod 832 (displacement in the sliding direction along), it is easy to maintain the combined state due to magnetic force.

As a result, even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally slightly rotates (for example, rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load, the plurality of first decorative members 870 and second decorative members The combined state of the member 880 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the torque limiter 866 rotates in the forward direction, when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, the torque limiter 866 disconnects the connection and generates a switching rotation DR1 to reduce resistance (slip). When rotating in the opposite direction, an idling rotation AR1 occurs such that resistance is reduced (idling). The torque limiter 866 is constituted by a set of rotations that are opposite to each other in the forward and reverse directions.

To be more specific, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 has a switching rotation DR1 in which, when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, resistance is generated until the applied load reaches a permissible value, and when the permissible value is exceeded, the torque limiter 866 rotates idly. On the other hand, in the counterclockwise direction of rotation when viewed from the front, it is configured so that an idling rotation AR1 occurs.

In addition, the right torque limiter 866 is configured to cause idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise direction of rotation when viewed from the front, while the applied load does not reach the allowable value in the counterclockwise direction of rotation when viewed from the front. The switching rotation DR1 is configured such that resistance is generated until the tolerance is reached, and when the tolerance is exceeded, the switching rotation DR1 is idling.

In this way, the set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotational directions, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, in a state where a load that exceeds an allowable value in the rotational direction is not generated, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) assembled to the torque limiter 866. It is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the outer rotary member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (inertial force of lifting/lowering displacement, impact force when opening/closing the door). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotary member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side in the width direction of the second covering part 885, and is arranged concentrically in a state where the five second covering parts 885 are combined in an annular shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an adsorption force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covered part 885 which is arranged adjacent to each other.

With this configuration, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged on both sides of the specific second covered part 885 in the width direction (that is, the magnet Mg2 is arranged close to the specific second covered part 885 on both sides), Both of the covering parts 885 are further away from the specific second covering part 885 in the combined state, compared to the case where both of the covering parts 885 receive an urging force from the magnet Mg2 in the direction of approaching the specific second covering part 885. It is possible to prevent the gap between the second covered parts 885 from increasing depending on the position, and to equalize the gaps between all the adjacent second covered parts 885.

Further, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement outward in the radial direction, and the combination due to magnetic force is completed by the time the rotational movement about the metal rod 832 is started. When they are separated to the extent that they are released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative members 880 are aligned (direction toward the center of the concentric circle). This acts as a resistance force against the second decorative member 880 sliding outward in the radial direction.

Moreover, since this resistance force is generated in the same magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, it is possible to balance the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2. That is, compared to the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly, the arrangement of the third operating unit 800 can be more easily stabilized.

All five second decorative members 880 have the same shape, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front and rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load having a longitudinal component to the second decorative member 880 due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, so that the magnetic force is applied at the time of starting displacement from the combined state or immediately before reaching the combined state. occurs in the front-rear direction, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the second decorative member 880 vibrates in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 102 is a front view of outer rotating member 840 and intermediate arm member 850. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individually combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is shown in imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member disposed on the rear side 840 is visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to have at least one portion that restricts rotation in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102), In most cases, rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two locations. A configuration for regulating the rotation of this intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, there is a contact protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840 . The abutting protruding portion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent extending arm portions 842, and the inside thereof is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

This abutting protruding portion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , is configured to prevent over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

In the thickened portion 852, the deformation resistance of elastic deformation is weakened by the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the abutment protrusion 845 is thinned out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protruding portion 845, the load generated at that time is transferred to the abutting protruding portion. Since the damage can be absorbed by elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, damage to the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The contact projections 845 are not provided at all intermediate angular positions of the extended arm 842, but are omitted at the angular positions where the detected portions 844 are formed. As a result, the arrangement of the abutting protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 is shifted when viewed in the axial direction, and the direction in which the mold for the outer rotary member 840 is removed can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841. . Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the molding die.

As described above, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted as a compensation for facilitating the design of the molding die, but in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted. As a second configuration, a proximal reinforcing portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852.

The proximal reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the distal end rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can come into contact when the distal end rod portion 853 over-rotates. By arranging the intermediate arm member 850, over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is prevented.

The proximal reinforcing portion 852a is hollowed out like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative amount of thinning out is small and deformation resistance is increased. Thereby, even if the rotating arm member 850 comes into contact with the rotating tip side, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid the amount of deformation from becoming excessive.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to come into surface contact with the curved portion 854d, so that excessive load may not be locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state. can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

In this way, when the abutting protrusions 845 are disposed facing each other, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is caused by not only the contact with the abutting protruding part 845 but also the displacement of the adjacent rotating arm member 850. With a configuration that allows the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d to come into contact with each other, and the proximal reinforcing portion 852a and the distal end rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 to come into contact with each other. , over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

On the other hand, even if the arrangement of the abutting protruding portions 845 is omitted, the curved portions 852c and 854d of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 may be brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm members Over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted by a configuration that allows the proximal reinforcing portion 852a of the rotary arm member 850 to come into contact with the distal end rod portion 853.

These abutting configurations are configured such that five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (circulatingly arranged). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of the abutting protrusion 845 at one location is omitted, and there is little structure that restricts rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted location, so the load at the time of abutting may be concentrated. However, in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 makes it possible to distribute the load at the time of contact.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutting protruding portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely reduced.

Further, the formation of an annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending from the outer circumferential surface of the main body portion 841 in a circular plate shape on one plane along the rear side end of the abutting protruding portion 845 also includes the abutting protruding portion 846. Similar to the portion 845, portions that overlap with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction are omitted.

The omission of the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as a compensation for facilitating the design of the molding die, similar to the omission of the formation of the abutting protrusion 845 described above. The effect produced by the portion 846 is achieved by (the structure for supporting) the adjacent rotating arm member 850 even in locations where the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as correction of the displacement in the longitudinal position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the tip of the rotating arm member 850 Even if the arrangement is unintentionally shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the proximal rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is placed opposite to the annular plate portion 846 and can come into contact with the annular plate portion 846. By doing so, the front-back position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the contact.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted because no contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 occurs. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 of the rotary arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842, so that the distal end of the rotary arm member 850 is Even if the position shifts back and forth, the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842 and can come into contact with it, so that rotation can be achieved by the contact. The longitudinal position of arm member 850 can be corrected.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extending arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate-shaped portion 846. As a result, even though the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is partially omitted, the entire rotating arm member 850 can have the effect of correcting the front-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850.

103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. 103(a) and 103(b), the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 are illustrated in the combined state.

The state illustrated in FIG. 103(a) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has been rotated from the state in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed) Corresponding to this, the state illustrated in FIG. 103(b) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F is rotated from the state of FIG. 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (the switching rotation operation is completed state).

Comparing the combined state and the individually combined state (see FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)), it is found that the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed; The difference is that the curved portion 852c that abuts the protruding portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts the curved portion 854d is on the opposite side.

In order to accommodate this difference, the abutting protrusion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are , the intermediate arm member 850 has a line-symmetrical shape when viewed from the front with respect to the longitudinal line (the straight line connecting the rotation base end and the supported hole 854a) as a reference.

Further, in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c, the curved shape of the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar curved shapes. Thereby, the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship both in the individual combined state and in the series combined state.

Further, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured in a positional relationship in which it is sandwiched from both sides by the abutting protrusion portion 845 and the curved portion 854d. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be prevented from displacing in any direction of rotation, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and maintaining the combined state. It can be made easier.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost radial positions (an intermediate state between the individually combined state and the serially combined state), and FIG. 105 shows the serially combined state.

106 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104. As for the configuration of the third operating unit 800, the front and back arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is placed in front of the metal rod 832, the player will be able to see the metal rod 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal rod 832 can be lowered. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal rod 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. Thereby, it is possible to avoid conspicuousness of the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a production member that reflects light due to its glossy surface, so that the light production by the light emitted from the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 107) is reduced. The production effect can be improved. That is, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light production.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is placed in front of the metal rod 832, light entering the player's eyes may be blocked by the intermediate arm member 850, but in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is a metal rod. Since it is disposed on the back side of the intermediate arm member 832, it is possible to prevent light from being blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the appearance to be poor.

In this way, in the present embodiment, light can be reflected through the metal rod 832 in a state in the middle of the switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see FIGS. 104 and 107). , it is possible to expand the range of light production. That is, the illumination board 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged not only in the rear range of the light-transmitting decorative member 824 on which the illumination board 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also so as to protrude outward in the radial direction of the light-transmitting decorative member 824 when viewed from the front. Even in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal rod 832 is exposed and visible, the reflected light can be made visible to the player.

Note that, as a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a includes a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having an annular light diffusion shape formed on the inner peripheral surface. The light emitted from the inner light emitting part 823a can be irradiated onto the light diffusion shape part 824b, and the light diffusion shape part 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, the light diffusing shaped portion 824b is brightly visible in an annular shape not only in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 but also during the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is canceled. By doing so, it is possible to easily maintain the performance effect using the annular shape of the third motion unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the transparent decorative member 824 includes not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extended portion that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a when viewed from the front. 824c.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state and has a low function as a decorative portion, but it has the effect of hiding the mechanism part during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104. .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extending portion 824c is difficult to use for production, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 or the extending arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see FIG. 61). The size is large enough to cover the mechanical parts and hide them from view.

Since the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulging portion 824a but also to the front side of the extension portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen in the area where the mechanical part is shielded and hidden. The effect can be improved.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the vertical displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the lift arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to the present embodiment, the vertical displacement and rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 are configured to be executable independently; however, for example, due to the inertial load during the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800, There is a possibility that rotational displacement occurs in the third operating unit 800 in conjunction with this. In this case, the posture of the third operating unit 800 changes or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attraction force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, the performance effect may be reduced.

In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly the integral rotational operation) of the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to be executed simultaneously.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 during the vertical displacement can be shown to the player as a presentation operation, so that deterioration of the presentation effect can be prevented. Furthermore, while the integral rotation operation continues, a load continues to be applied in the direction of displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so it is important to note that the combined state of the third operating unit 800 is released. can be avoided.

Furthermore, even if control is not performed to simultaneously execute the vertical displacement and the rotational displacement, the posture of the third operation unit 800 can be adjusted in advance so that the rotational arm member 850 is not easily displaced by the vertical displacement. Control may be performed to adjust the orientation of the unit 800 in the rotational direction.

The fact that the detection manner of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotary member 840 by the detection sensor 813 changes (see FIG. 68) indicates that in this embodiment, the rotation manner of the inner rotary member 830 is performed as an integral rotation operation. means. Therefore, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are designed in association with each other based on this premise.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed while the attitude of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained (inner rotation member 830 and outer rotation member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid situations where this assumption may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, so that the outer rotating member The posture of 840 is maintained.

Therefore, for example, during execution of the switching rotation operation, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases, and the operational resistance between the inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 increases. If the resistance increases and exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, there is a possibility that the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 will work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linearly moving member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the displacement direction of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the translational member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of the metal rod 832, resistance to rotation of the metal rod 832 can be made less likely to occur, and the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, and rotation member 834 The resistance generated between the intermediate arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be suppressed to a low level.

In a state where the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end position (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is in the direction of the metal rod. Since it is along the rotational direction of the metal rod 832, it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which once the switching rotation operation is started, the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached, and the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 are at the radially outer end. When placed in position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870, 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate about the metal rod 832.

Due to the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth portions 834a and 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. It passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is easily displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by the relationship between the members and the drive control design. There is.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained and the arrangement of the detected part 844 does not change. It is impossible to judge.

For example, control to stop the drive motor 861 at the timing when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting in advance a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotation member 834, and intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the driving time is the same, and the There is a possibility that the drive will stop. In this case, the performance effect may be reduced.

On the other hand, the switching rotation operation is ended and the integral rotation operation is stopped due to the change in the detection mode of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813, rather than the control mode that stops the drive motor 861 at the timing when the combined state is reached. It may be determined that the process has started (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 may be controlled to be stopped after this determination. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation where the driving of the drive motor 861 is stopped in a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 have not yet reached the combined state after performing the switching rotation operation.

As described above, as drive control, the switching rotation operation is executed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800, but the integral rotation operation can be executed regardless of the state of the third operation unit 800. It is.

As the drive control, it is possible to execute the switching rotation operation regardless of the rotational direction arrangement of the third operation unit 800, so as described above with reference to FIG. can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state where the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but the state where the detected part 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be performed even from the

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is executed with the detected part 844 placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detected part 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed. Since the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the vehicle enters the vehicle, it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be executed during a drive period that is set in advance as a necessary and sufficient drive period for the switching rotation operation, or the detected part 844 may be The drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until it enters the detection groove.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation ends, the operation mode shifts to integral rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, It can be determined that 880 is in the combined state.

On the other hand, even though the drive motor 861 is driven from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation for a sufficient length of time for the detected part 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. First, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined based on the output of the detection sensor 813 that the third operation unit 800 is malfunctioning.

In the latter case, when the switching rotation operation is executed from any rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 and the continuous combined state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 Driving continues until section 844 enters.

In the unified state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is unlikely to differ even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the serially combined state, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, when performing control to return from the reversal performance to the normal performance as shown in FIG. 68, since the detected portion 844 has already been placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor The period until the output of 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period that allows the detected portion 844 disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 to retreat from the detection groove is sufficient, so the length required for control to return from the reversal performance to the normal performance is sufficient. can be minimized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 that starts the switching rotation operation for switching from the normal performance to the reverse performance is improved, and the return operation usually takes a long time. However, we aim to shorten the switching rotation operation from the reversal performance to the normal performance as a return operation.

In other words, a part of the return operation to restore the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 (rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) can be observed even if the rotational arrangement is different. By performing this in a series of combined states where the appearance is difficult to change, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the presentation effect of the third movement unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the remaining return operation.

A cross-sectional explanation will be given of the configuration commonly adopted by a plurality of operation units 600, 700, 800 among the operation units 600, 700, 800, including the reason for the difference in the manner of adoption.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will confirm the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly adopted in each operation unit 600, 700, and 800, and confirm the mode of adoption (number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the detected piece, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extension portion 634b is allowed to enter the detection groove. The detection device included in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). Regarding the plurality of displacement members, namely the rotation member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotation member 660, once the orientation of the rotation member 620 is determined, the arrangement and orientation of the other displacement members are determined. Because of this configuration, the arrangement and posture of a plurality of displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices installed.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operation unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 of the second operation unit 700, and allows the detected portion 735 to enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), and each corresponds to the production standby state, intermediate production state, and extended state of the second operation unit 700. do.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the performance standby state is necessary to determine the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the overhang state is necessary to determine whether the upward displacement end position has been reached, and also to determine the reversal operation of the vertical reversal production device 770 or positional deviation due to the influence of unintended loads. is required. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate presentation state is required not only to determine whether the vertical position has been reached in the intermediate presentation state, but also to determine positional deviation due to the influence of an unintended load. Hereinafter, the reversal operation and the influence of unintended loads will be explained in order.

First, the reversing operation will be explained. The second operation unit 700 is configured to be capable of vertically displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, as well as reversing the vertically reversing device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since there is a possibility that the up/down reversal performance device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the reversing operation, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, it is necessary to It is not possible to determine the positional shift in the vertical direction in the intermediate performance state, and there is a possibility that an appropriate performance operation cannot be performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it can be determined that the up/down reversal effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by inverting the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the extended state, and based on this determination result, the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be adjusted appropriately. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the correcting direction (so that it is in the overhanging state), the arrangement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 can be maintained appropriately.

In this embodiment, since the reversal operation is allowed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), the positional deviation during the reversal operation can be corrected by the gear cam. It is only necessary to rotate the member 734 toward the end of the operation, which is easy.

Next, the effects of unintended loads will be explained. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, the elevating plate member 740 is moved to a longitudinal position corresponding to the vertical position of the elevating plate member 740. The vertical displacement of the vertically reversing effect device 770 occurs based on the vertically moving plate member 740 (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

Therefore, as the up/down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front/rear direction due to the load applied to the gaming machine in the front/rear width direction, the vertical positions of the up/down reversal effect device 770 and the elevating/descending plate member 740 change, and accordingly, the gear cam The attitude of member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied to the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine include an impact load when a player hits the gaming machine, a load when opening and closing the front frame 14, and the like.

Since there is a possibility that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 may be displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, if only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, the tension It is not possible to determine the positional shift in the vertical direction in the extended state or the intermediate presentation state, and there is a possibility that the vertical reversal presentation device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate position.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the game machine in the front-rear width direction in the intermediate presentation state and the vertical positions of the elevating/reversing effect device 770 and the elevating/descending plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the change in the vertical position. , it can be determined that the up/down reversal performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in a direction to appropriately correct the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (so as to be in an intermediate performance state). By doing so, the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be maintained appropriately.

Note that if it is determined that the detected part 735 of the gear cam member 734 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected part 735 of the gear cam member 734 is disposed on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate production state, this implementation In this embodiment, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has come off, but the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in a direction that first displaces the presentation device 780 downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 collide.

In this embodiment, when the detected part 735 again enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state due to this drive, the displacement of the detected part 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to move upwardly. If it is determined that a load has occurred on the side where the load is caused, and the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

In addition, due to this drive, if the detected part 735 does not enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state but enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state, the detected part 735 due to an unintended load It was found that the displacement occurred on the side that caused the production device 780 to be displaced downward, and the drive was continued to cause the production device 780 to be displaced upward again, and at the time when the detected part 735 entered the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate production state. By stopping the drive, the effects caused by unintended loads can be offset.

Note that the detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so a plate with a width and length appropriate to the detection width of the detection sensor 713 is used. It is formed as a shaped part. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 can be increased.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the up-and-down reversing member 781 of the second operation unit 700, and an arcuate protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the up-and-down reversing member 781 (see FIG. 56), and the up-down reversing member 781 is in an erect vertically arranged state and an inverted vertically arranged state, respectively. and corresponds to.

The second operation unit 700 is arranged in pairs on the left and right when the vertically inverting member 781 is in an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) and an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)). The covering member 787 is brought into a combined state in close proximity.

For example, when employing only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the vertically erected state of the vertically reversible member 781), the attitude deviation of the vertically reversible member 781 from the erected vertically arranged state is Since this can be determined, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the positional deviation of the vertical inversion member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state may be affected by unintended loads, poor control, etc. Even if there is a change, the detection sensor 778d will not be able to determine the change in state, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not desirable in terms of performance.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d is provided corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the up-down reversing member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the up-down reversing member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the state is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and based on the determination result, the state can be changed to the combined state. By controlling the drive motor 782 to the returning side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state. Thereby, the performance effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

Note that the arc-shaped protruding portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not serve the structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so the width length is appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. It is formed as a plate-like part. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the up-down reversing member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and is configured such that the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (Fig. 60 reference). The third operation unit 800 uses one detection device to detect the attitude of the outer rotation member 840, and this single detection device detects the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotation member 840. It is used (combined) for determining the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 in the state where the rotation is performed (switching rotation operation).

Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so a plate with a width and length appropriate to the detection width of the detection sensor 813 is used. It is formed as a shaped part. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotary member 840, and the number of detection sensors 813 is as small as one, so it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that causes the combined state to be canceled when the outer rotary member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected portion 844 is not placed on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 can determine this. I can't.

Therefore, rather than determining the deviation from the combined state and then returning the decorative members 870 and 880 to the combined state at regular time intervals (individual combined state (Fig. 66(a) )), the drive motor rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise as seen from the front, and in the combined state (see FIG. 103(b), the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as seen from the front). It is considered preferable to control the motor 861 so that it rotates for a certain period of time (for example, for a short period of time).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at fixed time intervals. Therefore, it is possible to avoid maintaining the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As described above, in the second operating unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. Although similar technology is adopted as shown in FIG.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws disposed on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a, which is the axis of rotation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 toward and away from each other can be reduced. As a result, the operating resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of its operation can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 disposed in the decorative member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is the same as that of the five rotation axes of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree of load applied to the decorative members 870, 880 in the direction of rotational movement can be reduced by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, making it easier to avoid malfunctions in which the decorative members 870, 880 wobble in the direction of rotational movement due to the magnetic force. be able to.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, a display on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 and an effect that allows the operation units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed integrally will be explained.

In the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to appear to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhanging decorative part 652b is placed near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the display area and the overhanging decorative part 652b are grouped together. It can be made easier to see as a display effect.

In the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is arranged at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is placed near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the display area and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 can be clearly identified. It can be easily recognized as a unified display effect.

In the third operation unit 800, each of the first covered parts 875 that are visible to the player in the individually combined state has a different decoration, and in the extended state, the third covering part 875 surrounds the first covered parts 875 in a front view. A display area of the symbol display device 81 is arranged. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covering part 875 is arranged in a range close to the first covering part 875 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the display area and the first covering part 875 can be displayed. The covering portion 875 can be easily recognized as a group of display effects.

In addition, if the third operation unit 800 is drive-controlled so as to rotate integrally, it becomes possible to perform a roulette-like motion effect in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. By moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covering part 875 in a range close to the first covering part 875 in the display area of the symbol display device 81, the display area and the first covering part 875 can be separated from each other. It can be easily recognized as a unified display effect.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but in the distribution device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path configuration part 2334 has a variable internal shape. Equipped with Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

When explaining the first flow path configuration section 2334 as a substitute for the first flow path configuration section 334 in the first embodiment, a configuration disposed on the right side will be illustrated and explained, but a configuration disposed on the left side will be explained. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration section 2334. Alternatively, the left and right sides may have different configurations, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path configuration part 2334, and the other side is the first flow path configuration part 334.

FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path forming part 2334 of the sorting device 2300 has a through hole 2410 bored in the front and back direction at the lower part of the curved protrusion 334b, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 that is guided so as to be displaceable, and a solenoid 2430 that is disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side of the slide member 2420 protrudes inward (upper side) than the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the ball can roll, and the rear side In the arrangement RP, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 is configured so as not to protrude (recess) inside (upper side) than the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is placed on the front side FP, the ball comes into contact with the upper side of the slide member 2420, and when the slide member 2420 is placed on the rear side RP, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not come into contact with each other.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 occurs while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the influence on the downward flow of the ball can be suppressed to a small level.

Since the downward direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally forward and downward, and the sliding direction of the slide member 2420 is the forward and backward direction, the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the downward direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 affects the strength of the rotation of the ball.

Since the ball rolls with the bottom surface 2334c facing forward, rotation occurs in a direction in which the ball rolls forward in the direction of travel (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slid from the front side FP to the rear side RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the de-energized state (see FIG. 108), the upper surface of the slide member 2420 is rotated. A backward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from the energized state to the de-energized state (see FIG. 108) and the slide member 2420 is slid from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, the bottom surface 2334b A forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the rolling ball via the upper surface of the slide member 2420. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is reduced, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load in the direction of pushing the ball upward is generated. occurs. Therefore, the velocity in the vertical direction of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, so that the downward speed of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by performing control to cause the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the flow of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300 is reduced. The speed can be made variable. Thereby, the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be variably controlled.

In this embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged at the rear of the second flow path forming part 335, it is difficult for the player to understand how the ball is being influenced by the slide member 2420. be able to.

That is, since the slide member 2420 and the ball come into contact with each other before the ball is introduced into the second channel forming portion 335 where it is easy for the player to see and attract attention, rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how the player moves or displaces the player in the vertical direction. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the ball is disposed above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, while the ball is placed above the bottom surface 2334c before and after the slide member 2420 is displaced (when stopped). A contact load with the slide member 2420 is not applied to the ball passing through.

Therefore, the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in operation, and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped, have different falling modes (rotation, change in rotation, falling speed). , flow velocity change, etc.) can be made different.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the case where the definite change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been explained, but in the distribution device 3300 of the third embodiment, the definite change detection sensor SE11 is arranged as the normal detection sensor. By moving to the rear side of SE12, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged in front and behind. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

An example of changing the arrangement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 will be explained on the right side of the center of the left and right sides, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right sides can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the definite change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side on the left and right as in the first embodiment, and the definite change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right of the sorting device 3300. The probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged so that they are different from each other, or on the left side, they may be arranged in front and back as described in detail below. may be configured so that they are symmetrical.

109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is placed in the front position, and in FIG. 109(b), the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. A state in which the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after flowing through the third flow path forming portion 336 is illustrated with imaginary lines. In this manner, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the sorting device 3300 includes a rear frame-shaped portion 3332 that partitions the ball guide path to the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. The ball is opened from the left side so that it can receive a ball.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position. The rear side position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is located between the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear frame-shaped portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the definite change detection sensor SE11. The rear inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed in the front side surface 376a is set at a position where they are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is disposed slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the ball passing through the third flow path forming part 336 will be on the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. While in contact with each other, the ball flows to the right side and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. However, if the slide displacement member 3370 is located at the rear position, the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 will pass through the slide displacement member 3370. It can be configured so that it flows to the right while contacting the front side surface 376a and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

That is, the downstream path of the ball that passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the downstream path of the ball that passes through the variable detection sensor SE11 are both downstream paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. Consists of. The only difference is the front and rear positions that flow to the right.

Therefore, from the perspective of the player viewing the third flow path forming portion 336 from the front side, it can be difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c that extend from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side, and an upper front protrusion portion 3376b that is integrally formed with the upper protrusion portion 376. An upper horizontal protrusion 3376c is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376.

The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. It is configured to be able to penetrate through the front side of the third flow path forming section 336 and be accommodated on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming section 336.

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 and does not come into contact with the ball, and the slide displacement member 3370 When the ball guide portion 3371c is disposed at the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed across the longitudinal gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide part 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, the lower left and right parts of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide part 3371c, and the ball can be slid and displaced. It can be bridged up to member 3370.

Thereby, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can easily avoid misguidance of the falling ball.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming part 336 is placed on the top surface of the rod-shaped guide part 3371c that is flush with the top surface of the ball guide part 371b, so that the ball and the ball guide part 371b can be prevented from colliding head-on in the longitudinal direction. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c prevents the ball from colliding head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backwards, or preventing the ball from being caught between the front side of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side of the discharge hole 337. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the operation becomes defective.

The upper front protrusion 3376b has a similar shape to the longitudinal long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, but has a relative position similar to the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. This is a shaped portion that is integrally formed with the upper protruding portion 376 in the positional relationship.

The upper horizontal protrusion 3376c has a similar shape to the left and right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, but has the same relative position at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. This is a shaped portion that is integrally formed with the upper front protruding portion 3376b in the positional relationship.

As a result, the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper lateral protruding portion 3376c act on the ball they are in contact with, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370, as an effect on the ball flowing down near the upper protruding portion 376. arise.

In other words, unlike when the front-rear elongated protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixedly arranged, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, the protrusion is It is possible to eliminate the action of the portions 3376b and 3376c that urges the ball that has reached the front position of the upper protruding portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the case where the definite change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been explained, but in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the regular detection sensor SE12 is arranged as the definite change detection sensor By moving to the rear side of SE11, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged in front and behind. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

110(a) and 110(b) schematically show the downstream configuration of the third flow path configuration section 336 in the fourth embodiment, the third flow path configuration section 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the normal detection FIG. 4 is a schematic top view of sensor SE12 and slide displacement member 4370.

FIG. 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path configuration portion 336, the definite change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110(a). b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming portion 336, the definite change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. 110(b). In FIG. 111(b), illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for clarity.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the definite variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that a ball cannot pass through, and open the other to allow the passage of the ball. It includes a front slide member 4371 that slides left and right, and a rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to the left and right by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when the state changes from the front open state shown in FIGS. 110(a) and 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 moves to the left. The rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged to cover above the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in the same shape as the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17). , and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming part 336, and is formed as an inclined plane having the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, thereby being swept downward (lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front slide member 4371 comes into contact with the ball at different locations and changes its state so that it guides (flows) the ball in different directions. be done.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 placed over the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in the same shape as the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 17). and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from a shape that is the reverse of the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper side surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4377, receives a load, and is swept downward.

Therefore, when the rear slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the rear slide member 4375 comes into contact with the ball at different locations, and the state changes so that it guides (flows) the ball in different directions. configured.

With this configuration, a situation may arise in which the ball that has passed backwards above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 returns above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 again and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve attention to the ball that has passed through the flow path forming section 336.

For example, a case where the solenoid is driven to change its state from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward through the upper surface 4372a is assumed to return to the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11 again. Ru. In this case, the ball rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, flows backward toward the near side along the slope of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, the ball is configured to be able to return to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow path forming section 336 matches the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370. Therefore, compared to a game machine configured such that a ball that has passed above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to the downstream side does not pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration section 336 is It is possible to improve attention to the driving timing of the ball and the slide displacement member 4370.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the spherical flow path is common up to the third flow path configuration part 336, and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path configuration part 336, but in the fifth embodiment In the sorting device 5300 of this embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed on the upstream side of the third flow path forming section 336, and the flow path of the sphere changes on the upstream side of the third flow path forming section 336. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

112(a) and 112(b) are partial sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line in FIG. 15. In FIG. 112(a), a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position and the ball is guided to the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370 is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the ball is placed at the left side position and the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after flowing through the first flow path forming part 334 is illustrated with imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and is provided with a thin plate portion 5371 that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball and protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371. An upper protrusion 5376 is provided.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed to be thin enough to allow a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 to ride on it. Since the left side surface 5376a of the upper protruding portion 5376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with a concave side toward the flow path, the flowing ball can be smoothly directed rearward.

According to the present embodiment, like the sorting device 5300, the longitudinal width of the downward path of the ball is formed to be long, and the visibility of the ball flowing down on the front side is higher than that of the ball flowing down the rear side. While employing this configuration, the slide displacement member 5370 is placed on the near side where the visibility of the ball is high, so that it is possible for the player to easily determine the falling manner (flowing path) of the ball.

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that a ball can enter. On the other hand, the ball flowing down the upstream side of the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is flowing toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path forming part 334.

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path forming part 334, the opposite velocity to the rear side is difficult to occur, so the configuration is such that the ball is unlikely to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, the provision of a member for blocking the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is intentionally omitted, thereby reducing the member cost.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right channels are separated by the partition plate section 338 and the channels do not merge with each other. 336 is connected to a merging channel 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the left curved protrusion 334b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path forming parts 334 to 336, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a space on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b for one ball. The passage 6341 is connected to the third passage forming part 336 as the right passage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path meet at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, so that the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 includes a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor section 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a higher position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming section 336. This makes it possible to create a difference in height between the ball flowing into the connection point JP1 from the merging channel 6341 and the ball flowing through the right channel and flowing down the third channel forming section 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow that occurs when the two collide with each other.

Due to the contact between the balls at the connection point JP1, the falling of the balls can be delayed compared to the case where the balls do not come into contact with each other. Thereby, the time required for the ball to reach the branch point BP1 after passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) can be changed depending on whether contact occurs between the balls or not.

The operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b regardless of the manner in which the ball enters, so by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370 There is a possibility that the ball can reach the branch point BP1 when 370 is in a different arrangement.

The premise of the contact between the balls is that the balls merge, and that there are balls flowing down the merge channel 6341. If the player wants to cause the balls to come into contact with each other, he/she can play the game by adjusting the firing intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see FIG. 74), respectively. If you want to avoid contact with the ball, you can play the game by adjusting the firing strength so that the ball enters only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (right side).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the ball launch intensity is related to whether or not the balls are in contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1. , which directly affects the interests of players. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch intensity.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a continuous ball. That is, the two balls that have contacted each other at the connection point JP1 can be caused to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being arranged close to each other.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path configured by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 has been described, but in the distribution device 7300 of the seventh embodiment, the first The ball is configured to be able to flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 114 is a front perspective view of a sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in FIG. 114. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball opening formed at approximately the center position on the left and right, in addition to the ball passing hole 163b, as a path through which the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. A passage hole 7163b is provided.

The ball passage hole 7163b is similar to the detection sensor SE1 used to detect the entry of balls into the variable prize winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state by determining whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the variable winning device 65. It is formed as a sphere passage opening of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a cylindrical flow path 7164 extending in a downwardly inclined direction toward the rear and having a rectangular cylindrical cross section is provided. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed sufficiently large so that a ball can flow down the inside thereof, and its end portion extends to the upper side of the front side of the branch point BP1. That is, the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 7163b flows down inside the cylindrical channel 7164 and is configured to be able to reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path components 334 to 336, and 334 is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through.

Therefore, for example, when the distribution device 7300 is driven and controlled according to the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 as described above. A ball that can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 returns to the front position, whereas a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b and flowed down the cylindrical channel 7164 can reach the slide displacement member 370. There is a possibility that the branch point BP1 is reached while the vehicle is located at the rear position.

In particular, the ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state tends to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, a certain variation is detected depending on whether the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. It can be configured such that whether or not a ball passes through the sensor SE11 changes. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the falling state of the ball inside the specific winning hole 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed from a general direction during a game, the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334 to 336 is reduced due to the cylindrical flow path 7164. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 has been devised so that this can be avoided.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while maintaining high visibility of the branching point BP1, by increasing the number of channels through which the ball is guided to the branching point BP1, the ball reaches the branching point BP1. The types of required time lengths can be increased, and the player's attention to the specific winning hole 65a can be improved.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b of the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 are connected at one point, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position, and the direction of displacement of the axis O1 is In the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connection position, and the direction of displacement is changed. The direction of displacement of O1 is switched. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide slot 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice in the left and right directions below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately arcuate shape), and the first curved portion 8616b. A second curved part 8616c is connected to the lower end of the second curved part 8616b and is formed on a curve (approximately arcuate shape) whose center of curvature radius is left and right opposite to that of the first curved part 8616b.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 is Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In addition, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the first curved part 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved part 8616b and the second curved part 8616c, the direction of displacement of the axis O1 can be switched. It is possible to reduce (reduce) the displacement speed of the axis O1.

In this way, it is possible to configure a plurality of midway positions where it is easy to stop the axis O1, so that the axis O1 can be stopped midway and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43), which is stopped midway, can be stopped. It is possible to increase the types (variations) of postures.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path, but in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is configured in a straight line. The first path includes a shaped portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 117 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide slot 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 includes a linear portion 616a and a curved portion 616b in the same way as the guide elongated hole 616 of the first embodiment. It includes an angle maintaining portion 9616c extending obliquely to the right from the connection point, and a connecting portion 9616d extending from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and connected to an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b. .

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is configured to rotate the rotating member 620 toward the tilting side from the state where the axis O1 is disposed at the connection point between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). It is formed in the same direction as the displacement locus of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained.

In this way, since the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the posture in the rotation direction of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is such that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 rotates, the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 that rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As for the rotation mode, it is possible to maintain the posture in which the third presentation surface 661c faces the front over the shape growth (formation angle width) of the angle maintenance portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, a change in angle θ due to the rotation of the rotation member 620 is allowed, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation member 620. .

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged on the curved part 616b and the angle when the axis O1 is arranged on the connecting part 9616d are different. Since the magnitude of θ is different, by making the path along which the axis O1 is displaced different on the left and right sides, the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotation member 620 can be made different.

Furthermore, regardless of whether the axis O1 is displaced on the left or right side, the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end are one type, so the axis The posture of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is placed at the upper end or lower end of the movable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be generated in multiple types. can.

The guide elongated hole 9616 is only configured with a plurality of paths, and is not provided with a mechanism that limits the path through which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions due to defects in the path-limiting mechanism, and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, a case where the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when displacing the axis O1 along the left path (straight portion 616a and curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is activated so that the rotational displacement of the rotation member 620 does not stop midway. Drive control.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616 as it is.

Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the rotating member 620 The drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is controlled to stop or decelerate halfway, and then the drive motor 631 is controlled to be driven in the same direction again.

In this case, since the inertia of displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a decreases, the selection of whether the axis O1 is displaced along the left path or the right path is less likely to result in displacement resistance. A side is chosen.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so that the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, and the intermediate gear 644 Also, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the downstream member. That is, since the displacement resistance is reduced accordingly, the axis O1 can be moved toward the angle maintaining portion 9616b.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is controlled to be selected depending on whether or not the drive motor 631 is stopped midway. be able to.

Note that when the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonally upper right direction, so that a situation in which the axis O1 is displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d is unlikely to occur. , the axis O1 can be upwardly displaced along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connecting portion between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at a midway position of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

Therefore, in a state where the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (springing back) along the circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the balls once flow down to the front side by the sorting device 300 and then flow down to the rear, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by forming a plurality of path bends or by forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a part that flows down toward the front side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the falling of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used is fine. For example, it may be configured with an inclined planar shape, or may be formed with a large number of small protrusions protruding from the planar surface, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case is explained in which the ball flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right center portions of the specific prize opening 65a, and the ball may be formed to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one ball at a time, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a as a group, the ball can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning a prize opening 65a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming section 335. Furthermore, in this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or immediately after flowing down in the front-rear direction (flowing down towards the near side). Branching to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may also occur.

In the first embodiment described above, the channel directions and inclinations of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of "laying down" that is routinely performed.

Laying refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 not in a vertical position but in a tilted state in the front-back direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a position where it is tilted backwards by approximately one degree. Compared to the explanation of the above-mentioned sorting device 300 alone (state without aging), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-rear direction The meaning of the slope of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is downwardly inclined by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although they are designed to be inclined, when considering the installation angle, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path that slopes downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly different in the second flow path configuration section 335. becomes smaller. Therefore, since the speed of the ball flowing down in the left and right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than passing through the third flow path forming part 336. It can be passed between.

In this way, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the rest of the Pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming part 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (approximately 1 degree), the direction of flow of the ball in the flow path forming parts 334, 336 will change depending on the quality of bending (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the tilt angle.

In addition, in a configuration in which the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front and back direction, and the flow path is visible, slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the flow path may cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be ascertained. If you really want to understand the degree of aging, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured to be easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are arranged around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "staleness" cannot be ascertained from the slight difference in the velocity of the ball. 162 are arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side to reduce visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made poor except from the normal player's line of sight (in the range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 to determine the degree of "slumber" of the Pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slope of the first flow path forming part 334 is larger than the slope of the third flow path forming part 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this slope relationship may be reversed, or the slopes may be configured with the same slope.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

Furthermore, although the flow path is configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or may be bent at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Additionally, crunes may be employed as each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

Although the first embodiment described above is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is 0.3 seconds, the design is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed such that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is transferred to the ball on the downstream side. In this case, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the balls flowing down.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions are provided that are elongated and protrude alternately from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the downward direction of the game ball, and the protrusions collide with the game balls. It may also be configured to slow down the ball. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

Note that the deceleration protrusions may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by forming a protrusion only in the third flow path configuration part 336 without forming a protrusion in the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335, the third flow path configuration part 336 It is possible to configure the ball to flow slowly down the third flow path forming part 336 while allowing the ball to reach the point quickly.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

In the case of a protrusion from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer walls toward the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side but toward the partition plate section 338 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding upward from the bottom, the protrusion itself may function as a cover for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the height and position of the protrusion in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

Note that the protrusion may be formed to be movable in and out. In this case, it may be possible to stop the ball from flowing down in the extended state and to resume the ball's flow when the ball is in the sunken state.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described where the user is blindfolded by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be hidden by the decorative member. This decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of the ball.

Furthermore, when the ball is used to blind the user, the ball is not limited to being placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is disposed on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the ball is disposed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If this is done, a blinding function can be created.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be placed behind the gaming area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning hole 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the channel forming portions 334 to 336 are formed from linear channels capable of guiding balls one by one, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path with multiple branches, or the flow path width may be large or small, and in areas where the flow path width is large, balls may easily accumulate. may be configured.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a blinding effect is produced by the ball heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be hidden by the discharge path and a ball disposed in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path configuration section 334 and flows to the second flow path configuration section 335 side (near side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-like distribution mechanism that distributes the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path configuration part 335, so that some of the balls are sorted. The balls may flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device so as to operate in a constant manner from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power on of the Pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of ball entering changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball enters exceeding the count number (10 pieces/round) (excess winning), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side. It's okay. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second channel forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of paid out excess prize balls, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

For example, in a configuration where the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full) and the ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the second channel forming part 335 side. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

When the displacement is performed by the weight of the balls, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or a different action may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning hole 65a, The balls may also flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. Also, the reverse is also possible.

Further, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the gaming area. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning hole 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or when viewed from the front. It may be configured to be placed on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 may be arranged in such a manner that the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In the first embodiment described above, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be caused to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows to follow the leading ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, if the trailing ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front ball, the player can set the timing at which the flow of the front ball changes toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 (downward) to the trailing ball. It is hidden and cannot be seen. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball does not enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability variation state can be made similar to maintain the player's sense of expectation. In a gaming machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 and each of the protrusions 317 to 319 are formed separately, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the respective protrusions 317 to 319 may be configured to protrude from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as the operation pattern Y in which the possibility of being hidden by a ball is taken into account, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be incorporated to cause the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide elongated hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed using magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, a plurality of positions can be formed where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ while the rotating member 620 is rotating. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape that allows the supported member 640 to be guided so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the guide slot 616 is fixed, but the guide hole 616 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is changed by a predetermined switching means (for example, another drive device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide elongated hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be able to change shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 and the first presentation surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and to the left, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured such that the performance surface is directed forward and diagonally to the right when it is placed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when it is placed on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The display surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) in the front direction.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement, but the structure is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member functions favorably to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the active side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.) limited to. On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that, irrespective of this favorable effect, a linear sliding member may be connected to the active side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and the three sides intersecting at right angles are decorated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop controllable in a posture with each side facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second operating unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is disposed near the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with a magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force It may be arranged so that this is more likely to occur in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when using the coil spring CS2, the biasing force is not limited to one that is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured so that the biasing force is generated in response to the expansion displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of using the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outwards. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 commonly use the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in the shape of a single stroke, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, depending on the design of the groove, the rotating member The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

In the first embodiment described above, a case will be described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has switched to the integral rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from a state in which the detected part 844 is placed on the detection sensor 813. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 when the detected part 844 is not placed on the detection sensor 813, detecting that the detected part 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 can prevent the switching rotation operation from occurring. It may be determined that the operation has switched to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing the torque limiter 866, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so a torque limiter is better at reducing displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plating portion 871a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is placed on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (on the inner diameter side of the circle), so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833, but during the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 When the metal rod 833 is placed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle), the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle) is exposed, making it possible to reflect the light LD1. It is.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downwardly to the left and right inside, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured to be downwardly inclined toward the left-right inner side. It's okay. The former can reduce the force of the ball toward the second flow path forming part 335 compared to the latter.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path forming part 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be configured to be downwardly inclined toward the rear. It may be configured as follows. The former can reduce the force of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 compared to the latter.

Moreover, although the case has been described in which the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 slopes downwardly inward in the left-right direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction. In this case, since the degree to which the ball is urged toward the partition plate portion 338 side is reduced, the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or rubbing with the ball can be maintained at a low level.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the locus of the ball passing through the branch point (configured by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the bulb passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the back side. A state in which the light does not reach the light diffusion processed surface 333b (dark state) can be achieved.

That is, while the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d continues, the falling state of the ball at the branch point and the light diffusion processed surface 333b (and the light diffusion processed surface that is illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processed surface 333b) 314c, 340) can be associated with each other. Since each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) from the player's perspective than the ball, the player can easily understand the manner in which the ball flows down at the branch point. .

In the first embodiment, the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 is during a jackpot game, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emission may be controlled due to the detection of winnings in the winning holes 63, 64, 140, etc., or the light emission may be controlled due to the input operation of the frame button 22. Alternatively, the light may be emitted due to winnings exceeding the specified number (the number of winnings that defines the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of pending changes based on the number of balls entered in the winning slots 64, 140). It may also be controlled.

In the first embodiment, if the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, so the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is checked. Although the case has been described in which the quality of the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the movement of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 deviates due to repeated operations or the influence of some external force, although this did not occur during the manufacturing stage, the slide displacement member 370 will operate to prevent the occurrence of the deviation. It can be determined based on the defect.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is a linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotating motion (e.g., roulette style), or a shaped part (e.g., a funnel-shaped croon) may be provided to make the ball flow irregularly down, so that the ball can flow down in multiple directions. good.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is employed as a device for switching whether the ball passes through either the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning hole (winning hole 64, 140), it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning hole 65a, or it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning hole (winning hole 64, 140), or it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning hole 65a, or it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning hole (winning hole 64, 140), or it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning hole 65a, or it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning hole (winning hole 64, 140). Alternatively, it may be employed as a device for guiding a ball to a winning area.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sorting device 300 is placed at the lower corner of the gaming area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed at the upper corner of the gaming area (for example, above the center frame 86), or at the left and right corners (left and right outside the left and right edges of the center frame 86). Alternatively, it may be placed at the center side of the gaming area. For example, when the distribution device 300 is placed at the upper corner of the gaming area, the player's line of sight when looking at the distribution device 300 is inclined diagonally upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere can be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured so that the front and back inclinations are reversed, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the shape of the window portion 162d is designed based on the shape of the flow path forming portions 335, 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the shape may be such that (only) the slide displacement member 370 is visible from the player's perspective (obliquely downward view), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Further, the slide displacement member 370 may have a shape that is visible at either the front position or the rear position and invisible at the other position.

In addition, in the first embodiment, by configuring the channel forming parts 334 to 336 as a pair of left and right channels and preventing them from merging, it is possible to reduce the number of balls entering one channel (by dispersing the entering balls). The slide displacement member 370 can switch between the paths of the balls that have passed through the respective channels, while producing an effect that can easily avoid clogging of the balls.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d is designed so that only one of the left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper protruding portion 376) can be seen and the other cannot. It can also be a shape. In this case, since the player can predict the falling path of the ball on the side that is no longer visible, the player's interest can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide section 371b is the backward direction (the forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming section 336). We have explained the case where the forward rotation of the ball is suppressed by sliding, and the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before it falls can be suppressed to make it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which a ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be the forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, by displacing the ball guide portion 371b in the forward direction and causing the ball guide portion 371b to enter the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336, the definite change detection sensor SE11 is configured to be openable. The upper protruding portion 376 is constructed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to protrude toward the branch point BP1 when a ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide part 371b is displaced to a state where no ball is placed on the ball guide part 371b, the upper protruding part 376 is displaced in the front and back opposite direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide part 371b, and the accurate change detection sensor SE11 All you have to do is secure a passage for the ball.

In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction can be increased by the sliding movement of the ball guide portion 371b with the ball during the sliding displacement, so the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before falling is increased, and the ball It is possible to make it appear to the player that the object has fallen instantly (falling smoothly).

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is controlled by the extending portion 634b being arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertia load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is turned off. Although the control mode is such that the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off, the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, the drive motor 631 is rotated weakly for a short period of time, and then stopped. Also good. Thereby, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (the position in the performance standby state).

In the first embodiment described above, in the second operating unit 700, the grooves of the front upper inclined parts 714, 751 and the receiving inclined part 762 are formed from straight inclined grooves, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, by forming a groove with a partial curve that curves forward on the lower end side, the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be combined with vertical sliding displacement, front-back sliding displacement, and front-back posture displacement. It can be a displacement mode.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as the shape of the groove of the front upper inclined parts 714, 751 and the receiving inclined part 762. For example, it may have a dogleg shape (or an inverted dogleg shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or it may have an S-curved shape.

In the first embodiment, in the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but the case is not limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used to avoid collision between the members by setting the number of gears of the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785.

In the first embodiment described above, a case will be described in which, in the second operation unit 700, the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is arranged at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the presentation device 780 in the extended state as the upper end position. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the presentation device 780, the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the elevating plate member 740 and the right side of the elevating plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to secure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720. Thereby, the elevating plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the third operating unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a part that is visually recognized by the player without changing its shape, regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in the individually combined state or in the serially combined state. Also, in both the series combined state, the bulging part 824a is made visible to the player as a part (center part), so that the bulging part 824a, the first covering part 875, and the second covering part 885 are mutually visible. Although a case has been described in which the shape is designed to reduce the sense of discomfort, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (eg, a segment display device or a liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in such a position that a display section is disposed in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging part 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness and color) of the light from the inner light emitting part 823a, the object visually recognized by the bulging part 824a is changed in the display mode of the display part. Since it can be changed by switching, the degree of freedom in production can be improved.

Further, for example, the design of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be changed so that the shape of the covered portions 875, 885 is extended toward the center side of the circular shape in the combined state. The extended portion may cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the series combined state, the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player, so that the bulging portion 824a, the first covered portion 875, and the second covered portion The degree of restriction on the degree of freedom in designing the portion 885 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are attracted by magnetic force in the third operation unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load due to the engagement of the concave and convex portions, or the combined state may be maintained by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, by adopting an operation mode that increases momentum, it is possible to realize the switching rotation operation even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is greater than or equal to the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an operation mode that increases momentum, for example, rotation control in the opposite direction may be performed as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, it is possible to apply a reaction to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and to generate a load in the direction of releasing the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction due to magnetic force.

In the first embodiment, as a device for suppressing wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, a case has been described in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be displaced in the radial direction before the reversal operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832 serving as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state is Even if a reversal operation occurs before the directional displacement, the magnetic force generated between the plurality of (five) decorative members 870, 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the wobbling that occurs in the third operation unit 800 during the switching rotation operation is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are reversed by 180 degrees, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that they are combined again by a 120 degree reversal operation. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, while the sides of the decorative members 870 and 880 that are visible when viewed from the front are the same, the angles at which the covering parts 875 and 885 are visible are made different (for example, before the operation, the sides facing right are 60 It is possible to perform a motion effect in which the robot turns 60 degrees to the left after the motion.

In addition, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the lengths to be different from each other, or by configuring the formation range and shape of the bevel teeth portions 854c to be different from each other, it is possible to The decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree reversal operation and the decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree reversal operation may coexist. For example, among the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 is configured to be reversed by 120 degrees by the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decoration members 870, 880 are configured to be rotated by the switching rotation operation. It may be configured to be reversed by 180 degrees.

Note that the angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It may be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, or it may be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair of left and right positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 at asymmetric positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged in symmetrical positions, the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or the outer rotating member 840 may rotate They may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the axis.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 have a common shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by changing the shape of the supported hole 854a and guide hole 854b in which the linear motion member 833 that slides along the metal rod 832 is disposed, the timing at which the linear motion member 833 starts sliding along the metal rod 832 is adjusted. 833 may be made different from each other.

For example, by changing the design so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and by mixing the intermediate arm member 850 with a corresponding design change in the shape of the guide hole 854b, it is possible to A difference can be provided in the timing at which the displacement of the member 833 starts.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear motion member 833, to have different timings of displacement outward in the radial direction from the combined state. Therefore, the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, since the load for removing the suction can be reduced, the driving force required of the drive motor 862 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

Note that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 does not need to occur every time. For example, a displacement mode that causes displacement in the shearing direction occurs when a switching rotation operation is executed from a combined state (outward path), but it is configured so that it does not occur when the switching rotation operation leads to a combined state (return path). It's okay.

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is changed from a combined state (a state in which the rotating tip is arranged on the rotation axis side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position. The manner in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates is different from the manner in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost radial position to the combined state. By configuring this, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 was explained for each operation unit 600, 700, 800, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, or instead of three detection sensors 713, two detection sensors KS1 may be arranged. The following or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. An example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where the extending portion 634b of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state or the extended state can be detected.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, or instead of one detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 may be arranged at positions where the detected portion 844 can be detected. It may be configured so that As for the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state of the third operation unit 800 can be arranged in five ways (rotation). The determination can be made in five different ways depending on the direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the ball continues to roll regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 in the front side arrangement FP may be configured to have a length equivalent to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is placed in the front side FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface part 314, so that the deceleration effect of the ball is strengthened. , it is possible to make it easier for balls to accumulate.

In the second embodiment, it is not described that a protrusion is formed inside the first flow path forming part 2334, but a protrusion for decelerating the ball is provided in the first flow path forming part 2334. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be determined by adjusting the height of the protrusion so that it comes into contact with either the ball riding on the slide member 2420 at the front position FP or the ball riding on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP. , the height may be set so that it does not come into contact with the other. In this case, the deceleration effect by the protrusions can be produced either when the slide member 2420 is in the front side arrangement FP or the rear side arrangement BP state.

In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 has been described in which the thin plate portion 371, the upper front protruding portion 3376b, and the upper lateral protruding portion 3376c are integrally formed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, in accordance with the timing when the thin plate part 371 is placed in the front position and the rear position, the upper front protruding part 3376b and the upper lateral protruding part 3376c as separate members move up and down in the vertical direction and abut the ball. and a state of no contact.

Note that the front and back arrangement of the definite change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited in any way, but it is better to place the definite change detection sensor SE11 on the rear side as in this embodiment, since it is easier to avoid errors in the definite change detection sensor SE11. This can make it easier to avoid winning.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact part 4373, and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact part 4377 are integrally formed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these may be configured as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (interlocked) at the same timing. Note that it may be configured to slide in the front-rear direction.

In the fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371 and 4375 slide at the timing when the ball passes backward through the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front side due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a. , but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be provided behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it can be configured such that only the ball that was riding on the slide plate 4372 when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state is guided by the additional ball entry detection sensor. Benefits that the player obtains when the ball enters the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, benefits that are greater than the rights obtained by the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11, such as winning multiple jackpots or higher rankings) (e.g., acquisition of the right to transition to a variable probability state) is larger, the more attention can be paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming part 336.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow path from the raised bed section 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, near the raised floor portion 6342, the connection point JP1 side may be configured as a curved flow path facing rearward. As a result, both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor part 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path forming part 335 can have backward velocity components, and these Collision can prevent backflow from occurring.

Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the left-right center position of the sorting device 6300. Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured so that the front and back inclinations are reversed, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily create a situation in which the balls gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down toward the front, and it is possible to improve attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is configured as a branched slot, and where the axis O1 passes through the guide slot 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be changed. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as an elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as elongated holes. It may be configured such that the case where the elongated hole is closed and the case where the elongated hole is closed are alternately switched. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along a wrong path, and therefore it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the elongated guide hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the guide slot 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be restricted by the switching valve, so it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along the wrong path. It is possible to prevent the member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 194. FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and FIG. 119 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. In addition, regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, each configuration used in each of the embodiments described above is used as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1 described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. It includes an inner frame 12 formed into a shape and supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 118) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 135) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a. Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, or changing the content of the super reach performance. Be manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Various performances such as variable performances and reach performances that are performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the variation effect is not being performed or during high-speed variation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage changes from "sandy beach stage" to "deep sea stage". ” → “Sandy Beach Stage” → ... will be changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach effect is to be developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect, a selection screen for the performance mode of the super reach effect is displayed during the normal reach effect. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the performance at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate stamp etc. affixed to the pachinko machine 10 (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, a ball firing unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the operation, a push-button stop switch 51b that stops firing the ball while the button is pressed, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 based on a change in electrical resistance. (not shown) is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at a lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, and is operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, specifically, the configuration necessary for explaining this control example will be mainly explained. In addition to the configurations whose detailed explanations have been omitted in FIG. 2 described above, the configurations already described in FIG. 2 described above will also be described again for convenience of explanation. Note that even in parts that are not explained with reference to FIG. 118, the same elements as those in the configuration of FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling a ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a, a variable prize winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 118.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (area flowing downstream).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 135) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 118) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 118) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn; If the symbol passes, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. There are two types of special symbols: a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and the first special symbol is drawn by lottery when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is executed, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed for the ball entering the second ball entry port 640. That is, in this control example, a plurality of special symbol drawings with different execution timings are configured to be executable.

In the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not. A determination is made as to whether or not it is correct, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special winning slot 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won a prize). ) is released, and the release is repeated 10 times (10 rounds). When a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls, so by entering a large number of balls into the specific winning opening 65a, a larger amount than usual will be awarded. The prize ball will be paid out. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols: "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", and "Jackpot D", and after the jackpot game state ends, the added value after the jackpot game ends. As a result, gaming value (gaming value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player.

Furthermore, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while a variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the maximum number of balls for each type of special symbol. The ball is held until the fourth inning, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the reserved ball is based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (first special symbol reservation) or the ball is based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640. If there is a reserved ball (second special symbol reserved), the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

In addition, in this control example, when the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation both exist, the special symbol lottery using the second special symbol reservation is configured to be executed with priority. are doing. In this way, by setting a priority in the order in which the lottery is executed according to the type of special symbol, it is possible to execute only the special symbol lottery of the type with a high priority. In a case where the benefits given to the player are different depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, and the degree of establishment of the execution opportunity for each special symbol type is different, specifically, the first special symbol The trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery is made more difficult to establish than the trigger for executing the lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is made easier to provide advantageous benefits to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In the case where the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, an opportunity to execute a lottery (second special symbol lottery) advantageous to the player is established. Regardless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a period in which a lottery advantageous to the player (second special symbol lottery) is not executed becomes long and the player's desire to play decreases.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game area formed on the game board 13 (the area where the ball can flow down) is changed by the variable display unit 80 to the left side area (the game area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80). , a right side area (gaming area formed on the right side of the variable unit 80), and a right side area (gaming area formed on the right side of the variable unit 80). The left side area indicates the ball that is fired when the player plays a left-handed game, that is, a game where the ball is fired by the firing solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a while suppressing the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). The right side area is a game area where the ball can reach, and the right side area is a game area where the player plays a right-handed game, that is, when the player increases the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1), the firing solenoid of the bullet firing unit 112a is used. This is the game area that the shot ball can reach when playing a game in which the ball is shot.

A through gate 67 is provided in the left side area, and the ball flowing down the left side area reaches a lower area formed below the variable display unit 80. In this lower region, a first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry means 640 accompanied by an electric accessory 640a are provided. On the other hand, the right side area is provided with a through gate 67 and a general ball entrance 63, and the ball flowing down the right side area is configured to reach a variable prize winning device 65 provided in the lower area. ing.

The first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower area is arranged so that a ball that has flown down the left side area enters the ball more easily than a ball that has flown down the right side area. Approximately 1 out of 15 balls enters the first ball entry port 64, and the ball that has flown down the right side area is placed in a position where it can enter the first ball entry port 64 at a rate of about 1 out of 100 balls. It is set up. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the lower region, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (shown in white in FIG. 118), the ball is When it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 and the ball is in the open state (indicated in black in FIG. 118), it is configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 than in the closed state. ing. As shown in FIG. 118, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a pair of blade members, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flowing down the left area also flows down the right area. Balls also enter the second ball entry means at a similar rate (approximately 2 out of 3 balls). When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

The specific winning opening 65a, which opens and closes when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot game state (special game state), is located at a position ( (lower part of the right area). Therefore, when a jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is a more advantageous gaming method for the player than the left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery that is performed when a ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. become easy. In other words, when a normal symbol wins, the ball becomes easier to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is more likely to be performed.

In addition, when a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 while a variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls will be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time as being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol lottery is held, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Begins.

As described above, there are four types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A", "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", and "Jackpot D".

In any of the "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D", a special game state (10R jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 10 is established. In addition, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot ends, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will shift to a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). . The variable probability state continues until the next time a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

If the jackpot type is "Jackpot B", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state after the jackpot game will shift to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time saving state continues for a first period (a period until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times).

If the jackpot type is "Jackpot C", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends will shift to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time saving state continues for a second period (a period until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times) which is longer than the first period.

If the jackpot type is "Jackpot D", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends will shift to a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time saving state continues for a third period (a period until the special symbol lottery ends 80 times) which is longer than the second period.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols has increased, in other words, it is a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state (10R jackpot gaming state). . On the other hand, a case where it is not a "special symbol high probability state" is referred to as a "special symbol low probability state", which indicates a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol high probability state. In addition, the "high probability state of normal symbols" means that the probability of winning the normal symbols is increased, and the normal symbol winning game (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, making it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640). This refers to a state in which it is easy to play a game. On the other hand, when it is not the "high probability state of normal symbols", it is called the "low probability state of normal symbols", which indicates that the probability of winning the normal symbols is normal (lower than the high probability state).

In other words, when a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal symbol lottery are normally ( This is a state where the probability is higher than when the probability is low (low probability), and is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. On the other hand, if the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is low, but the probability of winning in the regular symbol lottery is low. Since the probability is high, the game state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

In addition, even if the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the period during which the time saving state continues (time short period) is configured to differ depending on the selected jackpot type. "D" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types (jackpot B to D) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, followed by "jackpot C" and "jackpot B" in that order. This is a jackpot type.

In this control example, the condition for ending the time saving state is that the number of variations of the special symbol, that is, the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol, is a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 Although a time-saving end condition (special symbol fluctuation number end condition) is provided which is satisfied when the number of times (time, 50 times, 80 times) is reached, other time-saving end conditions may be provided without being limited to this. For example, a time-saving end condition may be provided that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) among a plurality of special symbol types reaches a predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, the first special symbol does not change during the time saving state, that is, when the game state is set in which it is easy to execute a game with a common symbol and the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed. It is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending due to the fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

In addition, there is a time-saving termination condition (lottery result termination condition) that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific winning result that is different from the jackpot winning result, or when the number of times that a specific winning result is reached reaches a predetermined number. may be provided. Thereby, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, making it difficult for the player to predict how long the time-saving state will continue.

In this control example, as described above, when a variable probability state is set, the variable probability state is configured to continue until a jackpot is won. Based on the same technical idea as above, it is also possible to set variable ending conditions, for example, a variable ending condition that is satisfied when the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number of times, or a special lottery to end the variable condition. , the variable probability state may be terminated when the lottery result is a lottery result that terminates the variable probability state.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, when the same jackpot type (Jackpot A to Jackpot D) is selected, a short variation time is selected as the variation time of the special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends. A first gaming state that is likely to be selected and a second gaming state that is likely to have a longer fluctuation time than the first gaming state are settable. With this configuration, the number of special symbol drawings per unit time can be varied in the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game.

As mentioned above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is the same regardless of the type of jackpot, and depending on the type of jackpot, after the jackpot ends, a "probable variable state" or a "time saving state" The configuration is such that one of the following is set. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for some of the types of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the symbol is in the "high probability state of normal symbols" may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state for normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 can be lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 640a can be released with one normal symbol hit can be increased. Also good.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 118), there is a first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize winning), or not. As a stop symbol after completion, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in a lit state, or a change is not executed among the balls entered into the first ball entry port 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters the ball is suspended up to four times. , the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but the maximum number of times that the ball is held is not limited to 4 times, and may be 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and if it is a jackpot, it will be displayed according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

In addition, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 configured with an LED. . A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to execute variable display of the second special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special second special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the game state on the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display will be made accordingly. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is composed of ten kinds of special symbols each imitating the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed, and the variable display It is structured so that the jackpot occurs after the end of the game.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

Further, a third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the main display area Dm. If the third symbols are stopped on the active line with a jackpot symbol combination (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. Furthermore, when a hit "Jackpot A" occurs, there is a possibility that the same combination of variable probability symbols will be stopped and displayed. Moreover, the main symbols composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols". 16R When "Jackpot B" which is a normal jackpot occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always stopped and displayed. In addition, even in a part of the case where "Jackpot A" occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Thereby, even when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot A.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each symbol row. The number of symbols etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol.

A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to be able to simply display a variable display of the third symbol. Here, when performing a variable display in the small display area Dm4, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22, etc. is executed. This is the case. While the display effect is being executed, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand effect. In addition, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm4 while the display effect is being executed, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing. can be made to understand.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 120(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed in this sub-display area Ds. As mentioned above, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of times the ball enters the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, respectively, up to four times. It will be put on hold. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls entered. In this control example, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4 for the first special symbol and 4 for the second special symbol, so a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. Ru. Although FIG. 120(b) shows an example in which the reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the display position of the reserved symbols is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols may be displayed in a part of the main display area Ds. It may also be configured to be displayed.

In addition, there is no need to display all the pending symbols stored in the pending memory, and for example, a high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state) of a normal symbol that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set. If there is, only the reserved symbol of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved symbol) is displayed, and if the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed. (Special symbol 1 reserved symbol) may be configured to be displayed, or the degree of visibility of the reserved symbol corresponding to each special symbol type may be varied depending on the gaming state. When a high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state) is set, the special symbol 2 pending symbol is displayed so that it is easier for the player to see than the special symbol 1 pending symbol, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is displayed. (Normal state), the special figure 1 pending symbol may be displayed more easily for the player to see than the special figure 2 pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the special symbol type that is mainly executed according to the set gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of pending symbols was made variable corresponding to the number of pending balls, the method of displaying the number of pending balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed numerically. In addition, the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed depending on the special symbol type so that the player can identify whether the displayed reserved symbol is the special symbol 1 reserved symbol or the special symbol 2 reserved symbol. Alternatively, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand how many pending symbols correspond to which special symbol type, each pending symbol may be configured in a similar display format (this idea includes completely the same display format). It may be configured to display a pattern.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125, the contents of the winning rate UP effect will be explained.

In this control example, as described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability variable state, time saving state) is configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. During this period, a performance (battle mode performance) is executed in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether a variable probability state or a time saving state is set. Then, the timing when the high probability state of the normal symbol can end, that is, the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving state where the number of time saving times is 30 times (the 30th special symbol variation), and the time saving state where the number of time saving times is 50 times. At the timing when the time-saving end condition is satisfied (the 50th special pattern variation) and at the timing when the time-saving end condition is satisfied in the time-saving state where the number of time-savings is 80 times (the 80th special pattern variation), the high probability state of the normal symbol is It is configured to execute a performance (battle performance) that indicates whether or not the game will end.

In this battle performance, an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, and when the ally character loses the battle, it is announced that the high probability state of the normal symbol has ended. Furthermore, even when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during a high probability state of normal symbols, a battle performance is performed, and a performance in which an ally character wins the battle is performed. Furthermore, even if the high probability state of the normal symbols does not end and the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, the battle performance is executed. In this case, a production result (continuation) in which the ally character neither wins nor loses the battle is displayed.

In this way, by configuring the battle mode performance to be executed during the execution period (high probability state of normal symbols) by various execution triggers, the battle mode performance can be executed during the battle mode performance period. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early. Further, by knowing whether the timing at which the battle performance is executed is a timing at which the time-saving end condition can be satisfied, it becomes possible to predict the performance result of the current battle performance.

In the battle mode performance described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the time-saving end condition is met or not, the battle mode performance is configured to be executed even at a timing when the time-saving end condition cannot be met. However, if configured like this, wouldn't the high probability state of the normal symbol end every time a battle effect is executed? There is a problem in that players are given a sense of crisis.

In contrast, in this control example, the winning rate in the battle performance executed during the battle mode performance is notified to the player in advance. The higher the winning rate notified in advance is, the more difficult it is for an ally character to be defeated in the battle performance executed during the battle mode performance. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a battle effect while referring to the win rate notified in advance.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the winning rate notified in advance can be increased during the jackpot game and during a predetermined period (3 rotations of special symbol variation) after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. (It is configured to be able to execute effects to increase the winning rate). In other words, even before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured to be able to execute a performance for notifying the player of the winning rate of the battle performance in advance. By configuring in this way, for example, if information indicating a jackpot win is included in the pending symbol obtained at the end of the jackpot game (in the case of a pending consecutive win), even if the information is set after the jackpot game ends. Even when the game state is a time saving state (30 times), a performance showing that the winning rate is high can be executed before a special symbol lottery is performed after the end of a jackpot game.

Here, the definition of battle winning rate in battle mode performance will be explained. As mentioned above, in this control example, the battle performance is configured to be executed under various conditions during the battle mode performance, and if the battle performance is defeated, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, and the normal It is configured to move from one state to another. In other words, if a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a battle performance will be executed in which the final change in the time-saving state will result in a defeat. . On the other hand, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not end without passing through the jackpot winning, so the performance result of the battle performance will not be a defeat.

Further, in this battle performance, a battle performance is executed in which the performance result is a victory when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the battle win rate is a numerical value of the expectation of winning a jackpot during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (during the battle production mode). In other words, the battle winning rate does not vary depending on the type of gaming state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is set after the end of the jackpot game, but the battle winning rate varies depending on the length of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. The winning percentage will be variable. Therefore, when the short working hours state (80 working hours) is set, rather than when the short working hours state (30 working hours) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery is drawn before the short working hours end condition is established. Since the probability of winning a jackpot increases, the configuration is such that a high winning rate is more likely to be selected as the battle winning rate. In addition, if the jackpot is consecutively won (on hold), it is confirmed that the jackpot will be won before the time-saving end condition is met, so the high winning rate will be high regardless of the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends. The winning rate can be easily selected.

In addition, in the winning rate UP effect in this control example, by making it easier to select the battle winning rate that corresponds to the gaming status that is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game status can be suggested to the player. The system is configured such that a winning rate that deviates from the battle winning rate indicated by the actually set gaming state can be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a performance that is surprising to the player, for example, a performance that displays a low winning rate when a variable probability state is set. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that a winning rate that deviates from the battle winning rate indicated by the actually set gaming state can be selected, the set gaming state can be easily determined by the player due to the winning rate UP effect. This can be suppressed.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, even if the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is the same, the data tables referred to when determining the fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation are different. It is configured so that it can be done. By changing the data table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol variation, the frequency of execution of the battle performance during the battle mode performance is configured to be variable. Specifically, as a special symbol variation executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the rate at which a variation time (60 seconds) in which a battle effect can be executed is selected when the lottery result is a loss is changed. Thus, the frequency at which battle effects with a lottery result of ``continuation'' are executed is configured to be variable.

First, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123, the contents of the winning rate UP effect executed during the jackpot game will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the winning rate UP effect is executed during the jackpot game (first half period) and during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (second half period). In this control example, the winning rate UP effect is executed in accordance with the player's game result during the first half period of the winning rate UP effect (during the jackpot game). Specifically, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the performance based on the fact that the ball fired during the jackpot game enters the general ball entrance 63 or the special prize opening 65a, and the lottery result is used as the performance. If the lottery result indicates that the game will be executed, the winning rate UP effect is executed.

In this way, by configuring it so that it is determined whether or not to execute the winning rate UP effect according to the player's game result (whether or not there is a prize in the winning hole) during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to execute the winning rate UP effect. Furthermore, in this control example, if a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a period during which the player is likely to interrupt the shooting of the ball during a jackpot game, that is, during an interval period provided between round games, The winning rate UP effect is more easily executed than when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 at other timings (during a round game). With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously shoot balls during a jackpot game, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the execution probability of the winning rate UP performance during the next round game is configured to be variable depending on the number of executions of the winning rate UP performance during one round game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game ends without the winning rate UP effect being executed even though a proper game is being executed during the jackpot game. .

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the general ball entry hole 63 by a right-handed game in which the ball enters the special winning hole 65a during a jackpot game. Although the game board 13 is configured so as to be, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be an appropriate gaming method for causing a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and an appropriate gaming method for executing an effect to increase the winning rate. The game board 13 may be configured so that the and. In this case, for example, during a jackpot game, executing a right-handed game makes it easier to win a ball into the specific winning hole 65a than when executing a left-handed game, and executing a left-handed game makes it easier to win a ball into the specific winning hole 65a. The structure may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball entry hole, which can be an opportunity to perform a winning rate UP effect, than when playing a game.

In addition, in this control example, the winning of a ball into the specific winning hole 65a is also configured to be an opportunity to execute the winning rate UP effect, and during one round game, the end condition of the round game (10 balls) is set. When more balls than winning (winning) enter a specific winning opening 65a (so-called over-winning), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a winning rate UP effect. With this configuration, in addition to allowing the player to win a large number of prize balls, it is possible to allow the player to play an unprecedented game in which the player aims to win more than the winning rate in order to increase the winning rate. can improve the interest of

FIG. 121(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 121(a), in addition to the display mode showing information to be notified to the player during the jackpot game, a display mode showing that the winning rate UP effect is to be executed is displayed.

Specifically, a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left side of the display screen, and "Right hit" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player on the gaming method during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that executing a right-handed game during a jackpot game is an advantageous gaming method.

Further, in the small display area Dm2, a round number notification mode is displayed to indicate what round the round game is being executed, and in the small display area Dm3, the jackpot symbol (the third A winning pattern notification mode is displayed to show the pattern stop display mode). In FIG. 121(a), since the display screen is taken as an example immediately after the start of the first round of a jackpot game that is executed after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed at "222", "ROUND1" is displayed in the small display area Dm2. “222” is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In this control example, an advantageous winning symbol (777) is used as a stop display mode of the winning symbol (stop display mode of the third symbol) to indicate a jackpot win, and to notify that a variable probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to display normal winning symbols (crossed numbers other than 777 (for example, 222)) in which the player cannot identify the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the advantageous winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is certain that the variable probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, so the probability variable state will be set without executing the winning rate UP effect during and after the jackpot game. A performance (confirmation performance) is performed to inform the player that the setting has been made in an easy-to-understand manner. In this way, by switching the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game according to the type of winning symbol that is stopped and displayed when winning a jackpot, unnecessary effects, that is, variable probability states are set for the player. To suppress a player's desire to play from decreasing because it is possible to suppress execution of a performance suggesting whether or not a variable probability state is set after clearly informing that a variable probability state is set. I can do it.

In addition, in this control example, the types of winning symbols that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning are two types: advantageous winning symbols and normal winning symbols, but three or more types of winning symbols may be provided. In this case, the winning symbol types are set so that the expectation level for which the probability variable state is set is different, or the probability variable state is set, or the time saving state with a specific number of time saving times is set, and the time saving state with a number of time saving times other than the specific number of time saving times is set. It is good to provide a winning symbol type to notify that there is a high possibility of winning. By configuring in this way, for example, when a winning symbol type that has a high possibility of being set to a variable probability state or a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 30 is displayed in a stopped state, other winning symbol types (for example, variable probability Compared to the case where the winning symbol type with a high possibility of setting the time saving state or time saving number of 50 times is stopped and displayed, it is normal when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game exceeds 30 times. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the variable probability state is set at the time when the high probability state of the symbol continues. In this way, by providing multiple patterns of winning symbol types, it is possible to predict the currently set gaming state with higher accuracy by comprehensively determining the winning symbol type and the gaming situation after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.

In the display area HR2, a consecutive winnings notification mode indicating the number of consecutive winnings in the jackpot game is displayed, and in the display area HR3, an acquisition information notification mode is displayed to show information regarding the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive winning period. . The number of consecutive wins is the jackpot won during the period (continuous advantageous period) in which the game can be executed without changing the gaming state to the normal state (time saving state, variable probability state, jackpot gaming state). This shows the number of times.

In addition, in this control example, the continuous winning notification mode is configured to cumulatively display the number of jackpots won during the continuous advantageous period, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be configured such that the number of consecutive wins is accumulated even when a jackpot is won (when pulled back) within a predetermined period (after transition to the normal state). In this case, the predetermined period may be, for example, the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30, or the lottery of the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation (maximum 4 pieces) obtained during the continuous advantageous period. What is necessary is to set the period until the special drawing 2 lottery ends. With this configuration, even after the continuation advantageous period ends, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to increase the number of consecutive chances.

In this control example, an example in which the number of jackpots is shown numerically is used as the consecutive winnings notification mode that indicates the number of consecutive winnings displayed in the display area HR2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an icon corresponding to the number of jackpots, An icon corresponding to the number of jackpots of 1 (for example, small icon), an icon corresponding to 5 jackpots (for example, medium icon), and an icon corresponding to 10 jackpots (for example, large icon) can be displayed. , the type and number of icons corresponding to the number of consecutive views may be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an icon (special icon) that is not displayed unless the number of consecutive matches reaches a certain number, so it is possible to provide an icon (special icon) that will not be displayed unless the number of consecutive matches reaches a certain number. can be set.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpots won during the continuous advantageous period (history of the number of jackpots) is displayed as the continuous winning notification mode, but the history information of games executed during the continuous advantageous period is displayed. , it may be configured to notify other game history information, such as past jackpot game types (number of rounds, gaming status set after the end of jackpot games) executed during the continuous advantageous period, and winning information. It may be configured to display historical information such as the symbol type (advantageous winning symbol, normal winning symbol), the number of special symbol drawings performed between jackpot games, or the winning rate displayed in the winning rate UP effect. (%) history information may be displayed.

In FIG. 121(a), since a jackpot game based on winning a jackpot (first win) in a special symbol lottery in the normal state is shown as an example, "bonus x 1" is displayed in the display area HR2, and "bonus x 1" is displayed in the display area HR3. , ``0010P (points)'' is displayed as an acquisition information notification mode to indicate information regarding the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive winning period.

Furthermore, in the display area HR1, a performance status notification mode for showing the performance result of the winning rate UP performance is displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, as a performance guide notification mode for guiding the performance contents in progress, "Win rate UP performance" is displayed. "Let's raise the level and advance the battle advantageously" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform a player who is playing a jackpot game that the winning rate UP effect will be executed. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 121(a), since the performance to which the win rate is added has never been executed, "0% win rate" is displayed in the display area HR1.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 121(a), the initial value of the winning rate displayed in the display area HR1 is "0%", but it is not limited to this, and for example, Depending on the situation, a different value may be set as the initial value of the win rate. In this case, the game situation where a high win rate is likely to be displayed in the win rate UP effect, that is, the case where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, is better. It is best to set the winning rate so that the initial value is high. With this configuration, by understanding the initial value of the winning rate displayed at the start of the winning rate UP performance, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, the initial value of the winning rate is displayed immediately after the jackpot game starts (from the start of the first round), but the invention is not limited to this, , 5th round), a winning rate increasing effect may be executed. In addition, even if the win rate UP performance is executed, the initial value of the win rate will not be displayed, but the initial value of the win rate will be displayed when the first win rate addition condition is met during the win rate UP performance. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while having fun seeing what value is set as the initial value of the probability, and the initial value can be displayed for players who do not want to check the winning rate. It becomes possible to execute a jackpot game without any problems.

Here, in this control example, the game board 13 having the configuration shown in FIG. 118 is used. The variable winning device 65, which is variably operated during the jackpot game, is arranged at a position where the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter, and the win rate addition conditions during the jackpot game are set in the right area. The configuration is such that it can be established when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63. Therefore, by configuring the variable winning device 65 to be arranged at a position where both balls fired in left-handed games and balls fired in right-handed games can enter (for example, a position below the electric accessory 640a). A player who wants to change the winning rate by increasing the winning rate during a jackpot game can play a right-handed game, and a player who does not want to change the winning rate can play a left-handed game.

In this way, by allowing the player to select the playing method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the jackpot game, the production executed during the jackpot game while allowing the player to win a predetermined number of prize balls during the jackpot game. By configuring the game so that the content of the performance (winning rate UP performance) can be varied, the performance performed during the jackpot game can be the content desired by the player.

In this case, it is preferable to display a display mode to notify the player of the relationship between the playing method that can be executed during the jackpot game and the performance content that is executed during the jackpot game. If you play a hitting game, the jackpot game will end with a winning rate of ?%.If you play a jackpot game with a right-hand hitting game, the winning rate will be displayed.'' It is good to display this comment in the sub-display area Ds. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the gaming method that matches the performance content desired by the player.

Further, the rate at which balls fired in a right-handed game win into the variable winning device 65 and the rate at which balls fired in a left-handed game win into the variable winning device 65 may be made different, for example. It may be configured such that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the variable winning device 65 in a right-handed game than in a left-handed game. As a result, the jackpot game period can be longer when playing a right-handed game than when playing a left-handed game, so that more balls can enter the general ball entrance 63 before the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it easier to perform the game, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance to increase the winning rate. Further, it may be configured such that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the variable winning device 65 in a left-handed game than in a right-handed game. As a result, it is more disadvantageous for the player to play a left-handed game than a right-handed game, so it is possible to force the player to actively play a right-handed game, and as a result, the winning rate increases. It becomes possible to provide a jackpot game in which the winning rate is easily variable. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance executed during the jackpot game can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the winning rate UP effect executed during the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the gaming method executed during the jackpot game, but the game executed during the jackpot game If the rate at which the specific performance is executed is made variable depending on the method and the player is allowed to select the game method, the same technical idea as this control example will be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the details of the winning rate UP effect during the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 121(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when a variable win rate effect is executed in the win rate UP effect. In this control example, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform an additional performance, and if the result of the lottery is to execute an additional performance. The configuration is such that additional effects are executed. Then, as the presentation mode of the additional presentation, a presentation mode that varies (increases) the winning rate or a presentation mode for liveliness is determined.

With this configuration, a player who is playing a jackpot game is informed that, based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63 during the jackpot game, balls other than the prize balls (3 balls) will be sent to the player who is playing the jackpot game. Since it becomes possible to give benefits, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot game. In addition, as the performance mode of the additional performance, it is configured so that it is possible to select (determine) a performance mode for varying (increasing) the winning rate displayed in the win rate UP performance and a performance mode for lively production. Even if the win rate cannot be varied (increased) in the win rate UP production, for example, the preset upper limit of the win rate display has been reached and the win rate cannot be increased any further. , it is possible to continuously perform additional performances using the lively performance mode, and it is possible to prevent the performance effect from decreasing rapidly.

As shown in FIG. 121(b), when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game and an additional performance is executed in a performance mode that changes the winning rate (information), the capsule 801 An image is displayed in the main display area Dm in which the contents 801a representing the value of the winning percentage that is variable from within the capsule 801 pop out. In FIG. 121(b), the content 801a is displayed in a display mode of "10%" to indicate that the winning rate increases by 10%. In the sub-display area Ds, the player is informed that an additional effect has been executed based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 63, and that the winning rate has been varied (increased) by the winning rate UP effect. A comment such as "Get a capsule!! Get a winning rate of 10%!!" is displayed as a notification mode for easy-to-understand notification.

The diagram shown in FIG. 121(b) is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the diagram shown in FIG. 121(a) described above. From the state shown, three balls have newly entered the special winning opening 65a and one ball has entered the general ball entering opening 63 without changing the number of rounds. Therefore, in the display area HR3, the additional winnings from the time shown in FIG. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(a), the performance contents during the interval period during the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 122(a) is a diagram showing the display screen during the interval period when the winning rate UP effect is being executed. In this control example, it is easier to execute the additional effect if the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during the interval period than if the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during the round game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, during a jackpot game, even during the interval period when it is difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a, the player is motivated to continue shooting the ball. As a result, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), during the interval period, the comment "Capsule GET high probability state" is displayed in the sub display area Ds as a guidance mode indicating that this is a period (state) in which additional effects are likely to be executed. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to encourage the player to fire the ball voluntarily in order to enter the ball into the general ball entry port 63 at this timing. In the example shown in FIG. 122(a), it is not the case that the additional performance is easy to execute, but the specific performance mode (the capsule 801 is displayed The sub-display area Ds indicates that the performance mode) is likely to be executed.

With this configuration, by making it easier to execute additional effects internally, as a result, additional effects can be executed in a specific effect mode (the effect mode in which the capsule 801 is displayed) that provides advantageous information to the player. Even if it is made easier to execute, the player can be made to think that the probability that additional effects will be executed in a specific effect mode is increased, even during the interval period. , the player can be motivated to continue playing the game in order to shoot the ball continuously. Note that, without being limited to this, the configuration is such that a specific performance mode is more likely to be selected as an additional performance to be performed during the interval period than during a period other than the interval period, without changing the probability that the additional performance will be performed. You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(b), the display contents when a lively presentation mode (decoration presentation mode) is displayed as an additional presentation will be described. FIG. 122(b) is a diagram showing display contents when the decorative presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode of the additional presentation. In this control example, a decoration mode is set in which one of nine types of animal-like characters is randomly selected and displayed. By configuring in this way, even if a specific presentation mode is not selected consecutively as an additional presentation, it is possible to display a different character, thereby suppressing the reduction in the presentation effect. can do.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this control example, a process is executed to restrict the same character from being selected (hard to be selected) a predetermined number of times (three times) in a row as a decoration effect mode. . The same character is configured to be selected a predetermined number of times (three times) only when a specific condition is met. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested even in the randomly selected character type, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Here, the conditions (specific conditions) under which the same character can be selected a predetermined number of times (three times) in a row include the upper limit value of the winning rate (upper limit winning rate) set in the winning rate UP effect, and the currently displayed Conditions have been set that will be met if the difference between the winning rate (displayed winning rate) and There is. In this way, by using a plurality of decorative presentation modes that are used as lively presentation during a jackpot game, the information that is advantageous to the player is not provided by itself, but is configured to be able to provide information that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the decorative presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), when the additional performance is executed in the specific performance mode, an elephant character 802 indicating the decorative performance mode is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display area HR4 is formed, and the display The character history of the decoration mode is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), in addition to the currently displayed decorative presentation mode (character 802), a character history is displayed so that the player can determine the type of the past two decorative presentation modes. In FIG. 122(b), since the display screen at the time when the decoration presentation mode was first displayed during the current jackpot game is displayed, "-" is displayed in the character history display for the past two times.

In addition, in this control example, the display contents of the character history display are configured to be erased in units of one jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display contents may be erased in units of one round game. It may be configured as follows. In this case, unless the player executes at least three additional effects during one round of play, the player cannot obtain advantageous information using the decorative effect mode. The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically trying to hit the ball into the 63rd spot. Further, the display contents of the character history display may be maintained over a plurality of jackpot games. With this configuration, for example, if a jackpot game ends when the same character is displayed twice in a row, the same character can be displayed three times in a row in the next jackpot game. It is possible to make the player play the game while keeping the player's expectations high.

In this control example, when the same presentation mode (character 802) is displayed three times in a row as a decorative presentation mode, advantageous information is given to the player. Although the configuration is configured so that the player can understand the types of decorative presentation modes for three times, if the conditions for giving advantageous information to the player using the decorative presentation modes are different, the conditions will be changed. It is preferable to vary the display content of the character history display so that the player can understand the type of decoration presentation mode within the applicable range.

Furthermore, in this control example, the condition for providing advantageous information to the player using the decorative presentation mode is that the same presentation mode (character 802) is displayed a predetermined number of times in a row. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a condition may be provided that is satisfied when different characters 802 are displayed in a specific order. In this case, what type (character 802) is the type of the decorative presentation mode set for the additional presentation to be executed next, and the conditions for giving advantageous information to the player using the decorative presentation mode. It is preferable to provide a notification (suggestion) means that can notify (suggestion) to the player whether or not the following holds true. Thereby, it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

If the same presentation mode (character 802) is displayed three times in a row as a decorative presentation mode of the additional presentation, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the win rate increases significantly as information advantageous to the player The performance will be executed. FIG. 123(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the same character 802 is displayed three times in a row as a decorative presentation mode of additional presentation.

As shown in FIG. 123(a), a display mode indicating that the elephant character 802 has been displayed three times in a row as a character history display is displayed in the display area HR4, and a decoration is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment "Chara Bingo Achieved" is displayed as a performance result display mode to indicate that the performance was successful using the performance mode. Then, "+30%" is displayed as the display mode 802a indicating that the winning rate will be varied (increased) by 30% as a result of this performance, and "+30%" is displayed in the display area HR1, where the winning rate that was already displayed has increased by 30%. 40%" is displayed.

In this control example, the additional performance shown with reference to FIG. 121(b), that is, the additional performance is executed in a performance mode (specific performance mode) in which the winning rate can be varied (increased) as a performance result of one additional performance. The winning rate seems to increase significantly when the winning rate is varied (increased) based on the additional effects shown with reference to FIG. 123(a), that is, the results of multiple additional effects, than when It is composed of With this configuration, even if an additional performance is executed in the decorative performance mode during a jackpot game, there is still a possibility that the winning rate will increase sufficiently before the jackpot game ends. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's desire to play a game decreases due to the performance contents of an additional performance.

When the final round (10 rounds) of the jackpot game ends, the ending screen of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed. FIG. 123(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the ending screen of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 123(b), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, the main display area HR1 is where the winning rate that increased during the jackpot game, that is, the winning rate at the end of the first half of the winning rate UP performance is displayed. It is formed near the center of area Dm, and in FIG. 123(b), "Current winning rate 40%" is displayed.

Then, the characters "Entering the winning rate UP zone" are displayed as a guidance mode to indicate that the winning rate UP effect continues even after the end of the jackpot game (entering the second half period). In addition, in the small display area Dm1, the words "Right-handed hit" are continuously displayed as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to continue playing the right-handed game even after the end of the jackpot game. . Thereby, even after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to continue playing the right-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in this control example, if the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during the ending period of the jackpot game, the additional performance is not executed. There is. Specifically, the processing for setting whether or not to execute additional effects and the presentation mode of additional effects is performed in the same way as in other periods, but the display command for executing additional effects is set. The configuration is configured so that the processing that does not occur is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the winning rate displayed near the center of the main display area HR1 from suddenly increasing and performing a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, regarding the production mode of the additional production set during this ending period, it may be configured so that the production is displayed in an interrupt manner during the second half of the winning rate UP production, or the additional production set during the ending period. It may be configured such that only the amount of increase in the winning rate is determined, and a performance corresponding to the determination result is executed in the latter half of the winning rate UP performance. With this configuration, even during the ending period of the jackpot game, the player can be encouraged to play a game in which the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 with enthusiasm.

In this control example, the ending period of a jackpot game is used as an example of a period in which no additional performance is performed during a jackpot game, but the ending period of a jackpot game is not limited to this, and examples include, for example, the opening period of a jackpot game, the round game of a specific round, etc. A period during which the additional performance is not performed may be provided in a predetermined period such as a period, or a period during which the additional performance is not performed may be provided within a period during which a specific performance is performed. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to execute additional performances at different timings based on the timing of the ball entering the general ball entrance 63, a plurality of additional performances are executed in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent performances that are difficult for players to understand from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, the contents of the performance in the winning rate UP zone that is set after the end of the jackpot game will be explained. This winning rate UP zone is a winning rate UP production that is executed during the period (second half period) after the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times (3 times), and is the first half of the winning rate UP production. With respect to the winning rate (%) that has been increased during the period, an effect is performed to vary (increase) the winning rate again.

During this winning rate UP zone, each time a special symbol change is executed, a production (slot production) for varying (increasing) the winning probability is executed, and three special symbol variations are performed. Before the variation is executed, an effect that varies (increases) the winning rate up to three times is executed. In addition, during the winning rate UP zone, it is configured so that a performance is executed to vary the winning rate in different performance modes depending on the type of variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, and normal variation pattern (variation time) is executed. If time 10 seconds) is selected, a slot effect will be executed in which whether or not the winning rate will be varied (increased) and, if the winning rate is variable (increased), the amount of the variable (increase) will be determined by lottery. If a specific variation pattern (variation time 11 seconds) is selected, it will be determined that the winning rate will vary (increase), and an increase confirmation effect will be executed in which only the amount of variation is determined by lottery. It consists of In this way, by configuring the performance result of the performance to be executed to be varied according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the control processing executed by the main control device 110 (special symbol lottery, variation pattern The control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can increase the variation of the production mode set by the audio lamp control device 113 using the processing result of the control process for selecting the type of The processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case where the performance mode of the performance is set only based on the processing results.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the slot effect executed during the win rate UP zone will be explained. FIG. 124(a) is a diagram showing the content of the slot performance in the winning rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 124(a), during the winning rate UP zone that is set after the end of the jackpot game, the sub-display area Ds displays the guidance notification mode “Win rate UP "Zone" comment is displayed. Then, a remaining period notification mode for indicating the remaining period of the winning rate UP zone is displayed in the display area HR5. FIG. 124(a) shows the period in which the first special symbol variation in the winning rate UP zone is being executed, and the display area HR5 shows the next two times, excluding the performance being executed (special symbol variation). The words "last 2 times" are displayed to indicate that the effect (special symbol variation) will be executed.

Three variable areas (a first variable area La, a second variable area Lb, and a third variable area Lc) are formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and for each variable area, the winning rate increases. The value is dynamically displayed (fluctuating display) from the top to the bottom. In this slot performance, the display mode (% symbol) that is normally dynamically displayed (variably displayed) in the first variable area La and the third variable area Lc is stopped and displayed first. Then, the display mode (% symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second variable area Lb that is stopped and displayed with a delay, and when the same display mode (% symbol) is stopped and displayed in a straight line, the display mode (% symbol) ) is executed to increase the winning rate by the value shown.

In other words, in this slot performance, the winning rate is variable before it is announced whether or not the winning rate will increase, that is, during the period in which the display mode of at least one of the multiple variable areas is dynamically displayed. The system is configured to notify the player of possible candidates. With this configuration, when a slot effect is executed, the player is first expected to see a large value displayed as a value that has a possibility of increasing, and then the first fluctuation area is displayed. La and the third variable area Lc are displayed in a stopped state, and then the second variable area Lb is displayed in a stopped state while making the player expect that the winning rate will increase. Therefore, even if a performance mode that does not increase the winning rate is selected, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end when the slot performance ends. In addition, since it is configured so that multiple values (% symbols) can be displayed as values (% symbols) that may increase the winning rate, the value (% symbols) that is different from the value (% symbols) that actually increases the winning rate ( % pattern) can also be displayed. Therefore, for example, by displaying a value (% symbol) larger than the value (% symbol) by which the winning probability actually increases, the player is made to expect that the winning probability will increase significantly at the end of the slot performance. It is possible to keep players interested until the end.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 124(a), "10%" and "20%" are displayed double as values (% symbols) that may increase the winning rate. Therefore, if a % symbol indicating "10%" is stopped and displayed at a specific position in the second fluctuation area Lb (a position where three % symbols are stopped and displayed on a straight line), the winning rate is 10%. If the result is an increasing performance and the % symbol indicating "20%" is stopped, the winning rate will be increased by 20%, and other symbols (for example, the % symbol indicating "30%", If the winning symbol indicating "losing" is stopped and displayed, the performance result of the current slot performance will be a performance result that does not increase the winning rate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), the contents of the performance when the performance result of the slot performance is a performance result that does not increase the winning rate will be explained. FIG. 124(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the performance result of the current slot performance is a performance result that does not increase the winning rate. As shown in FIG. 124(b), if the performance result of the slot performance is a performance result that does not increase the winning rate (missing), the same % symbols are displayed on a straight line in the three fluctuation areas (La to Lc). A display mode in which the display is not stopped is displayed, and a comment of "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify that the performance result is a failure.

In addition, in FIG. 124(b), as a display mode when the performance result is a loss, an example is shown in which a “cross mark” loss symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific position in the second variable area Lb. Without limitation, by stopping and displaying a type of % symbol (for example, "80%") that is not stopped and displayed in the first variation area La and the third variation area Lc at a specific position, the performance result may be off. may also be shown.

Further, it may be configured such that a composite symbol (for example, "10% and 20%") in which a plurality of percentage symbols are combined can be stopped and displayed at a specific position in the second fluctuation area Lb, and FIG. ), when this composite pattern ("10% and 20%") is stopped and displayed, a % pattern indicating 10% and a % pattern indicating 20% will be displayed on a straight line. Therefore, an effect that increases the winning rate by 30% in total will be executed. With this configuration, when the first variable area La and the third variable area Lc are stopped and displayed, if there are multiple values that may increase the winning rate, at most all of the values are displayed. Since it is possible to increase the winning rate by the sum of the summed values, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players for the slot performance. In addition, as the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variable area Lb, a universal symbol that can correspond to all percentage symbols (for example, a symbol that resembles "ALL") may be configured to be displayable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125(a), an explanation will be given of the increase confirmation effect executed during the winning rate UP zone. FIG. 125(a) is a diagram showing the display contents executed during the rising confirmation effect. This rising confirmation performance is a performance that is executed when a specific variation time (11 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and unlike the above-mentioned slot performance, when the performance is executed. , it is a performance that is certain to increase the winning rate. Therefore, when an increase confirmation effect is executed, the player is first notified that the winning rate will increase, so players who are concerned about whether their winning rate will increase or not can feel at ease. A game can be executed. After that, a suggestion performance is performed that suggests how much the winning rate will increase in the current increase confirmation performance.

When the increase confirmation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the text "Winning rate UP confirmed" is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm as a notification mode to notify that the probability will increase. Below, as a suggestion effect that suggests a value for increasing the probability, a suggestion effect mode in which an increase value is displayed in a fluctuating manner is displayed in the display area HRa. In this suggestive presentation mode, a "plus mark" and "%" are displayed in a fixed manner, and a two-digit number is displayed in a fluctuating manner between them, and the two-digit number that is stopped is displayed. It will show the increase in winning rate.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, in this suggestive effect mode, the 1s digit variation area and the 10s digit variation area are variably displayed in different manners. Specifically, the value to be finally stopped and displayed is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, and a display command including value information indicating the determined value is transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the value information included in the received display command, and determines the variable display mode based on the determination result. More specifically, the values in the ones place and the values in the tens place included in the value information are individually determined, and if each value satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, the value in the tens place is 3 or more. , or, if the value of the ones place is 6 or more, the variable display mode is determined so that the value on the side that does not meet the predetermined condition is stopped and displayed first, or the variable display mode is determined so that the value on the side that does not meet the predetermined condition is stopped and displayed first, or the value of 1 is selected from multiple variable display modes. It is configured such that the variation display mode is randomly determined.

With this configuration, it is possible to set multiple types of presentation patterns until the suggested presentation mode is stopped and displayed on the display control device 114 side, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 is not increased. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Then, in the final change of the winning rate UP zone, the performance results of the winning rate UP performance that has been executed since the jackpot game are shown, and the performance mode that is executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol is shown in a manner corresponding to the performance result. is determined. Here, with reference to FIG. 125(b), the content of the effect after the third winning rate increasing effect is completed in the final change of the winning rate UP zone will be explained. FIG. 125(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when a character to be used in the next performance zone is selected based on the determined winning rate after the win rate UP performance has ended. be.

In this control example, as a production executed while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, after the winning rate UP production ends, a battle zone is set and a production in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. (Battle production) is configured so that it is executed. The above-mentioned win rate UP performance is a performance to show the degree of expectation of victory of the ally character in the battle performance.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), when the winning rate UP effect ends, a display screen is displayed in which the enemy character to be fought in the next battle zone is selected. A display area HR6 is formed in the center of the main display area Dm, in which a plurality of enemy characters corresponding to the final display win rate are displayed, and below it, an enemy character for the next battle zone to be executed is selected. The text ``Determine enemy in battle zone'' is displayed as a guidance mode to indicate what is being done.

Here, to explain the contents of the display area HR6 in detail, "Monster" is the enemy character ch1 corresponding to the display win rate of 59% or less, and "monster" is the enemy character corresponding to the display win rate of 60% to 89%. "Rabbit" is displayed as ch2, "turtle" is displayed as enemy character ch3 when the displayed win rate is 90% to 99%, and "carrot" is displayed as enemy character ch4 when the displayed win rate is 100%. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 125(b), since the display win rate displayed in the display area HR1 is "60%", "Rabbit" is selected as the enemy character in the display area HR6.

As explained above, in this control example, as a performance executed during the winning rate UP zone, the first performance (slot performance) that notifies the value by which the probability can increase and then notifies whether the probability will increase or not. and a second performance (increase confirmed performance) that notifies an increasing winning probability after notifying that the probability increases. Therefore, the content expected by the player can be greatly varied depending on the type of performance to be performed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, the type of performance (slot performance, increase confirmed performance) executed during the winning rate UP zone is determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. Thereby, without increasing the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to increase the variations of effects executed during the win rate UP zone.

In addition, in this control example, the type of performance executed during the winning rate UP zone is configured to be different depending on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, so the production period of each production is It is necessary to prepare in advance according to the variation pattern of the corresponding special symbol variation, but for example, the variation pattern (variation time) in which the first effect is executed is 10 seconds, the variation pattern (variation time) in which the second effect is executed ( The performance period of the first performance and the performance period of the second performance may be made the same by setting the variation time) as 10.1 seconds and making it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the length of the fluctuation time. . With this configuration, the performance period of the first performance and the performance period of the second performance can be made the same, so when commands indicating the same variation pattern are received from the main control device 110, the audio Even if the lamp control device 113 adds processing to determine the type of performance to be executed during the win rate UP zone, the performance data of the first performance and the performance data of the second performance may be different in the same length of performance period. Therefore, there is no need to generate new performance data or separately provide dedicated performance data. Therefore, the amount of performance data can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, different effects are executed depending on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the result of the special symbol lottery (jackpot The configuration may be such that different effects are performed depending on whether the player is in the position or not. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the type of performance executed during the winning rate UP zone, so it is possible to execute a performance that further increases the attention of players. becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129, the contents of the battle mode effect executed while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set will be explained. The battle mode is a production mode in which friendly characters and enemy characters repeatedly battle, and is a mode production executed during a high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, this is a mode performance that can be executed both when the gaming state is a time-saving state and when it is a variable probability state. While this battle mode is being executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the set gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state.

Then, a battle production is executed during the battle mode, and when an ally character is "defeated", the high probability state of the normal symbol ends at that point, and the state shifts to the normal state. Additionally, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a battle performance is performed in which your ally character "wins". Furthermore, as a result of the battle performance, if the enemy character escapes and "Continue" is selected where the battle is not decided, the special symbol lottery has not won a jackpot (it has been won by a loser), and The high probability state of normal symbols does not end. In other words, in a state where the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol is not satisfied, the battle effect is executed even in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery is won.

With this configuration, battle effects can be executed at various opportunities, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which battle effects are not executed at all during the battle mode. In addition, when this battle mode is executed, it is configured so that 1 lucky point is added each time a special symbol change is executed, and when this lucky point reaches a specific value (100), It is configured to inform the player that the variable probability state is set as the gaming state. This lucky point is configured so that in addition to being added by 1 each time a special symbol variation is executed, a plurality of points can be added during a special symbol variation performance.

In other words, since 1 is added at least every time a special symbol variation is executed, if the battle performance continues for 100 variations, it is possible to always notify that a probability variation state is set. In addition, as a production mode of the variable production to be executed, if a production in which lucky points are added is executed multiple times, a variable state is set even if the number of special symbol variations is small. It becomes possible to notify the In this way, by varying the timing of notifying that the variable probability state is set depending on the performance mode of the special symbol variation performance to be executed, it is possible to quickly grasp that the current gaming state is a variable probability state. It is possible to make the player interested in the performance contents of the variable performance that is executed.

FIG. 126(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the battle mode is started. As shown in FIG. 126(a), when the battle mode is executed, "Battle mode in progress" is displayed in the display area HR7 formed above the main display area Dm as a guidance mode for guiding the current production mode. is displayed, and in the display area HR8 formed below it, "Rabbit" is displayed as the type of enemy character that will be fought during the current battle mode. The type of enemy character to fight during this battle mode is the type of enemy character selected based on the performance result of the winning rate UP performance, as shown in FIG. 125(b). In other words, the example shown in FIG. 126(a) is the display screen when the enemy character type "Rabbit", which is selected when the display win rate is 60 to 89%, is selected.

Further, a display area HR6 is formed at the lower left of the main display area Dm, and "1P" is displayed as the cumulative value of lucky points. This lucky point is configured to be incremented by 1 every time a special symbol change starts, and in reality, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol displayed in the small display area Dm5 is about to shift. , an effect in which 1 lucky point is added is executed according to the operation mode. In this way, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol shifts, the lucky point is added by 1, so the lucky point is updated according to the number of changes of the second special symbol. It is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the game is a real thing. As a result, by updating the lucky point value according to the execution content of the fluctuation effect, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the cumulative value of special symbol fluctuations after the battle mode is set, so the game state is set to a time-saving state. Even if set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time saving state will end.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Is the probability fixed when the lucky points reach 100P?" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the production contents of the lucky point acquisition production among the production contents during the battle mode. Ru. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the performance contents in a case where the battle mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 126(b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation content when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (missing and stopped) during the battle mode. In FIG. 126(b), an effect to add lucky points is executed at the stop display timing of the special symbol, and the words "+2P GET" are displayed in the display area HR9 as a display mode indicating that 2 lucky points are added. is displayed, and the total number of lucky points displayed in the display area HR6 is displayed with an addition of 2. In this way, by configuring the system so that multiple lucky points can be added with one special symbol change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current number of special symbol changes, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current number of special symbol changes. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the process will end or not.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127(a), the content of the battle effect executed during the battle mode will be explained. FIG. 127(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a battle effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 127(a), when the battle effect is executed, a display mode in which a boy 810 who is an ally character and a rabbit 811 who is an enemy character are fighting is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, The word "Start" will be displayed, indicating that the battle will begin. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating the content of the battle performance, ``If you lose the battle, the time will end short'' is displayed.

As mentioned above, the results of the battle performance are ``victory'' indicating that you have won the jackpot, ``defeat'' indicating the end of the time saving state, and ``continuation'' where the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. There are three types. Then, when "win" is selected as the performance result of the battle performance, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(b) is displayed. FIG. 127(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an ally character wins in the battle performance. As shown in FIG. 127(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the words "Victory!!" are displayed as a result display mode to show the performance results of the current battle performance. In the center of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 has won against the rabbit 811 is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Jackpot" indicating that the player has won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (555) indicating a jackpot win. In this case, since a jackpot game is executed, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is not displayed.

On the other hand, when "defeat" is selected as the presentation result of the battle presentation, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(a) is displayed. FIG. 128(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an ally character is defeated in a battle performance. As shown in FIG. 128(a), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the words "defeat" are displayed as a result display mode to show the performance result of the current battle performance, In the center of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 was defeated by the rabbit 811 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Battle mode ended" indicating that the time saving state has ended is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (361) indicating a winning winning. In this case, since the normal state is set from the next special symbol change, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is not displayed.

Further, when "Continue" is selected as the result of the battle performance, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(b) is displayed. FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an enemy character escapes in a battle performance. As shown in FIG. 128(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, the words "Continue" are displayed as a result display mode to show the performance results of the current battle performance, In the center of the main display area Dm, a display mode in which the rabbit 811 is running away from the boy 810 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Battle continues!!" indicating that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (361) indicating a winning winning. In this case, since the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, the display area HR6 for indicating the cumulative number of lucky points is continuously displayed. Furthermore, if the effect result of the battle mode is "Continue", an effect in which lucky points are added is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 128(b), a display indicating that 5 lucky points will be added. “+5PGET” is displayed as the mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(a), the content of the effect executed when the lucky points reach 100P during the battle mode will be explained. FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when lucky points reach 100P during battle mode. In this control example, the lucky point is configured so that it reaches 100P only when the game state is variable, and when it reaches 100P, the ally character will not be defeated in the battle performance. Enter the "invincibility zone" to prove something.

In this control example, as described above, even if a jackpot is won in which the probability variable state is set as the gaming state, the third symbol indicating the jackpot win stops at a normal winning symbol other than an advantageous winning symbol (for example, 777). may be displayed. In this case, as in the case of winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set, a win rate UP performance is executed during the jackpot game, and a battle performance is performed against the enemy character corresponding to the performance result (displayed win rate) of the win rate UP performance. Enter the battle mode where the battle will unfold. In other words, during the battle mode, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state.

Then, during the battle mode, a performance is performed in which lucky points are added. This lucky point is the first addition effect where the value is added "1P" when a new special symbol variation is executed, and the value is "2P or more" as part of the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. The second addition effect is added, and when the cumulative addition of lucky points reaches ``100P'', it reaches the ``invincibility zone'' where it is confirmed that a variable state is set. .

In other words, when entering the battle mode in a state where a variable probability state is set, the timing at which it is announced that the current gaming state is a variable probability state ( The timing of entering the invincible zone will be different. Therefore, a player who is playing a game in battle mode should play the game while expecting that his or her ally characters will not be defeated by the battle effects and that many additional effects will be executed so that the lucky points will reach 100P. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the shortening zone effect executed during the shortening mode will be explained. FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the shortened zone effect. This shortening zone is a performance that is executed during the shortening mode, and is a state where the probability change state is determined (the high probability state of the normal symbol continues 100 times or more, which is greater than the maximum number of times (80 times) of the time saving state) This is a performance that is performed in a state where

In this control example, when the period in which the probability change state continues for a predetermined period (100 times), the data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be switched. The configuration is such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the data table referenced during battle mode. Specifically, it is configured such that the variable time of 5 seconds is determined (selected) regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. As a result, the number of special symbol drawings per unit time can be increased, allowing the player to play the game efficiently.

In this shortening zone performance, as shown in FIG. 129(b), an attack standby performance is executed in which a posture in which the boy 810 attacks the battle opponent enemy character 811 is displayed. In other words, as described above, the state in which the shortened zone performance is being performed is determined to be a variable state, so even if the battle performance is performed, the battle victory is certain. Therefore, the attack standby effect is executed in a manner that the battle effect is won in a short period of time (5 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the contents of characteristic effects among the button effects that cause the player to operate the frame button 22 will be explained.

Conventionally, some pachinko machines 10 are provided with an operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by a player, and the player can perform an operation performance in which the performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. As an operation performance, one that allows the player to operate the operation means using various operation methods has been proposed. For example, an operation performance that executes a performance by continuously operating (pressing) the operation means for a predetermined period of time has been proposed. There is (long press effect, etc.).

In this long-press performance, a performance lottery is executed when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation means was pressed, and a performance is executed based on the lottery result. In this case, if the player releases the operating means for a moment, the duration of the operation on the operating means is reset, so the period until the operation effect is executed for the player who operates the operating means again. There is a problem in that it becomes necessary to make the user wait until the time has elapsed, and the user's desire to operate the device decreases.

In addition, for such operation performances, the effective period of operation is generally specified as the performance period (the period for validly determining the operation of the operation means), and the operation effect is valid for the entire period during the effective operation period. If the configuration is such that the highest condition for the operation effect is satisfied when the operation means is operated, if the operation means is released even once during the valid operation period, it becomes impossible to satisfy the highest condition. However, there was a problem in that the player's motivation to operate the game was significantly reduced.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the operating means is operated at multiple timings within the operation validity period, and it is determined that the operating means is operated at those timings. The system is configured to perform a performance lottery in such a case. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure that a player who operates the operation means during the entire period within the valid operation period can perform the effect lottery at all timings, as before, and also Even for a player who has released the operating means, the performance lottery can be executed at all timings depending on the timing of release. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to operate the operating means again.

In addition, by configuring to determine whether or not the operating means is operated at multiple timings within the effective operation period, the operating means can be continuously operated during one effective operation period. Execute an effect to make the user operate the operating device (long press effect), execute an effect to cause the user to operate the operating means multiple times (repeated hit effect), or execute an effect to notify the timing to operate the operating means (timing press effect) You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the variations of effects that allow the player to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the player interrupts the operation on the operation means (when the player releases the frame button 22) during execution of the long-press effect, the period of continuous operation on the operation means and the operation validity are determined. Based on the remaining period of the period, different effects can be performed for the remaining operation valid period. Specifically, when a user releases the frame button 22 during a long press effect, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the continuous press effect is executed. In this way, the frame button 22 can be configured to be able to execute operation presentations indicating different operation methods (long press, continuous press) within one operation validity period depending on the operation content of the player's operation means. Since the player who has taken his hand off the player can be made to perform a new operation performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the operation performance with a new feeling.

FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a long press effect, which is one of the operation effects performed during the normal state. In FIG. 130(a), as the player continues to press the operation means (frame button 22), a gauge indicating specific stage information rises, and depending on the degree of rise of the gauge, An operation effect (long press effect) suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Specifically, in the display area HR12 formed in the center of the main display area Dm, there is a message "Press and hold to save up your spirit" as a guidance notification mode for guiding the operation method for the operation means for the operation performance being executed. "Ro" is displayed, and the long press image NG includes a button image imitating the frame button 22, a comment "Long press", and an "arrow image" schematically showing how to operate the button image. is displayed, and below it is displayed a time gauge TG for indicating the length of the operation validity period set for the current long press effect.

This time gauge TG notifies the player of the remaining operation period as the specific display area (displayed in black in the figure) decreases. Since this is just after the performance has started, most of the time gauge TG is a specific display area (displayed in black in the figure), but as time passes, the specific display area (displayed in black in the figure) changes from left to right. A variable mode in which the amount (indicated by ) decreases is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the remaining period of the valid operation period in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, of the operation validity period indicated by the time gauge TG, the elapsed period that has already passed is displayed in the elapsed display area (displayed in white in the figure). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to relatively determine how long the remaining period is with respect to the length of the entire operation valid period.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a spirit gauge KG and a boy 810 are displayed as display modes whose display modes are changed based on the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22 as a long-press effect. Ru. The spirit gauge KG has a display mode that can display stage information in five stages. In the display screen shown in FIG. 130(a), the spirit gauge KG shows the display mode in the initial stage (displayed in black in the figure), and the display mode can be changed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. When this is established, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG is variably displayed. The variable display mode of the spirit gauge KG will be described later with reference to FIG. 130(b). The spirit gauge KG is configured so that the display mode can be varied in up to 5 stages, and the upper limit stage that can be changed with the operation effect (long press effect) is set in advance according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. Set.

Specifically, the upper limit stage is set so that the number of stages in which the display mode of the spirit gauge KG can be changed is more likely to increase when the result of the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player (such as winning a jackpot). Set. With this configuration, when the long press effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be operated voluntarily so that the number of times the display mode of the spirit gauge KG changes is increased.

Further, the boy 810 is configured so that the display mode is variable in accordance with the degree of variation in the display mode of the above-mentioned spirit gauge KG. Specifically, the display mode changes so that the boy 810 is surrounded by an aura, and thereafter, each time the spirit gauge KG rises, the display mode changes so that the size of the aura increases. Thereby, the performance result of the current operation performance can be visually notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates the operating means during the long press effect, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG and the boy 810 is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the player is long pressing the frame button 22 during the long pressing effect.

As shown in FIG. 130(b), when the player performs a long-press operation on the frame button 22 during the long-press effect, the operation means (frame button 22) is operated at multiple timings within the operation validity period. Since the frame button 22 is pressed down at the determination timing to determine whether or not, it is determined that the operating means is being operated at the determination timing, and a variable lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the spirit gauge KG. It will be done. If the player wins the variable lottery, a variable effect is performed in which the amount of the spirit gauge KG increases. The example shown in FIG. 130(b) shows a state in which the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG has increased to the second stage. The boy 810 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG.

Further, the time gauge TG is displayed in a manner that indicates that the remaining period of the valid operation period is decreasing (a manner in which the area indicating the remaining period (displayed in black in the figure) is gradually decreased). Here, in this control example, as shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the remaining period of the operation validity period is shown without changing the size of the display area of the entire time gauge TG. It is configured to reduce the With this configuration, it is possible to display not only the remaining time of the valid operation period but also the elapsed time of the valid operation period (displayed in white in the figure). Therefore, even if the remaining period of the operation validity period is not indicated in a specific number of seconds, the time that has already elapsed (the white display part) is shown in relation to the entire length of the operation validity period set this time. The remaining time of the valid operation period can be easily grasped by the player by the proportions of the mode showing the remaining time and the (black display portion).

In addition, as in this control example, when the time gauge TG is used to notify the elapsed status of the effective operation period, in other words, the effective period of operation is notified based on the degree of change in the display mode, rather than the specific number of seconds. By configuring the system to notify the player of the remaining period, it is possible to notify the player of different operational validity periods using the same display mode by simply executing processing to vary the variable speed of the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control process for notifying the player of the remaining period of the valid operation period. Also in this case, as in the fifth control example, the elapsed time of the valid operation period can also be displayed, so that the remaining period of the valid operation period can be displayed to the player in accordance with the variable speed of the display mode. It can be made easier to understand.

Note that in this control example, the remaining time until the operation validity period ends is displayed (suggested) by the time gauge TG, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining seconds may be displayed as a number and counted down as time passes, so that the player can recognize the remaining operational validity period. Further, for example, the remaining time may be indicated to the player by changing the coloring of the button image included in the long-press image imitating the frame button 22 depending on the remaining operational validity period. Specifically, for example, if the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the button image is displayed in blue, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, but less than 4 seconds, the button image is displayed in green. If the remaining time is 2 seconds or more but less than 3 seconds, the button image will be displayed in yellow, and if the remaining time is 1 second or more but less than 2 seconds, the button image will be displayed in orange. However, if the remaining time is less than 1 second, the button image may be displayed in red. Further, the remaining time until the operation validity period ends does not necessarily have to be indicated to the player. By omitting the suggestion display of the remaining time of the valid operation period, display control can be simplified, and the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, when a valid operation period during which the player can operate the operation means is set, by displaying the time gauge TG, not only the remaining period of the valid operation period but also the valid operation period is set. However, in all cases where the operation validity period is set, it is not necessary to display the time gauge TG. It may be configured to be able to execute an operation effect) and an operation effect in which the time gauge TG is not displayed (hidden operation effect). With this configuration, even when the time gauge TG is not displayed, there is a possibility that the valid operation period is set, so that the player can actively operate the frame button 22.

Further, in this fifth control example, the entire operation validity period can be notified to the player by the time gauge TG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the operation validity period can be notified by the time gauge TG. It may be configured to notify. With this configuration, it is possible to leave the possibility that the operation validity period is set even before and after the time gauge TG is displayed, so that the operation means ( The player can operate the frame button 22), thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the operation effect executed when the player releases the long press operation on the frame button 22 during the long press effect will be explained. FIG. 131(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player releases the long-press operation on the frame button 22.

FIG. 131(a) shows what happens when the player cancels the long-press operation, that is, releases his/her hand from the frame button 22, when there are 6 seconds remaining in the valid operation period (10 seconds) during the long-press effect. Shows the display screen. As shown in FIG. 131(a), a continuous press image RG is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm instead of the long press image NG (see FIG. 130(a)), and a continuous press image RG is displayed above the continuous press image RG. In the display area HR12, as a guidance notification mode for guiding the user on how to operate the frame button 22, the words ``Make sure to press the remaining buttons repeatedly!!'' are displayed, which urge the user to repeatedly press the frame button 22.

By displaying this kind of display, based on the player canceling the long-press operation during the valid operation period, the operation method that the player is asked to perform during the remaining operation valid period is different from the long-press operation. It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the operation has been switched to a continuous hit operation which is a different operation method.

Then, in the state shown in FIG. 131(a), that is, in the state in which the display mode in which the operation method to be performed by the player is switched from the long press operation to the repeated hit operation, the player executes the repeated hit operation, If the operation timing matches a plurality of determination timings set within the operation validity period, the display screen shown in FIG. 131(b) is displayed. FIG. 131(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a repeated tapping operation is performed after the operation content has been switched to a repeated tapping operation during a long press effect.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), when the condition for changing the display mode is satisfied by the repeated tapping operation, the effect of increasing the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG and the effect of changing the display mode of the boy 810 are performed for a long time. Execution continues from the display mode during the push operation.

In this way, even if the content of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (frame button 22) is changed within one operation validity period, the same display mode will continue based on the operation result. By configuring the display to be displayed variably, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the operation content has changed during a series of operation performances.

As explained above, in this first control example, after performing a long press operation on the frame button 22 during the operation validity period set for the long press effect, the player releases the long press operation. In this case, the player is configured to be able to execute an effect that prompts the player to perform a continuous tap operation, which is a different operation content from a long press operation.

In other words, in an operation performance in which one operation validity period is set, first the first operation performance that prompts the first operation is executed, and the result of the first operation during the first operation performance and the remaining period of the operation validity period are calculated. Based on this, the second operation performance that prompts a second operation different from the first operation is configured to be executable within the valid operation period. With this configuration, the player can be made to operate the operating means with a plurality of operation contents within one valid operation period, so that the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, the second operation performance is configured to be executed when it is determined that the first operation cannot be executed within the operation validity period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prompt a player who has not been able to perform the first operation to perform a different operation on the operating means, compared to the case where the first operation presentation that prompts the first operation is repeatedly performed. This makes it easier for the player to operate the operating means.

In addition, the second operation performance is configured to be able to execute the second operation performance when it is determined that the remaining period of the operation validity period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period at the time when it is determined that the first operation cannot be performed. There is. As a result, even though the second operation effect has been executed, it is not possible to secure a sufficient operation validity period to make the player perform the second operation, and the player's desire to play decreases. can be suppressed.

As described above, this control example is configured to perform determination for changing the display mode at multiple timings during the operation validity period, and when it is determined that the operating means is being operated at the multiple timings, , the display mode is configured to be variable.

With this configuration, for example, as the first operation performance, a performance that prompts the player to press and hold the operation means (frame button 22) (first operation), and as the second operation performance, , even when configured to perform an effect that prompts the player to repeatedly press the operating means (frame button 22) (second operation), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may not be displayed. It is only necessary to perform a process of switching the performance mode of the operation performance from the first operation performance to the second operation performance, and it is possible to standardize the determination process regarding the operation on the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a performance that prompts the player to perform different operation contents during one valid operation period.

In addition, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the operating means is operated at a plurality of predetermined specific timings within the operation validity period, and when it is determined that the operating means is being operated, the display is Since the configuration is configured to make a determination to change the mode, even if the player is continuously operating the operating means (so-called long-press operation), the player may not be able to use the operating means. The display format is configured so that it is possible to change the display mode even when operations are performed continuously at short intervals (so-called continuous operation), but in addition to this, operations during periods other than the specific timing mentioned above are possible. A case where a determining means for determining the situation (a non-timing determining means for determining the operation status at a non-specific timing) is provided, and the operating means is operated at a specific timing based on the determination result of the non-timing determining means. It may also be configured to vary the determination content for varying the display mode executed.

Specifically, the more the operating means is operated during a non-specific timing, the easier it is to change the display mode when it is determined that the operating means is being operated at a specific timing. With this configuration, regardless of the specific timing, it is easier to change the display mode when the operation means is actively operated within the valid operation period, thereby reducing the player's participation in the game. Can increase motivation.

Further, as described above, the operation valid period is formed to include at least a first period that is a specific timing and a second period that is a non-specific timing, and it is possible to determine that the operating means is operated during the first period. A first operation determining means capable of determining and a second operation determining means capable of determining that the operating means is operated during the second period are provided, and the determination result of the first operation determining means and the second operation determining means are provided. The degree of variation of the display mode may be changed based on the result of determining the means and the content of the operation presentation (the content of the operation that the player is prompted to perform). During the period in which a push operation is encouraged, the display mode is made easier to change as the operation on the operating means is determined by the second operation determining means, and the timing for causing the player to operate the operating means only at a specific timing as the operation presentation content. During the period in which a push operation is encouraged, the display mode may be configured to be made more difficult to change as the second operation determination means determines an operation on the operation means.

By configuring in this way, the processing for determining the operation status of the player during the valid operation period is made common, and the content of the operation performance being executed corresponds to the content of the operation performed on the actual operation means. , it becomes possible to vary the degree of variation of the display mode.

In other words, since the processing for determining the operation status of the player during the valid operation period is standardized, the player can press and hold the button for a long time even if the performance prompting the timing press operation is being executed. It becomes possible to perform the operation. However, if the long press operation is performed such that the first operation determining means reliably determines that the operation has been performed on the operating means, the second operation determining means will also determine that the operation has been performed on the operating means. Therefore, when an effect that prompts a timing press operation is being executed, it is possible to change the display mode more easily by executing the corresponding timing press operation than by executing a long press operation.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player operate the operating means with enthusiasm in order to perform an operation corresponding to the instructed operation content.

In addition, when it is determined that the operation means is being operated during a non-specific timing, when executing a process that makes it difficult to change the display mode, if it is determined that the operation means is being operated during a non-specific timing, In addition, the player may execute a performance that imposes a penalty on the player (for example, a performance that reverses the degree of change in the display format or a performance that indicates that the display format has become difficult to change), or performs operations that are instructed. It is preferable to configure the system to perform a presentation that emphasizes the notification. With this configuration, it is possible to easily operate the operating means with operation content corresponding to the operation performance executed during the operation validity period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134, the flow of various effects executed in this first control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 132, the flow of the performance executed when the special symbol lottery wins the probability-variable jackpot will be explained. FIG. 132 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of effects executed during the period from when the jackpot is fluctuating until the special symbol fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (approximately 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game in the case of a probability-variable jackpot win. be.

As described above, in this first control example, the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery informs the player that the jackpot has been won with a variable probability (a jackpot in which a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game). In cases where the player is stopped and displayed with a variable probability symbol (for example, "777") to be notified, and in a case where the regular symbol (for example, "222") is difficult (or impossible) for the player to distinguish whether the player has won a probability variable jackpot or a regular jackpot. It may appear stopped.

If you win a jackpot with a normal symbol (if the third symbol indicating that you have won a jackpot is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol), the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability change state. The game state suggesting performance for suggesting whether or not there is a game is configured to be executed during a jackpot game or during a special symbol variation after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, even if you win a jackpot where the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game ends (the time saving state is set), the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends until the time saving state ends. , it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the probability variable state is set.

On the other hand, if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a probability variable pattern, at that point, that is, before the jackpot game starts, it will be announced that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, so the above-mentioned game state suggestion Without executing a performance, during a jackpot game, a jackpot performance is executed to congratulate you on winning a guaranteed variable jackpot, and even after the jackpot game is over, a gaming state confirmation effect is executed to inform you that a variable probability state has been set. It is configured to do so.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game state suggestion effect is executed even though it is notified that a variable probability state will be set after the end of a jackpot game, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), there is a jackpot variation performance that is executed during the jackpot variation of special symbols, a jackpot game performance that is executed during the jackpot game period, and a predetermined performance after the jackpot game ends. By making the presentation mode different from the first period presentation executed during the period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times), various patterns of presentation are executed.

For example, when the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won in a special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed as a variable probability symbol (777), as in "performance pattern 1" shown in FIG. 132(b), during a jackpot game, As a performance, a performance to celebrate a certain probability jackpot is executed, and an invincible mode (see "Invincible Zone" in FIG. 129(a)) is set as a first period performance after the end of the jackpot game. Then, after the special symbol variation has been executed 100 times (after the end of the first period performance), the shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

On the other hand, when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed as the normal symbol (222), as shown in "Production pattern 2" shown in FIG. 132(c), during the jackpot game An additional point acquisition performance (see Figure 121(b)) is performed as a performance, and a winning rate UP zone (see Figures 124 and 125) is created using the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is performed three times. ) is set, and then a battle mode (see FIGS. 126 to 128) is set as the first period effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 132(c), since the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is activated after the first performance period ends. Set. In this way, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, there is no chance of losing in battle during battle mode (the high probability state of normal symbols ends), so it is not possible to perform during jackpot games or in the winning rate UP zone. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute an effect indicating that the winning rate is high.

Furthermore, in this control example, an effect is executed in which lucky points are added during the battle mode (see FIG. 126), and when the lucky points reach a predetermined number (100P), the setting The configuration is such that an invincible mode (see "invincible zone" in FIG. 129(a)) indicating that the current gaming state is a variable probability state is set. In addition, the effects in which lucky points are added include a first addition effect in which a specific number (1) of lucky points are added each time a variable effect starts, and an unspecified number (1) in which lucky points are added when a winning lottery is won. 2 to 5) A second addition effect that causes addition is configured to be executable.

Therefore, as shown in "Production pattern 3" shown in FIG. 132(d), if the lucky points reach a predetermined number (100P) before the special symbol change is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, the battle starts. The mode (a performance mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the set game state is a variable probability state or a time saving state) is switched to an invincible mode (a performance mode in which it is certain that a variable probability state is set). After the first performance period ends, a shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

By configuring this way, even if a jackpot is won with a normal symbol and the battle mode is set after the jackpot game ends, the player can still expect the lucky points to reach a predetermined number (100P). You can play games.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a specific jackpot type is selected among the cases where a probability variable jackpot is won, a variable probability symbol (777) is displayed as a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot win. . After the jackpot game ends, the variable pattern for the special symbol lottery is selected by referring to the same variable pattern table as during the shortened mode.

Here, in this first control example, a battle mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a game state suggestion effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not a variable probability state is set during the battle mode. are doing. Specifically, when a variable time of 60 seconds is selected as the variable time of the special symbol lottery executed during the battle mode, a battle effect (see FIGS. 127 and 128) is executed, and the result of the battle effect is An effect that suggests the game state to the player is executed.

In other words, in order to execute a game state suggestion effect to suggest whether the game state set after the jackpot game is a variable probability state or a time saving state, a variable time of 60 seconds is selected during battle mode. It was necessary to select the variation time of the special symbol lottery by referring to the variation pattern table obtained.

On the other hand, in this control example, if a specific jackpot type is selected and the player wins a probability variable jackpot, the player is notified that it is a probability variable jackpot before the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that battle mode will not be set later. If you win a probability-variable jackpot with a specific jackpot type selected, you can execute a shortening variation by referring to the variation pattern table referred to during the shortening mode from the first special symbol drawing after the end of the jackpot game. It is composed of

That is, in this first control example, the type of the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the probability variable state is configured to be different based on the jackpot type of the probability variable jackpot. If a jackpot type that refers to the same fluctuation pattern table as when the time saving state is set is selected, an effect will be provided to notify that the current jackpot game is a guaranteed variable jackpot before the jackpot game ends. 132(b), and execute the effect to notify that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot. If not, the effect is executed according to the flow shown in FIG. 132(c).

On the other hand, if a jackpot type is selected in which a fluctuation pattern table that is not referred to when a time saving state is set is selected, the effect is executed according to the flow shown in FIG. 132(e). are doing. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to improve the time efficiency of the special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the flow of the performance executed when winning the time-saving jackpot will be explained. FIG. 133(a) schematically shows the flow of the effect executed during the period from when the jackpot fluctuation is executed to when the special symbol fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (approximately 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game when a time-saving jackpot is won. This is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), even if the time-saving jackpot is won, the performance is executed in the same flow as "performance pattern 2" (see FIG. 132(c)) when the probability-variable jackpot is won. In addition, if you win the time-saving jackpot, the battle effect that will be executed in the time-saving final variation (out of the 30th, 50th, and 80th special symbol variations, the number of variations that will become the time-saving final variation in the time-saving state set this time) This differs from the above-mentioned performance in the case of winning a certain variable jackpot in that the performance results in a "defeat" (battle performance), and then shifts to the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol will be maintained during the jackpot game period after winning the special symbol lottery by winning the special symbol lottery with a part of the performance when winning a variable jackpot and a performance when winning a time-saving jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether he has won the time-saving jackpot or the probability-variable jackpot over a period until the game ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(c), we will briefly explain the relationship between the win rate display mode (win rate display value) and the internal situation of the game among the performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. give an explanation. FIG. 133(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the win rate display format (win rate display value) and the internal situation of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(c), when a winning rate of 100% is displayed, a variable probability state is set (is being set) as the gaming state, or a jackpot is confirmed (a special It notifies the state that the symbol lottery has won a jackpot, or that the special drawing 2 pending contains information indicating that the jackpot has been won. Additionally, if a win rate of 90 to 99% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variable pattern table in which battle effects are unlikely to occur is being referenced, or a situation in which a variable pattern table in which battle effects are likely to occur is being referenced. This shows that the probability is higher than that of the game state, and the probability that the fixed variable state is (is) set as the gaming state is approximately three times the probability that the time saving state is (is) set. becomes.

If a winning rate of 60 to 89% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variable pattern table in which battle effects are likely to occur is being referenced, or a variable pattern table in which battle effects are unlikely to occur is being referenced. This indicates that the probability is higher than the probability, and the probability that the variable state is set as a gaming state is approximately twice the probability that the time saving state is set. .

If a winning rate of ~59% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variable pattern table in which battle effects are difficult to occur is being referenced, or a situation in which a variable pattern table in which battle effects are likely to occur is being referenced. In addition, the possibility that the variable probability state is set as a gaming state is the same as the possibility that the time saving state is set.

In this way, by configuring the game so that the higher the winning percentage is displayed, the higher the possibility of winning the next jackpot becomes, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(d), a brief explanation will be given of the relationship between the accumulation of lucky points and the internal situation of the game among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. FIG. 133(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the accumulation of lucky points and the internal situation of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(d), the configuration is such that the accumulation of lucky points is variable depending on the type of gaming state, and if you win the time-saving jackpot, you will have to wait until the time-saving state ends. The frequency of execution of the addition effect is varied so that the lucky points reach near the upper limit within the period. Even if a variable probability state is set, depending on the type, lucky points will be accumulated in the same way as when a time saving state of 30 time savings, 50 time savings, or 80 time savings is set (additional The amount of accumulation is varied so that Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the gaming state based on the accumulation of lucky points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given of the relationship between the timing of determining the valid operation period and the button presentation. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing of determining the valid operation period and button effects. In this control example, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the content of the operation that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 can be changed midway, depending on the content of the operation on the frame button 22 within one valid operation period. It is configured so that it can be

Here, in this control example, the operation determination timing is set at a specific timing within the operation validity period for effectively determining the operation on the frame button 22, and the operation determination timing and the operation timing on the frame button 22 are set. When there is a match, a lottery (gauge UP lottery) for changing the performance mode of the operation performance can be executed.

Then, when a long press effect (see FIG. 130) is executed as the operation effect and the frame button 22 is continuously pressed and held, the operation determination timing and the frame button 22 are Since the operation timings match, the gauge UP lottery is repeatedly executed at each operation determination timing. Then, if the player wins in the gauge up lottery, an effect is performed in which the value of the spirit gauge KG increases.

Here, if the player releases his/her hand during the valid operation period, the long press effect ends. If it is determined that there is more than half of the operation validity period remaining (5 seconds or more), a continuous hit incitement effect (see FIG. 131(a)) is executed, and the player is prompted to repeatedly press the frame button 22. will be guided. Then, if the operation timing of the repeated tapping operation (the detection timing of the frame button 22 and each operation judgment timing match), the gauge UP lottery is executed again, and if the lottery is won, the value of the spirit gauge KG increases. The performance will be executed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a normal symbol lottery is being executed as the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of that normal symbol is shown in a lit state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67, a variation is performed in which an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit as the second symbol. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and is also displayed by lighting on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the variable display of the normal symbols (second symbols) can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4, but can be 3 or less, or 5 or more times ( For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, The main control device 110 draws a special symbol, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays a display according to the lottery result. Further, the first ball entry port 64 also serves as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the ball.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed so that the jackpot symbol is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

It should be noted that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A special gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may also be formed.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a are guided to a ball ejection path (not shown) through an out port 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 119, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 135). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 135). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 137 to 140. As shown in FIG. 137, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variable pattern as part of the fixed value data. At least a selection table 202d and a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e are stored.

The first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. The details will be described later together with the explanation of the first winning random number counter C1, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is one of the judgment values specified in the first winning random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

Specifically, a value that is determined as a jackpot is commonly defined for each symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if the state of the special symbol is a low probability state, , when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0", if the state of the special symbol is a high probability state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 5". , a random number value (first winning random number counter value) that is determined to be a jackpot is defined.

Since the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 299", the probability of a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300, and the probability of a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. The probability of being judged is 6/300 (1/50).

The first winning type selection table 202b (FIG. 137(c)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type. They are defined in correspondence. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol lottery (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", it is a jackpot. If it is determined to be A1 (10 rounds guaranteed variable jackpot), and it is in the range of "55 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot A2 (10 rounds guaranteed variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 64", it is a jackpot. If it is determined to be A3 (10 rounds guaranteed variable jackpot) and in the range of "65 to 69", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (10 rounds shortened time 30 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "70 to 74" , it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (10 rounds shortened time, 30 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "75-84", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds shortened time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "85-89". If it is in the range, it is determined that it is a jackpot C2 (10 rounds shortened time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90 to 94", it is determined that it is a jackpot D1 (10 rounds shortened time 80 times jackpot), and "95 99'', it is determined to be a jackpot D2 (10 rounds shortened time 80 times jackpot) (see FIG. 137(c)).

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of jackpot types are provided in which the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game are the same. The details will be described later, but in this control example, when selecting the variation time of the special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state or the probability variation state, a different data table (variation pattern table) is used depending on the selected jackpot type. It is configured for reference.

For example, when winning a "10 round guaranteed variable jackpot", the system is configured so that a special symbol variation with a long variation time is more likely to be executed if the jackpot type is "jackpot A1" than if it is "jackpot A3". .

In addition, when "Jackpot A1", "Jackpot B1", and "Jackpot C1" are selected as the jackpot type, the same data table (variation pattern table 1) is referred to, and "Jackpot A2" and "Jackpot B2" are selected. , When "Jackpot C2" is selected, the same data table (variation pattern table 2) is referred to, and when "Jackpot A3" is selected, a dedicated data table (variation pattern table 3) is referred to. Ru.

With this configuration, during the period in which the production modes (win rate UP zone, battle mode) described above with reference to FIG. 124 to FIG. It is possible to prevent the game state in which the player is playing from being grasped.

In addition, the above-mentioned variation pattern table 1 is defined so that the variation time of 60 seconds is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table 2 when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and the variation pattern table 3 is stipulated so that the variable time of 60 seconds will not be selected if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Here, in this control example, when a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation, the battle effect is executed.

In other words, the battle performance is a performance that is executed when the 60 second special symbol variation is selected. If the result of the special symbol lottery with a variable time of 60 seconds is a jackpot, "win" will be selected as the result of the battle performance, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, If the special symbol lottery (variation) is a special symbol lottery (variation) that ends the time-saving condition, that is, if it is the special symbol variation for the number of times the time-saving condition ends, "defeat" is selected as the performance result of the battle performance, and otherwise ( If it is a special symbol lottery (variation) (other than the number of times the time saving ends), "Continue" is selected as the performance result of the battle performance.

Therefore, depending on which variation pattern table you refer to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol lottery, the selection ratio of the 60 second variation to the winning winnings differs, so as a result, the battle production (production results) during the battle mode You can change the frequency of appearance of battle effects (in which battle effects are "continued"). Thereby, during the battle mode, the number of special symbol drawings that can be executed within a unit period can be varied depending on the referenced variation pattern table.

In addition, since it is possible to reduce the number of times a battle performance is performed where the performance result is "continue", it is possible to increase the percentage of "win" or "defeat" being selected when a battle performance is performed. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the performance during the battle performance.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern table that is referred to when winning "Jackpot A3", it is specified that the variation time of 60 seconds will not be selected if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and It is configured so that a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure than in other variation pattern tables. Thereby, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time can be increased. In addition, when this "Jackpot A3" is selected, before the special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed, an effect will be executed to notify that the current jackpot is a guaranteed strange jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game. A shortening zone (see FIG. 129(b)) is set.

Specifically, the stop display mode of "777" indicating a probability variable jackpot is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the winning rate executed during a jackpot game is displayed. In the UP performance, the winning rate increases to ``100%'' and a performance is executed to notify that the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 138(a)). Furthermore, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 138(a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is It determines whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 138(b), (c), and 139(a) to (c)) shows that the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is determined for each display mode. These are the data tables specified for each. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the explanation of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation pattern scenario selection table 202e selects the type of variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of special symbol variation, based on the set gaming state (jackpot type of the previous jackpot won) and after the jackpot game ends. This is a data table that is defined in correspondence with the number of special symbol changes from . By using this variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, it becomes possible to easily set a specific variation pattern (variation time) for a predetermined number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. Note that the detailed contents of this variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 150), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 159). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are respectively stored in accordance with the ball entry timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, in which the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are targets for executing the lottery, are stored. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and game balls are stored in each of these areas. The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry gate (through gate) 67.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through any one of the normal entry gates (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 159).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (or the execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not in progress) of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (or the execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not in progress) of the RAM 203. Stored.

The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is determined by the value of the first winning random number counter C1. is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (a period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). It is divided into two types: one for the period when the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of random numbers that will be a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

In addition, in this control example, the random number value (value "0" of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot when the special symbol is in a low probability state is determined to be a jackpot when the special symbol is in a high probability state. They are used as random numbers, but the random numbers that result in a jackpot are stored in the first random number table for low probability times, and the random numbers that result in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability times. Random values for each jackpot may be defined so that there are no duplicate values. By configuring in this way, as in this control example, depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to generate a random number that results in a jackpot. By changing the numerical value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random numerical value that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (hereinafter referred to as , various starting ball entrances) are stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) at the timing of winning a prize.

Here, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. If not, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the first winning type stored in the same each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b). The display mode is as indicated by the value of the counter C2.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. As described above with reference to FIG. 137(c), in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", the jackpot A1 If it is in the range of "55 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot A2 (10 rounds probability and variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 64", it is judged to be a jackpot A3. (10 round probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of ``65-69'', it is judged to be a jackpot B1 (10 rounds short time 30 jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``70 to 74'', If it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (10 rounds shortened time 30 times jackpot) and is in the range of "75 to 84", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds shortened time 50 times jackpot) and is in the range "85 to 89". If it is in the range of "90-94", it is determined to be a jackpot C2 (10 rounds shortened time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90-94", it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (10 rounds shortened time 80 times jackpot), and "95-94". 99'', it is determined that it is a jackpot D2 (10 rounds shortened time, 80 jackpots) (see FIG. 137(c)). In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has nine types of winnings (jackpot A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2) depending on the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, 98, 99), which stops at the reach, and ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, including a "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol in the RAM 203 is reserved. The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored in the ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front/back off reach" becomes narrow to 98, 99, and the "front/back off reach" also narrows to 90-97, making it difficult for "front/back off reach" or "front/back off reach" to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79. ``Completely off'' is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide, from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 159) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 138(b), (c), FIG. 139(a)) stores a random number value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1. - (c)) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as described above.

Here, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 138(b), (c), and FIGS. 139(a) to (c). As shown in FIG. 138(b), this variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 138(c)), a first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 (see FIG. 139(a)), The second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 (see FIG. 139(b)), the probability variation table 202d4 (see FIG. 139(c)), the first specific variation table 202d5 (see FIG. 139(d)), and the second It has at least a specific variation table 202d6.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 138(c). FIG. 138(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for special symbol fluctuations when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state. be.

Specifically, regardless of the symbol type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), if the winning/failure determination result is "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49". The range is jackpot variation A (30 seconds), the range "50-99" is jackpot variation B (60 seconds), and the range "100-198" is jackpot variation C (90 seconds). They are defined in correspondence.

In addition, if the validity judgment result is "off", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 99", and the variation A (10 seconds) is out of the range of "100 to 169". Variation B (30 seconds) falls outside the range of "170 to 198", and variation C (60 seconds) is defined in association with each other.

In addition, in this control example, the contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that a common variation pattern is selected for the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the special symbol. Without limitation, the contents of the variation pattern table may be defined so that different variation patterns can be selected for each symbol type of the special symbol. In addition, in this control example, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table are defined so that a common fluctuation pattern is selected no matter what value the number of reserved special symbols is, but the content is not limited to this, for example. It may be configured such that when the number of reserved special symbols is large, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of reserved special symbols is small. As a result, when the number of special symbols reserved is large (for example, the maximum number of special symbols reserved is acquired), the special symbols will fluctuate long, and there will be a period in which new special symbols cannot be acquired. can be prevented from being set for a long time.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 138(b). FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 138(b), the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1, a first time saving/probable variable table 202d2, a second time saving/probable variable table 202d3, a definite variable table 202d4, and a first specific table. A variation table 202d5 and a second specific variation table 202d6 are defined.

Next, the contents of the normal table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 138(c). FIG. 138(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol selected in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as the gaming state. It is a data table. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot variation A (30 seconds) is in the range, and the judgment value in the range of "50 to 99" is the jackpot variation. B (60 seconds) is in the range of "100 to 198", jackpot fluctuation C (90 seconds) is defined, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " Variation A (10 seconds) is outside the range of 0 to 99, fluctuation B (30 seconds) is outside the range of 100 to 169, and fluctuation C (60 seconds) is outside the range of 170 to 198. is stipulated.

Next, the contents of the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 139(a). FIG. 139(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2. This first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 shows the type of variation pattern (variation time) indicating the lottery result of a special symbol selected in a part of the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of normal symbols as a gaming state. This is a defined data table and is referenced based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as jackpot fluctuation B (60 seconds) in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the result of the special symbol lottery is If the result is incorrect, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is outside the range of "0 to 99" for short fluctuation (5 seconds), and the judgment value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is outside the range of "100 to 149" for fluctuation A (10 seconds). However, an outlier variation C (60 seconds) is defined in the range of "150 to 198".

Next, the contents of the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 139(b). FIG. 139(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3. This second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 shows the type of variation pattern (variation time) indicating the lottery result of a special symbol selected in a part of the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of normal symbols as a gaming state. This is a defined data table and is referenced based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as jackpot fluctuation B (60 seconds) in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the result of the special symbol lottery is If the result is out of range, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 196" for short fluctuation (5 seconds), and out of the range of "197", fluctuation A (10 seconds) is out of the range of "198". ”, a deviation variation C (60 seconds) is specified.

As described above, the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is more likely to be selected in the event of a losing election than the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3. ing. In this control example, a battle effect is executed when a 60 second variation pattern is selected in a battle mode executed during a high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is more easily executed than the second time saving/probability variation table 202d3.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202d4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 139(c). FIG. 139(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the probability variation table 202d4. This probability variation table 202d4 shows the type (variation time) of the variation pattern indicating the lottery result of the special symbol selected in a part of the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) as the game state. This is a defined data table and is referenced based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the entire range of "0 to 198" with a fluctuation pattern (short jackpot fluctuation, short loss fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds. stipulated. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute a time-efficient special symbol lottery.

Next, the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 139(d). FIG. 139(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5. This first specific fluctuation table 202d5 shows the type of fluctuation pattern ( This is a data table in which a variation time) is defined, and is referenced based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as a specific variation A (11 seconds) in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol lottery is If the result is incorrect, the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 will be in the range of "0 to 2" for specific variation A (11 seconds) and in the range of "3 to 198" for specific variation B (10 seconds). stipulated.

Next, the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6 will be explained with reference to FIG. 139(e). FIG. 139(e) is a diagram showing the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6. This second specific fluctuation table 202d6 shows the types of fluctuation patterns (variation time ) is a defined data table, and is referenced based on a scenario defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in the entire range of "0 to 198" for the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. By defining the second specific variation table 202d6 in this way, when a variation pattern is determined (selected) with reference to the second specific variation table 202d6, a variation time of 60 seconds can be determined without fail. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute battle effects.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 140, various variation patterns are defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e in correspondence with the gaming state (the jackpot type of the previous jackpot won) and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. has been done.

Specifically, when the gaming state is normal (normal state), the scenario is defined such that the normal table 202d1 is referred to when the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1~". There is.

When the gaming state is probability change 1 (jackpot A1), the first specific variation table 202d5 will be set to ``4 to 29, 31 to 49, 51'' when the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of ``1 to 3''. The first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is in the range of "~79, 81 to 100", the second specific variation table 202d6 is in the range of "30, 50, 80", and the probability variation table 202d4 is in the range of "101~". Scenarios are defined for reference.

In addition, when the gaming state is Probability Variation 2 (Jackpot A2), the first specific variation table 202d5 is "4 to 29, 31 to 49" when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 3". , 51 to 79, 81 to 100'', the second time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is in the range of ``30, 50, 80'', and the second specific variation table 202d6 is in the range of ``101 to''. The scenario is defined so that 202d4 is referenced.

When the game state is probability variation 3 (jackpot A3), the scenario is defined such that the probability variation table 202d4 is referred to when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1~".

On the other hand, when the gaming state is Time Saving 1 (Jackpot B1, Jackpot C1, Jackpot D1), the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 is set to "4" when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 3". 29, 31 to 49, 51 to 79, 81 to 100", the first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 is referenced, and the second specific variation table 202d6 is referenced in the range of "30, 50, 80". A scenario is defined.

In addition, if the gaming state is Time Saving 2 (Jackpot B2, Jackpot C2, Jackpot D2), the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 will be set as "4 to The scenario is such that the second short and definite variation table 202d2 is referenced in the range of "29, 31 to 49, 51 to 79, 81 to 100", and the second specific variation table 202d6 is referenced in the range of "30, 50, 80". is stipulated.

Returning to FIG. 136, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the right or left normal ball entry gate (through gate) 67. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally results in a winning symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second winning random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this second winning random number table is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As mentioned above with reference to FIG. 138(a), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (FIG. 138(a) )reference). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random winning counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbols. A fluctuating display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol hits. Although the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open and close, the opening time and number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" (see FIG. 138(a)). These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbols. A fluctuating display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the second ball entrance 640 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the probability of the normal symbol is low, and furthermore, the second ball entry port 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 159).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 135, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 136, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 159) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 158). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 157) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, probability variable flag 203h, time saving counter 203i, ball entry standby flag 203j, jackpot start flag 203k and a medium jackpot flag 203m.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type. Each value of a counter C2 and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the first special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area 203c, the first reserved area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, in this control example, the winning data is not stored in any of the holding areas of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special Even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) in a state where symbol variation is not being executed, the winning data is stored in the first reservation area, and then the winning data is By configuring it to shift to the execution area 203c, the process for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is standardized (unified process for storing the winning data that was stored in the first pending area). However, the configuration is such that the inability of the main control device 110 to perform processing is reduced; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 in a state where winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c. When winning a prize (starting winning), the winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data that is immediately shifted to the execution area 203c in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type. Each value of a counter C2 and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area 640). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the second special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area 203c, the first reserved area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, in this control example, the winning data is not stored in any holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special Even if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) in a state where symbol variation is not being executed, the winning data is stored in the first pending area, and then the winning data is By configuring it to shift to the execution area 203c, the process for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is standardized (unified process for storing the winning data that was stored in the first pending area). However, the configuration is such that the inability of the main control device 110 to perform processing is reduced; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state where winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c. When winning a prize (starting winning), the winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data immediately shifted to the execution area 203c in the first reservation area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this first control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery may not be executed simultaneously. It is configured so that it does not exist. In other words, when the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c (the special symbol lottery is not being executed), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is given priority over the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. It is determined whether the winning data is stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and if it is determined that it is stored, the winning data stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is transferred to the execution area. Shift to 203c. On the other hand, if it is determined that winning data is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, then the winning data is stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. If it is determined that it is stored, the winning data stored in the first reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area 203c.

In this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed according to the predetermined priority order without overlapping the execution period for multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). In the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to execute the game, it is preferable to provide one common execution area 203c as in this control example, instead of using a corresponding execution area for each special symbol type. . As a result, an abnormality occurs in the processing of the main controller 110, and a situation occurs in which winning data is stored in the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and the execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. can be reliably prevented.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. Apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is held is predicted (estimated) from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is held, various information that would be obtained when the original lottery was held is calculated based on the data corresponding to the starting winnings (values of each counter C1 to C3). Hereinafter, prediction will be described as pre-reading the lottery results of special symbols. Note that the various information includes validity, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223 as winning information. 223a.

In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading process uses various data (values of each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the starting winnings to determine in advance the information that will be obtained when the special symbol lottery is actually executed. (pre-read) processing is executed on the main control device 110 side, and the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command that includes information indicating the result of the pre-read processing (pre-determination result). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 sets a winning information command that includes information indicating various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the starting winning, and the winning In the process of the audio lamp control device 113 that receives the information command, various data (values of the counters C1 to C3) included in the winning information command may be read in advance.

With this configuration, there is no need to execute advance determination (read ahead) processing on the main control device 110 side, so that the burden of control processing on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In this case, instead of including the various data acquired based on the starting winnings (values of each counter C1 to C3) as they are in the winning information command, the various data acquired based on the starting winnings (each value of each counter The contents of each value of C1 to C3) may be processed to the extent that it can be specified on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and then included in the winning information command.

In this way, instead of including the information (random value) whose value is updated by the update processing periodically executed in the main control device 110 in the winning information command as it is, the information that has been processed is used to enter the winning information command. By configuring it to be included in the information command, even if an act of illegally acquiring the command (winning information command) output from the main controller 110 is performed, the information command will not be included in the acquired winning information command. It is possible to prevent the specifications of the update process executed by the main control device 110 from being analyzed from the information provided.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 1). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is stored in other holding areas. Shift processing is performed to shift the winning data to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e displays a variable display ( This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added up to (see S404 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 151).

The value of this first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 151). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203e is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the pitch deviates from the pitch, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has the same function as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e described above, except that the target is switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. A reserved ball of a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (a variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the ball entrance 640 (starting winning) This is a counter that counts the number of times (the number of times of waiting) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added up to (see S410 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 151).

The value of this second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved balls N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 151 and S411 in FIG. 153). ). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203f is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the second special symbol held ball counter 203f is changed. The value of the number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the pitch deviates from the pitch, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command (see FIG. 120(b)). ).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g maximizes the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the regular symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 156). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S505 in FIG. 155).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second winning random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S605 in FIG. 156). On the other hand, if the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entry port 67 and the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d. (S603 in FIG. 156: No).

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special This indicates that the probability of the symbol is changing, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). This probability change flag 203h is initially set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 160). On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, it is set to off when setting the start of the jackpot (see S213 in FIG. 151).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if its state is on, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for high probability times, while the state of the probability variation flag 203h is If it is off, a special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for low probability times (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 152).

The time saving medium counter 203i is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of normal symbols. The initial value of this time-saving medium counter 203i is set to zero, and when a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 and a jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game is won, the time-saving counter 203i wins. A value indicating the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot game (see S1013 in FIG. 160). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

In this control example, there are multiple jackpot types with different number of time savings, and if you win "Jackpot B1" and "Jackpot B2", you will win 30 time savings, "Jackpot C1", and "Jackpot C2". If so, the number of time savings is set to 50, and if the "jackpot D1" or "jackpot D2" is won, the number of time savings is set to 80, so the corresponding values are set in the time savings counter 203i. Then, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed (when it is time to stop and display the special symbol variation), the value of the time saving counter 203i is subtracted by 1.

When a winning lottery with a normal symbol is held, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more or the state of the probability change flag 203h is on. If so, it is determined that the state is a high probability state with a normal symbol. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability winning (see S509 in FIG. 155). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0 and the state of the probability change flag 203h is OFF, it is determined that the symbol is in a low probability state with a normal symbol, and the second winning random number table for low probability times is determined. , a lottery of normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 155).

Although the entry standby flag 203j is not used in this control example, it is a flag for indicating a state in which a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating the jackpot win. This ball entry standby flag 203j is set so that, for example, a jackpot game is executed when a ball enters a specific area (activated winning hole) after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating jackpot winning. This flag is used to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 configured as shown in FIG. If this ball entry waiting flag 203j is on, it means that the game is in a jackpot waiting state, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a jackpot waiting state. This entry standby flag 203j is set to ON when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has elapsed. Further, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to OFF when a game ball enters the operating winning hole during the jackpot waiting state. While this ball entry standby flag 203j is on, the ball entering the operating winning hole is treated as valid (when the ball entering is detected, a jackpot is started).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203k is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a special symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set.

The jackpot flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If this jackpot flag 203m is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203m becomes a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) starts. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state). In the special symbol variation process, this jackpot flag 203m is referred to to determine whether or not it is a jackpot.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 135, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the solenoid 209, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and controls to these via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power outage processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and continuous preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Here, with reference to FIG. 142, details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. First, FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a, a winning rate selection table 222b, a lucky point selection table 222c, a gauge increase lottery table 222d, and an additional lottery table 222e. There is.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. It will be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation pattern) is selected from among the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a. The detailed display mode of the performance is extracted (specified) (see S5205 in FIG. 174). Among the variation patterns defined in this variation pattern table 222a, for the variation pattern corresponding to the super reach with a variation time of at least 60 seconds, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-mentioned battle effect (see FIGS. 127 and 128). It also includes information to show.

The winning rate selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the upper limit value of the battle winning rate indicating the performance result of the battle performance executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol. The details of this win rate selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 143.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the contents specified in the winning rate selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 143, in this win rate selection table 222b, the upper limit value of the battle win rate is defined in correspondence with the determined jackpot type and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f.

Here, the above-mentioned battle production is executed when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as a variation pattern of special symbol variation during the period when the battle mode is set, and the production differs depending on the gaming situation. This is a performance where the results are displayed. Specifically, if a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected for a special symbol lottery that won a jackpot, the performance result of "win" will be a variation pattern of 60 seconds for a special symbol lottery that won a jackpot. If the second fluctuation pattern is selected, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not, and if it is determined that the time saving state ends with this special symbol variation, the production result of "defeat" is changed to the time saving state. If it is determined that the process does not end, a “Continue” effect is displayed.

In other words, during the variable probability state, "defeat" is not set as the result of the battle production, and during the time saving state, "defeat" is set in the variable production corresponding to the special symbol variation that ends the time saving state. It is configured so that In other words, when a variable probability state is set, it is more likely that "defeat" will be selected as the result of the battle production, and "victory" will be more likely to be set as a result than when a time-saving state is set. .

In this way, since it is determined whether or not you will win (or lose) in the battle performance depending on the game state that is actually set, the winning rate for that battle performance is determined based on the type of jackpot. Then, the win rate addition effect with the determined winning rate as the upper limit (point acquisition effect during jackpot games (see Figure 121(b)), win rate UP effect executed during the win rate UP zone (see Figures 124 and 125) ), it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this first control example, the battle effect is executed when the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the battle mode is 60 seconds, and the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e ( (see FIG. 140), the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation is selected using different variation pattern tables depending on the determined jackpot type.

The ease with which a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds can be selected is varied depending on the type of variation pattern table that is referred to. In other words, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected by referring to a variation pattern table in which it is difficult to select, it is possible to make it difficult for a battle effect to appear during the battle mode. Furthermore, the variation pattern table in which it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds will be more easily referenced when the fixed variation state is set as the gaming state than when the time saving state is set. It consists of With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, the production is configured to execute a production that numerically indicates a "winning rate" as information to indicate the degree of expectation that the production result of the battle production will be a "win", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is configured to execute a performance that indicates information indicating the degree of expectation that the performance result of the battle performance will not be "defeat", that is, the degree of expectation that the performance result will be "win" or "continuation". In this case, it is better to have a battle performance where the performance result is "continue", that is, a state in which a fluctuation pattern table is referred to in which a 60 second fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected in a special symbol fluctuation where the time-saving end condition is not satisfied. In a battle production where the production result is "Continue", that is, in a special symbol variation where the time-saving end condition is not met, the 60-second variation pattern is difficult to select, so that it shows a higher level of expectation than the state where the variation pattern table is referred to. It is a good idea to set the content of the performance.

To give a detailed explanation of the contents stipulated in the variable pattern scenario selection table 202e, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A1", that is, it is a jackpot type in which the probability is variable and the battle production is likely to be executed during the battle mode, If the value of the obtained production counter 223f is in the range of 0 to 39, the winning rate (upper limit) is 50% or less, and if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of 40 to 79, the winning rate (upper limit) is 60% to 89%. However, the winning rate (upper limit) is set to ``100%'' in the range of ``80 to 94'', and the winning rate (upper limit) to ``90 to 99%'' is specified in the range of ``95'' to ``99''. .

In addition, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A2", that is, it is a jackpot type in which the probability is variable and the battle effect is difficult to be executed during the battle mode, the winning rate is within the range of 0 to 39 if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "100%" is the winning rate (upper limit), "90% to 99%" is the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "40 to 79", and "60%" is the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "80 to 94". % to 89%" and "to 59%" as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "95" to "99".

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1, C1, D1", that is, it is a jackpot type in which the battle effect is likely to be executed in a time-saving state and during the battle mode, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". The winning rate (upper limit) is "~59%" for the range "40-79", the winning rate (upper limit) is "~59%" for the range "80-94", and the winning rate (upper limit) is "59%" for the range "40-79" 60% to 89%" and "90 to 99%" as the winning percentage (upper limit) in the range of "95" to "99".

In addition, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot B2, C2", that is, it is a jackpot type in which it is difficult to execute a battle effect during the time-saving state and during the battle mode, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". The win rate (upper limit) is "~59%", the win rate (upper limit) is in the range "40-79", the win rate (upper limit) is "60%-89%", and the win rate (upper limit) is in the range "80-94". ``90% to 99%'' is defined as the winning rate, and ``90% to 99%'' is defined as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of ``95'' to ``99.''

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot D2", that is, it is a jackpot type in which it is difficult to execute a battle effect during the time-saving state and during the battle mode, the winning rate is within the range of 0 to 39 if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set. The winning rate (upper limit) is ``~59%'', the winning rate (upper limit) is ``90%~99%'' in the range ``40~79'', and the winning rate (upper limit) is ``80~94''. 60% to 89%, and 59% as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of 95 to 99.

As explained above, the win rate selection table 222b is configured so that the win rate (upper limit value) "100%" is selected only for the jackpot type for which the variable probability state is set. Therefore, even though 100% is displayed as the battle win rate, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the result of the battle performance is "defeat".

In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) that refer to variable pattern tables that are difficult to execute battle effects are better than the jackpot types (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1) are configured so that a higher winning rate (90 to 99%, etc.) is more likely to be selected. In other words, if a jackpot type (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) that refers to a variable pattern table in which a battle production is difficult to execute is selected, the production result will be compared to the appearance rate of the overall battle production. Since the proportion of battle performances in which "win" is high, the configuration is such that a high winning rate is more likely to be selected.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily associate the winning rate displayed at the time when the battle performance is executed with the performance result of the actual battle performance, so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to make the player interested in the effect displayed in which the winning rate increases.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when winning a jackpot with a large number of time savings (for example, jackpot Dm), a higher winning rate (upper value) is configured so that it is easy to select. In other words, when a long time saving number is set, the number of special symbol drawings that will be executed until the battle production where the production result is "defeat" is executed (until the time saving state ends) will be greater. , During that time, the possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery increases. Therefore, when a time-saving state is set, the configuration is such that a high winning rate is more likely to be selected for a time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to satisfy than for a time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving end condition is easy to satisfy. By doing so, it is possible to easily associate the winning rate displayed at the time the battle performance is executed with the performance result of the actual battle performance, so that the win rate displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be It is possible to make players interested in performances that increase the winning rate.

In addition, in this control example, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a variable number of end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is set, but other time-saving end conditions are set. For example, it may be possible to set a lottery result end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a specific lottery result reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In this control example, "Jackpot A1" to "Jackpot A3" can be set as the jackpot type for which the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, but if "Jackpot A3" is set as the jackpot type The game is configured such that a performance mode (shortened mode) in which no battle performance is executed after the end of the jackpot game is set. Therefore, the win rate selection table 222b does not specify a value corresponding to "jackpot A3".

The lucky point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when determining the value of lucky points to be added and displayed during the high probability state of the normal symbol. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the value determined as the upper limit of the lucky points that will be added and displayed during the high probability state of the normal symbol this time (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) and the currently displayed value. The difference value between the current lucky point value (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r), the number of short time remaining (short time remaining), and the jackpot type (jackpot type set when winning the jackpot last time) ), and the value of the lucky points to be added and displayed in the addition display effect is defined.

In this control example, the effect of adding and displaying lucky points is executed during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and when the lucky points reach 100P, the probability variable state is It is configured to be able to notify the player that the settings have been made. In other words, the configuration is such that the lucky points cannot reach 100P when the time saving state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lucky points from reaching 100P except when the variable probability state is set.

However, even if the time saving state is set, if the addition display effect is not executed so that the lucky points reach around 100P during the time saving, the player will be notified of the currently set gaming state. There is a problem in that it is immediately determined whether the system is in a variable probability state or in a time saving state, resulting in a reduction in the performance effect of the addition display performance in which the addition display of lucky points is executed.

Therefore, in this first control example, the value determined as the upper limit value (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) and the value of the lucky point currently displayed (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r) are used. The system is configured to determine the value of lucky points to be awarded in the addition display performance based on the difference value from the current value) and the number of short remaining hours (short remaining time).

With this configuration, even if the time saving state is set with a small number of time saving times (for example, 30 times), it is easy to reach the lucky points near 100 (up to the upper limit) during the time saving state. be able to.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving states with different number of time saving times as in this first control example, if the lucky points reach around 100 (up to the upper limit) during the time saving. If the performance mode of the addition display performance is determined to make it easier, the addition display performance will be executed in which the degree of addition of lucky points clearly differs depending on the set number of time reductions. Therefore, a new problem may arise in that the game state may be easily determined by the player depending on the content of the addition display performance that is executed.

On the other hand, in the present first control example, a production pattern can be set for the addition display production that is executed when a variable probability state is set. Specifically, even in a variable probability state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, a value for performance can be set as the value of the number of remaining time reductions (remaining time short period), and the number of time reductions is 30. A production pattern in which lucky points are added at the same addition level as in the time saving state where the number of time reductions is set, a production pattern in which lucky points are added at the same addition degree as in the time saving state in which the number of time reductions is set to 50 times, a production pattern in which the number of time reductions is 80 It is configured such that it is possible to set a performance pattern in which lucky points are added at the same addition degree as in the time-saving state in which times are set.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the addition display performance during the variable probability state with the same addition degree (addition mode) as when the time saving state is set, so that the player is not informed of the addition display performance. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current game state based on the content of the performance.

In addition, the first control example is configured to be able to execute an addition display effect using a performance pattern that can be executed when a time saving state is set with a different number of working hours from the actually set number of working time saving states. ing. Specifically, when a time saving state with 50 time saving times is set, at a rate of about 80%, when the production pattern corresponding to the 50 time saving times, that is, the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, A production pattern of the addition display production that allows the lucky points to reach the upper limit is set, and at a rate of about 10%, the production pattern corresponding to the number of time savings is 30 times, and at a rate of about 10%, the number of time savings is 80 times. It is configured so that a corresponding performance pattern is set.

With this configuration, the addition display effect that adds lucky points at a timing different from the timing when the time saving end condition is actually met is executed, making it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of time saving times. can do. Furthermore, even though the number of time reductions is set to 50, if the addition display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the number of time reductions is set to 30, the 30th special symbol change will end. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol continues even after the game is finished, the player can be made to think that a variable probability state is being set instead of the time saving state where the number of time savings is 30 times. In addition, even though the number of time reductions is set to 50, if the addition display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the number of time reductions is set to 80, the lucky points will reach around 100. Since the time-saving state ends before the end of the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to grasp when the time-saving state ends, and an unexpected performance can be provided.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the upper limit of lucky points during the time saving state is set to a value around 100, and a value significantly different from 100 (for example, around 50). ) is set as the upper limit value. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to know when the time saving state ends, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

The gauge increase lottery table 222d is a data table that is referred to when executing the increase lottery to determine whether or not to increase the spirit gauge KG in the operation performance (long press performance) described above with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. be. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the success or failure of the upward lottery is defined in accordance with the value of the obtained performance counter 223f, and a performance mode is set in which the spirit gauge KG is increased when a winner is won in the upward lottery. Ru. This gauge increase lottery table 222d calculates the value of the production counter 223f corresponding to the increase lottery according to the number of stages of the variable mode in the performance being executed, the current variable stage, and the result (win or failure) of the special symbol lottery. It is stipulated that the higher the number of stages that can be increased from the current variable stage, the easier it is to win the upward lottery when you have won a special symbol lottery. There is.

The additional lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the additional performance when the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied during the jackpot game. In this first control example, the presentation modes of the additional presentation include an additional presentation for liveliness (see FIG. 122(b)) and an additional presentation for increasing the winning rate of the battle presentation to be executed later (see FIG. 121(b)). ) and are configured to be executable. In other words, the benefit (degree of advantage) given to the player differs depending on the performance mode of the additional performance selected with reference to the additional lottery table 222e.

Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a valid flag. Period timer 223e, performance counter 223f, performance information storage area 223g, additional performance information storage area 223h, winning rate variable flag 223i, upper limit winning rate storage area 223j, display winning rate storage area 223k, lottery number counter 223m. , confirmation flag 223n, high probability flag 223p, upper limit point storage area 223q, display point storage area 223r, press timer 223s, long press flag 223t, press release flag 223u, continuous hit effect flag 223v, upper limit At least a gauge amount storage area 223w, a gauge counter 223x, a time saving number counter 223y, a state storage area 223aa, and an arrival flag 223ab are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired according to the starting winning. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is , is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and converts the winning information into the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110, is connected to the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device). 81), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The value of 203f cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the first special symbol fluctuation is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable manner is added due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the number of reserved balls is subtracted by executing the second special symbol variation in the main controller 110, , transmits a held ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203f after addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the first special symbol held ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol held number counter 203e of the main control device 110 based on the held ball number command. The value of the ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4408 in FIG. 166). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of held pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays the number of reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being synchronized with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4402 in FIG. 166), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S5203 in FIG. 174). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 162). The information is sent to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4405 in FIG. 166), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S5217 in FIG. 174). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5219 in FIG. 174).

The valid period timer 223e is a timer for measuring the valid period of operation during which the operation of the frame button 22 by the player can be effectively determined. While the validity period timer 223e is measuring the period (while the value of the validity period timer 223e is greater than 0), it means that the operation is valid, and the validity period timer 223e is not measuring the period. If not (if the value of the valid period timer 223e is 0), it means that the operation is not valid. This validity period timer 223e is set to a value corresponding to the operation validity period of the operation performance that is executed when it is determined that the start timing of the operation performance (long press performance) that is executed as a variable performance has arrived. Then, in the effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165) that is executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the valid period timer 223e is updated (subtracted) ( (See S4303 in FIG. 165). Then, in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (see S4007 in FIG. 163), it is referenced when determining whether the current operation is valid (S4101 in FIG. 163).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This performance counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range from 0 to 99, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 162) is executed. . Note that the performance counter 223f has separate counters for each type of performance.

The performance information storage area 223g is a storage area for temporarily storing the content of the performance executed (set) in the pachinko machine 10, and includes, for example, the content of the performance executed during a jackpot game. Information indicating the content (performance information) is stored and is referred to when setting the performance mode after the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, when winning a probability variable jackpot, depending on the content of the performance executed during the first period (for example, during the jackpot game), the second period after the first period (for example, when the jackpot game ends) The system is configured to determine the performance mode of the performance to be performed after (after). More specifically, in the event that you win a guaranteed variable jackpot, if it is announced that the current jackpot is a guaranteed variable jackpot before the end of the jackpot game (until the end of the first period), then in the second period If the effect that notifies the player that the game is in a variable probability state is executed, and it is not notified that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot until the end of the jackpot game (until the end of the first period), In the second period, a suggestion effect for suggesting whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state is executed.

In this way, depending on the content of the performance performed during the first period (for example, during a jackpot game), the performance of the performance that is performed during the second period (for example, after the end of the jackpot game) after the first period By configuring the mode to be determined, after executing a notification effect that clearly informs the player of the content regarding the specific information (information indicating the gaming status), the content regarding the specific information (information indicating the gaming status) is displayed. It is possible to suppress the execution of suggestive effects that suggest.

The additional performance information storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the content (type) of the additional performance executed during the jackpot game, and is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the content (type) of the additional performance executed during the jackpot game. Each time, information indicating the content (type) of the additional effect to be executed is stored. When a new additional performance is executed, the information stored in the additional performance information storage area 223h is read out, and the new addition is performed based on the read information and predetermined performance conditions. The performance mode of the performance is determined.

In addition, in this control example, if the timing at which the execution condition for the additional effect is met is within the period in which the additional effect is already being executed, the content of the additional effect to be executed or the content of the additional effect being executed may be , is configured to restrict the execution of new additional effects. In this case, the contents of the additional performance whose execution is restricted are also stored in the additional performance information storage area 223h. In other words, the content (type) of the set additional effects can be stored separately into executed additional effects and unexecuted additional effects.

With this configuration, when a new additional performance becomes executable, the additional performance is executed based on the information indicating the unexecuted additional performance stored in the additional performance information storage area 223h, When the execution conditions for the additional performance are met, the additional performance can be executed in a performance mode in which the content of information indicating the non-executed additional performance stored in the additional performance information storage area 223h is also added. .

The winning rate variable flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the winning rate for the battle performance is variable, and is set to ON when the winning rate is variable (addable). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the win rate cannot be added, that is, when the win rate has already reached the upper limit value. Thereby, control for varying the winning percentage can be appropriately executed within the period in which the winning percentage can be varied.

The upper limit win rate storage area 223j is a storage area for storing the upper limit value that can be displayed in a display performance for increasing the winning rate in a battle performance, and is a storage area for storing an upper limit value that can be displayed when a jackpot game is started. In the setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168), if it is determined that the battle effect is to be executed after the end of the jackpot game (S4601 in FIG. 168: No), the upper limit determined by referring to the winning rate selection table 222b. The win rate (the upper limit of the displayed win rate) is stored (S4605 in FIG. 168).

Then, the performance mode of the additional performance is determined in the additional performance mode setting process (see S5009 in FIG. 173), which is executed when the execution condition for the additional performance during the jackpot game is satisfied (S5008: Yes in FIG. 172). The information stored at the time (upper limit win rate) is referenced. Also, in the winning rate UP zone performance setting process (see S5305 in FIG. 176) that is executed during the winning rate UP zone after the end of the jackpot game, the information stored when determining the performance mode of the additional performance (upper limit winning rate ) is referenced.

The display win rate storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing information for indicating the variably displayed win rate (display win rate) during a period in which the win rate of the battle performance can be variably displayed. 0% is stored as the value. Then, the additional performance mode setting process (see S5009 in FIG. 173) that is executed when the execution condition for the additional performance during the jackpot game is satisfied (S5008: Yes in FIG. 172), or during the winning rate UP zone after the jackpot game ends. Information indicating the performance mode (win rate after increase) of the additional performance set in the win rate UP zone performance setting process (see S5305 in FIG. 176) executed in is stored.

This makes it possible to appropriately manage the currently displayed winning percentage. In this control example, the display win rate storage area 223k is configured to store information indicating the display win rate after being increased; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display win rate and the currently displayed display win rate , information indicating the difference (so-called increase) from the displayed winning percentage to be displayed next may be stored in the displayed winning percentage storage area 223k.

The lottery number counter 223m is a counter for measuring the number of times a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an additional performance during a jackpot game, and when a lottery to determine whether to perform an additional performance is performed. The counter value is incremented by 1. Then, in the performance mode variable processing (see S4508 in FIG. 170) that is executed when the round game ends, the value of the counter is read and if it is determined that the value of the lottery number counter 223m is less than 1, (S4804 in FIG. 170: Yes), the high probability flag 223p is set to on. Then, each time a round game ends, the value of the counter is cleared to 0.

In other words, if during one round of gaming, a lottery to determine whether or not to perform additional effects is not performed even once, then during the next round of gaming, a lottery to determine whether or not to perform additional effects will be held. It is configured so that if executed, there is a high probability of winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the additional performance is not executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, if the lottery to determine whether or not to perform the additional performance is not performed, that is, the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 provided in the right area during the round game. The system is configured such that if the player does not hit the ball and there is no over-win in the specific winning slot 65a, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to perform an additional performance in the next round game with a high probability of winning. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the number of times a production mode that increases the winning rate is selected as a production mode of an additional production is a predetermined number of times (for example, once) or less within one round game, the next It may be configured such that a lottery for determining whether or not to perform an additional performance in a round game is won with a high probability, or a performance mode that increases the winning rate is easily selected as a performance mode of the additional performance.

In addition, in this control example, the execution probability of the additional performance during the next round game is varied according to the game content in one round game content, but the execution probability of the additional performance during the next round game is not limited to this. The execution probability of the additional performance during the next round game may be changed depending on the game content in the next round game. In this case, for example, instead of resetting the value of the lottery number counter 223m every round game, it may be configured to be reset when a specific round game ends. Furthermore, in this control example, when additional effects are not executed during a jackpot game (the number of executions is small), a situation in which additional effects are likely to be executed can be created, so that additional effects are executed during a jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this, and the more the additional effects are executed during the jackpot game (the greater the number of executions), the more the additional effects are executed. The configuration may be such that it is easy to create an easy situation. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute the additional performance.

The confirmation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the player has been notified that he or she has won the probability variable jackpot, and is set to ON when it is notified that the player has won the probability variable jackpot. Specifically, it is set to ON when a probability-variable symbol ("777") that informs a probability-variable jackpot is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. When setting various effects during a jackpot game, the setting status of the confirmation flag 223n is determined, and if it is determined that it is set to on, an effect indicating a guaranteed strange jackpot or celebrating a certain strange jackpot is set. Set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to OFF, a gaming state suggestion effect (additional effect to increase the winning rate, etc.) to suggest the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game to the player is performed. executed. Also, in the winning performance end process (see S4510 in FIG. 171) for setting the performance mode after the jackpot game ends, the setting status of the flag is determined, and the performance mode is set according to the setting status. Thereby, it is possible to set the mode of performance to be executed after the end of the jackpot game in accordance with the presence or absence of probability-variable jackpot notification. This confirmation flag 223n is set to OFF after determining (setting) the mode of performance to be performed after the end of the jackpot game.

The high probability flag 223p is a flag to indicate that the lottery to determine whether or not to perform the additional performance is in a state where the winning probability is high, and is set to ON when the winning probability is in the high probability state. . On the other hand, if the probability of winning is normal, it is set to off. In this control example, the execution frequency of the additional performance is configured to be variable depending on the game content during the jackpot game. Specifically, when the period in which the additional performance is not executed continues for a predetermined period, the additional performance is The configuration is such that it is easy to execute (the high probability flag 223p is set to on). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the additional performance is not executed during the jackpot game.

The upper limit point storage area 223q is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value that can be displayed in the lucky point addition display effect, and is executed in the time saving effect mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175). In the performance setting process after the first time (see S5309 in FIG. 177), the determined upper limit number of lucky points is stored (S5508 in FIG. 177). Then, the content of the effect for adding lucky points is determined based on the difference value from the currently displayed lucky point value.

The display point storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the value of lucky points displayed (displayed) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by executing the lucky point addition display effect. , a value corresponding to the display points added in the time-saving presentation mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175) is stored. In this control example, the display point storage area 223r has a display point counter, and the value of the display point counter is added and updated in correspondence with the added value. Then, when the period during which the lucky point addition display effect is executed ends, the information (the value of the display point counter) stored in the display point storage area 223r is cleared to zero.

The press timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the frame button 22 is pressed, the press timer 223s starts counting. Then, in the effect update process (see S4306 in FIG. 165) that is executed every millisecond in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 162), the value of the timer is updated (S4307 in FIG. 165), When the timer value is updated to a value corresponding to 2 seconds, the long press flag 223t indicating that the button is being pressed for a long time is set to on. In this way, instead of determining that a long press operation has been performed immediately after the frame button 22 is pressed, the long press operation is determined when the frame button 22 has been pressed for a predetermined period of time. By configuring it so that it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to detect both a long press and a normal press (repeated presses) as operations on the frame button 22. ) can easily increase the variation of operation effects.

The long press flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the player is performing a long press operation on the frame button 22, and is set to ON when the long press operation is being performed. When the player releases the frame button 22 while the long press flag 223t is set to on, that is, when no operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the long press flag 223t is set to off.

The press release flag 223u is a flag to indicate that the player has released the frame button 22 during a long press operation, and the press release flag 223u is a flag that indicates that the player has released the frame button 22 during a long press operation. It is set to on when the button 22 is released. Then, it is referenced when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, and is set to OFF when a press on the frame button 22 is detected in a state where the press release flag 223u is set on.

In this control example, if the player releases the frame button 22 after a long press operation is performed within the operation validity period 1, the effect that encourages the long press operation on the frame button 22 is continued. The configuration is such that, instead of being executed in a different manner, an effect is executed that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 in a different operation method. Here, by using the press release flag 223u, it is possible to reliably detect a situation in which the player releases his or her hand from the frame button 22 after a long press operation is performed within one valid operation period. It is possible to perform a performance that encourages repeated hits.

The continuous hit performance flag 223v is a flag for indicating that a performance that prompts a continuous hit performance is being executed during one valid operation period, and is set to ON when the continuous hit performance is being performed. Then, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, it is determined whether the repeated hit effect flag 223v is set to on, and if it is set to on, an operation effect corresponding to the repeated hit effect is executed. Ru. On the other hand, if it is set to OFF, a process for detecting a long press operation (a process for measuring the press time by the press timer 223s) is executed.

The upper limit gauge amount storage area 223w is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value determined as the upper limit amount by which the spirit gauge KG can be increased in the operation performance, and is used in the variable display setting process (FIG. 174). When the variable display mode determined in step S4013) includes an operation effect, the upper limit amount is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the determined upper limit amount is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to increase the gauge amount during the operation performance.

The gauge counter 223x is a counter for indicating stage information of the spirit gauge KG that is varied in the operation performance, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time the display mode of the spirit gauge KG is varied (increased). In this control example, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG is configured to be variable (increased) in five stages at most, and the value of the gauge counter 223x is updated to a value corresponding to the number of variable stages of the spirit gauge KG. (addition) is possible. Thereby, the stage information of the spirit gauge KG that is actually displayed can be appropriately determined.

The time saving number counter 223y is a counter for measuring the number of executions of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state, and the value of the counter increases every time a special symbol variation is executed during the high probability state of normal symbols. The configuration is such that 1 is added. Then, by referring to the value of the time saving number counter 223y, the present game state is configured to perform an effect to indicate to the player whether or not the number of special symbol variations satisfies the time saving end condition. ing.

The state storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the set gaming state, and when the gaming state is changed, the changed gaming state is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining the current gaming state.

The arrival flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the lucky point value has reached a predetermined value (100P), and is set to ON when the lucky point value has reached the predetermined value (100P). Then, it is set to off when a jackpot is won. While the arrival flag 223ab is set on, the process for adding the lucky point value is skipped.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 166) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 157).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set it once. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity than the NAND type flash memory 234a (for example, 2 kilobytes). This NOR flash memory 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, specifically, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d to one of the buffer RAMs 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 first sets the program from the NOR flash memory 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. The instruction code of the corresponding address from the program is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR flash memory 234a. The reason for storing it in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type flash memory 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is transferred to the NOR type flash memory 234d. By storing it in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. It is possible to set the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. A program and fixed value data used in the control program (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) that is executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 180) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b detects that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when the lottery is performed in the main control device 110.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 180).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 145(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the display control device 114 as shown in FIG. 145(b). As shown in FIG. 145(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 145(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Fig. 145(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 145(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 145(b) and 145(c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 146, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 146(b) shows a back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and a back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 146, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, the third symbol display device 81 displays a smooth image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage," the MPU 231 first sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 146(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the sandy beach stage that is frequently displayed is stored in the back image area. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage stores only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, images between position a and position b, in the resident video RAM 235. is stored in the rear image area 235c.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but in this case, the resident video RAM 235 is extremely A RAM with a large capacity must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and from position a including that initial position to position Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the player cannot press the frame button. When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back side B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The information can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed in a scrolling manner or while changing the color tone as time passes. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 144) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 120) imitating the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable presentation after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third symbol display device 81 immediately starts the variable presentation. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, a male character 313, etc. are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. It is configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state, and also informs the player of the gaming value (for a short period of time for normal symbols) that will be given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol that is on hold. This is an effect to notify the player that the lottery result will be a jackpot in the lottery.

By notifying the short period of time for the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the short period of time for the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more opportunities the ball will have to pass through the normal ball entry port 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will be more chances for the normal symbol to win. . Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory 64a to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, the stronger the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, so the electric accessory 64a is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player can be in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a feeling of expectation that you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is a presentation in which the third symbol consisting of sub-symbols without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared. Further, display data tables corresponding to each game menu screen are also stored in this data table storage area 233b.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table for variable effects (variable display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table is made to correspond to an address in which the time for displaying one frame of image on the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) is expressed as one unit. This specifies in detail the content of one frame's worth of images (drawing content) to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects, etc., is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by whether to display either the back surface A or B that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (either "Sandy Beach Stage" or "Deep Sea Stage"), or to display a back surface that is different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, we will explain the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 147 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the process of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operations, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 148). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 148 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the transfer data table, similar to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 148, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 148, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 180). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S9705 in FIG. 192(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 182(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 192(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 182(b ), pointer update processing (see S9305 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 149), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol) and various comments.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed at the backmost side (backmost drawing level), and the last drawn sprite is placed at the frontmost side (frontmost drawing level). It can be placed in Note that when the comment display function is on, the image placed at the forefront (frontmost drawing layer) is a character image that constitutes a comment. By arranging the comment at the forefront (frontmost drawing level), the comment can be more clearly viewed by the player.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, V interrupt processing (FIG. 182(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9307 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9813 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 193). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 150 to 160. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 msec intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 399, 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to perform display on the first symbol display device 37 and to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). A starting winning process is executed in response to a winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154.

After executing the start-up winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passage process is performed as the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in step 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current state is a jackpot waiting state or a special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether either the entry waiting flag 203j or the jackpot flag 203m is on. As a result of the determination, if it is in the jackpot standby state or if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: Yes), this process is directly ended.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the machine is not in a jackpot standby state or a special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is Acquire (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A held ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203f from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. The data is shifted and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the first The number N1) of holding the variable display based on the lottery of special symbols is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S209). .

In the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time is updated (S214), and the updated fluctuation time counter is Based on the value, it is determined whether the variable time of the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the time has not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, and D2 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A1 is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot A2 is turned on, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot A3 is turned on, the red LED is turned on. , lights up the green LED, and if it becomes a jackpot B1, lights up the blue LED and green LED, and if it becomes a jackpot B2, lights the red LED and green LED, and it becomes a jackpot C1. In this case, the blue LED, red LED, and green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot is C2, the blue LED, red LED, and green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot is D1, A blue LED, a red LED, and a green LED are turned on, and when a jackpot D2 is achieved, a blue LED, a red LED, and a green LED are turned on. In addition, if it is off, a blue LED and a red LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219), and the process moves to S224.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), is the value of the time saving medium counter 203i greater than 0 (in other words, is the time saving state of the normal symbol? ) (S220), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S221), and the process moves to S222. do. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process moves to S222.

In the process of S222, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203i after the subtraction is 0 (S222). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 (S222: Yes), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed from the time saving state with normal symbols to the normal state with normal symbols is set (S223). , and then proceeds to the process of S224. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the gaming status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 can be made to match the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is not 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process moves to S224.

In the process of S224, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and the process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment of success or failure) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the variation production performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is acquired (S301).

Next, the probability change flag 203h is read and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203h is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not a variable probability state). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state (S302: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability times (see FIG. 137(b)). As mentioned above, 20 random numbers from 0 to 5 are set as special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability times (see FIG. 137(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability times. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, "0") that results in a winning, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In the process of S305, the variable pattern table to be used this time is specified based on the variable pattern scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 140) (S305), and the process moves to S306.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S306), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is a special symbol jackpot (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, a display mode at the time of a jackpot is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 137(c)) to determine what type of jackpot is. do. As mentioned above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", it is considered to be a jackpot A1 (10 round probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of ``55 to 59'', it is determined to be a jackpot A2 (10 rounds guaranteed variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``60 to 64'', it is judged to be a jackpot A3 (10 rounds guaranteed variable jackpot). If it is in the range of ``65 to 69'', it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (10 rounds shortened time 30 times jackpot), and if it is in the range ``70 to 74'', it is judged to be a jackpot B2 (10 rounds shortened 30 times jackpot). ), and if it is in the range of "75 to 84", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds shortened time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range "85 to 89", it is judged to be a jackpot C2 (10 rounds shortened jackpot). If it is in the range of ``90 to 94'', it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (10 round time reduction 80 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of ``95 to 99'', it is a jackpot. It is determined that the result is D2 (10 rounds shortened, 80 times jackpot) (see FIG. 137(c)). In addition, in this control example, even when a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the same control process as in the case where a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery described above is executed. In the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2). be done. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2) is set as the stop type in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81. .

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 138(c), FIGS. 139(a) to (c)), and the variation type is determined. A fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S306, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S306: No), a display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the third symbol is displayed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. The stop type to be displayed on the device 81 is set as whether the reach is out of front and back, the reach is other than out of front and back, or the reach is completely off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach is set other than front and back out, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. time).

When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or the process of S310 is set (S311). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter (S312). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S307 or S309 (S313). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 159). When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151).

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. , This is a process for executing suspension processing of the values indicated by various counters when there is a starting prize.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e If the value (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process moves to S407. In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second ball entrance 640 (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process in S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether there is no winning in the second ball entry port 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning in the second ball entry port 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is If it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process moves to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203f from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S411, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is It is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process moves to S413. In addition, in the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-read process is executed to pre-read the win/fail from various counter values acquired based on the starting winnings (S413), and this process ends. The details of this prefetching process will be explained with reference to FIG. 154.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entering port 64 or the second ball entering port 640 was detected in the current starting winning process (see FIG. 153). (S501) If a new ball entering ball is not detected (S501: No), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that a new entering ball has been detected (S501: Yes), next, check whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected entering ball is the upper limit (i.e., 4). If it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), it is determined whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entered ball is in the probability variable state of the special symbol. (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether the game is in a variable probability state or not according to the current gaming state and the pre-read result of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held balls do not include a jackpot, the current gaming state will match the timing at which the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry starts, so the current gaming state will be in a variable state. It is determined that Further, if a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, the game state may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probability variable jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into account, it is determined whether the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in a variable probability state.

In the process of S503, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation based on the currently detected entering ball is in the probability change state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entering ball opening where the entering ball was detected and the high probability state. The lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained based on the first winning random number table (see FIG. 137(b)) (S504), and the process moves to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of fluctuation is a special symbol low probability state (S503: No), the type of ball entrance where the ball was detected and the first winning random number table for low probability times (Fig. 137 (b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S505), and the process moves to S506.

In the process of S506, which is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a prize information command is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the current ball was detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it stores the type of ball entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150), and is performed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150), and is performed during the fluctuating display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the fluctuation associated with the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is controlled to open and close. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S501: Yes), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203g (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is a normal symbol time saving state (S508). Specifically, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i in the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the time saving state is normal symbol, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0, Moreover, if the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the state is a normal state with normal symbols (not a time saving state).

In the process of S508, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second winning random number table for high probability times are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 138(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second win random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the second win for low probability Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 138(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S511: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the process of S511, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514: Yes), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is determined. is set to 3 seconds (S515), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, if it is determined that the normal state is the normal state of the symbol (S514: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this processing end. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. The frequency of drawing patterns increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the normal symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 becomes easier to open, so that it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. The process ends, and the stopped symbols (normal symbols) are stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S519). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is in the time saving state for the normal symbol (S520), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S520: Yes), sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (S522), and moves to the process of S523. . On the other hand, in the process of S520, if it is determined that the normal state is the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are determined. , "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process moves to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is determined. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

Is the ball not passing through the normal ball entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball is passing through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (M) If it is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry gate (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved pitch counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process is set to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is the first value among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. (S605), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process moves to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S812 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S812 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S914 in FIG. 159, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), clearing the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S809), and the process moves to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S811), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). (S901). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) or the start winning process (see FIG. 153) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 153) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 160) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this control example, although the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. Starting at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is lit, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is lit, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the red LED lights up.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) ends, the first symbol display device 37, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152). A stop indication (lit indication) is given on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155). The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed ( (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process moves to S901, and each process from S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 157 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S908 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is turned off, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. ), by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 159), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of specific prize openings ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1001, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the opening effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a jackpot (S1003: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1009, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1011: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot A (that is, a jackpot B) (S1012: No), the value corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203i (S1013), and the process is continued. The process moves to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203h, the probability variation state of the special symbol will be given after the jackpot ends. (S1014), and the process moves to S1015.

In the process of S1013 or S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery status of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (whether it is a variable probability state of the special symbol or a low probability state of the special symbol) is voiced. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), an end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 161, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4017 (see Figure 162). ) is started during execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4014: Yes in FIG. 162), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4017. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4016 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

In the processing of S3902, if the power-off processing flag is off (S3902: No), the current startup processing was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred. or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3906. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), the process moves to S3904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process moves to S3908.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process moves to S3904. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4017 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the process moves to S3908.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4017, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S3904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3904, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3904). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S3908, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4017 is executed (see S4016 in FIG. 162). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4017 is executed, so the reason why the process in S3908 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4017 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3909), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), the interrupt Permission is set (S3911) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S3908 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S3904 to S3906 and then S3908. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S3910, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), interrupt permission is set. (S3911), and shifts to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S3909 is skipped is because if the process has reached S3908 from S3904 via the process in S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S3904. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S4001 was executed (S4001), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S4001 was executed. If not (S4001: No), the process moves to S4012 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4011. In the process of S4001, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S4002 to S4011 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4012 and the process to update the variable display setting process in S4013 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4012 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S4013 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in each process of S4003 to S4013 are sent to the display control device 114 (S4002 ).

Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008, which will be described later (S4003), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4004). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4005 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process is performed in which a reservation lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4007). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing is a process of monitoring an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and setting a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Specifically, processing for changing the display mode when the frame button 22 is pressed (continued to be pressed) during the operation validity period of the operation effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22. It is. Details of this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

When the frame button input monitoring/production processing (S4007) is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S4008), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing in S4009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4010), and then, while the variable display is being executed, a effect update process is executed to change the effect mode according to the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, etc. It is executed (S4011), and the process moves to S4012. Note that details of this effect update process (S4011) will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

In the process of S4012, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4012). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 166. Then, when the command determination process ends, a variable display setting process is executed (S4013). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174.

When the process of S4013 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4014). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4014 (S4014: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4016), and the power-off process is executed (S4017). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4018), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4014 (S4014: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4015), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4015: No), the process returns to S4001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4015: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing. As described above, this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 163) is a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring/production process (see FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0), (S4101: No), which means that the operation validity period has not expired, so the process is immediately ended. In other words, unless the operation is valid, even if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the display mode of the operation effect will not be variably displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is larger than 0 (S4101: Yes), it means that the current operation valid period is reached, so next, press the frame button 22. is detected (S4102). In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S4102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the press timer 223s is larger than 0 (S4103), and if it is not larger than 0 (0 In other words, if it is determined that this is the first timing at which a press on the frame button 22 is detected within the valid period of the current operation (S4103: No), the value of the press timer 223s is set to 1. (S4104), and the process moves to S4105.

The press timer 223s set in the process of S4104 is a timer whose value is updated in the effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165), which will be described later, when the player continues to press the frame button 22. It is used to measure time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the value of the press timer 223s is larger than 0 (S4103: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 has already been pressed (long-pressed). , skips the process in S4104 and proceeds to the process in S4105.

In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the press release flag 223u is set to on (S4105), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S4105: No), the frame button 22 is continued to be pressed ( A display command indicating that the button is pressed is set (S4106), and the process moves to S4110.

Further, if it is determined in the process of S4105 that the press release flag 223u is set to on (S4105: Yes), a display command indicating that the press is being pressed repeatedly is set (S4107), and the press release flag 223u is set to off. (S4108), sets the continuous hit effect flag to ON (S4109), and proceeds to the process of S4110.

After completing the process of S4106 or S4109, a press effect setting process is executed (S4110), and this process ends. This press performance setting process (S4110) determines whether the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 is the determination timing for varying the stage information (spirit gauge KG) of the operation performance, and determines whether the timing is the determination timing. In this case, a process is executed to vary (increase) the stage information (spirit gauge KG).

Here, the contents of the press effect setting process (S4110) will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the press effect setting process (S4110). When the press effect setting process (S4110) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the judgment timing (judgment timing for the operation effect) for varying the stage information (spirit gauge KG) (S4201), and it is determined that it is not the judgment timing. If it is determined that this is the case (S4201; No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the determination timing (S4201: Yes), then the gauge increase lottery table 222d is used to determine whether the gauge has increased (S4202), and if it is determined that the gauge has increased (S4203). ), adds 1 to the value of the gauge counter 223x (S4204), sets a display command to indicate the value of the gauge counter 223x after the addition (S4205), and ends this process. Further, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the gauge has not increased (S4203: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 163, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the press of the frame button 22 is not detected (S4102: No), then it is determined whether the long press flag 223t is set to on (S4111), If it is determined that the flag 223t is on (S4111; Yes), the long press flag 223t is set to off (S4112), the press release flag 223u is set to on (S4113), and a display command prompting repeated presses is displayed. is set (S4114), the value of the press timer 223s is cleared to 0 (S4115), and this process ends.

In the process of S4111, if it is determined that the long press flag 223t is not set to on (S4111: No), the process of S4112 to S4114 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4115. In the process of S4115, a process for clearing the value of the press timer 223s to 0 is executed.

Next, the contents of the effect update process (S4011) will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process (S4011). As shown in FIG. 165, in the performance update process (S4011), the operation on the frame button 22 is determined to be valid based on the value of the validity period timer 223e that measures the remaining period of the operation validity period, A process of updating the value of the press timer 223s that measures the period during which the button is continuously pressed, and a process of setting a display command to indicate the presentation mode corresponding to the updated value are executed. . This effect update process (S4011) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, while the variable display is being executed, the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, etc. This is a process for changing the presentation mode accordingly.

This effect update process (S4011) is a process that is periodically executed every 1 millisecond (ms) in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 162), so the effective period timer 223e and press timer 223s measures the value in units of 1 millisecond. Therefore, every time the values of various timers are updated 1000 times, a period corresponding to 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is measured. For convenience of explanation, when indicating the values of various timers, we will explain them in milliseconds (i.e., the same as the values that are actually updated) and in seconds (i.e., 1/1/2 of the values that are actually updated). In some cases, a value of 1000) is used for explanation.

When the effect update process (S4011) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special symbol is changing (special symbol is changing) (S4301), and if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S4301: No ), that is, when the conditions for executing the special symbol fluctuation are not satisfied (when winning data is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (standby) (middle), or when winning data is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, but the winning data cannot be shifted to the execution area because it is a jackpot game. (During jackpot game)) executes processing for updating other performances being executed (standby production (demonstration production), production during jackpot game) (S4310), and ends this process.

A detailed explanation of the processing content executed in S4310 will be omitted, but for example, during standby, the display screen showing the results of the previous special symbol lottery (the stopped display mode of the third symbol is displayed) Updates the value of the timer (demo timer) that measures the period until the transition from the current display screen) to the demo screen displayed during standby (the screen displaying the model name, demo effects, etc.). Processing for varying the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the update result.

Also, during a jackpot game, the value of the timer that measures the elapsed time of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) is updated, and the third symbol is displayed based on the updated result. Processing for changing the display mode of the device 81 is executed. Here, for example, even though the round game period has passed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a, or the round game period has elapsed for a certain period (for example, 20 seconds). ) has elapsed but the round game has not ended, that is, if the round game end condition that is established by winning 10 balls into the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied, the player On the other hand, a performance is performed to emphasize and encourage right-handed games.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (special symbol is changing), then it is determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223e is greater than 0, that is, whether the current operation valid period is If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223e is 0 (S4302: No), the process of S4310 described above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is larger than 0 (S4302: Yes), the value of the valid period timer 223e is updated (S4303), and then the updated valid period timer It is determined whether the value of 223e is 0 (S4304).

If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223e is 0, that is, if it is determined that the operation validity period has ended (S4304: Yes), a display command is set to show the performance result of the current operation performance. (S4305), and this process ends.

In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not 0 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the value of the press timer 223s is larger than 0 (S4306), and it is determined that it is larger than 0. If so (S4306: Yes), the value of the press timer 223s is updated (S4306), and then it is determined whether the updated value of the press timer 223s is a value (20000) corresponding to 2 seconds (S4308). If it is determined that the value (20000) corresponds to 2 seconds (S4308: Yes), the long-press flag 223t is set to ON (S4309), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the press timer 223s is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S4306: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4308 that it is not a value corresponding to 2 seconds. In the case (S4308: No), the process of S4309 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the command determination process (S4012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4012). The command determination process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process (S4012), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by the main controller 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S4401). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4402), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S4403), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 174) to be described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4404). If a stop type command is received (S4404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 174), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4407). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S4407: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol held ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, or Extract the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in the special symbol N) and store it in the storage area of the corresponding special symbol type in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. (S4408). In addition, in the process of S4408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After completing the process in S4408, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the number of reserved balls command is issued to the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is held. Since the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is transmitted from the main controller every time a starting prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved). Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 may be changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 when a starting prize is detected or when a special symbol is drawn, the main It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the control device 110 (the number of reserved times N of the variable display in the special symbol). In addition, when the process of S4408 is executed, a display number of reserved balls command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved balls number counter 223b. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls for each special symbol type are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the reserved pitch number command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4409). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4409: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4410), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning related command has been received (S4411). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4411: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S4412), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this win-related process (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171.

In the process of S4411, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4411: No), then it is determined whether a prize ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4413). If it is determined that the prize ball number command has been received (S4413: Yes), the prize ball related process is executed (S4414), and this process ends. The details of this prize ball related process (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

In the process of S4413, if it is determined that the prize ball count command has not been received (S4413: No), then it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S4415), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114.

By executing this command determination process, appropriate processing can be executed in accordance with the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the variable display setting process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4013). This variable display setting process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag included in the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). If it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S5201: No), the main controller 110 issues a variation pattern command for the first special pattern (special pattern 1). Since it is in a state where it has not been received, the process moves to step S5209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag included in the variation start flag 223c is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag is turned off (S5203), and then the current gaming state is changed to normal. If it is determined that the state is the normal state (S5204: Yes), in the process of S4403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 166), the variation in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is determined. Based on the pattern type, the variable display mode of the current variable display is determined from the variable pattern table 222a (S5205).

Then, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the determined variation display mode, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5206). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5207). In the process of S5207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to S5209.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, if it is determined that the state is not normal (it is a time-saving state or a variable probability state) (S5204: No), a time-saving production mode setting process is executed (S5208), and then the process proceeds to S5209. Transition. This time-saving production mode setting process (S5208) is to set the production mode of various productions that are executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. This will be explained with reference to 179.

In the process of S5216, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S5216). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S5216: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5216: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5217), and then, in the process of S4406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 166), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5218).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as the stop type of the variable production in the third symbol display device 81 (S5219), and based on the set stop type, the display control device 114, and sets the command to be sent to the display control device 114 (S5220), and ends this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the time-saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) will be explained. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)). In this time-saving performance mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)), processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is executed. In addition, in this control example, the same production mode is set as the production mode of the variable production in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the normal symbol. , the same control processing is executed.

When the time saving performance mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) is executed, first, it is determined whether the arrival flag 223ab is set to on (S5301). If it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is set to on (S5301: Yes), the process moves to S5304, and if it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is not set to on (S5301: No). , it is determined whether the value of the display point counter is greater than 0 (S5302), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S5302: No), the information stored in the performance information storage area 223h is read (S5303). ), to identify the current performance state.

Then, it is determined whether the current situation is in a winning rate UP zone (S5304), and if it is determined that it is in a winning rate UP zone (S5304: Yes), the effect setting process for the winning rate UP zone (S5305) is executed, and then the display Add 1 to the value of the display point stored in the point storage area 223r (S5306), set a display command to indicate the added value (S5307), and add 1 to the value of the time saving counter 223y (S5310). )do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5304, if it is determined that the area is not in the winning rate UP zone, a variation display mode is determined based on the read information and the extracted variation pattern (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5310. In the process, if it is determined that the value of the display point counter is larger than 0 (S5302), the effect setting process is executed from the first time onwards (S5309), and then the process moves to S5310.

When the process of S5310 is finished, next, the upper limit number of time reductions (if the currently set gaming state is the time reduction state, the set number of time reductions) is read out from the information stored in the state storage area 223aa. In order to determine whether the current change display is the final time saving change, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y corresponds to the upper limit number of times (S5311), and if it is determined that it corresponds (S5311: Yes). , determines a variable display mode (presentation mode of a losing battle production) indicating the end of time saving (S5313), sets a normal state in the state storage area (S5314), and ends this process.

As mentioned above, in this control example, when the time saving state is set, a different number of time saving times can be set, and the variation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation of the number that can be the upper limit of the number of time saving times is always set to battle. It is configured so that a variation pattern (60 second variation) that can perform the effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the processing of S5312 to S5314, the game result can be appropriately notified to the player by simply performing the processing of rewriting the performance result of the battle performance only when the time saving state actually ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the contents of the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305) will be explained. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning rate UP zone performance setting process (S5305). In this winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305), various variable effects to be executed during the winning rate UP zone are executed.

When the win rate UP zone performance setting process (S5305) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current change is a jackpot change (S5401), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot change (S5401: Yes), the win rate is increased. A performance mode indicating the winning rate V% is determined so that the display becomes a special display mode (V%) (S5402), and information stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j and the display winning rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5403). ), the win rate variable flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this processing ends. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the winning rate UP zone, the jackpot game will start without setting the battle mode, so the winning rate display will be specially designed to show the expectation of victory in the battle performance during the battle mode. The display mode can be changed to notify the player of the jackpot win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that there is no jackpot fluctuation (S5401: No), the upper limit value of the win rate stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j is read out (S5405), and the upper limit value of the win rate stored in the display win rate storage area 223k is read out. The display value of the win rate read out is read out (S5406), and the difference value between the upper limit value of the win rate read out in S5405 and the displayed value read out in the process of S5406 is calculated (S5407).

Then, based on the calculated difference value, a value that can be increased in the current variation performance is determined (S5408), and then it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern with a variation time of 11 seconds). (S5409), if it is a normal variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds) that is not a specific variation pattern (S5409: No), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the winning rate will increase (S5410), and the winning rate will increase. If the execution is won (S5411: Yes), a performance mode indicating that the winning rate will be increased by the possible increase value determined in the process of S5408 is determined (S5412), and is stored in the display winning rate storage area 223k. The display value is updated (S5413), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if the execution of the winning rate UP performance is not won (S5411: No), a performance mode indicating that the winning rate will not be increased is determined (S5414), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the effect setting process after the first time (S5309) will be explained. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5309) after the first time. In this initial and subsequent performance setting processing (S5309), various processes are executed to set performance modes for special symbol fluctuations other than the first special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 2 or less (S5501), and if it is determined that it is 2 or less (S5501: Yes), the time saving number is set. It is determined whether the value of the counter 223y is 2 (S5502), and if it is determined that it is not 2 (S5502: No), the effect setting process for the win rate UP zone described above with reference to FIG. 176 is executed ( S5503), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 2 (S5502: Yes), the final winning rate determination process is executed (S5504), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is not less than 2 (it is 3 or more) (S5501: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 3 or not. If it is determined to be 3 (S5505: Yes), the current gaming state is read from the state storage area 223aa (S5506), and the upper limit number of lucky points is determined based on the read gaming state. (S5507), stores the determined upper limit in the upper limit point storage area 223q (S5508), reads out the performance information of the battle opponent from the information stored in the performance information storage area 223h (S5509), and responds to the read battle opponent. A mode of performance to be performed is determined (S5510), a battle performance setting process is executed (S5511), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is not 3 (it is 4 or more), that is, if the battle mode is already in progress, the processing of S5506 to S5510 is skipped and Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the final winning percentage determination process (S5504) will be explained. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning percentage determination process (S5504). In this final win rate determination process (S5504), a process is executed to determine the performance mode of the performance for determining the battle opponent (see FIG. 125(b)), which is executed as the final variation performance for the win rate UP zone.

When the final win rate determination process (S5504) is executed, it is first determined whether the current change is a jackpot change (S5601), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot change (S5601: Yes), the win rate display is special. The display mode (V%) is determined to show the win rate V% (S5602), the information stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j and the display win rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5603), and the win rate is The variable flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this processing ends. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the winning rate UP zone, the jackpot game will start without setting the battle mode, so the winning rate display will be specially designed to show the expectation of victory in the battle performance during the battle mode. The display mode can be changed to notify the player of the jackpot win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that there is no jackpot fluctuation (S5601: No), the upper limit value of the win rate stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j is read out (S5605), and the upper limit value of the win rate stored in the display win rate storage area 223k is read out. The display value of the win rate read out is read out (S5606), and the difference value between the upper limit value of the win rate read out in S5605 and the displayed value read out in the process of S5606 is calculated (S5607).

Then, in the current variable performance, a performance mode indicating that the winning rate increases by the difference value is determined (S5608), a battle opponent corresponding to the upper limit value is determined (S5609), and a performance mode for indicating the determined battle opponent is determined (S5610), and then, performance information corresponding to the determined battle opponent is stored in the performance information storage area 223h (S5611), and this process ends.

As mentioned above, in this control example, the upper limit value (upper limit value of winning rate) determined at the time the winning rate UP zone is set is finally displayed, and the battle opponent corresponding to that upper limit value is displayed during battle mode. The configuration is such that the battle opponent is determined. Therefore, even if an effect that increases the winning rate is not set in the winning rate UP zone, the upper limit value is ultimately displayed, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the battle opponent may be determined based on the display value stored in the display win rate storage area 223k instead of the upper limit value stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j. . In this case, even if the same upper limit value is set, the displayed winning percentage at the end of the winning percentage UP zone can be different depending on the content of the performance executed during the winning percentage UP zone, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current gaming state.

Next, the content of the battle effect setting process (S5511) will be explained with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the content of the battle effect setting process (S5511). In this battle effect setting process (S5511), when a variation pattern (60 seconds variation) that allows a battle effect to be performed during battle mode is set, a process for determining the effect of the battle effect is executed. .

When the battle performance setting process (S5511) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a 60-second fluctuation (S5651), and if it is not a 60-second fluctuation, that is, a fluctuation that makes it impossible to perform a battle performance. If it is determined that the pattern is a pattern (S5651: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5651, if it is determined that it is a 60 second fluctuation (S5651: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation (S5652), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot fluctuation (S5652: Yes), sets a display command for executing a performance in which the performance result is "win" (S5663), and ends this process. In addition, in the process of S5652, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot fluctuation (S5662: No), it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a time-saving final fluctuation (S5654), and if it is determined that it is a time-saving final fluctuation ( S5654: Yes), a display command for executing a performance whose performance result is "defeat" is set (S5665), and this process ends.

In the process of S5654, if it is determined that it is not the time saving final variation (S5654: No), a display command is set to execute a performance whose performance result is "continue" (S5656), and the display point storage area 223r is 5 is added to the value of the display point stored in (S5657), a display command for indicating the added value is set (S5658), and this process ends.

In other words, the display of "Continue" in the battle performance is a condition for executing the addition performance that allows a predetermined number of lucky points to be added. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the process of S5657 is not executed if the difference between the upper limit number of lucky points and the currently displayed number is less than 5.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 180, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory that can read data at high speed, so when the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately reads the first memory of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the boot program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S8101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently being stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S8001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 181, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S8102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing in S8101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S8101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S8102 and S8102 multiple times, the steps S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 180. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 through the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is then transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S8004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9602 in FIG. 192(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the simple command Determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S8309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance through audio lamp control. If received via the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 145(b) and 145(c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, You can perform simple variations. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 149) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 145, the normal effect is displayed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S8302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188.

In the display setting process (S8303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S8304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S8305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 149, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S8307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 145 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the steps in S8304 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188. First, FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S8303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S8402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S8403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S8405), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

In the process of S8502, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the variable pattern command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8504, the pointer 233f set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, by the process of S8502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), the time counter 233h to which the time data was set in the process of S8503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and When it is determined that the variable performance ends, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a display variation type command (S8406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be explained with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, or completely off) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S8601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and displays the stop symbol on the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. (S8603), and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S8602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S8304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S8602 is identified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in the process of S8603, and the identified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S8601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S8602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8704). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8705), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set opening display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S8410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b). FIG. 185(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8805), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S8410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the display command is executed. If there is an ending command (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8903). S8904). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S8905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S8414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(a). FIG. 187(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag is set to ON (S9001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S9603) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the ON state. . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S9002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S9001 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S9002. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back side A or B should be displayed according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set in the process of S9002 is used. , specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed as time passes, and determines the RAM type in which image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S8414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S8416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S8417) will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S9101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S9102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S9101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S9102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S9102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 183. In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the information to which the number of times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is added. It is determined (S8418), and if there is a command related to displaying the number of times (S8418: Yes), a number addition related command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

In addition, commands related to the count addition display include, for example, a display command to show the number of changes in special symbols, a display command to show lucky points, a display command to show winning percentage, and a display command to show the spirit gauge KG. Examples include display commands for indicating information for varying stage information. A display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b, like the variable display data table and the like. By executing the number addition related command processing (S8419), the type of display mode instructed to start displaying, the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to the number display, and the corresponding display data table is added to the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d.

Here, details of the number addition related command processing (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the number addition related command processing. This number-of-times addition-related command process is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-times addition-related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the number addition related command processing, a display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9201), and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S9202). Next, the time data corresponding to the performance time indicated by the command is set in the time counter 233h (S9203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S9204), and this process is ended and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8418, if it is determined that there is no command related to count addition (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process moves to the process of S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes). ), the processes of S8402 to S8420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S8308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Fig. 184(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Fig. 184(b)), is executed. For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S9301: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S9302 to S9304 and moves to the process S9305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9302), S9303, S9304 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S9303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S9304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S9401).

In task processing (see S8304 in FIG. 182(b)), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 189. After the warning image setting process (S9304) or in the process of S9303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S9303: No), then the process moves to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S9501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S9503), and if it is a demo display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the demo display data table 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9505), and this processing is finished and displayed. Return to setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S9506 ), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, menu display data table, and two-dimensional code display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, a variable display data table, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is written is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9502: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In task processing, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S9306, along with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position of each sprite is determined. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S9309).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S9309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S9310), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9311). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S9314), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S9315, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S9316). If the demo display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d (S9317), and then writes Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is being performed is set to ON (S9321), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the final display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the drawing content so that it is displayed.

In the process of S9316, if the demo display flag is on (S9316: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is immediately terminated. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S8309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. 145 (b) or (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S9601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S9601: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S9701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S9701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S9702). In the process of S9702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S9702 that the transfer process has not finished (S9702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process moves to S9703. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S9701, if the transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the process of S9703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S9703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S9703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S9601: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802), and if it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

Further, in the process of S9802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the process of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image controller 237 continues to perform the image transfer process, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process moves to S9807. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S9805, if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the process of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S9809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S9810), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S9812), and proceeds to the process of S9813.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the process of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S9813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S9813, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S9814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 149 is generated (S9901). That is, in the process of S9901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information. Further, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is included as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the furthest front side.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process in S9902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. In the above-mentioned first control example, during the jackpot game, an additional performance can be executed when a ball enters the general ball entry hole 63 or an over-win in the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when a ball enters each winning hole, an execution lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to perform an additional performance, and when the execution lottery is won, the additional performance is executed. However, since the timing at which the ball enters each winning slot varies, and winnings may occur consecutively in the lottery, multiple additional effects are executed overlappingly, making it difficult for players to understand. There was a problem in that it provided .

On the other hand, in this second control example, a new additional performance is not executed while the additional performance is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of additional performances from overlapping and executing performances that are difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the length of the period during which execution of a new additional performance is prohibited is configured to vary depending on the type of additional performance. Specifically, when an additional performance that increases the winning rate is performed, a new additional performance is not executed until that additional performance ends, and when an additional performance for liveliness is executed, the New additional performances can be executed even during the period of additional performances. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute additional effects that provide information that is advantageous to the player (increased winning rate), and to make the additional effects overlap for the purpose of creating excitement. This can further enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this second control example, if the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of a new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally executed based on the establishment of the execution condition. The game machine is configured to perform processing to determine a performance mode, and when an additional performance providing information (increase in winning rate) advantageous to the player is determined, the processing result is temporarily stored. Then, after it becomes possible to execute a new additional effect, when performing an additional effect that provides information that is advantageous to the player (increase winning rate), the processing results of the additional effect that have been temporarily stored are also included. It is configured to execute additional effects. In addition, during the period when the execution of new additional effects is prohibited, the number of times the execution conditions for additional effects are met is also stored, and based on the stored number of times, when it becomes possible to execute new additional effects. The presentation mode of the additional presentation to be executed can be determined.

With this configuration, a player who actively plays the game in order to execute an additional performance during a jackpot game is forced to continue playing the game actively even during the execution period of the additional performance. be able to.

<About the production content of the second control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 195, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be explained. This second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the additional effect is executed according to the number of times (stock count) that the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. They are different in that they are configured to vary the presentation mode. Therefore, we will explain the contents of the additional effects that are executed depending on the number of times the game is stocked.

FIG. 195(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a point acquisition performance (additional performance) is executed with two additional performances in stock. As shown in FIG. 195(a), when the execution condition of the additional performance is satisfied at the timing when the new additional performance can be executed (the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 and the execution lottery is won) ), an additional performance is executed in which capsules 801 corresponding to the number of times the additional performance is stocked are continuously acquired.

This capsule 801 is similar to the additional effect shown in FIG. 121(b) in the first control example described above, and the contents 801a pop out from the capsule 801, and information indicating the increased value of the winning rate is displayed. In FIG. 195(a), the characters "10%" are displayed to indicate that the winning rate displayed in the display area HR1 will increase by 10%. A second capsule 801b and a third capsule 801c are displayed in correspondence with the number of times the additional performance is stocked. In other words, the display screen shown in FIG. 195(a) is a display screen when a point acquisition performance (additional performance) is executed when the number of times the additional performance is stocked is 2, and the stocked additional performance is Runs continuously.

Then, the contents 801a of the second capsule 801b and the third capsule 801c are displayed in the same way as the capsule 801, and information that is advantageous to the player (information indicating the increased value of the winning rate, information on the presence or absence of consecutive wins) is displayed. Ru. With this configuration, even during a period in which the execution of new additional performances is prohibited, the player can be made to actively play the game in order to actively execute the additional performances.

In addition, in this control example, if the execution lottery of an additional performance is won during a period when the execution of a new additional performance is prohibited, the number of winnings of the execution lottery ( It is configured to count and memorize the number of times the stock is stocked. Then, if a lottery for executing an additional performance is won at a timing when a new additional performance can be executed, the number of times the stock is stocked is determined, and the additional performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the determined number of times the stock is stocked. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of setting the performance mode for the additional performance to be stocked, and therefore it is possible to simplify the process for determining the performance mode.

Furthermore, in this control example, the production mode (additional production type) corresponding to the stock of additional production is configured to be the same as the production mode (additional production type) set as the newly executed additional production. ing. In other words, if the type of the newly executed additional performance is the additional performance type of the point acquisition performance, the performance corresponding to the stock number is also the additional performance type of the point acquisition performance, as shown in FIG. 195(a). The performance mode is determined as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously execute additional performances corresponding to the additional performance type set for one additional performance, so that it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand. I can do it.

In addition, in FIG. 195(a), explanation was given using the point acquisition performance as an example, but for example, if a lively performance is set as an additional performance type, the lively performance will be executed continuously for the number of times corresponding to the number of times in stock. be done. With this configuration, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123, that is, the effect that grants a bonus to the player when the lively effect is executed according to a specific rule, can be executed in a short period of time. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the additional performance execution lottery has been won is stored during the period when the execution of the additional performance is prohibited, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to store information that determines the performance mode. In addition, in this control example, the number of times the additional performance execution lottery has been won is stored, but the number of times the additional performance execution lottery has been won may be stored, or the number of times the additional performance execution lottery has been won may be stored. The configuration may be such that the number of times the acquisition performance is set is stored.

Further, it is preferable to execute a notification effect on the display screen to notify the player that the current period is a stock period for additional effects. This allows the player to easily understand the situation in which a new additional performance is not executed even though the ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63. In this case, for example, it is possible to notify that the additional performance is in stock period by changing the performance mode of the additional performance that is being executed, or to display the text "Additional performance in stock" as a guidance mode in the sub-display area Ds. Good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195(b), an explanation will be given of the performance mode of the additional performance when the number of times of stock reaches the upper limit number. In this control example, a maximum of 10 additional effects can be stocked, and when the stock number reaches the upper limit (10), the number of additional effects corresponding to the number of times stocked is not executed. , and is configured to perform additional effects in a special effect mode.

With this configuration, when the number of additional performances in stock increases, the number of additional performances corresponding to the number of stocks as shown in FIG. 195(a) will be executed, and the performance period will become longer. This can be suppressed. Further, by increasing the number of stocks, it is possible to perform additional performances in the special performance mode, so that players can be motivated to play games in order to stock additional performances.

Note that the execution conditions for the additional performance of this special performance mode may be set separately. For example, when a determination means is provided to determine the remaining period of the round game and a new additional performance is to be executed, the additional performance to be executed this time is set. Determine whether there is a possibility that the performance period of the round game will be longer than the remaining period of the round game, and if it is determined that the performance period of the additional performance to be executed this time may be longer than the remaining period of the round game. may be configured to perform an additional performance in a special performance mode that has a shorter performance period than the normally executed additional performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily fit the performance period of the additional performance within the round game period, so it is possible to simplify the control process for executing the additional performance.

As shown in FIG. 195(b), when the additional performance of the special performance mode is executed, the capsule 801s on which the angel pattern is written and the capsule 801t on which the skull pattern is written are displayed in the main display area Dm. , and the text 801u "Which one should you open?" is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "winning rate 100% or 0%" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the content of the current additional performance.

That is, in the additional performance shown in FIG. 195(b), a performance that notifies the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. Here, when the capsule 801s with an angel pattern is opened, a win rate of 100% is displayed in the display area HR1, and when the capsule 801t with a skull pattern is opened, a win rate of 0% is displayed in the display area HR1. Ru.

In this control example, a period for stocking the additional effects is set during at least a part of the period during which the additional effects are being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may also be such that a period for stocking additional effects can be set even during a period in which additional effects are not stored. With this configuration, for example, an additional performance may be executed during a performance other than the additional performance executed during a jackpot game, which grants a benefit that is valid to the player. It is possible to suppress the

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 196(a), this second control example differs from the first control example described above in that an additional effect selection table 222aa is added, and is otherwise the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The additional performance selection table 222aa is a data table that is referred to in order to select the performance mode of the additional performance to be executed when the execution conditions for the additional performance are satisfied. In this additional performance selection table 222aa, an additional performance that increases the winning rate and an additional performance for liveliness are respectively defined in correspondence with the value of the stock counter 223an and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f. In other words, in the second control example, the performance of the additional performance is executed according to the number of times the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied (the value of the stock counter 223an) during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited. The configuration is such that the modes can be made different, and the larger the value of the stock counter 223an, the more likely it is that an additional performance that increases the winning rate, that is, an additional performance that is advantageous to the player, will be selected. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this second control example is different from the first control example described above in that a production timer 223am and a stock counter 223an are added, and other than that, the second control example is the same. . Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The performance timer 223am is a timer for measuring a period during which execution of a new additional performance is prohibited, and when execution of an additional performance is set, a period corresponding to the type of additional performance to be executed is set. be done. Then, in the effect update process (S4011) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the timer is subtracted. Then, when the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied, the value of the performance timer 223am is referred to, and it is determined whether the current period is an additional performance execution prohibition period in which execution of a new additional performance is prohibited.

In this second control example, instead of prohibiting the execution of new additional effects during the entire execution period of additional effects, the length of the additional effect execution prohibition period is determined according to the type of additional effects ( A value is set in the performance timer 223am), and execution of a new additional performance is prohibited during the additional performance execution period. By configuring in this way, for example, only the period in which information that is advantageous to the player is reported out of the performance period of the additional performance can be set as the additional performance execution prohibition period, or other conditions (such as If the condition (which is satisfied when information indicating a jackpot win is included in the special drawing 2 pending) is satisfied, the additional production execution prohibition period will be a different period than when it is not satisfied. You can easily perform processes such as setting

Furthermore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the execution period of the additional performance can be changed based on the timing when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the execution timing of the additional performance that is set to be executed It is possible to easily set the additional effect execution prohibition period according to the execution period.

The stock counter 223an is a counter for accumulating the number of times that the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied during the additional performance execution prohibition period. The value of this stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 when the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied during the additional performance prohibition period. Then, it is referred to in the process of determining the performance mode of the additional performance, and is used in the process for making it easier to select an additional performance with a different performance mode as the performance mode of the additional performance according to the value of the stock counter 223an. Then, the value is reset to 0 when a new additional performance is executed or when a jackpot game (round game) ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222aa will be explained. FIG. 196(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222aa. This additional performance selection table 222aa includes the upper limit value of the winning rate stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j, the difference value between the upper limit value and the winning rate currently displayed in the display area HR1, the value of the stock counter 223an, and In correspondence with the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, the performance modes of the additional performance for increasing the winning rate and the additional performance for liveliness are respectively defined.

Specifically, if the winning rate upper limit is "100" and the difference value is "50~", the stock number of additional effects is "0", and the normal "point additional effect" (Figure 121 (b) )" is the "point additional effect (see Figure 195(a))" corresponding to the stock number "1 to 3", and the "special point additional effect" corresponding to the stock number "4 and up". (See FIG. 195(b)).

In addition, if the difference value is "~49", the stock number of additional effects is "0", and the normal "point additional effect (see Figure 121(b))" is stocked with a number of "1 to 3". On the other hand, an "enjoyment effect (see FIG. 122(b))" corresponding to the stock number is defined, and a "special liveliness additional effect" is defined for the stock number "4~".

In addition, if the winning rate upper limit is "79~99" and the difference value is "50~", the number of times the additional performance is stocked is "0", and the normal "point additional performance" (see Figure 121(b) )" corresponds to the number of stocks "1 to 3", "point additional effect (see Figure 195 (a))" corresponds to the number of stocks, and for the number of stocks "4 to", "Additional points" corresponds to the number of stocks. "Point addition effect (see FIG. 195(a))" is defined.

In addition, if the difference value is "~49", the stock number of additional effects is "0", and the normal "lively effect (see Figure 122(b))" is stocked with a number of "1 to 3". On the other hand, an "enjoyment effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and an "enjoyment effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the number of stocks "4~".

Furthermore, if the winning rate upper limit is "~78" and the difference value is "50~", the number of times the additional performance is stocked is "0", and the normal "point additional performance (see Figure 121(b))" ” is the “point additional effect” corresponding to the stock number “1 to 3”, and the “point addition effect” corresponding to the stock number is “4” to the stock number “4~” "Additional effects (see FIG. 195(a))" are defined.

In addition, if the difference value is "~49", the stock number of additional effects is "0", and the normal "lively effect (see Figure 122(b))" is stocked with a number of "1 to 3". On the other hand, an "enjoyment effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and an "enjoyment effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the number of stocks "4~".

In other words, in the second control example, the performance of the additional performance is executed according to the number of times the execution condition for the additional performance is satisfied (the value of the stock counter 223an) during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited. The configuration is such that the modes can be made different, and the larger the value of the stock counter 223an, the more likely it is that an additional performance that increases the winning rate, that is, an additional performance that is advantageous to the player, will be selected. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. First, details of the effect update process 2 (S4061) will be explained with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 2 (S4061). This performance update process 2 (S4061) is a process that is executed in place of the performance update process (S4011) in the first control example, and is executed at a timing other than during special symbol fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation period), that is, when the jackpot This is a process for updating the value of the performance timer 223am that is set during the game.

Of the effect update process 2 (S4061) in this second control example, the same processes as the effect update process 2 (S4011) in the first control example are executed in each process from S4302 to S4310, and In the process, if it is determined that the current special figure is not changing (the jackpot game is in progress), the production timer update process is executed (S4351), and then the process moves to S4310. This is different from the effect update processing (see S4061) described above.

Here, the contents of the effect timer update process (S4351) will be explained with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production timer update process (S4351). This effect timer update process (S4351) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the effect update process 2 (see S4061 in FIG. 198) that the current special figure is not changing (S4301 in FIG. 198: No). Then, a process is executed to measure a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of additional performance during the jackpot game.

When the effect timer update process (S4351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, whether the prohibition period is measured by the effect timer 223am (S6001). If it is determined that the value of the production timer 223am is not greater than 0 (0) (S6001: No), the current process is not in the prohibition period, so the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0 (S6001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 223am is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether the updated value of the effect timer 223am is 0. (S6003), and if it is determined that it is 0, that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the prohibition period (S6003: Yes), a display command indicating that additional effects are possible is set (S6004), and this processing end. Further, in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the value of the updated effect timer 223am is not 0, that is, it is during the prohibition period (S6003: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the additional production mode setting process 2 (S5059) will be explained. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional production mode setting process 2 (S5059). This additional production mode setting process 2 (S5059) is different from the additional production mode setting process (S5009 in FIG. 173) of the first control example described above, in that it adds processing during the prohibition period, and the production mode of the additional production. The difference is that the process of determining the performance is changed to the process of determining the performance mode based on the number of times the additional performance is stocked, but other than that, the process is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the additional production mode setting process 2 (S5059) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the production timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in the prohibition period (S5151), and the value of the production timer 223am is determined. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5151: Yes), the value of the stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 (S5152), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S5151 that the value of the production timer 223am is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S5151: Yes), the additional production mode setting process of the first control example described above (S5009 in FIG. 173) is performed. The same processes of S5101 to S5103 are executed, and then, based on the calculated difference value and the upper limit value, the additional performance selection table 222aa is used to determine the performance mode of the additional performance (S5153). The additional effect selection table 222aa used in the process of S5153 is configured so that the value of the stock counter 223an is also referred to, as described above with reference to FIG. 197.

When the process of S5153 is finished, the value of the stock counter 223an is cleared to 0 (S5154), and the process of S5101 to S5103, which is the same as the additional production mode setting process of the first control example described above (S5009 in FIG. 173), is executed. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the additional performance period to be executed is set to the value of the performance timer 223am (S5155), and this processing is ended.

As described above, the second control example is configured to vary the length of the period during which execution of a new additional performance is prohibited depending on the type of additional performance. Specifically, when an additional performance that increases the winning rate is performed, a new additional performance is not executed until that additional performance ends, and when an additional performance for liveliness is executed, the New additional performances can be executed even during the period of additional performances. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute additional effects that provide information that is advantageous to the player (increased winning rate), and to make the additional effects overlap for the purpose of creating excitement. This can further enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this second control example, if the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of a new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally executed based on the establishment of the execution condition. The game machine is configured to perform processing to determine a performance mode, and when an additional performance providing information (increase in winning rate) advantageous to the player is determined, the processing result is temporarily stored. Then, after it becomes possible to execute a new additional effect, when performing an additional effect that provides information that is advantageous to the player (increase winning rate), the processing results of the additional effect that have been temporarily stored are also included. It is configured to execute additional effects. In addition, during the period when the execution of new additional effects is prohibited, the number of times the execution conditions for additional effects are met is also stored, and based on the stored number of times, when it becomes possible to execute new additional effects. The presentation mode of the additional presentation to be executed can be determined.

With this configuration, a player who actively plays the game in order to execute an additional performance during a jackpot game is forced to continue playing the game actively even during the execution period of the additional performance. be able to.

<About the third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 206. In the first control example described above, when an additional performance for liveliness is executed among the additional performances performed during a jackpot game, unless a predetermined condition is satisfied (a jackpot is added to the acquired special drawing 2 pending) (as long as information indicating winning is not included), additional effects with the same display format are not displayed a certain number of times in a row, so as to make players interested in additional effects for entertainment. It was composed of However, in the first control example described above, the display mode of the additional entertainment effect is randomly set, and the predetermined condition is satisfied only when the randomly set display mode is the same twice in a row. Since the display mode is configured to be varied depending on the presence or absence, there are few opportunities for the same display mode to be displayed three times in a row, and the presentation effect is not suitably enhanced.

On the other hand, in this third control example, as the display mode of the additional effect for liveliness executed during the jackpot game, the display mode is randomly determined within the range excluding display modes displayed in the past, The configuration is such that the type of information provided to the player is varied depending on the combination of display modes at the time when the additional production for liveliness is executed a specific number of times (5 times). By configuring this way, when an additional performance for liveliness is executed a specific number of times, some information is provided to the player based on the result of the performance, so the performance mode is randomly set for the player. It is possible to reliably provide a benefit based on the fact that the additional performance for liveliness has been executed a specific number of times, and the performance effect can be suitably enhanced.

Furthermore, in this third control example, it is configured to be able to notify which display mode is displayed as an additional effect for liveliness to be likely to be given a benefit that is advantageous to the player. Thereby, the player can play the game while expecting that a desired display mode will be set for the display mode of the additional production for liveliness that is randomly set.

This third control example is different from the first control example described above in that the content of the additional production performed during the jackpot game is different, and in order to make the production content of the additional production different, the voice lamp control is The difference is that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the device 113 has been changed, and a part of the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. Hereinafter, differences from the first control example described above will be mainly explained, and detailed explanations of the same contents as the first control example will be omitted.

<About the production content in the pachinko machine in the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202, the characteristic presentation contents among the various presentations executed in the third control example will be explained. In this third control example, the content of the additional performance performed during the jackpot game is different from the first control example described above.

FIG. 201(a) is a diagram showing the display screen at the time when the jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 201(a), when the jackpot game starts, a bingo card is displayed in the display area HR20 formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a message "Bingo game start" is displayed above the bingo card. characters are displayed. Then, the characters ``GET SECRET INFORMATION WITH THE NUMBER OF LINES ENABLED'' are displayed as a game guide mode to suggest benefits based on the performance results of the bingo game. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Up to 5 types of numbers will appear" is displayed as a game guide mode to inform that there are 5 types of numbers that can be obtained in this bingo game. Ru.

Thereby, it is possible to make the player who has started the jackpot game understand in an easy-to-understand manner that the bonus will be awarded according to the number of lines established by up to five types of numbers that can be obtained during the bingo game. In addition, in this third control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the ball enters the general ball entry hole 63 during the jackpot game, and the over winning into the specific winning hole 65a is executed as an additional effect. This is an opportunity. Then, as an additional effect, an effect in which numbers are displayed is executed, and the bingo game progresses. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to establish an opportunity to execute the additional performance in order to advance the bingo game.

When the jackpot game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 201(a) and an additional effect is executed based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63, the display screen shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed. FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an additional effect is executed in a bingo game executed during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 201(b), when the execution conditions for the additional performance are met (when the execution of the additional performance is determined based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63), a randomly set number is A display icon 820 indicating . In FIG. 201(b), a display icon 820 indicating the number "1" is displayed, and the area corresponding to the number "1" of the bingo cards in the display area HR20 is filled (in the figure, it is marked with a cross). display) is displayed.

Furthermore, a display area HR21 is formed, and the acquired numbers are displayed as a history. This display area HR21 is formed in a size corresponding to the number of display icons 820 that can be obtained in the current bingo game, and as shown in FIG. 201(b), one type of display icon 820 (number At the time when the display mode indicating that "1") is displayed, it becomes possible for the player to predict how many types of display icons 820 remain to be obtained. In other words, the display area HR21 serves as a history display mode for notifying the player of the number of display icons 820 obtained during the bingo game and the type of number shown in the display icons 820 in an easy-to-understand manner. Thereby, the player can easily grasp how many types of display icons 820 can be obtained during the bingo game.

In the example shown in FIG. 201(a), the display mode of the displayed bingo card is a display mode in which 9 types of numbers ("1" to "9") are displayed in 9 square areas. However, the display mode of the bingo cards used in the bingo game is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an overlapping display mode in which the same number is displayed in a plurality of areas. In this case, when numbers displayed in multiple areas are set as additional effects, it is possible to easily increase the number of bingo winning lines, and numbers displayed in multiple areas are not set as additional effects. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for bingo to occur, so it is possible to perform a sharp performance for the players. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of bingo winning lines until the last display icon 820 is displayed, so it is possible to keep the player interested until the end of the bingo game.

When the bingo game ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 202(a) is displayed. FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the time when the fifth type of display icon 820 (number "9") is displayed. As shown in FIG. 202(a), the player is notified by the history display in the display area HR21 that the fifth type of display icon 820 has been displayed. Specifically, the history display in the display area HR21 indicates that display icons 820 indicating the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" were displayed in the current bingo game. Displayed.

In the display area HR20, the area corresponding to the number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) indicated by the display icon 820 acquired this time is displayed in a display mode (displayed with a cross mark), and as a result of the bingo game. A display mode indicating that the number of bingo winning lines is 2 is displayed. Further, above the main display area Dm, the words "2 lines established" are displayed as a result display mode indicating the result of the current bingo game. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Congratulations" is displayed as a guidance feature indicating whether the result of the current bingo game is advantageous to the player.

In the bingo game example shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, as shown in FIG. 201(a), the display mode is such that nine types of numbers (“1” to “9”) are displayed in nine square areas. Since a bingo game is being executed using bingo cards, if the types of numbers obtained are, for example, "1", "2", "3", "4", or "5", then the bingo completion line The numbers become one line. Furthermore, if the additional performance is not performed five times during the jackpot game, five types of display icons 820 cannot be obtained, so there is a possibility that the number of bingo winning lines will be zero. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 202(b), when the number of bingo winning lines is 2, the result of the bingo game is an advantageous result for the player (the upper limit of the number of possible winning lines). A "Congratulations" comment will be displayed.

The guidance mode displayed in this sub-display area Ds is configured to vary depending on the result of the bingo game. For example, in the example of the bingo game shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the display icon If you have obtained 5 types of 820 and the number of bingo successful lines is 1 line, the "Participation Award" comment will be displayed when you have not obtained 5 types of display icons 820 and the number of bingo successful lines is 1 line. In this case, the comment "It's a participation award, but I could have tried harder", which indicates that the maximum number of additional performances were not executed, is displayed when 5 types of display icons 820 have not been obtained, and the number of bingo winning lines is 0. In this case, the comment "Unfortunate" will be displayed. In this way, by changing the content of the guidance form that shows the result of the bingo game depending on the number of executions of the additional effect and the number of lines where bingo is completed, it is possible to tell whether the result of the current bingo game was good or not. It is possible to make it easy for people to understand.

After the bingo game ends, as shown in FIG. 202(b), benefits are given according to the number of bingo lines. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of benefit information based on the results of the bingo game. In this third control example, as a benefit given to the player as a result of the bingo game, the game status information indicating the game status set after the end of the jackpot game, and the special figure 2 pending that has already been acquired during the jackpot game. It is configured to provide bonus information such as consecutive winnings information indicating a jackpot win (information indicating a pending consecutive jackpot), and the larger the number of winning lines, the more the above-mentioned gaming status information and contents of consecutive winnings information. The display format is designed to be easy for players to identify.

In FIG. 202(b), as game state information, the characters "Probability Variation Confirmed" are displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode to clearly notify that the probability variation state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the sub display area Ds The words ``You did it!'' are displayed to congratulate you on the establishment of the variable state. In FIG. 202(b), as described above with reference to FIG. 202(a), the result of the bingo game was an advantageous result for the player (the number of bingo winning lines was 2), so the award was given to the player. As the bonus information, a display format that allows the player to easily determine that a variable probability state is set is displayed. For example, when the number of bingo winning lines is 1, "Chance!!" In other words, a display mode that only suggests the possibility that a variable probability state will be set is displayed, and if the number of bingo winning lines is 0, a display mode of “no benefit” is displayed, that is, a display mode is set after the end of the jackpot game. The display mode for notifying (suggesting) the gaming status is configured not to be displayed.

Thereby, it is possible to make the bingo game executed during the jackpot game more interesting to the player who wants to quickly determine the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, information regarding any one of the multiple benefit types (gaming status information, consecutive ticket information) is provided as the benefit information given to the player according to the result of the bingo game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, for example, when the result of a bingo game executed during a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game is advantageous to the player, the game state information (time-saving state Instead of clearly informing the player of the status (information indicating that the status is set), it becomes possible to notify the player of information that is advantageous to the player (for example, consecutive winning information) that another benefit type has. .

In addition, in this third control example, the display mode is set based on the result of the bingo game for the benefit type that is advantageous to the player among the plurality of benefit types, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured such that the display mode based on the result of the bingo game is set only for the gaming status information indicating the gaming status set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, a situation may occur in which the player is clearly notified that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, but the display format indicating that the time-saving state is set also indicates that the time-saving state is set. Despite this, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for the variable probability state and from excessively reducing the player's desire to play when the time saving state ends. This can be said to be advantageous information for those who

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 203, this third control example differs from the second control example described above in that an array storage area 223ba, a selected information storage area 223bb, and a display number counter 223bc are added. , otherwise the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The array storage area 223ba is a storage area for temporarily storing the number types set for each area (9 squares) of the bingo card used in the bingo game, and is a storage area for temporarily storing the number type set for each area (9 squares) of the bingo card used in the bingo game. (upper left area where “1” is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. 201(a)), second area (upper middle area where “2” is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. 201(a)), It has nine types of storage areas corresponding to each of the nine areas (the lower right area where "9" is displayed on the bingo card shown in Figure 201(a)), and the number determined at the start of the bingo game. The type is stored in the corresponding recording area. Then, at the end of the bingo game, it is referred to when specifying the number of bingo winning lines based on the resulting number type as the display mode of the additional performance.

With this configuration, even if the number type displayed on the bingo card is randomly determined at the start of the bingo game, the number of lines established in the bingo game can be reliably determined. be able to.

In this control example, the type of numbers displayed on the bingo card is randomly determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be configured such that the player can select one bingo card from among them. In this case, the ROM 222 of the MPU of the audio lamp control device 113 stores in advance information corresponding to the numerical arrays of multiple types of bingo cards, reads out the information corresponding to the player's selection results, and stores the information in the array storage area 223ba. It should be configured so that it is stored in . With this configuration, the type (number type) of the display icon 820 that is randomly determined for the number arrangement selected by the player from among the plurality of patterns predefined as the number arrangement of the bingo card is set. Since the bingo game used is executed, the result of the bingo game can be varied according to the player's selection result. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, it is possible to easily make the players happy and sad.

In addition, if the player is configured to be able to select one bingo card from among a plurality of bingo cards whose numerical arrangement is predefined, each bingo card is It is preferable to display a selection screen that allows you to confirm the number arrangement specified in . This allows the player to proceed with the bingo game while considering whether or not the selection of the bingo cards was appropriate, thereby making it easier to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this case, the bingo game may be configured so that the player can confirm at least one number arrangement among the number arrangements defined in the bingo card that the player has not selected. This allows the player to more easily determine whether or not the bingo card selection was appropriate.

Furthermore, even in the case where the number arrangement is determined for each area of the bingo card as in the third control example, the player may be configured to be able to select any number. It is possible to make it easier for a player to experience joys and sorrows in the production of kata.

In this third control example, the bingo game is executed using the bingo card determined at the time the bingo game is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of cards may be executed during the bingo game. Even if the number arrangement of the bingo card is configured to be variable when a condition is met, for example, when a specific performance result is established in a mini-game in which the performance result is variable by the player operating the operating means. good. As a result, even if the progress of the bingo game is unsatisfactory, it is possible to change the progress of the bingo game to a situation advantageous to the player by changing the number arrangement of the bingo card, so that the bingo game can be played. It is possible to execute a performance that arouses the interest of the player until the end of the game.

The selected information storage area 223bb is a storage area that stores information indicating a display mode that has already been selected as a display mode of an additional effect executed during a jackpot game, and when the display mode of the additional effect is selected. Information indicating the selected display mode is stored in . Then, when the next additional effect is executed, the stored information is read out, and a display mode is selected from a range excluding the display mode indicated by the read information. With this configuration, when additional effects are executed multiple times, the additional effects can be executed in various display modes without selecting the same display mode.

Further, in this third control example, the display mode of the additional performance during the jackpot game is configured to indicate the type of numbers used in the bingo game. Then, as the history display displayed in the display area HR21, a display mode corresponding to the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is displayed.

The display number counter 223bc is a counter for measuring the number of executions of additional performances, and a value corresponding to the number of times of additional performances that can be executed during the jackpot game is set based on the start of the jackpot game, and when the additional production is executed. The value is decremented each time it is executed. Then, when the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0, a result effect corresponding to the result of the additional effect is executed.

In this third control example, when the bingo game is started, the number of times the additional performance is performed (the number of times the display icon 820 is displayed) is determined, and the display icon 820 is displayed the determined number of times. In this control example, since the additional effects are not executed in the same display mode, the more the additional effects are executed, the more types of numbers that can be obtained in the bingo game can be increased.

In this way, even if the number of executions of the additional production is configured to be variable, the number of executions of the additional production is set as the value of the display number counter 223bc, and the display number counter 223bc is set each time the additional production is executed. By configuring to subtract the value of , it is possible to reliably display the result of the bingo game when the additional effects have been executed the determined number of times.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 to 206, the content of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the performance executed during the jackpot game is different. More specifically, in the first control example described above, when a ball enters the general ball entry hole 63 during a jackpot game, or when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot game, In addition, the system is configured to be able to execute additional performance, and as the additional performance, a performance mode for increasing the winning rate or a performance mode for lively performance can be selected.

On the other hand, in this third control example, the bingo game is configured to be executable during the jackpot game, and the type of numbers used in the bingo game is configured to be displayed as an additional effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the winning effect setting process 3 (S4572) will be explained. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning effect setting process 3 (S4572). As shown in FIG. 204, the winning effect setting process 3 (S4572) in the third control example is different from the winning effect setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168) in the first control example described above. The difference is that the process executed when it is determined that "777") is not stopped and displayed, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the winning effect setting process 3 (S4572) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop display mode (jackpot symbol) of the third symbol stopped and displayed this time is "777" (S4601), and "777" is determined. If it is determined that it is (S4601: Yes), the same processes as S4602, S4603, and S4609 are executed as the winning effect setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168) in the first control example described above, and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol is not "777", that is, the stop display mode of the third symbol to indicate a jackpot win is not the stop display mode to indicate a probability variable jackpot. (S4601: No), next, the numerical arrangement of the bingo card is determined (S4651).

Here, the processing contents of S4651 will be explained. In this third control example, nine types of numbers from "1" to "9" are prepared as the number types used in the number arrangement of the bingo card. Specifically, it is stored in advance in the numerical information storage area of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 202(a), nine areas (first area to ninth area) are defined on the bingo card, and for each area, information is stored in the numerical information storage area. A process of randomly determining one number type from among the number types by lottery is executed.

When the process of S4651 is finished, the number array determined in the process of S4651 is stored in the array storage area 223ba (S4652), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 5 (S4653), and the process moves to S4608.

In the process of S4653, the number of additional effects performed during the bingo game, that is, the number of times the display icon 820 (see FIG. 202(a)) is displayed is defined. This value is configured so that different values can be selected based on the jackpot type to be executed, and the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player, that is, the jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, is selected. The jackpot type for which a variable probability state is set is configured so that a larger value is more likely to be set. In this way, by configuring the display number counter 223bc to be able to set different values depending on the type of jackpot, jackpot games that can provide information advantageous to the player (information indicating that it is a probability-variable jackpot) are more effective. , it is possible to easily increase the number of bingo winning lines in a bingo game.

Note that a different process may be executed to determine the value to be set in the display number counter 223bc. A larger value may be easily set in the display number counter 223bc than when the game is not played, or a state in which specific information that is advantageous to the player can be provided, for example, a time saving state may be set after the end of a jackpot game. , it may be configured such that a specific value (for example, 2) is set in the display number counter 223bc in a state in which information indicating a jackpot win is included in the reserved special drawing 2 that has been acquired. Thereby, even though the bingo game has started, it is possible to forcibly end the bingo game while the number of bingo winning lines is 0, and to provide the above-mentioned specific information. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that is surprising to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, the contents of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) will be explained with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576). This round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is a process for ending the bingo game when a specific round game is executed, in contrast to the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above. They differ in the additions, but are otherwise the same.

When the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S4706 as the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above are executed. When the process of S4705 or S4706 is finished, it is determined whether the round game to be executed this time is the 8th round (S4771), and if it is determined that it is the 8th round (S4771: Yes), the number of displayed It is determined whether the value of the counter 223bc is 0 (S4772), and when it is determined that it is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the bingo game has not ended at the time when the 8th round has started, (S4772) :No), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 1 (S4773), and the process of S4707, which is the same as the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above, is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S4771, if it is determined that the round game to be started this time is not the 8th round (S4771: No), or in the process of S4772, the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, the round game has already been started. If it is determined that the bingo game has ended (S4772: Yes), the process skips S4773 and proceeds to S4707, and then ends this process.

As explained above, in the round effect setting process 3 (S4576), even though the jackpot game has progressed to a specific timing (starting timing of the 8th round), additional effects are executed a predetermined number of times. If not, the process for terminating the execution of the additional performance is executed the next time the additional performance is executed, regardless of the number of times the additional performance has been executed up to now. As a result, while the bingo game is being executed, the additional effect (display of the display icon 820) is not executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), and the jackpot game ends before the bingo game ends. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the results of the bingo game cannot be notified to the players.

In addition, in this control example, by setting the value of the display number counter 223bc to 1 in the process of S4773, the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0 when the next additional performance is executed, and the result of the bingo game is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 0 in the process of S4773 so that the result of the bingo game is announced during the 8th round. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the result of the bingo game can be reliably notified during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the additional production mode setting process 3 (S5079) will be explained. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional production mode setting process 3 (S5079). This additional performance mode setting process 3 (S5079) is different from the above-mentioned additional performance setting process 2 (see S5059 in FIG. The difference is that the system is configured to skip to the next step, and that the processing for setting the presentation mode of the additional presentation is different.

When additional production mode setting processing 3 (S5079) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the production timer 223am is greater than 0 (S5151), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S5151: Yes). , and then ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S5151: No), then the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is read out, and one of the unstored values is (S5171), sets a display command indicating the determined value (S5172), stores information corresponding to the determined value in the selected information storage area 223bb (S5173), and sets the display number counter 223bc. The value is subtracted by 1 (S5174).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the display number counter 223bc after the subtraction is 0 (S5175), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (S5175: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the bingo game, , this process ends immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S5175, if it is determined that the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, it is the end timing of the bingo game (S5175: Yes), the information stored in the array storage area 223ba (this time Based on the information indicating the number arrangement of the bingo cards used in the bingo game) and the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb (the number type determined by the additional effect), the bingo completion line is determined. number (S5176), determines benefit information corresponding to the identified number of established lines (S5177), sets a display command to show the determined benefit information (S5178), and clears information in various storage areas. (S5179), and this process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 212. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the effect executed during the win rate UP zone is different, and other than that, is the same.

In the first control example described above, the contents of the performance executed during the win rate UP zone are configured to be executable: a slot performance (see FIG. 124(a)) and an increase confirmation performance (see FIG. 125); The content of the performance to be executed is determined according to the type of variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when a specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type, an increase confirmation effect is executed to notify the player that the winning rate will increase, and then the amount of increase in the winning rate will be notified. It was composed of

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the content of the upward confirmation performance that is executed when the specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type is different. More specifically, it is configured to be able to perform an operation performance in which the winning rate is increased by 1% based on the player's operation (repeated hit operation) of the frame button 22 as the increase confirmation performance. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the amount of increase in the winning rate during the increase confirmation performance based on the player's operation, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. I can do it.

In this control example, the winning rate of the battle performance is configured to be displayed variably between "0 to 100%", and as a winning rate increasing performance that varies (increases) the displayed winning rate, the winning rate is displayed in 5% increments. The slot performance that varies (increases) the winning rate and the guaranteed increase performance that varies (increases) the winning rate in units of 1% are configured to be executable multiple times.

Here, if the win rate of the battle performance is displayed as a specific value (for example, "77%" or "33%") in the process of executing multiple increase confirmation performances, it will be difficult for the player to In order to make the player think that the gaming state set is an advantageous gaming state (variable probability state), it is necessary to restrict the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, if the configuration is such that multiple types of performances can be executed as winning rate increasing performances, it is necessary to execute control for all of the winning rate increasing performances to ensure that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. However, there was a problem in that the processing load of the display restriction process to prevent the winning percentage of a specific value from being displayed increased.

On the other hand, in this fourth control example, the win rate value (1's digit value) displayed in the increase confirmation performance that is the win rate increase performance that can increase the win rate in the smallest unit (1%) It is configured so that the winning rate does not reach a specific value, no matter what value the performance results of other winning rate increasing performances (slot performances) become. In this way, when executing multiple winning rate increasing effects with different increase amounts, display restriction processing is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and display restriction processing is not executed for other winning rate increasing effects. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of display restriction processing.

<About the production content of the fourth control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 207, a characteristic effect among the various effects executed in the fourth control example will be explained. FIG. 207(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a consecutive hit effect is executed as an increase confirmation effect executed during the win rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 207(a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, a continuous hit image RG for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed, and the player's operation of the frame button 22 is displayed. A time gauge TG is displayed below the time gauge TG for indicating the operation validity period during which the operation is determined to be valid. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "Increase your winning rate by repeatedly hitting the button" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating the content of the repeated-hitting performance.

Then, based on the player operating the frame button 22 within the operation validity period, numerical icons 831a to 831b representing the increasing value of the winning rate are displayed from the icon 831 imitating a pot. In this control example, the value by which the winning rate increases in the continuous hit performance is configured in units of "1%", and "+1%" indicating that the winning rate increases by 1% is displayed in the numerical icons 831a to 831c. has been done. Further, "+?%" is displayed in the numerical value icon 831d.

Here, in this control example, a winning rate of a specific value (for example, "33", "77") is displayed in the display area HR1 at the time when one winning rate increasing effect ends, and the player is In order to prevent erroneous recognition that the jackpot game is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (a jackpot game in which a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends), the winning rate is displayed at the end of the consecutive hit performance. The display content of the effect is controlled so that the 1's digit does not become "2, 3, 7, 8".

Specifically, the 1's digit of the probability display displayed in the display area HR1 is specified, and the number of times the numerical icon 831a is displayed in the continuous hit performance is added up to the value of the specified 1's digit. When the value reaches "2, 3, 7, 8", the display icon "+?%" is displayed as shown in the numerical icon 831d. Then, when the continuous hit effect ends, the displayed number of "+1%" is totaled, and the value of the specified 1's digit and the cumulative number is "2, 3, 7, After displaying a numerical value in the numeric icon 831d of "+?%" so as to have a value other than "8", the performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed as shown in FIG. 207(b).

FIG. 207(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen showing the performance results of the continuous hit performance. FIG. 207(b) shows the performance result when the continuous hit performance ends in the state shown in FIG. 207(a). If the value is not added, the performance result will be "+3%" and the winning rate displayed in display area HR1 will be the specific value "33%", so display restriction processing will be executed and "+?%" will be added. ” By displaying the value “+2%” for the numerical icon 831d displayed, “+5%” is displayed in the display area HR30 where the result of the continuous hit effect is displayed, and is displayed in the display area HR1. A consecutive hit effect is executed so that the winning rate is "35%".

As shown in FIG. 207, during the continuous hit performance, the increase value of the winning rate obtained by operating the frame button 22 is individually displayed in the main display area Dm, and the performance result of the continuous hit performance is displayed in the display area HR30, and then the display area It is configured to be added to HR1 and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the value displayed in the display area HR1 changes during the continuous hit performance, making it difficult for the player to grasp the current winning rate. Further, it is also possible to prevent the value displayed in the display area HR1 from being changed during the continuous hit performance and displaying a specific value in the display area HR1 in the middle of the change.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, the display content of the continuous hit effect is variably controlled so that the displayed win rate does not reach a specific value, but the present control example is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may also be configured to perform a certain effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 208, another example of the effect control content for preventing the display winning rate from reaching a specific value will be explained. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in which a plurality of winning rate increasing effects are being executed overlappingly. In the example shown in FIG. 208, "+4%" is displayed in the display area HR30 as the result of the continuous hit effect, and the display win rate "73%" displayed in the display area HR1 is the result of the continuous hit effect (+4%). When the winning rate is added and displayed, the displayed win rate becomes a specific value "77%", so an additional effect that further increases the winning rate by ``+5%'' is executed overlapping the continuous hit effect.

With this configuration, by simply performing the process of determining whether or not to execute an additional performance, it is possible to control the performance content (display content) so that the winning percentage display does not become a specific value for the performance content of the continuous hit performance. It is possible to prevent the win rate display from becoming a specific value without any errors.

In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, by controlling the display content so that the displayed winning rate is added in a positive direction, the displayed winning rate can be suppressed from reaching a specific value without giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display contents may be controlled so that the display winning percentage is varied in a negative direction.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 209, this control example differs from the second control example described above in that an undetermined flag 223ca is added, and is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The undetermined flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the numerical icon 831d indicating that the winning rate to be added is unconfirmed is displayed during the continuous hit performance, and is the numerical icon 831d indicating that the winning rate to be added is unconfirmed. Set to on when displaying. Then, when the value (winning rate) given to the numerical icon 831d is determined to indicate the performance result of the continuous hit performance, it is set to OFF.

<About the control content of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. This fourth control example is different from the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a process related to a continuous hit effect in the winning rate UP zone is added. Specifically, instead of the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (see S4007 in FIG. 163), frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) is replaced with the production update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165). The difference is that effect update processing 4 (see S4061 in FIG. 212) is executed instead. Other than that, they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 210, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (see 4057) will be explained. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (see 4057). This frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (see 4057) is different from the frame button input monitoring/production process (see S4007 in FIG. 163) of the first control example described above, to the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (see 4057). They differ in that they execute processing in response to operations, but are otherwise the same. Specifically, when frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (see 4057) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101), and it is determined that it is not greater than 0. If so (S4101: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current state is a win rate UP zone (S4151).

In the process of S4151, based on the performance information stored in the performance information storage area 223g, it is determined whether the current situation is a winning rate UP zone, and if it is determined that it is a winning rate UP zone (S4151: Yes), consecutive hits are performed. The effect setting process is executed (S4152), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4151, if it is determined that the zone is not in the winning rate UP zone (S4151: No), S4102 to S4111 are the same as the frame button input monitoring and production process of the first control example described above (see S4007 in FIG. 163). Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the continuous hit performance setting process (S4152) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit effect setting process (S4152). In this repeated hit performance setting process (S4152), processing is executed to determine the display mode of the numerical icon 831a (see FIG. 207) that is displayed based on the frame button 22 being operated during the repeated hit performance.

When the repeated hit effect setting process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the depression of the frame button 22 is detected (S4171), and if it is determined that it has been detected (S4171: Yes), it is stored in the display point storage area 223r. The displayed points, that is, the win rate value displayed in the display area HR1 are read out (S4172), and it is determined whether the tens digit of the displayed points is 7 or less (S4173). If it is determined in the process of S4173 that it is 7 or less (S4173: Yes), then it is determined whether the 1 digit of the display point is "1, 2, 6, or 7" (S4174). , "1, 2, 6, or 7" (S4174: Yes), it is determined whether the undetermined flag 223ca is set on (S4175).

If it is determined in the process of S4175 that it is not set to on (S4175: No), a display command is set to indicate that the number of display points to be added is undetermined (S4176), and the undetermined flag 223ca is set. is set to on (S4177), and this processing ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4176, a numeric icon 831d of “+?%” (see FIG. 207) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4173, if it is determined that the tens place of the display point is not 7 or less (is 8 or more) (S4173: Yes), the specific value ("33 ", "77"), so there is no problem with setting any value for the ones digit (the specific value will not be displayed in the future), so the display point is 1. A display command is set to indicate that the points will be added (S4178), and then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S4174, if it is determined that it is not "1, 2, 6, or 7" (S4174: No), there is no problem in executing the continuous hit effect as usual, so the process moves to the process of S4178. After that, the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this process ends. Furthermore, in the process of S4175, if it is determined that the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4175: No), in other words, in the current continuous hit performance, the numeric icon 831d of "+?%" has already been set (see FIG. 207). ) is displayed, a display command is set to indicate that the display point will be added by 1 (S4178), and then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing end. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of numeric icons 831d of "+?%" (see FIG. 207) from being displayed during a continuous hit performance, thereby preventing a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the effect update process 4 (see S4061) will be explained. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 4 (see S4061). In this performance update process 4 (see S4061), the value of the valid period timer 223e set for the continuous hit performance becomes 0, unlike the performance update process of the first control example described above (see S4011 in FIG. 165). The difference is that processing is added when Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the effect update process 4 (S4061) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4304, which are the same as the effect update process of the first control example described above (see S4011 in FIG. 165), are executed, and in the process of S4304, If it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223e is 0 (S4304: Yes), then it is determined whether the undetermined flag 223ca is set on (S4351). If it is determined that the undetermined flag 223ca is set to on (S4351: Yes), the undetermined flag 223ca is set to off (S4352), and the value of the display point is set to "2, 3, 7, 8. ” (S4353), and stores the display points to which the determined value is added in the display point storage area (S4354). A display command for showing the performance result of the operation performance is set (S4305), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223e is not 0 (greater than 0) (S4304: Yes), the effect update process of the first control example described above (see S4011 in FIG. 165) ), and the process ends.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, a variable performance that can variably display variable stage information multiple times (a performance that displays the winning rate of the battle performance variably between "0 to 100%") is executed. In addition, as a performance mode of variable performance that changes stage information, a performance mode with different variable amounts (as a win rate increase performance that changes (increases) the displayed winning rate, the win rate is set in 5% increments) It is configured such that it is possible to set a slot performance that varies (increases) the win rate, and a fixed increase performance that varies (increases) the winning rate in 1% increments.

Here, if the win rate of the battle performance is displayed as a specific value (for example, "77%" or "33%") in the process of executing multiple increase confirmation performances, it will be difficult for the player to In order to make the player think that the gaming state set is an advantageous gaming state (variable probability state), it is necessary to restrict the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, if the configuration is such that multiple types of performances can be executed as winning rate increasing performances, it is necessary to perform control for all of the winning rate increasing performances so that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. , there was a problem in that the processing load of the display restriction process to prevent the winning percentage of a specific value from being displayed increased.

On the other hand, in this fourth control example, the win rate value (1's digit value) displayed in the increase confirmation performance that is the win rate increase performance that can increase the win rate in the smallest unit (1%) It is configured so that the winning rate does not reach a specific value, no matter what value the performance results of other winning rate increasing performances (slot performances) become. In this way, when executing multiple winning rate increasing effects with different increase amounts, display restriction processing is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and display restriction processing is not executed for other winning rate increasing effects. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of display restriction processing.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 221. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of lucky point display control has been changed, and is otherwise the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this fifth control example, like the first control example described above, an effect is executed in which lucky points are added and displayed during a high probability state of a normal symbol, and a predetermined number of lucky points ( 100P), the player is informed that the current gaming state is a variable probability state. In other words, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the lucky points are configured so that they cannot reach 100P.

Then, as a production that adds and displays lucky points, there is a first addition production that adds 1 to the value every time a special symbol variation starts, and a specific production as a variation production (for example, a battle production where the production result is "continue") A second addition effect that adds a plurality of values (2 to 5) when is executed is configured to be executable.

With this configuration, while the high probability state of the normal symbols is set, the game can be played while expecting the lucky points to reach a predetermined number.

However, a difference occurs between the lucky point value (internal points) managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the lucky point value (display point) actually controlled for display by the display control device 114. There was a risk that the lucky points would reach a predetermined number even though the time saving state was set.

Specifically, the display control device 114 displays lucky points (display points) on the liquid crystal screen based on a command output from the audio lamp control device 113 (for example, a command that includes information indicating internal points). In this case, there was a problem in that neither the audio lamp control device 113 nor the display control device 114 could detect the mismatch when the internal point and the display point were different.

The above-mentioned difference may occur, for example, when the liquid crystal board is momentarily stopped, that is, when a command is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 but the command is not received, or when the audio lamp control device This problem may occur when the display control device 114 receives a command incorrectly due to generated noise even though the command is not output from the display control device 114 from the display control device 113 .

In contrast, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a process of determining whether or not an internal point matches a display point.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably detect a mismatch between the internal points managed on the audio lamp control device 113 side and the display points managed on the display control device 114 side.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, when a mismatch occurs between an internal point and a display point, a correction process can be executed in which one value (the value of the internal point) is made positive and the other value is corrected. are doing. Further, the content of the correction process is configured to vary depending on the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) in which lucky points can be added and displayed.

Specifically, in the first half of the battle mode, if there is a mismatch between internal points and display points, instead of immediately executing a process to correct the mismatch, a second addition effect ( When a performance in which a plurality of lucky point values can be added in one performance is executed, the correction process is executed using the contents of the addition. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the difference between internal points and display points while continuing to perform the first addition effect in which 1 lucky point is added each time a special symbol variation is executed. I can do it.

Additionally, if an inconsistency occurs between internal points and displayed points during the latter half of the battle mode period, a correction effect will be executed to immediately eliminate the difference between internal points and displayed points. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending with display points having a value different from the internal points being displayed, and from performing performances that are difficult for the player to understand.

<About the production content of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214, characteristic presentation contents among the various presentations executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect (correction effect) executed when a difference occurs between the internal point and the display point will be explained.

FIG. 213(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display points shift to a negative value in the first half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(a), if the display point value is "33" even though the internal point value is "34", the display point It is necessary to correct the value of In this case, within one special symbol variation period, a variation effect (pseudo variation effect) is performed as if the special symbol variation had been executed a plurality of times. Then, in conjunction with the start of the pseudo fluctuation effect, an effect is executed in which the value of the display point is added by 1 and displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform the first addition performance multiple times within one special symbol variation period without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the difference between the internal points and the displayed points can be eliminated without the player noticing. In addition, if there is a difference between internal points and display points during the first half of the battle mode, special symbol fluctuations will be executed multiple times during the remaining period of the battle mode, so the above-mentioned pseudo fluctuations will occur. It is possible to make the execution of the correction process wait until a special symbol variation is executed with a variation pattern that allows performance to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(b), a description will be given of the contents of the correction process that is executed when the display point shifts to a negative value in the second half of the battle mode. FIG. 213(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display points shift to a negative value in the second half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in the latter half of the battle mode, that is, when the remaining period of the battle mode is short, execution of the correction process may be delayed until the second addition effect is executed. , there is a risk that the battle mode will end with the internal points and the displayed points misaligned.

Therefore, unlike the case where a difference occurs between the internal points and the display points in the first half of the battle mode, the correction effect is executed when it is determined that a difference has occurred. In this way, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending with a difference between the internal points and the displayed points.

In FIG. 213(b), in the first addition effect in which the lucky point value would normally be increased by 1, a correction effect in which the lucky point value is increased by 2 is executed. With this configuration, the difference between the internal point and the display point can be immediately and reliably resolved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the content of the effect executed when the number of display points becomes more than the internal points during the battle mode will be explained. FIG. 214(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display points shift in a positive direction during the first half period of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(a), if the internal point value is "34" but the display point value is "36", the display point is It is necessary to correct the value of , and in the example shown in FIG. When the execution conditions for the 2-addition effect are met, a correction process is performed in which, while adding internal points, a command is not set for the display control device 114 to execute a second addition effect for displaying the addition of display points. executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to add only internal points, so it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the display points are positively shifted (a situation in which there are more display points than internal points).

Next, FIG. 214(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the display points shift in the positive direction in the second half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(b), if the value of the display point is "79" even though the value of the internal point is "78", if the display point is not corrected immediately, the display Subtract the difference value because there is a risk that the battle mode will end with the points misaligned, and even if the time saving state is set, the displayed points will reach the predetermined number (100P). Correction processing for display is performed. Specifically, "-1P" is displayed as a subtraction display for directly subtracting the value of the lucky points displayed in the display area HR6, and a production mode is performed in which the value of the lucky points is subtracted by 1. . In this way, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending with a difference between the internal points and the displayed points.

Here, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of control processing regarding variable effect display in the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be explained. FIG. 215 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of control processing regarding variable effect display in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the special symbol variation (variation A) is executed, a variation pattern for production is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, and a variation production command (variation pattern command ) is output to the display control device 114. Then, if the output variation production command includes a production mode that adds lucky points, for example, a production that adds "+1" to the lucky points at the start of the variation and "+2" to the lucky points 5 seconds after the start of the variation. If a mode is included, information indicating that a total of 3 lucky points will be added in this variable performance is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the last effect to which lucky points are added in this variable performance is stored. A value for specifying the execution timing of (the performance 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set to the value of the detection timer 223da.

When the display control device 114 receives the variation production command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on various production information included in the received variation production command. Various performance images to be displayed are created, and a control process for displaying the performance images on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In addition, since the detailed control processing content for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the same as the first control example described above, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

If the variation production command received by the display control device 114 includes a production mode that adds "+1" to the lucky points at the start of the variation and "+2" to the lucky points 5 seconds after the start of the variation, immediately after the start of the variation. Instructs an addition display to add 1 to the lucky point value displayed on the display screen, adds 1 to the value of the display counter in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and information indicating the number of additions on the display counter. A confirmation command including this is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the controller instructs an addition display to add 2 to the lucky point value displayed on the display screen immediately after the start of the fluctuation, and displays the result in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The value of the display counter is incremented by 2, and a confirmation command including information indicating the added number of the display counter is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, addition display to the lucky point value is executed in response to the control processing of the display control device 114, and for example, “9P” is displayed as the lucky point. In this state, when an addition display of "+1" is executed, an addition display is executed in which the value of the lucky point becomes "10P". Then, when an addition display of "+2" is executed after 5 seconds, an addition display is executed in which the lucky point value becomes "12P".

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the confirmation command output from the display control device 114, it specifies the display counter value (additional value) included in the received confirmation command, and adds the specified value to the display counter. Set it to 223db. Then, wait until the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, and if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0, that is, all the effects of adding the lucky point value executed in the current variation effect are When it is determined that the process has ended, the display points (internal points) to be added during the current variable performance stored in the display point storage area 223r and the instruction to display the addition are actually issued by the display control device 114. The display points are compared and it is determined whether the same amount of value as the internal points has been added and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

If the comparison results match, the lucky point value set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the lucky point value actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. Since this is the case, the variable performance is ended normally. When transmitting signals between multiple control devices, the power supplied to one control device may become unstable, or there may be a momentary power outage (momentary power outage) due to noise, etc. In this case, the various output signals may not be received accurately. In this case, the value of the display point (internal point) set by the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 and the value of the lucky point (display point) actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A problem arises in that the values differ.

In particular, as in this control example, if the configuration is such that a specific effect can be executed when the lucky point value reaches a predetermined number, internal points and display points may differ. There is a problem in that a specific performance is executed when the lucky point value is a value other than a predetermined number, and the performance is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, information indicating the content of the display instruction given by the display control device 114 (the display counter of the display control device 114) is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. , the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute processing for correcting the degree of deviation between internal points and display points. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate problems caused by differences between internal points and display points.

For example, if the display point is 1 larger than the internal point, the lucky point will be added by 1 immediately after the start of the variation in the variation production command determined when setting the variation production for the next special symbol variation (variation B). If the mode is included, information indicating that 1 lucky point will be added in total in this variable performance is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the display control device stores the variable performance command and the non-display command. 114. When the display control device 114 receives the fluctuation effect command and the non-display command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines whether the non-display command has been received, and if it is determined that the non-display command has been received. If the variation command includes a production mode that adds 1 to the lucky points at the start of the variation, instructs an addition display that adds 1 to the lucky point value displayed on the display screen immediately after the variation starts. A confirmation command including information indicating the number of additions to the current display counter is output to the audio lamp control device 113 without adding the value of the display counter in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. .

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, addition display to the lucky point value is not executed in accordance with the control processing of the display control device 114, and for example, “12P” is displayed as the lucky point. In this state, "12P" remains displayed. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 side executes the process of determining the variation effect mode as usual, and when the internal point and the display point are different and the display point is larger, the non-display command is issued. By setting , it is possible to execute processing that does not add display points while adding internal points. Therefore, the correction process can be easily executed without executing complicated control process as a dedicated process for correcting the difference between the internal point and the display point.

Note that the variation B in FIG. 215 is shown as an example when the number of added lucky points included in the set variation display command is the same as the difference between the internal points and the display points, that is, when the variation display command is This example shows a case where the difference between the internal points and the displayed points can be resolved by not performing the addition effect of the included lucky points once (not displaying the addition on the display screen), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the setting If the added number of lucky points included in the displayed fluctuation display command is larger than the difference between the internal points and the displayed points, instead of setting a hidden command, change the actual added lucky points to the internal points. An actual display command that includes information indicating the value obtained by subtracting the difference from the display point is output to the display control device 114 together with the variable display command, and the actual display command is given priority over the variable display command on the display control device 114 side. If the configuration is configured to determine the existence and content of the command, and the display content is instructed based on the content of the actual display command instead of the number of lucky points included in the variable display command. good. As a result, the number of additions to the display counter value of the display control device 114 and the number of additions of lucky points on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are determined based on the actual display command, so this variation production When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command corresponding to the above, it is possible to resolve the discrepancy between the internal points and the display points that occurred at the time of the previous variation performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the displayed points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The content of the correction process for correcting the difference with the point is different. Specifically, if the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, as described above with reference to FIG. The configuration is such that an additional effect (added effect) is executed, or a correction process for hiding the additional effect is executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to perform a performance mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, a performance that subtracts the value of lucky points), so the correction process can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, a performance mode dedicated to correction processing (for example, a performance that subtracts the value of lucky points) is executed, and a performance that adds lucky points is executed within the period. The configuration is such that the difference between the internal point and the display point is reliably corrected (resolved). This makes it possible to solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the correction process is different by determining the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the addition effect may be performed. When a part of the executable period has elapsed, a specific performance is executed based on the display point value (the lucky point value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the content of the correction process to be different based on the remaining period until the partial period has elapsed. With this configuration, even in the process of adding lucky points, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, it is checked whether there is a difference between the value managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the value managed by the display control device 114, and correction processing is executed based on the check result. However, based on this technical concept, when one control process is executed across multiple control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By performing a process to confirm whether the content set by the controller matches the content executed by the execution-side control means, and a correction process based on the result of the confirmation process, it is possible to avoid processing with unintended content. The technical concept of suppressing execution may be used in other configurations, for example, it may be used between the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113, or between the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113. The control device 113, the display control device 114, and three or more control means may be used for execution.

Further, in this control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect of varying (adding) the value of the lucky points used as the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , control processing results of the main controller 110, such as displaying the number of time reductions to variably display a value (number of time reductions) indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and displaying the number of jackpots to indicate the number of consecutive jackpots. (Results of special symbol lottery) The value that is varied based on the information may be used as a target.

In addition, this control example is configured to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points by executing a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) when the remaining period of the addition effect is short. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the display point reaches a specific value while there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, or if the internal point reaches a specific value, the display point The value indicated by the display point is configured to be displayed in a display format that is difficult for the player to understand (for example, the display format of "??"), and the value indicated by the display point is displayed in a display format that is difficult for the player to grasp until the difference between the internal point and the display point is resolved. The configuration may be such that a display mode that is difficult to understand (for example, a display mode of "??") is continuously displayed. In this way, instead of correcting the displayed value, by performing correction that makes it difficult for the player to understand the displayed value, it is possible to further reduce the processing load in the correction process. In this case, for example, if the difference between the internal point and the display point is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), the display mode is such that it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point (for example, "??"). ” display mode), and if the value is larger than a predetermined range, an addition effect that corrects the value of the display point may be executed. In this way, by varying the content of the correction process depending on the amount of correction that needs to be made, it is possible to avoid display modes that make it difficult for players to grasp the values indicated by display points (for example, display modes of "??") for a long period of time. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction process while suppressing the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to continuous display.

In addition, in this control example, a correction process is executed for the setting value related to the effect set in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, correction processing may be performed on setting values related to effects set in the audio lamp control device 113 and operation values related to the movements of decorative objects. However, the correction process may be performed for the setting value related to the effect set in the audio lamp control device 113 and the output value related to the audio output by the audio output device 226, or the correction process may be performed for the setting value related to the effect set in the audio lamp control device 113, Correction processing may be performed for.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be explained. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Specifically, the difference is that a detection timer 223da, a display counter 223db, a non-display flag 223dc, and an addition flag 223de are added. Other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

FIG. 216 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifth control example.

The detection timer 223da detects the last addition effect when an addition effect (first addition effect and second addition effect) for adding the value of lucky points is set in the variable effect determined by the audio lamp control device 113. A timer for measuring the time until the end of the addition effect executed during the variable effect, and a value corresponding to the period from the execution of the variable effect until the end of the last addition effect executed during the variable effect. is set. Then, the value of the detection timer 223da is subtracted as time passes, and when the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, that is, when the last addition effect executed during the fluctuating effect is completed, the internal point and display point are The process of comparing the value with is executed.

With this configuration, even if the lucky point values are added and displayed at multiple timings in one variable effect, the values of internal points and display points are added after the last addition display is completed. Since comparison can be made, it is possible to easily determine the actual deviation.

The display counter 223db is a counter whose value is updated based on a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 (a command containing information indicating the number of additional lucky points to be displayed on the display screen). Each time a confirmation command output from the control device 114 is received, the counter value is updated. Then, when the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, the value of the display counter 223db is used as the value of the display point.

The non-display flag 223dc indicates a state in which lucky points are not actually added and displayed even if the audio lamp control device 113 determines that an addition effect is to be performed, and the value of the internal points and display points is If it is determined that the values do not match during the first half of the battle mode, and if it is determined that the value of the display point (display counter) is larger than the internal point (S4490 in Figure 218) :Yes).

The addition flag 223dd is a flag indicating that it is necessary to add and display additional lucky points when the audio lamp control device 113 determines that an addition effect is to be performed. In the case of comparison, if it is determined that the values do not match during the first half of the battle mode, and if it is determined that the value of the display point (display counter) is smaller than the internal point (S4490 in FIG. 218: No), it is set to on.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the content of control processing in the fifth control example will be described. This fifth control example is different from the first control example described above in that it is configured to be able to receive a confirmation command output from the display control device 114, and a process to be executed when the confirmation command is received is added. There is a big difference. Another difference is that the content of the control process for displaying lucky points has been partially changed. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination processing 5 (S4082) will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S4082). This command determination process 5 (S4082) is a process executed when a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received, in contrast to the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S4012 in FIG. 166). The difference is that ``is added, otherwise they are the same.

When the command determination process 5 (S4082) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4414 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S4012 in FIG. 166) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4413 that the award ball count command has not been received (S4413: No), then it is determined whether a confirmation command has been received (S4481), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4481: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4415), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4481, if it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S4481: Yes), the confirmation process is executed (S4482), and then this process ends. Details of the confirmation process executed in the process of S4482 will be described later with reference to FIG. 218, but in this confirmation process (S4482), the confirmation command output from the display control device 114, that is, the third symbol The audio lamp control device 113 side determines the value of lucky points (display points) actually displayed on the display screen based on a command including information indicating the number of added lucky points displayed on the display screen 81. Then, there is a process of checking whether the value of the lucky points (internal points) managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is different, and a process of determining that the value of the internal points and the value of the display points are different. If this happens, a correction process is executed to eliminate the difference.

Here, the contents of the confirmation process (S4482) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the details of the confirmation process (S4482). This confirmation process (S4482) is a process that is executed when it is determined in command determination process 5 (see S4082 in FIG. 217) that a confirmation command has been received.

When the confirmation process (S4482) is executed, first, the value included in the confirmation command received this time, that is, the value of the lucky points (display points) whose addition and display are controlled in the display control device 114 is displayed. It is added to the counter 223db (S4485). Then, it is determined whether the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486), and if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is not 0 (greater than 0) (S4486: No), this process is immediately terminated. do. In other words, if the timing at which the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received is not the final effect to which the lucky point value is added in the variable effect being executed, the display counter 223db is adjusted based on the received confirmation command. Execute only the process of adding values, and end this process.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the process of determining whether or not the value of the display point matches the value of the internal point every time a confirmation command is received. Here, in this control example, the first addition effect is executed to add 1 to the lucky point value in accordance with the start timing of the variable effect executed during the battle mode (while the lucky points are being displayed). . In other words, during the battle mode, lucky points are added and displayed each time a special symbol variation is executed. This makes it easier for the player to understand how lucky points are added as the game progresses during the battle mode.

Further, when a specific performance mode is set as a performance mode of the variable performance, a second addition performance for adding a plurality of lucky points is executed at the execution timing of the specific performance mode. By executing this second addition effect, players can be made to understand that the value of lucky points can rise suddenly, so they can expect that their lucky points will always rise rapidly during battle mode. A player can play a game while holding the player.

In this fifth control example, as described above, since the first addition effect and the second addition effect are configured to be executed within one variable effect, within one variable effect period, the number of lucky points is The value will be changed multiple times. Since the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is configured to be output every time the display value of the lucky points is displayed variablely (additionally displayed), the command determination processing 5 ( (See S4082 in FIG. 217), it may be determined multiple times that a confirmation command has been received within one variable performance. In this case, the confirmation process will be executed multiple times.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the performance mode of the fluctuation performance in response to one special symbol fluctuation, and the number of lucky points added (internal point number) is also set. , it is configured to be managed not for each additional effect but for each variable effect. Therefore, each time the confirmation process is executed, the internal points (the total number added to the lucky points in the current variable effect) and the display points (the number added to the lucky points in one addition effect) are calculated. It is possible to prevent the determination from being performed on the object and a determination result indicating that the internal point and the display point do not match.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the fifth control example, the internal points are stored for each value added to lucky points in units of addition effects, rather than the total number added to lucky points in one variable effect. Then, each time a confirmation command is received, it is possible to appropriately determine whether the value of the internal point and the value of the display point match.

In the process of S4486, if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486: Yes), then the value of the display counter 223db (display point) and the display stored in the display point storage area 223r are The point value (internal point) is compared (S4487), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S4488).

In the process of S4488, if it is determined that the comparison results match (S4488: Yes), the effect is appropriate for the effect mode of the variable effect (the effect mode of the addition effect) set in the audio lamp control device 113. Since this is a case where the addition display of the lucky points is being executed, this process ends without executing the correction process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4488, if it is determined that the comparison results do not match (S4488: No), the effect mode of the variable effect (the effect mode of the addition effect) set in the audio lamp control device 113 Since this is a case where the addition display of lucky points is not properly executed, the processes of S4489 to S4495, which will be described later, are executed as correction processes to match the value of the display point and the value of the internal point.

In the process of S4489, it is determined whether the current time is the first half period of the battle mode (S4489). Here, the remaining period until the battle mode ends is calculated based on the game state stored in the state storage area 223aa and the value of the time reduction counter 223y, and the remaining period is 50% of the entire battle mode period. If it is above, it is determined that it is the first half period of the battle mode, and if it is less than 50%, it is determined that it is the second half period of the battle mode.

In the process of S4489, if it is determined that the current time is the first half of the battle mode (S4489: Yes), then the value of the display counter 223db (display point) is stored in the internal point (display point storage area 223r). (S4490), and if it is determined that it is larger (S4490: Yes), the non-display flag 223dc is set on to correspond to the difference value between the display point and the internal point (S4490). S4491), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4490, if it is determined that the value of the display counter 223db (display point) is not larger (smaller) than the internal point (value stored in the display point storage area 223r) (S4490: No) , the addition flag 223dd is set on so as to correspond to the difference value between the internal point and the display point (S4492), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S4489, if it is determined that the current time is not the first half period of the battle mode (it is the second half period) (S4489: No), next, the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is A display command is set to change the display value of the lucky point to a value corresponding to the internal point (S4493), and it is determined whether the non-display flag 223dc is set to on (S4494). If it is determined that there is one (S4494: No), the non-display flag 223dc is set to OFF (S4495), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S4494, if it is determined that the non-display flag 223dc is not set to on (S4494: No), the process of S4495 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the time-saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be explained. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting process 5 (S5258). This time saving performance mode setting process 5 (S5258) is a process for adding the lucky point value (S5306 in FIG. , S5307) in that a display point setting process (see S5351 in FIG. 219) is executed, but other than that, they are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the display point setting process (S5351) executed in the time-saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be explained. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display point setting process (S5351). In this display point setting process (S5351), a process of setting an addition effect for adding up the value of lucky points as a variable effect is executed.

When the display point setting process (S5351) is executed, first, the value of the display point (internal point value) stored in the display point storage area 223r is added by 1 (S6101), and then the value is added to the current variable effect. It is determined whether there is an addition effect (second addition effect) for adding display points (S6102). In the process of S6102, the second addition effect is set in the effect mode of the variable effect set in the effect setting process after the first time executed in the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (see S5258 in FIG. 219) (see S5309 in FIG. 219). Determine whether it is set.

In the process of S6102, if it is determined that there is an addition effect (second addition effect) (S6102: Yes), the value is stored in the display point storage area 223r corresponding to the value added in the current addition effect. The display point value (internal point value) is added (S6103), a value indicating the final execution timing of the addition effect (value corresponding to the number of seconds) is set in the detection timer 223da (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6105. Transition. By setting the value of the detection timer 223da in the process of S6104, in the confirmation process (S4482 in FIG. 218), when a confirmation command is received, it is determined whether this is the timing when the last addition effect in the current variation effect was executed. It can be determined whether or not.

On the other hand, in the process of S6102, if it is determined that there is no addition effect (S6102: No), the addition effect executed in the current variation effect is the first addition effect (the value of the lucky point is 1 at the start of the variation effect). Since the processing for setting the value in the detection timer 223da is skipped, the process proceeds to step S6105.

Next, the contents of the display point setting process (S5351) after S6105 will be explained. In the process from S6105 onward, a process for setting a display command for displaying an addition effect that has undergone correction processing for the effect content of the addition effect set in the audio lamp control device 113. is executed.

First, in the process of S6105, it is determined whether the non-display flag 223d is set to on (S6105). If it is determined that the non-display flag 223d is set to on (S6105: Yes), then the non-display flag 223d is set to on. The difference value (the difference value between the internal point and the display point) is calculated based on the setting situation, and it is determined whether the additional value (the number of lucky points added) in the current second addition effect is greater than or equal to the difference value (S6106 ), if it is determined that it is greater than or equal to the difference value (S6106; Yes), the content of the addition performance (second addition performance) to be executed this time is corrected, and the difference value is calculated from the addition value in order to eliminate the difference value. , sets a display addition count command that indicates the subtracted value (S6107), sets a non-display addition count command corresponding to the difference value (S6108), and sets the non-display flag 223d to off (S6109). , this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6105, if it is determined that the non-display flag 223d is not set to on (S6105: No), then it is determined whether the addition flag 223dd is set to on (S6110), and it is turned on. If it is set (S6110: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a second addition effect in the current variation effect (S6111), and if it is determined that there is a second addition effect (S6111: Yes). ), adds the value corresponding to the difference value set in the addition flag 223dd to the addition value of the second addition effect, sets a display addition number command indicating the value after the addition (S6112), and sets the addition flag 223dd is set to off (S6113), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the display point setting process (S5351), a correction process is performed to eliminate the difference between the internal point and the display point determined in the confirmation process (see S4482 in FIG. 218), that is, by using an addition effect. The process of eliminating the difference by increasing or decreasing the value of the lucky points to be added is not targeted at the first addition effect (the effect in which the lucky point value is added by 1 every time the variable effect starts). It is configured to execute the second addition effect (addition process executed when a specific effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prohibit the correction process from being executed for the first variable effect that is executed periodically and whose addition number is a fixed value (1). It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the change in the performance contents of the variable performance. In addition, by continuously executing the first variable performance that periodically adds a fixed number (1) to the lucky point value, the player is informed that every time the variable performance is executed (the special symbol variation is executed). Since it is possible to easily make the player recognize the rule that the value of the lucky points is added by 1 each time the player receives the lucky points, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game while predicting the degree of addition of the lucky points.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, if it is determined that correction processing is necessary during the first half of the battle mode, execution of the correction processing is waited until the next execution of the second addition effect. ing. Thereby, the difference between the internal point and the display point can be resolved by simply executing the process of correcting the value added and displayed in the second addition effect in which the number of additions is indefinite. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a dedicated addition effect for executing the correction process, and the processing load for executing the correction process can be reduced.

Note that if the second half of the battle mode is entered while waiting for the correction process to be executed, in the confirmation process (see S4482 in FIG. 218), the correction to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the displayed points The process is configured to run. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the battle mode ends without executing the second addition performance and the correction process is not executed, and it is possible to reliably execute the correction process before the battle mode ends.

In this control example, the correction process is executed only when it is possible to eliminate the difference value between the internal point and the display point in one second addition effect, but the correction process is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the difference value between the internal point and the display point is canceled using the second addition effect of one time, and in this case, the difference value canceled by the second addition effect of one time is subtracted. The residual difference value may be configured to be memorizable, and when the next second addition effect is executed, the correction process may be executed for the stored residual difference value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily reduce the value to be corrected in one second addition effect, making it easy to execute correction processing that does not give a feeling of discomfort to the player. .

Note that, as in the fifth control example, it is preferable to provide a notification means that can notify the outside when a situation requiring correction processing occurs. In other words, if there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in one of the signal transmission systems, so by notifying the outside, it will be difficult to perform correction processing. It is possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring with respect to content that would cause great inconvenience to players.

<About the control process of the display control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the content of the control processing of the display control device 114 executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be explained. This fifth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the content of the process executed when a display command for adding and displaying a certain number of times is received is changed. Other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, in this fifth control example, based on receiving the number addition related command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that, when the displayed lucky point values are added and displayed, a display number counter is added as a measuring means for measuring the added and displayed value. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

The display count counter described above is provided in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and when receiving the addition count command and executing the addition display of lucky points, the value corresponding to the addition display number is displayed. It is added to the number counter. When a command indicating clearing the number of times to reset the value of the display number counter is received, the value of the display number counter is reset to zero. In this control example, it is configured to determine whether the internal points and display points are different for each variation effect, so when the variation effect ends (when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) ), a command indicating clearing the number of times is output from the audio lamp control device 113.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the contents of count addition related command processing 5 (S8469). This number addition related command process 5 (S8469) is a process executed when a command related to addition of the number of times set in the audio lamp control device 113 is received, and is a process for adding and displaying the lucky point value. Processing is executed. Further, according to the processing result of the correction processing performed by the audio lamp control device 113, processing for varying the lucky point addition display mode is performed.

When the number addition related command processing 5 (S8469) is executed, first, it is determined whether the number addition related command received this time is an addition number command indicating that the lucky point value is to be added (S9251), and the addition is performed. If it is determined that it is a count command (S9251: Yes), the same processes as S9201 to S9204 as the above-mentioned count addition related command process (see S8419 in FIG. 188) are executed, and then the value of the display count counter is The additional value indicated by the command received this time is added (S9252), a confirmation command including information indicating the value to be added and displayed is set (S9253), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9251, if it is determined that the command received this time is not an addition count command (S9251: No), then it is determined whether a hidden addition count command has been received (S9254), and the hidden addition If it is determined that the number of times command has been received (S9254: Yes), the process moves to the process of S9252 described above, then the process of S9253 is executed, and this process ends. In other words, if the display point is larger than the internal point due to the correction process, the process of adding and displaying the lucky points (processing of S9201 to S9204) is skipped and only the value of the display count counter is updated. is configured to run. With this configuration, only the value of internal points can be added without adding the value of lucky points that are actually displayed, making it easier to eliminate the difference between internal points and displayed points. be able to.

In the process of S9254, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a non-display addition count command (S9254: No), then a count clear command for clearing the value of the display count counter is received. If it is determined that it has been received (S9255: Yes), the value of the display count counter is reset to 0 (S9256), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9255, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating clearing the number of times (S9255: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the fifth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the internal point matches the display point, and the audio lamp control The configuration is such that inconsistencies between internal points managed on the device 113 side and display points managed on the display control device 114 side can be reliably detected, and when inconsistencies occur between internal points and display points, , is configured to be able to perform a correction process in which one value (the value of the internal point) is made positive and the other value is corrected. Further, the content of the correction process is configured to vary depending on the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) in which lucky points can be added and displayed.

Specifically, in the first half of the battle mode, if there is a mismatch between internal points and display points, instead of immediately executing a process to correct the mismatch, a second addition effect ( When a performance in which a plurality of lucky point values can be added in one performance is executed, the content of the addition is used to execute correction processing. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the difference between internal points and display points while continuously executing the first addition effect in which 1 lucky point is added each time a special symbol variation is executed. I can do it.

Additionally, if a mismatch between internal points and displayed points occurs during the latter half of the battle mode period, a correction effect will be executed to immediately eliminate the difference between internal points and displayed points. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending with display points having a value different from the internal points being displayed, and from performing performances that are difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the configuration is such that a specific effect can be executed when the value of lucky points reaches a predetermined value, the content ( The display control device 114 is configured to output information indicating the display counter (display counter of the display control device 114) to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 side executes processing for correcting the degree of deviation between the internal point and the display point. It is configured as possible. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate problems caused by differences between internal points and display points.

Furthermore, in this control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the displayed points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be performed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The content of the correction process for correcting the difference with the point is different. Specifically, if the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, as described above with reference to FIG. The configuration is such that an additional effect (added effect) is executed, or a correction process for hiding the additional effect is executed. This makes it difficult to perform a performance in a performance mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, a performance that subtracts the value of lucky points), so the correction process can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, a performance mode dedicated to correction processing (for example, a performance that subtracts the value of lucky points) is executed, and a performance that adds lucky points is executed within the period. The configuration is such that the difference between the internal point and the display point is reliably corrected (resolved). This makes it possible to solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In addition, in this control example, the content of the correction process is changed by determining the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the addition effect may be performed. When a part of the executable period has elapsed, a specific performance is executed based on the display point value (the lucky point value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the content of the correction process to be different based on the remaining period until the partial period has elapsed. With this configuration, even in the process of adding lucky points, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, it is checked whether there is a difference between the value managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the value managed by the display control device 114, and correction processing is executed based on the check result. However, based on this technical concept, when one control process is executed across multiple control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By performing a process to confirm whether the content set by the user and the content executed by the execution side control means match, and a correction process based on the result of the confirmation process, processing with unintended content can be avoided. The technical concept of suppressing execution of the sound lamp may be used in other configurations, for example, it may be used between the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113, or between the main controller 110 and the audio lamp controller 113. It may be executed across three or more control means such as the control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Furthermore, in this control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect of varying (adding) the value of the lucky points used as the effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , control processing results of the main controller 110, such as displaying the number of time reductions to variably display a value (number of time reductions) indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and displaying the number of jackpots to indicate the number of consecutive jackpots. (Results of special symbol lottery) The value that is varied based on the information may be used as a target.

In addition, this control example is configured to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points by executing a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) when the remaining period of the addition effect is short. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the display point reaches a specific value while there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, or if the internal point reaches a specific value, the display point The value indicated by the display point is configured to be displayed in a display format that is difficult for the player to understand (for example, the display format of "??"), and the value indicated by the display point is displayed in a display format that is difficult for the player to grasp until the difference between the internal point and the display point is resolved. The configuration may be such that a display mode that is difficult to understand (for example, a display mode of "??") is continuously displayed. In this way, instead of correcting the displayed value, by performing correction that makes it difficult for the player to understand the displayed value, it is possible to further reduce the processing load in the correction process. In this case, for example, if the difference between the internal point and the display point is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), the display mode is such that it is difficult for the player to grasp the value indicated by the display point (for example, "??"). ” display mode), and if the value is larger than a predetermined range, an addition effect that corrects the value of the display point may be executed. In this way, by varying the content of the correction process depending on the amount of correction that needs to be made, it is possible to avoid display modes that make it difficult for players to grasp the values indicated by display points (for example, display modes of "??") for a long period of time. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction process while suppressing the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to continuous display.

In addition, in this control example, a correction process is executed for the setting value regarding the effect set in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, correction processing may be performed on setting values related to effects set in the audio lamp control device 113 and operation values related to the movements of decorative objects. However, the correction process may be executed for the setting value related to the effect set in the audio lamp control device 113 and the output value related to the audio output by the audio output device 226, or a value of 3 or more may be performed. Correction processing may be performed for.

<About another example of the fifth control example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. FIGS. 222 to 225 are diagrams showing an example of a case where a performance using the decorative accessory YK and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Specifically, it schematically shows the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30) described in the above-described first embodiment to which this control example is applied. Note that the detailed operation of the decorative accessory YK is the same as in the first embodiment, so the explanation thereof will be omitted, but the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK shows the word "attack". On the second display screen, which is a different side (back side) from the first display screen, a second display mode showing the words "defense" is displayed.

This decorative accessory YK is used for the accessory performance executed during the battle mode, and is configured to be able to notify the degree of advantage of the player during the battle mode according to the action content of the accessory YK. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 222, the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK is displayed to the player at a production position that overlaps with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlaps on the front side of the display screen). When the first state becomes visible, the first display mode becomes visible to the player, and an attack standby effect is executed in which the boy 810 maintains a stance to attack the enemy character 811 in the main display area Dm. be done. This attack standby performance notifies the player that the boy 810 will perform an attack at the time when the battle performance is executed, and that "victory" will be determined as a result of the battle performance. This performance shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the pre-reading information of special symbol 2 pending and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in progress. It is executed based on information, and at least part of the case where the pre-read information or the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery in progress includes information indicating a jackpot win, and There is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern (60 seconds variation) in which the battle production is executed in the case of a loss variation is not included, that is, the production result is " This is executed at least in part when a battle production that is "continuation" is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to safely play the game for a predetermined period of time in the battle mode where it is not known when the game will end. In addition, in this separate example, the attack standby performance shown in FIG. 222 is configured to be executed during a period in which information indicating a battle performance whose performance result is "continue" is not included. For example, the attack standby effect can be executed even if a variation pattern (60 seconds variation) in which a battle effect is executed during a failure variation is included, and the attack standby effect can be performed while a failure variation is executed. When a variation pattern of 60 seconds variation is set in , it is preferable to configure the system so that, instead of executing a battle effect, an effect that incites whether or not a battle effect will be executed is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by encouraging the player to decide whether or not a battle performance that will confirm victory will be executed, and also to ensure victory when a battle performance actually occurs. be able to. Furthermore, since the attack standby effect can be executed even during the period in which the 60 second variation is set in the miss variation, the attack standby effect can be executed more frequently and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

It is preferable that this attack standby effect is configured so that when executed, the player wins a jackpot about 20% of the time. As a result, when the attack standby effect is executed, it is possible to make the player more likely to expect a jackpot win than when the attack standby effect is not executed. Further, in this other example, the display mode displayed in the main display area Dm during the attack standby performance is made common (at least partially common) to the display mode used during the shortened mode. Therefore, the amount of performance image data dedicated to attack standby performance can be reduced. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the attack standby effect may be changed depending on the game state that is actually set. For example, when the probability variable state is set, the attack is more effective than when the time saving state is set. It may be configured such that the standby performance is performed more frequently. Thereby, the player can predict the current gaming state according to the frequency of execution of the attack standby performance. In addition, when a gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, by increasing the frequency of execution of attack standby effects, even if the result of the attack standby effect is disadvantageous to the player. Even if a result (a performance result in which a battle performance is not executed) is displayed, it is possible to increase the possibility that a variable probability state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the contents of another performance using the decorative accessory YK (defense or more confirmed performance) will be explained. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of a performance during a defense or higher confirmed performance. This defense or better performance is a performance that can be performed during battle mode, similar to the attack standby performance shown in FIG. This is an effect to notify the player that "defeat" will not be selected as a result, that is, "continuation" or "win" will be determined. During this defense or better performance, the second display surface of the decorative accessory YK is visible to the player at a performance position that overlaps with the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlaps on the front side of the display screen). 2 state, and the second display mode becomes visible to the player. This performance shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the pre-reading information of special symbol 2 pending and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in progress. It is executed based on the information, and if there is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the look-ahead information or the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery being executed, in other words, the production result of the battle production will be "defeated". This is executed during at least part of the period when no other information is available.

Then, as shown in FIG. 224, the accessory lock performance is implemented which can notify the player of the period during which the decorative accessory YK is located at the performance position (the number of special symbol drawings performed while the decorative accessory YK is located at the performance position). It is configured to be executable. By configuring the accessory lock effect to be executable in this way, it is possible to inform the player of a period in which the boy 810 will not lose in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 224 shows an example of a performance when the accessory lock performance is being executed, and in the main display area Dm, a display area HR40 is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period of the accessory lock performance. ``Accessory lock 5G'' is displayed, and the boy 810 is displayed in a display mode wearing an aura. The display of this accessory lock 5G indicates the number of special symbol drawings performed during the accessory lock performance, and according to the example shown in FIG. The player is informed that the attack standby performance will continue during the period when the symbol lottery is executed.

In the accessory lock effect shown in FIG. 224, when the variable effect is set by the audio lamp control device 113, the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is determined based on the received variable pattern command, and furthermore, the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is The winning information (preread information) stored in the information storage area 223a is determined, and it is determined whether the execution conditions for the attack standby performance are satisfied. Furthermore, the number of winning information corresponding to special drawing 2 pending stored in the winning information storage area 223a is determined, the executable period of the attack standby performance is specified, and the performance period of the accessory lock performance is determined. Then, a performance mode is set according to the determined period, and a performance instruction (performance command) corresponding to the determined performance mode is output to the accessory control device that operates the decorative accessory YK and the display control device 114. .

Then, each time a new special symbol variation is started, a performance mode is determined to update (subtract) the remaining period of the accessory lock performance displayed in the display area HR40, and the remaining period is 0 (accessory lock 0G). In this case, a performance instruction (performance command) for terminating the accessory lock performance is output to the accessory control device and the display control device 114. With this configuration, the accessory lock performance whose period is managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is executed by synchronizing the operation status of the decorative accessory YK and the performance display of the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

However, in this accessory lock performance, as in the fifth control example described above, the performance command may be missed, noise may occur, and the accessory control device or display control device 114 may receive incorrect reception. There is a problem in that the remaining period managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the remaining period controlled by the accessory control device and the display control device 114 may be different. Therefore, in this other example, similarly to the fifth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to be able to manage the execution contents of the accessory control device and the display control device 114.

If it is determined that the remaining period managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side and the execution status of the accessory control device and the display control device 114 side are different, the voice lamp control device 113 The display mode shown in FIG. 225 is controlled to be displayed until the remaining period managed by the side ends. FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating an example of correction processing during the accessory lock performance. As shown in FIG. 225, if the remaining period managed on the audio lamp control device 113 side and the execution status on the accessory control device and display control device 114 side are different, the display area HR40 displays "accessories". ``Lock?G'' is displayed, and the effect is executed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period for which the accessory lock effect continues. This creates a situation in which "Accessory Lock 2G" is displayed in the display area H40 at the timing when the decorative accessory YK ends the performance during the accessory lock performance, that is, when the accessory control device and the display control device 114 Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the degree of progress of the accessory lock performance differs.

In addition, when displaying "Accessory object lock? It is preferable to configure it so that "lock? In other words, the conditions are such that the winning information regarding the newly acquired special drawing 2 hold is read out from the winning information storage area 223a until the predetermined performance period of the accessory lock performance has elapsed, and the accessory lock performance can be continued and executed. It is preferable to configure the extended performance to be executable when the following is established. As a result, even in a normal situation, that is, when the period management of the accessory lock effect managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is normal, "accessory lock? G" is displayed in the display area HR40. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether a correction process is being executed or whether an extended performance is being executed.

<A1 embodiment>
Next, the A1 embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the same configurations as those described in each of the above embodiments and control examples will also be described again for convenience. First, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 296, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as the A1 embodiment. FIG. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. It includes an inner frame 12 that is supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 226), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 229) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 229). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 227) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball naturally falls and is ejected from the bottom opening. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (a movable member 310 is shown, and other parts are (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol starting hole ( It is constructed by assembling a through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are made of penetrating holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 227.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 227) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (top right in FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first prize opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the gaming area on the game board 13 into left and right sides, with the left side of the variable display unit 80 being a left channel where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 being a channel for playing games. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow down is formed. The game balls flowing down the left channel are configured not to flow down the right channel. The first prize opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flown down the right side flow path can enter the ball more easily than the game ball that has flowed down the left side flow path. The second prize opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a channel through which a game ball can flow down is formed in the opening. A photosensor is provided to detect game balls. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that can close the opening, and the opening/closing plate is driven to open and close in the front side with the change of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning hole 640 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When a normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower front side, temporarily creating an open state in which the ball can easily enter the opening of the second winning opening 640. It is operated to repeat the open state and the normal closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The jackpot types determined here include 5R time saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A), 5R time saving that is set corresponding to the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when winning in the first prize opening 64. (3 times) jackpot (jackpot B) and 15R normal jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variably displayed when a prize is won in the second winning hole 640 is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, "5R time saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A)" means that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 95 times, and the maximum number of rounds is 95. During the period until the second fluctuation stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to a high probability state, and a time-saving gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the regular symbol (second symbol) is likely to be selected. It's a big hit. "5R time saving (3 times) jackpot (jackpot B)" means that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed three times, and the third fluctuation occurs. A jackpot in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to a high probability state until the symbol stops, and a time-saving gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is likely to be selected. It is. Moreover, "15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)" is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set and a time-saving gaming state is not set after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.

During time saving (during time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to during normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving period, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second winning slot 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in one win. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the game is opened compared to normal times. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one win are at least the same. One of them may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, we do not calculate the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win, but only the winning probability of the second symbol. , it may be changed to be higher than normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 displays the fluctuation of the third symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") performs display, and a second symbol is variably displayed using the passing of a ball through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that the third symbol display device 81 is configured with a 9-inch large liquid crystal display. Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays an "○" symbol and an " This is a fluctuating display that lights up alternately for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "○" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured such that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time saving mode than in the normal gaming mode. As a result, during the time saving period, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of variable display times of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during the time saving period, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper tray 17, so it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. , it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and it is possible to suppress the investment for additionally lending out balls, and it is possible to make the lottery of special symbols take place for a short period of time. .

In addition, during the time saving, it is possible to increase the winning probability, increase the open time or number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per winning time, etc., or increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened or the number of times it is opened. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the electric winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the region of the left flow path of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to prevent some of the balls that are launched onto the game board, flowing down the left side of the game board. configured to allow passage. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B mentioned above, and the second pattern holding lamp is displayed. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but is set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). You may do so. Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 (See FIG. 229), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, if the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuating display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a becomes open, and the ball enters the second winning hole 640 easily.

As mentioned above, during the time saving mode, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during the normal mode, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second symbol. becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, if the ball enters the second prize opening 640 as the type of jackpot that is selected in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot is won in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R will be selected at a rate of 100%. When the time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) is selected and the ball enters the first prize opening 64 (the jackpot is won in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the time-saving gaming state is granted. The jackpot is a maximum of 5R jackpot (61% rate in the case of jackpot), and the jackpot type is selected so that it is more advantageous for the player if the ball lands in the second winning hole 640. has been done. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state and no time saving is given), it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 than the second winning opening 640. By placing a game ball in the first prize opening 64, the proportion of jackpots (jackpot A or jackpot B) that gives time savings is set to be low, and when the game ball is given time savings and enters the second prize opening 640. When it is easy to win a prize, the second special symbol can be used to make it easy to win a jackpot, and the time-saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, the value of being given time savings can be increased.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V-winning door 600 that can guide the ball to the V-ball entrance 600a of the V-winning device 620 is arranged. The V winning door 600 stands upright and the ball does not enter the V ball entrance 600a when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot B or a small win. The ball is configured to be able to enter the V-ball entry opening 600a by changing from a closed state in which the ball is upright to an open state in which it is rotated approximately 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small win, a 1R (round) small win game is executed in which the V winning door 600 remains open for 1.2 seconds or until 10 balls enter the V ball opening 600a to win a prize. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot B, the V winning door is open until the 1st round, similar to the small winning game, and from the 2nd round, the variable winning device 65 is changed to the open state. Here, from the 2R, the V winning door placed on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is set in advance as 1R (round) for 30 seconds or until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. Round games are repeatedly executed until the number of rounds corresponds to the type of jackpot.

With this configuration, whether it is a small hit or a jackpot B, the third symbol display device 81 etc. does not notify whether it is a small hit or a jackpot B, and the small hit is not announced. By configuring the transition to a game or a jackpot game, players can similarly enter the game ball into the V-winning device 620 and play the game with the expectation that the game ball will enter the V-winning slot 624, which will be described later. It can be carried out. In this embodiment, in the case of a small win, a game ball enters a V winning hole 624 of a V winning device 620, which will be described later, so that a jackpot game is executed after the small win game. . In addition, the jackpot that is started when a game ball enters the V winning hole 624 during the small winning game is configured such that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R.

In the case of a jackpot game in jackpot B, winning control is executed so that when a game ball enters the V winning device 620 in the 1Rth jackpot game, the game ball enters the V winning hole 624. It is composed of As a result, even in the case of a jackpot game in jackpot B, it is possible to make it seem as if the variable winning device 65 has been opened after winning the V winning opening 624 (actually, in the jackpot game 2R eyes are running). It should be noted that when a ball enters the V ball entrance 600a or the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls for each ball. In addition, in jackpot games other than jackpot B, since the variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be in the open state from the 1R (round), the content of the jackpot game indicates that a jackpot game has started instead of a small win. It is configured so that it can also be identified.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit, and a stop symbol (for example, a diagonal symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a small win, the small win stop symbol will be displayed after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol (for example, a double eye symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, whether it is a small hit or a big hit B, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a reach display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same). A chance pattern consisting of a combination in which the middle symbol is stopped and displayed is a chance symbol (the third symbol with the word "CHANCE" attached) is stopped and displayed. will be notified by the As a result, the player can at least execute a game (equivalent to a small winning game or a jackpot game) in which the 1R V winning door 600 is opened by the third symbol being stopped and displayed on the chance symbol. By being able to recognize this, it is possible to expect the ball to enter the V winning hole 624. In addition, when a specific symbol among the third symbols (for example, a 777 zigzag symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is notified that a jackpot game will be executed, and the specific symbol may be displayed so that the player is made aware at an early stage that a jackpot game with high added value will be executed.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate toward the front with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the case of jackpot B, the large opening solenoid is driven from the 2nd R, and in cases other than jackpot B, the large opening solenoid is driven from the 1R to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, so that the ball is in an open state where it is easy for the ball to enter the special winning slot 65a. It operates so as to temporarily form an open state and a normal closed state.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 and is attached to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guide member 622, a rotation distribution member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharge path 623a, a right discharge path 623b, a first retention member 622d, and a flow path switching It is constituted by a member 622e.

Normally, the rotation distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and when the power is turned on, the rotation distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left and right direction at a constant period. It is configured to When the V winning door 600 is opened at the start of a small winning game or a jackpot game, game balls can flow into the V ball entrance 600a of the V winning device 620. A V-ball entrance 600a into which a game ball can enter is formed at the abutting portion of the V-winning door 600 and the V-winning device 620, and the game ball enters the V-winning device 620 through the V-ball entrance 600a. A guideway has been formed to guide the A photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is placed in the V ball entrance 600a, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings to the V winning device 620 (V ball entrance 600a). The player is configured to pay out prize balls (three balls) based on the detection of balls by this photo sensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, a detailed explanation of the V winning device 620 will be given in accordance with a timing chart of operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small winning game. When the small winning game starts, after the opening period (t1: 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, the V prize opening solenoid is activated (operated ON) during the opening period (t2: 1.2 seconds) and the V prize is won. Door 600 is changed to an open state. When the game ball enters the open state and enters the V-ball entrance 600a, the game ball flowing down the guiding path is configured so that its flow is restricted by the first retention member 622d shown in FIG. 231 and the game ball is retained therein. This first retention member 622d is configured such that the retention 1 solenoid is activated (turned ON) for 4 seconds so as to protrude to the front side so that the ball is retained in the upper part based on the start of the small winning game. . In addition, when one ball is retained in the first retention member 622d, the game ball flowing down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is configured to be discharged to either the left or the right. 2.7 seconds after the V winning door solenoid is turned off and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, when 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600 has elapsed, When the retention 1 solenoid 209a is turned off, the first retention member 622d is retracted toward the rear side of the Pachinko machine 10, and the balls retained in the upper part flow downward. A flow path switching member 622e that constantly operates in the left-right direction is arranged below the first retention member 622d.

The flow path switching member 622e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4 seconds by the flow path solenoid 209b. When turned off, the movable guide member 622 is configured to move to a position where the inlet is closed, thereby preventing a ball from entering the movable guide member 622. In the off state, the ball flowing down from the upstream is guided to the right side by the slope formed on the upper part of the flow path switching member 622e and is discharged out of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side of the inlet, the ball can flow into the movable guiding member 622. It is configured.

At the timing when the first retention member 622d retreats and the retained game balls flow down, the flow path switching member 622e is in an open state (the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left). Then, the ball flows into the movable guide member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 has a cylindrical shape that allows one ball to flow down, and has an inlet at one end through which the ball flows, and an inlet through which the ball is discharged at the other end. A discharge port 622a is formed. A recess 622c for holding one ball is formed in front of the discharge port 622a (on the upstream side), and a second retention member that prevents the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down is formed on the downstream side of the recess 622c. 622b is arranged. The second retention member 622b is in a regulating state in which the retention 2 solenoid 612 is activated (turned on) to protrude upward and prevent the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down, and the retention 2 solenoid 612 is turned off and the second retention member 622b is rotated to the left and the ball is changed to a released state in which the ball entering the recess 622c is allowed to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second retention member 622b is changed to the restricted state by the retention 2 solenoid 612 being activated (on) for 2 seconds (t6) 5 seconds after the start of the small winning game. , restricts the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down. The movable guide member 622 is rotated to the left by the stay 2 movable motor 610a five seconds after the start of the small winning game (t4) so that the inlet side is raised as shown in FIG. 231(b). Thereafter, the retention 2 movable motor 610a is operated for 1.5 seconds (t5) to raise the movable guiding member 622 to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231(b)). As explained earlier, the second retention solenoid 612 is controlled to turn off six seconds after the start of the small winning game, so the second retention member 622b is released while the movable guiding member 622 is rising. In this state, the movable guide member 622 is tilted downward to the left, and when the angle of inclination is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622c is configured to easily flow down to the downward left.

As shown in FIG. 229(a), when the ball that has entered the recess 622c starts flowing down, the ball that has entered the recess 622c is discharged to the rotary distribution member 621 from the discharge port 622a. The ejected balls roll on the rotary distribution member 621 and are ejected downstream. The rotary distribution member 621 is rotated left and right at a constant period after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the rotation distribution member 621 is rotated between the V prize opening 624 arranged downstream of the rotation distribution member 621 and the rotary distribution member 621. When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at a timing that coincides with the downstream discharge port 621a in parallel, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the V winning port 624. On the other hand, when the ball is ejected from the downstream ejection port 621a in a state where the downstream ejection port 621a and the V winning a prize port do not match in parallel, the V winning device 620 is It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the V validity period is set such that it is determined that the ball entering the V winning hole 624 is valid for 2 seconds (t7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small win. It is configured. Only when the photosensor detects that a ball enters the V winning hole 624 during this V valid period, the winning detection is enabled, and if a winning is won during any other period, the control processing is performed as invalid. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine only the period during which it is possible to enter the V-winning slot 624, and prevent damage caused by fraud, such as when a ball is manipulated with a magnet or the like to fraudulently enter the V-winning slot 624. can be reduced. In this embodiment, when a winning in the V winning hole 624 is detected during the V validity period, the jackpot game is executed after the small win game. A jackpot game awarded when a ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in a small winning game is based on the type of small winning game executed (small winning A or small winning B (Fig. 244(b) to (c)). The jackpot type corresponding to (see)) is configured to be set.

In addition, for the case where the small hit does not pass through V, a timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622e is in the closed state, the first retaining member 622d is released and the game ball is not guided to the movable guiding member 622, resulting in a V winning prize. This is an example of something that was not done. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart in which a prize is entered in the V winning hole 624 when the jackpot is B, and FIG. This is an example. Further, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state that is set when a big hit or a small hit occurs in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), when small hit A in special drawing 1 is executed, a 5R (time saving 95 times) jackpot is set, and when small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( (No time saving) A jackpot is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 244(c), when small hit C in special drawing 2 is executed, a 15R (time saving 95 times) jackpot is set, and when small hit D is executed, 5R ( 95 times of time saving) is set, and when small hit E is executed, 5R (no time saving) jackpot is set. In addition, the time saving in the name of each jackpot mentioned above indicates that a time saving gaming state is set, and the subsequent number display indicates the number of times the special symbol changes as the period in which the time saving gaming state is set. Normal indicates a jackpot in which the time-saving gaming state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, a jackpot type corresponding to the small winning type is executed by winning a prize in the V winning hole 624, but the present invention is not limited to this. A counter value (for example, the first winning type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing when a prize is won, and the selection may be made from a predetermined selection table. The predetermined selection table may be a different selection table for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state), a different selection table depending on the type of special symbol, or a different selection table may be set depending on the type of special symbol. Different selection tables may be set depending on the winning type.

In addition, here, if the variable display is stopped when it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a small hit or a jackpot, the small winning type , the LED of the first symbol display device 37a is displayed in a lighting manner corresponding to the jackpot type. Since the display mode is a combination of a plurality of LEDs, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37a, the details of the small winning type and the jackpot type are difficult to identify at a glance. has been done. Further, in the case of a jackpot, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed in accordance with the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. Regarding the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified in letters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of an LED indicating the type of jackpot, so it is configured to be more difficult for the player to identify. As a result, even if the jackpot type, small win type, and number of jackpot rounds are notified to the player on the first symbol display device 37 to maintain the fairness of the game, the notification may be difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the small winning game and the jackpot game before the game is executed, and even during the small winning game and the jackpot game in jackpot B, the player can easily distinguish the small winning type, the jackpot type, etc. It is configured so that you can play the game while making predictions. Thereby, the interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the type of jackpot game awarded when a prize is won in the V winning hole 624 differs depending on the type of small winning, so the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player. When a small winning game corresponding to the small winning type to which the type is given is executed, by stopping the firing of the game ball and playing the game so that the game ball does not enter the V ball entrance 600a, Although there is a risk that the disadvantage on the gaming parlor side will increase, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode that makes it difficult to understand the type of small win. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the gaming method that causes the disadvantages mentioned above.

Furthermore, after the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, 0.1 seconds later, the V winning door 600 becomes open and remains open for 1.2 seconds. Therefore, even if the player can be identified by analyzing the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the player operates the game ball launch after the identification, the player will not be able to reach the V ball entrance 600a. It is configured so that it is difficult to fire the game ball so that it reaches the target. Specifically, this embodiment is configured to fire 100 game balls per minute at equal intervals regardless of the firing intensity, so it is configured to fire one game ball every 0.6 seconds. Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V ball entrance 600a after it is fired from the launcher, if the game ball is not continuously fired to the right side area, the V ball entrance 600a It becomes difficult to let the ball enter the V ball entrance 600a, and if control is performed to prevent the ball from entering the V ball entrance 600a at the time of a small hit, the game ball will not enter the V ball entrance 600a for a small winning game corresponding to any small winning type. It becomes impossible to let the ball enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol stops displaying and a right-hand hit notification (a notification mode that notifies the player that the game ball will be fired to the right side area) is given, the player immediately starts right-hand hitting. You can have the player play the game as you would.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 600a, 640 are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the variable prize winning device 65.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 228, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (starting winning), using this as a trigger, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A variable display of is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a variable display of a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Note that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol, and is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time. has been done.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. This may be a possible configuration. With this configuration, more lottery games can be executed in the same amount of time, and the efficiency of the games can be improved.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the game state on the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display will be made accordingly. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example. In addition, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of numbers "0" to "9".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is It is structured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row with three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. The symbol rows are displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

Further, a third symbol is displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each symbol row. The middle part of this third symbol is set as an active line L1, and in every game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, there is a number of balls that have not been changed (pending balls) among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. One identification symbol (retention symbol) of a "circle symbol" is displayed for each retained ball, and the player is notified of the number of reserved balls. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved symbols. In addition, the number of reserved balls for the first prize opening 64 and the second prize opening 640 is set to a maximum of four, and each reserved ball is equal to the number of reserved balls for the first prize opening 64 and the second prize opening 640. are configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in distinguishably different colors (for example, black for the first winning hole 64 and red for the second winning hole 640).

In addition to the third symbol and the pending symbol, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 displays character symbols, letters, etc. as a preview display mode that is displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. be done. Further, if no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that balls entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are held up to a maximum of four times each, the maximum number of balls that can be held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of held balls to indicate the number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 239. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a random number table per normal symbol 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202aa, and a small winning Scenario tables 202ab are set respectively. It should be noted that data necessary for other games is also stored, but in the explanation of the invention in this embodiment, the explanation is omitted because it is unnecessary.

The first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the normal symbol winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202e will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table in which a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set is defined, and it is used during the opening period of the jackpot game (when the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started). jackpot type), round period (maximum period for which one round game is set), and interval period between rounds (period from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game). This corresponds to the value of the scenario counter 203aa, which is set when a jackpot game is started, and whose value is periodically added by 1 (every time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed). Motion control is performed.

This jackpot scenario table 202aa defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types. Here, detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248(a), the jackpot scenario table 202aa defines different scenarios corresponding to jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), jackpot scenarios a202aa1 corresponding to 5R worth of jackpot games are included in jackpot types A and C in which jackpot games that open the specific winning opening 65a are executed. In D, a jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to a jackpot game worth 15R is defined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 248(a), for jackpot type B in which the V winning hole 624 or the specific winning hole 65a is opened according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game, as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game, A winning scenario a202aa2 showing the action content of the first half of the first round, a winning scenario b202aa3, a winning scenario c202aa4 showing the action content of the second half of the first round, and the action content of the round game from the second round to the fifth round. A jackpot scenario b202aa5 is defined.

In the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, the content of the round game in the first round is the same as that of the small winning game (an error that is difficult for the player to identify). ), and when a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot type B is started, the V winning door 600 is opened and a round game (V challenge) aiming at the V winning opening 624 is executed. be done.

Furthermore, by opening the V winning door 600 during this V challenge, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the V ball entry port 600a, and the game ball that enters the V ball entry port 600a is transferred to the flow path switching member. 622e and is retained by the second retention member 622b of the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231(a)) based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown). Based on the result of the determination, the content of the action in the second half of the first round game is changed.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 262), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 274). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning hole 640 that correspond to winnings in the first winning hole 64, which consists of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage areas 203b corresponding to winnings are provided, and each of these areas has a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the ball. Each value of a 1 per random number counter C1, a 1st per win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the normal starting gates (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 240. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), it becomes 0. It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table (see FIGS. 242(a) to (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Here, in the first winning random number table 202a1, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol are respectively set.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 3", and the value is "0 to 3". 3", it is determined that it is a jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, the jackpot lottery is determined to be a failure), it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "4" or not. If the result is "4", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained similarly to the first special symbol is "0 to 3", and " If the number is between 0 and 3, it is determined that it is a jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is other than "0 to 3" (that is, the jackpot lottery is determined to be a failure), the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is either "4 to 997". If it is between "4 and 997", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

In this way, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, but regarding the small win probability, the second special symbol has a higher small win probability than the first special symbol. is set high. As a result, in the time-saving gaming state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, the lottery is more likely to be executed with the second special symbol, so the probability of a small hit is high, and the prize is entered into the V winning hole 624. It is possible to increase the chances of being able to Therefore, since the time-saving gaming state can be set more advantageously to the player, it is expected that jackpot games that give the time-saving gaming state will be executed even when the normal gaming state is set. This allows the player to play the game, and it is possible to suppress the problem of the player getting tired of the game early.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the jackpot type and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the case of a special symbol jackpot. ), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot or small hit, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to become a jackpot, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the random numbers per special symbol as described above. It is stored in the table 202a1 and the random number table 202a2 per special symbol 2. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 4 out of the total number of random numbers of 1000, the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "1/250".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, a first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241(a)) is used to determine the type of jackpot to be executed. It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the first winning type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol, and a second special A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, three types from jackpot A to jackpot C described above are set to be selected by the value of the first win type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is one of "0 to 44", the jackpot type is "jackpot A (5R time saving 95 jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 44" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is one of "45 to 60", the jackpot type is "jackpot B (5R time saving 3 jackpot)". That is, the value of "45 to 60" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is one of "61 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R time saving jackpot)". That is, a value of "61 to 99" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is played mainly by winning the game ball into the first winning hole 64, but when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, the time saving gaming state occurs at a rate of 61%. These are the jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) that are awarded. Therefore, even when a jackpot is achieved with the first special symbol, the time-saving game state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether the jackpot type is such that a time-saving game is given even when it is a jackpot. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 243(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of jackpot D described above is set to be selected by the value of the first win type counter C2. Specifically, when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is one of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot D (15R time saving 95 jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 99" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

In this way, when a jackpot is achieved for the second special symbol (by jackpot determination for winning the second prize opening 640), the system is configured such that a jackpot in which a time-saving game is always awarded is awarded. There is. Furthermore, the number of time savings is set to 95, which is more advantageous than jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, which is more advantageous to the player than jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol that is likely to be executed mainly in the time-saving game state, a jackpot game that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is executed. The game is configured so that the value increases when the game state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the case of a special symbol winning. 99), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Further, the value of the small winning type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202e (see FIG. 244(a)) is used to determine the type of small win to be executed. is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The small winning type selection table 202e includes a special figure 1 small winning type selection table 202e1, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the first special symbol, and a second small winning type selection table 202e, as shown in FIG. 244(a). A special figure 2 small winning type selection table 202e2, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the special symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 244(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small winning type selection table 202b1. As the small win type of the first special symbol, two types, the above-mentioned small win A and small win B, are set to be selected by the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 64", the small win type is "Small win A (5R short 95 times jackpot when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is any one of "65 to 99", the small win type is "Small win B (10R time saving no jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "65 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small win A and the small win B, the type of the jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 624 in the small win game is set. In the case of small win A, a 5R time-saving 95-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of small win A, a jackpot is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then a 95-time jackpot is set as a time-saving game state. It is configured such that a time saving game (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, a 10R time saving no jackpot is set, and after the small win B is executed, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state is executed, but after the jackpot game is configured such that the time-saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is set. In this way, small win B has a large number of rounds executed in the jackpot game and is set more advantageously than small win A, but since the time-saving gaming state is not set after the jackpot game, it is difficult for the player to It is difficult to execute a lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous, and overall, it is set so that it is more advantageous to the player when the small win A is won in the V winning hole 624 than the small win B. has been done.

FIG. 244(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning type selection table 202b2. As the small win type of the second special symbol, the three types of small win C to D mentioned above are set to be selected by the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 49", the small win type is "Small win C (15R short 95 times jackpot when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 79", the small win type is "Small win D (5R time saving 95 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "80 to 99", the small win type is "small win E (5R time saving no jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, the type of the jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 624 in the small winning game is set for each of the small winnings C to E. In the case of small win C, a 15R time saving 95 jackpot is set, and after the small win C is executed, a jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state, and then a 95 time saving game state is set. It is configured such that a time saving game (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of a small win D, a 95-time jackpot in 5R time is set, and after the execution of the small win D, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then a variable winning jackpot is executed. A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then 95 time-saving games (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 95 times and stopped and displayed) are set as the time-saving game state. It is configured. In addition, in the case of a small hit E, a 5R time saving no jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small hit E, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the jackpot game is configured such that the time-saving gaming state is not set and the normal gaming state is set.

In this way, the small win type for the second special symbol is a small win in which a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set when a prize is won in the V winning hole 624 than the small win type for the first special symbol. The rate at which the type is selected is set to be high. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, and the probability of being determined to be a small hit is also set higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. It is determined that it is a small win, and by winning the V winning hole 624, it is possible to easily execute the jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set again. As a result, it is possible to provide the jackpot game to the player while continuing the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to further increase the value of the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a small hit and the variable display stops, the LED corresponding to the small win type on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed as lit. It is configured to Therefore, when a player is playing a time-saving game, he or she wants to play the game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a time-saving gaming state is set) can be executed by effectively using the remaining number of time-saving games. . Then, the small winning game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only if it is a small winning type that does not give a time-saving gaming state, the game ball is stopped from being ejected and enters the V ball entrance 600a. There is a possibility that a gaming method that is disadvantageous to the gaming parlor side, such as playing the game so that the game balls do not enter the ball, will be executed. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to be open for 1.6 seconds after the variable display determined to be a small win in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the configuration of this embodiment, in which the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and it takes 2 seconds to reach the V ball entrance 600a, the game balls are fired after checking the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to let the ball enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, and the fluctuation stops, and the right hit notification is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If you do not immediately launch the game ball to the right side area and play the game, it will be difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a in small winning games of all small winning types. It is composed of As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a gaming method that is extremely disadvantageous to the gaming parlor side.

Here, each winning type and the operation of the winning game will be explained with reference to FIG. 247. For jackpot A and jackpot C, a round game in which 1R is continued until 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 65 or until the open state continues for 29 seconds is repeatedly executed for 5R.

In the jackpot B, in the 1st round game, the V prize door 600 is in an open state, and the V ball entry opening 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. In addition, if 10 balls enter the prize in the 1st round, it will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed, but at 1.2 seconds, the open time is such that it is realistically impossible for 10 balls to enter the prize. It becomes. In the 2nd to 5th round games, the round game continues until the variable winning device 65 receives 10 game balls or the open state continues for 29 seconds.

In jackpot D, a round game is repeatedly executed for 15R in which 1R is continued until 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 65 or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the lottery results (missing, jackpot type, small winning), so-called short winning (7 seconds), fake winning (30 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), special reach Various (90 seconds), no pseudo development (30 seconds), one pseudo development (34 seconds), two pseudo developments (38 seconds), three pseudo developments (42 seconds). variation time) is determined. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 274) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 245(a)) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in the normal gaming state and a time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 used in the time-saving gaming state. are set respectively.

FIG. 245(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202d1. The normal variation pattern table 202d1 includes variation patterns that are selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a miss, such as short miss (7 seconds), fake miss (30 seconds), normal reach various ( 30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds), and the corresponding fluctuation is determined by comparing the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. A pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short error (7 seconds) is selected, and when it is "140 to 149", short error (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, if it is "180 to 194", super reach (60 seconds) is selected, and if it is "195 to 198". In this case, the determination values are set so that each type of special reach (90 seconds) is selected.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, and the jackpot type is jackpot A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B), the variation pattern selected is normal reach (30 seconds). , various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. be done. Here, when the variation is stopped, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a row (a jackpot with matching symbols), so that the player is notified of a jackpot. Note that "777" is displayed only when the type of jackpot is such that a time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type in which a time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game, the configuration is such that the determination lottery of the stop symbol of the third symbol also determines the squares other than the "777" square. It is also configured such that it is not known whether the time-saving game will be awarded until after the jackpot game.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", normal reach types (30 seconds) are selected, and when it is "41 to 179", super reach types (60 seconds) are selected. The respective determination values are set so that when the selected value is "180 to 198", various types of special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

In addition, each variation pattern selected in the case of a jackpot is composed of the same variation time as each variation pattern selected in the case of a miss, and the final pattern is a stop symbol (three eyes) indicating a jackpot. It is configured differently depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the player's judgment result is wrong, the same variation pattern (variation pattern that becomes a reach) that is also selected in the case of a jackpot will be selected, so that the player can have expectations for a jackpot. can.

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit or a jackpot, and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the variation patterns selected are pseudo-development no performance (30 seconds), pseudo-development once performance (34 seconds), pseudo development 2 times effect (38 seconds), and pseudo development 3 times effect (42 seconds) are each set, and the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are set. After comparison, a corresponding variation pattern is selected. Here, when the variation is stopped, the chance number (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, thereby informing the player that he or she has won at least a small win. As a result, even a jackpot B is displayed with the same stop symbol as a small win, so the player can play the game with the expectation that the game ball will enter the V winning hole 624 in the small win game. can.

In detail, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", a pseudo development no effect (30 seconds) is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", a pseudo development one effect (30 seconds) is selected. 34 seconds) is selected, and if it is "100 to 149", a pseudo development twice (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", a pseudo development three times (38 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set for each selection.

Here, with reference to FIG. 232 to FIG. 236, the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment's false release (30 seconds), pseudo-development no presentation (30 seconds), and pseudo-development once presentation (34 seconds). The presentation mode that will be displayed will be explained. FIGS. 232 to 233 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol when it is removed (30 seconds). When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is determined to be a miss starts changing, each of the third symbols (left, middle, The right pattern) starts to be scrolled vertically. Further, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a fourth symbol is displayed as a "circle symbol" in a display area smaller than the region in which the third symbol is displayed (the region in which each third symbol is displayed). ” and “x symbol” are displayed in two rows on the left and right as symbols that are alternately displayed in a fluctuating manner. This fourth symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Lose: A combination of circle symbols in the left column and × symbols in the right column. Jackpot: A combination of circle symbols in the left column and circle symbols in the right column. Small win: A combination of × symbols in the left column and × symbols in the right column.) It is configured to stop and display at . Note that, as shown in FIGS. 232(a) and 232(b), the state in which three lines are written on the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In 30 seconds, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the third symbol, which had been temporarily stopped, is fixedly stopped (displayed as stopped from the shaking fluctuation), and in synchronization with that, the fourth symbol is changed. It is configured so that it is also stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo-development-free performance (30 seconds), the symbol that is temporarily stopped in response to the fluctuating display of the false development (30 seconds) is shown in Figure 237 (a), with the left and right symbols in the reach display mode, and the middle symbol with " The difference is that a chance symbol with the words "CHANCE" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation mode of the third symbol in one pseudo development performance (34 seconds). When it is determined that it is a small hit or a jackpot B and the pseudo development one-time effect is selected, at the start of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, similar to the case described in the case of the pseudo development no effect, the effect shown in FIG. 232 ( As shown in a), each third symbol (left, middle, right symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 starts to be scrolled in the vertical direction. Thereafter, after being scrolled at high speed (the type of the third symbol is displayed at a speed or in a manner that is difficult to distinguish), the chance symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, stopped at the combination of "354") as shown in FIG. 232(b). After displaying, each third symbol is oscillated up and down.

After this, in the pseudo development one-time performance, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the middle symbol "5" symbol and the right symbol "4" symbol are displayed in a changing manner so as to be replaced. Here, in this embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination of "345", it is set as the symbol of the combination that notifies the player that a re-variation will be executed. As shown in FIG. 234(b), when the combination "345" is moved and displayed, scrolling display in the vertical direction is started again. Thereafter, after a high-speed scroll display, the chance is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 237(a), and is stopped and displayed when 34 seconds of the fluctuation time (variation period) have elapsed. Here, if the pseudo development is performed twice (38 seconds) or the pseudo development is performed three times (42 seconds), then after a temporary stop, if the pseudo development is performed twice, it will change again. In the case of a pseudo development three-time performance, the chance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed after the performance in which re-variation is performed twice is performed. In this way, by executing the pseudo fluctuation a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small winning game or the jackpot B starts.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the SW (switch) performance in the false development, one-time pseudo-development performance, two-time pseudo-development performance, and three-time pseudo-development performance will be described. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the variable pattern command. Detailed performance contents are selected by a lottery by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern commands indicating false development, one-time pseudo-development, two-time pseudo-development, and three-time pseudo-development. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop display is performed, a symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 235(a), and the user is prompted to press the frame button 22. A performance prompting the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235(b), if any of the pseudo development 1 time performance, pseudo development 2 time performance, or pseudo development 3 time performance is selected, the change is made again. A symbol "345" indicating this will be displayed and the re-variation will be executed. On the other hand, when the loose pattern is selected, the temporarily stopped symbol does not change as shown in FIG. 236, and is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation period has elapsed. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the "CHANCE" symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the last stopped symbol that has changed again, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "CHANCE" symbol and other symbols (for example, The "4" symbol) may be displayed alternately, or by displaying both symbols and scrolling, an effect may be displayed to show whether the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, if the "CHANCE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, if the symbol is to be changed again from the stopped symbol, it may be changed again. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to determine each variation pattern before the player is fixed and stopped, and the start timing of the small winning game and the jackpot B can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that small wins and jackpots are displayed in a distinguishable manner in the fourth symbol, attention to the fourth symbol can be reduced by the presentation of the third symbol, and the small win game can be started. can be difficult to identify. Furthermore, since the fourth symbol is configured so that the type of small win cannot be identified, it is necessary to check the first symbol display device 37, and to stop firing the game ball in a specific small win game, etc. It is possible to suppress special gaming methods (strategy play).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, the performance mode (fluctuation pattern) on the third symbol display device 81 until the fixed stop symbol in the small hit or the big win B will be explained. As explained earlier in the pseudo development no effect, the pseudo development 1 time effect, the pseudo development 2 time effect, and the pseudo development 3 time effect, when the chance eye symbol indicating the final stop symbol temporarily stops, the chance eye symbol swings and fluctuates. In this state, the words ``Prepare to aim to the right'' are displayed above the chance symbol. Further, at the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a thin outline of a right-hand hitting informing symbol n is displayed which notifies the player to operate the firing handle with a firing intensity that causes the game ball to be fired to the right side area. When the variable time has elapsed and it is 2 seconds before the elapse of the variable time, the words "Now, let's aim to the right" are displayed and the outline of the right-hand hit notification symbol n is displayed with a darker density (Fig. 237 (see (b)). Thereafter, at the timing when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 238, not only the outline but also the center of the right-handed hitting notification pattern n is displayed in color, and the characters "Right-handed hitting" are displayed on the left side.

In this way, by notifying the right hit notification in stages before it is fixed and stopped, the game ball is launched to the right area in accordance with the timing when the small winning game is started, and the V winning door 600 is in the open state. It is possible to suppress the problem of not being able to launch game balls in time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the fixed symbol is displayed after the re-variation has been executed a prescribed number of times, the right hit notification symbol is displayed in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this. If you want to start the stage display of the right-hand notification symbol n every time at the timing and change it out or change it again, the right-hand notification symbol n should be It may be configured such that it is hidden and the third symbol is changed again. In this case, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed on the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when changing again, it is scrolled again without being confirmed, and if it is a miss, another symbol is displayed. It is also possible to use a fixed stop symbol that is replaced with 3 symbols and fixedly stopped (for example, scrolled (shifted) by one frame and then stopped) to notify the failure. By configuring in this way, it is further possible to make it difficult to understand when the small hit starts, and to make the player prepare for a right hit every time there is a temporary stop, making it possible to play special games such as preventing the player from firing a specific small win type. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used to select a special symbol variation pattern when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is a loss are short loss (2 seconds), short loss pseudo 1 time ( 6 seconds) and short-miss pseudo twice (9 seconds), and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set determination value.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", short miss (2 seconds) is selected, and when it is "91 to 189", one short miss pseudo (6 seconds) is selected. ) is selected, and the respective determination values are set so that if it is "190 to 198", the short miss pseudo twice (9 seconds) is selected.

Short miss (2 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 2 seconds, and after 1 second of high-speed variation from the start of variation, it oscillates with a chance (the middle symbol is "CHANCE" and the symbol has a large oscillation variation). After fluctuating and temporarily stopping for 1 second, the fluctuating effect is executed in which the symbol changes to a missed symbol (the middle symbol scrolls (slides) one frame downwards from the "CHANCE" symbol), stops definitively, and informs you that it is a missed symbol. This is a fluctuation pattern. In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop will shake a lot, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol next to it (for example, the "1" symbol) will be alternately displayed at the stop display position. , so that the player does not misunderstand that the result is a lottery result such as a small win.

The variation pattern of one short miss (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 6 seconds, and after the 1 second temporary stop of the short miss (2 seconds) mentioned above, the symbol will move at high speed again for 2 seconds. After starting the variation and re-variation, it temporarily stops for 2 seconds on the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short miss (2 seconds)), and then scrolls down one frame from the missed symbol (the middle symbol is "CHANCE" symbol). This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the symbol changes to (slipped) symbol), stops fixed, and is notified that it is a miss.

The variation pattern of 2 short misses (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 9 seconds, and after the above-mentioned 1 short miss pseudo pause for 2 seconds, the symbol will again fluctuate at high speed for 2 seconds. After starting and re-fluctuating, it temporarily stops for 1 second on the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short miss (2 seconds)), then the missed symbol (the middle symbol scrolls one frame downward from the "CHANCE" symbol) This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the symbol changes to (slided) symbol), stops fixed, and is notified that it is a miss.

In the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is a small win are short-term small win (2 seconds), short-small win pseudo 1 time (6 seconds), short and small winning pseudo 2 times (9 seconds), short and small winning pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) are set, and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared with the set judgment value. and the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

In detail, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", short and small winning (2 seconds) is selected, and when it is "68 to 136", one pseudo short and small winning (6 seconds) is selected. ) is selected, and if it is "137 to 167", the short and small winning pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is selected, and when it is "168 to 198", the short and small winning pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is selected. Judgment values are set for each.

The short and small hit (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of the fluctuation, it will shake on the chance eye (the medium symbol is "CHANCE" and the symbol will fluctuate greatly). This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the game fluctuates and temporarily stops for one second, then comes to a final stop and a small win is announced. In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop swings greatly, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol placed one frame after that "for example, the "1" symbol" are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The fluctuation pattern of one pseudo short and small win (6 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 6 seconds, and after the above-mentioned short and small win (2 seconds), the symbol will move quickly for 2 seconds again after the temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and re-fluctuation, there is a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short small hit (2 seconds)), then a fixed stop, and a small hit is announced. This is the variation pattern to be executed.

The fluctuation pattern of short and small winning pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 9 seconds, and after the above-mentioned short and small winning pseudo 1 time temporary stop for 2 seconds, the symbol changes again at high speed for 2 seconds. After starting and re-fluctuating, it temporarily stops for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to the short and small hit (2 seconds)), then stops permanently, and a fluctuating effect is executed in which it is announced that it is a small hit. This is a fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern of short and small winning pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, and after the above-mentioned short and small winning pseudo 2 times, the symbol will rapidly fluctuate for 2 seconds after the temporary stop for 1 second. After starting and re-fluctuating, it temporarily stops for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to the short and small hit (2 seconds)), then stops permanently, and a fluctuating effect is executed in which it is announced that it is a small hit. This is a fluctuation pattern.

In this way, in this embodiment, during the time-saving game, the lottery result is a loss and a small win are configured with the same fluctuation time, and the same fluctuation timing (the elapsed timing of the fluctuation time). The third symbol is configured to be temporarily stopped on the chance roll. As a result, even when the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to make the player think that it will be a variable small win every time, and it is possible to make the player prepare for hitting the right hand in preparation for the start of the small win game. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 confirms whether it is a specific small winning type (for example, small winning E, which is a small winning type that is disadvantageous to the player among the small winning types) and launches the game ball. It is possible to suppress the problem of a special game method in which the game ball is stopped and prevented from entering the V ball entrance 600a.

Incidentally, the stepwise notification of the right-handed notification symbols in the normal gaming state may be configured to be executed every time there is a temporary stop even during the time-saving game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to win a small prize even if the fluctuation is a little off, and allows the player to play the game.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) occurs, and when the ball passes through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67 on either the left or right. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 242(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which the normal symbols are in the normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for the time-saving state (period) and the number of random numbers that become a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

FIG. 242(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c described above. In this second winning random number table 202c, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will be a win for a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbols. The display will run for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the second prize opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x once". In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the second winning hole 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". The opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the normal symbols. The display will run for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed in a lit state, and the second prize opening 640 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the release period of the second prize opening 640 is Since the time becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit based on the value (random number) of the second random number counter C4. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the second winning hole 640 is opened for "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time is The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 274).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 240, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 274) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 273). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, jackpot start flag 203h, jackpot medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing place jackpot type value 203m, a V flag 203n, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 acquired based on winning in the first winning opening 64 are stored, respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first prize opening 64 (starting prize winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (first area to fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winnings in the second winning hole 640 are stored respectively, and in other respects. Since the configurations are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (1st reserved area to 4th reserved area). ). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4). Among the vacant areas of the area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first prize opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the number of reserved balls counter 203d increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 263, S211 in FIG. 266). (See S305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuations held in the main controller 110 by the special symbol 1 pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 203d is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol (reserved symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls entered into the second winning opening 640 and reserved is stored. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, it is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal starting port 67 to a maximum of 4. This is a counter that counts up to the number of times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. . On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second winning random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, and is decremented by 1 at the timing when the variation of the special symbol stops, thereby reducing the time until the number of variation of the special symbol set in the time saving gaming state ends. The gaming state is configured to be set.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON (see S219 in FIG. 263). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to off in the initial state, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power outage is maintained.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, it is configured to be set to OFF when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed). This jackpot flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when RAM is cleared, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like. It is configured to

The small winning start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small winning start flag 203j is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203j is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is configured to be

The small winning medium flag 203k is a flag indicating that a small winning game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit flag 203k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. is configured to be

The jackpot type value 203m when passing V is a memory that stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball enters the V winning hole 624 within the V validity period when a small winning game is being executed. area. The V-passing jackpot type value 203m stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type that has been determined when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small win stops. When a ball enters the V winning slot 624 during the V validity period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203m when passing the V is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the large winning type value 203m when passing V is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203m is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and in the event of a power outage, etc., the state immediately before the power outage, etc. occurs will be backed up. It is configured to be held by

In the V flag 203n, when a ball enters the V winning hole 624 during the V validity period in a small winning game, a flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of small winning game being executed is set to ON. Ru. At the end of the small winning game, by determining whether this V flag 203n is on, it is identified that there has been a win in the V winning hole 624 during the V validity period, and the flag is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like. It is configured as follows.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

The scenario counter 203aa is a counter for advancing various scenarios (jackpot scenario, winning scenario) that define the operation control contents of the jackpot game or the small winning game, and when the jackpot game or the small winning game is started. , "1" is set as the counter value, and then the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) or the small win control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 274) 278 (see S1005) is executed, the value is incremented by "1". The counter value is reset to "0" when the various scenarios (jackpot scenario, winning scenario) are added up to the value that ends.

The specific controlled flag 203ab is a flag to indicate that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) that is executed when jackpot B is set as the jackpot type has ended, and is set to on. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

This specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the setting status of the flag is determined by the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (see S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, if it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which a special round game is executed is It is determined that the game has ended, and a normal round game from the second round onward (a round game in which the specific winning hole 65a is opened) is executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

Returning to FIG. 239, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each type of variation pattern (too far, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The audio lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b). As shown in FIG. 251(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, a production counter 223f, a SW valid time counter 223g, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and uses the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b to count the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, and The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of held pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b based on the reserved balls number command output from the main controller 110. Since the only difference is that the method is performed, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and turned off when the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is set. When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The performance counter 223f is a counter used for preview performances and various lottery games. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223g is a storage area in which the period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This controls the performance (performance) and preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234, which is provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) that is executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding the NOR type ROM 234d of extremely small capacity, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is used when a player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. In this case, this is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

The image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 transfers the power-on main image to the third symbol display device using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. 81 (the third symbol display device 81 displays "○" and "x").

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a ``special symbol jackpot'', the image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``miss of the special symbol'', the image is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable performance is stopped.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The MPU 231 sends an instruction to the image controller 237 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be instructed. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable presentation after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately start the variable presentation. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a storage image data determination It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, a stop symbol indicating a miss will finally be displayed, while if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a jackpot, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is finally stop displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

By notifying the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more chances the ball will pass through the through gate 67, the more opportunities the lottery for the normal symbol will take place, and the more opportunities for the normal symbol to win. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot.This increases the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the first winning hole 64 is a winning hole where when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as prize balls, so it becomes a jackpot with a normal symbol, an electric accessory is released, and the ball is sent to the second winning hole. The easier it is to hit 640, the more prize balls you get. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player can be in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending performance, by informing that the lottery result of one of the pending special symbol drawings will be a special symbol jackpot, the player can win the special symbol in the pending special symbol drawing. Since the player can recognize that it will be a jackpot with a special symbol, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will definitely get a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a starting prize is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is to display either back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or to display back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. Furthermore, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to C is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 259) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operations, so the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on the start-up winnings.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 260 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the corresponding address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variable image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3308 in FIG. 288(b)) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 288(b), S3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 288(b ), pointer update processing (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 261), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The rendered image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 288(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 288(b)). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 288(b)) is executed (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 262 to 279. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 999, 99, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process accompanying a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 268. After executing the normal symbol variation process, a through gate passage process is executed as the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S107). Note that details of the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

After executing the through gate passage process, the V entrance passage process is executed (S108), and then the V passage process (S109) is executed. Here, details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

After executing the V passing process (S109), a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game for the symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is determined. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value has been changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special symbol 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 264.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S208), and determines whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, if there is no reserved ball to start a new special symbol variation, the book is returned as is. Finish the process.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and by the process of S210. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the changed (subtracted) value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set (S215). . Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. be exposed. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined. One of the jackpots A to D is determined accordingly, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, one of the small wins A to E is determined according to the value of the small win type counter C5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is informed of the lottery result of the current special symbol (determined result of each type of counter) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, if it is a small win, the red LED is lit, and if it is a miss. The red LED and green LED are turned on.

Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A is determined, the blue LEDs in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are set to show jackpot A (for example, the alphabet "a"). If a jackpot B is determined, the light is lit in a manner that shows the jackpot B (for example, in a manner that imitates the letter "b"), and if a jackpot C is determined, the jackpot is lit. It lights up in a manner that shows C (for example, in a manner that imitates the alphabet "c"), and if a jackpot D is determined, it lights up in a manner that shows jackpot D (for example, in a manner that imitates the alphabet "d"). let

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the red LED will light up in a manner corresponding to each small win type (small win A to small win E), similar to when winning the jackpot described above. let Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, in this embodiment, in order for the player to understand each winning type (big winning type and small winning type) determined as described above, the content of each winning type is shown (colors corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols). Although the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a lighting mode formed from lighting modes corresponding to each winning type, other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by checking the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the current special symbol and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the lottery results of the special symbols may be configured to be displayed in a lighting manner that is differentiated to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery results are different. .

After the process of S215 is completed, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a V-win is made so that the ball can enter a specific winning hole (specific winning hole 65a, V-winning hole 624). An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and then a jackpot start setting (jackpot setting of 15 rounds, etc.) is executed in accordance with the jackpot type determined for the current jackpot (S218). ).

After completing the process of S218, next, the jackpot start flag 203h and jackpot flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and a stop command is set (S225). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S221), and it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined that (S221: Yes), the small hit start setting process (S222) is executed, and then the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

In the process of S221, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss) (S221: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S223) . If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is not 1 or more (0) (S223: No), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203g is greater than or equal to 1 (S223: Yes), that is, if the current time-saving state is in progress, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224). Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win", or "special symbol loss" lottery ( This is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance performed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) , the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 (S231). Next, the special symbol lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process moves to S233.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242(b)). Compare each one with the four random numbers set in . As mentioned above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers for the first special symbol that will result in a jackpot, and the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these random numbers that will result in a jackpot are set. When the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value "4" that is a small win set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242(b)), It is determined that it is a small hit with a special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, a random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress bias in jackpots.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different numbers of determination values for determining a small hit. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied depending on the type of special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make the player play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first winning random number table 202a is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols wins a small hit. The first winning random number table 202a may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value for a small hit of the special symbol, and only the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is set. It is best to set the random number value that will result in a small hit of the symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the benefits (small winning games) that can be given to the player according to the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special symbol jackpot corresponds to a predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1, and a jackpot of a special symbol corresponds to a predetermined range of the value of the first random number counter C1, and a jackpot of a special symbol corresponds to a predetermined range of the value of the first random number counter C1, and However, in other configurations, for example, the first special symbol corresponds to a value in a part of the range that results in a jackpot (for example, 0 to 2), and the second special symbol corresponds to a small hit. It may be set as a winning range.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, miss) is performed using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a. As an alternative configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, the first random number table may be used to check whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or not. , and if the lottery result using the first random number table is not a jackpot, the second random number table is used to determine whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small win. You may do so. By performing the lottery of special symbols using multiple random number tables in this way, the lottery results of the special symbols can be set more randomly, and fraudulent acts that manipulate the lottery results of the special symbols can be suppressed. .

In this embodiment, when drawing a special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A special symbol may be drawn by using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot based on the value of the first random number counter, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not is determined based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 264, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of S232 is a special symbol jackpot (S233). If it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (S234), A display mode at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type is set (S235), a jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S236), and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time is set. A command is set (S243), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S237), and it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined that (S237: Yes), the small winning type is acquired based on the small winning type selection table according to the type of special symbol corresponding to the current special symbol lottery (S238), and the special symbol and small winning type are obtained. sets the display mode at the time of a small win corresponding to the above, determines a small win fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter, and sets a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the small win fluctuation pattern determined this time (S243), This process ends.

In addition, in the process of S237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss, the result is a loss corresponding to the type of special symbol. setting the display mode for the time (S241), determining a variation pattern when missing based on the number of held pitches (S242), setting a variation pattern command corresponding to the currently determined variation pattern when missing (S243), This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol If the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of reserved pitches. Specifically, it is configured such that the larger the number of balls on hold at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the special symbol lottery result is displayed as a lottery result (losing) that does not give any benefits to the player can be shortened as the number of pending balls increases, so it can be executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of drawings of special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, if it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, the time for each special symbol fluctuation can be increased, which prevents the occurrence of a situation where the special symbol does not change during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to vary based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, but in addition to that, for example, the special symbol It may be configured to shorten the variation time set in the variation pattern being executed on the condition that the number of balls on hold reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more during variation. . With this configuration, even while the special symbols are changing, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to secure a large number of reserved balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation patterns may be different based on the number of balls, or the structure may be such that the larger the number of balls on hold, the easier it is to determine a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Among the 2 special symbols, it may be only the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start process is executed with priority, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start process is executed this time. Only the value of the number of reserved balls in the symbol may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the small hit start setting process (S222) will be explained. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). In this small hit start setting process, the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery, and the ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 are A first retention member 622d (see FIG. 231), a movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), a second retention member 622b (see FIG. 231), and a rotational distribution member provided in a flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624. 621 (see FIG. 231), a process is executed to set a scenario for driving the solenoids for operating each of the 621 (see FIG. 231).

In the small win start setting process (S244), first, based on the small win scenario table 202ab (see FIG. 248(b)), a scenario (win scenario a) corresponding to the set small win type is set (S241). . Next, a small win type corresponding to the small win type determined as the jackpot type value when passing V is set (S242), a small win start corresponding to the small win type is set (S243), and a small win start flag 203j is set. , sets the small hit medium flag 203k to ON (S244), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in this embodiment. This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and suspending their values when there is a random number counter.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first prize opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of reservations of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S302). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, there is no winning in the first winning hole 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S303: No), the process moves to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning hole 64 (S301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S305, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. Each value is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In addition, in the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S307 to S312, similar processing to the processing from S301 to S306 is performed for the winning prize in the second winning hole 640. The only difference is that a reservation process is executed for the second special symbol in response to a win in the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S307: No), a pre-reading process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). After that, this process ends.

Next, the prefetching process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S313). When the prefetch process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a new prize winning (S321). If there is no new prize winning (S321: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S321: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is a winning of the first special symbol (S322).

In the process of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), the winning is based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table, and the special symbol 1 small win selection table. The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small win type are acquired (S323), and the process moves to S325.

On the other hand, in the process of S322, if it is determined that the winning is a winning of the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table, and the special symbol 2 small win selection table are Based on this, the lottery result, jackpot type and small win type are acquired (S324), and the process moves to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big win determination result, jackpot type, small win determination result, small win type) acquired in the process of S323 or S324 described above is set ( S325). Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and is used to control the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc. This is a process for controlling.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S401). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning includes when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol and when the electric accessory 640a is being controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S401: Yes), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S407).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). The time saving counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S409). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S409: Yes), the process moves to S411.

In the process of S409, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S407. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability times, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number table for normal symbols for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 8(b)).

In the process of S408, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S408: No), the process moves to S411. In the process of S411, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S407 and the low Based on the normal symbol per random number table for probability time, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S411). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal symbol per random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 8(b)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S410 or S411 is a normal symbol win (S412), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S412: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S413). In the process of S413, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot. It is determined whether or not (S415). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S415: Yes), the process moves to S417.

In the process of S415, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S416), and the process moves to S419. In the process of S414, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S414: No), the process moves to S417. In the process of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of openings is set to one (S417), and the process moves to S419.

In the process of S412, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S412: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the time saving middle counter 203g is 1 or more (S419: Yes), the change in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this process is ended. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). Note that the varying time here is a time that is preset by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the variable display starts on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S422, if the variable time has not elapsed (S422: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S422, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, if the drawing of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S413, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped on the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or the process of S418.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S424). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S424: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to start (S425), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S425, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S416 or the process of S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This through gate passage process determines whether or not a ball has passed through this normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and if a ball has passed, obtains and holds the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4. This is a process for

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S434). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S435), and the process ends.

In addition, when storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the first area among the empty holding areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to and the value is determined. If it is 0, the first reservation area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V-inlet passing process (S108), it is first determined whether the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501), and if it is not on (S501: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501: Yes), then during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game where jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. It is determined whether the round game or the small winning game is in progress based on whether the set scenario is the winning scenario a202aa2 (S502). In the process of S502, if it is determined that the V winning hole opening period is in progress (S502: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this process ends. If it is not a small winning game (S502: No), this means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S504) and this process is executed. finish.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S503 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

When the V passing process (S109) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether the game ball has won in the V winning hole 624 (S601), and if it is determined that the winning has been won (S601: Yes). ), then it is determined whether the current V validity period is in progress (S602). In the process of S602, during a small winning game or when the value of the scenario counter 203aa that counts the progress of the scenario (winning scenario b222aa3) set to jackpot type B is between "1" and "501", It is determined that the V is within the valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that the V is not within the valid period.

In the process of S602, if it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is being played (S603), and if the small winning game is currently being played (S603). : Yes), acquires the V passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small win type of the current small win game (S604), sets the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S605), and sets the time saving medium counter to 0. (S606), and the process moves to S607.

That is, in the processing of S604 to S606, processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 624 during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot type B is in progress) (S603: No), it is necessary to perform a process for executing a new jackpot game. Since there is no one, the process of S604 to S606 is skipped and the process moves to S607.

In the process of S607, a V passing command is set (S607), and this process ends. The V passing command set here is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during a small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game is successful, and following the small winning game, , executes an effect to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed. Further, when the V pass command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small win game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V passing command is received at the predetermined timing during the jackpot playing. If not, a revival performance from the disappointing performance is executed and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has won in the V winning hole 624 is set, but when a game ball has not won in the V winning hole 624. It may also be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) to indicate this. In this case, for example, in this embodiment, the only game ball that can enter the V winning hole 624 is the game ball (for example, one) that is retained by the second retention member 622b, so the second retention member 622b A number counting means for counting the number of game balls retained by the rotary sorting member 621 and a left discharge path 623a and a right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls flowing down from the rotating distribution member 621 can flow down. A detection means for detecting the number of game balls may be provided, and the above-mentioned V non-passing command may be set when the detection means detects the number of game balls counted by the number counting means. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is jammed in the V winning device 620.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the current time is not within the V validity period (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this process ends. By performing the process of S607, if a game ball enters the V winning hole 624 outside the V validity period, that is, if a game is played that illegally puts the game ball into the V winning hole 624, or if the game ball enters the V winning hole 624 outside the V validity period, It is possible to promptly inform the outside that a malfunction has occurred in the member attached to the port 624 (for example, the second retention member 622b).

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), it becomes a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, in this case as well, payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is transmitted (S912).

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power-off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data (S908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S910), and the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances (S911). Next, interrupts are permitted and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 274), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 263), start winning process (see Figure 266), V entrance passage process (see Figure 270), and V passage process (see Figure 271) can be sent to the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275) and various commands set in the small win control process (see FIG. 278) described later are sent to the audio lamp control device 113. . In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, small hit control processing (S1005) is executed. This small hit control process (S1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 278. After that, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S416 or the process of S417 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display according to the variation pattern is The process starts at the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time has elapsed, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) ends, The variable display being executed in the 1 symbol display devices 37a and 37b is finished, and the stop symbol (the 1st symbol ) is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device After the display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S413 or the process of S418 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 268). )do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM 203 stores information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1009), and if the RAM 203 does not store information on the occurrence of a power outage (S1009: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process moves to S1001, and each process from S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting it to the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 275, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the variable winning device 65. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning hole 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) or the process of S1406 of the small hit ending control process (see FIG. 279), which will be described later, is executed to determine whether a jackpot scenario is set. do. In other words, the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the jackpot scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the jackpot scenario is set based on passing a specific area (V prize opening 624) during a small win game. Determine whether it is set. In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1101: No), the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is for jackpot B. It is determined whether or not (S1102).

In the process of S1102, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario of jackpot B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether the specific controlled flag 203ab is on (S1117).

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed and the jackpot control process is ended. The specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG. 276.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that a jackpot scenario other than jackpot B is set (S1102: No), or if it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233ab is on in the process of S1117 (S1117: If Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the opening start is 1, so check whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1 or not. Discern.

In the process of S1104, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the opening start (for jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1104: Yes), the jackpot opening command is executed. settings (S1105), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value that does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value that corresponds to the start of the round (if jackpot scenario a , the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

In the process of S1106, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in the process of S1107 (specific winning opening A specific winning a prize opening solenoid is set to ON so that the opening/closing door 65b of the opening 65a is in an open state), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and this processing is ended.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning a prize opening 65a in this embodiment, when 29 seconds have passed since the specific winning a prize opening 65a has been opened, or after the specific winning a prize opening 65a has been opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, if 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning a prize opening 65a is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is changed to the counter value corresponding to the end of the round currently being executed. The value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 1 (S1110), and this processing ends. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and the system is configured so that it will not be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa and cause the player to perform an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) enter the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the specific winning opening 65a is closed due to a factor that is not associated with the passage of time (updating of the counter value). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). ).

By doing this, operation control that is executed due to factors that are not associated with the passage of time (update of counter value) (for example, operation control that closes a specific prize opening when a predetermined number of balls have won) can be converted into a jackpot scenario. It becomes possible to execute based on Therefore, as a closing condition for the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario, and when a predetermined number of winnings have been won, the operation is controlled not based on the jackpot scenario. This eliminates the need to perform complex control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of making design easier and preventing a situation where both types of motion control are mixed.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to the value corresponding to the end of the round (whether it is the jackpot scenario a or not). If the counter value is 8750), it is determined (S1111).

In the processing of S1111, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S1112 (specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed). The specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the opening/closing door 65b of the opening 65a is in a closed state), and this process is ended. Note that the above-described determination processing from S1106 to S1111 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (Jackpot If it is scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: Yes), an interval command is set (S1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: No), then a jackpot ending control process (S1115) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process that is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, during the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the special symbol fluctuation. .

The details of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is finished, other operation processes based on the scenario are executed (S1116), and the present process ends. Here, as the process of S1116, for example, when drive-controlling the V distribution motor 620a for driving the rotation distribution member 621 based on the jackpot scenario, the operation process of the motor is executed.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 276, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the set scenario is the winning scenario a (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is set (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1204). In the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1204: No), the process directly returns to the jackpot control process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the winning scenario is retained in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether or not there are any game balls (staying balls) (S1206).

In the process of S1206, if it is determined that there is a retained ball in the first retaining member 622d, a winning scenario b is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no ball staying in the first staying member 622d, a winning scenario c is set (S1208) and the process moves to S1209. Thereby, at the end timing of the winning scenario a, the type of the winning scenario set thereafter can be changed depending on whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

In the process of S1209, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210).

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210: Yes), the jackpot scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233ab is set on ( S1212), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210: No), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped, and this process ends.

In the process of S1201, if it is determined that there is no setting for winning scenario a (S1201: No), then it is determined whether there is setting for winning scenario b or c (S1213). In the process of S1213, if it is determined that there is a setting for winning scenario b or c (S1213: Yes), the process moves to S1209. As a result, if the winning scenario a is set, the processing from S1202 to S1208 is executed, and if the winning scenario b or c is subsequently set, the processing from S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing from S1209 is executed. The following can be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that neither winning scenario b nor c has been set (S1213: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 277. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (for jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1301: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (if jackpot scenario a , the counter value is 42000) (S1303). In the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1303: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1303: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1305). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

Next, the jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1307). Then, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), a jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 278, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and is used to set commands to cause the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small win, and to This is a process that controls the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600 attached to the opening 600a and the flow path solenoid 209b. In addition, in this embodiment, since the scenario set during the small winning game is the same as the specific jackpot control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small win control process, first, it is determined whether or not the win scenario a is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is set (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after the addition is performed. Execute (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1404). In the process of S1404, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1404: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the winning scenario is retained in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether or not there are any game balls (staying balls) (S1406).

In the process of S1406, if it is determined that there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b, a winning scenario b is set (S1407), and the process moves to S1409. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no ball staying in the second staying member 622b, a winning scenario c is set (S1408) and the process moves to S1409. Thereby, at the end timing of the winning scenario a, it is possible to set an effect depending on whether or not there is a ball staying in the second staying member 622b.

In the process of S1409, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410).

In the process of S1410, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410: Yes), a small winning ending control process is executed (S1411) and this process ends. Details of this small winning ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 279.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S1401, if it is determined that there is no setting for winning scenario a (S1401: No), then it is determined whether there is setting for winning scenario b or c (S1412). In the process of S1412, if it is determined that there is a setting for winning scenario b or c (S1412: Yes), the process moves to S1409. As a result, if the winning scenario a is set, the processing from S1402 to S1408 is executed, and if the winning scenario b or c is subsequently set, the processing from S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing from S1409 is executed. The following can be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that neither winning scenario b nor c is set (S1412: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the small winning ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 279. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small winning ending control process (S1411). This small hit ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small win control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of an ending (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1501: Yes), a small hit end command is set (S1502) and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (if the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending) , the counter value is 1500) (S1503). In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1503: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1503: Yes), the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process moves to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to on (S1505). In the process of S1505, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is not set to on (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to on (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. Set (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203h and jackpot middle flag 203i are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S1508), and this process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, all small winning games are set as games of one round, so unlike a jackpot scenario in which operation control of a jackpot game is executed, processing for setting a command related to the number of rounds, and an interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the jackpot scenario used in the above-mentioned jackpot game may be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning scenario is configured to be set for the period in which the small winning game is executed, but for example, after the small winning game ends, the small winning scenario is set until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A small win scenario may be set for the period between. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passing valid period until one second has passed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that spans different gaming states using one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning hole 624 in a small winning game, a jackpot game corresponding to a preset jackpot type corresponding to the small winning is executed. Although configured, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning hole 624.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the A1 embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S2018 (see Figure 281). ) is started during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), it executes the power-off process in S2018. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2018 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1514 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process moves to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process moves to S1408.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process moves to S1404. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process moves to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2018, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing in S2018 is executed, so the reason for reaching the processing in S1408 with the power-off flag on is that the current startup processing is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), the interrupt Permission is set (S1411) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1408 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1404 to S1406 and then S1408. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. (S1411), and shifts to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1409 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1404 when the process has reached S1408 from S1404 via the process in S1406. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S2001 was executed (S2001), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S2001 was executed. If not (S2001: No), the process moves to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S2002 to S2012 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S2014 and the command determination process in S2013 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S2013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S2014 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2003 to S2012 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2002 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008, which will be described later (S2003), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2004). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2005 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/production processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, but in order to enhance the production effect, the frame button 22 is This is a process that sets the corresponding effect to be performed when the input is confirmed. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing in S2009, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal presentation execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter update processing of S2011, various counters used in the control processing of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, an update process of effects, etc. is executed.

After the effect update process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S2013). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 282.

Next, the process moves to S2014. In the process of S2014, a variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 284.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off process is executed (S2018). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2019), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: No), the process returns to S2001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . In addition, in this process, when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also decides to start a continuous preview performance.

In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and then sent to the main controller 110. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2101). When a variation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) to be described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2104). If the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2107). Then, when the number of reserved balls command is received (S2107: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command. These are stored in the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively. Note that when the process of S2108 is executed, a display number of reserved balls command is issued to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c. Set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2107, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2107: No), then it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2109). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: Yes), winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2110). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether a winning-related command regarding a big win, a small win, etc. has been received (S2111). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2111: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S2112). This win-related processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but processing based on each command output from the main control device 110 in a big win or a small win is executed. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S2111, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S2115) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transferred to the display control device 114. This is to set the command so that it will be sent to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the winning-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this winning related processing (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, a display jackpot start command is set (S2202). Although omitted, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it executes processes necessary for starting jackpots such as various lamps and sounds. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2203). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S2203: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the received command (S2204). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S2205). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), a display jackpot end command indicating that it is time to end the jackpot is set (S2206). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the small win start command has been received (S2207). If it is determined that the small winning start command has been received (S2207: Yes), a small winning starting command for display indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game is set (S2208). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether the small winning ending command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (S2209: Yes), a small winning ending command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small winning game is set (S2210). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211: Yes), a V entrance passage command for display indicating that the first retention sensor is on is set (S2212). After that, this process ends. The fact that the first retention sensor is on indicates that a game ball has entered the V ball entry port 600a.

If it is determined that the V entrance passing command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the V passing command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V winning hole 624 and a V effect (a effect that displays a character such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81) A display V effect command indicating that it is the timing to execute is set (S2214). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the variable display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2014). This variable display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2221). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2221: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2226. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222), and then, in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2224). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the process of S2225, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2225: No), this fluctuation display is in a state where the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226), and then, in the process of S2006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process moves to S2229. In the process of S2229, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2229). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/production process (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is used to enhance the production effect in the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to cause the player to execute a performance according to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring/production process (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time (SW valid time counter 223g>0) is set (S2301) . As shown in FIG. 235, the SW effective time is automatically changed to the SW effective time at the corresponding timing when the variable pattern effect using the frame button 22 is selected, as shown in FIG. 235. Set. If it is determined that the SW valid time has been set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is updated by subtracting a value corresponding to the elapsed time (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303; Yes), a chance command for display is set based on the set variation pattern and the pressing timing. This display chance command causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute a re-variation (see FIG. 235), or to perform an effect in which a temporary stop display of the swing fluctuation is performed again without being re-varied. The SW valid time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S2301: No), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S2303 (S2303: No). ), the process of S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other SW effect related processes (background change, etc.) are executed.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the first control process example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 286, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S3001) will be explained with reference to FIG. 287. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S3101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S3001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S3101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S3102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing in S3101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S3101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process including steps S3102 and S3102 multiple times, the steps S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the description of FIG. 286. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process (S3002), after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is set so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instructs execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S3003, the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S3004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see S3305 in FIG. 288(b)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image to the RAM 235.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 288(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S3309 in FIG. 288(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first prize opening 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S3005, interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing in S3006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288(a). FIG. 288(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 288(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

In the display setting process (S3303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that the details of this display setting process are the same as the display setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 167 and 168), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

After display setting processing (S3303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S3303) or the simple display setting process (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that the details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 170 and 171), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S3304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 261, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that the details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process of the first control example (see FIG. 172), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S3307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S3302), when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A to D, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete off/off reach) is detected. , chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S3309) is executed, and the process moves to S3304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S3402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S3403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3405), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290(a). FIG. 290(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S3501 is turned on, and the other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3505, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is transferred by the process of S3502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S3504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406), If there is a display stop type command (S3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290(b). FIG. 290(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table is created that corresponds to the stop type information (jackpot A to D, reach outside the front and back, reach outside the front and back, complete miss, chance) indicated by the display stop type command. is determined (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbols displayed after the variable performance are finally set (S3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S3603), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S3602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S3603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, but before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is stored from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S3601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S3602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408), If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 291(a). FIG. 291(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to on, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state ( S3701). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3702), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3701 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3702. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing (S3304), if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3702 is , the type of back image to be displayed at that point in time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified as time passes, and the RAM in which image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. Specify the type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3410), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no error command. If (S3410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S3411) will be described with reference to FIG. 291(b). FIG. 291(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3801, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S3802, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: No), it is then determined whether there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and if there is a hit-related command, it is determined whether there is a hit-related command or not. If (S3412: Yes), the winning related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, details of the win-related command processing (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing this win-related command processing.

In this win-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether there is a jackpot start command for display among the win-related commands (S3901), and if there is a jackpot start command for display. (S3901: Yes), executes the jackpot start command process (S3902), and moves to the process of S3903.

Here, details of the jackpot start command processing (S3902) will be explained with reference to FIG. 293(a). FIG. 293(a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing. This jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot start command processing, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3921, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command processing, in the display setting processing, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3921 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3924. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer through the process of S3922. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233e, and the sprite image data required in the set jackpot start display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 for normal use. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

Further, when this jackpot start command processing is executed, a jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the jackpot start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the reading speed is slow, so the jackpot performance (jackpot start performance, round performance, jackpot end performance) It takes a long time for the image data used for the production to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 at the same time as the jackpot start effect on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command shown in FIG. Waiting time may occur, which may cause players to feel uneasy or anxious about whether or not the game has stopped.

In addition, the display jackpot end command that instructs the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 are finished, so the display jackpot If the image data necessary for the jackpot end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the end command, a lot of waiting time will be required between the end of the round effect and the start of the jackpot end effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the game has stopped or not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the display jackpot start command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. By this time, the transfer of data necessary for the round performance and the jackpot end performance is controlled to be completed. Thereby, when the jackpot start performance ends on the third symbol display device 81, the round performance can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when all the round performances are completed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot end performance can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have to worry about whether the operation has stopped or not. It won't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, the transfer of image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot start performance is completed by the time the variable performance that results in a jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the fluctuating effect that results in a jackpot ends on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot start effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so the player is asked whether the operation has stopped or not. It will not make you feel anxious or uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the winning related commands (S3903), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S3903: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S3904), and the process moves to S3906.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293(b). FIG. 293(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3932).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3931, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3935), the round number command is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command processing.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), then it is determined whether there is a display jackpot end command among the winning related commands (S3905), and the display If there is a special jackpot end command (S3905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process moves to S3907.

Here, details of the jackpot end command processing (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. 294(a). FIG. 294(a) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing. This jackpot end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot end command processing, first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the display jackpot end command is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3941). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3942). Note that the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be able to be determined. Specifically, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set in the process of S3941 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other jackpot end display data tables are set to off. Thereby, by referring to this data table discrimination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in processing such as display setting processing corresponds to the display mode of which jackpot end effect. It can be easily determined whether

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3941, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3945), the jackpot end command is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command processing.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: No), then it is determined whether there is a display small win start command among the winning related commands (S3907), If there is a small winning start command for display (S3907: Yes), small winning start command processing is executed (S3908), and then the process moves to S3909.

Here, details of the small hit start command process (S3908) will be explained with reference to FIG. 294(b). FIG. 294(b) is a flowchart showing small hit start command processing. This small hit start command process is to execute processing corresponding to the display small hit start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the small win start command processing, first, a small win start display data table corresponding to the received display small win start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the small winning start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3951, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3955), the small win start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command process, in the display setting process, the small hit start display set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3954. The drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data is The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set small hit start display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 233. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

Furthermore, when this small win start command process is executed, a small win start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the small hit start effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. . As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, so due to the slow readout speed, small winning effects (small winning start effect, round effect, small winning effect) It takes a lot of time until the image data used for the effect (end effect) is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small hit start effect on the third symbol display device 81 ends, so If the image data necessary for the round performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command indicating the number of rounds, it will be necessary to transfer the image data required for the round performance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur, and the player may feel uneasy about whether the game has stopped or not.

In addition, the display small hit end command that instructs the start of the small hit end effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 are finished, so the display If the image data necessary for the small hit end effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the small hit end command, the data will be transferred from the end of the round effect until the start of the small hit end effect. There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur, and the player may feel uneasy about whether the game has stopped or not.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small hit start command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect is started from there, and the variable display of the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small winning end effect is completed by the time the round effect ends. As a result, when the small hit start effect ends on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and the round effect is completely completed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the small winning end performance can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of jackpot, the transfer of image data used in the small win end effect is started from there. However, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit start performance is controlled to be completed by the time the fluctuating performance that results in a jackpot is completed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the variable performance resulting in a small hit ends on the third symbol display device 81, the small win start performance can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have to stop the operation. It will not make you feel anxious or uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can feel at ease.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3907, if it is determined that there is no display small winning start command (S3907: No), then it is determined whether there is a display small winning end command among the winning related commands (S3909). If there is a display small win end command (S3909: Yes), the small win end command process is executed (S3910), and then the process moves to S3911.

Here, details of the small hit end command processing (S3910) will be explained with reference to FIG. 295(a). FIG. 295(a) is a flowchart showing the small winning end command process. This small hit end command process is to execute processing corresponding to the small win end command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the small win end command processing, first, a small win end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small win end effect indicated by the display small win end command is determined, and the determined small win end display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3962). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small hit end effect, the data table corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the process of S3961 is determined. At the same time as turning on the flag, data table discrimination flags corresponding to other small winning end display data tables are set to off. In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2703, the small win end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which small win end effect. It can be easily determined whether the

Next, based on the small winning end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3961, time data representing the production time is set in the time counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3965), the small win end command is ended, and the process returns to the win related command process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3909, if it is determined that there is no display small winning end command (S3909: No), then it is determined whether there is a display V entrance passing command among the winning related commands (S3911). If there is a V entrance passage command for display (S3911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S3912), and then the process moves to S3913.

Here, details of the V entrance passage command processing (S3912) will be described with reference to FIG. 295(b). FIG. 295(b) is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. This V entrance passage command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V entrance passage command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3972). Note that the display mode of the V entrance passing effect may be made distinguishable. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set in the process of S3971 is turned on, and other V Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table to OFF. As a result, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process etc. It can be easily determined whether the display mode corresponds to the display mode.

Next, based on the V entrance passing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3971, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3973), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3975), the V entrance passage command is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command processing.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 292. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S3911: No), then it is determined whether there is a display V production command among the winning related commands (S3913), If there is a V effect command for display (S3913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3914), and then the winning related command process is ended.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S3914) will be explained with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3981). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3981, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3983), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command processing.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no win-related command (S3412: No), then it is determined whether there is a chance command for display (S3414), and if there is a chance command for display (S3414). :Yes), the chance command process is executed (S3415), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, details of the chance command processing (S3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 291(c). FIG. 291(c) is a flowchart showing chance command processing. This chance command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display chance command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the chance eye command processing, first, a chance eye display data table corresponding to the chance eye display mode indicated by the chance eye command for display is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3851). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3852).

Next, based on the chance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3851, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the chance command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 289. In the process of S3414, if it is determined that there is no chance command (S3414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

In the process of S3401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes). ), the processes of S3402 to S3416 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S3308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown) are selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as variable pattern command processing (see Figure 290(a)) and stop type command processing (see Figure 290(b)), is executed, and other processing is performed. Regarding the command, the process is performed to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

<A2 embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment has an area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed area) compared to the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. They differ in that they have different configurations. Specifically, a sorting device B700 is provided in the right-handed hitting area, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed hitting area, game balls that have flowed down the first channel B701a and into the sorting device B700 are divided into two channels ( It has a configuration for distributing into a second flow path B701b and a third flow path B701c).

Next, the sorting device B700 provided in the right-handed play area of the game board 13 of the A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

FIG. 298 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the right-handed play area of the game board 13. The ball fired into the right-handed hitting area and flowing down the first channel B701a passes through the sorting device B700 and is sorted into the second channel B701b or the third channel B701c. The detailed configuration of this sorting device B700 will be explained with reference to FIG. 114, which will be described later, but the balls flowing down the first flow path B701a are divided into the second flow path B701b and the third flow path B701c by 3: It is configured to be distributed at a rate of 1. With this configuration, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a, it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls. , it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, at least one out of four balls flowing into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third channel 701c, so when playing a normal game in which multiple game balls are continuously launched, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701b is configured so that the ball that has flown down can flow down to an area where it can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701c is configured so that the ball that has flown down can enter the V ball entry port 600a. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the second flow path B701b passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V ball entrance 600a. The ball flows into (enters) the ball. On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, it is configured to flow down to an area where it can pass through the through gate 67.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701c is configured to always enter the V ball entry port 600a, but other than that, the ball flows out from the third flow path B701c. For example, a distribution member (such as a nail or a distribution device) for distributing the downward direction of the balls may be provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701c and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 It may be configured such that only a part of the balls flowing out from the third flow path B701c enters the V ball entry port 600a when the ball is open.

With this configuration, out of the game balls that are distributed regularly (at a ratio of 3:1) by the distribution device B700, game balls that flow into the V ball entrance 600a can be irregularly generated. Therefore, while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be fired continuously in order to let the game ball enter the V ball entrance 600a.

Next, the structure of the sorting device B700 that sorts the inflowing balls into two channels will be explained with reference to FIGS. 299(a) to (d). 299(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of the distribution device B700, and FIGS. 114(c) and (d) are diagrams showing the distribution of the ball under flow in the first channel B701a. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship with device B700.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), the sorting device B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable around an axis, and is arranged in four directions (four directions at 90 degree intervals) of the rotating body. Blade members (first blade member B700a, second blade member B700b) that can come into contact with the ball are provided. The first blade member B700a has a flat shape so that the balls flowing down to the sorting device B700 flow down to the third flow path B701c (so that they flow down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the sorting device B700). The second blade member B700b is arranged so that the balls flowing down to the sorting device 700 flow down to the second flow path B701b (so that they flow down directly below the rotating body of the sorting device B700). It is constructed in the shape of a flat plate.

In this embodiment, since a rotating body having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used as the distribution device B700, the number of balls to be distributed to the second flow path B701b and the third flow are The configuration is such that the number of pitches distributed to path B 701c is at a ratio of 3:1. Furthermore, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting device B700, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating using a detection sensor (not shown). As a result, an act has been carried out in which the sorting device B700 is illegally modified and the balls that have flowed into the channel unit B720 are caused to flow down only to one channel (the second channel B701b or the third channel B701c). can be easily distinguished.

Next, the arrangement relationship between the first flow path B701a and the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299(c) and (d). FIG. 299(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second blade member B700b is located within the flow path. When a ball flows down the first flow path B701a in this state, the ball contacts the second blade member B700b and is distributed to the third flow path B701c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the ball rotates 90 degrees (rotates 90 degrees downward) along the flow direction of the ball (downward in FIG. 299(c)), and the first blade member B700a moves into the flow path. It will be located inside.

When two balls pass through the sorting device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299(c), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299(d) (the state in which the first blade member B700a is located in the flow path). do.

In this way, by bringing the balls flowing down the sorting device B700 into contact with the blade members provided on the rotating body, the flowing direction of the balls can be changed, and by using a configuration in which the rotating body is rotated, the balls can be Each time the ball passes, the rotating body rotates and the blade member that can come into contact with the ball can be changed, so the balls can be reliably sorted.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sorting device B700 is provided in the right-handed hitting area, and the flow path (third flow path 701c) through which a ball can enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the V ball entrance 600a Since the game balls are distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701b) in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, the V ball entrance In order to reliably enter the game ball into the ball 600a, it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls, so it is possible to suppress games in which a game ball is fired single-shot, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. .

In addition, at least one out of four balls flowing into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third channel 701c, so when playing a normal game in which multiple game balls are continuously launched, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open.

In the A2 embodiment described above, a configuration including the sorting device B700 is used in order to suppress the game in which game balls are fired single-shot, but other configurations may be used. A delay means is provided in the right-handed hitting region to make the falling period of the game ball irregular so that the period from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the V-ball entrance 600a is irregular, and the game ball is fired. A configuration may be used in which a game in which a game ball is fired single shot is suppressed by making it difficult to easily grasp the period from when the game ball is fired until the ball reaches the V entry port 600a, or a configuration in which multiple game balls are fired in succession In order to prevent the game ball from reaching the V-input ball opening 600a unless the game ball flows down, a retention means is provided for retaining the game ball in the right-handed hitting area for a predetermined period of time, and when the game ball is retained in the retention means, , it may be configured such that the subsequent game balls collide with the staying game balls and flow into the channel where the balls can enter the V ball entry port 600a.

In this embodiment, the distribution device B700 is configured to distribute one out of every four balls to the third channel 701, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other ratios may be used. The dividing device B700 may be configured with a windmill or the like to distribute the information at random rates.

<A3th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 300 and 301. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in this A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment has an area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed area) compared to the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. They differ in that they have different configurations. Specifically, the difference is that a croon member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed hitting area, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, by providing the croon member 1700, the flow of the game ball is delayed and the game ball flows down the inside of the croon member 1700 as a path for the game ball flowing down the right-handed area, and reaches the V winning door 600. and a normal path that flows down the outside (right side) of the croon member 1700 and flows down to the V winning door 600.

With this configuration, even after the player stops firing the game balls, the game balls flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600.

Here, for example, if the player determines the small win type and a small win of a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player occurs, fraud such as refraining from firing the game ball to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the V winning door 600 is performed. I can think of games. In this case, the damage to the game parlor increases because no V-wins occur due to the small winning game, which is disadvantageous for the player.

In contrast, with the above-described configuration, even if the player stops firing the game ball after determining the type of small win, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the croon member 1700 (delay path) will reach the V winning door 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a V-win does not occur due to a small winning game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, the timing at which the fired game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a (that is, to allow the game ball to enter even if the game ball flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch the game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the performance of the game.

Here, details of the croon member 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. 301. The croon member 1700 has a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710a in the upper portion into which a game ball flowing down the right-hand hitting area enters. This ball entry portion 1710a is an opening slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12 mm).

A spiral flow path 1710d is formed inside the croon member 1700 to allow the game balls that have entered the ball entry portion 1710a to spirally flow down along the inner wall of the croon member 1700. A bottom portion 1710c is formed which is gently sloped toward the center in the shape of a mortar. The spiral flow path 1710d is configured so that the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a flows downward in a spiral manner along the inner circumferential surface of the bottom portion 1710c so that the game ball enters the ball entry portion 1710a toward the outer end of the bottom portion 1710c. There is. The bottom surface portion 1710c has the same shape as the bottom surface of the already known Kroon, and guides the game ball gradually toward the center while causing the game ball to move circularly along the inner periphery of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b, which is slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, 12 mm in diameter), is configured to protrude downward in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, inside the ball outlet 1710b, a spiral flow path is formed by a 0.5 mm protruding flow path wall, and the game ball rotates spirally inside the ball outlet 1710b to the outside of the ball exit 1710b. configured to be ejected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the spiral flow path 1710d is formed inside the croon member 1710, but the structure is not limited to this, and the spiral flow path 1710d may not be provided, or the croon-shaped bottom surface It is also possible to form only the spiral flow path 1710d without forming the spiral flow path 1710d. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 1710d, a deceleration portion made of a material with a high friction coefficient or the like that decelerates the downward speed of the game ball may be formed. Any one may be selected as long as it delays the falling of the game ball.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the Croon member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner circumferential wall of the Croon member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and is guided to the bottom portion 1710c. The game ball guided to the bottom part 1710c is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710b while making a circular motion on the bottom part 1710c from the outer circumferential side to the center. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710b is slightly larger than the game ball, and due to the spiral flow path formed inside, the game ball rotates spirally inside the ball outlet 1710b that protrudes downward. At the same time, the ball is discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. With this configuration, the game ball that enters the ball entry portion 1710a of the croon member 1700 is configured to take approximately 6 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b.

Here, in this embodiment, the time from when the small winning type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the user refrains from launching a new game ball after the small winning type is displayed, the game ball that has been flowing down inside the croon member 1700 with a delay will flow down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent game in which the player refrains from firing the game ball after determining the type of small win, thereby preventing the occurrence of V winnings due to the small win game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the small winning variation time is configured such that a larger number of variation times shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700 (delay path) are selected. There is. As a result, the game ball that enters the ball entry part 1710a of the croon member 1700 before the small winning variable presentation (or during the variable presentation), the small winning variable presentation ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. Depending on the timing, the ball can be easily ejected from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of game balls into the V-ball entry port 600a, thereby suppressing fraudulent games, and also makes it easier for game balls to enter the V-ball entry port 600a during normal games. , it is possible to improve the player's interest. It should be noted that a variable time shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700 (delay path) may naturally be configured to be difficult to select.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of variable times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) are selected as the small winning variable time. Therefore, it becomes difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and to let the game ball enter the V ball entrance 600a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V ball entrance 600a changes greatly depending on which of the delay path and the normal path the game ball flows down in the right-handed hitting area. Therefore, it is possible to make it even more difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the performance of the game.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and it may be only a fluctuation time shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700, or it may be only a long fluctuation time. Of course it's good.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing two routes, the delay route and the normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball will arrive at the V ball entrance 600a. Of course, three or more routes may be provided.

As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, by providing the croon member 1700 on the upper part of the V winning door 600 (V ball entrance 600a), the game ball flowing down the right-handed hitting area can be prevented from entering the V ball entrance 600a. A delay route and a normal route with different flow times are provided as routes for entering the ball.

This delay route allows the game balls flowing down the delay route to reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops firing the game balls. That is, even if the player stops firing the game ball after determining the type of small hit, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the croon member 1700 (delay path) will enter the V ball entrance 600a. become. Thereby, it is possible to suppress illegal games in which the player discriminates the small winning type and prevents the game ball from entering the V ball entry opening 600a during a small winning game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the fired game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, in order to ensure that the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a (that is, to allow the game ball to enter even if the game ball flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch the game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which a game ball is fired in a single shot, and it is possible to improve the performance of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the time for the game ball to flow down the croon member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small winning type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened. are doing. Therefore, even if the firing of new game balls is stopped after the small winning type is displayed, the game balls that have been flowing down inside the croon member 1700 with a delay will flow down to the V winning door 600. Thereby, it is possible to prevent illegal games by stopping the firing of game balls after the player determines the type of small winning and preventing the occurrence of V winnings due to small winning games that are disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the small winning variation time is configured such that a larger number of variation times shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700 (delay path) are selected. There is. As a result, the game ball that enters the ball entry part 1710a of the croon member 1700 before the small winning variable presentation (or during the variable presentation), the small winning variable presentation ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. Depending on the timing, the ball can be easily ejected from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of game balls into the V-ball entry port 600a, thereby suppressing fraudulent games, and also makes it easier for game balls to enter the V-ball entry port 600a during normal games. , it is possible to improve the player's interest.

<A4th embodiment>
Next, the A4th embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. In the A4th embodiment, in contrast to the A1 embodiment, a sorting device 720 for distributing game balls is disposed in the right channel of the variable display unit 80, so that the balls flowing down the right channel are alternately distributed. After the fluctuation of the special symbol determined to be a small hit or jackpot is stopped and displayed in one of the channels to be distributed, a gate that starts the small win or jackpot game is placed, and the ball is placed in the right channel. The difference is that the ball can enter the V winning device 620 at the start of a small win or a jackpot by continuing to shoot the ball. Since the other configurations are the same, the other configurations will be omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. In the present A4 embodiment, a sorting device 720 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600. The sorting device 720 has a ball entry port 720c in the upper part into which a ball flowing down the right channel can enter, with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and the ball that has passed through the ball entry port 720c is When the balls flow down, they rotate left and right and are configured to alternately distribute the balls flowing down into a left flow path 720d and a right flow path 720e. A starting gate 720a configured with a photosensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is arranged at the lower end of the right channel 720e. The configuration is such that the start of a small winning game or a jackpot game is set when a ball passes through this starting gate 720a. In this way, in the second embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been determined to be a small hit or a jackpot stops, the ball passes through the starting gate 720a without transitioning to the small winning game or the jackpot game. The execution of a small winning game or a big winning game is in a standby state until the passage passes.

The sorting rotation member 720b receives the entered game balls in a left storage part or a right storage part arranged on the left and right sides. When a game ball is received in the left storage section, the distribution rotation member 720b rotates counterclockwise in front view due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left channel 720d. Here, the distribution rotation member 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left storage section and the right storage section.

On the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 720, a base-side magnet is arranged at a position where the magnet of the sorting rotation member 720b is on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotation member 720b and the base-side magnet are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet is constituted by a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip. The base side magnet is arranged and fixed so that its tip portion faces toward the distribution rotation member 720b.

The magnet is also a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720b so that the tip thereof faces toward the base-side magnet. The distribution rotating member 720b rotates, and the base is moved to a position where the boundary wall between the left storage section and the right storage section is directly above (on the center line of the interval that allows approximately one game ball to enter at the passage opening). This is the position where the side magnet and the magnet of the distribution rotation member are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that their polarities are the same (for example, N-pole and N-pole), they repel and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotation member faces directly upward. There is no rotation, and it is maintained in a rotated position to either the left or right.

As a result, when the distributing rotation member 720b is in a position where the magnet is on the center line of the passage opening (a position above), the magnet and the base side magnet repel each other, so that the distributing rotation member 720b can be moved to the left or right. Then, either the left accommodating part or the right accommodating part faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives game balls entering the distribution device 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entered game balls from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left storage section and the right storage section and causing a ball jam.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet and the base-side magnet, for example, the left storage section receives the game ball and rotates approximately 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the left flow path 720d, and then the distribution rotation is performed. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating clockwise (with the left accommodating portion facing upward). As a result, after the game balls are guided to the left flow path 720d, the right storage section faces upward, and the game balls that enter the distribution device 720 are received by the right storage section, and the game balls are received by the right storage section. The distribution rotating member 720b rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the right channel 720e. In this way, the sorting rotation member 720b can alternately guide game balls entering the sorting device 720 to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed and guided to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e.

After being sorted into the right channel 720e by the sorting rotation member 720b, the balls that have passed through the ball entrance 720c are transferred to the left side channel 720d as the sorting rotation member 720b rotates to the left. Can be sorted. Once distributed to the left flow path 720d, the ball is guided to a flow path where the ball can enter the V-ball entry port 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, a small win or jackpot game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state, so the balls that are then distributed to the left channel enter the V ball entrance 600a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds one second after the start timing of the jackpot game in the small win or jackpot B (timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720a). Here, since the firing device fires 100 balls at the same interval per minute, each ball is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the balls are continuously fired into the right side area, the game balls will be discharged from the left flow path 720d approximately 0.6 seconds after passing through the start gate 720a (distribution device The flow path is formed so that the time for the balls to flow down is the same in the left flow path 720d and the right flow path 720e of 720).

Since the time required for the ball to flow from the lower end of the left flow path 720d to the V-ball entrance 600a is approximately 0.1 seconds, the ball will flow down before the V-winning door 600 is opened, and then , since the V winning door 600 is open, the ball discharged from the left channel 720d (1.2 seconds after being first discharged from the left channel 720d) can win the V ball entrance 600a. Become. Moreover, the next ball ejected from the left flow path 720d can also be won in the V ball entrance 600a.

In this way, a small winning game in which the ball passes through the start gate 720a, the ball launch is stopped, the small winning type is confirmed on the first symbol display device 37, and the jackpot type with the least number of time savings is selected. Even if you try to avoid winning the ball into the V winning hole 624 in , the number of balls that can be won is limited to 2 balls even if you shoot them continuously, and even if you shoot after checking, the ball will not be allowed to win into the V winning hole 600a. It is difficult.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the game ball which passed through the left side flow path 720d was configured to be able to enter into the V ball entry port 600a, the game ball which passed through the right side flow path 720e was configured to be able to enter. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that game balls that do not enter the sorting device 720 among the game balls flowing down the right channel can enter the ball.

Furthermore, although the sorting device 720 in this embodiment is configured to alternately sort out the entered game balls, the sorting rotating member 720b may be configured with a windmill or the like so as to randomly sort them left and right. .

<About the electrical configuration in the A4 embodiment>
The A4th embodiment differs from the A1th embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as the first control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the A4th embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this A4th control is different from the A1th embodiment in that a conditional device flag 203ac is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The conditional device flag ac is a flag indicating that the starting gate 720a has been passed. This is a flag that is referenced when the power is restored in the event of a power outage or the like to determine whether the vehicle has passed through the start gate 720a. It is set off based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306 and FIGS. 308 to 309, the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit or a big win B in this embodiment is determined will be described.

FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing a timing chart of the contents controlled by the main control device 110 and the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when passing through the V winning hole 624 in a small winning game. It is.

When the win/fail determination is executed from the state where the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a small hit is determined, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device begin to display the third symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner. be done. When the fluctuation starts, the words "Roulette Chance Start" are displayed as shown in FIG. 304(a). Three seconds later, as shown in FIG. 304(b), the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner, and the roulette display starts. In the roulette display, an arrow pattern is displayed on the left side, and depending on the roulette pattern that stops at the arrow position, a "V" pattern is displayed that indicates the win/fail judgment result (big hit, miss, small win) and the winning in the V winning slot 624. A "BIG" symbol indicating that the jackpot game has started even though the player did not win a prize, and a "skull and crossbones" symbol indicating that the player has lost the prize are placed in the V winning opening 624. Thereafter, during the special symbol variation time, the roulette display is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 305(a). After that, as shown in FIG. 305(b), when the fluctuation period has passed and the fluctuation of the third symbol has stopped, the scrolling (rotating display) of the roulette display is displayed in slow motion, and the right-hand hit notification symbol is displayed in the upper left. The player is notified that it is the right-handed hitting period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306(a), at the timing when a game ball enters the V winning hole 624, the position of the "V" symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at a position that matches the arrow symbol. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 624, if the winning/failure judgment result is wrong at the timing when the V validity period has passed, the “skull and crossbones” pattern will be displayed as shown in FIG. 306(b). The display stops when the position matches the arrow pattern. Although not shown, if the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 624 and the winning/failure determination result is a jackpot (jackpot B), the "BIG" symbol will stop at the position where it matches the arrow symbol. It is announced that the game that is displayed and actually being executed is a jackpot game.

With this configuration, whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot or a small win can be determined by a series of effects until the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning hole 624 has elapsed, and the period until the V winning can be determined. You can improve the interest of the game by using it to create a performance.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311. In the A1 embodiment, after the special symbol variation period has passed, if the judgment result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is started 0.1 seconds later, but in this embodiment, the game ball hits the starting gate 720a. They are different in that the jackpot game starts when they pass. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the A1 embodiment will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 310, special symbol variation processing 2 (S140) in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes from S217 to S220 are deleted from the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment, and the condition device determination process (S250) is added. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 311, the condition device determination process (S250) in the A4th embodiment will be described. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of this condition device determination process (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, and condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this process is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, so the jackpot game can be started according to the player's intention.

Further, in this embodiment, only the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, but a small win game may also be started by passing through the start gate 720a. . With this configuration, the game ball that passes through the start gate 720a can easily enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the game ball can be avoided by avoiding the game ball from entering a specific small winning game type. It can be difficult to fire.

Further, in this embodiment, the start gate 720a is provided in the left flow path 720e, but the starting gate 720a is not limited thereto, and may be provided in the right flow path 720d. In the case of this configuration, the ball can enter the V ball entrance 600a from the time the game ball passes the start gate 720a until the V winning door 600 is opened. It may be configured such that the period is as follows. With this configuration, in the small winning game, the game ball can be entered into the V ball entrance 600a, and the gaming method of avoiding winning of the game ball in a specific small winning type can be suppressed.

<A5th embodiment>
Next, the A5th embodiment and its modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314. In the A1 embodiment, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 in the V prize winning device 620 was always constant, but in this embodiment, the control of the rotation distribution member 621 was configured to be changed in the case of a jackpot B. They differ in some respects.

FIG. 312(a) shows that jackpot B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, a game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a, and the game ball is guided to the rotary distribution member 621 by the movable guiding member 622. FIG. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotary distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (the position where the game ball is guided to the V winning hole 624).

Moreover, FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the contents of specific jackpot control processing 3 (S1118) in the present A5th embodiment. The difference is that the processing of S1281 to S1282 is added to the specific jackpot control processing (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted.

In the process of S1203, after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed, the process of S1281 is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether it is the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (the solenoid that opens and closes the V winning door 600) (S1281). If it is determined that it is the timing to turn off the V winning solenoid (S1281: Yes), data for stopping the V distribution motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the winning scenario a (S1282). Thereafter, the process moves to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process moves to S1204.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot B, the rotating distribution member is configured to stop at the center position in accordance with the timing of the V winning prize, so that the game that was thought to be a small winning game It is possible to provide a fresh presentation to the audience. Furthermore, since it is possible to make the player win the jackpot B without fail in the V winning hole 624, it is possible to make it seem as if the 2nd round has started by winning the prize in the V winning hole 624.

Next, a modification of the A5th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312(b). In the A5 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of jackpot B, but the control is not limited to this, and in the case of jackpot B without changing the control of the rotation distribution member 621, The confirmed flow path 660 newly protrudes, the movable guiding member 622 releases the retention 2 solenoid at an intermediate position, the game ball falls onto the movable guiding member 622, and the determined flow path 660 moves to the V prize opening 624 for playing the game. They differ in that they are configured to guide the ball. The definite channel 660 is configured to be projected by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning hole 624 with high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of specific jackpot control processing 4 (S1118) in a modified example of the A5th embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so their explanation will be omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the winning scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the determined flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guide member 622. The position is changed to a position where the game ball to be played can be received on the upper surface (S1283). After that, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the retention 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of a jackpot B, the player can enter the V winning hole 624 via a different guide path than in the case of a small win. Thereby, the winning control to the V winning hole can be switched between the case of a small win and the case of a big win B, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The phrase "at the start (at the time of execution) of a jackpot (jackpot game)" used when explaining each of the control examples and embodiments described above means that the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is won and the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept to indicate the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is confirmed, and specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. This concept includes timing, timing at which a jackpot opening period starts, and timing at which a jackpot round game starts.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in explaining each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept to indicate the timing at which the jackpot game ends, and is specifically is a concept that includes the timing at which the final round of the jackpot ends, the timing at which the ending period of the jackpot ends, and the timing at which the first special symbol lottery is performed after the end of the jackpot.

For each wording used in such a concept, if a specific timing is not specified in each of the control examples and embodiments described above, the configuration is such that one of the timings described above is adopted as appropriate. It's okay.

The configurations of the pachinko machine 10 described in each of the control examples and embodiments described above may be combined as appropriate. For example, the fall lottery means for executing the fall lottery used in the second control example described above may be implemented. The pachinko machine 10 having the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the third control example described above.

In addition, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that, It may be used to shift (fall) the content set for the element, for example, to shift (fall) the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) from a high probability state to a low probability state. It may also be configured to perform a lottery for changing the time saving state to a normal state (falling down).

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation means, for example, Photographing results of lever-shaped operating means that the player can operate in the front and rear directions, touch sensor operating means that detects contact (or proximity) of the player, and photographing means that photographs the player's movements. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which various performances are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the various effects described above using , the player may be able to select the performance to be actually executed from two or more executable performances.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example of the present invention will be explained with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the same elements as those in each control example and each embodiment described above will be repeatedly explained for convenience of explanation. Similar to the A1 embodiment described above (see FIG. 226), the gaming machine of the sixth control example uses a special symbol lottery as an opportunity to execute a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The first opportunity is to win a small win and execute a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game). A trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in a V winning device 650 (see FIG. 315) that is opened and operated ).

With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide jackpot games to players at various opportunities, and therefore it is possible to provide games with improved gameplay. Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the lottery with the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be easier to win a small hit than the lottery with the first special symbol (special symbol 1). And, during the time saving state which is a gaming state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, it is configured so that the special drawing 2 lottery is more likely to be executed. Thereby, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game than when the normal state is set. That is, in the normal state, the lottery for special drawing 1 is mainly executed, whereas in the time saving state, the lottery for special drawing 2 is mainly executed, making it easier to establish the second opportunity described above. . Therefore, since the time saving state can be made into a gaming state advantageous to the player, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in this sixth control example, in the state where the normal state is set, it is configured such that a period during which the lottery of the special drawing 2 is more likely to be executed can be made to appear temporarily. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 315, but when a specific win (long open win) is won by the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is activated for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to open the ball and set a period during which it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port (winning port) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special drawing 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible for players who are playing games in the normal state to execute the special drawing 2 lottery, so they can play the game without having to execute the special drawing 2 drawing (without shifting to the time-saving state). You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a continuation condition (termination condition) of the time saving state that is set after the end of the jackpot game, at least the first condition (for example, executing the special figure 2 variation 5 times during the time saving state, or executing the small winning game end) and a second condition that makes it easier to continue the time-saving state (difficult to end) than the first condition (for example, when the special figure fluctuation (total of special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation) is set to 99% during the time-saving state) It is configured such that it is possible to set the number of executions or the end of the small winning game. Then, in the case where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and the case where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving condition, the time saving The setting ratios of the state continuation conditions (termination conditions) are different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, it is better to finish the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. The configuration is such that a continuation condition (termination condition) that makes it easy for the time saving state to continue (difficult to end) is easily set.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in this sixth control example, as described above, the gaming state (normal state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player than the gaming state (time saving state) that is set. The configuration is such that when is set, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is easier to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in this sixth control example, a maximum of four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be stored and stored, and the lottery result of the final fluctuation of the special symbol 2 in the time saving state is shown. The player is configured to inform the player of the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which is stored on hold using a variable performance. In other words, as a performance result of the variable performance executed during the time-saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the gaming state has transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state The system is configured to notify the result of the lottery (for the winning information of the special drawing 2 that has been stored on hold at the time of transition). By configuring this way, if the performance result of the variable performance is a performance result that indicates a win (for example, a small win), it is possible to check whether the current small win was won in a time-saving state or under the normal state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won the prize.

In addition, as described above, in this sixth control example, a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed via a small win game in a case where a small win is won in the time saving state and a case where a small win is won in the normal state. ), the ease of continuation of the time-saving state that is set after the end of the time-saving state is different, and specifically, if you win a small win in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state, it is easier to continue the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is easier to set continuation conditions (termination conditions) that make it easier for the time-saving state to continue (difficult to end) than if you win a small win in the 2nd lottery, and furthermore, after transitioning to the normal state. If the look-ahead result corresponding to the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed is a determination result that a small win will be won in which the time-saving state is likely to continue, in a variation effect that shows the lottery result of the final variation of the special drawing 2 in the time-saving state. , is configured to notify the pre-reading result (pre-reading result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state).

By configuring this way, when it is announced that a small win has been won due to the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the proportion of the won small win that is likely to continue in the time saving state is determined. can be increased. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, Pachinko machine 10), in order to improve the health of the game, the percentage of game states that are advantageous to the player (for example, time saving state and variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game. There are some games that suppress the gambling nature of games by setting the so-called continuation rate low (for example, 65% or less). In such gaming machines, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a jackpot or a small win) while an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state may be changed again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem in that it is difficult to create expectations for the winning notification performance during the advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, in the win notification performance (variable performance) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), a win (small win) that is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) In addition to the above notification, if you win a small win that makes it easier to continue in a time-saving state based on the pre-read results of the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed after the transition from an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) to a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), you will be notified in advance. The configuration is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, when a winning notification performance is executed during an advantageous gaming state (time saving state), it is possible to increase the winning percentage of a small win in which the time saving state is likely to continue, and players' expectations regarding the winning notification performance during an advantageous gaming state. It can enhance the feeling.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), or the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state (after transitioning to the normal state) (residual feature existing at the time of transition to the normal state) It is configured such that a variation performance is executed that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 has won the small hit. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this sixth control example, by the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period of the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, after the end of the time saving state (after transition to the normal state) It is configured to also notify the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 pending that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) that is executed during the transition to the normal state. The variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 pending that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short-time variation is ended. Until then, the display results of the variable effects executed in response to the final variable period of the time saving state are displayed. In this way, the final variation of the time saving state and the special figure 2 variation that is executed after the end of the time saving state (after transitioning to the normal state) (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the residual special figure 2 reservation that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) By executing a series of effects using the period in which , is executed, and displaying the effect results of the series of effects across multiple variations, it is possible to determine which special figure variation this series of effects corresponds to. It is possible to make it difficult for players to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is being announced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a front view of the game board 13 in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example has a variable display unit 80 different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the A1 embodiment described above (see FIG. 227). The game area formed on the left side (left side game area) is also provided with a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 that is a trigger for drawing a normal symbol (second symbol), and is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The V-winning slot 600a, the V-winning door 600, and the flow path through which the ball that enters the V-winning slot 600a flows down are removed from the gaming area (right side gaming area) where the ball enters the V-winning slot 600a. The difference is that a variable winning device 65 and a V winning device 650, which are opened when a jackpot or small winning is won, are arranged downstream of the right side gaming area. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the left side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, in this sixth control example, the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left side game area (left side of the variable display unit 80). Thereby, even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down into the left side game area, the lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is executed. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, if a specific normal symbol is won while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, It is configured so that a game with a common symbol that allows a ball to easily enter the second prize opening 640 is executed.

In this way, by providing a period (state) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second prize opening 640 during the normal state, it is possible to use the special drawing 2 lottery without having to shift the gaming state to the time-saving state. It is possible to provide the player with a game feature, that is, a game feature that allows the player to execute a jackpot game based on a small win win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing a game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the gameplay using the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, there is a game that aims to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is executed based on a ball entering the first prize opening 64, and a game that aims for a jackpot when a ball enters the through gate 67. Since the game aiming at a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the passing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed at the same time, the interest of the game in the normal state can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be described. In this sixth control example, similarly to the A1 embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the special drawing 2 lottery is more likely to be executed (the second prize that triggers the special drawing 2 drawing is Since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the opening 640), a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right side gaming area where the second winning opening 640 is arranged is performed.

In this sixth control example, a through gate 67, a second winning hole 640 (electric accessory 640a), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right side game area, and a lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is provided. A game in which a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn, and a game in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) can be executed as a right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the ball launch direction (left side game area direction, right side game area direction) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game, and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the direction in which the ball is launched in a complicated manner, and to play the game comfortably. In addition, in this sixth control example, when a gaming state (time saving state, small winning gaming state, jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player is set than when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Since the configuration is such that the player is forced to play the right-handed game, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed, and is a V winning device that can be changed between an open state where a ball can be won in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state where it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650b. This V-winning door 650b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the V-winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball cannot be fired by a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, there is a specific area (V area) not shown inside the V winning hole 650a, and the ball that won the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game ends). The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed when the player passes through a specific area (V area).

Note that the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a common technique well known in the art, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. As shown in the figure, a plurality of channels through which balls can pass may be provided in the V winning device 650, and only the balls that have passed through a specific channel can pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the downward direction of the balls flowing down inside the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, or a distribution member that is operated in advance according to a predetermined rule after the start of a jackpot game. A sorting member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule, or a sorting member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after a certain number of rounds of jackpot games have been started, and the games are sorted by the sorting member. It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area).

Furthermore, there are multiple types of small winning games that are executed when a small winning is won, such as a small winning game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. It may be configured such that the type of small winning to be executed and the type of small winning in which a small winning game is executed in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area) can be set. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed depending on the type of small winning won, and when playing a small winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area (V area), the V winning door 650a is It is configured such that an opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for balls to enter is set, and balls are distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the right timing. In addition, as a small winning game executed based on a small winning winning, a small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and not the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a jackpot game, and has a winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a. have. This winning door 65b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball fired in the right-handed game is The upper surface of the winning door 65b is configured such that it flows down toward the out port 66 direction.

<About the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be explained. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 316, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, The configuration is such that one of the following (high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

Then, when a left-handed game is played during the normal state and a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, a description will be given of the setting contents of the time saving state that is set when the special drawing 1 jackpot is won during the normal state. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to Figure 335, but if you win a special lottery jackpot during the normal state, one of the three jackpot types will be set, and for each jackpot type. Different time-saving termination conditions are specified. The time saving end condition is a condition for ending the time saving state, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

If you win the special pattern 1 jackpot in the normal state, as shown in Figure 316, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are 99 times. The jackpot type (jackpot AA) for which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of changes of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 is set at a rate of 1%. The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (jackpot AC) that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 1 is set. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special map 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time-saving state will always be set after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the set jackpot type, the ease of continuation of the time-saving state (time-saving end) conditions) are different.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this sixth control example, since it is configured so that a maximum of four pieces of winning information of special drawing 2 can be stored and stored, one time reduction is set as the time reduction end condition. Even in this case, the time saving state is set while the first special figure 2 variation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 variation stops), and the electric accessory 640a is easy to open. Since it is in the state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special drawing 2 on hold. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition for one time saving is set, the winning information of special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 pending) will be held and stored during the period when special drawing 2 variation is executed once during the time saving state. By playing the game that causes the player to move, the special figure 2 variation after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state can be executed up to four times. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won, a large number of special drawing 2 drawings can be executed, making it easier for the player to experience a jackpot game via a small jackpot win.

On the other hand, if you win a special small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery during the normal state (small winning probability 1/500), it will be executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area) during the small winning game. After the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( The small winning type (small winning AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small winning type (small winning AB) in which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. The small winning type (small winning AC) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 1 is set at a ratio of 50%. It is composed of

As mentioned above, in this sixth control example, when a jackpot is won (a symbol jackpot is won) and a small jack is won by the special drawing 1 lottery executed with the normal state set, When a ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game and a jackpot game is executed (V jackpot), or when a jackpot game is executed due to any trigger, the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, the ease of continuation of the time saving state is changed depending on the execution trigger of the jackpot game. There is. As mentioned above, among the execution opportunities of the jackpot game, in the case of an execution opportunity that is easy to occur (jackpot winning by special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of times the time saving state that is set after the jackpot game continues is 2.58 times, In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to establish (small winning by special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is 12.4 times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of opportunities to execute a jackpot game, by associating the ease of establishing an execution opportunity with the ease of continuation of an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) that can be set after establishment, it is possible to Even if a jackpot game is executed due to an execution opportunity, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player.

In this sixth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is configured to be executed even while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed. , the probability is 1/10 that the winning pattern is won. Then, the configuration is such that a game for winning a regular pattern (long opening game) is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 of winning for a winning pattern for a regular pattern. There is. In other words, a state is set in which the special pattern 2 lottery can be executed with a probability of about 1/1000 of the regular pattern lottery executed while the normal state is set (long open winning game).

When a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game, the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, the flow of the game when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state will be explained with reference to FIG. 316. In this sixth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery. If you win a jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery, the time will be shortened if the number of changes of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the number of changes of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackpot AD to AF) for which the end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 335). In other words, in the normal state, between the Tokuzu 1 lottery and Tokuzu 2 lottery, which have the same jackpot probability, it is difficult to trigger the execution of the Tokuzu 2 lottery (difficult to place a ball in the corresponding starting prize opening). The configuration is such that it is easier to set a time-saving state in which the time-saving termination condition is difficult to satisfy after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, when a player wins a winning lottery in a general drawing and a long open winning game is executed (1/1000), it is possible to motivate the player to execute the special drawing 2 drawing. can.

Next, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state. In this control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 drawing (approximately 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small winning in the special drawing 1 drawing (1/500). (See Figure 334). Then, after the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area) during the small win game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 times, the small win type (small win AE) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied is 60%. It is configured so that it is set at a ratio of . In other words, in the normal state, the average number of times the time-saving state that is set via the small winning of the special drawing 2 lottery is continued is 42.6 times, and the jackpot game is executed via the small winning of the special drawing 1 drawing in the normal state. It becomes easier to set a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to satisfy (easier to continue).

In this way, in a game in the normal state, although the probability is low, you win a jackpot in the regular drawing lottery, and when a long open winning game is executed (1/1000), it is more likely than winning a jackpot in the special drawing drawing. By configuring the system so that it is easy to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can play the game aiming for a big hit or a small win in the special drawing 1 lottery, while also being able to Taking the win of the drawing drawing as an opportunity, the player can play a game aiming at a big win or a small winning in the special drawing drawing 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 315, when a left-handed game is performed to win a ball in the first prize opening 64, the ball fired into the game area (ball flowing down the left side game area) can pass through. Since a through gate 67 is provided in the slot, a game in which a special drawing 1 lottery is performed and a game in which a regular drawing lottery is performed without requiring a player who is playing a normal game to change the direction of ball launch. can be performed in parallel.

In addition, in this control example, the more a jackpot game is executed at an opportunity that is difficult to achieve, the more likely a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set. However, the present control example is not limited to this; It may be configured so that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set when a jackpot game is executed in ) may be configured so that when a jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is likely to be set.

In addition, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small winning game (small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 drawing) (in the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the small winning game ends (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 315). This prevents excessive benefits from being given to players who engage in illegal games in which they intentionally do not let the ball enter a specific area (V area) while a small winning game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be explained. In this control example, when the time saving state is set, it becomes easier to open the electric accessory 640a and it becomes easier to win a ball in the second prize opening 640, so a right-handed game that mainly executes the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Ru.

This time-saving state continues until a predetermined time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the system is configured to shift to the normal state. This time-saving termination condition is configured so that different conditions are set depending on the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special drawing lottery or the small hit type set for the won small win. There is. Specifically, no matter which win type (big win type, small win type) is set, there is a common time-saving end condition that is set as a common condition, and a response where different conditions are set depending on the win type. A time-saving ending condition is defined, and the common time-saving ending conditions include a first ending condition that is met when winning a jackpot (at the start of a jackpot game), a second ending condition that is met when a small winning game ends, and a time-saving ending condition. A third end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of special symbol (special symbol) fluctuations executed during the state (accumulation of the number of special symbol 1 fluctuations and the number of special symbol 2 fluctuations) reaches 99, The corresponding time-saving termination conditions include a short termination condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time-saving state is 1, and a medium-term termination condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time-saving state is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the winning type.

As mentioned above, the corresponding time saving end condition is set based on the number of times the special chart 2 changes that mainly change during the time saving state, so for example, if the corresponding time saving end condition exists at the time the time saving state is set. Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state based on the pending storage of the special figure 1 variation, the corresponding time saving end condition will not be satisfied. Therefore, even though the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending without the special drawing 2 lottery being executed. In addition, since the corresponding time saving end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 variations, it is possible to easily specify the number of special figure 2 variations to be executed during the time saving state, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special drawing 2 lottery) to customers.

Note that in this sixth control example, the common time saving ending condition and the corresponding time saving ending condition can be set as the time saving ending conditions as described above, but the settings are not limited to the settings of this control example. For example, in this sixth control example, the end condition regarding the small winning game that is predetermined as the common time saving ending condition is that the ending condition is set when the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number (for example, 3 times). It may be configured so that the termination condition regarding the small winning game is satisfied, or the termination condition regarding the small winning game may be set as the corresponding time saving termination condition, and the number of executions of the small winning game where the termination condition regarding the small winning game is satisfied is varied depending on the type of win. It may be configured. In addition, in this control example, the second end condition is established when the small winning game is executed regardless of the small winning type set at the time of winning the small winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the second end condition is satisfied when a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type is executed. Furthermore, in this control example, the second ending condition is established when the small winning game ends; however, the second ending condition is not limited to this, and the second ending condition is satisfied when the small winning game starts (when the small winning is won). It may be configured so that the following holds true.

By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving end condition is met based on a small winning win during the time-saving state, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time-saving state will continue. You can play games.

Returning to FIG. 316, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be explained. If you win a jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are the same as in the normal state. Any of the jackpot types (jackpot AD to AF) for which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 335). In other words, only the common time-saving termination condition is set as the time-saving termination condition.

On the other hand, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small winning winning ends, in addition to the common time saving ending conditions mentioned above, the A time-saving state is set in which a corresponding time-saving end condition is set. Specifically, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the jackpot game that is executed via the small winning winning ends, the special drawing 2 fluctuation will be applied at a rate of 10% as a corresponding time saving end condition. The number of times is set to 5, and the configuration is such that 90% of the time, the corresponding time saving end condition is not set (actually 99 times is set).

As mentioned above, in this sixth control example, the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the small winning of the special drawing 2 lottery is changed to the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving ending condition) based on the winning of the small winning of the special drawing 2 lottery. It is different depending on the situation, and it is more difficult for the time-saving end condition to be satisfied if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state than if you win a small winning in the special drawing 2 drawing during the time-saving state (correspondence The system is configured so that a time-saving state (where no time-saving end condition is set) is easily set.

With this configuration, for example, when the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the state transitions to the normal state, a small hit can be won by the special figure 2 lottery that is held and stored. By doing so, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so that the player can be made to play the game enthusiastically in order to acquire a large number of reserved memories of special symbols 2 until just before the time-saving state ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the fluctuation performance (final fluctuation performance) executed in response to the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation where the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied) In addition to the fluctuating lottery results, the system is configured to notify the pre-reading results of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which is reserved and stored. By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to notify the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery with the performance result of the final variation performance being a maximum of 5 times. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that a win (small win, jackpot win) will be announced as a performance result of the final fluctuation performance to be higher than that of a fluctuation performance in which only the lottery result of one special drawing 2 lottery is announced. This allows the player to watch the performance content with interest.

In addition, since it is configured to notify the lottery results (including the look-ahead results) of the special drawing 2 drawing during the time saving state and the special drawing 2 drawing during the normal state at the same time, this final variation effect will result in winnings. is notified, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is a special figure 2 lottery in a time-saving state or a special figure 2 lottery in a normal state. With this configuration, as in this control example, when the time-saving end conditions are set at different rates depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, the jackpot that is executed based on the current small win winning To prevent a player from easily understanding what kind of time-saving end conditions a time-saving state with time-saving ending conditions is set after the end of a game, depending on the performance mode (performance timing) of a variable performance.

In addition, in this control example, a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state. It is configured to display the effect of the above-mentioned final variation effect as a short-time variation effect. As a result, even if it is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which has been reserved and stored in the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation of the time-saving state, the target of the pre-reading result The final variation effect can be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation ends. Then, when the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining reservation after the end of the time saving state (the special figure 2 variation during the normal state) is completed (when the number of special figure 2 pending memories becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery A left-handed game aiming for execution is played.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, even if the normal state is set, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the regular lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured such that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible for the player to play a game in which the general drawing lottery is executed in parallel with a game in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning hole 64, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

<About the flow of production in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 331, the characteristic performance contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example is configured such that when the normal state is set, a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the special pattern 1 variation, if a long opening win is won in the general lottery, the general pattern variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special pattern 1 variation. has been done.

Here, the normal pattern fluctuation performance is from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, through the normal pattern winning game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, to win a ball to the second prize opening 640, and to correspond to the winning ball. This game is executed as part of a series of performances using the period from when a small hit is won due to the special figure 2 variation and a jackpot game is executed based on the small win.

Here, in recent years, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) per normal pattern (long opening). Some attempts are made to set the lottery contents of the general map lottery so that a player can win, and to temporarily execute an advantageous special map lottery (for example, special map 2 lottery) during a normal state. In such a gaming machine, players who have been playing a game in a normal state for a long period of time can be made to perform an advantageous special drawing lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, in such a gaming machine, a general pattern fluctuation effect is executed to show the general pattern fluctuation lottery result, and the result of the general pattern lottery is executed by the time the winning game for the long opening is executed for the player. A production that can provide the enjoyment of predicting the following is executed using a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area in which the variation production corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed). There is also.

However, in recent gaming machines that execute only the general pattern variation effect that can notify the player that a winning game for a long opening will be executed, the above-mentioned variable effect of the special pattern 2 lottery obtained by the winning game and the above-mentioned There is no relation to the normal figure fluctuation performance that was performed, and the special figure 2 lottery was executed due to the privilege given to the player by the winning game for the long opening, that is, the winning game for the long opening was executed. There was a problem in that it was not possible to notify the user in an easy-to-understand manner, and it was not possible to enhance the performance effect of the general figure fluctuation performance.

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, from the start timing of the normal pattern variation, after the normal pattern winning game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, a ball is placed in the second prize opening 640, and the winning ball is It is configured to execute a series of performances using a period until a small hit is won by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation and a jackpot game is executed based on the small win. As a result, by executing a series of performances, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game up to the execution of the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery results of the common drawing lottery, thereby increasing the performance effect. can.

Here, when executing the series of performances described above, if a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 during a winning game with a long open pattern, that is, while the electric accessory 640a is left open for a long period of time. Moreover, a problem arises in that the timing at which the special pattern 2 variation based on the winning is started varies greatly depending on the fluctuation status of the special pattern 1 variation. Specifically, for example, when a ball is entered into the second prize opening 640, the special pattern 1 variation is being executed, and the remaining variation time of the special pattern 1 variation is 120 seconds. , the period (standby period) from when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 until the special map 2 fluctuation starts is 120 seconds. If a series of performances were to be executed continuously in such a situation, there was a problem in that the performance form of the series of performances would be delayed, and the player would become bored with the performances.

To deal with this problem, in this sixth control example, if the above-mentioned waiting period is 60 seconds or more, the series of performances is pseudo-finished, and then the series of performances is executed again in a pseudo manner. The configuration is such that the mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the presentation mode of a series of presentations is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the flow of the variation performance related to the special symbol variation and the variation production related to the regular symbol variation executed during the normal state will be explained. FIG. 317(a) shows the flow of the performance that is executed when the waiting period from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 to when the special symbol 2 variation starts is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds). FIG. 317(b) is a timing chart showing the waiting period from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 to when the special chart 2 variation starts for a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). 12 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects performed in the case of

As shown in FIG. 317(a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed until the variation corresponding to the normal pattern long opening (long opening variation) is executed in the normal pattern variation. A variation effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is executed using the entire surface of the . Here, with reference to FIG. 319(a), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation will be explained. FIG. 319(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation effect). As shown in FIG. 319(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically divided into a main display area Dm and a sub display area Ds, and the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether it is in the lottery (changing) or not, and the lottery result). Then, the fourth symbol (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed. The configuration is such that a fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the following is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to display the lottery status of the special symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is displayed variably in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (Fig. 319 (indicated by a downward arrow in (a)) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is changing, and by displaying the fourth symbol in a stopped state in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 322(a)) ), it is configured to show the lottery results of special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as the fourth symbol or a display mode that shows a plurality of colors can be used to display a figure. It is configured to indicate that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode in which it is transformed or the display mode in which the color is varied, and to show the lottery result of the special symbol by stopping and displaying the display mode showing a specific symbol or color. You may do so.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not it is in the lottery (changing) and the lottery result), but this is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changing). In addition, as shown in FIG. 319(a), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is Although an example is shown in which the fourth symbol display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size where this fourth symbol display area is formed can be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect executed in the center part of the main display area Dm. It may be different.

Specifically, in a variable effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is possible to know whether the variable effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. If a performance mode is set to make it difficult to play, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) so that it is difficult for the player to see. Also, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol or displaying only one display area, the player can change the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may also be configured such that the type of special symbol being executed cannot be easily determined by just using the special symbol. With this configuration, the type of special symbol currently being executed is grasped depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the production effect of the variable production executed in the main display area Dm is reduced. This can prevent such a situation from occurring.

In addition, as mentioned above, although it is announced that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period in which the special symbol (special symbol) is changing, If the type is configured to be displayed in a variable manner that makes it difficult to distinguish, the result of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) and the special symbol type can be notified by the stop display mode after the variable display ends. For example, when a red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol corresponding to special figure 1 (special 1 fourth symbol) is displayed. If a blue stop display mode is displayed in the symbol), it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special symbol 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed and reducing the performance effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol is displayed variably using the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is best to configure it to run.

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed near (on the left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed near (on the left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319(a), which will be described later, the number of reserved pitches for each special pattern is displayed using numbers in the reserved number display area (small display areas Dm1a, Dm1b). Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow the number of reserved pitches in the acquired drawing to be identified.

A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area Dm). This small display area Dm4 displays a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be launched (game direction) (see FIG. 320(b)).

In this sixth control example, the small display area Dm4 is used as a guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board 13 he should shoot the ball toward just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), there is a display mode of "right-handed play" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for instructing the player to play a left-handed game. A display mode for "left-handed play" is displayed to guide the player, and a display mode for "right-handed play" indicates a game state in which right-handed play is advantageous for the player, that is, It is displayed during a time saving state, a jackpot game, and a small win game, and the display mode of "left-hand hit" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-hand hit game ends. ing. In addition, even if it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a normal state, the "left-handed game" is The display mode is configured to be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 319(a), the explanation will be continued. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the result of determining in advance the winning information held and stored (pre-reading result ) is configured to display a display mode that can be suggested to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game that will be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol that has been stored on hold).

Furthermore, a small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) of the normal symbol (common symbol) is displayed, It is configured such that a fourth symbol (a fourth symbol of a common symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the symbol (a common symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed near the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is displayed. In addition to the value indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the above-mentioned small display area Dm3a can suggest and inform the player of the result of determining in advance the winning information that is reserved and stored (pre-reading result). It is configured to display a display mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the normal symbol stored on hold).

Furthermore, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 319(b), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments regarding the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. Note that the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information indicating the number of reserved balls for each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a pending display mode (eg, a circular pending symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub display area Ds. Further, it is preferable to configure the game system so that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol based on the displayed number of reserved display modes. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to vary the corresponding hold display mode based on the result of the determination.

With this configuration, the player can play the game with the expectation that he or she will win the jackpot by drawing a special symbol that corresponds to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed among the plurality of reserved symbols that may exist. can be set. Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since the configuration is such that the suspended symbols are displayed corresponding to the individual number of suspended symbols, the display mode is designed to show the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the multiple suspended symbols. A result display that easily displays a variable pending symbol display can be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm. A performance explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are in the sub display area Ds. The display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to vary depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there is a pending ball, the third symbol will be stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result is a loss. After that, a fixed display is displayed, and then a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved balls is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state remains until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. There is a situation where there is no winning (ball) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 even though the player shoots the ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). This is rare, and in many cases where the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. This is due to this.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entering is executed. be done.

Note that in FIG. 319(a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown as being displayed in the main display area Dm; When the display mode to guide is not displayed, the small display area Dm4 itself is configured not to be displayed. In this way, in a state where there is no need to provide guidance on the gaming method (direction), by deleting the display area where the guidance display area is displayed, the area where other display modes (for example, variable effect display mode) are displayed can be created. Since it can be made wider, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the explanation will be continued. When a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed and the regular figure long open variation is executed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A normal symbol fluctuation effect is executed to show the normal symbol (common symbol) fluctuation using (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point A in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319(b).

After that, when the variation time of the regular pattern long open variation passes a predetermined time, the special pattern variation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the general pattern variation effect are displayed. A process of switching the size is executed, a general figure variation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and a special figure variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (FIG. 317(a)) (See point B). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point B in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(a).

In this control example, the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect is set to be 10 seconds after the start of the normal pattern variation effect. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a 10-second fluctuation time is set in some cases where the result of the lottery is a loss. The configuration is such that the normal pattern variation effect (see FIG. 319(b)) is executed even when the deviation variation is set.

By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern variation effect is executed based on the normal pattern deviation variation (10 seconds), the display area of the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect does not switch, and the normal pattern variation effect is executed. A performance is executed in which the variable performance ends. Therefore, after the normal pattern variation effect is executed, the display areas for the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect are switched and displayed (see FIG. 320(a)), so that the common pattern variation effect being executed becomes normal. It is possible to increase the expectation level due to the long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the long open fluctuation of the common figure has elapsed, the game per normal figure (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the game per common figure is displayed (see point C in FIG. 317(a)) . Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(b).

Here, the display contents of the normal pattern fluctuation effect executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation will be explained with reference to FIGS. 319(b) to 320(b). FIG. 319(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the general pattern variation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 319(b), when the general pattern variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed at the lower right side of the main display area Dm (lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , the general pattern fluctuation performance begins.

In other words, the small display area Dm5 becomes a normal pattern variation effect display area where the normal pattern variation effect is executed. Then, as a general pattern variation effect, a effect is performed in which the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches it. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 319(b), since the special figure 1 variation and the regular figure variation are being executed, the display mode (Fig. 319(b), a "downward arrow") is displayed, and a display mode indicating that the general map is being displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm3 (in FIG. 319(b), a "downward arrow" is displayed). (indicated by an arrow) is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Treasure chest found! If you reach it, you have a chance!!" are displayed to the effect that the general figure fluctuation effect has been executed and as a comment to indicate the content of the general figure change effect. . Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what type of performance the normal figure fluctuation performance executed in a part of the main display area Dm should progress to in the future.

Thereafter, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the general figure fluctuation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 320(a) is displayed. FIG. 320(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the display area of the normal pattern variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 320(a), when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the normal pattern variation effect, the normal pattern variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first A variable display effect of the special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in a small region Dm6 formed in a portion (lower left portion) of the main display region Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal pattern variation performance has progressed (indicating that the result of the general pattern lottery was not a variation out of the normal pattern) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 319(b) and FIG. 320(a), a variable effect (special pattern variable effect, general pattern variable effect) for showing the lottery results of multiple symbol lots (special pattern lottery, general pattern lottery) are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variable effect is executed is varied according to the suggestion situation of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, so that the player can receive multiple symbol lottery draws. It is possible to notify that variable effects for showing the results are being executed at the same time, and also to notify in an easy-to-understand manner which variable effects to watch depending on the size of the display area in which each variable effect is executed. can.

Although illustration is omitted, if the executed normal pattern variation effect is a normal pattern off variation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 319(b) and finally A performance in which the small display area Dm5 is no longer displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery corresponding to the current regular symbol variation performance is a loss. In this way, when the normal pattern variation effect is executed based on the normal pattern deviation variation, only the normal pattern variation effect using a smaller display area than the special pattern variation display effect is executed. The figure variation performance does not interfere with the special figure variation performance.

In other words, according to the above-mentioned example, a loss (a deviation from the normal pattern (10 seconds)) is selected as the performance result of the normal pattern fluctuation performance (the result of the general pattern lottery that triggered the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation performance). During the period in which there is a possibility, that is, from the start of the normal pattern variation effect until 10 seconds have passed, the display mode shown in FIG. The player is notified that the fluctuating effects are being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the fluctuating performance has started, the result of the fluctuating performance (the result of the fluctuating performance that triggered the execution of the fluctuating performance) is displayed. Figure 320(a) As shown in , a display mode is executed in which the display area of the regular figure variation effect is large (larger than the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed).

As a result, as the probability of the drawing result being advantageous to the player as a lottery result of the normal figure fluctuation effect, that is, a lottery result in which a winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is released long, increases, Since the display area in which the performance is executed can be enlarged, the player can be made to properly watch the normal pattern variation performance. Also, for example, if a normal pattern variation effect is executed based on a normal pattern deviation variation (10 seconds), the normal pattern variation effect is executed in a smaller display area (see FIG. 319(b)) than the special pattern variation effect. Since the process ends with only the effect, the visibility of the special figure variation effect is not obstructed. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the general drawing lottery, the size of the display area at the time of starting the general drawing fluctuation effect is unified, so the drawing of the general drawing drawing depends on the display format immediately after the general drawing fluctuation effect starts. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 319(b) and FIG. 320(a), the display area where the regular figure variation effect is executed is larger than the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 319(b))) and a larger display area (see FIG. 320(a)) than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 320(a)) where the special figure variation effect is executed (See (a)) and 2 types of sizes are provided, but the size is not limited to this, and three or more types of display area sizes for the general figure variation effect may be provided, for example, the special figure variation effect. A display area that is approximately the same size as the display area where the process is performed may be used.

In addition, in the present sixth control example, as the general pattern variation effect progresses, the display area in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed gradually becomes larger; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The display area in which the variable effect is executed may be made smaller than the initial range (see FIG. 319(b)), and then changed to the final range (see FIG. 320(a)). . With this configuration, it is possible to continue the normal pattern fluctuation performance while making the player think that the normal pattern fluctuation performance will end, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance. can.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, when the special pattern variation performance and the regular pattern variation performance are executed at the same time, by varying the size of the display area in which each variation performance is executed, the player's attention is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mode of the display area in which each variable effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area, the color of the background of the display area, etc.) the output mode of the audio corresponding to each variable production (for example, outputting only the audio corresponding to one variation production, or varying the output level (volume) of the audio corresponding to each variation production) By setting the output mode), the player may be made to pay attention to any one of the plurality of variable effects.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the range of the display area in which the general pattern variation effect is executed is varied according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the general pattern variation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal figure variation effect is executed is configured to be variable based on the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, It may be configured to set a variable range of the display area in which the general pattern fluctuation effect is executed based on the progress of the presentation (elapsed time) and the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the general pattern lottery. .

With this configuration, for players who want to quickly grasp the lottery results of the regular lottery during the regular lottery performance, the regular lottery will be displayed based on the range of the display area that changes based on the operation of the operating means. For players who wish to grasp the lottery results based on the performance results of the general pattern fluctuation performance, there is a display area where the general pattern fluctuation performance is executed without having the player operate the operating means. It is possible to perform a general figure variation effect without changing the range of the figure.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the general pattern long opening fluctuation has elapsed and the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is displayed as a long opening winning, the long opening winning is executed after that, as shown in FIG. 320(b). The display screen will appear. FIG. 320(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display contents displayed when a player wins a regular long opening and a long opening winning game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when a winning is achieved in the long opening of the general map, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm, and the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 from inside the treasure box 852 to show that the winning is achieved in the opening of the long opening. An effect in which the capsule 853 appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (displayed as "three circles" in the figure) to indicate that the result of the common drawing lottery is a long open win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm4 , "Right hit" is displayed in order to play a game in which a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 (right-handed game), and the small display area Dm5 visually indicates the position where the ball is won in the right-handed game. As a guide display mode for notification, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right side gaming area of the game board 13 (near the second winning hole 640) is displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 320(b), since the special pattern 1 fluctuation is being executed even while the regular pattern long open winning game is being executed, the small display area Dm1 shows that the special pattern 1 is changing. The fourth symbol of special figure 1 is displayed in a display mode that shows that the special figure fluctuation effect is displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 320(a) (displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, without changing the size of the display area where the regular figure variation effect is executed, by reducing the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed, the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed. Since the display area in which the normal figure variation effect is executed can be made relatively large, the content of the normal figure variation effect can be made more noticeable to the player.

Then, the comment "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player that the normal pattern variation performance will further progress. Here, in this sixth control example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the regular lottery is a win, the fluctuation time is the same as the fluctuation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning the regular lottery long open winning. The configuration is such that a short-circuit release variation (60 seconds) is set. When the general pattern variation effect is executed in response to this general pattern short opening variation, the general pattern variation effect progresses until a display mode similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 320(b) is displayed, and the treasure box An effect is performed in which a winning pattern is displayed to indicate that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is a winning lottery result from among 852.

In other words, when a winning result is won in the general drawing lottery and a short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened to such an extent that the ball cannot enter the second prize opening 640. ing. In this case, even if a right-handed game is executed, it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, so the comment "Right-handed player" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. .

In addition, in this control example, a long open winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning opening 640 is executed as a winning game (a game in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to open) when a winning result is won in the general lottery. The present invention is configured so that two types of winning games can be executed: and a short open winning game in which it is difficult to enter a ball into the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second prize opening 640, a winning game in which the opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are different may be executed. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the regular figure long opening game, so the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to prevent a game in which a ball is won into the second prize opening 640 from being played. In addition, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal pattern variation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode notifying the start of the normal pattern winning game) may be configured to be different. . Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning ball firing timing in the second winning opening 640 based on the performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the flow of the performance will be explained. When a right-handed game is played while a game is being played, and the ball enters the second winning hole 640 (see point C in FIG. 317(a)), the display mode indicating this is the third one. It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(a).

Here, in this sixth control example, the special symbol 1 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel) ), and the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed preferentially over the special figure 1 variation.

Therefore, when a ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during a game with a regular figure, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the winning information of the special figure 2 is held and stored, and the winning information of the special figure 1 that is being executed is During the period (waiting period) until the variation ends, execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited. After that, when the running special pattern 1 variation ends, the special pattern 2 variation based on the winning information held and stored is preferentially executed, and the special pattern 2 variation is an advanced version of the above-mentioned general pattern variation performance. A variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 317(a)). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point D in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(b).

After that, when the special figure 2 variation ends and the special figure 2 stops displaying in the display mode indicating a small hit win (see point E in Figure 317(a)), the special figure 2 to indicate a small hit win. A variable performance is executed. Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point E in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(a). Then, while the small winning game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 317(a)), the small winning game is executed. After the winning game ends, a display mode indicating that the jackpot game will be executed is displayed (see FIG. 322(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 321(a) to FIG. 322(b), the normal pattern long open winning game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is reached before the jackpot game is executed based on the winning game. The content of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be explained.

In this sixth control example, a series of games (normal pattern variation, normal pattern hit, special pattern 2 variation, special pattern 2 small hit , a game executed in the flow of a jackpot), the system is configured to execute a series of effects with a story. Specifically, the game player is informed that the production contents of the normal pattern fluctuation production described with reference to FIGS. 319(b) to 320(b) will progress, and that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the progress of the production. It becomes possible to suggest.

With this configuration, a series of performances are used to determine whether or not an execution opportunity that is more complex than the execution opportunity established when winning a jackpot in a special symbol (special symbol) lottery is established as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

FIG. 321(a) shows that in the state shown in FIG. 320(b), that is, in the state where the long open winning game is being executed during the variation of special drawing 1, a ball has won in the second prize opening 640. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen for indicating this. As shown in FIG. 321(a), when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a game of long open winning, the capsule 853 is broken and a hint indicating the content of the game to be executed in the future is extracted from inside the capsule 853. A ticket 854 with "Challenge Game" written as the mode is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Challenge Game GET" is displayed to notify that a challenge game will be executed from now on.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 321(a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately executed based on the ball winning in the second winning hole 640. The winning information of the special drawing 2 will be stored on hold without being released. Therefore, "1" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, indicating that one piece of winning information of the special drawing 2 has been acquired. Then, when the special pattern 1 variation that was being executed in the state shown in FIG. (See Figure 321(b)).

FIG. 321(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the challenge game. As shown in FIG. 321(b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, a challenge game is started. This challenge game is a performance executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 321(a), a plurality of result display modes 861a for showing the performance results - 861e are rotated in order, and a performance is performed in which the result display modes 861a to 861e stopped and displayed within the result display area 860 are the current performance results.

In this sixth control example, the result display mode 861a is a result display mode 861a in which a "cross mark" is attached to indicate that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a "miss", and a "small win". A result display mode 861d with a "V" attached to indicate that it is a "big win", a result display mode 861c with a "777" attached to indicate a "jackpot", and a result display mode 861c that does not notify the lottery result of special drawing 2. It has a result display mode 861b with a "?" mark, and a result display mode 861e with a "NEXT" mark indicating that the challenge game will be executed again.

Here, the result display mode 861b marked with "?" as the performance result of the challenge game is when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". This can be selected in the challenge game, and an effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is not announced. Note that even when this result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "right-handed hitting" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

With this configuration, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as a performance result of the challenge game, a right-handed game is performed without knowing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball fired in the right-handed game will win the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game or the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, Will the player win the second winning hole 640 that is opened during the normal game, or will he not win the special game (big hit, small win) or the regular game, and will not win in any of the winning holes. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is falling while observing the actual falling behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that in this sixth control example, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player is configured to be unable to grasp the presentation result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, by changing the display mode of the result display mode 861b, the lottery result of the current special drawing 2 lottery is announced as the performance result of the challenge game. It may be possible to do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in a way that it is difficult to understand which special drawing 2 lottery result the result display mode 861b corresponds to during the execution of the challenge game, and when the challenge game ends. Then, it is possible to notify the player of the performance result of the current challenge game, that is, the lottery result of special drawing 2.

Further, the result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 321(b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In this sixth control example, if multiple pieces of winning information for special figure 2 are acquired during a long open winning game, the lottery for special figure 2 continues until a jackpot or small win is won in the lottery for special figure 2. is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special pattern 2 lottery is a loss, the second special pattern 2 lottery will be executed subsequently, so the challenge will be executed in response to the first special pattern 2 variation. The result display mode 861e is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect of the game, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special drawing 2 lottery is a win (big hit, small win), any of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Ru.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special drawing 2 acquired during the long open winning game without feeling strange. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the variable time set in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is the variable time (10 seconds) corresponding to one challenge game, and the variable time (20 seconds) corresponding to two challenges. ) is configured to be settable, and when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss, the variable time of 20 seconds is configured to be less likely to be selected than the variable time of 10 seconds.

As a result, if the challenge game is executed twice with one special pattern 2 fluctuation effect, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning in the special pattern 2 lottery (big hit, small win). . In addition, when the result display mode 861e with "NEXT" added by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is displayed as one special figure 2. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the variation time or whether it was executed across two special figure 2 variations.

Since the state shown in FIG. 321 is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the special figure 1 variation that was fluctuating at the time shown in FIG. 321(a) is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol of special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode "451" indicating that the special figure 2 variation is being executed in the small display area Dm2 (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Displayed. In addition, since the special drawing 2 variation was executed using the winning information of the special drawing 2 that was stored on hold at the time shown in FIG. 321(a), "0" is displayed as the value displayed in the small display area Dm2a. Displayed.

Then, as a series of effects, the special figure 2 variation effect is executed using the display area where the regular figure variation effect was executed, so the special figure variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) is executed in FIG. 321(a). The small display area Dm6 that was previously displayed is erased from the main display area Dm. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the words "Right-handed game" are continuously displayed to encourage the player to play the right-handed game, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Right-handed game" are continuously displayed to encourage the player to play the game with the right-handed game. A comment asking "What do you think will come out?" will be displayed.

In addition, according to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 321(b), in order to explain the current gaming situation, the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size. In reality, the display is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see. Thereby, the presentation effect of the presentation mode (challenge game) being executed in the continuous main display area Dm can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, as described above, the state shown in FIG. 321(b) is a state in which the regular pattern long open hit game has ended and the special pattern 2 variation is being executed, so at that timing, the state shown in the right side game area is Each of the winning holes (second winning hole 640, specific winning hole 65a, V winning hole 650a) is in a state where it is not easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 321(b), it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 due to the regular pattern long open winning game, and for example, the ball can easily be won by the special pattern 2 lottery in progress. If you win a jackpot, or if you win a jackpot, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the V winning hole 650a or the specific winning hole 65a.

In this way, even if performing a right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the right side playing area is not an advantageous gaming method for the player, the player is forced to continue playing the right-handed game. By displaying the words "right-handed game" in the small display area Dm4, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of the player who frequently switches between right-handed game and left-handed game, and also to avoid delay in switching the game method, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a right-handed game cannot be performed while a small winning game is being executed, and a ball cannot be won in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game.

In this control example, for the reason mentioned above, in the case where the right-handed game can be executed at a predetermined interval (period in which the special figure 2 variation is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continuously displayed during the predetermined interval. Although the configuration is such that the characters "Right-handed player" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed player" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display the state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (normal pattern long open winning period, small winning game period) and the period between those states (special pattern 2 fluctuation). It is also possible to configure the small display area Dm4 to display the characters "Right-handed" in different display modes depending on the period).

With this configuration, a player who is not accustomed to the game is forced to play right-handed games continuously, and a game situation that is disadvantageous to the player (during a small winning game when a ball is thrown into the V winning hole 650a) is avoided. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a player cannot win a prize to occur, and to allow a skilled player to select a gaming method according to the display mode of "hitting right" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, FIG. 322 ( This will be explained with reference to a). FIG. 322(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small win is announced in a challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 322(a), when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a small win, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed in the display mode "341" indicating a small win in the small display area Dm2. is displayed, and the result display mode 861d is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "Get a small win!!" indicating that you have won a small win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm, a comment that the player aims for during a small win game is displayed. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V prize opening 650a during the small winning game, it is notified that the right to execute the jackpot game after the small winning game is finished. The display screen shown in FIG. 322(b) is displayed as the display screen. FIG. 322(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the right to play a jackpot game is acquired during a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 322(b), the characters "777" indicating that a jackpot game will be executed are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "Jackpot!! Congratulations!" congratulating the player are displayed in the sub display area Ds. !” comment is displayed.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, the normal symbol fluctuation performance (see FIG. 319(b)) is executed when the long open hit fluctuation of the normal symbol (common symbol) is started in the normal state. , A winning game performance executed during a winning game where the electric accessory 640a is opened (see FIG. 320(b)), a ball being won in the second prize opening 640 during the playing game winning a general drawing, Special figure 2 pending acquisition effect that is executed when winning information for special figure 2 is acquired (see Figure 321(a)), special figure 2 variation effect that is executed when special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started (See Figure 321(b)), A small winning effect showing that you won a small winning in the special figure 2 variation (lottery) (See Figure 322(a)), A right to play a jackpot game was acquired during a small winning game. Since the small winning game effect (see Figure 322(b)) that is executed in the event of a small hit is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a story, a big win that is realized when multiple conditions are met. In a pachinko machine 10 that has an opportunity to play a game, it is possible to inform the player of the game performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation will be continued. As mentioned above, according to the game flow shown in FIG. 317(a), by executing a series of effects, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player, Depending on the game state when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640, the performance mode of the series of performances described above may not be able to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Specifically, at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a), since the special pattern 1 variation is being executed, the start timing of the special pattern 2 variation is within the predetermined period (the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed). A series of effects is used in which a display screen (see FIG. 321(a)) is displayed when the player is on standby. When a ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special drawing 2 fluctuation will be started immediately. Therefore, when the above-described production mode of a series of productions is used, the display screen of FIG. 320(b) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. There was a problem in that the relevance of the performances was weakened.

Therefore, in this sixth control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of performances are being executed, and the determination result is Based on this, the production mode after acquiring the winning information of the special drawing 2 is configured to be varied. Here, with reference to FIG. 323, the presentation contents will be described when the special drawing 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the winning information of the special drawing 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of presentations are being executed.

FIG. 323(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when winning information of special drawing 2 is obtained while special drawing 1 is not changing, and FIG. 323(b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 323(a) is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 323(a), when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 while the special pattern 1 variation is not being executed, the special pattern 2 variation starts immediately. According to the effect shown in , an effect is executed in which the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 that appears from the treasure box 852 using the hammer 851aa. Then, when the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 323(b) is displayed. FIG. 323(b) shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when the special pattern 2 fluctuation that is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 while the special pattern 1 fluctuation is not changing is stopped. It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 323(b), when the special figure 2 variation stops, an effect is performed in which a result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation appears from inside the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 323(b), since the lottery result of the special drawing 2 variation is a small win, a result display mode 855 with a "V" indicating a small win is displayed. The display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable depending on the lottery result of special drawing 2 variation. Since it is the same as the display mode shown in FIG.

As mentioned above, during a series of presentations, if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the special drawing 1 variation, the presentation in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the regular drawing winning period (first stage). The effect of acquiring the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 pending acquisition period (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1) (second stage effect), and the challenge game effect is the special figure 2 variation. While the production mode is set to correspond to the period (third stage production), if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 while the special drawing 1 is not changing, the capsule 853 will be released from the treasure box 852. The production mode is set so that the production that appears corresponds to the regular pattern winning period (first stage production), and the production that destroys the capsule 853 corresponds to the special pattern 2 fluctuation period (second stage production) It consists of

In this way, depending on the gaming situation during a series of performances, different performance modes can be set for when the standby period for the special figure 2 variation occurs and when it does not, giving the player a sense of discomfort. A series of easy-to-understand performances can be executed without any trouble.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation of the flow of performance will be continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 319 to 323, the content of effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed while the series of effects is being executed has been explained. Specifically, regarding the performance contents when the ball normally enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game, and the performance contents when the ball enters the V prize opening 650a during the small winning game. I explained.

Here, the content of the performance that is executed when a normal game is not executed while a series of performances is being executed will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 324, the contents of the performance when the ball does not enter the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game will be explained. FIG. 324(a) schematically shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 after 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game for the long opening. FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 324(b) that is displayed when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the regular long open winning game and the regular long open winning game ends. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), until the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game, an effect in which the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 is displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time as this is executed, a comment such as "Hurry!!, Hurry!!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds to call attention to winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 quickly. In addition, a possible cause of a situation in which the ball does not enter the second prize opening 640 even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the game with a long open hit is that the player is not playing a right-handed game. The guidance display mode for "hitting right" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is more emphasized than usual (in FIG. 324(a), the outline of the small display area Dm4 is displayed with a double line). be done. In addition, the audio output device 226 also outputs audio to notify that a right-handed game will be played.

In addition, in this sixth control example, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second as a normal figure long opening game, the electric accessory 640a is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. It is configured so that a winning game (opening action) is executed. Therefore, when one second has elapsed from the start of the game for the long open hit, the warning screen shown in FIG. It is configured such that a ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). Thereby, it is possible to provide a player who played a right-handed game after viewing the display content of the attention-calling screen with an opportunity to win a ball into the second winning hole 640.

After that, if the playing time (3 seconds) of the regular long open winning game has passed without a ball entering the second prize opening 640, the series of effects ends as shown in FIG. 324(b). A performance indicating this is executed. As shown in FIG. 324(b), a character 851 who is disappointed because he was unable to obtain the capsule 853 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "End" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, indicating that the series of effects has ended. Comments will be displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "left-handed hit" are displayed to cause the normal game to be executed in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed in the normal state. With this configuration, if a normal game (a game in which a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular game long opening winning game) is not executed in the middle of a series of performances, the series of performances will be executed. Since the ending performance is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the series of performances from progressing to the end in a state where winning information for special drawing 2 has not been obtained and giving players excessive expectations. .

Next, as the production content that is executed when a normal game is not executed while the continuous production is being executed, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game, or when a specific The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be explained with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 325(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the ball has not entered the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game. FIG. 325(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the small winning game ends without the ball entering the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), if a ball has not entered the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, a small In the display area Dm8, characters "Last 5 seconds!!" are displayed as remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small winning game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases as time passes. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation is displayed in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small winning game is wrapped in smoke. Further, as in FIG. 324(a) described above, a highlighted display mode emphasizing the guidance for the right-handed game is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the sub-display area Ds shows that the current small winning game is being played. , the comment "Small win!! Hurry!!" is displayed to indicate that the player should hurry up and play the game.

Then, when the small winning game ends without a ball being won in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, a screen is displayed in which the same series of effects as shown in FIG. 324(b) described above ends (FIG. 325( b)). In this way, if a situation occurs where the series of performances ends at each point in the series of performances, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data. In addition, since it cannot be displayed during normal gaming, even if the same image data is used, it is difficult for the player to think that the same image data is being reused. It is something.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation will be continued. Depending on the fluctuation status of special figure 1 during a series of performances, a state in which the waiting period for special figure 2 variation is set and a state in which it is not set occurs. A new problem also occurred in the state where the waiting period of FIG. 2 fluctuation is set.

In other words, the waiting period for the special figure 2 variation is set in accordance with the remaining variation time of the currently running special figure 1 variation, and the winning timing of the ball into the second winning opening 640 is determined by the special figure 1 variation. This is set regardless of the fluctuation timing of 1. Furthermore, since the length of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation varies, for example, a situation may occur in which the waiting period of the special figure 2 variation during a series of presentations exceeds 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see Figure 321(a)) indicating the waiting period for the special figure 2 variation continues to be displayed, the same display mode will continue to be displayed for 100 seconds. This poses a problem in that it gives a sense of discomfort to the player, and the series of performances is extended, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a series of presentations, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 variation and the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. If the remaining variation time of the variation shown in FIG. 1 is longer than a predetermined time (60 seconds), a special series of effects is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317(b), a description will be given of the flow of the game when a special series of effects is executed. In FIG. 317(b), the period from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular game to when the special pattern 2 fluctuation is executed (current special pattern 1 remaining fluctuation period) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the performance (special series of performances) executed in the above case. Note that detailed description of the same elements as in the flow shown in FIG. 317(a) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 317(b), when a series of effects (general pattern fluctuation effects) are executed based on the general pattern long open fluctuation, the special pattern 1 variation (indicated as special pattern 1 variation in the figure) is When a long winning variation (special 1 long variation (missing)) is being executed and the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular pattern long open winning game, the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed If it is determined that the duration is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is ended with a pseudo effect (see point G in FIG. 317(b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long miss variation that is being executed reaches 10 seconds, a series of pseudo effects will be executed, and a challenge game will be played according to the start timing of the special figure 2 variation (see Figure 321 (b)) The performance mode in which the is started is set (see point H in FIG. 317(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 326, the contents of the above-mentioned special series of effects will be explained. FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at point G in FIG. 317(b). As shown in FIG. 317(b), if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed is 60 seconds or more at the time the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the small display area Dm2a Despite the fact that "1" is displayed indicating that one piece of winning information for special drawing 2 is being held and stored, the end screen indicating that the series of performances has ended is displayed in the main display area Dm. Ru.

Thereafter, as a special series of performances, once the series of performances is finished, a special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds (when the timing when the special figure 2 variation is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 326(b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be explained. FIG. 318 (a) schematically shows the flow of the effect that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state and a time saving state (once) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This is a timing chart, and FIG. 318(b) shows that a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small win. 3 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects performed when

As shown in FIG. 318(a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 hold), and a special figure 2 hold (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 hold). ), that is, if you win a jackpot by playing a game that causes the special figure 1 lottery to be executed (left-handed game), the special figure 2 lottery will be executed by playing the right-handed game during the time saving state. The system is configured so that all the special drawing 1 drawings that have been previously held and stored are executed.

Specifically, the normal pattern fluctuation time that is executed when the time saving state is set (the normal pattern fluctuation time that is set during the high probability state of the normal symbol) is executed when the time saving state is set. The structure is such that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than that of special figure 1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the time saving state while the special figure 1 is on hold. Therefore, while various effects are being executed during the time-saving state, the special figure 1 variation, which is more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation, is executed, and the balance of the various effects is disrupted. Can be suppressed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this sixth control example, if the special drawing 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, regardless of the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery, the 0.2 seconds It is configured so that variable time can be set. Then, the jackpot game end screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed after the jackpot game has ended, or until the special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the period during which the special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation) based on the special pattern 1 reservations that had already been obtained at the start of the jackpot game is executed (approximately 1 in the case where the number of special pattern 1 reservations is 4) seconds), a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game will be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to finish the special drawing 1 reservation without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game), if you win a jackpot or win a small win that allows you to pass V, you can play the jackpot game again from the jackpot game end screen. The display screen is configured to display game information indicating the content of the jackpot game (for example, round number information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or information obtained during one jackpot game). The system is configured such that game information indicating a cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls played, and a display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that multiple jackpot games are one jackpot game. A variation display mode that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation) that corresponds to a newly executed jackpot game (a short-time (0.2 second) variation and a variation in the third symbol) Even if the game is executed without any display, the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as game information for one jackpot game can be increased, it is possible to make the player have stronger expectations for winning the jackpot. Furthermore, this sixth control example is configured so that the right-handed game is an appropriate game for both the jackpot game and the game in the time-saving state, so internally, the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set. During the special figure 1 variation period (during the special figure 1 variation period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "Right hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the player is currently in a jackpot game or in a time saving state based on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example is configured so that the special symbol 2 reservation is given priority over the special symbol 1 reservation. Therefore, in a state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if a player makes a mistake in the game operation and obtains special drawing 1 with special drawing 2 pending, special drawing 1 will continue until special drawing 2 is pending. Special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) based on reservation is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continued during the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold is configured so as not to run out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 1 variation from being executed unnecessarily during the time saving state.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as a corresponding time-saving termination condition that is part of the time-saving termination condition for terminating the time-saving state, a termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming situation until the corresponding time shortening end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. There is nothing to do.

As mentioned above, in this sixth control example, the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, and the special figure 2 variation is executed in the state where the time saving state is set. The configuration is such that the special figure 1 variation is changed for a short time during the period when the special figure 1 variation is not held, so that the special figure 1 variation is no longer held during the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation shown in FIG.

If "Special Figure 2 variation once" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 variation will be changed using the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state. The time-saving final variation performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 pending acquired during the time-saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 327 to 331, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the sixth control example will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth control example, the effects during the time saving state include the first time saving variation effect, which is set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation in the time saving state, and the special feature. It is configured to execute a second time-saving variation effect that is set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation which is the final variation of the figure.

Then, in the first time-saving variation performance, a variation performance is executed to show the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the second time-saving fluctuation performance is to show the lottery result of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 reservation. A variation effect is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 327(a), the display contents of the first time saving variation effect will be explained. FIG. 327(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in a variable production during a time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 327(a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is being executed in a time saving state where the number of time saving times is set to "5 times".

As shown in FIG. 327(a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the words "time saving mode" are displayed to indicate that the current time saving state is in effect, and the rabbit is displayed. An effect is executed in which the simulated character 851 runs and obtains one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c indicating the result of the current special drawing lottery. In this sixth control example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, the character 851 attempts to obtain the lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the variable time set during the time saving state (excluding the final time saving variation). It is configured such that the get effect is executed multiple times during one variation period, and the more the number of get effects executed during one variation period, the more the lottery result of this special symbol variation becomes more attractive to players. The lottery result is configured such that the probability of a lottery result being advantageous is high. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the performance results of each get performance but also to the number of executions of the get performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed to guide the game method during the time saving state, and in the small display area Dm20, the characters "Last 4" are displayed to indicate the period until the end of the time saving state. ” will be displayed. In other words, it is notified that the time saving state will end if the special figure 2 variation is executed four more times. In addition, in this sixth control example, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions that are satisfied based on the number of special symbol fluctuations can be set. , the remaining period until the time-saving termination condition that is most likely to be met is displayed.

With this configuration, compared to displaying all of the multiple time-saving termination conditions and displaying the period (remaining period) until all of the displayed time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, it is possible to It is possible to inform players of easy time-saving termination conditions in an easy-to-understand manner. Additionally, if the ease of fulfillment of the time-saving termination conditions overlap, the configuration may be configured to display all of the overlapping time-saving termination conditions, or only one of the overlapping time-saving termination conditions may be displayed. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this control example, in FIG. 327(a), as the lottery result formats 871a to 871c, a first lottery result format 871a with "777" indicating a jackpot win and a "V" indicating a small win win are shown. A second lottery result format 871b marked with a "cross mark" indicating a loss is displayed, and a third lottery result format 871c marked with a "cross mark" indicating a loss is displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 selects one of the lottery results. It is configured such that an action is performed in which the result aspects 871a to 871c are acquired but not acquired, and an effect is executed in which one of the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c is finally acquired and the lottery result of the variation is announced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a "chance" attached thereto indicating that there is a high expectation of winning lottery result modes 871a and 871b indicating a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in a get effect. The character 851 executes the get performance to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the number of performance suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can perform an action to acquire any display mode multiple times during one variable display performance, which prevents the player from getting bored with the performance. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the current special pattern variation in the middle of the special pattern variation period, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 327(a), a display mode for indicating the remaining number of executions of the special symbol 2 variation as the remaining period for which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. For example, it is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode may be displayed to indicate the remaining time for which the time-saving state is set based on the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or a get effect that is executed during the current time-saving state. A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Furthermore, the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 variation at the time when the time saving state was set, that is, the time saving end condition set in the current time saving state (the number of special figure 2 variations), and the special figure executed during the time saving state. It may be configured such that a display mode indicating the number of 2 fluctuations is displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327(b), the display contents of the final time saving variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed in the final variation of the time saving state will be described. FIG. 327(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect. In this sixth control example, as a variation effect in the time saving final variation, a held ball acquisition effect for making the player acquire a special figure 2 held ball, a lottery result of the variation, a pre-read result of special figure 2 held, The system is configured to be able to execute a second time-saving fluctuating performance for notifying the player, and a held ball acquisition performance is executed during the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the final time-saving fluctuating performance, and a second time-saving fluctuating performance is executed during the second half period (for example, , 25 seconds), the second time saving variation effect is executed.

When the reserved ball acquisition performance is executed in the first half of the time-saving final variation performance, as shown in FIG. 327(b), the sub-display area Ds displays the message "Gather the characters!! ” is displayed, and an effect in which allied characters gather around the character 851 is executed in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 327(b), a state in which an ally character 851a shaped like a "turtle" and a ally character 851b shaped like an "elephant" are gathered together is displayed. Then, the characters "Last" are displayed in the small display area Dm20 to notify the player that the current special symbol change is the final change in the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of reserved balls of special map 2 that has been acquired, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. 327(b), Since it shows a state in which two special drawing 2 reservations have been acquired, it means that two ally characters 851 have gathered. In the small display area Dm7, an assembly history display is displayed in which the assembled ally characters 851 are displayed in the order in which they were assembled, with "turtle" being displayed as the first history 872a and "elephant" being displayed as the second history 872b. .

In this small display area Dm7, a collection history display is displayed, and the display order here corresponds to the order in which the special map 2 reservation is consumed. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, in the case of winning, it is possible to suggest which special drawing 2 reservation has been won.

Then, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4) during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. 328(a), it shows that the number of special 2 reserved balls has become 4 The performance mode is displayed. Specifically, around the character 851, a new ally character 851c modeled after a "snake" and a ally character 851d modeled after a "lion" are added, for a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d. The collected performances will be displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d, and in the sub-display area Ds, it is displayed that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached the upper limit. A comment saying "Everyone gather!!" is displayed. As mentioned above, while the reserved ball acquisition effect is being executed, the number of grouped ally characters 851 is associated with the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so the small display area Dm2a shows the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. "4" indicating that the number is the upper limit (4 pieces) is displayed.

Thereafter, when the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect has passed and the second half period has been reached, the second time-saving variation effect shown in FIG. 328(b) is started. FIG. 328(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time-saving variation effect) displayed when the second half period of the final time-saving variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 328(b), in the second time-saving variation performance, any of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time-saving final variation performance challenges the mission, announces the winning if the mission is successful, and the mission fails. A performance will be performed to notify you of winning or non-winning. The performance result of this second time-saving variable performance is configured to be set to reflect the look-ahead result of the special map 2 reservation obtained at the time when the first half period of the final time-saving variable performance has passed. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 328(b), a mission performance using an ally character 851a imitating a "turtle" is executed as a mission performance executed as a second time-saving variable performance. Here, the content of the mission performance to be executed (in FIG. 328(b), "withstand falling rocks") is configured such that multiple patterns can be set, and the content of the mission performance and the type of the selected ally character 851 are set. The expectation of mission success differs depending on the situation. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance but also in the performance process until the performance result is displayed.

If the mission effect is successful, the mission success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 329(a). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 329(a), the first special figure 2 hold (the next executed special figure 2 hold), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the first rotation after transitioning to the normal state. As shown in Fig. 329(a), the mission is successful as a result of the second time-saving variation effect, as shown in Figure 329(a), because it is predicted that the small win will be won in . At the fluctuation stop timing of the time saving final fluctuation that is being displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of the current special drawing 2 lottery is a loss is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After this, as shown in FIG. 329(b), while the pseudo pattern "VVV" for notifying the win is displayed in the main display area Dm in a oscillating manner, the special symbol 2 variation that wins the small hit is displayed. A notification screen for notifying the player of the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance is displayed until the game ends. In addition, at the time of FIG. 329(b), the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the special figure 2 is changing (during non-big win game, non-small win game), so in reality, the right-handed game is not performed. This is a state in which the player cannot play an advantageous game, but since the small winning game will be executed immediately after, the "right-handed" game that continues to guide the right-handed game from the time-saving state. The display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. This allows the player to play the game smoothly without having to change the direction in which the ball is launched.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 pending at the time when the second time saving variation effect is being executed, the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 pending is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. As expected, the display mode for displaying the small win to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is "777" to indicate the small win type set for this small win. Displayed in display mode.

On the other hand, if a failure effect is set as the effect of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. ), the mission failure effect shown in FIG. 330(b) is displayed, and then the time-saving state end screen shown in FIG. 331 is displayed during the period until the special chart 2 variation corresponding to the special chart 2 hold is finished in the normal state. is displayed.

In addition, details will be described later, but at the timing when the first half period of the final time-saving variable effect ended, the special map 2 hold had not reached the upper limit, and after the second time-saving variable effect started (the second time-saving variable effect After the effect result of the variable effect is set), if you newly acquire special figure 2 pending, the newly acquired special figure will be displayed at the start timing of the first special figure 2 variation in the normal state after the end of the final time saving variation. If the pre-reading process is executed for the Fig. 2 hold (special figure 2 hold that is not reflected in the performance result of the 2nd time-saving variation effect) and the result of the pre-read process is a win, the display shown in Fig. 331 is executed. An effect is executed in which a small winning winning screen (see FIG. 330(a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, the configuration of the counter buffer in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 332, in this sixth control example, a second winning type counter C6 and a second fluctuation type counter CS2 are added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 240) in the fourth control example described above. In addition, a variable type counter storage area for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1 is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. In addition, a second winning type counter storage area for storing the value of the second winning type counter C6 and a second fluctuation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are provided. The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol reserved ball execution area and the normal symbol reserved ball execution area have been changed in accordance with the counter value stored in the reserved ball storage area. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process of the main controller), and the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. At this timing, the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The random number value for winning the normal symbol is defined in the random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 334(d)). When the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the random number value for a normal symbol win defined in the 5 random number per normal symbol table 202ec, it is determined that the normal symbol is a win.

Here, the random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol will be explained with reference to FIG. 334(d). The 5 random numbers per normal symbol table 202ec is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state (high probability state for normal symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in the lottery for normal symbols. It is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 334(d), when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the lottery of normal symbols It is determined whether the number is within the range of "5 to 28", and if it is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a regular hit. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, it is determined whether the obtained value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204" in the lottery of normal symbols. If the number is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a regular hit.

In other words, in this sixth control example, in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, there is a probability of 1/10 of winning, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, there is a probability of 5/6. It is configured so that you can win at any time. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the normal state, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 as a game with a normal symbol at a probability of 1/100 of winning a normal symbol (normal symbol winning). It is configured so that an easy long open winning game can be executed. In addition, during the time saving state, the long open winning game is always executed when the regular winning symbol is won.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000. To allow a player who is playing a game to simultaneously execute a game in which a special drawing 1 drawing is executed and a game in which a special drawing 2 drawing is carried out (a game aiming at a specific winning in a general drawing drawing). I can do it.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 999, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). The second variation type counter CS2 determines one normal pattern fluctuation pattern from the set normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set for this common figure fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the above-described main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 136) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main processing. . In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef (see FIG. 338), which stores the random value for determining one fluctuation time of normal symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 of.

Returning to FIG. 332, the explanation will be continued. In this sixth control example, a fluctuation type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is The system is configured so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that will actually be executed can be read in advance by determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that will actually be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the timing at which the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol that is held and stored is executed.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the winning information of the normal symbol, that is, the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67, is the first winning random number counter used for the winning lottery of the normal symbol. C2, a second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of winning game per common symbol.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 333(a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 333 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed adoption of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 333(a), for the A1 control example described above, the first winning random number table C202ea is used instead of the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 242(a)), and the first winning type is selected. A first winning type selection 5 table 202eb is provided in place of the table 202b, a random number 5 table 202ec is provided in place of the normal random number table 202c, a variable pattern 5 table 202ee is provided in place of the variable pattern table 202d, and a small hit is provided. A small winning type selection table 202eg is provided in place of the type selection table 202e, a small winning scenario 5 table 202eh is provided in place of the jackpot scenario table 202aa, and a small winning scenario 5 table 202ei is provided in place of the small winning scenario table 202ab. The difference is that a 5-type selection table 202ed per ordinary figure and a variation pattern selection table 202ef for ordinary figures are newly provided.

The first winning random number 5 table 202ea is different from the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 242) described above in that the specified value for determining a jackpot is different, and other than that, the first winning random number table 202ea is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334, the contents defined in the first random number 5 table 202ea will be explained. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 5 table 202ea. As shown in FIG. 334(a), the first random number 5 table 202ea is the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1, which is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol It has a special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery (special symbol 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 will be explained. FIG. 334(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1. As shown in FIG. 334(b), a "big win" is defined in the range of "0 to 3" for the value of the first random number counter C1, and a "small win" is defined in the range of "10, 11". That is, in this sixth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small jackpot is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 will be explained. FIG. 334(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 334(c), a "big win" is defined when the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 3", and a "small win" is defined to be in the range of "10 to 149". That is, in this sixth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small jackpot is about 1/7.1.

That is, in this sixth control example, the same jackpot probability is set for the special pattern 1 lottery and the special pattern 2 lottery, and the small win probability is configured to be higher in the special pattern 2 lottery. As mentioned above, in this sixth control example, since the configuration is such that a small winning win can become an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, the special drawing 2 lottery is a special feature that makes it easier to execute the jackpot game than the special drawing 1 drawing. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as mentioned above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery, but the same jackpot probability is set for the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing. A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a low probability state (high probability state of special symbols) and a low probability state (low probability state of special symbols).

The first winning type selection table 202eb is different from the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 243) described above in that the jackpot type that is set when winning a jackpot is different. Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb will be explained with reference to FIG. 335(a). FIG. 335(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb includes the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1, which is referred to when winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing, and the special drawing 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 will be explained. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. The pachinko machine 10 of this sixth control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, three types from jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is "0", the jackpot type is defined as "jackpot AA (15R time saving 99 jackpots)", and "jackpot AB" is defined in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time-saving 5-time jackpot)" is defined, and a "jackpot AC (7R time-saving 1-time jackpot)" is defined in the range of "16 to 99."

In other words, in a normal state in which a left-handed game is played and the special drawing 1 lottery is executed, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the jackpot game ends. There is. The end conditions of the time saving state are set differently depending on the set type of jackpot.

Specifically, when jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the above-mentioned common time-saving ending conditions are set, so whether you win a hit (big hit or small win) in the special drawing lottery or the special drawing fluctuation The time saving state continues until (the sum of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation) reaches 99 times. In this sixth control example, a right-handed game is performed in which the special symbol 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state, and in the special symbol 2 lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small prize is 1/250. 7.1, so for example, if a time-saving state based on jackpot AA is set, the special pattern fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning in the special drawing 2 lottery. The probability of reaching this point is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when jackpot AA is selected, the game state is essentially set in a time saving state until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special drawing fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning in the special drawing 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time saving end condition will be met and the time saving state will end) is approximately 46%. . In other words, when jackpot AB is set, that is, when 5 times of special chart 2 variation is set as the time-saving end condition, the probability of winning a hit before the time-saving end condition is met (consecutive chance probability) is This is approximately 54%.

In addition, when jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 fluctuation is 1" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special symbol variation reaches the predetermined number of times (one time) without winning in the special symbol drawing 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time-saving termination condition is met and the time-saving state ends) is 85%. In other words, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the number of variations of special chart 2 is set once as the time-saving end condition, the probability of winning a winning prize (consecutive chance probability) before the time-saving end condition is met is It will be about 15%.

As explained above, depending on the type of jackpot that is set when winning a jackpot on special drawing 1, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state (probability of consecutive chances) that is set is configured to differ, and jackpot AA is the most advantageous jackpot type, then jackpot AB is the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games to be executed as a jackpot game is also defined as a different value depending on the type of jackpot, such that a round game of "15R" is executed for jackpot AA, and "7R" for jackpot AB and AC. stipulated in The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so in terms of the jackpot games that are executed, jackpot AA is the most popular for players. This is an advantageous type of jackpot.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the jackpot type (jackpot AA) with the highest consecutive winning probability is configured to execute the jackpot game with the highest number of rounds (15R), but the invention is not limited to this. The jackpot type with the highest consecutive winning probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the most advantageous gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, if you win a jackpot just before the game hall closes, you should choose a jackpot type that allows you to win more prize balls in one jackpot game than a jackpot type that grants (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of successive winnings. This is a more advantageous type of jackpot, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit on the number of times the time-saving state can be set across jackpot games, one jackpot win will occur just before the limit is reached. The jackpot type that allows you to win a large number of prize balls is the more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, if the number of consecutive games (the number of times a jackpot game has been executed without transitioning to the normal state) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times), the player will receive a bonus (e.g., a valuable In a pachinko machine 10 that can provide bonuses (images), if a player is trying to obtain a benefit, a jackpot type that provides (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of consecutive winnings is a more advantageous jackpot type.

Note that the above-mentioned consecutive winning probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in this sixth control example, the special drawing 2 lottery is (4 pieces) can be stored on hold up to an upper limit. Therefore, even after the time-saving termination condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state, it is possible to execute the special drawing 2 lottery as many times as the number of special drawing 2 holdings stored in the holding memory (the number of remaining special drawing 2 holdings). It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small win through the special drawing 2 lottery. As mentioned above, in this sixth control example, the probability of winning a small hit by the special drawing 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, so the remaining number of remaining special drawing 2 reservations (maximum 4) It becomes possible to sufficiently aim for a small winning prize by drawing the special drawing 2 lottery a corresponding number of times.

Specifically, when the number of Zantoku Chart 2 reserved is 1, the probability of winning a small hit in the Toku Zhu 2 lottery based on the Zantoku Chart 2 reservation (pullback probability) is about 14%, When the number of 2 balls reserved is 2, the pullback probability is about 28.5%, and when the number of remaining pitches 2 is 3, the pullback probability is about 39.6%, and the number of pitches held on the remaining pitch 2 is about 39.6%. If there are 4, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, by configuring the special drawing 2 drawing to be able to be stored and stored, and by configuring it so that the special drawing 2 drawing based on the remaining special drawing 2 holding is executed even after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state, Regardless of the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, it is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically in order to obtain the special drawing 2 pending until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, once the time-saving state is set, the above-mentioned gaming period during the time-saving state (continuous winning period) and the period during which the special drawing 2 drawing based on the remaining special drawing 2 reservation during the normal state is executed (withdrawal) Because it is possible to aim for a small win in the special drawing 2 lottery during the two periods (period) and It is possible to reduce the probability of transitioning to a normal state in which the player is aiming for one lottery, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and a jackpot game (continuous jackpot game) is executed based on the small win, the It is configured so that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and a jackpot game (pullback jackpot game) is executed based on the small win win. . As a result, even if the consecutive winning period has passed, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to win a small win during the pullback period, which prevents the player from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 will be explained. FIG. 335(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2. The pachinko machine 10 of this sixth control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot type is defined as "jackpot AD (15R time saving 99 jackpots)", and the value is in the range of "20 to 69". ``Jackpot AE (12R time-saving 99 times jackpot)'' is specified, and ``Jackpot AF (7R time-saving 99 times jackpot)'' is specified in the range of ``70 to 99''.

In other words, when a jackpot is won by the special drawing 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set in which the time-saving state continues until the special drawing variation reaches 99 times after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, in the special drawing 2 drawing, which is executed less frequently than the special drawing 1 drawing, if the player wins a jackpot, which has a probability of winning a small hit at least three times lower, A gaming state can be reliably provided. Therefore, for players who had the special experience of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, which does not occur often, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, one time saving setting) is set, and the desire to play is discouraged. It is possible to prevent a significant decrease.

In addition, each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. The number of round games to be played is set to be different, and the round game is specified to be executed with a jackpot AD of "15R", a jackpot AE of "12R", and a jackpot AF of "7R". The greater the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of jackpot games executed. This is a jackpot type.

The random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol changes the value of the second random number counter C4 defined corresponding to the normal symbol, compared to the above random number table 202c (see FIG. 242(d)). They differ in that they are the same, but are otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted. Here, with reference to FIG. 334(d), the contents of the random number 5 per normal symbol table 202ec will be explained. FIG. 334(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 334(d), the random number per normal symbol 5 table 202ec includes values that are referenced when performing a lottery per common symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol, and values that are referred to when performing a lottery per common symbol in a high probability state of a normal symbol. A value that is referred to when executing a drawing per drawing is specified, and specifically, in a low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28". A "win" is defined, and in a high probability state of normal symbols, a "win" is defined when the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204".

The ordinary symbol per type selection 5 table 202ed is a data table for selecting the ordinary symbol per type type, and when the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery is executed with reference to the ordinary symbol per random number table 202ec and a winning is achieved. This is what is referred to. In this sixth control example, the electric accessory 640a is installed so that the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 as a game to win a regular symbol, which is executed when a regular symbol is won in a low probability state of a regular symbol. It is configured to be able to execute a long opening winning game in which an opening operation is performed, and a short opening winning game in which an electric accessory 640a is opened in such a way that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 than in the long opening winning game. Different winning games are executed depending on the type of winning pattern selected at the time of winning the winning pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 336, the contents stipulated in the per ordinary figure type selection 5 table 202ed will be explained. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 5-type selection table 202ed per standard figure. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the per-normal symbol type selection 5 table 202ed selects two types of per-regular symbol ( It is configured such that A per ordinary figure and B per ordinary figure are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (ordinary symbol low probability), the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0", "A per ordinary symbol" is defined, and " ``B per ordinary map'' is defined in the range of ``1 to 99''. In addition, the probability state of the normal symbol is a high probability state (common symbol high certainty), and the "ordinary symbol per hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0, 1", "B per ordinary map" is defined in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, with reference to FIG. 336(b), the relationship between the per-regular pattern type selected in the per-regular pattern selection table 202ed and the gaming state at the time when the per-regular pattern game is executed will be explained. do. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the type of common symbol and the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this sixth control example, a winning lottery is executed according to the gaming state set at the timing (common symbol fluctuation start timing) of executing a winning lottery for a regular symbol (common symbol), and a winning lottery is executed. If the player wins, the content of the game for each common symbol is set according to the gaming state set at the timing of executing the game for the common symbol (the timing for stopping variation of the common symbol). In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example, since the game state is configured to change depending on the lottery situation and fluctuation situation of special symbols (special symbols), the game state is changed independently from the special symbol lottery game. In the regular lottery game to be executed, different game states are set at the timing of executing the regular lottery and the timing of executing the regular lottery game that is executed when a winning result is won in the regular lottery. There's a case.

For example, if a regular symbol lottery is executed during a special symbol variation (time-saving final variation) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high A winning lottery is executed using the determination value specified in (Accuracy). If the player wins, the normal pattern fluctuation stops after a predetermined normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, and then the normal pattern winning game is executed. Here, if the time saving final variation ends during the normal pattern variation and the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the gaming state at the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed. It turns out.

In such a case, if you set the game mode of the game to win a common symbol according to the gaming state set at the time the common symbol lottery was executed, even though the normal state is set, There is a problem in that a regular map winning game (long open winning game) that is executed during a time-saving state as a regular map winning game is executed, and an excessively advantageous benefit (special map 2 lottery) is provided to the player. there were.

On the other hand, in the present sixth control example, the game state set at the timing of executing the game per regular symbol is determined, and the content of the game per regular symbol is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state during the fluctuation of the normal symbols, it is possible to execute a game per common symbol corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (special drawing 2 lottery).

Specifically, when the per-regular pattern A is selected (set) as the per-regular pattern type, the game state set at the execution timing of the per-regular pattern game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). Regardless of this, a game is executed based on the long open winning game. On the other hand, when B is selected (set) as the normal pattern winning type, the game state set at the execution timing of the normal pattern winning game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is the normal pattern. If it is in a low probability state (general pattern low certainty), a game to hit the general pattern short opening will be executed, and if it is in a high probability state (general pattern high certainty) for the normal pattern, a game to hit the general pattern long opening will be executed. It is stipulated as follows.

Here, the content of the winning games of the regular pattern long open winning game and the normal pattern short opening winning game, which are the normal pattern winning games, will be explained. The long open winning game for regular figures is a game for winning ordinary figures in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (positioned in the open state) so that the ball can easily enter the second prize opening 640, and the winning number is 0.1. After being in a closed state (opening period) for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then, after being in a closed state (standby period) for 1.5 seconds, it is opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second opening period) A game with a common symbol is executed. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

In addition, in this sixth control example, when a game with a long open winning game is executed, two open periods are set to ensure a period during which the ball can enter the second prize opening 640. are doing. Then, when the first opening period of the two opening periods has passed, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, and the result of the determination is that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640. If it is determined that this is the case, the system is configured to display a warning screen (see FIG. 324(a)) to alert the player to play a game in which a ball is won in the second prize opening 640. There is.

With this configuration, a player who does not realize that a game with a long opening (right-handed game) has been executed in a state where the normal state is set (a state in which a left-handed game is being played) In this case, the player can be notified to play the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a disadvantageous game result. In addition, in this sixth control example, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) of waiting period after displaying the caution screen (see FIG. 324(a)). configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (approximately 0.5 seconds) it takes for the ball fired by the player to play a right-handed game to reach the second winning slot 640. has been done. This makes it easier for a player who plays a right-handed game after seeing the display of the caution screen (see FIG. 324(a)) to win a ball into the second winning hole 640.

In addition, in this sixth control example, when the scenario for winning a regular pattern is updated as time passes and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game for winning a general pattern ends, and when the second prize is won during the game for winning a general pattern. Two types of win-win end conditions are set for ending the win-win game when the number of balls entered into the opening 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one ball).

Then, if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the first opening period, or if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, the ball enters the second winning hole 640. The system is configured to provide different notification modes to indicate what has happened. Specifically, if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that a proper game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start of the regular game. The game is configured to display a game explanation (such as a comment such as ``Be sure to hit right while playing a long open hit game'') so that you can play the game properly the next time you play a game with a long open win. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won a ball in the second prize opening 640 during the first opening period, the game contents that the player has already understood may be repeatedly notified and the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the short opening game for regular symbols, a game for opening the electric accessories 640a for 0.1 seconds is executed after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

The above-mentioned short open winning game is a short open winning game in which the electric accessory 640a has a short opening period of 0.1 seconds, so the ball cannot actually enter the second prize opening 640. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 336(b), this normal pattern short open winning game is a normal pattern winning game that is executed only during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal pattern low probability), and is the same as described above. As expected, since the normal pattern short opening game ends 0.2 seconds after the start of the normal pattern short opening winning game, the general pattern short opening winning game is executed while the player is playing a left-handed game. Even if a right-handed game is played, the regular game will end before the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second prize opening 640 (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 during the normal pattern short open winning game.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second prize opening 640 during the game of short opening. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be configured such that the electric accessory 640a When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured to allow balls to flow down from one end to the other end, and only the balls that flow out from the other end of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win a prize. It is preferable to arrange the second prize opening 640 at a position such that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is at least 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, when a game with a normal figure short opening is executed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Since the ball cannot reach the other end side, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example, the winning game content of the game per regular figure is set according to the game state set at the timing when the game per regular figure is executed. Therefore, even if you win a common symbol in a time-saving state (high probability state of common symbol) in which you win a common symbol with a high probability, and the game per common symbol based on the winning of that common symbol is in the normal state (low probability state of common symbol). Even if the game is executed in the state), it is possible to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern long opening winning game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 336(a), in this sixth control example, the rate at which the type per normal pattern (A per normal pattern) in which the game is executed per normal pattern long opening is selected, regardless of the gaming state is different between the low probability state of normal symbols (low probability of common symbols) and the high probability state of normal symbols (high probability of common symbols). In the probability mode, the selection is made with a probability of 2%. By configuring in this way, when the general pattern is high and the probability is high, it is possible to win the general pattern when the pattern is high, and it is more likely The probability that a game with a common figure long opening is executed when a common figure is low is more likely to be executed when a common figure is low. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game content of the game per regular symbol is set according to the gaming state at the timing when the game per regular symbol is executed, the content of the game per regular symbol is set when the game changes from the time saving state to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that a normal figure winning game becomes a common figure long open winning game, and the player can be made to pay close attention to which game content the normal figure winning game will be executed.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee is a data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( It is configured so that various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery results of the special drawing lottery and the set gaming state. Note that the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee is the same as the various variation patterns used in each control example or each embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted and this The description will continue focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee used in the control example.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee will be explained with reference to FIG. 339(a). FIG. 339(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 5 table 202ee. As shown in FIG. 339(a), the variation pattern 5 table 202ee is the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 that is referenced when the gaming state is the time saving state. It has a time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202ee2, and the special symbol variation pattern is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the special symbol variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339(b), the contents of the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 included in the variation pattern 5 table 202ee will be explained. FIG. 339(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1. As shown in FIG. 339(b), the variation pattern 5 table 202ee includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in this sixth control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is played in which the special symbol 1 lottery is mainly executed, and the second special symbol ( The patterns in which the special drawing 2) lottery is executed include the pattern in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in accordance with the special drawing 2 holding stored at the end of the time saving state, and the pattern in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in accordance with the holding of the special drawing 2 held at the end of the time saving state, and the pattern in which the long opening lottery is executed in the regular drawing lottery. There is a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the ball winning in the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, a time saving final variation effect is executed which can notify the pre-read result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the start of the time saving final variation. It is composed of The performance result of the time-saving final variation performance is continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed after the time-saving state ends (into the normal state) ends.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery executed between the number of special symbol variations 1 to 4 as a variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) variation executed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special symbol 2 variation, and if the lottery result of the special symbol 2 variation is "lost", the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of , "short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "win (big hit, small win)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol variation after the normal state is set is a special symbol 2 variation, and the lottery result of that special symbol 2 variation is "missing", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Win", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, and the special symbol changes after the normal state is set. If the third time is a special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of that special figure 2 variation is "miss", it will be "short miss A (0.5 seconds)" regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. is selected, and in the case of "win", "short win C (1 second)" is selected. If the fourth special symbol variation after the normal state is set is a special symbol 2 variation, and if the lottery result of that special symbol 2 variation is "lost", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Win", "Short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

With this configuration, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is the maximum number (4 pieces) at the end of the time saving state, the special drawing 2 lottery corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding will be won (small win). , jackpot) (the period during which the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the win) and the lottery results of the special symbol 2 lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 pending. The period until it becomes a miss can be unified to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, whether there is winning information in the special drawing 2 pending or not, simply controlling the results to be displayed for 2 seconds after the end of the time-saving final fluctuation will give the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 variation in the normal state without giving it. In addition, no matter what number of special drawings 2 is reserved, the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning status is stopped and displayed will be unified (2 seconds after the normal state is set). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special symbols 2 were reserved to win.

In addition, as shown in Figure 339(b), if the number of special symbol variations is "5 or more" as the variation time of special symbol 2 variation in the normal state, the number of special symbol 2 reservations at the time the time saving state ends , the regular pattern long opening winning game is executed in the normal state, and the special pattern 2 lottery is executed based on the ball winning in the second prize opening 640, so the series of effects described above are executed. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode ( performance mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 222ee2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, will be explained. FIG. 340 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of the special drawing lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In this sixth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which is likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player compared to the special drawing 1 drawing, is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, so the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 is configured so that when a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for a ball to enter the first prize opening 64, which triggers the execution of the special drawing 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery that is executed during the time-saving state where the right-handed game is executed is the special figure 1 lottery that is executed based on the special figure 1 reservation that has already been obtained at the end timing of the jackpot game when the time-saving state is set. There will be 1 lottery.

Specifically, if the player wins a jackpot while the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving initial setting state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640. If the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained because an easy game is not being played, and there is a special figure 1 reservation at that time, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating time) of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the period until the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long period of fluctuation (for example, 60 seconds) is used. Once set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game cannot be smoothly played during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state. Thereby, even if the time saving state is set in a state where the maximum number (4 pieces) of special figure 1 reservations is secured, the special figure 1 variation can be executed without interfering with the special figure 2 variation.

Further, in this sixth control example, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed even after the jackpot game ends until the special figure 2 variation is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 1 fluctuation is fluctuating in a short time during the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a jackpot, the continuously displayed jackpot game end screen is configured to be shifted to the jackpot game screen.

The normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ef is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol variation (common symbol variation), and includes the gaming state at the time of executing the common symbol variation, It is configured such that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the lottery result of the regular figure variation and the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef will be explained with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef. As shown in FIG. 338, in this sixth control example, the short variation (2 seconds) in which a short variation time is set as the variation time of the regular pattern variation, and the long variation in which a longer variation time is set than the short variation. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected.

The configuration is such that when a long variation is selected as the variation time of the common figure variation, the common figure variation effect is executed. In addition, in this sixth control example, only during the period when a normal state is set in which it is difficult to win a common pattern long opening, a general pattern fluctuation effect is executed to suggest that a general pattern long opening is won. Because of this configuration, long fluctuations (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are defined only in the data table that is referenced during the normal state.

Specifically, if the gaming state at the time when the ordinary symbol variation is executed is the normal state (low probability state of ordinary symbols) and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol variation is "A per common symbol", the acquisition When the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 499", "Permanent pattern long variation A (30 seconds)" is selected, and when the value is in the range of "500 to 999", "Public pattern long variation B (60 seconds)" is selected. are respectively stipulated, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "B per common pattern", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999". A (2 seconds)" is specified. In addition, if the lottery result of the regular pattern fluctuation is "out", if the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", the "common pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is " ``997, 998'' defines a ``general figure long variation A (30 seconds)'' and ``999'' defines a ``general figure long variation B (60 seconds).'' On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the normal symbol variation is executed is the short time state (normal symbol high probability state), regardless of the lottery result of the common symbol variation and the value of the second variation type counter CS2, "General figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is defined.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "A common pattern per hit", that is, the general pattern long fluctuation is a long open win, the general pattern long fluctuation is set as the general pattern fluctuation time. It is designed to be easily selected. Therefore, by executing the normal pattern variation effect, the player can expect to have won the normal pattern long open win. Further, the configuration is such that different variation times (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long variation in which the general figure variation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the general pattern fluctuation effect until the start of the general pattern long opening winning game, so that, for example, when the general pattern fluctuation effect is started, It is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the ball is stopped and the ball is shot again after a specific period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the general pattern change is a failure, although slightly, the general pattern long fluctuation is configured to be selected, so even if the general pattern fluctuation effect is executed, it will not be normal. You can leave open the possibility that you won't win the long opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the normal pattern variation effect to the end.

In addition, in this sixth control example, when winning the "normal pattern winning A" which is the normal pattern long open winning, the long variation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected. , without being limited to this, for example, in some cases when winning "A", "Short fluctuation" or "Middle fluctuation (10 to 15 Seconds) may also be selectable.Then, if a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it may be configured such that the regular pattern variation effect is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the normal pattern long open winning game without executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect, so it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game, It is possible to predict the execution timing of a game with a long opening per game and to make it difficult to play a game in which a ball is fired in accordance with the predicted timing.

In addition, in this sixth control example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "normal pattern winning B" in which the "normal pattern short winning game" is executed as the normal pattern winning game, the "long variation" is Although the configuration is such that it is not executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small winning type selection 5 table 202eg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery. This small win type selection 5 table 202eg is different from the small win type selection table 202e (see FIG. 244) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment in that the contents of the specified small win types are changed, Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 337, the small winning type selection 5 table 202eg will be explained. FIG. 337(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 5 table 202eg, and FIG. 337(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special drawing 1 small winning type selection 5 table 202eg1. FIG. 337(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special drawing 2 small winning type selection 5 table 202eg2.

The jackpot scenario 5 table 202eh and the small jackpot scenario 5 table 202ei are the contents stipulated in each scenario for the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the small jackpot scenario table 202ab of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the contents of the jackpot game or small win game executed in the control example, and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 333(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the sixth control example will be described. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the sixth control example deletes the scenario counter 203aa and the specific control flag 203ab compared to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the A1 embodiment described above (see FIG. 241(b)). , the difference is that a special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is added, and the other configurations are the same. Identical components will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is referred to when determining whether to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality.

In this sixth control example, the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is configured to be different depending on the type of jackpot won. Thereby, the ease of ending the time saving state can be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of a jackpot win, but also in the set jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 341(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(a), the ROM 222 in this control example has a variable pattern selection 5 table instead of the variable pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 of the A1 embodiment described above (see FIG. 251(a)). The difference is that 222ea is provided. Note that here, the differences from the above-mentioned variation pattern selection table 222a will be mainly explained, and the detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea will be explained with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variable pattern selection 5 table 222ea, and FIG. 342(b) is the time saving final variable pattern selection 5 table included in the variable pattern selection 5 table 222ea. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in H.222ea3.

As shown in FIG. 342(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea has three variation pattern selection tables in association with the gaming state and variation situation. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, A normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 that is referred to in a certain case, a time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 that is referenced when the time saving state is in the time saving state, and a time saving final variation pattern referenced when it is the final variation of the time saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3.

The normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 and the time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 described above have the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table explained in each control example or each embodiment. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (performance mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time-saving state, that is, when selecting the performance mode of the variation effect for the special symbol variation when the time-saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. It is a data table that includes the symbol type of the change, the lottery result, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), and the presence or absence of a hit in the reservation (winning information storage area 223a). The configuration is such that different variation patterns (performance modes) are selected based on the result of determining whether winning information indicating a win is included in the winning information stored in the winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342(b), when the time-saving final variation is special figure 1, that is, when the time-saving final variation is 99 times, which is one of the common time-saving termination conditions among the time-saving termination conditions. If the special pattern variation when "" is established is the special pattern 1 variation, "time-saving final for special pattern 1" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the lottery result of the variation or the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2. be done.

Next, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, and the lottery result (right/wrong judgment result) of the variation is "win" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final". A" is selected, the number of balls reserved for special drawing 2 is "1, 2", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special drawing 2 holding, then "time-saving final A" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. , If winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, the "time saving final B" is selected as a variable pattern.

Then, if the lottery result (judgment result) of the fluctuation is "win", the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is "3", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special drawing 2 reservation, the fluctuation "Time-saving final C" is selected as the pattern, and if winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, "time-saving final D" is selected as the variable pattern.

On the other hand, if the time-saving final variation is special chart 2, and the lottery result (right/wrong judgment result) of the variation is "lost" and the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final E". ” is selected, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “1, 2”, and the winning information indicating a win is included in the special figure 2 pending, “time-saving final B” is selected as the fluctuation pattern, If the winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, the "time-saving final F" is selected as a variable pattern.

In addition, if the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the change is "lost", the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "3", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special figure 2 reserve, the change "Time-saving final D" is selected as the pattern, and if winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, "time-saving final E" is selected as the variable pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 341(b). FIG. 341(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example has a state storage area 223ea, Series production flag 223eb, pseudo series production flag 223ec, short time final variation flag 223ed, small hit caution flag 223ee, non-variation winning flag 223ef, special figure variation time counter 223eg, regular figure variation time counter 223eh, continuous series production flag 223ej, The difference is that a series performance counter 223ek is added.

The state storage area 223ea is a storage area for temporarily storing the current gaming state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main controller 110. In this control example, the state storage area 223ea contains information indicating the gaming state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the winning type (jackpot type, The information indicating the small winning type) is stored. Based on the various information stored in this state storage area 223ea, the presentation mode is configured to be variably set.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the state storage area 223ea is configured to temporarily store previously set gaming states in addition to information indicating the current gaming state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute fluctuations based on the transition status of the gaming state (from which gaming state to which gaming state has the transition been made).

The series effect flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing a series of effects are satisfied, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing a series of effects are satisfied. Here, in this control example, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as a variation pattern of a winning special symbol lottery, or when a long variation of normal symbols is executed, the execution conditions of a series of effects are set. It is configured so that it holds true.

This series effect flag 223eb is set when a series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 371) in the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 371), or in the winning variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 373). , when a series of effects is set (C4402: Yes in Figure 373), it is set to on (C4208 in Figure 371, C4403 in Figure 373), and in the small win related command processing (see C3504 in Figure 366(a)). , is referred to when setting the performance mode during the small winning game (C3701 in FIG. 366(a)). It is also referenced when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370) and the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371). Then, in the series of effects update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375), if it is determined that the conditions for continuous execution of the series of effects are not satisfied, it is set to OFF (see C4613 in FIG. 375).

As described above, this control example is configured such that a series of effects are executed in response to a plurality of opportunities (special drawing lottery, regular drawing lottery). Even with this configuration, by using the series effect flag 223eb, it is possible to prevent a series of effects from being set (executed) in duplicate.

The pseudo series effect flag 223ec is a flag to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure variation is a loss and the execution conditions for the series effect are satisfied, and the series effect is set as a variation effect of the special figure variation. This is set to on when the This pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to have a lower priority than the above-mentioned series effect flag 223eb, and when the series effect flag 223eb is set to on while the same series effect is being executed. , a different effect setting process is executed depending on when the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to on.

Specifically, in the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371), if the series effect flag 223eb is set to on (for example, if a series effect is executed as a winning variation effect of a special figure variation) case), the configuration is such that a new series of effects will not be executed even if the normal figure fluctuation satisfies the execution conditions for a series of effects, whereas the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to on. (For example, when a series of effects is executed as a variation effect of a special pattern variation), if the normal pattern variation satisfies the execution conditions of a series of effects, and the special conditions are also satisfied. In this case, a new series of performances (special series of performances) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 371).

In this way, in a state where the same series of productions is being executed, the process of executing a new series of productions (processing of replacing the production mode of the series of productions that is currently being executed) based on the execution trigger of the series of productions that is currently being executed. Since it is possible to vary whether or not to perform the performance, it is possible to diversify the presentation contents of the series of presentations. In addition, only when it is possible to display a performance result that is more advantageous to the player than the performance result of the series of performances currently being executed, the performance mode of the series of performances is replaced. The player can be made to watch a series of performances while expecting that the number will change.

The time-saving final variation flag 223ed is a flag to indicate that the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time-saving state, and is set to ON when the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time-saving state. . By setting this time-saving final variation flag 223ed to ON, it is possible to set the performance mode for the time-saving final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223ee is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through a specific area even after a predetermined period of time has passed during the small win game, and is a flag for a predetermined period (1 second) from the start of the small win game. Set to on if the ball has not passed through a specific area even after . Then, by setting the small hit caution flag 223ee on, a guidance display mode (see FIG. 325(a)) for causing the player to play the right-handed game during the small winning game is displayed. Then, it is set to off at the timing when the small winning game ends.

The non-variation winning flag 223ef is a flag to indicate that the special figure 1 variation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Set to ON when special figure 1 variation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, and to cause a ball to enter the first prize opening 64 and execute a special drawing 1 lottery. Then, a general drawing lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left side gaming area, and when the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is a general drawing long opening win, the electric accessory 640a Since a game with a regular long opening is executed in which the ball is opened long, a right-handed game is executed in order to win a ball in the second winning hole 640.

In other words, when the game is being played normally, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, if the normal state is set and a game is played in which the ball simply passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right side gaming area of the game board 13, the ball passes through the through gate 67. This means that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing. Here, as for the board configuration of the game board 13 of the sixth control example, the proportion of balls fired in left-handed games passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand game area is higher than that in right-handed games. The configuration is such that the percentage of balls passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area is higher.

In this way, in a normal state, if you play a right-handed game and try to execute only the general lottery, even if you win the long open winning by the general lottery, It is configured so that variable effects are not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a right-handed game in a normal state to understand the timing at which the regular pattern long open winning game is executed.

The special symbol variation time counter 223eg and the regular symbol variation time counter 223eh are counters for measuring each symbol variation time, and when a symbol variation is executed, a value corresponding to the current variation time is set. Ru. Then, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, that value is periodically subtracted. By using the values of the special symbol variation time counter 223eg and the regular symbol variation time counter 223eh, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each symbol variation time during symbol variation.

The continuous series effect flag 223ej indicates a continuous series effect (see FIG. 317(b) ) is set, and is set on when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series performance counter 223ek is a counter for updating the performance scenario of a series of performances, and when a series of performances is set, a value corresponding to the performance period of the series performance to be executed this time is set, and the value is , is updated in the performance update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) that is periodically executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113. Note that this series performance counter 223ek is set to a value indicating the period until the series performance is completed to the end (the performance in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 322(b))). The performance mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of a series of performances, the performance end condition (for example, the condition that is satisfied when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the regular game winning game and the special pattern 2 reservation cannot be obtained) is satisfied. However, when the series of performances is to be ended, a performance mode for indicating the end of the series of performances is set, and the value of the series of performances counter 223ek is reset to zero.

The re-prereading flag 223em is a flag for indicating that it is necessary to perform the pre-reading process again on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and it is necessary to perform the pre-reading process again. Set to on if In this sixth control example, as a variable effect corresponding to the final special figure change in the time-saving state, a variable effect (time-saving final change effect) in which the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of special figure 2 pending is configured to be executed. It is configured to perform a pre-reading process for the acquired special figure 2 hold at a specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period, and to set a performance mode corresponding to the pre-reading result.

The above-mentioned re-look ahead flag 223em is set to ON when the final special symbol variation is being executed and a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired after a specific timing of the final special symbol variation period has elapsed, and is set to ON. In this case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 variation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the pre-reading process for the special figure 2 pending is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the pre-reading process is executed.

The reservation upper limit flag 223en is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 has reached the upper limit value (4), and is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 has reached the upper limit value (4). Set to on. Then, it is referred to when setting the production mode of the time-saving final variation production. Specifically, in this sixth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state, a reserved ball is created to obtain special symbol 2 reservation during the first period of the final special symbol fluctuation period. The acquisition performance can be executed, and during the second period after the first period, the time-saving final fluctuation performance can be executed to show the lottery result of the fluctuation and the pre-read result of special drawing 2 pending. If the suspension upper limit flag 223en is set to ON at the start of the first period, the time saving final fluctuation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. .

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player who has already obtained special drawing 2 holding up to the upper limit from performing an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 holding. At the same time, the execution period of the time-saving final variation effect can be extended for players who are playing a game in which they constantly obtain special drawing 2 reservations close to the upper limit, that is, playing a right-handed game. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be made to continue playing the game, and the performance of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223eq is a flag for indicating that the time-saving final variation effect is being executed as a variation effect corresponding to the final special symbol variation, and is usually executed from the second period of the time-saving final variation period. This is set to ON when the time-saving final variation effect is being executed from the first period that is set before the second period. In other words, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of reserved special drawings 2 has reached the upper limit, and during the first period, the time-saving final fluctuation performance (a performance using the first period and the second period) It is set to ON when it is determined that the execution flag 223eq is to be executed, and it is determined whether the executed flag 223eq is set to ON at the start of the second period. Since the presentation mode to be executed during the period has been set, the process for setting a new presentation mode is skipped. Then, when a stop command corresponding to the time saving final variation is received, it is set to OFF.

The special 2 winning flag 223er is a flag for indicating that a ball has won a prize in the second prize opening 640 during the game with a normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and during the game with a normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) This is set to ON when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). This special 2 winning flag 223er is set when it is determined that a ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (C4701 in FIG. 376(a): Yes), is set to on (see C4705 in FIG. 376(a)), and is referenced in the series of effects update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see C4503 in FIG. 375). 375 C4608). In the process of C4608, if it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off) (C4608 in Figure 375: No), the special figure 2 variation will not be executed, and the condition for ending the series of effects is met. Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the sixth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 343 to 359. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are interrupt processing 5 and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup. Processing and main processing will be explained. In addition, in this sixth control example, for the convenience of explanation, the content explained in each of the control examples and each embodiment described above is given a different reference numeral and is redundantly explained in some parts. For parts where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those explained in each control example and each embodiment, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above apply. It is. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this sixth control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applicable to the sixth control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to this sixth control example.

FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 5 is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process 5, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the second winning type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the second winning type counter C6. At the same time, when those counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, 999, 99, 239, 239, 99, and 99, respectively), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process 5 is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (C104). . Thereafter, the starting winning process 5 associated with winning the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (starting winning) is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 5 and the starting winning process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 344 to 349.

After executing the starting winning process 5 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 5, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. After executing the normal symbol variation process 5, the through gate passage process 5 accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352.

After executing the through gate passage process 5, the V entrance passage process 5 is executed (C108), and then the V passage process 5 (C109) is executed. Here, details of the V entrance passing process 5 and the V passing process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 353 and 354.

After executing the V passing process 5 (C109), the firing control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 5 is ended. . Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, special symbol variation processing 5 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 5 (C104). This special symbol variation processing 5 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343), and is used to display the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the three symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (C201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (C201: Yes), it is in a state where the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (C201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a, 37b is not changing (special figure changing) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (C206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 5 is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (C213). The special symbol variation start process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 345.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is The value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (C209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (C209: No), that is, if there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, the main processing is continued. end.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (C210), and by the process of C210. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the changed (subtracted) value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (C211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (C212). Thereafter, the process of C213 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, when executing a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation), the special symbol 2 is It is configured to determine the value of the reserved ball number counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (N2) is greater than 0, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is It is configured to execute a process (special symbol variation start process 5 (see C213)) for starting a special symbol variation (special symbol variation). Thereby, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

In addition, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (C202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been executed (C214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (C214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set (C215). . Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 345. When this special symbol fluctuation start process 5 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It will be done. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined. Accordingly, one of jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE, and jackpot AF is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, it is a small win according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Either AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small win AE, or small win E is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is informed of the lottery result of the current special symbol (determined result of each type of counter) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, if it is a small win, the red LED is lit, and if it is a miss. The red LED and green LED are turned on.

Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot AA is determined, the blue LEDs on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are set to show the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a"). If jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in a manner that shows jackpot AB (for example, in a manner that imitates the letter "b"), and if jackpot AC is determined, it is lit in a manner that represents jackpot AB. Lights up in a manner that indicates AC (for example, in a manner that imitates the letter “c”), and when a jackpot AD is determined, lights in a manner that indicates the jackpot AD (for example, a manner that imitates the letter “d”) let

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the red LED will be displayed for each small win type (small win AA, small win AB, small win AC, small win AD, small win AE, and small win E). Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, in this embodiment, in order for the player to understand each winning type (big winning type and small winning type) determined as described above, the content of each winning type is shown (colors corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols). Although the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a lighting mode formed from lighting modes corresponding to each winning type, other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by checking the lighting conditions of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the current special symbol and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the lottery results of the special symbols may be configured to be displayed in a lighting manner that is differentiated to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery results are different. .

After the process of C215 is completed, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( C216). If this lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type determined for this jackpot. Start settings (jackpot settings such as 15 rounds) are executed (C218).

Note that when the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202eh. Note that the method for updating the jackpot scenario table is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 248 for the A1 control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

After completing the process of C218, next, the jackpot start flag 203h and jackpot flag 203i are set to ON (C219), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (C220), and a stop command is set (C225). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C216: No), a time saving update process is executed (C221). Details of this time-saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but when the time-saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special pattern 2) A process of updating the number of variations (total number of variations of special symbols) is executed. After executing the process of C221, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (C222), and if it is determined that it is a small win (C222: Yes), the small win start setting process 5 (C223) is executed. Then, the process of C225 described above is executed, and this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 347.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss) (C222: No), the process is immediately ended.

As explained above, in the present sixth control example, the time saving update process is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (the timing when the special symbol variation time has elapsed). By configuring in this way, for example, when "1 time special figure 2 fluctuation number" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is a part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Even if it is, the period until the special figure 2 variation stops can be shortened, so it is possible to secure a period for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this sixth control example, it may be configured such that the time saving update process is executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and in this case, the period for one special symbol 2 variation is secured as the time saving state. In order to do so, it is only necessary to configure the system so that "the number of variations in special figure 2 is twice" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition.

Next, special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and is a process executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" This is a process for performing a lottery (judgment of validity) and determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance performed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 5, first, the first winning random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are acquired (C231). Next, the special symbol lottery results are determined based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1, special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is acquired (C232), and the process moves to C233.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is input to the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (figure 1). 334(b))) are compared one by one with the four random numbers set. As mentioned above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers for the first special symbol that will result in a jackpot, and the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these random numbers that will result in a jackpot are set. When the numbers match, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the two random numbers "10, 11" that will be a small win set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see FIG. 334(b)) are If they match, it is determined that it is a small hit with a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different numbers of determination values for determining a small hit. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied depending on the type of special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make the player play the game.

In addition, in this control example, the first random number 5 table 202ea is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols wins a small win. The first winning random number 5 table 202ea may be set so that the winner wins. Specifically, the random number value for the small hit of the special symbol is not set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 corresponding to the first special symbol, but is set in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is better to set a random value that will be a small hit for the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the benefits (small winning games) that can be given to the player depending on the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the jackpot of the special symbol corresponds to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1, and the jackpot of the special symbol corresponds to the value within the other range (4 to 999) according to the type of the special symbol. However, in other configurations, for example, the first special symbol corresponds to a value in a part of the range that results in a jackpot (for example, 0 to 2), and the second special symbol corresponds to a small hit. It may be set as a winning range.

Furthermore, in this control example, the special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, miss) is configured to be performed using the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 5 table 202ea. As another configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, the first random number table may be used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or not. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a jackpot, the second random number table is used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a small win or not. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of special symbols using multiple random number tables in this way, the lottery results of the special symbols can be set more randomly, and fraudulent acts that manipulate the lottery results of the special symbols can be suppressed. .

In this control example, when performing a special symbol lottery, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, the values of multiple random number counters and the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number 5 table 202ea. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot based on the value of the first random number counter, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not is determined based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 345, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C233, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of C232 is a special symbol jackpot (C233). If it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to the current special symbol lottery ( C234), sets the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type (C235), determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time. A corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (C237), and it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined that (C237: Yes), the small winning type is acquired based on the small winning type selection 5 table 202eg according to the type of special symbol corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C238), and the special symbol and small winning type are obtained (C238). The display mode at the time of small winning corresponding to the winning type is set (C239), the small winning fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small winning fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of C237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (C237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss, the result will be a loss corresponding to the type of special symbol. Sets the display mode of the time (C241), determines a variation pattern when missing based on the number of held pitches (C242), sets a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern when missed currently determined (C243), This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol If the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of reserved pitches. Specifically, it is configured such that the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the special symbol lottery result is displayed as a lottery result (losing) that does not give any benefits to the player can be shortened as the number of pending balls increases, so it can be executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of drawings of special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, if it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the time for each special symbol to change, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation where the special symbols do not change during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In this control example, the variation pattern is configured to vary based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the process of special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) is executed. Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed, on the condition that the number of balls on hold reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the ball is fluctuating. good. With this configuration, even while the special symbols are changing, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to secure a large number of reserved balls.

In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or small hit, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The variation patterns may be different based on the number of balls, or the structure may be such that the larger the number of balls on hold, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a long variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Among the 2 special symbols, it may be only the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is executed with priority, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is executed this time. Only the value of the number of reserved balls in the symbol may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the time saving update process (C221) will be explained. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols. This indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state with normal symbols. In addition, in this sixth control example, it is configured such that two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two game states can be set: normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). It is composed of That is, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, the term "time saving state" is sometimes used to indicate a high probability state of normal symbols, and the "normal state" is sometimes used to indicate a low probability state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C251: No), the time saving state is not set, and the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current time-saving state is in progress, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (C252); Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C253). If the current special figure change is a change in special figure 2 (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 change number counter 203ea is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time short number command is set to indicate the values of various counters. (C255), and the process moves to C256.

In the process of C255, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter 203g and the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is set. The remaining time shortening number command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of the status command indicating the gaming status by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later. Output. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined in command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) that a status command (remaining time shortening number of times command) has been received (C3212 in FIG. 360), the command included in the received command The information is extracted and the current gaming state (remaining time shortening number) is stored in the state storage area 223ea. Thereby, it is possible to predict (determine) the remaining period of the time-saving state currently set by the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to set an effect mode according to the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In this control example, each time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 346) is executed, the main controller 110 is configured to output a remaining time saving number command to indicate the remaining time saving number. For example, without being limited to this, a time-saving end condition command to indicate the time-saving end condition set at the time when the time-saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The time-saving termination condition is extracted from the time-saving termination condition command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and then the number of receptions of a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure variation output from the main control device 110 side. may be accumulated, and it may be determined based on the accumulated value whether or not the time saving termination condition is satisfied. With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if the current special figure variation is not the variation of special figure 2 (C253: No), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed and the process moves to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 or not (C256). If the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (C256: Yes), this means that the time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions) are satisfied, so it is determined whether the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea for this purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process moves to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is 0 or not (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is 0 (C258: Yes), it means that the time-saving end condition (corresponding time-saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the common time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the time-saving counter 203g for determining the time is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process moves to C260. On the other hand, in the process of C258, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is not 0 (C258: No), this process is ended as is.

In the process of C260, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this processing ends.

As explained above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 346) includes a plurality of time saving ending conditions (some of the common time saving ending conditions, and The system is configured to be able to determine whether the corresponding time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, and to reset the values of parameters for establishing other time-saving termination conditions when any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. This makes it possible to unify the state after the time saving state ends, regardless of which parameter value the time saving end condition is established based on.

In addition, in this control example, as a time-saving end condition, a common time-saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time-saving state set based on which jackpot type (first end condition that is satisfied when winning a jackpot, small win) The second ending condition is established after the end of the game, the third ending condition is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations (total of special symbols 1 and 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type is set. Although the system is configured to set corresponding time-saving termination conditions (conditions that are satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times), the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are not limited to these. For example, a small win termination condition may be set that is satisfied when the number of small win wins reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times a specific small win type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times. In this case, the small hit termination condition may be set as a common time-saving termination condition, or may be set as a corresponding time-saving termination condition. In addition, an end lottery means is provided to determine whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is a lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends, so it is possible to make the player play the game in the time saving state while giving the player a feeling of excitement. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a special symbol lottery result indicates a specific failure) is satisfied during the time-saving state, various parameters related to the time-saving end condition are set for a predetermined period of time. It may be configured so that it is not updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has passed after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30). The configuration may be such that various parameters related to the time-saving termination conditions are not updated. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably set a period during which the time-saving state continues, allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, a determining means is provided that can determine that a ball did not enter the V winning hole 650a even though a small winning game was executed, and the determining means determines that a ball did not enter the V winning hole 650a. It may be configured such that a time-saving forced termination condition that is satisfied when it is determined that a common time-saving termination condition is established. With this configuration, the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won is determined, and the determination result is a small winning type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball is placed in a specific area within the V winning hole 650a). If it is determined that the game is a jackpot game that would be disadvantageous to the player if it passes (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds, or a jackpot game where a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not firing a ball during a small winning game and aiming to win the next small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) will be explained. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 5 (C223). In this small hit start setting process 5 (C223), a scenario is set for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery. Processing is executed.

In the small win start setting process 5 (C223), first, a scenario (win scenario) corresponding to the set small win type is set based on the small win scenario 5 table 202ei (C291). Next, a small win type corresponding to the small win type determined as the jackpot type value when passing V is set (C292), a start of a small win corresponding to the small win type is set (C293), and a small hit medium flag 203k is set. is set to on (C294), and this process ends. Note that the detailed method for updating the small win scenario (win scenario) in this process is the same as that in the A1 embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 348, the starting winning process 5 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 5 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) in this embodiment. This startup winning process 5 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and is executed when the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 or the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640 is entered. This is a process for determining the presence or absence of a (start-up win), acquiring various random number counters when there is a start-up win, and executing processing for holding the values.

When the starting winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 (C301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (C303).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203d is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process moves to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (C303: Yes), The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command by the process of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) , the values of the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set among the empty holding areas (holding 1st area to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Store it in the first area (C306). In addition, in the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing as the processing from C301 to C306 is performed for the winning of the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640. The only difference is that the reservation process for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed for the winning of the second ball entry opening (winning opening) 640, and the other processing is the same, so the details are as follows. Further explanation will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of C307 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (C309: No), prefetch processing 5 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, prefetch processing 5 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing 5 (C313). When the prefetch process 5 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning prize (C321). If there is no new prize winning (C321: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or not (C322).

In the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (C322: Yes), the process of C306 or C312 of the starting winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) Using the obtained various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see Figure 334(b)), special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 (see Figure 335(b)), and special symbol 1 small hit type selection 5 table 202eg1 (see FIG. 337(b)), the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small win type are acquired (C323), and the process moves to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 (see FIG. 334(c)), The lottery result, jackpot type, and small win type are obtained based on the Figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 (see Figure 335(c)) and the special drawing 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202eg2 (see Figure 337(c)). (C324), the process moves to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big win determination result, jackpot type, small win determination result, small win type) obtained in the process of C323 or C324 described above is set ( C325). Then, this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the prefetching process 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) in this sixth control example, in addition to the above-mentioned prefetching results, when special symbol fluctuations are performed based on the corresponding winning information, The set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is also configured to be able to be determined in advance. Specifically, the configuration is such that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the process of C306 or C312 of the starting winning process 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired by the process of C323 of the prefetch process 5 (see C313 of FIG. 349). Alternatively, in the process of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 5 table 202ee (see FIG. 339), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the process of C325. There is. Thereby, it becomes possible on the audio lamp control device 113 side to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information held and stored will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, the normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 5 (C106). This normal symbol variation processing 5 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343), and is used to display the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a. This is a process for controlling things such as.

In this normal symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (C601). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning includes when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric accessory 640a is being controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (C601: Yes), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (C604: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time saving counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the process of winning a jackpot with a special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a normal symbol, so it is acquired by the process of C607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the random number 5 per normal symbol table 202ec for high probability times (see FIG. 334(d)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (C609 ). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number 5 per symbol table 202ec for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(d)).

In the process of C608, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C608: No), the process moves to C610. In the process of C610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of C607 and the low Based on the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202ec for probability time (see FIG. 334(d)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (C610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number 5 per symbol table 202ec for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(d)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of C609 or C610 is a normal symbol win (C611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (C611: Yes), Next, the type per ordinary figure (A per ordinary figure, B per ordinary figure) is set using the per ordinary figure type selection table 202ed (C612). Specifically, the value of the second winning type counter C6 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary pattern selection 5 table 202ed. As mentioned above, when the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability state for regular symbols), if the value of the second winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is A per regular symbol. If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that the average score is B (see FIG. 336(a)). Alternatively, if the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state for regular symbols), if the value of the second winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the winning is A for regular symbols, and " 1 to 99'', it is determined that the normal figure is B (see FIG. 336(a)).

Next, the display mode at the time of winning is set based on the setting result of C612 (C613), and the process moves to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (C611: No), the current normal symbol lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) is a miss, so the display mode in the case of a miss is set. (C614), the process moves to C615.

In the process of C615, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef is Among these, the regular map fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the specified content corresponding to the time saving state (general map high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is ended. In the process of C615, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 (C615: No), the standard content corresponding to the normal state (general pattern low certainty) from the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef is used. The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and after that, various contents set in this process (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol lottery result, normal symbol fluctuation time ) is set (C623), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (C618). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of C616 or the process of C617 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the variable time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process moves to C623 and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of C619, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or C614.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 5 is the normal symbol win. (C620). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (C620: Yes), an opening pattern for the electric accessory is set according to the ordinary symbol winning type and the gaming state (C621), and opening/closing control processing for the electric accessory is set. (C622), and then moves to C623, sets a command to indicate the content of the game per common symbol set by the process of C621, and ends this process. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of C621, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the process of C616 or C617 ends. On the other hand, in the process of C620, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (C620: No), the process of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process moves to the process of C623, and the fluctuation of the out of normal symbol is stopped. Set a command that indicates this, and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, the through gate passage process 5 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing 5 (C107) determines whether or not a ball has passed through this normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and when a ball has passed, calculates the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4. This is the process for acquiring and holding the information.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

The ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process moves to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (C434), and a command for the number of pitches reserved for regular pitches is set (C435). Then, the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt processing 5 mentioned above, and the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the processing C1002 of the main processing (see FIG. 357) described later The value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (C436), and the process moves to C437. .

In addition, when storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the first area among the empty holding areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to and the value is determined. If it is 0, the first reservation area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of C437, a general map pre-reading process is executed (C437), and then this process ends. Further, details of this ordinary symbol pre-reading process will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but based on each counter value stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c corresponding to the acquired ordinary symbol reserved in the process of C436. Then, before the normal symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation) is executed, processing is executed to determine the lottery result and variation pattern of the regular symbol pending in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the general map pre-reading process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the ordinary map pre-reading process (C437) executed in the through gate passing process 5 (see FIG. 351).

In the ordinary symbol pre-reading process (C437), first, the random number 5 table 202ec per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 334(d)), the 5 type selection table 202ed per ordinary symbol (see FIG. 336(a)), and the ordinary symbol variation pattern are The lottery results are acquired based on the selection table (C451), and winning information commands for indicating each lottery result are set (C452), after which this process ends. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the pre-reading result of the common map) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing described below (see FIG. 357). ) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (C1001). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, it determines whether the received winning information command is a winning information command related to a special symbol variation or a winning information command related to a general symbol variation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223a. . The winning information stored here is used to display the lottery results of the symbol variation at a timing before the symbol variation (special symbol variation or regular symbol variation) corresponding to the winning information command is actually executed. Refer to this when setting up suggestive effects.

Next, V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V-entrance passage processing 5 (C108) has the same processing content as the V-entrance passage processing (see S108 in FIG. 270) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the V entrance passage process 5 (C108), it is first determined whether or not the current game is a winning game (small winning game) (C501), and if the current game is not a winning game (small winning game) (C501). :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game is a winning game (small winning game) (C501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening period is in progress, that is, a small winning game is being played. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that it is during the V winning opening opening period (C502: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (C503) and this process ends. If it is determined that a small winning game is not in progress (C502: No), this means that a ball has won in the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (C504), and this process ends.

The V entrance passing command set in the process of C503 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on winnings in the V winning device 650.

Next, V passing process 5 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing V passing processing 5 (C109) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V passing process 5 (C109) has the same technical concept as the V passing process of the A1 embodiment described above (see S109 in FIG. 271), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is V passage, that is, whether the ball has won in a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning hole 650a (C601). If it is determined that no prize has been won (C601: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a prize has been won (C601: Yes), then it is determined whether the current V validity period is in progress (C602). In the process of C602, if the progress status of the small winning scenario set during the small winning game is within a specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, the V valid period is not in progress. It is determined that

In the process of C602, if it is determined that the V is in the valid period (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is being played (C603), and if the small winning game is currently being played (C603). :Yes), acquires the V passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small win type of the current small win game (C604), sets the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and sets the time saving medium counter 203g. It is set to 0 (C606), the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is set to 0 (C607), and the process moves to C608.

That is, in the processing from C604 to C607, processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of C603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C603: No), there is no need to perform a new process to execute the big winning game, so the processes of C604 to C607 are skipped. , the process moves to C608.

In the process of C608, a V passing command is set (C608), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V passing command, for example, when receiving a V passing command during a small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game is successful, and following the small winning game, , executes an effect to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed. Further, when the V pass command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small win game is executed. On the other hand, if the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a regrettable effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small winning game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning hole 650a is set, but if a game player enters the V winning hole 650a It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) to indicate that the ball did not win. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is jammed in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current time is not within the V validity period (C602: No), an error command is set (C609) and this process ends. By performing the process of C609, if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a outside the V validity period, that is, a game is played in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 650a illegally, or if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, or if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, It is possible to quickly notify the outside of a problem (ball clogging, etc.) occurring in the ball flow path within the port 650a.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the contents of startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: Yes), it becomes a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: No). , since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, in this case as well, payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is sent (C912).

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (C907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets the initial value, and enters a state where it can start controlling the payout of game balls. becomes. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). Thereafter, the process moves to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power-off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data (C908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time the drive power was cut off (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (C910), and the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances (C911). Next, interrupts are permitted and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see Figure 357), first, while executing timer interrupt processing 5 (see Figure 343), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing is executed to transmit data to each control device (peripheral control device) (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of C101 in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of balls won is sent to the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in special symbol variation processing 5 (see Fig. 344), starting prize winning processing 5 (see Fig. 348), V entrance passage processing 5 (see Fig. 353), and V passage processing 5 (see Fig. 354) It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, ending command set in jackpot control processing 5 (see Fig. 358) and various commands set in small jackpot control processing 5 (see Fig. 359) to be described later are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, each variation type counter (variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2) is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this sixth control example, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used to refer to the variation pattern of special symbol variation (special symbol variation). The value is used when referring to the variation pattern of normal symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation). The special pattern variation and the regular pattern variation are configured to be executed by the establishment of separate and independent opportunities. As a result, even if the timing and contents of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation will not be synchronized. None. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured so as not to be synchronized. For example, the value of one of the fluctuation type counters may be updated every time the main processing is executed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured such that only the value of the other variation type counter is updated each time it is executed a specific number of times different from the above-mentioned predetermined number of times. By making the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters different in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of the other fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the obtained value of one fluctuation type counter.

In addition, in this sixth control example, a variation type counter CS1 that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol variation, and a second variation type counter CS2 that is referred to when a variation pattern of a regular symbol variation is selected. Although the configuration is such that each counter value is updated periodically, for example, the variation pattern of special symbol fluctuation and regular symbol fluctuation is based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It may be configured to select.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, , executes the jackpot control process 5 for executing the jackpot performance and opening or closing the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a of the variable winning prize device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 5, the specific winning opening 65a is opened by opening the winning door 65b for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a. Determine whether a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Further, details of this jackpot control processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. 358.

Next, small hit control processing 5 (C1005) is executed. This small hit control process 5 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 359. After that, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of C616 or the process of C617 in the normal symbol variation process 5 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of C236, C240, or C242 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. , starts on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time has elapsed, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236, process of C240, or process of C242 of special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345) ends, The fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is ended, and the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or C617 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device. After finishing the fluctuation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of C613 or the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350). indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (C1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (C1010: Yes), the process moves to C1001, and each process from C1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (C1010: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process C1001 to C1008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, various fluctuation type counters can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the configuration in which the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated as in the sixth control example, in order to make the update timings of the various fluctuation type counters different, for example, C1002 of the main process. In the process, update processing is performed for both variation type counters, and only one variation type counter (for example, variation type counter CS1) may be updated in the process of C1012.

In addition, in the process of C1009, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, so the processing at power-off after C1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). (C1014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game status performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting it to the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of C1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 358, jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing 5 (C1004). This jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the variable winning device. This is a process for opening or closing 65 specific winning openings 65a. In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example, the same control process as the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275) in the above-mentioned A1 embodiment is executed. There is. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the contents explained in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), modified examples, and additional examples will be omitted, but the contents explained in each control example or each embodiment described above will be omitted. Of course, this also applies.

In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201: Yes), an opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot flag 203i is set on, and the jackpot start flag 203h is set off (C1203). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (C1204).

In the process of C1204, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is off (C1204: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is now the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current timing is the start of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning a prize opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is in an open state), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is ended.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this sixth control example, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during the plural jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This cumulative number of rounds is determined by determining whether the continuous condition is satisfied when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that the jackpot has been won), and If it is determined that the condition is met, the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode that shows the updated results.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that successive jackpot games are one jackpot game, so it is possible to make the player think that consecutive jackpot games are one jackpot game. It is possible to show the maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation regarding the size of the benefit (number of prize balls) provided by one jackpot game.

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied, and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the process for displaying the number may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side, for example, as a continuous condition for displaying the cumulative round number, it may be executed after the end of the jackpot game. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when a jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure variations (for example, 5 special figure 2 variations), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main controller 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if a continuous condition is met when a jackpot game is executed, the value of the cumulative round number counter will be set to the cumulative number of rounds of the previous jackpot game. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. The cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player simply by

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games. If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen is displayed continuously (the period until 10 seconds have passed after the jackpot game ends) For example, conditions that hold true when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 lottery, or a jackpot game is executed during a period in which a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may also be configured to set a condition that is satisfied when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (cumulative round number) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (single round number) are displayed. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing conditions for the specific winning opening are satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state). ) (C1209), and then ends this process. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning hole is not satisfied (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current timing is to start the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: Yes), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

Note that if it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and the system is configured so that it will not be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203g and the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea (C1213), and the jackpot is set. A state command corresponding to the subsequent gaming state is set (C1214), an end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Here, the values set to the values of each counter in the process of C1213 are different depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see Figures 335 and 337), and the jackpot type AA, jackpot type When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set in the time saving counter 203g, and "-" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea, indicating that it is not set. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 is not set as the time-saving end condition, and the common time-saving end condition (big hit winning, small winning game end, the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 99 times) will be set.

When jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, "5" is set in the special chart 2 variation counter 203ea, and when jackpot AC is set, the time saving medium counter 203g is set as "5". 203g is set to "99", and the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is set to "1".

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is executed based on a small win, the value of the jackpot type corresponding to the set small win type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. At the end of a jackpot game based on a small win for which types AA and AE are set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, "5" is set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea, and small winning types AB, AD are set. At the end of the jackpot game based on the small win set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, and "-" indicating that it has not been set is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea. On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game based on the small win for which the small win type AC is set, "0" is set in the time saving medium counter 203g and "0" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 359, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process 5 (C1005). This small hit control process 5 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and is used to set commands to cause the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small win, and to set the V winning prize. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the opening 650a.

In the small winning control process 5 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small win scenario set in the process of C291 of the small win start setting process 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) indicates the start of a small win game. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (C1302), the small winning medium flag 203k is set on (C1303), and the small winning operation is performed. The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning medium flag 203k is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small winning flag 203k is off (C1305: No), this means that the current small winning game is not in progress, and thus the process is immediately ended. If it is determined in the process of C1305 that the small winning flag 203k is on (C1305: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: Yes), the small winning medium flag 203k is set to OFF (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is reset to 0. (C1308), and determines whether the V flag 203n is set to on (C1309). As described above, in this sixth control example, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203g after the small winning game ends, regardless of whether the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game. It is configured as follows.

Through the process of C1308, one condition of time-saving termination condition (common time-saving termination condition) is set. In other words, if a small winning game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state also ends when the small winning game ends, so for example, during the time saving state, the small winning game being executed may be disadvantageous to the player. If it is determined that the small winning type is a small winning type (for example, a small winning type in which a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player may be executed), during the small winning game so that a jackpot game based on the small winning game that is being executed is not executed. It is possible to prevent a game in which the ball is not shot (the ball is not passed through a specific area) from being played.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is always set (reset) to "0" when the small winning game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, When a small winning game based on a specific small winning type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g may be set (reset) to "0" after the small winning game ends.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is off (C1309: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (C1309: Yes), then the jackpot start corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203n is set to off. (C1311), and then ends this process.

In addition, in this control example, all small winning games are set as 1 round games, so unlike the jackpot scenario in which operation control of the jackpot game is executed, processing for setting commands related to the number of rounds, and interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the jackpot scenario used in the above-mentioned jackpot game may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the small winning scenario is configured to be set during the period in which the small winning game is executed, but for example, after the small winning game ends, the small winning scenario is set until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A small win scenario may be set for the period between. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passing valid period until one second has passed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that spans different gaming states using one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning hole 650a in a small winning game, a jackpot game corresponding to a preset jackpot type corresponding to the small winning is executed. Although configured, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning a prize opening 650a.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 375. Note that, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, the details of the parts where the same processes as in each of the above-mentioned control examples or each embodiment are executed are as follows. Further explanations and illustrations will be omitted.

In this sixth control example, as shown in FIG. ), it is configured to be able to perform a general figure fluctuation performance according to the following.

The general pattern fluctuation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects are performed across the general pattern fluctuation period, the general pattern per game period, the special pattern 2 variable period, and the small winning game period. There is. By configuring in this manner, when a player wins a specific common map (long open winning) in the general lottery, the ball enters the second winning slot 640 during a game where the player wins a long open winning. A game in which a small win is won by the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning prize, and a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small win game. The flow can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the presentation mode of a series of presentations.

In addition, the execution period of the above-mentioned series of performances varies greatly depending on the gaming situation (presence or absence of special pattern 1 fluctuation) at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the long opening of the general pattern. It is configured to set different production modes depending on the gaming situation (presence or absence of special figure 1 variation) at the time when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game. In other words, if the special pattern 1 variation is being executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the regular pattern long opening, the special pattern 2 variation will occur after the current special pattern 1 variation ends. is executed, the performance mode is set according to the length of the remaining fluctuation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than a predetermined period, the production mode corresponding to the normal series of productions is set, and if the waiting period is longer than the predetermined period, the series of productions is pseudo-ended, and the production mode that is currently in progress is set. When the remaining fluctuation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches a specific period, a continuous series of performances is set in which the series of performances is executed in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the performance mode of a series of performances to be variably settable depending on the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of performances that do not give players a sense of discomfort. It is possible to prevent the execution period of the performance from becoming unnecessarily long and the player from getting bored with the game.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a regular game long opening game, if the special pattern 1 variation is not executed, the special pattern 2 immediately after the ball enters the second winning hole 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series of performances is set which is shorter than the normal series of performances.

That is, the present sixth control example is configured so that when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is performed in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed by a left-handed game, and the above-mentioned series of performances are as follows. Executed when the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery (lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) executed during the normal state is a specific lottery result (Fuzu long open win) Because of this configuration, while the series of effects is being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed. Therefore, a normal series of productions includes a regular pattern variation period, a regular pattern per game period, a waiting period (a period of waiting until the end of the special pattern 1 variation in progress), a special pattern 2 variation period, and a small winning game period. It is configured so that it is executed across periods, and the content of the performance is varied depending on the stage at which each period moves.

Here, if the special pattern 1 variation has not been executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the long opening of the regular pattern, the waiting period is within each period in which the series of effects described above are executed. Since this does not occur, the special symbol 2 fluctuation period is set after the regular symbol per game period has elapsed. While such a situation can occur, the same performance mode is maintained regardless of the gaming situation (presence or absence of special pattern 1 variation) at the time when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a game with a regular pattern long open win. If this is set, there is a risk that unnecessary effects (for example, effects that indicate that the waiting period is in progress even though no waiting period has been set) will be executed, leading to a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

On the other hand, in this sixth control example, if the special pattern 1 variation has not been executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the regular pattern long opening game, the above-mentioned waiting period It is configured so that a series of performances with skipped performances is executed. In addition, in order to prevent the effect of the performance from decreasing even if the performance during the standby period is skipped, we have created a performance mode that does not give players a sense of discomfort when skipping from the regular pattern per game period to the special pattern 2 variable period. is configured so that it is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner the general pattern fluctuation effect (series of effects) that is executed based on the lottery result of the general pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 318, as a variable performance indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery during the time saving state, a first suggestion performance that suggests and informs only the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery. and, in addition to the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery, a second system that makes a suggestion notification including the results of preliminary determination that determines in advance the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special drawing 2 pending. It is configured to be executable.

Specifically, during the time saving state, it is determined whether the special figure variation to be executed this time (special figure 2 variation) is the final variation during the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation). If it is determined that this is the final variation of the time saving, the first suggestion effect described above (see Figure 327(a)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that it is the time saving final variation, that special figure 2 The above-described second suggestion effect (see FIGS. 327(b) to 329(a)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the variation.

With this configuration, in the variation performance corresponding to the time saving final variation, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the special drawing 2 drawing is executed after the time saving state ends (after transitioning to the normal state). Since the second suggestion performance is executed based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of , the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed after the end of the time-saving state is shown to the player as if it were executed during the time-saving state. Since the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery can be made to appear, the winning probability (big winning probability, small winning probability) during the time saving state can be made to seem higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set a presentation mode (success presentation mode shown in FIG. 329(a)) that indicates a win in a special presentation executed during the time saving state (for example, the mission presentation shown in FIG. 328(b)). Therefore, the performance effect of the dedicated performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the variation time (normal state It is configured so that a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the period, and during the variation period of the special figure 2 variation, it corresponds to the time-saving final variation. The present invention is configured such that the performance result of the second suggestion performance that is executed is displayed. By configuring this way, when a successful performance is executed based on the fact that winning information indicating winning (small hit) is included in the special drawing 2 reservation as the second suggestion performance, the special feature of winning a small hit can be executed. Until the variation shown in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed, the second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to the time saving final variation is divided into a plurality of performance periods, and each performance period is configured to be used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period from when the time-saving final variation is executed until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the player acquires a large number of Tokuzu 2 reservations by the time the variation ends. The system is configured to perform a performance (retention acquisition performance) to make the player obtain a reservation, and to perform the above-described second suggestion performance during a second period that is set after the first period.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestion production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at a specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of reservations and the preliminary determination result.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends (if the final time saving variation lottery result is a failure), the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent games that are disadvantageous to the player from being played.

As described above, the sixth control example is configured to execute the reservation acquisition performance and the second suggestion performance in the time saving final variation. This is because the hold acquisition effect was executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation that was executed before the time saving final change, and the upper limit number (4) of special figure 2 hold was acquired while the hold acquisition effect was being executed. However, when the special drawing 2 variation is executed as the time-saving final variation, the special drawing 2 pending will be subtracted, so it is necessary to have the player execute the special drawing 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as the second suggestion performance executed in the time-saving final variation, a plurality of special chart 2 drawings (corresponding to the special chart 2 drawing of the time-saving final variation and the special chart 2 pending) that are the target of the production are Although the configuration is such that a presentation mode is set to indicate to the player whether or not the lottery result of the Special Figure 2 Lottery includes a winning result, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a performance mode that suggests to the player the number of winning lottery results included in a plurality of special drawing 2 lottery results. In this case, for example, as a production mode of the second suggestion production, it is indicated that at least one winning prize is included among the plurality of special drawing 2 drawings that are the target of production. A special performance mode that can be notified to the player earlier than that may be set, and a winning number suggesting performance for suggesting and informing the player of the number of winning prizes may be executed in the special performance mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by notifying the player that there are winnings as soon as possible, while also allowing the player to enjoy the production that suggests how many winnings there are. can.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 5 (C3113). This command determination process 5 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example, is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and is executed by the main controller 110. This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from.

In the command determination process 5, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), winning information command processing 5 is executed (C3202), and this processing ends.

Here, winning information command processing 5 (C3202) will be explained with reference to FIG. 361. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 5 (C3202). This winning information command processing 5 (C3202) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a process is executed to store the information included in the received winning information command in a corresponding area (reservation storage area corresponding to the winning information command) in the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223.

The information included in the winning information command includes information regarding the judgment result, information regarding the stop type, information regarding the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) to which this winning information corresponds. Although this information targets the winning balls, other information may be included, for example, winning information regarding balls that have already won prizes (for which winning information commands have been received in the past) may be included. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this sixth control example, the main controller 110 is configured to set a winning information command to indicate the pre-read result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 352). In the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to an area for storing winning information for special symbols, an area for storing winning information for normal symbols is also formed.

When winning information command processing 5 (C3202) is executed, first, information on the received winning information command (preread information) is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3401), and winning status determination processing (C3402) is executed. Execute. As mentioned above, the winning information storage area 223a stores up to 4 winning information commands for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), up to 4 winning information commands for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 winning commands for normal symbols, and 12 winning information commands in total, and the winning information commands are stored in the designated storage area according to the order in which the winning information commands are received. .

Here, the winning situation determination process (C3402) will be explained with reference to FIG. 362. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning situation determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 5 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process that is executed in winning information command processing 5 (C3202) of the ordinary symbol (common symbol). Determine the gaming state at the time the command is received, process to set a different performance mode based on the determination result, and determine whether a proper game (left-handed game) is being played in the normal state. The processing for this is executed.

In the prize winning situation determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether there is a prize winning of a common symbol (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to a common symbol) (C3451). If it is determined that it is not a common drawing prize (C3451: No), the process moves to C3458, which will be described later. If it is determined that the game has won (C3451: Yes), then the current gaming state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state. (C3453). If it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, if it is determined that it is the time saving state, this process is ended and the process returns to winning information command processing 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is currently changing (C3454). ). Here, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is currently changing by determining whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is greater than 0. If it is determined that the current state is not during the variation of special map 1 (C3454: No), the normal state is a state in which the special pattern 1 variation has not been executed and the regular pattern variation has been executed, so it is stored in the RAM 223. The provided non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to ON (C3455), and the process moves to C3458.

By setting the non-fluctuation prize winning flag 223ef to ON in the process of C3455, it is possible to remember that the winning information command for the regular map was received during the normal state and during the non-fluctuation of the special symbol 1. By determining the setting status of the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef when receiving the general pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the winning information command of the general pattern, the special pattern 1 at the time of general pattern winning (passing through gate 67) is determined. It is possible to set different variation performance modes depending on the variation situation.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 360, the process executed when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process 5 (C3113) of the audio lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 360, C3204) is configured to execute the processes (C3201 and C3202 in FIG. 360) that are executed when the winning information command is received.

Here, in the external output process (C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 357), a winning information command for the regular symbol winning and a fluctuation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) Even if and are output in the same process, specifically, if a win occurs in a state where the fluctuation of the general pattern is not executed, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. A winning information command is set in the process of C105 (see Figure 343), and a fluctuation pattern command is set in the process of C104 of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 343) that is executed next (2 milliseconds later). . Then, in the process C1001 (external output process) of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is output. Therefore, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process and the execution timing of the main process, the winning information command for the regular drawing prize and the fluctuation pattern command may be output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same process. There is.

In such a case, in this sixth control example, in the command determination process (see C3113 in FIG. 360) of the audio lamp control device 113, prize information command processing 5 (see C3202 in FIG. 363 and C3204), so even if the main controller 110 outputs the winning information command and the fluctuation pattern command at the same time, when setting the fluctuation pattern of the regular pattern fluctuation, the non-fluctuation time The setting status of the winning flag 223ef can be used for determination without missing anything.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the special map 1 is currently fluctuating (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special map 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456) . If it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), then the process moves to C3458.

In the process of C3456, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of special drawing 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), a display command indicating a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458 Shift to processing.

When moving to the process of C3458, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (C3458), and it is determined that it is the winning information command of special symbol 1. If (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning flag 223ef at the time of non-variation is set to on (C3459), and if it is determined that it is set to on (C3459: Yes), the non-fluctuation prize flag 223ef is set to on. The variable winning flag 223ef is set to OFF (C3460), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of special drawing 1 (C3458: No), check whether information indicating that a left-handed game is being played is received. Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether winning information indicating winning of a ball to each winning hole (general winning hole 63) provided in the left side gaming area of the game board 13 has been received.

In the process of C3461, if it is determined that a left-handed game has been detected (C3461: Yes), the process moves to the above-mentioned process of C3459, and if it is determined that a left-handed game has not been detected (C3461: No), This process ends immediately.

As explained above, this sixth control example determines whether the special pattern 1 variation is being executed at the time when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and determines whether the special pattern 1 variation is being executed. If it is determined that there is no change, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to ON to indicate that. In addition, when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to on and information indicating that a special figure 1 prize is won or a left-handed game is received is received, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to off. It is configured to do so.

The details will be described later, but when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to ON and the long fluctuation of the general pattern is executed, the fluctuation effect (series of effects) corresponding to the long fluctuation of the general pattern is executed. It is configured not to run.

By configuring in this way, a game situation in which normal pattern fluctuations are executed without performing a left-handed game in a state where the normal state is set (due to a right-handed game, a through gate provided in the right side game area) 67), and in that case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the long variation of the common figure (the effect suggesting that a game that hits the common figure will be executed). .

In addition, in this sixth control example, even when the left-handed game is being executed properly, depending on the winning condition of the ball in the first winning hole 64, the special drawing 1 may be placed at the timing when the winning of the regular drawing occurs. Since fluctuation may not be executed, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef, which is set to on at the time of winning a regular figure, is configured to be able to be set to off by a left-handed game. As a result, for example, by executing a left-handed game within a predetermined period from winning a prize to the start of a fluctuation in a general pattern, a fluctuation performance corresponding to a long fluctuation in a general pattern (a game per winning pattern is executed) This makes it possible to normally execute a performance that suggests that a certain event will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a performance mode from being set that is disadvantageous to a player who is playing a proper game.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the sixth control example described above, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (left-handed game in the normal state) is being played. It may be configured such that it can be determined whether a left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing intensity) of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotational operation based on a change in electrical resistance. A detection means for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a part of the left side playing area (the upper area where most of the balls flowing down the left side playing area pass), and the left-handed game is executed based on the detection result of the detection means. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether the

Further, in the sixth control example described above, a configuration is used that determines whether a left-handed game is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that determines whether a right-handed game is being executed is used. When a predetermined normal pattern variation (normal pattern long variation) is executed in a state where it is determined that a right-handed game is being executed, a variation effect corresponding to the normal pattern long variation (normal pattern long variation) is executed. It may also be configured to restrict the execution of (effects that suggest that). In this case, the configuration for determining that a right-handed game is being executed is such that when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the through gate 67) provided in the right side game area, A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 51 or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance. It may be configured such that it can be determined whether a right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing strength).

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is playing a proper game during the period from winning a prize to starting a fluctuation in a common symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period used to determine whether or not a proper game is being played (determination target period) may be set to a longer period. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means that can temporarily store the game situation may be provided, and the game situation storage means may store the game situation (past history) indicating whether or not the player is playing a left-handed game. It is preferable to configure the game system so that, at the timing of winning a common figure, it is determined whether or not a common figure has been won during a proper game based on the gaming situation stored in the gaming situation storage means.

In addition, as a winning information command (Fujitsu winning information command) that is set when a Futou winning a prize, a winning information command (Left Futou winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the left side gaming area. The audio lamp control device 113 side identifies the winning information command (winning information command) and the winning information command (right winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side gaming area. Based on the type of the received Futou winning information command and the gaming situation, execution restriction of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the Futou long fluctuation (performance suggesting that a game to hit the Futou will be executed) is configured to be possible. It may be configured to set variably.

Returning to FIG. 361, the explanation will be continued. It is determined whether there is special 2 winning information as information (pre-read information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). In the process of C3403, if it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information (C3403: No), then the process moves to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 winning information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

If it is determined in the process of C3404 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is on (C3404: Yes), information indicating winning notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3405), and then the process moves to C3406. do.

In the process of C3406, the production mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set production mode is set (C3407), and then this process is ended and the process returns to command determination process 5.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the fluctuating display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set at another period (for example, It is stipulated that the performance indicates that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than the specific performance (which is executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In other words, it is stipulated that the variation pattern that corresponds to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern that allows the specific effect C to be executed.

Thereby, when the suggestive performance is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that he will win the jackpot with the next fluctuation. Further, it is possible to encourage the player to actively reserve special symbols so that a suggestive performance that spans a plurality of variations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, multiple variable displays are straddled based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed). Although it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the fluctuating display being executed). It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to be executed, a foreshadowing effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and the specific effect is set at the timing of starting the next variable display. , the specific performance is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the period in which the precursor performance is being executed (the specific performance that is the target of the suggestion performance is set from a plurality of specific performances). Also good. With this configuration, the production of the suggestion production is based on the gaming situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion production has started. The mode can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom in presentation can be increased compared to a configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display. Although the suggested effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as the suggestive effect is executed across multiple fluctuating displays. For example, winning information won during the fluctuating display is executed one after another. In the case of a fluctuating display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to span the fluctuating display that is currently being executed and the fluctuating display that will be executed one after the other, or it can be executed one after the other starting from the next fluctuating display. Suggestive effects may be performed across the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether the timing to execute the suggestion effect is set to the currently running variable display or the next variable display based on the timing at which the winning information command is received (remaining period of the currently running variable display). It would be good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the content of various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113, and for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is displayed in the hold display area where the number of held balls of a special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (pending symbol) corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot, a pending change notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice performance that makes people expect a big hit as a special symbol performance whose fluctuations start earlier than the above.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to at the time of winning a jackpot, during a jackpot game, and at the end of a jackpot, and winning information indicating a jackpot is included in the pending state. It is configured to determine whether there is a consecutive game on hold (presence or absence of consecutive games on hold), and to set effects during a jackpot game or after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the discrimination. In addition, even in the continuous performance executed during the variable probability state, the content of the performance is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, when a performance (pre-reading performance) that refers to winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag indicating that effect ( For example, if the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, and the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command will be displayed. The configuration is such that new prefetch effects based on information are not executed. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which a plurality of look-ahead performances are executed consecutively without any gaps, giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Note that controls other than those described above may be used to solve the above-mentioned problems; for example, a priority rank may be assigned to a plurality of pre-read effects that are set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that has been given and is currently being executed is compared with the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command, and the pre-reading effect with a higher priority rank is selected. It may also be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, a look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the currently executed look-ahead effect will end midway. After that, execute a new look-ahead effect, or change the direction of the currently executed look-ahead effect to a shortened look-ahead effect that is earlier than the originally set end timing, and then execute a new look-ahead effect. You may do so.

In addition, the priority rank of the look-ahead performance is such that the priority rank of the look-ahead performance that corresponds to winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest, and the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank. It is recommended to set the value so that the value is high. Thereby, when the pre-read performance being executed ends midway, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the new pre-read performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3203). If it is determined that a variable pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), variable pattern command processing 5 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command processing 5 is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to in the variation display setting processing 5 (see FIG. 369) described later to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern. . It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern. In addition, in this sixth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a variation pattern for a regular symbol (common symbol). It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for special symbols or regular symbols, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, variable pattern command processing 5 (C3204) will be explained with reference to FIG. 363. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable pattern command processing 5 (C3204). This variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. It is.

In variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), the process of C3302 and C3303 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3304. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), a variation pattern is extracted from the received special figure variation pattern command (C3303), and then the process moves to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for regular figures (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a general figure variation pattern command (C3304: No), the process of C3305 and C3306 is skipped and the process returns to command determination process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for ordinary figures (C3304: Yes), the variation start flag 223d for ordinary figures provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received general figure variation pattern command (C3306), and then this process is ended and the process returns to command determination process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3203, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). If a stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to on (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of C3205, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3208). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is received (C3208: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is The value included in the reserved ball number command received from the special symbol reserved ball number counter or the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls command received this time is the number of reserved balls command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls counter 203d of the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 is calculated from the received number of reserved balls command. The value (the number of pending times N1 of variable display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the held ball number command received this time is the held ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The number N2) of holding the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received, (C3210: Yes), the win-related command process 5 (C3211) is executed, and after the win-related command process 5 (C3211) is finished, this process is ended.

Here, the contents of the win-related command processing 5 (C3211) will be explained with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related command processing 5 (C3211). The hit-related command process 5 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the winning-related command processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3501). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (C3501: Yes), jackpot-related command processing is executed (C3502), and then the process moves to C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot related command processing (C3502) will be explained with reference to FIG. 365. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related command processing (C3502). The jackpot related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the win related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the jackpot related command processing (C3502), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3601). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), opening command processing for display is executed (C3602), and then the process moves to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (C3603). Here, if the number of rounds command is received (C3603: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (C3604), and then the number of rounds command for display is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time. (C3605), and then the process moves to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this sixth control example, when a jackpot game is executed while a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game The number of round games of the jackpot game to be executed this time is cumulatively displayed. Specifically, a period flag is provided that is set to ON during the period in which the time saving state is set and the period from when the time saving state shifts to the normal state until the special symbol 1 variation is executed. Then, when a jackpot game starts, it is determined whether the period flag is set to on, and if it is determined that it is set to on, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game is determined. The number of rounds of the current jackpot game is accumulated and displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the process of C3603, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3606). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), an ending command for display is set (C3607), and then the process moves to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts an ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), the process moves to C3608. In the process of C3608, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C3608), this process is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command process 5.

Returning to FIG. 364, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether a small win related command has been received from the main control device 110. (C3503). If it is determined that a small win related command has been received (C3503: Yes), small win related command processing is executed (C3504), and then the process moves to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504) will be explained with reference to FIG. 366(a). FIG. 366(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small win related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the win related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the small hit related command processing (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3701). If it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small win process is executed (C3702), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the win related command process 5. .

As described above, in this sixth control example, the production mode when the small winning game is executed is configured to be variably set depending on whether the small winning game execution timing is during a series of productions. . In other words, when a small winning game is executed during a series of performances, the small winning game performance (see FIG. 324) is executed as part of the series of performances. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

Here, the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702) will be explained with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702). The normal small win process (C3702) is a process executed in the small win related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the normal small winning process (C3702), first, it is determined whether a small winning start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3801). If it is determined that the small win start command has been received (C3801: Yes), a small win start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

In the process of C3801, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3801: No), then it is determined whether the small winning end command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3803). . If it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (C3803: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

In the process of C3803, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3805). If it is determined that the V passing command has been received (C3805: Yes), a V passing command for display is set (C3806), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Returning to FIG. 366(a), the explanation will be continued. If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on in the process of C3701 (C3701: Yes), the small win process for the series effect is executed because the current small win game is a small win game that is executed during the series effect. It is executed (C3703), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the win-related command process 5.

Here, the contents of the series performance small winning process (C3703) will be explained with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win process for series performance (C3703). The small win process for series performance (C3703) is a process executed in the small win related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the series performance small win process (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small win start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3901). Then, if it is determined that the small winning start command has been received (C3901: Yes), a winning start command for a series of effects is set (C3902), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

In the process of C3901, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3903). If it is determined that the V passage command has been received (C3903: Yes), then it is determined whether the small hit warning flag 223ee provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). If it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is off (C3904: No), a V performance command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Here, the small hit caution flag 223ee indicates that even though the small winning game is being executed, the ball does not pass through the specific area within the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. This is a flag that is set on if it is not present. In this sixth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the period required for the ball fired by playing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, so the small win When playing a right-handed game based on the execution of the game, the small hit caution flag 223ee is configured not to be set on.

On the other hand, players may play left-handed games without realizing that a small winning game is being executed, or play inappropriate games where the number of balls fired during a small winning game is intentionally reduced (including 0). In this case, the ball may not have passed through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, so the small winning caution flag 223ee is turned on. Easier to set. By setting this small hit caution flag 223ee to ON, an emphasized guidance display (see FIG. 325(a)) for making the player play a right-handed game is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be done. In addition, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit warning flag 223ee is set to on or off at the timing when the ball passes through a specific area within the V winning hole 650a. For example, if a V passage command is received with the small hit caution flag 223ee set to on, a guidance effect is created to prompt the player to play the right-handed game in the next small win game. is executed.

In the process of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is on (C3904: Yes), a special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), and then this process ends and the small hit is executed. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V production command for displaying a series of productions, it displays on the third symbol display device 81, as part of the series production, a message indicating that the timing at which the ball passed through the V in the current small winning game was too late. A V performance including a performance mode shown (for example, a comment such as "Next time, let's hit the right ball earlier") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907 ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of productions is performed. A display small winning end command is set (C3909), and then the small winning warning flag 223ee is set to OFF (C3912), this process is ended, and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, if it is determined that there is no passage of V (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of a series of effects is set (C3910), a series of effects flag 223eb is set to off (C3911), The small hit caution flag 223ee is set to OFF (C3912), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

In other words, if the ball does not pass through a specific area in a small winning game during a series of performances, the performance result indicating the occurrence of a jackpot game cannot be displayed as a performance result of the series of performances, so the series of performances ends ( A presentation mode (see FIG. 325(b)) indicating "failure" is set. Also, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received in the process of C3907 (C3907: No), then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Returning to FIG. 364, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that a small hit related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3503: No), then it is determined whether or not a small win related command has been received from the main control device 110. Determine (C3505). If it is determined that a command related to hitting a common map has been received (C3505: Yes), a display command corresponding to the command related to hitting a regular map is set (C3506), and then this process is ended and the command is determined. Return to process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3210, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current gaming status is extracted from the received command, stored in the status storage area 223ea (C3213), and a status command for display is set (C3214). , and then ends this process.

In addition, in the process of C3213, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 in the first control example described above is received. In addition to the current gaming state, processing is executed to store the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, a status command indicating the current gaming status and a status specifying command indicating the gaming status (planned gaming status) to be set when a predetermined condition is met (when the jackpot ends) can be separated. and memorize it. In addition, after the jackpot ends, you will receive a status command indicating the current gaming status, but at that time, the content of the status command indicating the current gaming status and the content of the status specification command indicating the planned gaming status. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a determining means is provided for determining whether or not the two match, and it is determined whether the gaming state is properly set based on the determination result of the determining means. As a result, it is possible to suppress, for example, a fraudulent act of variably setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the process of C3212, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (C3215), and if a stop command has been received (C3215: Yes). ), the stop command processing 5 (C3216) is executed, and after the end of the stop command processing 5, this processing is ended.

Here, the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216) will be explained with reference to FIG. 368. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216). Stop command processing 5 (C3216) is a process executed in command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In stop command processing 5, first, it is determined whether a special figure stop command has been received (C3951), and if it is determined that a special figure stop command has been received (C3951: Yes), then the special figure fluctuation time counter is The value of 223eg is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to on (C3953).

In the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to on (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time is a special figure that executed a series of effects as a variation effect of a variation out of the special figure. Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series performance flag 223ec is set to OFF (C3954), and the process moves to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is not set to on (C3953: No), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to on (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to on (C3955: Yes), the re-read ahead flag is set to on (C3956). ), sets the time saving final change flag to OFF (C3957), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is not set to ON (C3955: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 360, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3215, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3215: No), the process according to the received command is executed (C3217), and this process ends. . For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114.

Through this process, commands for performing various settings on the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 369, the variable display setting process 5 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 5 (C3114). This variable display setting process 5 (C3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable display. In order to execute this, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

Variation display setting processing 5 (C3114) of the sixth control example sets a variation pattern command for normal symbol display for the variation display setting processing used in each of the above-mentioned control examples or each embodiment. The two systems differ greatly in that they are structured as such and in that the contents of the variable effects that are set are changed, but other elements (technical ideas) are the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements (technical ideas) as those of the variable display setting process used in each control example or each embodiment described above will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 5 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the above-mentioned variation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 in FIG. 363), either the variation start flag 223d for special symbols or the variation start flag 223d for regular symbols is set. is set to on.

If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, both the special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d and the regular symbol fluctuation start flag 223d are off) (C4001: No), the main control Since no variation pattern command has been received from the device 110, the process moves to C4006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (C4001: Yes), the corresponding variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (C4002), and then C3303 of variation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 363) In the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 370.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370), a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). Thereafter, the process moves to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (C4006: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 5 (C3207 in FIG. 360) , the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process moves to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (C4010). , and then ends this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the variable effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing this variable effect setting process (C4004). This variable effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes the variable effect mode of the special symbol, Alternatively, processing for setting the variation presentation mode of the normal symbol is executed.

In the variation performance setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether the current variation performance setting process is to set a variation performance of special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In this process of C4101, if it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to on in the process of C4001 of the variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369), the current variation effect setting process It is determined that this sets the variation performance of the special figure variation. Here, if it is determined that the special pattern variation effect is not set (the general pattern variation effect is set) (C4101: No), the general pattern effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process ends. . Details of the production setting process for ordinary symbols will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing for setting the production mode of the variable production based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, if it is determined that a special figure fluctuation effect is to be set (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state storage area 223ea is read out (C4102), and the current gaming state is determined to be the normal state. It is determined whether there is one (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (a time-saving state) (C4103: No), a time-saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process moves to C4116. The time-saving performance setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the time-saving state. This time-saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 372.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-read ahead flag 223em is set to on (C4105), and the re-read ahead flag 223em is set to on. If it is determined that it has been set (C4105: Yes), that is, the current variation effect is a variation effect corresponding to the first rotation special figure variation after the end of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is in progress. If there is a special figure 2 hold whose look-ahead result is not reflected in the time-saving final variation performance executed in the time-saving final variation among the special figure 2 holds obtained in the above, the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a Among the information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2), winning information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2) for which pre-reading processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is included in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether there is winning information included (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning winning information (C4107: yes), a display command is set to replace the result display mode of the time-saving variation effect with the revived winning display mode (C4108). , the re-prefetch flag 223em is set to OFF (C4109), and the process moves to C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, if it is determined that the re-read ahead flag 223em is not set to on (C4105: No), the current variable effect setting process is executed at the timing to change the display mode of the result of the time-saving variable effect. Therefore, the process from C4106 to C4109 is skipped and the process moves to C4110. In addition, in the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including winning information among the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the current variable performance setting process changes the result display mode of the time-saving variable performance. However, since the conditions for changing the result display mode (including a new prefetch result being a hit) are not met, the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether the current time is within the extended display period of the time-saving fluctuating performance executed during the time-saving state (C4110), and the game results that are within the extended display period, that is, during the time-saving state are displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 331) is being displayed (C4110: Yes), this process is ended without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), then based on the fluctuation pattern obtained in the process of C4003 in Figure 369, check whether the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern. (C4111).

In the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (C4111: Yes), a winning variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process moves to C4116. In this winning fluctuation performance setting process (C4112), there is a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as the current special symbol fluctuation performance, and a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as the current special symbol fluctuation performance, and a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as a regular symbol fluctuation performance. Processing for replacing the performance results is executed. A detailed explanation of this winning variation performance setting process (C4112) will be given later with reference to FIG. 373.

On the other hand, in the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a winning fluctuation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4113), If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4113: Yes), then the process moves to C4116.

In the process of C4113, if it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is off (C4113: No), it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series production based on the extracted variation pattern ( C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: No), then the process moves to C4116.

On the other hand, in the process of C4114, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON (C4115), and then the process proceeds to C4116. Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is set (C4116), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the fluctuation display setting process 5.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, the ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing this ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117). This ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a variable effect based on the ordinary figure variation. (a series of effects) is executed.

In the normal figure production setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), then this process ends.

In the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: No), then this process ends. If it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), then it is determined whether the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4204: Yes), then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series performance flag 223eb is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is on (C4205). If it is determined that the flag 223ec is off (C4205: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4206). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), a series effect is set (C4207), a series effect flag 223eb is set on (C4208), and then this process is ended.

In the process of C4206, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4206: Yes), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special pattern fluctuation time is set (C4209), and then the main processing end.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, if it is determined that the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is on (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C4210 ), if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is not larger than 0 (is 0) (C4210: No), if the regular figure variation is executed in a state where the special figure variation is not executed. Therefore, the present process is ended without setting the normal pattern variation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern variation.

In addition, in this sixth control example, the general pattern variation effect is not set when the special pattern variation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the general pattern variation effect can be set as normal. may be configured to execute a general pattern fluctuation effect that is executed at different timings, and based on the general pattern fluctuation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time according to the lottery result of the current general pattern lottery. It is only necessary to configure the timing so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the process of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C4210: Yes), a special series of effects is set (C4211), and a series of effects flag 223eb is set to ON (C4212). ), then this process ends.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, when the regular symbol fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), the control is performed based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special symbol fluctuation in progress. It is configured to set a general figure fluctuation effect (a general figure effect). By configuring in this way, when a special pattern variation effect that is easy to notify the player of a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is being executed as a special pattern variation effect for displaying the lottery result of a special pattern variation, the normal pattern effect is It is possible to suppress a situation that obstructs a special figure variation performance, and to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372, the time-saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing this time-saving effect setting process (C4104). This time-saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the time-saving performance setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure variation is a variation of special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the current special figure variation is not the variation of special figure 2 (C4301: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the current special pattern variation is the variation of special pattern 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special pattern variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302). If it is determined that the current special figure variation is not the time saving final variation (C4302: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the current special figure variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), the time-saving final variation flag 223ed is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read. (C4304), a variation pattern for the final variation is set based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information (C4305), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the winning variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing this winning variation effect setting process (C4112). This winning variable effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4401). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4401: No), then it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series of effects flag 223eb is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether there is one (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the results can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern for replacing the performance results of the series of performances is set (C4406), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the effect update process 5 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing performance update processing 5 (C3112). This effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and is This is a process for setting effects that are controlled based on.

When the performance update process 5 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various variable time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether the series performance flag 223eb is on (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4504). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is off (C4504: No), the process moves to C4505.

In the process of C4502, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4502: Yes), and in the process of C4504, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4504: Yes), The effect update process is executed (C4503), and then the process moves to C4505. Further, details of the series effect update process will be described later with reference to the process in FIG. 375.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether the time saving final change flag 223ed is on (C4505). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is on (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process moves to C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is on (C4505: Yes), other effect update processes are executed (C4507), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, a series of effects update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of performance update processing (C4503) is executed in the performance update process 5 (see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the series performance update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series performance counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter is 0 or not. (C4604). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process moves to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON (C4612), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), the value corresponding to the current series of effects is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process proceeds to C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the current game is based on a common symbol (C4605). If it is determined that the current game is in a game with a common symbol (C4605: Yes), update processing is executed during a game with a common symbol (C4606), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently being played on a regular basis (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the game on a regular basis has ended (C4607). It is determined whether or not the normal game has ended (C4607). If it is determined that the normal game has not been completed (C4607: No), the process moves to C4609. If it is determined that the normal winning game has ended (C4607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series performance flag 223eb is set on (C4612), and then this process ends. In the process of C4608, if it is determined that the Special 2 winning flag is on (C4608: Yes), the process moves to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being played (C4609). If it is determined that the current game is a small winning game (C4609: Yes), a small winning game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current game is not a small winning game (C4609: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the contents of the regular game in-game update process (C4606) executed in the series performance update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) will be explained. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-game update process (C4606) per normal figure. In this game-in-progress game update process (C4606), if the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 for a predetermined period of time even though the player is playing a game with a regular card, a warning is given to the player. The processing to be performed is executed.

When the normal map winning game update process (C4606) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won in the second winning hole 640. If so (C4701: No), then it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the start of the game per common symbol (C4702). Here, if it is determined that one second has elapsed (C4702: Yes), a display alert command is set (C4703), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, if it is determined that it is not the timing when one second has passed since the start of the game per common symbol (C4702: No), this process is ended as is.

Here, in the process of C4703, when the display attention command is set, the attention screen (see FIG. 324(a) ) is displayed. In addition, in this control example, when a game per normal pattern long opening is executed as a game per normal pattern, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, then after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, it is opened again by 0.5 seconds. It is configured such that a game with a common figure is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a second. The attention-calling screen shown in FIG. 324(a) is displayed one second after the start of the normal winning game. By configuring in this way, when a player who has seen the alert screen plays a right-handed game, it is possible to make it easier for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the second prize opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of C4701, if it is determined that a ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (there is a special 2 prize) (C4701: Yes), a display command to indicate the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), sets the special 2 winning flag 223er on (C4705), and ends this process. Here, when the display command is set in the process of C4704, a display mode notifying special 2 winning is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a special 2 winning prize has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376(b), the contents of the small winning game update process (C4610) will be explained. FIG. 376(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small winning game update process (C4610). In this small winning game update process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small winning game was started. If the ball has not passed through the specific area within the V winning hole 650a even after the elapse of time, a process is executed to alert the player.

When the small winning game update process (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small winning caution flag 223ee is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small winning caution flag 223ee is not set to ON. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small winning game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball is currently passing through the specific area within the V prize opening 650a (C4753), and it is determined that it has not passed. If it is determined that (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223ee is set on (C4754), a display alert command is set (C4755), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4751, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee has already been set to ON (C4751: Yes), in the process of C4752, it is determined that the timing is not 3 seconds after the start of the small win game. (C4752: No), in the process of C4753, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a (C4753: Yes), skip the processes of C4754 and C4755 and continue this process. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be explained. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final variation performance update process (C4506), processing for setting a variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state is executed. As mentioned above, in this control example, as a variation effect during the time saving state, a first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and a special figure in addition to the variation result (lottery result) of the variation concerned. The system is configured to be able to execute a second suggestion performance that suggests a look-ahead result of 2 suspension, and is configured such that the second suggestion performance is executed in the final variation of the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the final variation of the time-saving state in this control example, there is also a reservation acquisition effect to encourage the player to acquire special drawings 2 reservations up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the period in which the time-saving state is set. It is configured to be executable, and is configured to execute a reservation acquisition performance in the first half of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and perform a second suggestion performance (time-saving final fluctuation performance) in the second half. And, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 reservation obtained at the end timing of the first half period is configured to be reflected in the performance result of the second suggestion performance.

By configuring this way, after the player acquires a large number of Tokuzu 2 reservations, the second suggestion performance (time-saving final variation performance) that reflects the pre-reading results for the acquired Tokuzu 2 reservations is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a performance mode indicating winning as the performance mode of the time-saving final variation performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the number of acquired special map 2 pending balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (4) at the timing (start timing of the first half period) until the pending acquisition performance is executed, the pending acquisition performance will be executed. The configuration is such that the second suggestion effect is executed from the first half of the period. As a result, an unnecessary performance for the player, that is, a reservation acquisition performance that tries to make the player acquire the special figure 2 reservation even though the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the performance. Furthermore, by executing the second suggestion performance from the first half period, the performance period of the second suggestion performance can be lengthened, so that a more interesting second suggestion performance can be executed. Since the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestion performance, the performance of the game can be improved.

In the final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 377), which will be explained with reference to FIG. The elapsed period of the final variation effect to be executed (the elapsed period of the special figure 2 variation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the timing at which the waiting period has elapsed (C4801), and if it is determined that the timing is at the timing at which the waiting period has elapsed, (C4801: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 reserved ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) is the upper limit "4" (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "4" (C4802: Yes), the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON (C4803), and this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is not "4", that is, it is less than "3" (C4802: No), the reservation upper limit flag 223en is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the process of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804), and at the first period start timing. If it is determined that there is (C4804: Yes), it is determined whether the suspension upper limit flag 223en is set to on (C4805), and if it is determined that it is set to on, that is, at the start timing of the first period. If it is determined that the predetermined number (4) of special figure 2 reserved balls is secured (the upper limit number) (C4805: Yes), a time-saving variation effect using the first period and the second period is performed as a time-saving final variation effect. A display effect command indicating the above is set (C4806), the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, the executed flag 223eq is set to ON (C4808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, if it is determined that the reservation upper limit flag 223en is not set to on (C4805: No), a reservation ball number acquisition effect is executed to obtain the special map 2 reservation up to the upper limit (4). The display command shown in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the performance executed during the first period according to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls at the timing when the waiting period has elapsed, thereby providing a variety of performances to the player. can do.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810), and the start timing of the second period is determined. If it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the executed flag 223eq is set on (C4811).

Here, if it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is set to on, that is, if it is determined that the production mode of the production to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period, (C4811: Yes), since there is no need to newly set the performance mode, the executed flag 223eq is set to OFF (C4812), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4811, if it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is not set to on (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (C4813), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (C4813). A display performance command indicating a time-saving variation performance based on the lottery result (win determination result) and the pre-read result (pre-discrimination result) included in the read winning information is set (C4814), and this processing is ended.

In this way, the production mode based on the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 pending is not at the execution timing of the time saving final variation, but at the timing after a predetermined period of time has passed after the time saving final variation is executed (the timing at which the second period is set). By setting , the number of special pattern 2 pending balls (value of the special pattern 2 pending ball counter 223c) that is subtracted when executing the variation is re-added to the pre-read result of special pattern 2 pending. You can set the presentation mode based on the following. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of pre-read special drawings 2 reservations, so it is possible to easily display the performance result indicating a win in the performance executed during the second period (time-saving final variation performance), The performance effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired is determined. If it is determined (C4816: Yes), the re-prefetch flag 223em is set to ON (C4817), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed in C4816, the winning information storage area 223a has a storage area corresponding to each symbol reserved, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The number of storage areas for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the storage area for the regular symbol (ordinary symbol) corresponds to the maximum number of stored symbols (4) for each symbol. It is formed. Each storage area stores the prefetch information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the referenced information indicating whether or not the prefetch results were referred to when setting various effects in the audio lamp control device 113. It is configured so that information is stored.

In other words, in the process of C4816, it is checked in each storage area whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223a other than the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the process of C4806 or C4814. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information that is stored, and if the look-ahead information is written in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223a, and the referenced information is When it is determined that there is a storage area in which no information is stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 reservation.

Then, by setting the re-read ahead flag 223em to ON in the process of C4817, the special figure 2 hold is set again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure variation (the first special figure variation after the end of the time reduction). A variable performance is executed based on the look-ahead results.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4816: No), all the currently acquired special 2 reservations are read ahead, and the second Since this is a case where the final time-saving variation effect during the period is being executed, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time-saving variation effect is directly set (C4818), and this processing is ended. In the process of C4815, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4819), and this process ends. In the process of C4819, setting of the presentation mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, update setting of the remaining period display mode to indicate the remaining period of the final variation, and elapsed period display mode to indicate the elapsed period of the final variation. , and setting of the operation display mode that is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the seventh control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385. In the sixth control example described above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored at a maximum of four, and when the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the special symbol 2 reserved (up to 4 pieces), the special drawing 2 lottery was executed with the lottery probability in the normal state.

Furthermore, the sixth control example described above is configured such that the special drawing 2 drawing in the normal state is more likely to produce a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the special drawing 2 drawing in the time saving state. The game was made to be played enthusiastically in order to obtain as many special drawings 2 as possible at the end of the game.

In the above-mentioned sixth control example, by simply playing the right-handed game continuously during the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, it is possible to easily obtain the maximum number of special symbols 2 pending, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special drawing 2 drawings that could be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvements were required.

In contrast, in this seventh control example, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set to "1", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state is short. The period during which time is likely to be selected can be set according to the type of time saving state and the number of special symbol fluctuations during the time saving state, and furthermore, a winning game period is set as a game per regular symbol executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that multiple types of long open winning games can be set. In addition, a state in which a short-time variation (0.1 second variation) is likely to be set can be configured as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, the number of times of the special drawing 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be varied depending on how various game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy seeing what kind of game conditions will be satisfied when the time saving state ends.

First, with reference to FIG. 378, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 378 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is changed. are different, and otherwise are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 378, in this seventh control example, a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 378) and an open state in which it is easy to win a prize (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 378) A variable electric accessory 640a is provided. This electric accessory 640a is designed to make it easier for a plurality of balls to enter the second prize opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 315) of the sixth control example described above is in an open state. It is composed of Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the period from when the ball passes through the open electric accessory 640a to when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 is configured to vary depending on the falling state of the ball. For example, a ball that flows down along the structure that has the second winning opening 640 and reaches near the base of the electric accessory 640a (the side of the structure that has the second winning opening 640), and a ball that flows along the structure that has the second winning opening 640 and a ball that reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640a (the side of the structure that has the second winning opening 640) and the tip of the electric accessory 640a (the second The ball flowing down period required from the time when the ball reaches the vicinity (the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640) from when it is located at the downstream position where it can win the second winning opening 640 to the time when it enters the second winning opening 640. The configuration is such that the difference between the two times is greater than 0.1 second.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the normal game in which the electric accessory 640a is placed in the open state. can. The details will be described later, but in this control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the minimum variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation. There is.

In other words, in this control example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation can be executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the time lag of occurrence of multiple winning balls during one game per regular symbol. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win in the second prize opening 640 during one game per regular symbol, it is possible to easily execute the special symbol 2 lottery a number of times corresponding to the number of prizes won.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 378, with respect to the electric accessory 640a located in the open state, a time lag of the winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a the ball reaches. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of openings (a first opening, a second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 may be provided, and the ball flowing into each opening may enter the second winning opening 640. It is configured such that the period until reaching the point is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further configured to execute a game per normal pattern in which each opening is opened in one game per normal pattern. Also good.

By configuring in this way, during a game with a common figure, the period until the ball that passes through the first opening and the ball that passes through the second opening at approximately the same timing reach the second prize opening 640 can be reduced. Since the numbers can be made different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special drawing 2 lottery a number of times according to the number of prizes won.

Further, in this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to move a plurality of openings between an open state and a closed state. .

<About the production content executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the display contents of the display screen in this seventh control example will be explained. In this control example, when a predetermined gaming condition is established at the end timing of the time saving state, a state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special drawing 2 lottery is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. In addition, in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation effect), the system is configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the support state will be set after the end of the time saving state.

FIG. 379(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final variation of the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 379(a), in this seventh control example, unlike the sixth control example described above, even in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, a fluctuation effect (first suggestion) to show the lottery result of the fluctuation Since the effect) is executed, an effect screen similar to the variation effect (see FIG. 327(a)) that is executed in response to the non-final variation during the time saving state of the sixth control example described above is displayed. Note that the same elements as those on the display screen of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 327(a)) are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this seventh control example, on the display screen of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 327(a)), in addition to the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, it is suggested that a support state is set after the end of time reduction. The difference is that a status suggestion mode 871d with the word "Support" is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871d is configured to be displayed more easily each time the end of the time saving state approaches, and when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is a loss and the support state is set after the end of the time saving state, A production mode in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871d is set. In addition, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a win, an effect mode is set in which the lottery result modes 871a to 871b indicating a win are obtained.

When the support state is set after the end of the time saving state, a display screen shown in FIG. 379(b) is displayed. FIG. 379(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the support state. The details will be described later, but in this control example, the normal figure winning game won during the time saving state is the long opening winning game, and even after the time saving state ends, the long opening winning game continues to be executed, and during the normal state. A support state is set when the ball can win in the second winning hole 640.

During this support state, although it is a normal state, the ball can enter the second winning hole 640, so "hitting right" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4. Then, in the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode is displayed that visually informs the player that he/she will play a game in which a ball is won in the second winning hole 640, and in the sub display area Ds, a support state is set. A comment saying "Support time has arrived" will be displayed.

In addition, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 variation being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and information indicating the number of special figure 2 variations executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. is displayed as "Number of Supports". In the example shown in FIG. 379(b), since the first special figure 2 variation is being executed after the support state is set, "Number of support x 1" is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 851 tries to stand up, and a comment "Give it your all" is displayed. During this support state, it is configured such that a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases, a large number of special figure 2 variations are executed. If the special figure 2 variation in the support state is won, an effect in which the character 851 stands up is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 380 to 383. In this control example, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example described above, and the upper limit number of special drawing 2 reservations is set to 1. The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed in accordance with the change, and other than that, they are the same. It is. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, detailed explanations regarding the differences in the RAM 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 380, for the above-mentioned sixth control example, 6 random number tables 202fd per normal figure are substituted for the 5 random number tables 202ed per normal figure, 6 variable pattern tables 202fe are substituted for the 5 variable pattern tables 202ee, The difference is that a regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff is provided in place of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the ordinary figure type selection 6 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 381(a). FIG. 381(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 6-type selection table 202fd per ordinary figure. In this seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 381(a), as the types per ordinary figure, A per ordinary figure, B1 per ordinary figure, and B2 per ordinary figure are provided, and the above-mentioned types per ordinary figure are provided. This is different from the selection 5 table 202ed.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (ordinary symbol low probability), the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0", "A per ordinary symbol" is defined, and " ``B1 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``1 to 50'', and ``B2 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``51 to 99''. In addition, the probability state of the normal symbol is a high probability state (common symbol high certainty), and the "ordinary symbol per hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0, 1", ``B1 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``2 to 50'', and ``B2 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``51 to 99''.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381(b), a description will be given of the relationship between the type of per-regular symbol selected in the per-regular symbol selection table 202fd and the gaming state at the time when the per-regular symbol game is executed. do. FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the type of common symbol and the gaming state.

This seventh control example differs from the above-mentioned sixth control example in that it provides "B1 per normal pattern" and "B2 per normal pattern" instead of "B per normal pattern" as the type per normal pattern. Although different, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a for the "normal pattern B1" of this control example are the same as the opening operation contents of the "normal pattern B" of the fifth control example described above. A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

If the per-regular pattern type is "B2 per standard pattern" and the game state at the time when the game per standard pattern is released is the short time state (high certainty of general pattern), the game per standard pattern is "long". The opening operation of ``Release B'' is executed. When this "long open B" is set, a game per normal figure is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

In other words, in this seventh control example, if a regular pattern is won during the time saving state, one of the regular pattern winning games "Long Opening A" and "Long Opening B" is executed as the regular pattern long opening winning game. Ru. No matter which normal figure game is executed, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open is the same as 1.5 seconds, and if the normal figure game is executed during the time saving state, which one The system is configured so that a state can be provided to the player in which the same privilege can be given even if a game with a winning symbol is executed.

However, in "Long Open A" and "Long Open B", the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second prize opening 640) after the start of the normal winning game. are different, and if "Long Open A" is set, from 2.6 seconds (including the 0.1 second opening period) to 3.1 seconds after the start of the normal game. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be operated to open in the period of .

Therefore, if you win on a regular pattern where the opening action of "Long Release A" is executed just before the time saving state ends, you will win a winning number on a regular pattern where the opening action of "Long Release B" will be executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set than in the case of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents of the normal variation pattern 6 table 202fe1 included in the variation pattern 6 table 202fe will be explained. FIG. 382 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the normal variation pattern 6 table 202fe1, and includes the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 (see FIG. 339(b)) of the sixth control example described above. ), the difference is that the contents selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are different, and other than that they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In this seventh control example, the special figure is executed until the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of times, depending on the type of time-saving state (time-saving A, time-saving B) set after the end of the jackpot. The two fluctuations are configured to have different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times).

Specifically, if time saving A (1 time saving or 99 time saving) is set as the time saving state, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal state within the range of "1st to 99th". When the special figure 2 variation is executed, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the "100th to 151st" variations are set. In the range, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is "miss", "super short miss (0.1 seconds)" is used, and if it is "win (big hit, small win)" "Long hit (20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "152nd and later", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of special drawing 2 lottery. It is specified that

Here, in this seventh control example, as in the sixth control example described above, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions (common time-saving termination conditions, corresponding time-saving termination conditions) are set as the time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state. For example, even if the time saving state is set to 99 time saving times (the time saving state where the corresponding time saving end condition is set which is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 99 times). , When a small winning game is executed and the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game and the jackpot game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do so. Therefore, even if the time reduction of 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special pattern 2 lottery in the normal state will be executed when the number of special pattern changes after the end of the jackpot is shifted to the second time.

As shown in Figure 382, when time saving A is set, the variation time is 0.1 seconds when the special symbol 2 variation is executed when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot is "100th to 151st". is configured so that it is set. In other words, if you complete 99 times of time saving without winning with the time saving state set, a 0.1 second variable time will be set as the variable time for the special map 2 hold stored at that point. be done. In addition, when a game with a normal figure is executed so as to cross the end timing of the time saving state, the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation occurs in the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. is executed, so even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 during a game with a normal figure, the structure is such that it is easy to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation a number of times according to the number of winnings. .

On the other hand, if a time saving state with one time saving number is set, even if a game per regular pattern is executed across the end timing of the time saving state, the 10 second fluctuation time is the special pattern 2 variation. Since this is set, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 during a game with a regular figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured so that it is executed only the number of times that the number of stored special figure 2 reservations is the upper limit. are doing.

In addition, if time saving B (time saving state in which 5 time saving times are set) is set, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is within the range of "1st to 5th" and the special symbol 2 fluctuation during the normal state. is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, and in the range of "6th to 20th", the fluctuation type is set. Regardless of the value of counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is "miss", "super short miss (0.1 seconds)" will be used, and if the result is "win (big win, small win)", "long win ( 20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st time onwards", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery. has been done.

As explained above, in this control example, among the three time saving states (1 time saving, 5 time saving, and 99 time saving) in which different time saving end conditions are set, the time saving state in which 5 time saving is set is In two types of time saving states: , 99 time saving times are set, and the time saving state is set to 0. It is configured to be able to perform 1 second special figure 2 variations.

As mentioned above, the 0.1 second set as the special figure 2 variation is based on the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the regular figure long opening game. Since the length is also short, it is possible to execute many special pattern 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls into the second prize opening 640 in one regular pattern long opening game.

Therefore, the ease with which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed after the end of the time-saving state can be varied depending on the set time-saving state and the established time-saving end condition. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play when the game ends.

In addition, in this control example, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, two special symbol fluctuations are executed within a period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151". In other words, after the time saving state of one time saving ends, and after that, while playing the left-handed game in the normal state, the player wins the regular pattern long opening and the timing when the special pattern 2 lottery is executed is If the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151", it is configured so that a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery is a loss. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special pattern 2 variation multiple times when the regular pattern long open hit is won during the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which the special drawing 2 drawing can be carried out advantageously not only after the end of the time-saving state, but also when winning a regular long open winning pattern in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game in the normal state while being aware of the number of changes in the special figure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, players who have been playing games for a long time can understand the details of the previous time-saving state (number of time-savings), and also have an advantage in the special drawing 2 lottery by winning the regular state long opening. It is possible to predict the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to play the game more advantageously than other players, which increases the motivation to continue playing the game. can be made to increase.

In addition, in this seventh control example, when a specific time saving state is set and the time saving state ends when the specific time saving end condition is met, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set for a short time (0. The structure is configured such that a fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected, but it is not limited to this, and a short time (0.1 second) fluctuation pattern is selected depending on the timing of winning the regular pattern long opening during the normal state. It may be configured to separately provide a range in which a variation pattern is selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special drawing 2 lottery can be carried out advantageously in the case of winning the long opening of the common drawing, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, in this control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, no matter which time-saving ending condition the time-saving state ends, it becomes possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation after the time-saving state ends, and it provides the player with peace of mind. The player can play the game with care.

Further, it may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns are selected when the same type of time saving state is set. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 time saving times are set as the time saving state may be provided, and multiple Among the time saving types, only when a specific time saving type is set, a short time (0.1 second) special figure 2 variation may be executed after the time saving state ends. Thereby, at the time when the time saving state is set (at the time when the remaining time saving number is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the game after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this control example, a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set as a state (support state) in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed advantageously. It is sufficient that the variable time is set to be shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a, and multiple types of variable times (for example, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, and 0.3 seconds) are sufficient. It may be configured such that one variation time is selected from among them. With this configuration, depending on the length of the special pattern 2 fluctuation time set in the state where the special pattern 2 lottery is carried out advantageously (support state), the number of times the special pattern 2 lottery can be executed during the support state can be changed. Since this is variable, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the game content during the support state.

Next, the contents of the regular pattern variation pattern selection 6 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 383. FIG. 383(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the regular pattern variation pattern selection 6 table 202ff, and FIG. This is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the fluctuation pattern table 202ff2, and FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the fluctuation pattern table 202ff2, and FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 383(a), the normal pattern variation pattern selection 6 table 202ff includes the normal pattern variation pattern table 202ff1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the "normal pattern variation pattern table 202ff1" as the type of time saving state. It has a regular pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A that is referenced when "time saving A" is set, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. are doing.

The contents stipulated in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff1 are the same as the contents referenced in the normal state (low certainty of general pattern) of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef in the fifth control example described above. , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the general pattern variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) is based on the type of time saving state set and the jackpot, with respect to the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the regular pattern variation pattern selected is different based on the number of special pattern variations after the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383(b), the contents defined in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A will be explained. This normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A is a data table that is referred to when "time saving A" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is set to 1 time or 99 times. As shown in (b), various regular pattern fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) are defined based on the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, if the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98" and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds), but in the range of 630 to 999, ``ultra short fluctuations (0.1 seconds)'' are specified, and the number of special pattern fluctuations is ``99 times'', and the acquired second When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 709", "very short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and when the value is in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is specified. In the range of "990 to 999", "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined.

In other words, for the final change in time reduction when one time reduction is set, 63% select 2 seconds and 37% select 0.1 seconds as the normal pattern, and 99 time reductions are set. In the time saving final variation in the case, 71% selects 0.1 seconds, 28% selects 10 seconds, and 1% selects 2 seconds as the regular pattern variation pattern. Here, the shorter the variation time is set as the regular pattern fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the game to be executed per regular symbol to cross the end timing of the time saving state, so compared to the time saving state where one time saving is set, In the time saving state in which 99 time saving times are set, it is possible to more easily set a state (support state) in which it is easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special pattern fluctuations is "99 times", the configuration is such that 10 seconds of general pattern fluctuation time is selected with a 28% probability, and this 10 second general pattern fluctuation time is selected. In this case, it becomes difficult to execute a game with a common symbol so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in this control example, when 99 times of time saving is set as the time saving end condition, other symbols are used as the regular pattern variation time during the execution of the special pattern fluctuation (99th special pattern variation) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Since the configuration is such that the 0.1 second regular pattern fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the period of , the 0.1 second regular pattern fluctuation is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which excessive privileges (prize balls paid out by placing a ball in the second prize opening 640) are obtained.

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special symbol variation set as the time-saving final variation and the regular symbol variation are set at different triggers, and either of the triggers for execution can be established by the ball fired in the right-handed game. Since this configuration is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which a normal pattern variation (a variation per common pattern) is executed in accordance with the end timing of a special pattern variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383(c), the contents defined in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B will be explained. The regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B is a data table that is referred to when "time saving B" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is 5, and is shown in FIG. 383(c). As mentioned above, various regular symbol fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are defined based on the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, if the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4" and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds) is in the range of 630 to 999, "ultra short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and if the number of special pattern fluctuations is 5 times, the acquired number 2. Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS2, "very short variation (0.1 seconds)" is defined. In addition, since the time saving state is set to a maximum of 5 times, a value corresponding to the 6th and subsequent special figure fluctuation times is not set.

As described above, when five time saving states are set, the normal figure variation is always executed with a variation time of 0.1 seconds during the final time saving variation. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute a game with a common symbol so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As explained above, in this control example, the variation time of the special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol can be set differently depending on the type of the set time saving state (time saving A, B). The time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 time saving times are set is the easiest to set the state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special map 2 lottery after the time saving state ends, followed by 99 time saving times and 1 time saving. It is configured in this order.

As a result, if the conditions for executing a jackpot game during a time-saving state are not satisfied, it is possible to grant benefits (support state) to the player, and furthermore, depending on the type of the set time-saving state, benefits can be granted to the player. By varying the grant probabilities, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of the regular symbol variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, each variation pattern may be selected by referring only to the number of variations of the special pattern 2 variation, or may be configured to refer to the number of variations of the regular pattern variation. You may do so. Further, each variation pattern may be selected by referring to the degree to which the set time-saving termination condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of the regular symbol variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, the variable pattern table used when selecting each variable pattern may be changed based on the type of small win won during the time saving state, or the variable pattern table used when selecting each variable pattern may be It may be configured such that each variation pattern is selected based on the number of special figure variations or the number of regular figure variations.

<About the control process in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385, the content of the control process in this seventh control example will be explained. In this control example, in contrast to the sixth control example described above, the main control The difference is that the contents of data tables referred to in various discrimination processes in the device 110 (see FIGS. 380 to 383) are different, and other than that, they are the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) will be explained with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol variation processing 6 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) is executed, the same processes from C601 to C611 as the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) of the sixth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that the current regular symbol lottery is a win (C611: Yes), the current regular symbol winning type is set by referring to the regular symbol winning type selection 6 table 202fd (C641), The display mode (when the figure is correct) is set (C613), and the process moves to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the current winning lottery of the normal symbol is a loss (C611: No), the display mode when the winning lottery is a loss is set (C614), and the process moves to the process of C642.

In the process of C642, the current common pattern variation pattern is set based on the common pattern variation pattern selection 6 table (C642), and commands corresponding to each setting (judgment of validity of winning lottery, common pattern variation pattern) are set. (C623), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current normal symbol is fluctuating (C602: Yes), C618 to The process of C623 is executed and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 385, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh control example will be described. The control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example are as follows: It is different in that it is configured to execute the production setting process 6 for ordinary figures (see C4167 in FIG. 385). The other control processes are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production setting process 6 for ordinary figures (C4167). As shown in FIG. 385, in the ordinary symbol production setting processing 6 (C4167), in contrast to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol production setting processing (see C4117 in FIG. 371), the ordinary symbol production setting processing 6 (C4167) is executed during the special symbol final fluctuation period in the time saving state. The difference is that processing for setting the presentation mode is added, but other than that, they are the same, and the same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the ordinary figure effect setting process 6 (C4167) is executed, the same processes from C4201 to C4212 as the ordinary figure effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) of the sixth control example described above are executed, and this process end. In addition, in the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current state is in the final change of the time saving state (C4251), and the final change is made. If it is determined that it is not inside (C4251: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4251, if it is determined that the current time is in the final variation of the time saving state (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure variation being executed is obtained. Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is during the game when the regular symbol long is hit (C4253), and if it is determined that it is during the game when the regular symbol long is opened (C4253: Yes), the current time saving Since the regular pattern long open winning game is executed to cross the state end timing, a display command is set to suggest that the special pattern 2 fluctuation zone (support state) will be set after the time shortening ends (C4254). , this process ends. When a display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 through the same process as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 379(a) is displayed as the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the short time end timing (C4253: No), this process is ended as is. In addition, in this control example, when it is determined in the process of C4253 that the long release is not performed at the short time end timing (C4253: No), this process is terminated as is, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the setting The time-saving state that was set was a time-saving state in which it was easy to set the support state (for example, time-saving B), but perhaps the execution timing of the special pattern variation and the regular pattern variation was bad, and the support state was not set. It is also possible to provide a means for determining whether a time saving state in which it is difficult to set (for example, time saving A) has been set, and to display a display mode that can notify (suggest) the determination result to the player. . In addition, at the end timing of the current normal pattern variation and the end timing of the normal pattern winning game executed based on the current normal pattern variation, a means for determining whether the final variation of the time saving state has ended or not is provided. If it is determined that the final change in the time saving state has not ended at the end timing of the current normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern winning game executed based on the current general pattern fluctuation, It may be configured to suggest (notify) the determination result.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, similar to the sixth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery 2) is more effective than the first special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery 1). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. The special drawing 2 lottery is configured to be executed more easily than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set. Then, when a ball is won in the V winning opening 650a that is opened during a small winning game and the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), an opportunity to execute the jackpot game is established. .

Then, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a first end condition (a condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure variations (the number of special figure 2 variations) reaches a specified number of times (for example, 5 times)); A case where there is at least a second termination condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specific small win is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special drawing lottery during a time-saving state), and the first termination condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that an advantageous state advantageous to the player can only be given to the player. Specifically, during the special pattern fluctuation where the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short (regular symbol fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and a large number of fluctuations are made within one special symbol fluctuation period. It is configured to be able to perform general fluctuations.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the fulfillment of the first ending condition, the fluctuation period of the regular pattern variation to be executed is shortened in the final variation of the time saving state (special pattern final variation). be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a game with a common figure long opening per game during the final variation of the time saving state (final variation of special figures), and by extension, the time saving state ends during the execution of a game with a common figure long opening, and the normal Even after the state is set, it is possible to easily continue the regular pattern long open winning game.

In other words, in this control example, in a state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, special drawing 2 lottery is executed, and the first benefit (small winning winning (small winning winning probability is about 1/ 7)) In the case where the player is allowed to play a game that aims to be awarded ``Special Figure 2 Lottery'' a predetermined number of times without winning a small hit in the Special Figure 2 Lottery executed during the time-saving state, It is configured such that a second benefit (a period in which a short fluctuation is executed as a regular fluctuation) different from the first benefit is granted. With this configuration, advantageous benefits can be given to the player regardless of whether the player wins a small hit as a gaming result (special drawing 2 lottery result) during the time saving state or not. It is possible to improve the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in this control example, the period in which the short variation is executed as the regular pattern variation is set during the execution period of the special pattern final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 time reductions). When the time-saving state ends, it is possible to easily obtain the number of second special symbols (special symbols 2) to be stored up to the upper limit (four). Furthermore, by shortening the regular figure fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the proportion of the period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open per unit time, so the state in which the game per ordinary figure is being executed (the electric accessory The normal state can be easily set in a state in which the object 1640a is open or a period in which the electric accessory 1640a remains open.

As a result, even after the normal state is set, it is possible to make it easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 1640, so when the second benefit is granted, it is easier to win the ball than when the second benefit is not granted. Many special figure 2 lottery drawings can be executed, and players can be motivated to play games.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example changes from a first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball during a specific game (for example, a small winning game) to a state in which the ball enters the ball from the first state. A specific ball entering means (V winning hole 650a) is provided which can be changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to enter, and a ball that enters the specific ball entering means (V winning hole 650a) is placed in a specific area (V gate). The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed based on passing the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball enters the V winning hole 650a that is opened when a small win game is executed. In this case, the technology described in this control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. In this case as well, by configuring the special drawing 2 drawing to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the special drawing 1 drawing, it will be advantageous for the player when the second benefit mentioned above is given. A gaming state can be provided.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, as explained with reference to FIG. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if 99 times of time saving is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set (for example, a period in which the number of special map changes is 45 to 50 times after the time saving state was set), the second benefit is The contents specified in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern 6 table 202fe may be configured so as to be given. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of time saving types for a time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, and to configure the period during which the second benefit is granted to be different depending on the set time saving type. good.

By configuring this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second benefit will be awarded, so it is expected that the second benefit will be awarded. It is possible to have the player play the game while in the time saving state.

<About the modification of the seventh control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example described above will be explained. In the seventh control example described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when the fifth special symbol variation is executed in a state where a specific time saving state (time saving state of 5 time saving times) is set. , an advantageous game in which a short (0.1 second) variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is configured to be executed, and the game is executed just before the end of the time saving state or immediately after the end of the time saving state. It was configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 378, a second prize opening 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side game area of the game board 13, and when a right-handed game is executed, The configuration was such that a ball could enter the second winning hole 640, but a ball could not enter the first winning hole 64.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second prize opening 640 provided in the right side game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game If it is possible to win a prize and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, use the game board 13 in which the first prize opening 64 is arranged in a position where it is difficult for the ball fired in a right-handed game to win a prize. ing. The rest of the configuration of the game board 13 is the same as that of the sixth control example described above, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in this modification, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) change in the order in which the acquired information was acquired (in the order in which the ball entered the corresponding prize opening). This control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that it is configured so that the (lottery) is executed and that the configuration that stores the acquisition information of the special drawing 2 on hold is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as the sixth control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second benefit (playing period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is likely to be set as the normal pattern fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and the When the state is set, it becomes easier for the ball fired in the right-handed game to enter the second winning hole 640, and it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at a timing other than during the normal winning game, it becomes easier for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win in the first prize opening 64. Since it does not have a configuration for storing the reservation of special drawing 2, even if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 while the special drawing 1 variation is being executed, the special drawing 2 variation will not be executed. It is configured not to run.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640 and a restricting means for restricting the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. configured to function. With this configuration, the second benefit is granted to the player when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, depending on whether the second benefit is granted during the time saving state or not. Benefits can vary widely. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while expecting to be awarded the second benefit.

<Second modification of the sixth control example>
Next, a second modification of the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 397. In the sixth control example described above, a series of performances is configured to be able to be executed as a variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of performances are executed. The system was designed to make it difficult to tell whether the execution trigger for the current series of performances was a special lottery or a general lottery, and to provide players with the pleasure of predicting the performance results (lottery results). (See Figure 317).

However, the notification mode (small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the gaming method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game depending on the winning game (normal winning game, small winning game, jackpot game) to be executed. There is a possibility that it may be determined which symbol lottery the current series of effects is based on depending on the timing at which the display mode) is displayed.

On the other hand, in this second modification, in the performance (set performance) that is executed in response to the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery), which symbol lottery is performed. Even when the game is played, it is configured to be able to display a notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the gaming method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at the same timing. The characteristic configuration and control contents of this second modification will be explained below. Note that detailed explanations of the same contents as in the sixth control example described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example differs in the configuration of the right side game area from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 315). , otherwise the same. Identical components will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification. In this second modified example, when the player plays a right-handed game, the ball flowing down the right side game area becomes each winning slot that can win a prize in each winning game (normal winning game, small winning game, jackpot winning game). (The second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a, and the specific winning hole 65a) are configured to take different times to reach, and specifically, the balls fired by the right-handed game reach the second winning hole 640. It is configured such that the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 4 seconds, the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time it takes to reach the specific winning a prize hole 65a is about 6 seconds.

Here, the configuration of the right side game area of the second modification will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. As shown in FIG. 386, above the right side game area there is provided a sorting means 700 that can sort the balls into a plurality of ball paths, and the balls sorted by the sorting means 700 are sent to the first path 701. and a second route 702.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering ball path, and is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first path 701. The ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the channel unit in which the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessories 640a are provided. The flow channel unit is configured such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 66, and as part of the flow channel formed on the upper surface, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are installed. It is provided. When the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are both in a closed state, the ball that has flown down the upper surface of the channel unit flows out from the lowest end of the upper surface of the channel unit (the end on the out port 66 side) and is out. It is configured to flow into the port 66 .

The configuration is such that the time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second, and furthermore, the ball flow on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a (the upper surface of the channel unit) A delay member for delaying the flow of the ball is provided on the surface forming the path, and the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is approximately 2 seconds. It consists of Here, in the present seventh control example, a meandering channel is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, which is meandered in the depth direction so that the ball does not flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in a straight line. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flow into the opening 704a of the straight passage passage formed in the depth direction of the first passage, and are placed near the exit of the passage passage. The ball is configured so that it flows down toward the V winning hole 650a, and the ball fired in a right-handed game reaches the V winning hole 650a in about 2 seconds.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example, the balls fired in the right-handed game can be won in each winning slot in each winning game (normal game, small winning game, jackpot game). (The second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a, and the specific winning hole 65a) are configured to take different times to reach, and specifically, the balls fired by the right-handed game reach the second winning hole 640. It is configured such that the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 4 seconds, the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time it takes to reach the specific winning a prize hole 65a is about 6 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to sequentially check in which winning hole the ball fired in the right-handed game enters the prize, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this second modification, different special symbol fluctuation times are set in the case of winning a small hit in the special lottery and in the case of winning a jackpot, and each winning game is Immediately after execution, in order to win a prize in the winning hole opened by the ball hitting game, the system is configured to give notification for guiding the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. And, regardless of whether a small hit is won or a big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special symbol fluctuation starts, and at the same timing after a specific time has elapsed, the system is configured to make a notification to guide the right-handed game. ing. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the current lottery result is determined by the player based on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is made.

In addition, in this second modification, when a player wins a long opening hit in the general drawing lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so that a notification to guide the right-handed game is made at a specific timing of the set effect. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if a set performance is executed and a notification indicating a right-handed game is made, it is difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current set performance indicates. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a series of performances used as variable performances of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in this second modification, and a right-handed game that guides a right-handed game. The relationship with the notification display timing will be explained. FIG. 389 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 389, in this control example, a performance (a series of performances) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the start of symbol variation, and then a guidance notification is issued to guide the player to a right-handed game. (Right hit notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes a right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the ball fired by the right-handed game is released according to the lottery result of the symbol variation currently being executed. It is configured so that a prize can be won in the winning opening (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the special pattern 1 variation (60 seconds) that has won a jackpot, then the right hit will occur 54 seconds after the start of the variation (during the special pattern 1 variation). Notification is executed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the specific winning hole 65a (6 seconds after the right-handed game is played).

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the special figure 1 variation (58 seconds) that has won a small hit, the right hit notification will be issued 54 seconds after the start of the variation (during the special figure 1 variation). is executed. Then, the small winning game is started at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the V winning hole 650a (4 seconds after the right-handed game is played). In addition, in this control example, when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game, it is configured so that it always passes through the V gate, and when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. In this case, the jackpot game is started two seconds after the start of the small win game. As a result, the performance mode of the fluctuation performance (series of performances) that is executed from the start of the fluctuation, and the guidance notification that guides the right-handed game, depending on the case where you win the jackpot with the special figure 1 fluctuation and the case where you win the small hit. In addition to the execution timing, it is possible to make the timing from the start of fluctuation to the timing at which the jackpot game starts to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the winning normal pattern fluctuation (54 seconds), a right-handed notification will be executed 54 seconds after the fluctuation starts (when the general pattern fluctuation stops). be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning hole 640 (two seconds after the right-handed game is played), the game with a common figure is started. In addition, even when a series of performances are executed based on this fluctuation of the general pattern, the start timing of the jackpot game via the normal pattern winning game will be different from the case where the jackpot is won in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 lottery and the case where the small winning is won. It is configured so that they can be made the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this second modification, at multiple timings during the period (right-handed ball flow period) after the guidance notification (right-handed ball notification) for guiding the right-handed game is executed until the jackpot game starts. , is configured to be able to execute a failure performance that notifies that the current performance result is a failure (the jackpot game will not be executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed hit notification is executed.

In other words, although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is a loss, the structure is configured such that a variation pattern of variation times of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds is set. When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as described above is executed, and failure notification is executed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. The above-mentioned failure notification timing is based on the timing when it is determined that the ball could not be won into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, and the timing when the ball was won into the second winning hole 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation executed by the lottery is announced, or the timing at which a small win is won as a result of the special figure 2 lottery and the small win game ends.

By configuring in this way, there is a performance mode of a series of effects that are executed when the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is a loss, and a series of effects that are executed based on a winning of a normal drawing. In the game process after the game, it is possible to make the performance mode set when the jackpot game is not executed the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this second modification, for example, even if you win a jackpot with the 1 variation of special symbols and the 60 second variation of special symbols is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the above-mentioned failure notification is executed. It is configured to execute an inciting performance for the purpose of inciting people. In this case, since the state is that the special figure 1 jackpot has been won internally, a successful performance mode is set and executed as a performance to inform the player that there will be no failure as a result of the promotion performance.

In this way, by executing the inciting performance, it is possible to reduce the difference in performance between a series of performances in which failure notification is actually executed and a series of performances in which failure notification is not executed, and this fluctuating performance (set performance) ) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand which winning game the performance result indicates, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance performed for the player (the performance performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), the current performance is It is possible to make it difficult to determine in advance what the result will be.

<About the electrical configuration in the second modification>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392. The second modified example differs from the sixth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. , otherwise the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 390(a), the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the second modification will be described. FIG. 390(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the second modification. In this second modification, with respect to the sixth control example described above, the variation pattern 7 table 202ge is replaced with the variation pattern 5 table 202ee, and the regular pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf is replaced with the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef. The difference is that a Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202ge will be explained with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 391(a), the variation pattern 7 table 202ge includes a normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 and a time saving variation pattern 5 table 202ee2. The contents of the variation pattern table that is referenced depending on the state in which the state is set are made different.

Here, the contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 391(b). FIG. 391(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1. As shown in FIG. 391(b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 has the first special symbol ( The contents stipulated in the data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special pattern 1) are different, and the data that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is different. The contents specified in the tables are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery is "miss", "big hit", or "small win", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time ) is selected, and specifically, when the lottery result of special drawing 1 is "lost", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "short" in the range of "0 to 139". "Out (7 seconds)" is in the range "140-179", "Out (30 seconds)" is in the range "180-189", "Short set production (30 seconds)" is in the range "190-194". "Various types of super reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "set effects (60 seconds)" are defined in the range "195 to 198."

In addition, if the lottery result of special map 1 is "Jackpot", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the value of "Normal reach various (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39". ``Short set effects (30 seconds)'' are specified in the range ``40-179'', ``Various types of super reach (60 seconds)'' are specified in the range ``180-198'', and ``Set effects (60 seconds)'' are defined in the range ``180-198''. , if the lottery result is a "small win", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "super reach various (60 seconds)" in the range "0 to 99", and "small win" is in the range "100 to 198". "Winning set performance (56 seconds)" is stipulated.

As explained above, the second modified example is configured so that the variation pattern for executing the set performance at a predetermined ratio is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special drawing 1. The variation pattern (variation time) set as a set effect is configured to be different between when a small hit is won and when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when winning a big hit, a variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as a set effect, and when winning a small hit, a variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as a set effect. In other words, the fluctuation time of the set performance when winning a small hit is configured to be 4 seconds shorter than the fluctuation time of the set performance when winning a jackpot.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 386, in the game board 13 of the second modified example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning hole 650a that is opened during the small winning game. The configuration is such that the time required for the ball to reach the specific prize opening 65a that is opened during the jackpot game (approximately 6 seconds) is 4 seconds longer than the time required for the ball to reach the special prize opening 65a (approximately 2 seconds). ing. As will be described later, in this control example, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time), 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. It is configured to execute a notification (right-handed notification) to guide a right-handed game.

With this configuration, the timing from when the set performance is executed to when the right hit notification is executed can be made the same for both jackpot wins and small win wins, so players can be informed of the performance results of the set performance. It can be difficult to understand. Furthermore, a right-handed game will be notified 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, and if the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game notification, the special drawing lottery result will be the trigger for executing the current set performance. Regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, the ball fired in the right-handed game can be won in any of the open winning holes.

Next, the contents of the common pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf will be explained with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the common pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf. As shown in FIG. 392, the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf is based on the general pattern long fluctuation B (60 seconds) defined in the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef (see FIG. 338) of the sixth control example described above. The difference is that the normal pattern long fluctuation C (58 seconds) is defined in the range specified, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf, the gaming state is normal (normal pattern low probability), the result of the general pattern lottery is A per normal pattern, and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "500". ~999'', and when the gaming state is normal (low probability of regular figures) and the result of the regular lottery is a loss, the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates within the range of ``800 to 999''. As a pattern, "regular pattern long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is defined.

When the regular figure long variation C is selected, a set effect can be executed. In other words, even when a set effect is executed based on the long variation C of the regular figure, the right-handed hit notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game notification, the shot ball is configured to win in the second winning hole 640.

By configuring in this way, the timing from when the set performance is executed to when the right hit notification is executed can be the same for jackpot winnings, small winning wins, and regular winnings, so players can enjoy the set performance. It is possible to make the performance results difficult to understand. Furthermore, a right-handed game will be notified 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, and if the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game, the symbol lottery result that will trigger the execution of the current set performance will be Regardless of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a regular hit, the ball fired by the right-handed game will be released into any winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening). 640).

Furthermore, in this second modification, the special drawing reservation and the general drawing reservation are read in advance, and when the start timing of the special drawing fluctuation is not won in the special drawing lottery for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds), In addition, when it is determined that the player wins a regular lottery after a predetermined period of time (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and that it is the timing to execute the winning long open winning game. , is configured to execute a set effect from the start timing of the special figure variation, and 54 seconds after the set effect is started from the start timing of the special figure variation, the right side corresponding to the regular figure long open winning game is executed. It is configured to execute a notification.

In this way, the contents of the special pattern fluctuation and the contents of the regular pattern fluctuation are read in advance, and if it is determined that the set performance can be executed at the start timing of any symbol fluctuation, the set performance can be executed. It is possible to increase the frequency with which the performance is executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the performance result of the set performance executed at the start timing of the special pattern variation can indicate the winning of the regular pattern long open winning, it is possible to make the player play a unique game.

Note that the relationship between the start timing of the set performance and the execution timing of the right-handed notification should not deviate significantly; for example, the execution timing of the right-handed notification, which is normally executed 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, may be changed. You can shift it back or forth by a few seconds (2 seconds), and in reality, the ball fired by the right-handed game will enter the winning slot 58 seconds after the set performance is executed, but the set performance is The right-handed hit notification may be executed 54 seconds after execution. By allowing a slight deviation in this way and making it possible to execute the set performance, the conditions for executing the set performance are more likely to be established, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, although the second modification is configured to execute the set effect at the start timing of symbol fluctuation, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the conditions for executing the set effect described above are satisfied, for example, It may be configured such that the set effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo-stop display mode to make the player think that the special symbol variation has ended before the set effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to perform a set performance that is started in the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without feeling any discomfort to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modified example will be explained. This second modification differs from the sixth control example described above in that a production prohibition flag 223ga is added, and is otherwise the same. Identical components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The performance prohibition flag 223ga is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set performance, and is set to ON when the setting of a new set performance is prohibited. In this second modification, in addition to the period when the set effect is being executed, the set effect is configured so that it is not executed during the period when a specific super reach effect (including a miss) is being executed based on the special symbol fluctuation. The performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON even during a period in which a specific super reach performance is executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the performance being executed (particularly a performance with high expectation of winning) being switched to a set performance midway through.

<About the control process in the second modification>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 393 to 397, the content of control processing in the second modified example will be explained. In the second modified example, in contrast to the control processing content in the sixth control example described above, the main control device 110 performs various determination processing (hit determination processing, etc.) and various selection processing (hit type selection processing, variation pattern selection processing, etc.). ), the processing results are different, and the specifics of the various processes executed based on the processing results (processing to set commands, processing to store processing results, etc.) Although the technical content is different, since the technical idea is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, stop command processing 7 (see C3246 in FIG. 393) is substituted for stop command processing 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368), and variable display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369). ) in place of variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in Figure 394), and effect update process 7 (see C3142 in Figure 397) in place of effect update process 5 (see C3112 in Figure 374). are doing. Everything else is the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246) will be explained with reference to FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 393, stop command processing 7 (C3246) is different from stop command processing 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) described above in that a setting process for the production prohibition flag 223ga is added, and other than that, are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When stop command processing 7 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processing as C3951 to C3956 as the above-mentioned stop command processing 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) is executed, and then the current stop command is set to the production prohibition flag. 223ga is set to ON (C3971), and if it is determined that the target fluctuation is stopped (C3971: Yes), the production prohibition flag 223GA is turned off. settings (C3972), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that the change does not indicate the stoppage of the target fluctuation (C3972: No), the process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) will be explained with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 394, the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) in that it adds a process for setting the performance mode of the set effect. The difference is that a process of setting the performance prohibition flag 223ga on when the obtained fluctuation pattern is a super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is executed, the same processes from C4001 to C4004 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process was executed based on the special figure variation or the regular figure variation. Then, based on the determination results, it is determined whether the execution conditions for each set performance are satisfied, and if the execution conditions for the set performance are satisfied, a process for setting the performance mode of the set performance is performed. executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the explanation will be continued. When the process of C4041 is finished, it is then determined whether the fluctuation pattern obtained this time is a super reach (C4042), and if it is determined that it is a super reach (CS24042: Yes), the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on. (C4043), sets a display variation pattern command (C4044), executes the same processes C4006 to C4010 as the above-described variation display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C4042, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is not a super reach (C4042: No), the process of C4043 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C4044.

Next, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be explained with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting a set effect is executed at the start timing of special figure variation or regular figure variation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (time saving state), (C4901) , since the game is not in a gaming state where a set performance is to be executed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: Yes), then the current variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in Figure 394) sets the variable display of the special figure variation (sets the effect) (C4902), and if it is determined that the process is to set the variable display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process of C4003 of the variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in Figure 394). It is determined whether the variation pattern obtained in (C4903) is a variation pattern corresponding to the set performance.

In the process of C4903, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to a set performance (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to on. If so (C4904: No), it is determined whether the current long fluctuation per ordinary symbol is in progress (C4905).

In the process of C4905, if it is determined that the current per regular pattern is in long fluctuation (C4905: Yes), the value of the regular pattern fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared ( C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of the regular symbol fluctuation is shorter than the current special symbol fluctuation time (C4907). If it is determined that the current special symbol fluctuation time is longer (C4907: No), the winning information of the normal symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (C4908), and the winning information that has been read out is It is determined whether there is winning information that corresponds to the long fluctuation in the general pattern (C4909), and if it is determined that there is winning information that corresponds to the long fluctuation in the general pattern (C4909: Yes), a set performance according to the current fluctuation pattern is performed. is set (C4910), the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4909, if it is determined that there is no long variation in the winning information read out in the process of C4908 (C4909: No), this process is directly ended. In addition, in the process of C4907, if it is determined that the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), a set effect is set to match the stop timing of the normal figure fluctuation (C4912), and the effect prohibition flag 223ga is turned on. (C4920), and ends this process.

In addition, in the process of C4905, it is determined that there is a long fluctuation per regular pattern, that is, even though it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223ga is not set to on in the processing of C4904, the long fluctuation per regular pattern is determined. A case in which this is the case is, for example, when a super reach effect is being executed as a variation effect of a special figure variation at the start timing of the long variation per normal figure being executed.

As described above, in this control example, the process of C4909 is provided, and when there is a long fluctuation in the winning information, the set effect is set. By configuring this way, if it is determined that there is a long change in the general pattern in the winning information, the long change in the general pattern is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special pattern change, so the set effect cannot be executed. During the normal pattern fluctuations are executed multiple times in a short period of time, for example, by executing a short winning game of the general pattern, it is possible to realize that the current set performance is a set performance executed based on the special pattern fluctuation. It is possible to prevent players from easily grasping the information. In addition, although the process of C4909 is provided in this control example, it is not limited to this and may be configured to set a set effect.

In addition, in the set performance set in the process of C4912, the set performance is executed not at the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation, but at the timing that matches the regular pattern fluctuation stop timing, so the general pattern long release is performed as a result of the set performance. It will notify you of the hit. In addition, if the remaining period of the general pattern variation at the start of this special pattern variation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the performance mode of the set effect can be executed, the general pattern long release is performed instead of setting the set effect. It is preferable to configure the game so that a special performance mode indicating a win is set. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he has won the regular long open winning.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, if it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to on (C4904: Yes), or in the process of C4905, if it is determined that there is no long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905: No) obtains the lottery result of the currently executed Fuzu drawing (C4913), determines whether the Fuzu lottery has been won ( Fuzu long open winning) (C4914), and determines whether the Fuzu lottery has been won ( Fuzu long open winning) (C4914). If it is determined that the player has not won (or the regular lottery has not been executed) (C4914: No), the process moves to the process of C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, if it is determined that the regular symbol has been won (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a winning fluctuation. If so (C4915: Yes), the value of the regular pattern fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general pattern fluctuation is calculated from the current special pattern fluctuation time. It is determined whether the length is also short (C4917). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the current special pattern fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the current general pattern fluctuation (C4917: Yes), the set effect that is being executed for the general pattern fluctuation will be changed this time. The set effect is set to show the lottery result of the special figure variation (C4918), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4915, if it is determined that the current special symbol fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special symbol fluctuation is longer than the remaining period of the regular symbol fluctuation that is being executed. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process is ended without setting a set performance corresponding to the current special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in Figure 394) is a process for setting the variable display of normal symbols (C4902: No), the normal symbol set effect setting The process is executed (C4919), and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the general map set effect setting process (C4919) will be explained with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map set effect setting process (C4919). When the general figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined that it is a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next Then, it is determined whether the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on (C5002).

If it is determined in the process of C5002 that the performance prohibition flag 223ga is not set to on (C5002: No), a set performance is set according to the current fluctuation pattern (C5003), and the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on. (C5004) and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, if it is determined that the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the current normal pattern fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (long open winning fluctuation). C5005), if it is determined that it is a long open winning fluctuation (C5005: Yes), the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is obtained (C5006), and it is determined whether it is a special drawing winning (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the performance prohibition flag 223ga is set to on based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the process of C5007, if it is determined that it is not a special figure hit (C5007: No), then the value of the regular figure variation time counter 223eh and the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg are compared (C5008), It is determined whether the current general pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation that is being executed (C5009), and if it is determined that the current general pattern fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), A replacement performance (set performance) is set to notify the general lottery result (long opening win) by special pattern performance (set performance executed based on special pattern fluctuation) (C5010), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of C5007, if it is determined that the special symbol variation being executed is a winning variation (C5007: Yes), or in the process of C5009, the current regular symbol variation time is the remaining amount of the special symbol variation being executed. If it is determined that the time is longer than the specified time (C5009: No), the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the contents of the effect update processing 7 (C3142) will be explained with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update processing 7 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 397, the effect update process 7 (C3142) is a right-hitting notification process when a set effect is executed, in contrast to the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that . The rest is the same, and detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 7 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the sixth control example described above are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of C4505 that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is not set to ON (C4505: No), or if the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. It is determined whether there is a child (C4541). In the process of C4541, determination is made by referring to the value of a performance time measurement counter (not shown) that is set to measure the performance time when a set performance is executed.

In the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set performance is being executed (the performance time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have passed since the set performance was started? (C4542), and if it is determined that 54 seconds have elapsed (C4542: Yes), a display guide command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process moves to C4507. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the process of C4542, if it is determined that 54 seconds have not elapsed (C4542: No) , C4543 is not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the performance update processing 7 (C3142) shown in FIG. 397, the right-handed game is shown at the timing of 54 seconds from the start of the performance only when it is determined that the set performance is being executed. However, in reality, the configuration is such that a display guide command to indicate a right-handed game is set at other times as well. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 in FIG. 391(b), when a 30 second set effect is set, the set effect is executed. At the timing when 24 seconds have passed since then, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game is set. Further, when replacing the performance result of the set performance that is being executed midway through, a display guide command for indicating the right-handed game may be set at a further different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from normal, so that it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 410. This eighth control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that the method of setting the presentation mode of the series of presentations is different. First, a method for setting a series of effects in the sixth control example described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of setting a series of effects in the sixth control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 398, in the above-mentioned sixth control example, there are two cases: when winning a regular symbol (general symbol long open winning) and when winning a jackpot or small prize in the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery. It is configured such that a series of performances can be set, and the performance data of the series of performances is stored divided into a plurality of scenario types.

Specifically, scenario 1 corresponds to the performance mode executed during the normal pattern fluctuation (see FIGS. 319(b) and 320(a)), and the performance mode executed during the normal pattern game (see FIG. 320(a)). Scenario 2 corresponding to (see (b)); and Scenario 3 corresponding to the presentation mode (see FIG. 323 (a)) that is executed when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular game winning game until the special lottery 2 lottery is executed based on the winning ball is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponds to the performance mode (see Figure 321(a)) that is performed during the special figure 2 fluctuation (see Figure 321(b)), and scenario 4 corresponds to the performance mode executed during the variation of the special figure 2 (see Figure 321(b)). Scenario 5 corresponds to the production mode executed when the series of productions ends (see FIG. 322(b)) and the production mode executed when the series of productions ends midway (see FIGS. 324(b) and 325(b)). A corresponding scenario 7 is stored.

Then, when a jackpot or small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a series of performances using a plurality of production data is set at once in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special symbol 1 variation. There is. Specifically, if you win a big hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, a variable effect (series of effects) is executed in which the effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 5 mentioned above is set all at once, and you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 drawing. If the player wins, the system is configured to execute a variable performance (a series of performances) in which the performance data for Scenario 1 to Scenario 4 described above are set all at once.

On the other hand, for a series of performances that are set based on winning a common map, each scenario that makes up the series of performances is set individually, and the next scenario is set based on the fulfillment of scenario transition conditions for one scenario. It is composed of Specifically, in the case where a player wins the long open win in a general map lottery and the conditions for executing a series of performances are met, scenario 1 indicating the start of a series of performances is set, and the player wins the long open win in a common map. When the stop command shown in FIG. 2 is received, scenario 2 is then set. In addition, in the sixth control example, there is a case where scenario 1 is set (so-called fake effect) without winning the general map long open hit, and in that case, when the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends, , the series of performances ends.

Next, when the performance mode corresponding to scenario 2 is executed during the regular game long open winning game and the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a special map 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that is executed. A notification mode indicating that the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 is outputted from the main control device 110 and is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects are executed (sub-display area in FIG. 321(a) (see Ds). Then, when the special drawing 2 winning command is received, scenario 3 is set. In addition, if the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the period in which scenario 2 is set, scenario 7 is set to end the series of effects, and the end screen for a predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the sixth control example described above, when transitioning to scenario 3, that is, when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular game, the period (waiting period) until the special lottery 2 is executed. is determined based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and different scenarios are set depending on the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see Figure 323(a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see Figure 321(a)) is set. reference) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or more, a special series of performances (continuous series of performances) that pseudo ends the series of performances that are being executed (scenario 7 is set) and starts the series of performances again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is executed (see FIG. 326). Further, when scenario 3-1 is set, the performance mode corresponding to scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received with scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 set, the conditions for transition to the next scenario are met and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 variation is received, and a production mode of the same length as the variation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. . Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the current special figure 2 fluctuation indicates a win, the process moves to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates a loss, the process moves to scenario 7 and the series of processes ends.

Here, in the sixth control example described above, the same variation time is set whether the special figure 2 variation being executed in the state where scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a jackpot, and the change time is changed to scenario 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a jackpot is won with a special figure 2 variation during the normal state, the small winning variation time (15 seconds) and the small winning game time are changed as the variation time. (10 seconds) is configured to set a fluctuation time of 25 seconds, which is the sum of 25 seconds, and transitions from scenario 4 to scenario 5 during the jackpot fluctuation of special map 2, and matches the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation of special map 2. It may also be configured such that a jackpot game is executed.

When scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 variation is a small win, the performance mode corresponding to scenario 5 is executed until the V passing command is received during the small win game or until the small win game ends. When the V pass command is received, a notification mode indicating this is displayed on a layer different from the display layer where the series of effects are executed, and the game proceeds to a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V pass command is not received after the small winning game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the process moves to scenario 7 to end the series of performances.

As explained above, in the fifth control example described above, when executing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 variation, a series of effects scenario is set all at once in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation. When executing a series of performances based on fluctuations in common figures, the performance mode of the series of performances is updated according to the satisfaction of transition conditions corresponding to each scenario. Therefore, when performing a series of performances in the same performance mode, if the update of the performance mode is confirmed, the processing for setting the series of performances can be simplified, and the updated contents of the performance mode can be changed depending on the game situation. In this case, the performance mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned sixth control example, when executing a series of performances based on the general drawing lottery, the scenario of the series of performances is individually set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, Of the series of performances to be executed based on the drawing drawing, a plurality of scenarios may be set together for a part where the update of the performance mode has been confirmed. This makes it possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

The method for setting a series of effects in the sixth control example described above with reference to FIG. 398 is to set a series of effects when an update of the effect mode is confirmed when executing a series of effects in the same effect mode. In addition to simplifying the process, if the update content of the production mode changes depending on the gaming situation, it is possible to flexibly change the production mode according to each gaming situation, but the length of the waiting period Since the only production mode that can be variably set according to the scenario is the production mode corresponding to Scenario 3, players may feel a sense of discomfort when compared to the production mode based on other scenarios in a series of productions that are executed in a predetermined period of time. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the present eighth control example, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the game per normal pattern is predicted, Based on the prediction result, the mode of performance of a series of performances corresponding to fluctuations in the general pattern is set. In other words, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to be executed this time, the general pattern lottery result, and the playing time (maximum time) of the game per normal pattern are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the special symbol 1 variation currently being executed during a game with a common symbol will end, and to set the performance mode of a series of effects corresponding to the common symbol variation based on the determination result. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the end timing of the variation of the special figure 1 variation being executed is later than the period in which a ball can win in the second winning hole 640, that is, the playing period (maximum period) per regular figure. In this case, it becomes possible to predict the timing (length of waiting period) at which the special figure 2 variation can be executed at the time when the regular figure variation is executed. As a result, it is possible to set performance modes based on the length of the standby period as various performance modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, with respect to the fifth control example described above, the period that can be variably set among the production modes of the series of productions can be lengthened depending on the length of the waiting period, so that the series of productions according to the length of the series of productions can be lengthened. It is possible to make it easier to execute the performance.

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400. The eighth control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series effect scenario table 222ha is added to the ROM 222, and a medium hit flag 223ha, an effect scenario storage area 223hb, and a constant monitoring flag 223hc are added to the RAM 223. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 399(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example is different from the sixth control example described above in that a series effect scenario table 222ha is added.

The series performance scenario table 222ha is a data table in which performance modes of a series of performances to be executed in accordance with the progressing game situation are defined. Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the regular pattern scenario table 222ha1, which defines the performance scenario of a series of presentations set based on the regular pattern fluctuations, will be explained among the series presentation scenario table 222ha.

FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series effect scenario table 222ha. In addition, in FIG. 400, among the contents specified in the series production scenario table 222ha, only the characteristic content of this eighth control example (production scenario of a series production set based on fluctuations in common figures) is shown. Therefore, the description and explanation of the same content as the sixth control example described above, that is, the content of the presentation mode of the series of presentations set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation, is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 400, in this eighth control example, when setting the performance mode of a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the general pattern, it is possible to set multiple scenarios per normal pattern (scenarios 1 to 4 per normal pattern). Based on the result of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that may occur during the execution of a series of effects), which is executed when the general pattern fluctuates, different scenarios for the normal pattern are set. It consists of

Specifically, at the start of the fluctuation of the general pattern won by the long opening of the general pattern, it is determined whether the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is changing, and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is changing. Next, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is determined. Next, compare the playing period of the regular pattern long opening game to be executed based on the current general pattern variation with the remaining period of the currently running special pattern 1 variation, and determine the end timing of the currently running special pattern 1 variation. It is determined whether or not it is after the end time of the game for the long opening of the regular figure to be executed based on the current fluctuation of the ordinary figure, and if it is determined that it is after the end time of the game for the opening of the ordinary figure long The waiting period until the FIG. 1 variation ends (the period until the special figure 2 variation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined in the above-described process.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special pattern 2 variation will not be executed at the start of the general pattern variation, so it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special pattern 2 variation will not be executed. It becomes possible to execute a series of performances in a different performance mode.

In addition, in the first prediction described above, if the special pattern 1 variation is not being executed at the start timing of the general pattern variation, or the end timing of the special pattern 1 variation currently being executed is longer than the normal pattern long winning game period. If it is before, the waiting period cannot be predicted in advance, so at the start of the regular pattern variation, only the performance mode of the series of performances corresponding to the regular pattern fluctuation time is set.

As shown in FIG. 400, the series effect scenario table 222ha defines a plurality of scenarios per normal pattern that are set based on the prediction results of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. As a prediction result, if the waiting period (special map 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per regular map" is set, and if it is "more than 2 seconds but less than 30 seconds" It is stipulated that the "normal map hit scenario 2" is set, and when the time is "30 seconds or more", the "regular map hit scenario 3" is set. In addition, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is specified that "scenario 4 for normal map" is set.

Here, we will explain the contents of each general map scenario. When "Scenario 1 per regular map" is set, "Scenario 1" is set for "During regular map fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set for "Playing per regular map", and "Scenario 2 is changed for special map 2" as a performance mode of a series of performances. The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the production mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set to "Medium". In other words, when "scenario 1 for winning a regular map" is set, that is, when the special chart 2 waiting period is short, the performance mode that shows the game for winning a regular map without setting the performance mode exclusively for the special chart 2 waiting period. A series of performances are executed that transitions from to the performance mode showing the special figure 2 variation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to the performance mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period being set for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). I can do it. In addition, in this control example, when scenario 1 for a normal pattern is set, a special pattern 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds that occurs when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a normal pattern long open winning game. Inside, the production mode that can be set during a game with a regular figure is configured to be set continuously, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 change during the special figure 2 standby period of less than 2 seconds. It may also be configured to set the presentation mode that can be set inside.

When "Scenario 2 per normal pattern" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During normal pattern fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set to "Playing per normal pattern", and "Scenario 2 is changed to special pattern 2". The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the effect mode corresponding to ``Scenario 3'' is set in ``Waiting'' and the performance mode corresponding to ``Scenario 4'' is set in ``Special Figure 2 Changing''. In other words, when the "regular figure winning scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 standby period exists for a predetermined period, a performance mode exclusive to the special figure 2 standby period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 waiting period occurs for a predetermined period, a series of effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort (feeling of delay). Furthermore, in this control example, when "Scenario 1 per regular map" is set, "Scenario 3" is set to "Special map 2 changing", but when "Scenario 2 per regular map" is set, "Scenario 3" is set to "Special map 2 changing". is configured to be set in correspondence with "Special Figure 2 Waiting". By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode that transitions from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of effects, regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 standby period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances that will not give the player a feeling of discomfort.

Next, when "Scenario 3 per normal pattern" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During normal pattern fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set to "During play per normal pattern", and "Special The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the performance modes corresponding to "Scenario 2", "Scenario 3", and "Scenario 4" are set in "Fig. 2 Waiting for variation" and "Scenario 4" in "Special figure 2 variation". In other words, when the "scenario 3 for winning a regular map" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special map 2 is longer than the predetermined period, the period in which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the game for winning a regular map is: It is structured so that it is longer than other common map winning scenarios.

By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol 2 waiting period is long, it is possible to make the player think that the regular symbol winning game is being played during that period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to make the user think that the waiting period for the special map 2 is long. In addition, since the corresponding performance mode (scenario 2) is displayed for a long period of time during a game with a common map, the player is not given a special pattern 2 waiting period, and the game with a regular map continues for a long time. It can make you think that it is being done.

In addition, when the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" is set, it is a case where the fluctuation situation of the special pattern 1 fluctuation during the general pattern long open winning game cannot be predicted at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, so the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" is set. Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "Figure changing" is set, and this processing is ended. In addition, when "normal map hit scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the fifth control example described above, and the scenario is set based on the determination result. It is configured as follows.

Furthermore, even if a different normal pattern winning scenario is set as the normal pattern winning scenario, the same performance mode is set during the small winning game and the jackpot winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401 and FIG. 402, the flow in the case where scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where the scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 401, the first prediction process for determining the length of the standby period (special figure 2 standby period) is executed at the time when the regular figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period is "20 seconds" as a processing result of the first prediction process, at the time of starting the variation of the common pattern, the performance data corresponding to the "scenario 2 per common pattern" specified in the series performance scenario table 222ha is set and stored in the production scenario storage area 223hb, which will be described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of performances are executed in a performance mode corresponding to the performance data stored in the performance scenario storage area 223hb.

In this way, if it is possible to predict the future game content at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, by configuring multiple performance data (scenarios) to be set together, the performance mode of a series of performances can be set. processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, a description will be given of the flow when the normal pattern winning scenario 4 is set as a series of effects. FIG. 402 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where scenario 4 per common figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 402, the first prediction process for determining the length of the standby period (special figure 2 standby period) is executed at the time when the regular figure fluctuation is executed. If it is determined as a result of the first prediction process that the stop timing of the special symbol 1 variation that is being executed is earlier than the stop timing of the variation per regular symbol, it is possible to predict the length of the waiting period. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the regular pattern variation, the effect data corresponding to "performing pattern scenario 4" specified in the series effect scenario table 222ha is is set.

In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 402, in the period from when the special symbol 1 fluctuation in execution stops until the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular symbol long open winning game, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether the special figure 1 variation will be executed or not, it is not possible to predict the length of the waiting period. In such a case, at the start of the variation of the common pattern, only the performance mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the variation of the common pattern is set as the performance mode of the series of effects, and when the variation of the common pattern stops (when the variation of the common pattern starts) ), the second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is to determine the length of the waiting period again when the fluctuation of the regular pattern stops (when the fluctuation of the standard pattern starts), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process that is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 fluctuation is being executed when the fluctuation of the general pattern stops (when the fluctuation of the general pattern starts), and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 fluctuation is in progress, the special pattern that is being executed The length of the waiting period is determined by comparing the remaining period of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 1 with the playing period of the regular pattern long opening game. Then, based on the determination result, the performance mode of the series of performances is set based on the contents specified in the series of performances scenario table 222ha.

As shown in FIG. 402, if the waiting period could not be predicted in the second prediction process (if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point, it is not possible to determine the waiting period, so the start of special pattern 1 variation or the start of special pattern 2 variation during a regular pattern winning game (general pattern long open winning game) is constantly monitored. A constant monitoring process is executed for this purpose. Then, if it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 variation will be executed before the new special figure 1 variation is executed, the special figure 2 variation will be executed in response to the start of the special figure 2 variation. A corresponding performance mode (scenario 3) is set during the fluctuation.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, when setting the production mode of a series of productions to be executed based on fluctuations in regular symbols, the waiting period is set as an irregular period depending on the gaming situation. It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. With this configuration, even if a long waiting period is set during the period in which a series of performances is performed, it is possible to provide a series of performances that will not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects are executed, so the series of effects that are executed before the actual waiting period is set. It becomes possible to variably set the performance mode depending on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, compared to the case where only the performance mode set corresponding to the waiting period among the production modes of the series of productions is varied according to the length of the waiting period, it is possible to execute a series of productions that does not feel strange. .

Furthermore, in the present eighth control example, in a state where the standby period is set, it is possible to set an effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the standby period (for example, a game period per common symbol), It is possible to make it difficult for players to understand that a long waiting period has been set. In addition, in this eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, since the configuration is such that a right-handed game is performed during a series of performances, it is not possible to determine whether or not the current time is a standby period depending on the gaming method. It can be made difficult for players to identify.

In addition, in this eighth control example, if it is difficult (impossible) to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern, the waiting period is restarted at a different timing (game start timing per normal pattern). It is configured to execute processing for predicting the length of (second prediction processing). In this manner, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period during the period until the waiting period is set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the length of the waiting period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the gaming status during the game per game is constantly monitored, and the waiting period is responded to based on the results of constant monitoring. Since the configuration is configured to set the presentation mode for the series of presentations, the processing for setting the presentation mode for the series of presentations can be simplified.

In addition, in this eighth control example, in the processing for predicting the waiting period (first prediction processing, second prediction processing), the length of the waiting period is calculated using the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed. Although the configuration is configured to predict (discriminate), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information of special drawing 1 pending stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read in advance, and the next prediction is made based on the result of the prereading. The length of the waiting period may also be predicted using the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed in the above.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. If the start condition for the special figure 2 variation (ball winning into the second prize opening 640) cannot be met when the special figure 1 variation ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be executed next. It is possible to read ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the result of the read ahead. Therefore, the accuracy of predicting the length of the waiting period can be improved.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, similar to the sixth control example described above, the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special pattern 1 variation and the special pattern 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the order in which the balls enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, or the special pattern 2 variation may be given priority over the special pattern 2 variation. It may also be configured such that the special figure 1 variation is executed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 403 to 410. This control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that winning information command processing 8 (see FIG. 403) is executed instead of winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 404), executing the winning related command processing 8 (see Fig. 405) instead of the winning related command processing 5 (see Fig. 364), and executing the winning related command processing (see Fig. 406). The following points are executed: The variable effect setting process 8 (see FIG. 407) is executed instead of the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 369), and the constant monitoring effect setting process (see FIG. 408) is executed. , executing the effect setting process 8 for ordinary figures (see FIG. 409) instead of the effect setting process for ordinary figures (see FIG. 371), and executing the series effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 410). , and are otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 403, the contents of winning information command processing 8 (C3242) will be explained. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 8 (C3242) executed in this eighth control example. In this winning information command processing 8 (C3242), in contrast to the above-mentioned winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361), the process (series performance determination process) that is executed when a winning information command is received during the execution of a series of performances. The difference is that C3441)) in FIG.

When winning information command processing 8 (C3242) is executed, after executing the same processing of C3401 to C3405 as winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above, in the processing of C3403, a special If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the process of C3441, a series of effects discrimination process is executed (C3441). The details of this series performance determination process (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) will be explained. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) executed in the winning information command process 8 (FIG. 403) in this eighth control example. In this series of production determination processing (C3441), it is determined whether a series of productions is currently being executed, and if it is determined that a series of productions is currently being executed, the type of winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2. Processing corresponding to the general figure) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223ek is obtained (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223ek is 0 (C5102). The series performance counter 223ek acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the performance period when a series of performances is executed, and is subtracted (updated) in the performance update process that is periodically executed, and the counter value is The series of effects is configured to end when the value becomes "0". That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether a series of effects is being executed.

In the process of C5102, if it is determined that the value of the series performance counter 223ek is not larger than 0 (0) (C5102: No), the current performance is not in progress, so various display modes during execution of the series performance The process skips steps C5103 to C5110 for setting the value and moves to step C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series performance counter 223ek is larger than 0 (C5102: Yes), since a series of performances is being executed, the winning information command received this time will be the special drawing 2 prize (special 2 prize). (C5103), and if it is determined that it is a special 2nd prize (C5103: Yes), the information in the production scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223hc is turned on. It is determined whether there is one (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is off (C5105: No), the process moves to C5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on (C5105: Yes), in other words, the waiting period during which the execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited for during the performance period in which the current series of performances is executed is set in advance. If the condition cannot be predicted, a waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be explained. Since the process of C5106 is a process executed when a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning (special drawing 2 winning) is received, the current moment is the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of the special drawing 2 variation). The ball enters the prize, and the condition that is part of the trigger for the execution of the special figure 2 variation is established. In this control example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured so that they are not executed at the same time (duplicately), and furthermore, the special figure 2 variation has priority over the special figure 1 variation. It is configured so that it is executed.

In other words, if the special figure 1 variation is currently being executed, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed after the currently executed special figure 1 variation is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. In addition, if the special pattern 1 variation is not executed at the moment, the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed immediately, so "0" is set as the waiting period. .

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the number of balls that enters the second prize opening 640 during one series of performance execution (during one round long opening per game) is one. Therefore, in the process of C5103, when a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning (special 2 winning) is received, the process for calculating the waiting period is always executed. Without limitation, for example, when configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second prize opening 640 during the execution of one series of performances (during one round of regular long open winning game) In this case, a flag indicating that the waiting period has been calculated (calculated flag) is set on in the processing of C5106, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on in the processing of C5105 (C5105: Yes) , is configured to determine whether the above-mentioned calculated flag is set on, and if the calculated flag is set on, skips the processing of C5106 and C5107 and moves to the processing of C5108. It is best to configure it like this.

With this configuration, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 and a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received multiple times while a series of performances is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the first received special drawing 2 winning, it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing from being executed. In other words, in this control example, the period from the timing when special figure 2 is won for the first time until the special figure 2 variation is executed during a series of effects is set as the waiting period, and the effect mode is set according to the length of the waiting period. By setting , even if there is a long period (waiting period) in which the special drawing 2 variation is not executed even if the special drawing 2 winning is won, the effect that is executed in the middle of a series of effects (during the waiting period) Since the structure is configured to prevent the performance (performed performance) from being prolonged and the performance effect being degraded, a plurality of balls enter the second prize opening 640 while the series of performances is being performed. However, even if a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received multiple times, there is no need to calculate the length of the waiting period based on the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning received from the second time onwards. This will be a process.

In addition, as in this control example, if the waiting period is calculated every time a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received during a period in which a series of performances are being executed, the waiting period is calculated first. Figure 2: When receiving a winning information command indicating a winning, it is sufficient to determine whether the special drawing 1 variation is being executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period, and then calculate the waiting period. When a winning information command indicating a special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure variation being executed is the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation, and if the special figure 1 variation is being executed. , the waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the special drawing 1 fluctuation being executed and the winning information command indicating the winning of the special drawing 2 received earlier.

In this case, the lottery result of the special drawing 2 fluctuation corresponding to the winning information command that indicates the previously received special drawing 2 winning is read in advance, and if the prereading result is a loss, the winning information indicating the special drawing 2 winning that was received this time is read in advance. The remaining period until the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the period that is the sum of the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed and the variation time of the next out-of-order variation to be executed is the waiting period. It is best to configure it so that it is set as . With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the winning variation of special drawing 2 is being executed as the waiting period, so it is not difficult for the player to understand that he has won a winning lottery in special drawing 2. can.

Returning to FIG. 404, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process moves to C5109. In the process of C5108, a display command indicating that the special drawing 2 prize has been won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode that directly displays that the special drawing 2 winning has been won, and a display that suggests the remaining period until the special drawing change corresponding to the winning is executed. In other words, an indirect display mode that indirectly indicates that the special drawing 2 prize has been won is displayed.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned direct display mode and indirect display mode can be set using the display command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The performance mode may be set based on the lottery result of the fluctuation, or may be configured based on the length of the waiting period for a series of performances. In addition, the notification mode that indicates that a ball has won a prize in the second winning hole 640 for the first time during a series of performances is different from the notification mode that indicates that a ball has won a prize in the second winning hole 640 from the second time onward. Also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether the ball that won the V winning hole 650a passed through a specific area (V area) (whether there was a V winning) (C5109). If it is determined that the winning ball in the V winning hole 650a has passed through a specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process moves to C5111. . If it is determined that the ball won in the V winning hole 650a has not passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: No), then the process moves to C5111.

In the process of C5111, other production modes related to winning information are set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set production mode is set (C5112), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the contents of win-related command processing 8 (C3261) will be explained. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related command processing 8 (C3261) executed in this eighth control example. In this win-related command processing 8 (C3261), the production mode for each period of the series of productions is set based on the fact that the normal symbol winning game is executed during the period in which the series of productions is being executed.

When win-related command processing 8 (C3261) is executed, the same processes C3501 to C3504 as win-related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364) of the sixth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C3505, the main control If it is determined that a command related to a regular map has been received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), a command related to a regular map is processed (C3551), and then this process ends. The details of this common map related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the contents of the common map hit related command processing (C3551) will be explained. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal map related command processing (C3551) executed in the eighth control example. This normal figure winning related command processing (C3551) is executed when a winning related command related to a common figure winning is received (C3505 in FIG. 405: Yes), and it is executed when the normal figure winning game start timing and end. At the timing, various processes for setting the presentation mode of the series of presentations are executed.

In the common map related command processing (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5201). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223ek is greater than 0, that is, whether a series of effects is currently being executed (C5202). . If it is determined that the value of the series performance counter 223ek is not larger than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command processing for display is executed (C5203), the medium per normal map flag 223ha is set to ON, and the C5215 Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5202, if it is determined that the value of the series performance counter 223ek is larger than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the performance scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5205), and then the performance scenario It is determined whether the information stored in the storage area 223hb corresponds to scenario 4 for a common map (C5206).

Here, the production scenario storage area 223hb stores information indicating a scenario for winning a common picture that is set in a series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 410) that is performed when performing a common picture variation (a common picture lottery). , and in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the scenario is "Popular pattern scenario 4 (see Figure 400)", which is a pattern pattern corresponding to the period in which the normal pattern is being played, , a process for setting the presentation mode during the normal symbol winning game in the series of presentations is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the performance scenario storage area 223hb is not scenario 4 per general map (scenarios 1 to 3 per general map) (C5206: No), the information stored in the performance scenario storage area 223hb is Since the performance mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series performance prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) that is performed when performing the normal pattern variation (normal pattern lottery), the performance mode during the normal pattern winning game is set in advance. Since this is a case where the production mode corresponding to the period of 2018 has been set, in this process, the production mode corresponding to the period during which the normal map is played is not set (skipping the processing of C5207 to C5210). ) The process moves to C5204.

On the other hand, in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223hb is scenario 4 per regular figure (C5206: Yes), the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) The value of 223eg and the playing period per normal figure are compared (C5207). To explain in detail the processing contents of C5207, first, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is calculated using the value of the special symbol variation time counter 223eg. For example, when a special figure 1 variation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the variation time of 60 seconds (in this control example, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg) is set at the start timing of the special figure 1 variation. , since it is configured to subtract 1 in the effect update process 7 (see C3142 in Fig. 397) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see Fig. 281), so the value corresponding to 60 seconds is "60000") is set. If this process is executed after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure 1 variation, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is "30000". Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. Next, it is calculated based on the type of game per common symbol to be executed this time. In this control example, since the opening command output from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of game per normal figure to be executed this time, the game period per normal figure is calculated based on that information. In addition, here, the time stipulated as the end condition that is satisfied based on the passage of time is calculated as the game period per common figure.

Specifically, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game for a common symbol, or when the number of winning balls in the second prize opening 640 reaches 10, the game for a common symbol ends. If the termination condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time that the game per regular symbol can continue, is set as the gaming period per regular symbol. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period (period from the winning of special drawing 2 to the execution of special drawing 2 variation) in advance in order to set the presentation mode of a series of presentations, the per normal drawing used for prediction Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the actual game period per common symbol is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640 after the elapse of and the special drawing 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even if the performance mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult to deviate between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the playing period per ordinary figure is calculated as described above, the game per ordinary figure ends in a period shorter than the calculated playing period per ordinary figure, that is, the predetermined number of pieces ( There is a case where the game for winning a common symbol ends when 10 balls enter the second winning hole 640. In this case, a ball wins in the second prize opening 640 during a game with a common symbol, and at the time the game with a common symbol ends, a production corresponding to the waiting period or a special symbol 2 fluctuation period is performed. Since the performance is executed, it is configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. When the process of C5207 is finished, it is then determined whether the special figure 1 remaining period (remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation) is larger (longer) than the playing period per regular figure, based on the comparison result of C5207. It is determined whether the timing at which the fluctuation shown in FIG. In the process of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the playing period per regular figure (C5208: No), the special figure will be released at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game per regular figure. Since there is a possibility that the 1 variation has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set on (C5209) and the process moves to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of special figure 1 is longer than the playing period per regular figure, that is, the running special figure 1 variation will not end during the game per regular figure to be executed this time (C5208 : Yes), the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223hc (C5209) is skipped because it is confirmed that the special pattern 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern winning game. Then, the process moves to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a series of performance scenarios during the game per corresponding normal figure are set (C5210), and then the process moves to C5204. In the process of C5204, the medium hit flag is set to ON (C5204), and then the process moves to C5215. Here, to explain in detail the processing contents of C5210 mentioned above, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 remaining period is longer than the playing period per regular symbol (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is, , calculate the period from the end of the game per regular symbol until the end of the special symbol 1 remaining fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special pattern 2 waiting period, select the scenario per standard pattern to which the special pattern 2 waiting period corresponds from among the standard pattern per scenario tables defined in the series performance scenario table 222ha, and perform the performance. Set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the playing period per regular figure (C5208: No), the production mode (series of production Since the performance mode corresponding to the waiting period in ) is set, the same performance mode as in the fifth control example described above is set.

Next, in the process of C5201, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (C5211). Then, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: Yes), the normal map hit medium flag 223ha is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to off (C5213), and the display ending A command is set (C5214), and then the process moves to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114 within the . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts an ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5211, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C5211: No), the process moves to the process of C5215. In the process of C5215, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C5215), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) will be explained with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) executed in the eighth control example. In this variable performance setting process 8 (C4044), if the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to on (the game is being played during a series of performances, and the length of the waiting period is not set) The variation production settings of the sixth control example described above include the addition of a process for setting the variation production to be executed in (case) and the change of the content of the process for setting the variation production of normal symbols. This is different from Process 5 (see FIG. 370), but otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) is executed, the process of C4101 which is the same as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the sixth control example described above is executed, and the special figure variable effect is not set (normal If it is determined that the figure fluctuation effect is set (C4101: No), the ordinary figure effect setting process 8 is executed (C4167), and then this process is ended. The details of this ordinary figure effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

On the other hand, in the process of C4101, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation effect is set (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to on (C4151). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is on (C4151: Yes), a constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to C4102. Details of this constant monitoring performance setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408. On the other hand, in the process of C4151, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to on, the process of C4152 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the process of C4102 to C4116 which is the same as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be explained. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the eighth control example. This constantly monitored production setting process (C4152) is executed in the variation production setting process 8 (see C4044 in FIG. 407), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to a special symbol variation is received. It is something.

In the constant monitoring production setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation has been received (whether it is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and the process responds to the special figure 1 variation. If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (this is the start of special 1 fluctuation) (C5301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of C3303 of fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 in Figure 363) is Based on this, the variation time of the current special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation time is larger (longer) than the regular figure per period (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per regular figure that is being executed (period per regular figure), and the end timing of the special figure 1 variable time is determined as follows. It is determined whether the timing is later than the end timing of the regular pattern winning period. In this control example, since the constant monitoring performance setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to on, that is, at least during the normal game, C5303 The process will be executed during a game with a normal figure, but if the process of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where a game with a normal figure is not being executed, a game with a normal figure is not being executed. Assuming that there is no state, it may be configured to compare the special pattern 1 variation time and the period per regular pattern using the period "0" per normal pattern.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 fluctuation time is longer than the playing period per regular symbol (the end timing of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the regular symbol game) (C5303: Yes) , Since the special symbol 1 fluctuation does not end during a game with a common symbol, the production mode (performance scenario of a series of productions) during a game with a common symbol is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304), and is constantly monitored. The flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5305), and the process moves to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be explained in detail. First, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the playing period per regular figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per regular figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference Calculate the period, that is, the period from the end of the game per regular symbol until the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and use the calculated period as the waiting period for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) fluctuation (special symbol 2 waiting period) period), and the production mode is set based on the scenario per regular symbol corresponding to the currently calculated special symbol 2 waiting period among the scenarios 1 to 3 per regular symbol defined in the series of performance scenario table 222ha. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time is not longer than the regular figure winning period (the end timing of the special figure 1 variation is earlier than the end timing of the normal figure winning game), (C5303 :No), even if the current special pattern 1 variation is executed, it is not possible to predict the special pattern 2 waiting period, that is, if the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the current special pattern 1 variation. If not, even after the special pattern 1 variation to be executed this time ends, the game per normal pattern is still being executed, so it is difficult to determine whether the special pattern 1 variation will be executed during the remaining normal pattern games. Since it is not possible to predict whether the variation shown in FIG. 2 will be executed, the processing in C5304 and C5305 is skipped and the process moves to processing in C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is subsequently executed.

In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, a period performance (a series of When performing a production), the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (regular symbol fluctuation start timing, regular symbol per game start timing), and the production is performed based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the mode. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that prediction is impossible, the constant monitoring production setting process (C4152) is executed to constantly monitor whether special symbol fluctuations will be executed during the regular symbol winning game. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of a series of performances all at once for a range where the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) can be predicted in advance. The processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified. Further, since the process for predicting the content of the next game can be executed at multiple timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Furthermore, if it is not possible to predict the next game content at multiple prediction timings, the system is configured to execute the performance mode of the series of performances based on the actual game content. The mode can be set reliably.

Returning to FIG. 408, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation has not been received (not the start of the special pattern 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special pattern 2 variation is determined. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (is this the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation has been received (this is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306: Yes), because the special pattern 2 variation was executed during the game per normal pattern, as described above with reference to FIG. Set scenario 3 as the production mode of the corresponding series of productions (C5307), set the constant monitoring flag 223hc to off (C5308), set the display special 2 variation command (C5309), and then move to the process of C5310. do.

In addition, the process of C5307 mentioned above is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first prediction process is executed at the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, and the first prediction process is executed at the normal pattern game start timing. It is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period in any of the second prediction processes, and the special figure 2 variation is executed during the period when the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed during the regular figure winning game. This is done when there is a problem. That is, this is a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the production mode corresponding to the special figure 2 variation period is set in the process of C5307. Therefore, even if it is not possible to predict the next game content at multiple prediction timings, the performance mode of the series of performances is executed based on the actual game content. It is possible to reliably set the performance mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, if it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process moves to the process of C5310. In the process of C5310, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C5310), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the contents of the ordinary figure effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be explained. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure effect setting process 8 (C4167) executed in this eighth control example. This production setting process 8 (C4167) for ordinary figures is a series of effects prediction setting process for predicting the subsequent game content and setting a series of effects when the conditions for executing a series of effects of variations in ordinary figures are established. This is different from the ordinary figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above in that the (first prediction process) is executed. Since the other contents are the same as the ordinary figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the ordinary figure effect setting process 8 (C4167), first, the processes of C4201 to C4206 which are the same as the ordinary figure effect setting process of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 371) are executed, and in the process of C4206, the pseudo If it is determined that the series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), a series effect prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process moves to C4208. The details of this series performance prediction setting process (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 410. Next, after executing the same process of C4208 to C4212 as the ordinary pattern effect setting process of the fifth control example (see FIG. 371) described above, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to OFF (C4252), and then the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the contents of the series performance prediction setting process (C4251) will be explained. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the eighth control example. In this series effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 standby period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of regular figure fluctuation, and a series of effects are predicted based on the prediction result (first prediction result). Processing is executed to set the performance mode during the period in which the performance is executed, and the length of the special map 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result, and the length of the special map 2 waiting period is predicted, and when it cannot be predicted. , processing for setting presentation modes for different periods of the period in which a series of presentations is performed is executed.

In the series effect prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether the current normal pattern fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C5401). If it is determined that the current normal pattern fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation (C5401: No), the conditions for executing the series of effects are not satisfied, and the process is thus ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current regular pattern variation is a winning variation (C5401: Yes), the value of the special pattern variation time counter (special pattern 1 variation time counter) 223eg is read out (C5402), and the special pattern variation time counter It is determined whether the value of 223eg is greater than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is 0, that is, the current time is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation state (C5403: No), this process is ended as is. In other words, in this control example, the conditions for executing a series of effects when the normal symbol hit variation is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. , low probability state of normal symbols), the current normal pattern variation time is 30 seconds or more, the series performance counter 223ga is set to OFF, the non-variation winning flag 223ef is set to OFF, and the pseudo series Even if the production flag 223ec is set to OFF and the condition that is satisfied when the current normal pattern fluctuation is a normal pattern fluctuation as shown in FIG. 410 is satisfied, If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time this process is executed, the series of effects is not executed (set).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set whether or not to execute a series of effects that can be executed based on the variation per ordinary symbol depending on the execution status of the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation). It is possible to prevent a player who is playing a right-handed game and playing a game in which only normal pattern fluctuations are performed from performing a series of effects.

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is larger than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg is The special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is calculated based on (C5404), and the current regular figure fluctuation time and the playing time per regular figure to be executed after the end of the current regular figure variation are extracted and summed (C5405). In the process of C5405, by adding up the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern per game period, the period from the current moment (normal pattern fluctuation start time) until the normal pattern game ends (normal pattern per end period) Processing for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (total time per regular figure) calculated in the process of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time. It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is larger (longer) than the total time per regular pattern (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining variation time is larger (longer) than the total time per regular figure (C5407: Yes), the game per common figure ends before the running special figure 1 variation ends. Therefore, it is possible to predict the waiting period for the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular symbol winning game. Therefore, with reference to the series performance scenario table 223ha, a scenario per regular pattern is set based on the difference time (special pattern 2 waiting period) between the remaining fluctuation time of special pattern 1 and the total time per general pattern (C5408), and then the main pattern is set. Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the total time per regular figure (C5407: No), the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period and the length are predicted at the present time. Since it is not possible to do so, scenario 4 is set for normal map (C5409), and then this process is ended.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, when the normal pattern variation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, and based on the prediction result. The present invention is configured to set the mode of performance of a series of performances corresponding to fluctuations in the general figure. In other words, when a general pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation to be executed this time, the general pattern lottery result, and the playing time (maximum time) of the game per general pattern are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the special symbol 1 variation currently being executed during a game with a common symbol will end, and to set the performance mode of a series of effects corresponding to the common symbol variation based on the determination result. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the end timing of the variation of the special figure 1 variation being executed is later than the period in which a ball can win in the second winning hole 640, that is, the playing period (maximum period) per regular figure. In this case, it becomes possible to predict the timing (length of waiting period) at which the special figure 2 variation can be executed at the time when the regular figure variation is executed. As a result, it is possible to set performance modes based on the length of the standby period as various performance modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, with respect to the fifth control example described above, it is possible to lengthen the period that can be variably set among the production modes of the series of productions depending on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 8th control example, similarly to the above-mentioned 6th control example, the short opening game (the closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds and the opening period is 0.1 seconds) is performed as a game per regular pattern. ) and long opening game (closed period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, first opening period is 1 second, closing period (waiting period) is 1.5 seconds, second opening period is 0.5 seconds) Since it is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 410)) executed when the general pattern changes, it is determined that the winning result is determined by the current general pattern fluctuation. It may be configured to determine the winning type per common symbol and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which a ball can enter the second winning hole 640) based on the determination result. In addition, the aspect of the prediction range corresponding to the type of per-regular symbol determined this time (the length and timing of the period in which the ball can be won in the second winning hole 640), that is, the game mode of the game per the regular symbol to be executed. Based on this, the ease with which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a game with a normal figure is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball enters the second winning hole 640, If it is not possible to predict the period until the special drawing 2 variation based on the winning is executed, the winning difficulty determining means is used to determine the ease of winning the ball into the second winning opening 640. Based on the determination result, it may be configured to set the performance mode during the regular pattern fluctuation period.

Specifically, the winning difficulty level determining means determines that the winning difficulty level is low (by playing the game normally, it is possible to win the ball into the second winning opening 640). When the type of per-regular pattern (for example, per-private pattern A (see FIG. 336(b))) corresponding to the per-private pattern long open per game) is set, as the performance mode set during the variable period of the standard pattern , a performance mode is set that allows easy transition to the next performance mode that is set as a series of productions, and the difficulty level of winning a prize is high (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to land a ball in the second prize opening 640). When a normal pattern winning type (for example, normal pattern winning B (see FIG. 336(b))) corresponding to a normal pattern winning game (for example, a normal pattern short open winning game) that is determined as As the performance mode set during the figure fluctuation period, it is preferable to set a performance mode that suggests the end of a series of performances (a performance mode that makes it difficult to move to the next performance mode set as a series of performances). . In this way, in the case where the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the performance mode of the performance to be executed during the regular pattern fluctuation period is varied based on the type of the game per regular pattern to be executed. As a result, at the point when the normal pattern fluctuation starts, it is possible to have the player predict whether or not it is likely that a jackpot game will be executed using the current general pattern fluctuation as an opportunity, so the first prediction process is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance performed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing.

In addition, it supports games that are determined to have a high winning difficulty level (it is difficult to land a ball in the second winning slot 640 even if the game is played normally) (for example, a game that hits a short open winning game). In the case where the type of per-common symbol (for example, per-common symbol B (see FIG. 336(b))) is set, the production mode corresponding to the series of productions may not be set. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during a game with a regular figure winning, and games for a jackpot game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small winning winning, small winning game) It is possible to prevent a series of performances from being executed when it is difficult to proceed. In this case, if it is determined that a ball has won a prize in the second prize opening 640 during a game with a high winning difficulty level, it is preferable to configure a series of effects to be executed from the winning timing. If the length of the waiting period (the period until the special pattern 2 variation based on the current winning is executed) at the time when the ball enters the 2 winning hole 640 is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or more), It is preferable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 to set the performance mode that is normally set during the regular symbol fluctuation period.

In this way, when a game with a high winning difficulty is executed, the start timing of the series of performances is not the timing when the fluctuation of the general symbols starts, but the timing when the ball wins in the second prize opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency in which a series of performances ends in the middle of the series of performances even though the series of performances has been executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, an example was shown in which one type of per-popular pattern corresponding to a game per common pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize was provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it can correspond to a game per common pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize. It may be configured such that multiple types of winning patterns can be set, and the game mode of the game playing a winning pattern executed corresponding to each type of winning pattern may be different, for example, it corresponds to a game playing a winning pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize. The system is configured such that at least a per-regular pattern type α and a per-regular pattern type β can be set as the per-regular pattern types to be played, and a game mode of a game per standard pattern (game α per standard pattern) corresponding to the type α per standard pattern. As, a game mode with a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an open period of 3 seconds is set, and a closing period of 0.1 seconds is set as a game mode of a game per ordinary figure (game per ordinary figure β) corresponding to the type β per ordinary figure. , a first open period of 0.1 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (2.9 seconds) may be set.

In this case, when a winning game with a low winning difficulty is executed, the period during which it is easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640 differs depending on the type of winning winning symbol that is set, so the fluctuation of the winning symbol starts. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, a period in which a ball is likely to win in the second winning hole 640 is determined based on the type per normal symbol, and is executed in the first prediction process based on the determination result of the determination means. It is preferable to configure the prediction range to be different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned game α per regular symbol is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is set from 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per regular symbol ( When the game β per normal figure is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is set based on the range of opening period) from 3.3 seconds to 6.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal figure. It is preferable to configure the setting based on the range of seconds (range of the second open period).

In this way, by associating and setting the range to be predicted based on the playing mode of the regular game to be executed (difficulty level of winning, timing of setting possible winning period), the prediction executed in the first prediction process It becomes possible to narrow the range of This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a series of performances and enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, it is configured to be able to set the per-regular pattern type γ as the per-regular pattern type corresponding to the per-regular pattern game with a low winning difficulty level, and the game of the per-regular pattern game (game per standard pattern γ) corresponding to the per-regular pattern type γ. If the game mode is configured to set a closing period of 0.1 seconds, a first opening period of 1.5 seconds, a closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and a second opening period (1.5 seconds), That is, when a game with a common symbol is executed in which a plurality of open periods in which a ball can be won in the second winning hole 640 are set, in the first prediction process, first, the game corresponding to the second open period that will be set later is executed. Compare the range to be executed and the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special chart 1 fluctuation that is being executed, and determine whether the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special chart 1 fluctuation is after the second opening period. , If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation (remaining variation period) is later than the end timing of the second open period, the special figure that is being executed from the end timing of the second open period The waiting period is configured to be set until the end timing of the 1 variation, and on the other hand, it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining variation period) of the special drawing 1 variation is before the end timing of the second open period. If so, then the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) and the range corresponding to the first open period are compared.

If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first open period is earlier than the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation (remaining variable period), the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first open period The waiting period is configured to be set until the end timing of one fluctuation, and on the other hand, if it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first open period is later than the elapsed timing of the first open period, If the running special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed before the 1 release period has passed, it is assumed that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process, and the above-mentioned second prediction process is executed. It is best to configure it like this.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the ninth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 411 to 420. This ninth control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that the control processing for the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state is different.

In the sixth control example described above, the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state is used to determine the lottery result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (when the time saving state ends, the normal It was configured to suggest the preliminary determination result for the special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the state is set. By configuring in this manner, when a winning result (big hit, small win) is won by the special figure 2 variation executed after the time saving state ends, it becomes possible to indicate this in the final variation performance.

This ninth control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that the processing for setting the performance mode of the final variation performance is explained in detail. Specifically, when executing the final variation in the time saving state, the final variation effect is produced based on the lottery result of the variation and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c). It is configured to set the mode.

Furthermore, when the final variation in the time saving state is a missed variation, the production period of the final variation production is configured to be set based on the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c). There is. In other words, if the final variation in the time-saving state is a missed variation, the next special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final variation effect will be executed after the variation ends. Therefore, if the final variation of the time-saving state is a missed variation, at the start timing of the final variation of the time-saving state, the change period of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 pending is determined in advance. It is configured to set the performance mode (final variation performance).

<About the electrical configuration of the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this ninth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415. This ninth control example is different from the sixth control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and other than that the same. It is. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 411(a). FIG. 411(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 411(a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example has the final variation effect table 222ia and The difference is that a final performance variable setting table 222ib is added, and the rest is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The final variation production table 222ia is a data table that is referred to when setting the production mode of the final variation production, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. It is something that will be done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia will be explained with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413.

FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 412(a), the final variation effect table 222ia includes a final winning table 222ia1 that is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a win, and a final table for winning 222ia1 that is referenced when the lottery result of the variation is a loss. It has a final table 222ia2 for removal.

Here, the performance period in the final variation performance will be explained. In this ninth control example, similarly to the sixth control example described above, a "standby period", "first period", "second period", and "third period" are formed as the production periods of the final variation performance. It is configured so that the presentation mode can be set for each period. In the sixth control example described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (time saving final variation), a production mode (standby production) for notifying that the final variation production will start is set in the "wait period", and " In the 1st period, a performance mode (acquisition performance) for acquiring a large number of special drawings 2 reservations is set, and in the 2nd period, the lottery results of the fluctuation and the pre-reading results of special drawings 2 reservations are suggested. A presentation mode (mission presentation) for showing the presentation result of the mission presentation was set, and a presentation form (result presentation) for showing the presentation result of the mission presentation was set in the "third period".

Furthermore, the configuration is configured to determine whether to perform an acquisition performance or a mission performance as a performance performed during the "first period" based on the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 after the "waiting period" has elapsed. However, if the number of special map 2 reserved balls at the end of the "waiting period" is a predetermined number or more (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission effect is executed in the "first period". Ta.

On the other hand, in this ninth control example, the performance mode of the final variation performance is configured to be set based on the number of special figure 2 pending balls at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. This is different from the sixth control example described above. Also, it is different from the sixth control example described above in that the production mode of the final variation production that is set at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. are doing. Furthermore, this control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that a plurality of timings for setting the performance mode of the final variation performance are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 412(b), the contents stipulated in the winning final table 222ia1 included in the final variation effect table 222ia will be explained. FIG. 412(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the winning final table 222ia1. As shown in FIG. 412(b), the final table for winning 222ia1 includes the following values according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls) and the obtained value of the production counter 223f. The performance mode set for each performance period of the final variation performance is defined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", the performance pattern A is used as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. In the range of "170 to 189", production pattern B is defined as the production pattern of the final variation production, and in the range of "190 to 198", production pattern C is defined as the production pattern of the final variation production. ing. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "1, 2" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", performance pattern A is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. In the range of "170 to 198", performance pattern B is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. Furthermore, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "3" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 109", performance pattern A is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance, In the range "110 to 198", performance pattern B is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance.

Here, detailed contents of the various production patterns defined in the winning final table 222ia1 will be explained. Effect pattern A is one in which the final variation effect similar to the fifth control example described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. In the waiting period (0th period) to be executed, "standby effect (effect a)", which is a presentation mode to indicate that the final variation effect will be executed, is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has passed, , "Acquisition performance (performance b)" is set, which is a performance mode for guiding the player on a gaming method that allows the player to execute the subsequent game advantageously (to obtain special drawing 2 reservation), and during the first period. In the second period after the period has passed, the lottery results of the symbols that are subject to the final variation effect (the lottery results of the special pattern 2 variation that will be the time-saving final variation, the pre-read results for the special pattern 2 pending that has been obtained at the moment) "Mission production (production c)", which is a production mode for suggesting, is set, and in the third period after the second period has passed, the "mission production (production c)" executed during the second period is set. A "result performance (performance d)" which is a performance mode for indicating the performance result (lottery result) is set.

Performance pattern B is a performance pattern that is set when the time-saving final fluctuation has been won (big hit, small win), and is a performance to notify the player that he or she has won as a final fluctuation performance. The mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

Performance pattern C is a performance mode that is set when the number of reserved special drawings 2 when setting the final variation performance is less than or equal to a predetermined number (0), and is a performance mode that is set during the waiting period ( ``Standby effect (a)'' is set in the 0th period). When this performance pattern C is set, after the standby period (0th period) ends, the performance mode of the final fluctuation performance (the performance mode executed in each of the 1st period to the 3rd period) is set again. The configuration is such that the process (final performance variable process) is executed.

The details of this final effect variable processing will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of reserved special drawings 2 acquired during the waiting period (0th period), and the number of special drawings 2 held at the end of the waiting period (0th period) Processing is executed to set different presentation modes in each of the first to third periods according to the number of reserved special figures 2.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, in contrast to the setting method of the final variation effect in the sixth control example described above, the final variation effect is set when the final variation effect is set (at the start of the time saving final variation). It is configured to set the performance mode, and the lottery results (pre-reading results) that are subject to the final fluctuation performance are determined by the lottery results of the fluctuation and when the final fluctuation performance is set (at the start of the time-saving final fluctuation). ) is different from the pre-read result of the reserved special drawing 2 that has already been obtained.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, so that the time saving final variation is executed. It becomes possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, which is executed before the game ends (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in this control example, when changing the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed. It is good to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired at the time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of special drawings 2 pending becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. I can do it.

The above-mentioned final winning table 222ia1 is a data table that is referred to when the fluctuation (time-saving final fluctuation) is a winning result, so the execution of the final fluctuation effect that is set by referring to the final winning table 222ia1 is performed. The period corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the short-term final fluctuation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the final winning table 222ia1 is completed, a winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, if the time-saving final fluctuation is won, the final fluctuation will be made in accordance with the fluctuation time of the said fluctuation without considering the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 fluctuation that is executed based on the special drawing 2 reservation. Since the performance mode of the performance can be set all at once, the processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified.

As described above, the winning final table 222ia1 used in this ninth control example is designed so that the smaller the special symbol 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), the easier it is to select the performance pattern C. stipulated. In other words, the smaller the number of special drawings 2 on hold at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the more the number of special drawings 2 holding that can be obtained during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. ) The performance pattern C is configured to be easily selected in which the performance mode can be variably set according to the number of reserved special drawings 2 obtained during the period. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reserved special figures 2 is small, it becomes possible to execute a different final variation effect.

Further, it is stipulated that the larger the special symbol 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), the easier it is to select performance pattern B as the final variable performance. With this configuration, when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reserved special drawings 2 is large, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect 1 indicating that the winning result has been won. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play a game to acquire the number of reserved special drawings 2, and the performance of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the contents of the final table for losing 222ia2 included in the final variation effect table 222ia will be explained. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table for removal 222ia2. This final table for losing 222ia2 is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation, which is the time-saving final variation, is a loss. This is used to set the production mode of the final variation production whose production period is the period including the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the hold.

In this ninth control example, similar to the sixth control example described above, by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation), the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation It is configured to suggest the preliminary determination result for the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation executed in a state where the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set). If the lottery result of the time-saving final fluctuation is a win (big hit, small win), the winning game will be executed after the end of the fluctuation, so the final fluctuation effect will be played during the period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. configured to run.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a loss, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 pending stored after the end of the variation is executed. In this control example, the final variation effect is executed including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation which is stored pending at the time when the time saving final variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 413, the final table for losing 222ia2 includes the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c), the pre-reading result for the special symbol 2 reserved, and the value of the acquired production counter 223f. The performance mode of the final variation performance is defined according to . In addition, as the performance period in which the final fluctuation performance is executed, the fluctuation period of the time-saving final fluctuation and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) end, and the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) ends. The fluctuation period of the special pattern 2 variation (the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the special pattern 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state, low probability state of normal symbols) is defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the production mode of the final variation effect is also set for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is executed corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 2 variations that have already been obtained. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of the performance (final variation performance) that is executed across multiple special figure variations (special figure 2 variation) at once, so each special figure variation Compared to the case where the performance mode of the final variation performance is set every time the performance mode is executed, the processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this control example, if there is winning information indicating a hit in the special drawing 2 pending that has been acquired at the time of setting the performance mode of the final variation performance (if the pre-read result is a win), The content of the execution of the acquisition performance (whether or not it is executed, the period of execution) that is executed during the final variable performance is configured to be different between cases where there is no winning information indicating a win (when the pre-read result is a loss) and Therefore, if there is winning information indicating a win in the reserved special drawing 2 that has been won (if the pre-read result is a win), the winning performance is more difficult to execute than in other cases. Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is shortened.

By configuring in this way, the player can predict the pre-read result of the special figure 2 suspension according to the performance mode of the variable performance executed as the final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, if the time-saving state can end, that is, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time-saving final variation is a missed variation, and the pre-read result of the acquired special figure 2 pending at the time the time-saving final variation is executed. In the state of losing, the production mode (acquisition production (production b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends, other than that. It is possible to emphasize this more than in the case of . Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the advantageous game is executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, to specifically explain the contents stipulated in the final table 222ia2 for misses with reference to FIG. , when the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 159", "performance a" is set in the standby period, "performance b" is set in the first period, and "performance c" is set in the second period. The performance data is specified. In addition, if the special symbol 2 pending number (the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223c) is 0 and the obtained value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period and the Effect data is defined in which “effect b” is set for one period and “effect c” is set for a second period. Furthermore, when the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is in the range of "180 to 198", performance data is defined in which "performance a" is set in the standby period.

In addition, in the final table for failure 222ia2, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the current final variation effect is not set (in FIG. 413, "○" is displayed as the display mode indicating that it is not set). It is composed of In other words, if the special drawing lottery results (read-ahead results) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation do not include a hit, the special drawing 2 corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation obtained after the execution timing of the time-saving final variation The variation may be executed after the special figure 2 variation that is the target of the pre-reading process at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation.

In this way, when it is necessary to vary the performance result (performance mode) of the final fluctuation performance based on the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation that can be executed during the period from the execution of the final fluctuation performance until the end of the final fluctuation performance. The present invention is configured such that the production mode of the final variation production can be variably set even at timings other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation performance can be executed in various performance modes.

Returning to FIG. 413, the explanation will be continued. If the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is 1, and the special symbol 2 reserved contains winning information indicating a win, and it is "there is a hit in the reserved", that is, , the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next special figure 2 variation to be executed (the first special figure 2 variation executed after the normal state is set) ) results in a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" will be in the waiting period and "performance b" will be in the first period. , in the second period, "effect c" is applied, in the third period, and in the variation period (1) of the first special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set. Performance data in which "performance d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special pattern 2 pending number (the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223c) is 1, and the special pattern 2 pending does not contain any winning information indicating winning, so it is "no winning in pending". In other words, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next to be executed special figure 2 variation (the first feature to be executed after the normal state is set) If the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "performance a" is set during the standby period and "performance b" is set during the first period. , "Continuous performance (effect f)" is set, which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the display of the effect of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The performance data to be used is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continued performance" is a performance mode that is displayed after the mission performance (see FIG. 328(b)) is executed, and is a performance mode that shows the performance results of the mission performance (see FIG. 329(b)). (see a)), that is, this is the performance mode that is executed when the period until the result performance (performance d) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

Although a detailed explanation of the display contents will be omitted, for example, when the presentation mode shown in FIG. By reducing the speed, you can extend the period showing the process until the performance result (success or failure) of the mission performance that is being executed is displayed, or the mission performance can continue as the performance result of the mission performance that is currently being executed ( The system is configured so that a display format (for example, the words "Continue!") is displayed to indicate that the second mission performance will be executed, and multiple mission performances can be performed in one final variation performance. A performance mode is set in which a pseudo-result display performance that temporarily displays a display mode suggesting a performance result different from the actual performance result is executed as a performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuation effect" as the final variation effect, for example, after the final variation effect is executed, special drawing 2 hold can be obtained, and the execution period of the final variation effect that is currently being executed can be changed. To extend the performance period of a final variation performance without giving a player a sense of discomfort when extending the final variation performance.

Next, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is 2, and the winning information indicating that the special symbol 2 reserved is a hit is included (win in reservation is "yes"). If so, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a missed variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the two acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" is applied during the waiting period, "performance b" is performed during the first period, and "Production C" is in the 2nd period, and in the 3rd period, and the variation period (1) of the 1st special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set. Production data in which "effect d" is set during the period until the winning variation ends during the variation period (2) of the special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 2) of the second time is specified. ing.

On the other hand, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is 2, and there is no winning information indicating winning in the special symbols 2 reserved, so it is "no winning in reserved". In other words, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next to be executed special figure 2 variation (the first feature to be executed after the normal state is set) If the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "performance a" is set during the standby period and "performance b" is set during the first period. , "Continuous performance (effect f)" is set, which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the display of the effect of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The performance data to be used is specified.

Next, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is 3, and the winning information indicating that the special symbol 2 reserved is a hit is included (win in the reserved is "yes"). If so, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a missed variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the three acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" is used in the waiting period, "performance b" is performed in the first period, and A production in which "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period, and during the period until the winning variation ends among the 1st variable period, 2nd variable period, and 3rd variable period. Data is specified.

In addition, when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is 3, and the winning information indicating winning is not included in the special symbols 2 reserved (hit within reservation is "none") In other words, when the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a losing variation, and the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the three acquired special figure 2 reservations are all losing variations. Here, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), performance data is defined in which "performance a" is set in the standby period.

Returning to FIG. 411(a), the explanation will be continued. The final performance variable setting table 222ib is a data table used to select the performance mode of the final variation performance to be executed in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), When setting using the final variation production table 222ia, if there is a production period for which the production mode has not been set (an unset period), the production mode is set for the unset period while the final variation production is being executed. It is used for this purpose. Specifically, in the final variable effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is determined that the standby period (0th period) has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes), and the effect variable flag 223ic is set to on. When it is determined that the performance mode is set (C4864: Yes in FIG. 420), that is, when there is a performance period (unset period) in which the performance mode has not been set, it is referenced (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222ib will be explained with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. 414(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final performance variable setting table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 414(a), the final effect variable setting table 222ib includes a winning setting table 222ib1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) being executed is a winning variation, and a winning setting table 222ib1 It has a setting table 222ib2 for losing, which is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a losing variation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) being executed. , so that different presentation modes can be set. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the elements that are referenced when setting the production mode are different depending on whether the lottery result of the special drawing 2 variation (time-saving final variation) that is being executed is a win or a loss. It's set.

With this configuration, the performance mode set as the final variable performance can be set in accordance with the actual game content (the special drawing lottery result and the increase in the number of reserved balls), so the player It is possible to arouse interest in the presentation content of the final variation presentation performed on the subject.

Next, the contents of the winning setting table 222ib1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 414(b). FIG. 414(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning setting table 222ib1. As shown in FIG. 414(b), the winning setting table 222ib1 is based on the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia, that is, during the period from the execution of the final fluctuation performance until the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the obtained number of reserved special figures 2 and the obtained value of the production counter 223f.

Specifically, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "0, 1" and the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "performance b", It is specified that "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period. In addition, without setting a new performance mode for a period in which a production mode has already been set when the final variation production is executed, an unset period in which the production mode is not set when the final variation production is executed (Fig. 412(b))), the presentation mode is set by referring to this table.

Next, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "2" and the obtained value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "performance b" is used in the first period, and "performance b" is used in the second period. If it is specified that "effect c" and "effect d" be set in the third period, and the range is from 150 to 198, then the "Special performance 2 (performance g)" is set, which is a high expectation notification mode to indicate that the performance result of the final variation performance is highly likely to be a performance result indicating a winning of the special symbol (special symbol 2). It is stipulated to do so.

The above-mentioned "special performance 2 (performance g)" is a performance mode in which a performance different from the mission performance (see FIG. 328(b)), which is normally performed as a final variation performance, is performed, and a detailed explanation is given below. As will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the performance result of the current final variation performance is more likely to be a performance result indicating a win than when the mission performance is executed.

A detailed explanation of the display contents of this "special effect 2" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will become dark, and the effect will indicate a winning result. A certain winning display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a winning display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is the effect of a winning result, are displayed, and are not displayed until the end. A performance is executed in which the display mode is the performance result of the final variation performance. In this way, by notifying players in an easy-to-understand manner that a performance different from the normal one will be executed immediately after the waiting period ends, the performance that will be executed while making the players expect to win is made easier. You can make them pay close attention.

Note that the production content of "Special Production 2" is not limited to the content described above; for example, according to the example shown in FIG. , a character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character imitating a whale) may be configured so that a different mission effect than usual is executed, or the same ally character (851a~ 851d) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With this configuration, the image data used in the normal mission performance can be used as part of the image data for the performance executed as "special performance 2", so the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can be reduced.

Next, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "3" and the obtained value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "performance b" is used in the first period, and "performance b" is used in the second period. It is specified that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and if the range is from 120 to 198, "effect g" is set in the first period, second period, and third period. It is stipulated that the

Finally, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "4" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", then " If it is specified to set "effect g" and is in the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variation effect being executed will be set as a special symbol ( It is prescribed to set "special performance 3 (performance h)" which is a confirmed notification mode for notifying that the performance result is a winning result of special drawing 2).

The above-mentioned "special performance 3 (performance h)" is a performance that is different from the mission performance (see Figure 328(b)), which is normally performed as a final variation performance, and is a time-saving final variation ( This is executed only when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation) is a hit. A detailed explanation of the display contents of this "special effect 3" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will become dark, and the effect will indicate a winning result. An effect is executed in which a certain winning display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period for the final variation performance ends, the player is informed of the winning game, thereby making the player mentally prepare for the winning game. In addition, by making the display mode at the start of special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of special effect 3 the same (a mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player However, it is possible to inform the user in advance that the current final variation performance is special performance 2 or special performance 3. As a result, the player watches the final variation effect while expecting that the special effect 3 will be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as a benefit given to the player when the performance corresponding to special performance 3 is executed, the performance result of the final variation performance is notified at a time before the final variation performance ends. Although it is configured to give benefits, it may be configured to give other benefits, for example, based on the pre-read result of acquired special drawing 2 pending at the timing when special effect 3 is set. It may be configured such that a bonus is given to the player to notify him of the number of times he wins. Specifically, if there are two special figure 2 holds out of the four special figure 2 holds whose pre-reading result is a winning result, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed as the production mode of the special effect 3. becomes dark, and a performance is executed in which a plurality of winning display modes (display modes imitating the letter "V"), which are the production results indicating a win, are displayed, and finally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured such that the number of displayed winning display modes indicates the number of winnings. In this way, as a special performance (special performance 3) that is executed when special performance conditions are met, the first benefit (notification of winning) is given to the player based on the execution of the special performance. However, by making it possible to grant a second benefit (notification of the number of winnings) that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit, even after the first benefit is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the content of the special performance (special performance 3) executed for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, referring to FIG. 415. The contents of the setting table 222ib2 for deviation will be explained. FIG. 415 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the removal setting table 222ib2. This setting table for deviation 222ib2 is used when the final variation for deviation effect 222ia2 is used when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state (see C4364 in FIG. 419). ) is a data table used to set a performance mode for an unset period in which a production mode is not set (the period indicated by "○" in FIG. (See C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (0th period) (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes) (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

As shown in FIG. 415, the losing setting table 222ib2 includes the value of the held pitch increase counter 223ia (the number of special chart 2 held balls acquired during the waiting period), and whether or not there is an additional hit (the number of held balls acquired during the waiting period). It is set for each performance period of the final variable performance based on the presence or absence of winning based on the pre-read result of special figure 2 reservation), the setting status of the reservation upper limit flag 223en, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223f. The performance mode is specified.

In addition, when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) using the final table for losing 222ia2 (see C4364 in FIG. 419), the effect mode has already been set. The configuration is such that a new performance mode is not set for the current performance period, and the performance mode is set only for the unset period by referring to the off setting table 222ib2.

Next, the contents specified in the setting table 222ib2 for deviation will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 415. First, if the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, if no new special chart 2 hold is acquired during the waiting period, the presence or absence of additional hits and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223en are determined. Regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, various performance modes are set such that "performance b" is set for the first period, "performance c" is set for the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third period to the fourth period. is stipulated. In other words, since there is no change in the number of reserved special drawings 2 from the time when the final fluctuation effect is started, the final result effect (effect d) is an effect that indicates a loss, without setting a special effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to on, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of reservations is 3 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 holding (3 pieces) are all wins, if the pre-reading result of the newly acquired special drawing 2 holding during the waiting period is a win. , When the value of the obtained performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", various performances are set such that "performance c" is set for the first period, "performance c" is set for the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth period. Aspects are defined. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done. By configuring this way, unnecessary effects are created for the player (an acquisition effect that forces players to perform a game that allows them to acquire special drawings 2 even though the number of special drawings 2 held has reached the upper limit). This can be prevented from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful of the content of the performance being executed, and from reducing the performance effect. Furthermore, when the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "170 to 198", various performance modes are defined such that "performance g" is set in the first period, second period, and third to fourth periods. ing.

In addition, if the value of the pending pitch increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first Various performance modes are defined such that "effect b" is set for the period, "effect c" is set for the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third period to the fourth period. In other words, if one new special figure 2 reservation is acquired with respect to the time when the final variation performance is started, and the look-ahead result of that special figure 2 reservation is incorrect, a special performance mode should be set. Instead, a performance result indicating a loss is set as the final result performance (performance d).

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to on, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of reservations is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out of order, at least If the look-ahead result of any special figure 2 pending is a hit, regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, "effect c" will be applied in the 1st and 2nd periods, and ``effect c'' will be applied in the 3rd to 4th periods. Various performance modes are defined so as to set "d". That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

By configuring this way, unnecessary effects are created for the player (an acquisition effect that forces players to perform a game that allows them to acquire special drawings 2 even though the number of special drawings 2 held has reached the upper limit). This can be prevented from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful of the content of the performance being executed, and from reducing the performance effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, special figure 2 hold at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out, the pre-reading results of the 2 newly acquired special drawings 2 reservations during the waiting period are also out. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, various performance modes are defined such that "performance c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth periods. There is. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to off, that is, if the special value obtained during the standby period of the final variation effect is In a state where the pre-reading results of the two reserved (2 pieces) in Figure 2 are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special drawings 2 pending during the waiting period are also out, and furthermore, the current special drawing 2 pending results are also out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, "performance b" is used for the first period, "performance c" is used for the second period, and for the third to fourth periods. Various performance modes are defined such that "performance d" is set for. That is, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, an acquisition performance (performance b) is performed to make the player newly acquire the special map 2 reservation using the first period. is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to on, the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "0~ In the range of ``109'', various performance modes are defined such that ``effect c'' is set for the first period and second period, and ``effect d'' is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, the acquisition performance (performance b) is configured to be executed even though the suspension upper limit flag 223en is set to on. In this way, when a performance result indicating a hit is displayed as a performance result of the final variation performance, the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, no more new special symbols 2 hold can be obtained. By configuring the system so that the acquisition performance is executed intentionally even in a state where the acquisition performance is not possible, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the performance mode to be executed.

In addition, in this ninth control example, only when the performance result of the final variation performance is a performance result indicating a win, the above-mentioned performance (despite the suspension upper limit flag 223en being set on, the acquisition performance ( Since the configuration is such that the performance b) is executed, the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed are different. , it is possible to notify that the performance result of the final variation performance is a performance result indicating a winning. Therefore, the player can pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223en is set to on, the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is "110 to 198". ”, various performance modes are defined such that “effect c” is set for the first and second periods, and “effect d” is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

Next, if the value of the pending pitch increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, Various performance modes are defined such that "effect c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition performance (performance b) is configured not to be executed even though the suspension upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF. In this way, when a performance result indicating a hit is displayed as a performance result of the final variation performance, it is possible to obtain a new special drawing 2 reservation in a state where the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF. Even if it is possible, by configuring the system so that the acquisition performance is not executed intentionally, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the performance mode that is executed.

In this case as well, by performing a performance that has a difference between the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed, the performance result of the final variation performance will be the performance result that indicates the winning. This can be reported. Therefore, the player can pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the value of the reserved ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the reserved upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the number of special drawings 2 reserved at the start of the final variation effect is In 2, in a state where the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all wrong, if the pre-reading results of the 2 newly acquired special drawings 2 reservations during the waiting period are also wrong. Regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, various performance modes are defined such that "performance c" is set in the first period and the second period, and "performance d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to off, that is, if the special value obtained during the standby period of the final variation effect is In a state where the pre-reading results of the two reserved (2 pieces) in Figure 2 are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special drawings 2 pending during the waiting period are also out, and furthermore, the current special drawing 2 pending results are also out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, "performance b" is used for the first period, "performance c" is used for the second period, and for the third to fourth periods. Various performance modes are defined such that "performance d" is set for. That is, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, an acquisition performance (performance b) is performed to make the player newly acquire the special map 2 reservation using the first period. is configured to run.

Finally, if the value of the number of reserved balls increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time when the final variation effect is executed is "0", and four special symbols 2 are reserved during the waiting period. If you newly obtain a hold, if the value of the performance counter 223f obtained when the additional hit is "Yes" is in the range of "0 to 99", " Various production modes are defined such that "production g" is set, and various production modes are defined in the range "100 to 198" such that "production h" is set for the first period, second period, and third to fourth period. The performance mode is specified. Then, if the additional hit is "none", regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, "performance c" is set for the first period and second period, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth periods. Various presentation modes are defined as follows. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 411(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example has a pending number increase counter 223ia, a variable period storage area 223ib, and The difference is that a production variable flag 223ic is added, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pending number increase counter 223ia indicates the number of special drawings 2 acquired within a specific period (the standby period and the first period set as part of the performance period of the final variation performance executed in response to the final variation of the time saving state). This is a counter for measuring the number of reservations, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 every time a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired within a specific period. This pending number increase counter 223ia receives the winning information command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning in the final winning process (see C3461 in FIG. 418) executed in the winning information command process 9 (see C3262 in FIG. 417). (C5501: Yes), and when it is determined that the production variable flag 223ic is set to on (C5502: Yes), in other words, the special feature acquired during the standby period is used to set the production mode of the final variable production. When it is necessary to count the number of pending cases in FIG. 2, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 418).

Then, in the final variable effect update processing 9 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), if it is determined that the standby period has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is changed to the final effect variable setting table 222ib. (See C4865 in FIG. 420). Furthermore, if it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866 in the diagram: Yes), a performance extension process is executed to set the special symbol 2 hold fluctuation period obtained during the final fluctuation performance as the performance period of the final fluctuation performance. Therefore, the counter value is referenced (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration that counts the number of specific pending memories (for example, special map 2 pending) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period), the specific pending memory at the end of the specific period can be counted. Since it is possible to set the performance mode after the specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of pending memories acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of performance modes. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the player with a new gaming experience in which a large number of reserved memories are acquired within a predetermined period of time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223ia) is configured to count the number of specific holding memories (for example, special map 2 holding) acquired during a specific period (for example, during a waiting period). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the number of pending memories at the start of a specific period may be provided, and the number of pending memories at the end of the specific period and the number of pending memories stored in the storage means may be stored. The number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing the number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period.

In addition, in this control example, a specific period (e.g., waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory (e.g., special figure 2 pending) is set within one special figure fluctuation period (e.g., special figure 2 fluctuation). Since the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, the number of retained memories that have been acquired is simply added up. As the specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it may be configured to set a period in which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory can decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special chart 2 fluctuations), In this case, the configuration is such that the number of specific pending memories (for example, special drawing 2 pending) is counted, and each time a specific pending memory (for example, special drawing 2 pending) is acquired, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the specific It may be configured such that the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the pending memory decreases (for example, each time a special figure 2 variation using the special figure 2 reserve is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific pending memories may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period, so the number of specific pending memories (for example, special map 2 pending) As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set the initial value of the counter to a value larger than the upper limit of the number of specific pending memories that can be stored. With this configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased in response to an increase or decrease in a specific suspended memory during a specific period, it is possible to reliably prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0.

Also, as a specific period for measuring the number of specific pending memories acquired, a period in which the number of specific pending memories acquired may decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special map 2 fluctuations) is set. In this case, as mentioned above, the configuration does not count the actual increase in the number of specific retained memories within a specific period, but simply adds up the number of specific retained memories newly acquired within a specific period. A configuration may also be used.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, based on the increase in the number of specific pending memories (special figure 2 pending) within a predetermined specific period (within the waiting period), the performance mode after the specific period has elapsed is set. However, without being limited to this, a specific period may be set depending on the game content (lottery results of each symbol, game status, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable; for example, a plurality of non-consecutive periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be configured to be variable. In this case, by configuring the player not to be notified of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is made difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suspended and memorized value is being counted. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, the specific period will not be set based on the fulfillment of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is met when the player performs an operation using an operating means to indicate that the specific period will not be set). It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the performance in a manner suitable for each player.

The variation period storage area 223ib is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). This variable period storage area 223ib stores the standby period (0th period), 1st period, 2nd period, and 3rd period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (normal state setting). 1 period (the first special figure 2 variation after the normal state is set) associated with the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the time saving state) executed during the period (after) period), Toru 2 period (the second special chart 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), Toru 3 period (the third special chart 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), Toru 4 period (normal In order to store the effect mode set for each period (4th special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set), a storage area corresponding to each period is formed.

Then, information indicating the presentation mode of the final variation effect set in the time-saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 419), and the final variation effect update process (See C4566 in Figure 420), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes in Figure 420), or when it is determined that it is the end timing of the set production mode (C4865) or the first period (C4866 in FIG. 420: Yes), the set performance mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 420). Although not shown, when the final variation performance is completed, information indicating the performance mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the performance mode of a period performance that is executed using a predetermined period can be set at multiple timings (timing to start the period performance, predetermined timing during the execution of the period performance), the period performance By providing a storage area for storing the set performance mode each time a production mode is set, it is possible to set a subsequent production mode based on the contents of the previously set production mode. Become. Therefore, when performing a performance for one period using performance modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set a performance mode that does not feel strange.

The production variable flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). This is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time-saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 419), and the unset period when the effect mode is not set is set. If it is determined that there is one (C4366 in FIG. 419: Yes), it is set to on (see C4367 in FIG. 419).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), this is the timing at which the waiting period ends (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes) and the timing at which the first period ends (C4866 in FIG. 420: Yes) That is, when it is determined that it is the timing when it is possible to set the production mode of the final variation production, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420), and when it is determined that it is set to on. , a new performance mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420). Then, after setting the presentation mode for the unset period, it is set to off (see C4871 in FIG. 420).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 416 to 420. This control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 416) is executed instead of command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360), and prize information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) is executed. (see Figure 417) instead of the winning information command process 9 (see Figure 417), the final prize winning process (see Figure 418), and the time saving effect setting process (see Figure 372). The difference is that the final variation effect setting process 9 (see FIG. 419) is executed, and the final variation effect update process 9 (see FIG. 420) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 377). , otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) will be explained with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) executed in this ninth control example.

When command determination process 9 (C3163) is executed, after executing the same processes as C3201 to C3209 as command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the sixth control example described above, the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 It is determined whether the number of reservations) is at the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "4" which is the upper limit value.

In the process of C3261, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (number of special drawings 2 reservations) is the upper limit (C3261: Yes), the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to on (C3262), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (number of special drawings 2 reservations) to be held is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3262 is not executed and this process is ended.

Further, after executing the same processes C3210 to C3217 as the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the sixth control example described above, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of winning information command processing 9 (C3262) will be explained. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 9 (C3262) executed in this ninth control example. In this winning information command processing 9 (C3262), the contents of the processing executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to on in contrast to the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) described above. The difference is that the .

When the winning information command processing 9 (C3262) is executed, the processing of C3401 to C3402, which is the same as the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the sixth control example described above, is executed, and then the processing of C3403 is executed. First, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is on (C3404: Yes), the final prize winning process is executed (C3461), and the process moves to the process of C3406. Details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C3406. Thereafter, processes C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be explained with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the content of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the ninth control example. In this final winning process (C3461), a ball enters the second winning slot 640 while the final change in the time saving state (special drawing 2 variation) is being executed, and a new special drawing 2 reservation (winning information) is entered. Processing is executed to set the presentation mode when a winning information command indicating that the prize has been won is received.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that a ball has won in the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special drawing 2 winning). (C5501), If it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 has not been received (not a special drawing 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning information command indicating that a ball has won in the second winning opening 640 has been received (this is a special map 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the production variable flag 223ic is turned on. (C5502). If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223ic is on (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the reservation number increase counter 223ia (C5503), and the process moves to C5504. If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223ic is off (C5502: No), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223ib is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether the current acquisition performance is being performed (C5505). If it is determined that the acquisition performance is currently in progress (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating pending acquisition during the acquisition performance is set (C5506), and then this processing is ended. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the current acquisition performance is not in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating pending acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this control example, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, and a new special figure 2 hold is made as part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 327(b)) for making the player acquire the item. Then, if the timing at which a new special drawing 2 reservation is acquired (the timing at which the winning information command indicating the winning of special drawing 2 is received) is when the acquisition presentation is being executed, the dedicated presentation is executed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance being executed related to the actual gaming situation, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance.

In addition, in this control example, at the timing when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired (at the timing when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 win is received), it is determined that the special figure 2 hold has been acquired based on the content of the performance being executed. Although the configuration is configured to show different production modes, other configurations may be used. For example, the timing of acquiring a new special drawing 2 reservation and the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variation time of the final time saving variation) may be used. ) The presentation mode may be set based on the following. In this case, for example, a winning determination means that indicates that a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning has been received, and a remaining time determining means that determines the remaining time in the time saving state at the time when the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received. means, and determines the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning has been received by the winning determining means (there is a special drawing 2 winning), that is, the special drawing 2 pending. If the remaining period that can be easily won is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), a display format indicating that the number of reserved special drawings 2 has increased due to the winning of special drawings 2 (for example, a comment of "plus 1") ) is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display format indicating that the number of special drawings 2 pending has increased due to the winning of special drawing 2 (for example, a comment of "plus 1"), the number of special drawings 2 pending is displayed. It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of reserved special drawings 2 has increased in a state where the remaining period in which it is possible to easily obtain is short.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the timing at which the new special drawing 2 reservation is acquired is at a time when there is ample margin, so this can be used as a reference for future games. I can do it. Further, in this case, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special drawing 2 reservation can be easily obtained, may be configured not to be notified to the player. As a result, the player will determine the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained, so the display displayed when the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained. The aspect can be watched closely. In addition, the display mode displayed when special drawing 2 reservations are acquired may be configured to differ depending on the number of special drawings 2 reservations. For example, if the number of acquired special drawings 2 reservations is number or less (for example, "2" or less), the remaining period of the time saving state when receiving the winning information command indicating the special drawing 2 winning, that is, the remaining period in which the special drawing 2 pending can be easily obtained is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display format (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special drawings 2 pending has increased due to the winning of special drawing 2, the number of special drawings 2 pending will be displayed. It may be configured to display a display mode that suggests that it is difficult to make the number the upper limit (for example, a comment saying "It may be difficult").

In addition, as a method to determine the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is met (for example, the period until the final special symbol fluctuation of the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the period until the end of the last regular winning game executed in the time saving state is set as the remaining period of the time saving state.

In other words, in this control example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of variations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches a predetermined number of times) during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends. It is configured to do so. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the end of the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the ball is likely to win in the second winning hole 640 (per the common symbol long open) The system is designed to make it easier to win. In addition, the normal symbols are configured so that the gaming mode is set according to the gaming state at the time when the lottery is executed and the gaming state at the time when the normal symbol winning game is executed. If the time saving state is set when the normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) is executed, the common symbol lottery and the common symbol fluctuation time setting will be executed as the high probability state of the common symbol, and the game per common symbol will be executed. If the time saving state is set when the game is executed, the game is configured such that the normal symbol winning game is executed as a high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, even if you win a common symbol by drawing a common symbol that is executed during the time saving state, if the normal state is set at the time when the common symbol winning game based on that common symbol is executed, the normal state is set. A game with a common symbol is executed as the symbol has a low probability state.

In this control example configured in this way, depending on the variation timing of the special symbol and the variation timing of the normal symbol, the timing may be changed before the last special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends. In some cases, the state in which it is easy for a ball to win a prize in the second winning hole 640 ends. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time-saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time-saving state, the second winning prize will be won within the remaining period. This results in a period in which the ball is not easily placed in the hole 640, causing a problem in that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state, the period until the state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which a normal game can be executed during the time-saving state is determined. It is best to configure it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 is likely to be set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, when performing an effect to notify the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. In addition, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state in this way, even after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, there is a period advantageous to the player (when the ball is in the second prize opening 640). If a period in which it is easy to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize continues, it is preferable to configure the system so that the remaining period of the time-saving state is determined until the end of that period. In other words, if a game per normal pattern (game per normal pattern long opening) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the game per normal pattern (game per normal pattern long opening) is executed across the time saving state and the normal state. It is preferable that the period until the end of the game (game) is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. This makes it possible to accurately determine a period that is advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 is likely to be set), so an effect that notifies the remaining period of the time-saving state can be set. When executed, the accuracy of the notification contents can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the contents of the time-saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) will be explained. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) executed in the ninth control example. This time-saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is different from the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the sixth control example described above, and sets the effect mode when the special figure 2 variation is executed as the final time-saving variation. The difference is that the process for setting has been changed.

When the time-saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is executed, after executing the same processes of C4301 and C4302 as the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the sixth control example described above, in the process of C4302, If it is determined that the current special pattern variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a winning variation (C4361). If it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a winning variation (C4361: Yes), the production mode is set with reference to the final winning table 222ia1 that the final variation production table 222ia has (C4362 ), the process moves to C4365. In addition, in the process of C4301, if it is determined that the current special pattern variation is not the special pattern 2 variation (C4301: No), or in the process of C4302, it is determined that the current special pattern variation is not the final variation of the time-saving state. If it is determined (C4302: No), the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 fluctuation (time-saving final fluctuation) is not a winning fluctuation (it is a losing fluctuation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (second The winning information regarding the special symbol (special symbol 2) is read out (C4363), the production mode is set with reference to the final table 222ia2 for losing that the final variation production table 222ia has (C4364), and the process moves to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the performance content (performance mode) set by the above-mentioned process of C4362 and C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223ib (C4365), and then it is determined whether or not there is a period for which the performance has not been set. (C4366). If it is determined that there is a period for which no performance has been set (C4366: Yes), the performance variable flag 223ic is set to ON (C4367), and then this process ends. Further, if it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4367 is skipped and the process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 420, the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) will be explained. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) executed in this ninth control example. In the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566), the final variation is executed in response to the final variation of the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 5 in the sixth control example (see C3112 in FIG. 374). The elapsed period of the production (the elapsed period of the special figure 2 variation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variable effect update process 9 (C4566) is executed, first, the information in the variable period storage area 223ib is read out (C4861), and the information (the set effect period) in the read variable period storage area 223ib and the special figure The current production situation is extracted based on the value of the variation time counter 223eg (value indicating the variation time of the special figure 2 variation) (C4862), and then it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period end timing or not. (C4863), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4864). If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the judgment result of the appropriateness of the change (C4865), and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4864: No), the process of C4865 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

In the process of C4863, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the first period (C4866), and at the end timing of the first period. If it is determined that there is (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ic is on (C4867). If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223ic is on (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the reservation number increase counter 223ia is greater than 0 (C4868). If it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is greater than 0 (C4868: Yes), the performance period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223ib (C4869), and the process moves to C4870. In the process of C4868, if it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is 0 (C4868: No), the process of C4869 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the performance mode for the final performance period is set (C4870), the performance variable flag 223ic is set to OFF (C4871), and the process moves to C4872. Also, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is cleared (C4872), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired. If so (C4874: Yes), the re-prefetch flag 223em is set to ON (C4875), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the process executed in C4874, the winning information storage area 223a has a storage area corresponding to each symbol pending, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The number of storage areas for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the storage area for the regular symbol (ordinary symbol) corresponds to the maximum number of stored symbols (4) for each symbol. It is formed. Each storage area stores the prefetch information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the referenced information indicating whether or not the prefetch results were referred to when setting various effects in the audio lamp control device 113. It is configured so that information is stored.

In other words, in the process of C4874, it is checked in each storage area whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223a other than the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the process of C4806 or C4814. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information that is stored, and if the look-ahead information is written in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223a, and the referenced information is When it is determined that there is a storage area in which no information is stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 reservation.

Then, by setting the re-read ahead flag 223em to ON in the process of C4875, the special figure 2 hold is set again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure variation (the first special figure variation after the end of the time reduction). A variable performance is executed based on the look-ahead results.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special 2 reservations are read ahead, and the second Since this is a case where the time-saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time-saving variation effect is directly set (C4876), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4873, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process ends. In the process of C4877, setting of the performance mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, update setting of the remaining period display mode to indicate the remaining period of the final variation, and elapsed period display mode to indicate the elapsed period of the final variation. , and setting of the operation display mode that is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the production mode of the final variation production is set at the time of setting the final variation production (at the start of the time saving final variation), and the final variation The lottery results (pre-reading results) that are subject to the production are limited to the lottery results of the relevant variation and the pre-reading results of the special drawing 2 pending that was obtained at the time of setting the final variation production (at the start of the time-saving final variation). They are different in that they do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, so that the time saving final variation is executed. It becomes possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, which is executed before the game ends (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in this control example, when changing the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed. It is good to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired at the time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of special drawings 2 pending becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. I can do it.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the above-described final variation effect is started from the timing when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period of the time saving state is a predetermined period. In this case, for example, the final variation effect may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions becomes two. In addition, in this ninth control example, a configuration is explained in which the final variation effect is executed using a period for one special symbol variation during the time saving state and a period for several special symbol variations during the normal state. As for the increase/decrease in the number of special figures 2 pending while the final variation effect is being executed, the number of special figures 2 pending increases until the special figure variation in the time saving state ends, and the number of special figures 2 pending in the normal state increases. After the start of figure fluctuation, we have only explained the pattern in which the number of reserved special figures 2 decreases, but other patterns include, for example, time reduction during the execution of a regular figure long opening game executed during the time saving state. After the state ends (the final variation in the time-saving state (special pattern 2 variation) stops) and the special pattern variation in the normal state (special pattern 2 variation) starts, a ball enters the second prize opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery status of the regular symbol (the winning/failing result of the regular symbol lottery being executed, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the pending memory of the regular symbol lottery) The diagram information (win/fail results, winning game type)) is configured to be able to be determined, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 after transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. The presentation mode of the final variation presentation may be configured to be varied based on the result, for example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win in the second prize opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. is a performance mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery based on winnings in the second prize opening 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation performance (using a still image that makes it easy to extend the performance period). It may also be configured to set a performance mode in which the performance result can be suddenly changed.

In addition, when executing the final variation effect using multiple special figure 2 variation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions (the number of remaining special figure 2 variations that can be executed during the time saving state) when executing the final variation effect. ), and based on the determination result, calculate the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the final fluctuation performance, and set the performance mode based on the calculation result. . In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation performance will not be greater than the calculated maximum number, but may be less (for example, if you stop the game during the final fluctuation performance) (If the special drawing 2 reservation becomes 0). Therefore, the performance mode based on the above-mentioned calculation result may be configured to set a performance mode in which the performance effect does not deteriorate even if the number of changes in the special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, if the special figure 1 variation is executed while the final variation effect is being executed for the special figure 2 variation, the final variation effect will continue for the variation period of the special figure 1 variation. It may be executed, or it may be configured such that the final variation effect is temporarily interrupted and the effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation is executed during the interruption period.

<10th control example>
Next, the tenth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. In the sixth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the game (left-handed game ) is configured to be able to execute the Fuzu drawing lottery, and performs a suggestive effect (a series of effects) that suggests that a specific win (Fuzu long opening win) has been won in the Fuzu drawing lottery executed during the normal state. It was configured to do so.

Then, a guide display mode (right hit display) for winning a ball into the second prize opening 640 provided in the right side gaming area is displayed (a series of (displayed during performance execution), and the player is configured to be able to easily win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game. Furthermore, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game during the normal state), the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode will be displayed if the player wins a long open hit. First, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during a game with a long opening win.

On the other hand, in this tenth control example, while the normal pattern long open winning game is being played by the normal pattern lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) is also played to the right. The electric accessory 1640a that is opened during the normal game and the second prize opening 1640 are arranged in a position where the ball fired by the hitting game (the ball flowing down the right side game area) can also win a prize. There is a difference.

Furthermore, the proportion of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a among the balls fired in left-handed games is made different from the proportion of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a among the balls fired in right-handed games, and The ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate in the hitting game than in the left-handed hitting game.

In addition, in this 10th control example, in some cases where a win is won for a long open hit during the normal state, the fact that the win is won for a long open hit is announced rather than the game being executed for a long open hit. Announcements that can be made to the player before (for example, during the fluctuation of a winning regular symbol, or the period from acquiring the winning information of the winning regular symbol (common symbol) until the relevant symbol fluctuation is executed) It is configured to perform a performance.

By configuring in this way, when a player wins in the long open winning game, the ease with which the ball enters the second prize opening 640 can be varied depending on whether the notification effect is executed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the performance executed for the player interested, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second winning hole 1640 is arranged at a position where balls fired in left-handed games can also win, even if the notification effect is not executed, the ball can be won in the second winning hole 1640. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is extremely disadvantageous.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 421 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. In this 10th control example, the positions of each component arranged in the right side game area are different from the above-mentioned 6th control example, and specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a, and the The arrangement positions of the two winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 421, in the game board 13 of the tenth control example, a second winning hole 1640 to which an electric accessory 1640a is attached is provided below the first winning hole 64. The ball that has flown down the area and the ball that has flown down the right side game area due to the right-handed game are configured so that they can both reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, a regulating member (nail) is placed in the area between the first prize opening 64 and the left end side (left side in front view in FIG. 421) of the electric accessory 1640a in the open state (depicted in black in FIG. 421). are planted in such a way that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls flowing down the left side game area, only the balls that are guided by the nails planted on the game board 13 and pass through the upper area of the first winning hole 64 reach the second winning hole 1640. configured. In this tenth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the proportion of balls that reach the second prize opening 1640 among the balls flowing down the left side game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the balls fired in the right-handed game and flowing down the right side game area are the ball flow formed on the upper surface of the V winning door 650b located in the closed state and the winning door 65b located in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that most of the water (approximately 100%) reaches the second prize opening 1640.

By configuring in this way, during a normal long open winning game, that is, in a state where the ball can enter the second winning slot 1640, the ball flowing down the right side game area is more likely to be played than the ball flowing down the left side game area. This makes it easier to win a prize in the second prize opening 1640. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether to play a left-handed game or a right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 421, in this control example, in the normal state, the ball flowing down the right side gaming area is placed in a position where the ball flowing down the right side game area is larger than the winning hole that can win a prize (the winning hole that can give a privilege (prize ball) to the player). It is configured so that there are more winning holes (winning holes that can award benefits (prize balls, lottery) to players) into which balls flowing down the left side gaming area can win. Specifically, a ball flowing down the right side game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning hole 1640, whereas a ball flowing down the left side game area can win through the through gate 67. , the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 1640, and the general winning hole 63 are configured so that it is possible to win (pass through).

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, except for the period when the ball can be won in the second winning opening 1640 (the game period for the regular long open hit), it is possible to avoid the right-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the right side game area. However, a left-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the left side game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. Thereby, during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to play right-handed games, and allow the player to play left-handed games. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting when to play a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the time required for the ball fired in a left-handed game to reach the second prize opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right-handed hitting arrival time). Specifically, the configuration is such that the arrival time for left-handed shots is about 4 seconds, while the arrival time for right-handed shots is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the ball fired by a left-handed game and the ball fired by a right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, 1 second after the previously executed left-handed game) It becomes possible for the balls (balls fired by the right-handed game to be executed) to reach the second prize opening 1640 at the same timing.

Therefore, when a game with a long open winning pattern is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from a left-handed game to a game with a right-hand hit, the winning of the ball to the second winning hole 1640 during the game with a long opening hit with a normal pattern can be changed. Since the ease of play can be varied, players can be motivated to play the game.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this 10th control example, the winning game period of the regular figure long open winning game is 3 seconds (opening period 1 second, closing period 1.5 seconds, and the open period is 0.5 seconds). In other words, when a right-handed game is executed after a game with a long opening per game is executed, it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the second prize opening 1640. The game is configured such that the game may have ended when the ball reaches .

As a result, the player who does not fire the ball until the Fuzu Long Opening winning game is executed, and who plays the game of hitting the ball right after the Fuzu Long Opening winning game has started, will receive a benefit (Second Prize Opening). 1640 (prize ball, special drawing 2 lottery)) can be made difficult to award, it is possible to make the player continuously fire the ball, and the game is improved. Operation can be improved.

As mentioned above, in this tenth control example, even if the winning game period of the normal pattern long open winning game is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the normal pattern long opening winning game is started, Although the configuration is such that it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 1640, the winning game period of the regular long open winning game is set to the right-handed hit arrival time (the ball fired in the right-handed game). It may be configured to be longer than (for example, 5 seconds (open period 1 second, closed period 1 second, open period 3 seconds)). As a result, the player can play the game during the regular game long open winning game with peace of mind.

<About the production content in the 10th control example>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effect executed in the tenth control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 422. In this 10th control example using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 421, it is easy to cause the ball to enter the second prize opening 1640 while the regular figure long open winning game is being executed. Therefore, the system is configured to be able to execute a guidance notification (for example, a right-handed notification) for guiding the player on the gaming method, and the notification mode of the guidance notification is such that the player can easily identify the gaming method. The first guide notification mode and the second guide notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the gaming method than the first guide notification mode are configured to be settable.

With this configuration, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guide notification is the first guide notification mode or the second guide notification mode, the ball is sent to the second prize opening during the game of the regular long open winning game. 1640, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win.

The first guide notification mode is a notification mode that is set as a part of the special pattern variation performance that is executed in response to the special pattern variation, and during the general pattern variation where a winning is won in the long opening of the common pattern, This is set when a special symbol variation is executed in a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When a variation effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is being executed, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) is used to display information to the player. A guidance display mode (for example, a comment of "hitting right") for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 320(b)).

Furthermore, in this 10th control example, before a game with a long opening of a general pattern is executed (for example, during a period of fluctuation of a general pattern during which a winning of a long opening of a general pattern is won, the fluctuation of the general pattern ends and the game becomes normal). During the period when the symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), or from when the winning information command for winning the regular symbol long opening is received as the winning information command of the normal symbol until the game is executed when the symbol long opening is played. period) so that the first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With this configuration, even if the player recognizes that the first guidance notification mode is being displayed and then executes a game according to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "Right-hand hit"), The ball can easily reach the second prize opening 1640 which is in an open state where it is easy for the ball to win in the regular figure long open winning game.

On the other hand, the second guide notification mode is always displayed when a game with a long open winning pattern is executed, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guide notification mode described above. It is something that Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guidance display mode for guiding the gaming method (for example, a "right-handed player" ” icon) is displayed.

As mentioned above, in this tenth control example, the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640 is about 3 seconds. After recognizing the notification content of the second guidance notification mode, if you perform a gaming method according to the notification content (for example, a right-handed game), depending on the falling situation of the ball, the ball may be thrown in the first place during a game with a long open hit. A situation occurs in which the player cannot reach the second prize opening 1640.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the regular long open hit, with the notification condition of the first guide notification mode being satisfied. In addition, in this 10th control example, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied and the general pattern long opening win is won, the general pattern long opening winning game is executed based on the winning. The first guide notification mode is displayed three seconds before, and the second guide notification mode is displayed at the time when the regular long open winning game is executed. With this configuration, even if the first guide notification mode is displayed before a game with a long opening per game is actually executed, it is possible to notify that a game with a long opening winning a general pattern is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In addition, in this 10th control example, the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is set that the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, the notification condition may be set to the fact that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, or the notification condition may be set to the state of transition of the game state, Specifically, the notification condition may be set that the time saving state has ended and the state has transitioned to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition has been met (notification condition fulfilled flag) is provided, and when the notification condition is met, the notification condition fulfilled flag is set to ON, and during the period when the notification condition satisfied flag is set to ON. is configured to be able to display the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition fulfillment flag is set to OFF. Also good. In this case, it is recommended to set a notification end condition to turn off the notification condition fulfillment flag that is set to on, and to set the notification condition fulfillment flag to OFF when the notification end condition is met. .

Specifically, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification condition fulfillment flag was set to ON (the number of special symbol fluctuations reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), or the elapsed time reached a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes)). It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the notification end condition has passed, or the lottery is executed when a predetermined trigger for execution (for example, execution of a special drawing lottery, or a ball is placed in each prize opening) is satisfied. It may be configured such that the notification termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

In addition, multiple types are provided for each long open (for example, A for long and B for long), and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set depending on the type of long open for long. By making them different, it may be configured such that the first guidance notification mode can be set to be easily displayed in the long open hit of the regular map and the long open hit for the regular map that is difficult to be displayed.

In addition, the notification conditions may be varied based on the player's gaming situation, for example, the elapsed period (number of special figure fluctuations, elapsed time) from the previous jackpot game (small win game) satisfies a predetermined condition. In this case (for example, when the number of special pattern changes reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), the first guide notification mode may be configured to be displayed whenever the regular pattern long open winning is won. .

In addition, the player may play an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game played when the normal state is set (a predetermined period after transitioning from the gaming state (time saving state) in which the right-handed game is performed to the normal state). )), a warning display for the player to modify the playing method (for example, a warning display for the player to correct the playing method (for example, in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, "Left-handed batting If it is determined that the player continues to play inappropriate games even after the comment "Please return the player" is displayed, the notification condition may be configured so as not to be satisfied.

The techniques for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above are not limited to this tenth control example, but can be applied to each of the embodiments and control examples described above. For example, as in the sixth control example described above, a pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured such that a ball cannot be won in the second winning hole 640 unless a right-handed game is executed. May be applied. In this case, the benefits given to the player will vary greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed, so the player is encouraged to play the game in order to satisfy the notification condition. can be set.

Furthermore, a notification means may be provided to notify the player of the gaming method for establishing the notification condition, for example, in order to satisfy the notification condition in the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a good idea to configure it to display the necessary information (for example, please show your super reach). Furthermore, the presence or absence of display of this necessary information may be configured to be shared as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when a game is executed according to the display content displayed as necessary information, it is possible to check whether the notification conditions for displaying the first guidance notification mode are established or whether the special symbol lottery result is Since it is possible to notify the player whether a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating a jackpot win) has been obtained in a way that is difficult for the player to understand, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, a notification means may be provided that can notify the player that the first guide notification mode is currently available for notification (a condition in which notification conditions are met). This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in this tenth control example, a first guidance notification mode is used as a guidance notification mode that suggests that a game is to be executed per normal pattern long opening, and the player discriminates the notification content from the first guidance notification mode. However, when the first guidance notification mode can be set, special execution conditions (for example, a special operation on the operating means (frame button 22)) can be set. A special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set if a condition that is satisfied when the following is performed is satisfied.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing to execute a gaming method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is By executing a gaming method according to the notification content at a certain timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which more advantageous benefits are more likely to be awarded. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is configured such that both balls fired in left-handed games and balls fired in right-handed games can reach the second prize opening 1640. The period required for a ball fired in a left-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640 is approximately 4 seconds, and the period required for a ball fired in a right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640. The configuration is such that the time is approximately 3 seconds. By operating the operating handle 51, it is configured to be able to fire 100 balls per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game in accordance with the execution timing of the Futu long opening game, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can be changed. It is configured such that both can be made to reach the second winning a prize opening 640 at approximately the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the regular long open winning game is executed, and the game method corresponding to the notification content (for example, The player determines the timing at which multiple balls can arrive at the second prize opening 640 at approximately the same time as the timing to change to a game played with a right-handed player (for example, a game played with a right-handed player) or the timing of firing balls in the currently executed game method (for example, a game played with a left-handed player). The notification mode for notification is set.

With this configuration, the player is motivated to play the game so that a more advantageous guide notification mode is displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the above-mentioned special guidance notification mode can be set when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, but the first guidance notification mode is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that a special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode can be satisfied even if the notification condition for the first guidance notification is not satisfied. The configuration may be such that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is more easily satisfied when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied than the case where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are met, the corresponding guidance notification mode is set. It may be configured to set. Furthermore, the ease with which notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes may be established based on the operation results of the operation means (frame buttons 22) that can be operated by the player may be varied. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operating means, each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes is easily satisfied. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As explained above, in this 10th control example, the game per standard pattern is executed to make it possible to win a ball in the second prize opening 1640 (game per standard pattern long open). It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, a right-handed notification) to notify the player during the execution of the normal pattern variation which is the lottery result to be executed, and the game based on the normal pattern winning game is started. The game method is configured so that the game method executed by the player is changed from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at a point before (before the regular figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), and a game with a regular figure is started. The game ball launched in the right-handed game is configured to enter the second winning hole 1640 during the regular long open winning game, but the invention is not limited to this, for example, A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right hit notification) is set during the opening period of the long open winning game (from the start of the open winning game). , until the electric accessory 1640a is opened).

With this configuration, the guide notification (right-handed hit notification) can be executed after the winning common pattern fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display), so the guide notification (right-handed hit notification) can be executed. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is not executed when a normal figure is won. In this case, as well as the tenth control example, it is determined whether the notification condition for the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, the first guidance notification mode is set. It is preferable to configure the system so that guidance notification is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, an effect is created to show the lottery result of the general drawing lottery using the general drawing fluctuation period and the opening period of the general drawing winning game. It is preferable to carry out the above process, and display a display mode indicating that the game has won a common symbol as a result of the performance at the end timing of the opening period of the common symbol winning game (timing of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, if the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is not satisfied, it is announced that the winning of the common symbol is won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed as the common symbol winning game. Therefore, even if a player who has identified that he has won a common symbol by the notification plays a right-handed game, it is difficult to enter the second prize opening 1640 with the ball fired by the right-handed game. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is not satisfied, the winning of the common figure is won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as the normal figure winning game. Although the example is not limited to this, if the remaining period of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the notification is not limited to this. It may be configured to notify that the person has won. In other words, even if a player who recognizes that he has won a normal figure wins a right-handed game, the timing at which it becomes difficult to win a ball into the second prize opening 1640 during the normal figure winning game, for example, due to the right-handed game. The game for winning a common card ends after the notification that the ball has been won is announced, which is longer than the period required for the fired ball to reach the second winning hole 1640 (the ball can be entered into the second winning hole 1640). It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that the period until the end of the period is shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being fluctuated, if the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is satisfied, the period of time until the normal symbol winning game is executed is In the variable performance corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation during the period, perform a performance suggesting that you will win the regular figure winning game, and execute the performance in which the first guidance notification mode is set during the opening period of the regular figure winning game. By merging the production mode of the variation production of the special symbol fluctuation with the production mode of the opening production of the regular symbol winning game, it is possible to inform the player of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is executed by the special drawing performance executed based on the special drawing fluctuation, and the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing drawing is executed based on the general drawing fluctuation. By executing the second notification to indicate the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification with relevance (continuously or overlappingly), it is possible to It may be configured to perform a third notification for indicating the right-handed timing for the player to execute the right-handed game in response to a winning game.

In addition, the length of the opening period that is set is different depending on the type of game per game to be executed, and the opening period is set to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more. , the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern winning game and the normal pattern winning game in which a period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the opening period is made different. Also, when the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per common map to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, it is better than the case where the combination condition is not satisfied. , It may be configured such that a guide notification for making it easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 during a game with a common figure is executed. As a result, different benefits (to the second prize opening 640) are provided to the player depending on the type of game per common symbol to be executed, the type of guidance notification mode to be set, and whether or not the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the seventh control example described above, the method of setting the guidance notification mode to make it easier to win a ball to the second winning hole 640 during a game with a winning pattern was explained. From a game (e.g., a left-handed game) in which a ball is fired at one firing intensity, to a game in which a ball is fired at a predetermined firing intensity different from one firing intensity (for example, Any device may be used as long as it makes it easier for the ball to enter a specific winning hole (for example, the second winning hole 640) by changing the game to a right-handed game, such as a special drawing lottery executed during a left-handed game. As a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won, the ball fired by the right-handed game is placed in a winning position (for example, the right side game area) with a prize opening that becomes open during the small winning game (for example, V If the configuration includes the winning opening 650a), it may be configured to use the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small winning game to set the guidance notification mode with the same concept as this control example.

<About another example of the second modification example of the sixth control example>
Next, another example of the second modification of the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 and 424. FIG. 423 is a front view schematically showing the board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this other example. The board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this alternative example has a different configuration of the right side playing area compared to the board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 386). There is a difference. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the pachinko machine 10 in this other example, the velocity of the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 is reduced (the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed). ), delay members 701y and 701z are disposed so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first channel 701 (ball passage time) is approximately 4 seconds. An operating gate 670 is provided at the downstream end of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operating gate 670 will be explained. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won after a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) for a predetermined period of time. The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in this modification, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating jackpot winning, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed through the activation gate 670. It is configured so that That is, the activation gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing a jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating jackpot winning).

With this configuration, the player can execute a jackpot game by actually firing a ball toward a predetermined area (operation gate 670), not just the lottery result of the special symbol. The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically. Note that the activation gate 670 used in this modification is one of the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, in contrast to the start gate 720a of the A4 embodiment described above. (The starting gate 720a is provided as an execution condition in both the small winning game and the jackpot game) and other configurations (the structure of the gate and the main control device 110). Since the processing contents (conditional device determination processing (see S250 in FIG. 311)) are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, this different example differs from the second modified example described above in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Also, the difference is that the configuration of the second winning hole 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this alternative example is configured such that the variation time of the special symbols to be selected and the variation time of the normal symbols are different from the pachinko machine of the second modification described above. Specifically, a special special symbol with a variation time of 50 seconds is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery in the normal state. 1 variation pattern can be selected, and a special special symbol 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery in the normal state. Furthermore, a special regular symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is selectable as a regular symbol fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a long open winning of a regular symbol is won.

Then, as the end conditions of the small winning game, the first ending condition is satisfied when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period during which the V winning hole 650a is open in the small winning game is 1.5 seconds. A second termination condition that is satisfied when the condition is reached is defined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example configured in this way, when the special symbol variation for which the special symbol 1 variation pattern is set is stopped, or when the regular symbol variation for which the special symbol/common symbol variation pattern is set is displayed, When the stop display is displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 320(b)) is executed to prompt the player to play a right-handed game as a gaming method.

Here, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on a jackpot win, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first channel 701 and passes through the activation gate 670, resulting in a jackpot. The game begins. As mentioned above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the activation gate 670, the jackpot game starts about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played. become.

In addition, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on a small winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and enters the V winning hole 650a, A jackpot game is started. As mentioned above, the time required for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the V winning hole 650a is approximately 4 seconds, and the small winning game ends when one ball wins during the small winning game. In addition, when a ball wins in the V winning hole 650a, the winning ball always passes through the V gate (V area), so about 5 seconds after playing the right-handed game. A jackpot game will be started.

Furthermore, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the winning of a normal figure, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702, passes through the second prize opening 640, If the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small win, the small win game is executed after a variable time of 1 second. Since the second channel 702 is formed so that the time it takes for the ball that passed through the second winning port 640 to reach the V winning port 650a is about 2 seconds, you can win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery. In this case, the ball that passed through the second winning hole 640 will win in the V winning hole 650a. Therefore, the jackpot game will start approximately 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

In other words, in this separate example, the same fluctuation time is set for the case where a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case where a small win is won, and the fluctuation time elapses. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed to change the playing method at a certain timing, by having the player perform a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, it is possible to execute a jackpot game at the same timing. It is composed of

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current jackpot game was executed based on a jackpot win or a small win win. can. Furthermore, as in the control example described above, a jackpot game that is executed when a special symbol jackpot is won, and a jackpot game that is executed via a small jackpot (V jackpot game), If the size of the benefits given (the number of prize balls during a jackpot game, the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) set after the jackpot ends) is different, it is important to know what triggered the jackpot play. By making it difficult to understand, the player can play the game while having expectations for the gaming state that will be set during or after the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this separate example, as mentioned above, even if a specific win (normal pattern long open win) is won in the regular symbol lottery, the jackpot game will start after the guidance notification (right hit notification) is executed. The period until the winning is the same as when winning a special symbol jackpot or small jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

In addition, in this separate example, the same variable time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected when the lottery result (special lottery result, general lottery result) is such that a jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variable effect using the same effect mode as a effect using the variable time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special fluctuation performance being executed is a special fluctuation performance based on special pattern fluctuations or a special fluctuation performance based on regular pattern fluctuations, even while the special fluctuation performance is being executed. be able to.

In addition, in the above example, a case was explained in which a special variation effect is set for a special variation pattern in which a variation time of 50 seconds is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, Of the variation effects corresponding to the set variation pattern, the above-mentioned special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time reaches 50 seconds. Furthermore, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a special loss fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds can be set, and a right-handed game will be announced after the fluctuation time has elapsed as a result of the special fluctuation performance. A performance pattern in which notification is not performed (failure performance) may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pattern (false pattern) in which a right-handed game is not guided even when a special variation effect is executed, thereby drawing the player's attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as mentioned above in each separate example, if a specific win (normal pattern long open win) is won in the lottery of normal symbols, a guide notification to guide the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is placed in the second prize by the right-handed game. When winning (passing) the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation will not be executed immediately, that is, the special figure 2 variation will not be executed until the special figure 1 variation that is being executed ends. A waiting period will be set during which the 2 fluctuations are not executed. In this case, it is preferable to perform a failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. In addition, in the case where a ball enters (passes through) the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game and the special drawing 2 lottery is immediately executed, the above-mentioned failure effect can also occur if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss. It is best to configure it to run.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the same performance mode in the case where the player wins the special drawing 2 lottery and in the case where the standby period for the special drawing 2 drawing is set. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has passed is a small winning prize, the small winning prize will be won from the above-mentioned failure effect. It is preferable that the configuration is such that a performance (resurrection performance) that switches to a performance mode that indicates what has happened has been executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute a performance that can keep the player's expectations until the end.

Note that the waiting period for the special drawing 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using the various techniques used in each of the control examples described above, and the various techniques used in each control example may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, in the case where a right-handed game is played based on a winning of a common symbol, or when a small winning game is played based on a small winning winning, the ball is placed in a specific winning slot in the same manner as in each of the control examples described above. (The second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a) may not be won (passed). In this case as well, the display mode may be configured to display the effect mode described in the fifth control example (for example, see FIG. 324(b)). In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, the timing at which the ball fired in a right-handed game can pass near the second prize opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed) The failure effect may be executed in a pseudo manner at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning hole 650a (about 4 seconds after the guide notification mode is displayed).

In the other example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 that can execute a jackpot game based on a plurality of opportunities, the player is notified that the conditions for executing a jackpot game are satisfied (in this variation, "right-handed hit notification"). By making the period from when the jackpot game is actually executed the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, players can be informed in advance that the jackpot game will be executed. Although it is notified, it is configured to make it difficult to understand when the jackpot game will be executed, so it is difficult to know which game mode the jackpot game will actually be executed, or the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which gaming state will be set.

Note that the notification mode for notifying that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is not limited to the configuration of this modification, but may include, for example, the production mode of the variable performance that is executed in response to each symbol variation. It is also possible to set a performance mode that indicates that the conditions for executing a jackpot game are satisfied, and to unify the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is executed until when the jackpot game is actually executed. If it is possible, the notification timing and notification mode may be set as appropriate.

In addition, when using an opportunity to execute a jackpot game through a small win game, no matter at what timing during the small win game a ball enters the V winning hole 650a, the predetermined timing is determined in advance after the small win game starts. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after a certain amount of time has elapsed. Thereby, the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is executed until when the jackpot game is actually executed can be more unified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that uses a configuration in which the type of jackpot game to be executed later (jackpot type) is set when the ball passes a specific area (V gate) during the small winning game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650a where balls can win, and on the upstream side thereof, the balls that have entered the V winning opening 650a are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates). By providing a sorting movable member and configuring the sorting movable member to move according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, after the small winning game is started, the distribution in the V prize opening 650a is The configuration is such that the ball passes through different specific regions (V gates) depending on the time it takes for the ball to reach the movable member. Then, by configuring a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a different opening period is set when passing through each specific area (V gate), each specific area (V gate) is Even when using a configuration in which a jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the jackpot, the structure may be such that the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 becomes open in the jackpot game is unified.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, an eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 453. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth to tenth control examples (including each modification example) described above has a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) and a time saving state (a special symbol low probability state) as a gaming state. A low probability state of a symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) are configured to be settable at least, and a game with a common symbol that is executed during the time saving state (a win that is executed when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery). The electric accessory 640a is opened by the player (game), and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry opening (winning opening) 640.

Then, in a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640, a lottery result other than a jackpot (for example, a small win win) is determined. , a small winning game is executed, and if the game ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game (at the end of the small winning game, information indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area is stored). ), the jackpot game was configured to be executed. In addition, by configuring a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the lottery triggers for the second special symbol to be able to be stored on hold, the lottery for the second special symbol can be held during the time saving state (high probability state for normal symbols). By suspending and memorizing the opportunity, even after the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (even after transitioning to the low probability state of the normal symbol), the second special symbol lottery can be executed, for example. , Even if the time saving state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal state, the game in the normal state (normal state in which the lottery trigger of the second special symbol is held and stored) is more advantageous than normal. Therefore, for players who have finished the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state, the player can be given a state where the possibility of playing a jackpot game is higher than usual. Therefore, it was possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, for a player who is normally playing a game during the time saving state, in order to end the time saving state in a state where the player has obtained the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, , Since the game is configured such that the probability of winning a regular symbol is increased during the time saving state, and the period during which the variable means is opened is extended, a game with a winning symbol is executed. There is a problem in that the number of lottery opportunities for the second special symbol that has been completed (the number of reserved special symbols 2) is always the same number, making it impossible to provide a surprising game to the player.

In addition, in the case where the number of reserved special drawings 2 that have been acquired is always the same when the time-saving state ends, in order to prevent the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous, the time-saving state must be Including the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed after the second special symbol lottery is completed, the rate at which the time saving state is set is predefined low, or the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is predefined low. There is a need to. Therefore, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to play the game during the time saving state, and the player's desire to play the game decreases.

On the other hand, in this eleventh control example, the time-saving states include a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation (disadvantageous time-saving state). is configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to easily vary the number of reserved special figures 2 at the time when the time saving state ends, depending on the type of the set time saving state. Therefore, even if the rate at which the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased, it is possible to prevent players from playing games that are excessively advantageous to the player. This makes it easier for the player to execute the game, and increases the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, the setting ratio of the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time when the jackpot game is executed (the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot). There is. Specifically, when a jackpot game is executed with the time-saving state set, the advantageous time-saving state is better than when the jackpot game is executed with the normal state set as the gaming state. The configuration is configured so that the set ratio is high. In other words, in the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player, even if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantageous time saving state is likely to be set, so the time saving state is likely to end, but it is likely that the player will win the jackpot during the time saving state. When the game is executed and the time-saving state is set again, the advantageous time-saving state is more likely to be set, so the time-saving state can be easily looped through the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the player can be made to play games with different degrees of advantage in stages, so that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. . Note that in this control example, similarly to each of the control examples described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured so that a lottery is executed that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. A time-saving state in which it is easier to end with special drawing 2 pending (advantageous time-saving state) is more attractive to the player than a time-saving state in which it is easier to end without obtaining special drawing 2 pending (unfavorable time-saving state). Although it is configured to be advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery to obtain special symbol 2 reservation. It may be configured such that a time saving state in which it is easier to end in a state in which the special drawing 2 reservation is not acquired is more advantageous to the player than a time saving state in which it is easier to end in a state in which the special drawing 2 reservation is not obtained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the control examples described above, the time saving state can be changed by making it possible to set a different number of times depending on the type of jackpot as the number of special symbol changes to end the time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. There are some games that make it difficult for players to understand how long this will continue. This makes it possible for the player to play the game while expecting that the time-saving state will continue for a longer period of time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of each of the control examples described above is configured to end the time saving state at a specific timing in the special symbol fluctuation of the number of times the time saving state is ended, for example, at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation. However, in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is easy to understand that the timing at which the time saving state ends is the specific timing (stop timing) of the special symbol fluctuation, which may be surprising to the player. There was a problem that it was difficult to provide games.

On the other hand, in this eleventh control example, when the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the timing for ending the time saving state (timing in special symbol fluctuation) is configured to be different. . Specifically, when the time-saving end condition is met, the first timing (for example, when the special symbol changes It is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing) or end the time saving state at the second timing (for example, the stop timing of special symbol fluctuation). In other words, the time saving state is ended in the case where a jackpot game is executed during the normal state and then the time saving state is set, and in the case where the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state and then the time saving state is set. It is configured to have different timing.

In this way, by configuring the system to vary the timing at which the time saving state actually ends when the time saving end condition is met, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, even if the time saving state is set based on the same jackpot type, depending on the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot game is executed), Although the configuration is such that it is possible to vary the timing at which the time-saving state ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine that has a plurality of time-saving end conditions, depending on the time-saving end condition that has been established, The timing at which the time saving state ends may be specified to be different. Further, the end timing of the time saving state may be determined according to the variation content (lottery content) of the special symbol variation (lottery) for which the time saving end condition is established.

In addition, in this control example, the gaming state that is set at the time of winning a jackpot (when executing a jackpot game) is used as an element for varying the timing of ending the time saving state, but this is not limited to this, and special The timing for ending the time saving state may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time the symbol lottery is executed. As a result, for example, if the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed is different from the gaming state at the time when the special symbol (identification information) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, that is, the special Predicting what type of time-saving state will be set after the end of a jackpot game in a gaming machine that has a game feature where the gaming state can change during the special symbol fluctuation period from the start of symbol fluctuation until it is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that makes the player interested in the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as described above, the type of time-saving state to be set may be determined based on a combination of gaming states set at a plurality of timings, for example, when a special symbol lottery is executed. When the gaming state at , and the gaming state at the time when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed are both time-saving states, an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the special symbol lottery is executed. When the gaming state at the time and the gaming state at the time when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed are both normal states, a disadvantageous time-saving state is set that is disadvantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, If the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed is the time state and the gaming state at the time when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is the normal state, a special time saving state different from the above-mentioned advantageous time saving state and disadvantageous time saving state It may be configured such that a state is set.

In this way, by combining the gaming states set at multiple timings to determine the type of gaming state (time-saving state) that is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is easy to provide players with multiple types of time-saving types. can do.

First, with reference to FIGS. 425 to 429, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is provided with a V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 315) of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example described above. The positions and structures have been changed; the locations of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 have been changed; and the structure of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 has been changed. The difference is that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general entrance. It is constructed by assembling a ball opening 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. Its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

This first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 239), and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (wins a prize). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate even when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (wins a prize). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is also a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbols may be used.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) the pachinko machine 10 is in, and the special symbol (first symbol) changes. It is possible to indicate by the lighting state whether it is a medium (during a dynamic display to stop and display a combination of symbols to show the lottery result), or whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a winning that is advantageous to the player or a symbol that is unfavorable to the player. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a hit or a miss symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, the lighting state can also indicate that the fluctuation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various gaming states are notified by combinations of emitted light colors of the light emitting means (seven segment display device), but any other structure may be used as long as the player can identify the various gaming states. For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length of the period in which the light emitting means is on and the period in which it is off (blinking mode).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (wins). Then, in the special symbol lottery, a judgment is made as to whether or not a small hit has been won (winning lottery). Here, based on the fact that it has been determined that the small win has been won, a small win game which is a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed.

Then, during the small winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state in which it is easy to win a ball to the V winning device 650 is provided. When a ball that enters the V winning device 650 during this small winning game enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) described later, a jackpot game is executed after the small winning game ends. During this jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state in which it is easy to win a ball to the variable winning device 65 is provided.

In this control example, the total number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the game is larger in the jackpot game than in the small win game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that the player obtains, the jackpot game is a bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the small win game. Note that the small winning game may be configured so that the total number of prize balls that the player can acquire is greater than the large winning game. In this way, by configuring the system so that benefits with different degrees of advantage can be given depending on the bonus game to be executed, it is possible to let the player play the game while having fun knowing which bonus game will be executed. .

In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a gaming state (for example, a normal state) that is different from the gaming state before the jackpot game is set, and after the jackpot game ends, the settings related to the executed jackpot game are set. A new gaming state can be set based on information (for example, small winning type (big winning type) and gaming state at the time of winning (small winning)). On the other hand, when a small winning game is executed, the gaming state before the small winning game is continued during the small winning game and continues even after the small winning game ends. In other words, during a jackpot game where the degree of advantage to the player is high (large number of prize balls), by setting the normal state which is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, during the jackpot game, the player is given an excessive amount of money. In contrast to suppressing the provision of benefits, the game state is configured not to be changed when a small win game having a lower advantage than a jackpot game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed due to the execution of a small winning game with a low advantage. Note that this is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) for the player is set during the small winning game, similar to the jackpot game, or based on the type of small winning winning. , the game state may be determined after the end of the small winning game. Furthermore, it may be configured to determine the gaming state to be set after the winning game ends based on the game results during the winning game (during the jackpot game, during the small winning game). ) The variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650 (variable ball entering means) that makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball enters the variable ball entering means determines whether or not the ball that enters the ball passes through a specific area provided within the variable ball entering means. It is preferable to configure the system so that the type of game state that is set after the winning game is determined is determined and the type of game state that is set after the end of the winning game is made different based on the determination result. It is preferable to set a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, or to set a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the player passes through a specific area than when the player does not pass through the specific area. As a result, during a winning game, it is possible to have the player play a game with the aim of setting an advantageous gaming state after the winning game ends, and it is possible to make the player play a game that he or she is motivated to play.

In addition, there is an event in which a winning game is executed while a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set even after the winning game ends. If a winning game is executed after being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in a row, a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) for the player is forcibly set after the winning game ends. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a gaming state advantageous to the player continues excessively.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that no jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and in order to execute the jackpot game, it is necessary to go through the small win game, but this is not limited to the above-mentioned Similarly to each control example, it may be configured so that a jackpot can be won in a special symbol lottery.

When a jackpot game is executed, the variable winning device 65 enters an open state in which it is possible to easily win a ball into the specific winning hole 65a, and by placing a ball into the specific winning hole 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in some cases) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and the opening period (variable) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a of the winning device 65), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a period in which the next round game is played after one round game period ends. An interval period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the game starts, and a closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round gaming period. A jackpot game period consisting of a winning ending period and a jackpot game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period in accordance with the start timing of the jackpot game, preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in accordance with the timing when the specific prize opening 65a becomes open during the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Furthermore, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the players of the game contents of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new special symbol lottery from being executed immediately after the last round game ends. Since preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played, it is possible to smoothly switch between games.

In this control example, the jackpot game can be executed after the small win game ends based on the fact that the ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small win game. Therefore, by setting the ending period as the final period of the small winning game, the preparation period for switching from the game executed during the small winning game (left-handed game) to the game executed during the jackpot game (right-handed game) Since this can be provided, it is possible to allow the player to smoothly switch between games.

The length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) is determined by the time of the special symbol drawing (when the small winning is won), the timing when the special symbol drawing result is stopped and displayed, and the start of the small winning game. Different lengths may be set depending on the game state set at the time, at the end of the small win game, at the start of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game, or the type of jackpot won. If you win a jackpot in which the game content (playing method) to be executed after the game is different from the game content (playing method) before the jackpot game, the ending of the jackpot game The period (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and is executed for the player after the jackpot game ends during that ending period. It is preferable to make it possible to perform a performance that provides advance guidance on the game contents. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

On the other hand, if a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (gaming method) before the start of the jackpot game is the same as the game content (gaming method) executed after the jackpot game ends, the ending period of the jackpot game ( For example, 1 second) may be set to be shorter than the ending period of other jackpot games (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually discriminates between the game content (gaming method) before the jackpot game and the game content (gaming method) to be executed after the jackpot game, for example, the type of jackpot game to be executed (small Based on the winning type) and the gaming state set before the jackpot game, the gaming state to be set after the jackpot game ends is defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game is set according to the specified content. It may be configured to set the length.

In this control example, either a "normal state" or a "time saving state" is set as the gaming state. In the normal state, the small hit probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/50 for special symbol 1, 1/1.25 for special symbol 2), and the probability of a small hit for the normal symbol is set to a low probability (1/10). This is a gaming state that is set (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol low probability state). In Figure 2, the winning probability is set to 1/1.25), and the winning probability of normal symbols is set to high probability (1/1.2) (hereinafter referred to as the low probability state of special symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols). ).

In this control example, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the gaming state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the above-mentioned time saving state is set. The number of times indicates the time saving termination condition. In other words, the number of time saving times of one time indicates that the time saving end condition is satisfied when a special symbol lottery is executed once without a jackpot game being executed after the time saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this control example, the timing at which it is determined whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied can be varied. Specifically, there is a time saving state in which it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, and a time saving state in which it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing to stop the special symbol fluctuation. , is configured to be configurable.

With this configuration, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be varied depending on the set time saving state, making it difficult for the player to determine how long the time saving state will continue. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time-saving termination condition for ending the time-saving state, a condition regarding the number of special symbol drawings during the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is defined, but other configurations may be set as the time-saving termination condition. For example, a time-saving end condition or a time-saving state that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (specific failure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) may be set. A time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined amount of time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the ball entered the ball into a specific ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63a) during the time-saving state. You may set an end condition that is satisfied when the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5).

Also, the timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met and the timing for ending the time-saving state may be different. For example, at the timing to start the special symbol fluctuation, the time-saving end condition is met by the current special symbol fluctuation. If it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met, the time-saving state may be ended before the special symbol fluctuation starts, or the special symbol may be The time saving state may be configured to end at a predetermined timing during the period from when the fluctuation is started until it is stopped (including the stop display timing of the special symbol fluctuation). This makes it possible to unify the timing of executing the process for determining whether the time-saving termination condition is met, thereby simplifying the control process for terminating the time-saving state.

In addition, the above-mentioned specific conditions (factors for determining the timing to end the time saving state when the time saving end conditions are met) include the special symbol lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (the special symbol winning the small win). It is only necessary to set conditions that are satisfied based on the type of gaming state (normal state or time saving state) set at the time when the lottery (lottery) is executed, the set small winning type, and the type of jackpot game, For example, if the same small winning type (jackpot type) is set and the same time saving ending condition is set in the case where the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state and the case where the gaming state is the time saving state. However, the configuration may be such that the timing of ending the time saving state is different.

Similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh control example, the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment). In this case, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general prize winning device 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time, and a winning game (general winning game) is executed.

The time required for the second symbol to fluctuate (normal symbol fluctuation time) is determined by different lengths of fluctuation time depending on the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol. In the low probability state, the regular symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds, and in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the regular symbol fluctuation time is set to 1 second. As a result, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of games with normal symbols during the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols.

Note that a configuration different from this control example may be used, and for example, the same normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) may be set regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, for example, in order to make it difficult to perform a game with a normal symbol during a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuating display of the regular symbol (the regular symbol fluctuation time) is reduced. In a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the time is longer in the normal state than in the time saving state, the time is changed from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) in which it is difficult to execute a winning game with normal symbols (game with normal symbols) to When the game state shifts to a time-saving state (a state with high probability of normal symbols) in which a winning game is likely to be executed, the long-term normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (which is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) The normal symbol lottery during the time saving state may be set for a long time even though the time saving state has been set, and the period in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed is set for a long time. Can be suppressed.

In this case, the normal symbol lottery will be executed at most once per second in the low probability state of the normal symbols, so the game per common symbol will be executed in the low probability state of the normal symbols (normal state). In order to make it easier, the probability of winning a regular symbol in a low probability state (normal state) of a regular symbol may be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the regular game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state. In other words, a normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than a normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, in other words, the ball enters the second ball entry hole. The structure is such that it is easy for the ball to enter 640. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after a 4.1 second opening period (closed period of the electric accessory 640a), a 0.1 second opening period is set for the regular game ( If a normal game per game) is executed and a time-saving state is set, a game per standard image in which a 3-second opening period is set after a 1-second opening period (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) (Time-saving regular map winning game) is executed.

Next, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a will be explained with reference to FIG. 425. The electric accessory 640a in this control example is configured to be able to be displaced between a buried state (limited state) in which it is buried in the game board 13 and a protruded state (guided state) in which it protrudes from the game board 13. When the normal figure winning game is not executed, it is configured to be located in the buried state (closed state). Then, when a game with a common symbol is executed, it is displaced to a protruding state (guiding state) for a predetermined period (maximum 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, the terminology for the displacement state of the electric accessory 640a will be explained. The closed state of the electric accessory 640a means a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is closed, that is, the electric accessory 640a is closed. This is a term used to indicate the state in which the ball 640a is embedded in the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term restriction state (a state that restricts the entry of balls into the second ball entrance 640). may also be used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 640a means a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is open, that is, the electric accessory 640a is opened. This is a term used to indicate the state in which the accessory 640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term guiding state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is used. In some cases.

As shown in FIG. 425, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the guided state, most of the balls fired in the left-handed game are caused by the flow formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a located in the guided state. Electric accessory 640a is arranged so as to flow into the road. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a has a ball flow lower surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and the ball that reaches the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a enters the second entrance. It flows down to the ball mouth 640.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the game is terminated when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can enter the second ball entry hole 640 during one game per normal figure is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 425, in this control example, the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is the same ( The game is configured to be a left-handed game. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established (a ball passes through the through gate 67) even during the normal state, and a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, if a winning result is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area that can be reached by the ball fired in the left-handed game is controlled to open, so that the normal symbol lottery is not possible. During execution, there was a risk that the ball would enter the second ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, even if a game with a winning pattern is executed during the normal state, a ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during a game with a winning pattern. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the configuration is such that the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reach the second ball entry port 640 is about 1 second, whereas in the normal state It is configured such that the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state due to the normal figure winning game is 0.2 seconds.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration that executes the game using the same gaming method in the normal state (low probability state with normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state with normal symbols). In the pachinko machine 10 in which a winning game can be won even in the normal state, it is possible to suppress balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired at the game board, the ball flows down the left side area of the game board 13. Most of the balls (approximately 100%) are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of this second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is If the result is a failure, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of balls held is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 mentioned above. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 425, the explanation will be continued. A V winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 425) so that a ball launched in a left-handed game and flowing down the left side area can win a prize. Here, with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 650 will be explained. In this control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. A jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball enters a V winning hole 1650 provided in the V winning device 650.

This control example is based on the fact that the ball passes through a specific area (V winning hole 1650) (wins) during a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won without a jackpot winning by special symbol lottery. , so that a jackpot game is executed. In this way, the first condition (winning a small win) and the second condition (passing through a specific area) are satisfied step by step to allow the player to execute a bonus game (big win game) that is advantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to provide players with a game that they will never get tired of.

In addition to this, it may be configured such that a special symbol lottery is used to win a jackpot. In this case, in addition to the opportunity to execute a jackpot game (special figure jackpot game) that is established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, there is also a jackpot game that is executed when a ball enters a specific prize opening (V prize opening 1650). (V jackpot game). In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets boring.

First, the configuration of the V prize winning device 650 will be explained with reference to FIG. 426. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a ball than in the open state. This opening/closing door 650a is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach (see FIG. 425), and is changed to an open state when a small winning game is executed.

Inside the V-winning device 650, a first flow path 650b is formed in the space between the first partition wall 650k1 and the second partition wall 650k2, through which the balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 650a in the open state flow down. A storage valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball flowing down the path 650b (flowing period: 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 660a, and is configured such that the ball that first wins in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is temporarily stored in the storage portion. are doing. Further, a storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that the ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side of the first channel 650b, and based on the ball detection sensor 650s2 detecting a ball, a small winning The number of balls that have won a prize into the V winning device 650 during the game is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at a position where the winning ball flows down immediately after the winning ball of the V winning device 650, it is possible to suppress a situation in which more than the specified number of balls enter the V winning device 650. At the same time, it is possible to immediately award prize balls to a player during a small winning game.

Further, a second flow path 650c is formed to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first outlet 1163a is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 426, the balls flowing down the first flow path 650b do not directly flow into the second flow path 650c, but are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a. The subsequent ball flowing down the passage 650b comes into contact with the ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be guided to the second flow path 650c. The first out port 1163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 650c is an inlet for discharging the entered balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and is a ball inlet for discharging the balls that have entered the machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. After a falling period of 0.1 seconds), the balls that enter the first out port 1163a flow down a ball ejection path (not shown) and are ejected to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a changes the storage state in which balls can be stored and the storage state in accordance with the progress of the small winning game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small winning game is executed). The ball is also configured to be variably operated between a released state and a release state in which it is difficult to store balls. When the storage valve 660a is in the released state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d communicate with each other, and the balls flowing down the first flow path 650b are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a. The ball flowing down flows down the third flow path 650d. The third flow path 650d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm formed in a space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 650k1 and the third partition wall 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. The first movable valve 660b has a guiding position (protruding position) where it can receive balls flowing down the third flow path 650d in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10; It is configured to be movable to a passing position (buried position) where it cannot receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d. Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is drive-controlled by the main controller 110. When the valve solenoid 209d is turned on (energized), the first movable valve 660b moves to the passing position (the position buried in the game board 13) where it retreats from inside the V winning device 650, and the first When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to the guiding position where it protrudes into the V winning device 650 (the position where it protrudes from the game board 13). It is configured as follows.

The first movable valve 660b located at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured such that the ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. 426, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b is connected to the fourth It is configured to slope downward toward the road 650e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 660b is located at the guiding position (protruding position), the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d (flowing period: 0.2 seconds) moves the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b into the fourth flow path. It will flow down toward 650e. A second out port 1163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that has flown down the fourth flow path 650e (flowing period: 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 1163b. This second out port 1163b is a ball inlet port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, similar to the first out port 1163a described above, and is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The balls flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is located at the passing position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f communicate with each other, and the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d (flowing period 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (flow period 0.1 seconds). A V-winning port 1650 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65Of. The V winning hole 1650 is a winning hole that can be used as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 1650 while a jackpot game is not being executed, the winning information is stored (the jackpot game is not executed). (obtains the right to play), and after the small winning game in progress ends, the jackpot game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 426, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first out port 1163a and a second out port 1163b. With this configuration, when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, a winning ball in the V winning device 650 can pass through the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 660a is in the released state. It is possible to reliably prevent the liquid from flowing into the channels 650d, 4th channel 650e, and 5th channel 650f. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e may be communicated with each other, and the storage valve 660a may be in the storage state. , the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c may be configured to enter the second out port 1163b. In this case, the third partition wall 650k3, which is provided linearly in the vertical direction in FIG. 426, is tilted from the upper end side toward the lower end side to the lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. It is preferable that the extension line in the direction is on the right side of the fourth partition wall 650k4 (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 426). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 650c from flowing into the fifth flow path 650f.

In this way, in this control example, the jackpot game is executed when the ball enters the V winning hole 1650 during the small win game. Hereinafter, when explaining the jackpot game by classifying the triggers for execution, the jackpot game executed when a prize is won in the V winning hole 1650 is also referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V prize winning device 650 of this control example enters an open state in which balls can win prizes by executing a small winning game, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a enters the third flow path 650d. The ball is configured to flow down the third flow path 650d, and depending on the operating status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball reaches the first movable valve 660b, whether the ball wins in the V winning opening 1650 or not. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, the time when the first movable valve 660b is located at the guiding position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning hole 1650) is 6 seconds, whereas the time when the first movable valve 660b is located at the passing position ( Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the time it takes for the ball to enter the V-winning port 1650 is 1 second, the rate at which the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d enter the V-winning port 1650 is approximately It becomes 1/6.

In addition, in this control example, the operation control content of the storage valve 660a is varied depending on the type of small winning game, and in the small winning game executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, 1 Even if a plurality of balls are won into the V winning device 650 in the small winning game, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third channel 650d is one, and the second In the small winning game executed when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third channel 650d is two.

In other words, in this control example, in the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to pass the ball to the V winning hole 1650 once every 6 times, In the small winning game executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the V winning hole 1650 once every two times.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 427 to 429, the contents of the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 650 during execution of the small winning game will be explained. In addition, in the following explanation, the operation contents when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, that is, even if a plurality of balls are won into the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the An example will be described in which the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the three flow paths 650d is one. First, referring to FIG. 427, the ball flow in the first half period of the small winning game (the period in which the storage valve 660a is in the storage state) will be explained. FIG. 427 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state in the small winning game. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be operated and controlled to be in the storage state from when the small winning game is executed until the V prize winning device 650 is in the closed state. There is. When a plurality of balls win a prize in the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage part formed in the storage valve 660a, and the second prize winning ball P1 is stored in the storage part formed in the storage valve 660a. The ball P2 contacts the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the out port 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, all winning balls (for example, ball P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage part of the storage valve 660a enter the out port 1163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 650. In addition, the storage valve 660a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 650a of the V prize winning device 650 is closed (after the operation control to bring it into the closed state is executed). It becomes possible to reliably set the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to one in the accessory winning game.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the ease of winning a ball to the V winning opening 1650 depending on the timing of winning a ball to the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to provide a fair game to all players.

Note that, without being limited to this, the ease of winning balls into the V winning opening 1650 may be configured to vary depending on the number of winnings by winning balls into the V winning device 650 during a small winning game. For example, it is possible to provide six storage sections that can store balls that have won into the V winning device 650, and to distribute the balls that have won into the V winning device 650 to any of the six storage sections ( Clune, etc.) will be established. Of the six storage sections, only the balls stored in a specific storage section can enter the V winning hole 1650 when the storage state of the storage section is released, and the balls other than the specific storage section The balls (maximum 5 balls) stored in the storage sections are configured to enter the second out port 1163b when the storage state of each storage section is released. In addition, if the next ball is distributed by the distribution member toward a storage section where balls are already stored, it will collide with the ball that is already stored and will be stored in another adjacent storage section. A flow path is provided to communicate between each storage section.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the percentage of winnings into the V winning opening 1650 depending on the number of winning balls entered into the V winning device 650 during a small winning game, thereby motivating players. can be made to play games.

Even with this configuration, by varying the number of times the storage state of the storage section that causes the ball to flow down to the out port during one small win game is released depending on the type of small win, the actual The percentage of winnings to the V winning opening 1650 can be varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state (the second half of the accessory winning game) will be explained. FIG. 428 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 428, after the V opening/closing door 650a is in the closed state and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 650, the storage valve 660a is in the released state (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). When the transition occurs, the ball P1 (see FIG. 427) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 428, since the first movable valve 660b is located at the guiding position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, and flows through the fourth flow path 650e. The ball flows down and enters the second out port 1163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 427) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, the first movable valve 660b moves to the passing position. The ball flow in the case where the ball is located will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 429, if the first movable valve 660b is located at the passing position at the timing when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, the fifth flow path 660f is It flows down and enters the V winning slot 1650.

<About the production content in the 11th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 430 to 433, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be explained. As mentioned above, in this 11th control example, the time saving state is a disadvantageous time saving state (first time saving state) in which the time saving state is likely to end without acquiring the special drawing 2 holding, and a special drawing 2 holding has been acquired. The present invention is configured such that an advantageous time saving state (second time saving state) in which the time saving state is easily ended can be set. The mode of performance of the performance (time-saving performance) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state is also configured to vary depending on the type of time-saving state that is set. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether only one or two execution opportunities for the second special symbol lottery can be obtained in the time saving state set this time. It is possible to make it easy for people to understand.

First, with reference to FIG. 430(a), the content of the time-saving performance A, which is a time-saving performance executed when the first time-saving state, that is, the time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain special drawing 2 reservation, is set will be explained. do. FIG. 430(a) is an example of a display screen displayed in time-saving performance A, which is a time-saving performance in the first time-saving state, which is set after a jackpot game of jackpot type "jackpot AB" is executed in the normal state. FIG.

The diagram shown in FIG. 430(a) is immediately after the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery has not been executed, and the first special symbol variation based on the acquired special symbol 1 reservation ( It is a diagram showing a state in which the special figure 1 variation) is being executed, and in the small display area Dm1, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 variation (in the figure, it is indicated by a downward arrow) ) is displayed, and "2" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 1 is displayed in the small display area Dm1a. In the small display area Dm2, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed, and in the small display area Dm2a, "0" indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations is displayed.

Here, if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed during the normal state, as shown in FIG. is displayed as "0", that is, the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired, so the display mode indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 displayed in the small display area Dm1a is changed from "1" to " 4'', the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) will be executed before the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is executed.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol lottery executed in the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is specified as "1 second", and When a per-figure game is executed, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened after an opening period of "1 second" has elapsed. The variation time of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is defined as "0.2 seconds". In other words, if the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special drawing 2 hold, you can play a regular game (providing a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640) during the time-saving state. It is configured so that all acquired special drawing 1 reservations (up to 4 pieces) can be used up before this.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired during the first special symbol variation period executed during the time saving state. In this control example, the first special symbol lottery is also configured to win a small hit with a probability of 1/50. Then, only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation (special symbol 1 small winning variation) with a variation time of "30 seconds" will be executed. The game is configured so that a situation (a game with regular symbols in a time-saving state) in which special symbols 2 reserved are acquired before all acquired special symbols 1 reserved can occur.

Therefore, if a small hit is won by the special symbol 1 lottery executed during the time saving state, a game for a regular symbol will be executed during the 30-second fluctuation of the special symbol 1, and a second prize will be won during the regular symbol prize game. By entering the ball into the ball entrance 640, it is possible to obtain special map 2 reservation. In this case, there is a possibility that the regular pattern winning game will be executed over the timing at which the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) using the acquired special symbol 2 reservation is executed.

If a regular pattern winning game is executed over the timing when the second special symbol lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) is executed in the first time saving state, that is, a special pattern 2 lottery using special pattern 2 reservation is executed. If the normal game is started before the regular game is started, and the regular game is continued until after the special map 2 lottery is executed (after the time saving state ends), the normal state is set. However, a situation is created in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, even when the first time saving state is set, it is possible to increase the possibility of ending the time saving state in a state in which the special drawing 2 reservation is acquired.

In other words, in this control example, the acquisition status of the special drawing 2 reservation at the end of the time saving can be made different depending on the result of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state. It is also possible to make the player interested in the result of the first special symbol lottery. In addition, in this control example, if the special figure 1 lottery that is executed during the time saving state loses and wins, the short variation time (0.2 seconds) special figure 1 variation is executed and if the small hit is won, It is configured so that the special pattern 1 variation with a long variation time (30 seconds) is executed, and in the special pattern 1 lottery executed during the first time shortening state, if you win a small prize than if you lost and won. is configured to make it easier for the player to execute a game that is more advantageous to the player (a game that ends the time-saving state with the special drawing 2 pending); , it may be configured such that a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning a small hit. By configuring this way, in the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the first time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player if the player wins a small hit than if he wins a small winning (special drawing 2 pending). It is possible to easily execute a game in which a time-saving state is ended in a state in which a game is stopped, and it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a player is made to have a sense of expectation for winning a winning in a special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 430(a), when time-saving effect A is executed, a character 851 imitating a rabbit displays a display mode 853 imitating a capsule in the center of the main display area Dm, and a hammer 851aa. The effect of swinging down and smashing is executed, and in the upper center of the main display area Dm there is a "One-shot win" indicating that the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed in this time-saving state is one. !!” is displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm20, the characters "Last" are displayed as a display mode to indicate the number of trials of the time-saving effect executed during the time-saving state.

As described above, in the first time saving state where the time saving effect A shown in FIG. Since it is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, at the end timing of the time saving effect A (stop display timing of the second special symbol variation), the normal state is set as the gaming state. . In other words, the period during which the time saving state is actually set is different from the performance period for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state.

In such a case, if the display mode (for example, display of the number of remaining time reductions) indicating the period in which the time saving state is actually set (remaining time short period) is displayed, the remaining time reduction effect will be displayed at the timing when time saving effect A is executed. Since the player is notified that the time period has become 0, the time-saving performance A is not a performance indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, but the second special symbol lottery performed during the normal state. There was a problem in that the player was made to misunderstand that the performance was an indication of the result of a special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the small display area Dm20 is used to indicate the remaining number of executions of the performance (time-saving performance) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state, rather than the short remaining time. It is configured to display the display mode (the number of remaining time shortening effects). With this configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the time-saving effect that is being executed without worrying about the end timing of the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, since the time saving end condition is established when the second special symbol variation is executed once, as shown in FIG. 430(a), the small Although the word "Last" is displayed in the display area Dm20, for example, if the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation is set to "5 times" instead of "1 time". If there is, "5 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm20 when the time saving state is set, and each time a new time saving effect is executed, the display count is subtracted, and the last time saving effect is executed. "Last" will be displayed at the right time.

With this configuration, the number of times (minimum number of times) that the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the current time saving state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 430(a), in this control example, the time-saving effect A can be executed even during the period from when the time-saving state is set until the first second special symbol variation is executed. ing. Specifically, after the time saving state is set, the first time saving effect A is configured to be executed when the first first special symbol variation based on the acquired special symbol 1 reservation is executed. There is. With this configuration, the results of multiple types of special symbol lottery during the time saving state can be suggested to the player using the same performance mode, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. can.

In addition, if no special symbol changes are executed when the time saving state is set, the display mode of the ending screen of the jackpot game may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game ends, or the game content in the time saving state may be displayed. It may be configured to display a display mode for explaining to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the time-saving effect A from being executed for an unnecessarily long period of time. In addition, in this control example, the result of the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state is configured to be notified to the player using a time saving effect, which is a performance for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery. For example, without being limited to this, if you have obtained a special figure 1 hold at the end of a jackpot game, the ending screen of the jackpot game will be displayed until the special figure 1 variation (short variation) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is completed. is configured to be continuously (extended) displayed, and when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the effect for notifying the player of the small win is associated with the effect executed during the jackpot game. It is a good idea to configure it so that it is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that a jackpot game with a small win game has been executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 430(a), the explanation will be continued. In the sub-display area Ds of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the words "break the capsule" are displayed as a display mode for explaining the content of the time-saving performance A currently being executed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the process until the performance result is displayed by the time-saving performance A being executed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although FIG. 430(a) shows an example in which a plain capsule 853 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the display mode of the capsule 853 may be changed. Specifically, winning information regarding the first special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a (pre-reading process 5 executed by the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 349) C313 (see information for indicating the contents of the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol set in ), and determines whether the winning information includes information indicating a small winning. Based on the results, it is more likely to be selected when information indicating a small win is stored in the winning information storage area 223a than when information indicating a small winning is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The display format (for example, a display format imitating a golden capsule) and the information indicating a small win are stored in the prize information storage area 223a than when the information indicating a small win is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. If the configuration is such that one display mode is selected from a plurality of display modes including at least a disadvantageous display mode that is more likely to be selected when the capsule is not stored (for example, a display mode imitating a plain capsule). good.

By configuring this way, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance the result of the first special symbol lottery, which is quickly digested, using the time-saving effect A that is executed when the first time-saving state is set. Therefore, each time the first special symbol lottery that is quickly digested is executed, the result of the first special symbol lottery will be displayed for a longer period of time than when the performance suggesting the result of the first special symbol lottery is executed. Since it is possible to execute a performance that suggests to the player, it is possible to provide a performance that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the display mode of the capsule 853 displayed during the time-saving performance A is configured to be determined (selected) based on the pre-reading result related to the first special symbol lottery, but this is not limited to this. If the information corresponding to the winning information indicating the pre-reading result related to the second special symbol lottery is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the information corresponding to the winning information indicating the pre-reading result related to the second special symbol lottery is stored. The display mode of the capsule 853 displayed during the time-saving effect A may be changed based on the information. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, the display mode of the capsule 853 displayed during the time-saving performance A is configured to be changed depending on whether information indicating a small win is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the capsule 853 may be changed depending on the number of pieces of winning information indicating small winnings or the contents of the set small winning type. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration that allows a jackpot to be won in a special symbol lottery, the display mode of the capsule 853 may be varied based on information indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won.

Furthermore, when performing a performance that indicates in advance to the player the result of the first special symbol lottery that is quickly digested using the time-saving performance A that is executed when the first time-saving state is set. It is preferable that the time-saving effect A is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, for example, before the jackpot game in which the first time-saving state is set ends. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the time-saving effect A before the first special symbol lottery is executed for the first time in the time-saving state, so the first special symbol lottery for the first time in the first time-saving state is performed. Even if the winning result is a small hit, the result of the first special symbol lottery, which is quickly digested, can be suggested to the player well in advance, making it possible to provide an easier-to-understand performance to the player. .

In addition, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery that is quickly digested, before the second special symbol lottery is executed, the effect described later with reference to FIG. 431(a), that is, It is configured so that the same performance as when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is executed. With this configuration, if a small hit is won during the first time-saving state, the performance result of the time-saving performance A is notified to the player in the same performance mode, regardless of the type of special symbol that won the small hit. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player, and it is also possible to reduce the amount of performance data used for the performance when a small hit is won.

Then, when the second special symbol variation is executed after the time saving effect A is executed, the effect screen shown in FIG. 431(a) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 431(a), the display mode during the second special symbol variation will be described as time-saving effect A. FIG. 431(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the time-saving effect A executed during the second special symbol variation (during the special symbol 2 variation). In FIG. 431(a), since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display mode (in the figure, three downward arrows) indicating that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the second special symbol small display area Dm2. ) is displayed.

In addition, in this control example, when the first time saving state is set, the time saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the first second special symbol variation, so as shown in FIG. 431(a) The time shown in is after the gaming state has transitioned from the time saving state to the normal state. Therefore, in this control example, the display mode showing the remaining number of time-saving effects displayed in the small display area Dm20 is displayed in a display mode (reduced display in the figure) that is different from the display mode shown in FIG. 430(a). It is configured so that With this configuration, the actual gaming state can be suggested to the player by the display mode showing the remaining number of time-saving effects.

Then, near the center of the main display area Dm, the capsule 853 is broken and the contents 855 are displayed, which is a display mode showing the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed. In FIG. 431(a), as the display mode of the content 855, the words "Challenge" are displayed, indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed is a small win. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Small win GET" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed is a small win are displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 431(a), the display mode showing the current lottery result is displayed during the period of variation of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a sufficient period (remaining fluctuation period) between when the player recognizes that he or she has won a small winning game and when the small winning game is actually executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a small winning game is started and a proper game cannot be executed during the small winning game. Furthermore, when the remaining period until the small winning game starts (remaining period of special figure 2 variation) becomes within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), a small display area is formed at the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In Dm7, as a game guidance mode for guiding the player to the position of the V winning device 650 that makes the ball win during the small winning game (the position where the ball is fired during the small winning game), the V winning device 650 of the V winning device 650 is introduced. An image simulating the door 650a is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the gaming method to be executed next in an easy-to-understand manner. The display mode displayed in this small display area Dm7 is configured to be changed every time the remaining period until the small winning game starts (remaining period of special figure 2 fluctuation) decreases. For example, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm7 may be gradually increased, or only a part of the guide display mode is displayed at first, and the guide display mode gradually changes. The entire area is displayed, and at the end (just before the small winning game starts), the words "Aim here" may be displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 431(a) (effect result of time-saving effect A) is displayed during the variation period of the second special symbol is selected from a plurality of timings. It is configured so that the timing can be determined. Specifically, depending on the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won, that is, whether the small winning type is such that it is easy to make the ball enter a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game. The timing for displaying the performance result of time-saving performance A is varied depending on the situation. With this configuration, during the second special symbol variation, it is possible to draw attention not only to the content of the performance result of time-saving performance A, but also to the timing at which the performance result is displayed, which improves the performance effect of time-saving performance A. can be increased.

Regarding the timing of displaying the performance result of time-saving performance A, the timing to display the performance result of time-saving performance A is set such that the more advantageous the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed is for the player, the later the timing of displaying the performance result of time-saving performance A becomes. It is good to configure it as follows. As a result, the more time has passed since time-saving effect A was executed, the more likely it is that the lottery result will be advantageous to the player. It is possible to maintain interest in the performance.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol being executed is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the performance result of time-saving performance A is displayed more than the advantageous lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. The configuration may be such that the timing at which the process is performed is earlier. With this configuration, when the lottery result is advantageous to the player, the time-saving performance A is displayed in a display mode that shows the lottery result until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Since the period can be made longer, for example, it is possible to secure a longer period for performing a performance to congratulate the player on a lottery result that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, one timing can be determined from a plurality of timings as the timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 431(a) (performance result of time-saving production A) is displayed during the variation period of the second special symbol, In the case of executing a performance with different degrees of advantage to the player depending on the timing at which the performance result of time-saving performance A is displayed, whether or not the performance result is displayed as a performance mode of time-saving performance A. In order to show the player the timing of displaying the result of a drawing that is likely to be an advantageous lottery result for the player. (For example, a gauge indicating the performance period of time-saving performance A, and a display mode that shows on the gauge the timing when the performance result indicating that the lottery result is advantageous to the player is likely to be displayed (For example, a chance period display) ) and a moving pair that moves on the gauge as time passes. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the performance result is expected to be displayed, and to draw attention to whether or not the performance result is displayed, thereby increasing the performance effect. be able to.

In addition, with respect to a performance that prompts whether or not a performance result will be displayed, it is preferable to predefine an upper limit number of times the performance will be performed. By configuring in this way, if the effect that incites whether or not the effect is displayed while the number of times the effect has been executed has reached the upper limit, the effect will always be displayed. Since this is displayed, it is possible to draw the attention of the player who is predicting the timing at which the performance result of the time-saving performance A will be executed to the number of executions of the promotion performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430(b), the content of the time-saving performance B, which is the time-saving performance executed when the advantageous time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set, will be explained. FIG. 430(b) is an example of a display screen displayed in time-saving performance B, which is a time-saving performance in the second time-saving state, which is set after a jackpot game of jackpot type "jackpot AA" is executed in the normal state. FIG. Note that among the display elements displayed in this time-saving effect B, those that are the same as the display elements displayed in the above-mentioned time-saving effect A are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When time-saving effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 430(b), the words "Extra" are displayed in the small display area Dm20a, and the words "Gather the characters" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Ru. Then, an effect is performed in which a plurality of characters of different types (a character 851a imitating a turtle, a character 851b imitating an elephant) fly into the main display area Dm. Further, a small display area Dm27 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. This small display area Dm27 is for notifying the player whether or not the special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired.

In other words, the time-saving performance B is executed in response to the second time-saving state, that is, the advantageous time-saving state in which it is possible to end the time-saving state with the special drawing 2 reservation acquired, so the above-mentioned aspect The performance is performed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the currently set time-saving state is an advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, even if the second time-saving state is set, the number of time-saving effects that can be performed during the time-saving state is one, so the small display area Dm20 has a display mode showing the number of remaining time-saving effects. The word "Last" is displayed. Then, the characters "Extra" are displayed in the small display area Dm20a to indicate that the time-saving state is where it is easy to execute the second special symbol variation during the normal state. In other words, the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm20a indicates that there is a situation in which a game advantageous to the player (special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state) is likely to be performed even after all the time-saving effects are finished. This is a display mode for notifying the person.

In the state shown in FIG. 430(b), the second special symbol lottery is executed by entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640, and then, when the special symbol 2 reservation is obtained, as shown in FIG. 431(b). The production screen shown in is displayed. FIG. 431(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second special symbol variation of time-saving effect B. As shown in FIG. 431(b), a display mode 853 resembling a capsule is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and a character 851 resembling a rabbit is displayed as an effect indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed. However, an effect is performed in which the hammer 851aa is swung down and smashed. On the display screen shown in FIG. 431(b), a state in which the special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired (a state in which "1" indicating that one special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired is displayed in the small display area Dm2a) ), the standby character 872a is displayed in the small display area Dm27, indicating that the special map 2 reservation has been acquired, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Standby completed!", which indicates that the special map 2 reservation has been acquired. !Don't give up even if you miss" is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 430(b), there are a plurality of character types that can be displayed as the standby character 872a, and in this control example, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, the acquired special figure 2 reservation The character type of the standby character 872a is determined based on winning information corresponding to the winning information. In other words, the configuration is such that it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed next (executed after transitioning to the normal state) depending on the character type displayed as the standby character 872a. are doing. As a result, for example, the character type indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed next (executed after transitioning to the normal state) is a small win advantageous to the player is displayed in the small display area Dm27. When it is displayed, the user can safely view the effect (the effect being executed in the center of the main display area Dm) that suggests the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed.

In addition, in this control example, there is an effect that suggests the pre-discrimination result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed next (executed after transitioning to the normal state), and a performance that suggests the result of the second special symbol lottery that is currently being executed. However, the present invention is configured to perform a different effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the preliminary determination result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed next (executed after transitioning to the normal state) Based on this, it may be configured to vary the performance mode of the performance that suggests the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. In this case, the technical concept of the sixth control example described above, that is, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state and the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed after transitioning to the normal state It is only necessary to set a performance period that spans , and to notify the player of the results of the plurality of second special symbol drawings in a composite manner during the performance period.

Then, on the performance screen shown in FIG. 431(b), it is possible to win by winning the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, or by entering the ball into the V prize opening 1650 during the small winning game. If not, the performance (last chance performance) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in the normal state shown in FIG. 432(a) is executed. FIG. 432(a) is a diagram showing an example of a last chance performance screen. As shown in FIG. 432(a), the character 851a corresponding to the standby character 872a destroys the capsule 853, and the upper part of the main display area Dm indicates that this is the last of the second special symbol lottery. The words "Last Chance" are displayed, and the words "Look forward to your last chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Furthermore, the characters "Extra" are displayed in the small display area Dm20, which is a display area for indicating the remaining number of time-saving performances (remaining number of time-saving performances). Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the last chance performance being executed is a performance related to the time saving performance.

Next, the content of the performance executed after the ball enters the V winning hole 1650 during the small winning game will be explained with reference to FIG. 432(b). FIG. 432(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed after a V win (after a win in the V win hole 1650) during a small winning game. Note that the details of the small winning game performance executed during the small winning game are the same as the above-mentioned sixth control example, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 440, but in this control example, the operation scenario of the small winning game is predefined, and the small winning game continues until the predefined operation scenario is completed. It is configured as follows. The operation scenario (small winning scenario) is defined such that a waiting period (ending period) of 3 seconds is set after the period during which the ball can reach the V winning hole 1650 has elapsed.

Therefore, even if a player wins a V prize during a small winning game, the jackpot game is not executed immediately, but a waiting period of at least 3 seconds can be ensured. During this waiting period, as shown in FIG. 432(b), the main display area is In the center of Dm, an image 862 of "777" is displayed as a display mode indicating that a jackpot game will be executed (jackpot winning), and in the sub display area Ds, characters "Jackpot!! Congratulations" are displayed. be done.

Furthermore, as a guidance display mode for guiding the gaming method during a jackpot game, the player is informed that the player is currently playing a small win game (playing to the left), but that a jackpot game (playing to the right) will be executed later. The characters ``Right-handed player on standby'' for guidance and the characters ``Two seconds left until right-handed player starts'' are displayed as a display mode to indicate the remaining period until the jackpot game is executed. Also. In the small display area Dm7, the image of the V winning device 650 that the player should aim at during the small winning game (see FIG. 431(a)) gradually disappears, and a new , a dynamic display is executed in which images of the variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 425) that is opened during the jackpot game are gradually displayed.

With this configuration, by the time the small winning game ends (before the jackpot game starts), the player is informed that the jackpot game will be executed and the game content to be executed during the jackpot game. can be clearly understood before the jackpot game starts.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, the display is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in which no special drawing 2 reservation has been obtained even though the second time saving state has been set and the special drawing 2 lottery has been executed. Explain the warning screen that will be displayed. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an attention-calling mode executed during time-saving performance B. This control example is configured to be able to set an advantageous time saving state in which the time saving state occurs during the variation period of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and a disadvantageous time saving state in which the time saving state becomes the normal state. Therefore, even though the advantageous time-saving state is set, there is a possibility that left-handed hitting may be stopped after the second special symbol variation is started.

In this case, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 hold has not been acquired when the remaining variation time of the 2nd special symbol variation (remaining time in the time saving state) becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the game The player is configured to display a warning mode to urge the player to play the left-handed game. Thereby, even though the advantageous time saving state has been set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without acquiring the special drawing 2 reservation.

In addition, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation (remaining time of the time-saving state) will not last for a predetermined period ( For example, even if the special map 2 hold is not obtained when the time is less than 10 seconds), the attention-calling mode (screen) is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 433, when the attention-calling screen is displayed, in addition to the characters "Last" indicating that the time-saving effect is the last of the time-saving effect, a countdown of the remaining time of the time-saving effect is displayed in the small display area Dm20. In the example shown in FIG. 433, the characters "5 seconds" indicating that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds are displayed. Then, the character acquisition suggestion effect shown in FIG. 430(b), that is, the effect in which multiple types of characters (a character 851a imitating a turtle and a character 851b imitating an elephant) fly, is executed again and is currently in progress. is displayed so as to cover the effect suggesting the result of the second special symbol lottery. In addition, the words "Hit left!! Gather the characters!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, in the small display area Dm27, a display mode "not standby" indicating that the special drawing 2 reservation has not been acquired is displayed.

By displaying the above-mentioned display contents, the player is made aware that the situation where he or she has not acquired the special drawing 2 reservation even though it is possible to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation is a disadvantageous situation to the player. , it is possible to emphasize and guide the player to the game for acquiring the special drawing 2 reservation. In addition, in FIG. 433, a display mode indicating the remaining time of the time-saving effect is displayed in the small display area Dm20 indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving effect, thereby calling the player's attention. As part of the performance that continues to be executed after the time-saving performance has started, the system is configured to make it easy for players to understand the warning for obtaining special drawing 2 reservation, but this is not limited to this. Instead, the display mode for showing the remaining time in the time-saving state may be displayed in the main display area Dm, and in this case, the display mode for showing the remaining time in the time-saving state is longer than the time-saving effect being executed. It is also preferable to configure the display screen so that it is highlighted and displayed on the display screen. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the situation is not normal.

As explained above, in this control example, different time-saving performances (time-saving performance A, time-saving performance B) are executed depending on the type of time-saving state that is set (first time-saving state, second time-saving state). Therefore, the type of time saving state set this time can be easily understood by the player. In addition, the player is informed not of the period until the time saving state ends, but of the number of times the bonus (special drawing 2 lottery) will be given to the player due to the setting of the time saving state (the number of times the benefit can be given). Since the game is configured to do so, it is possible for the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, depending on the type of the time saving state that is set, the time saving state is terminated at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. The configuration is such that a completely different time-saving effect is executed depending on the type of time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this; It may be configured such that the time-saving effect is made common and then a time-saving effect is executed in a presentation mode according to the type of the time-saving state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data for the time-saving effect executed during the time-saving state, and for a predetermined period after the time-saving effect has started, the player can understand which time-saving type has been set. It can be made difficult to do so.

Further, it is configured to perform time-saving effect A in a part of the state where the second time-saving state is set, and to execute time-saving effect B in a part of the state where the first time-saving state is set. For example, when the second time-saving state is set in a state where the special drawing 2 pending is acquired, the lottery result of the acquired special drawing 2 pending wins a small hit (the jackpot game is not executed). If you have won a small winning type that is easy to win), that is, if you have won a small winning that is easy to execute a jackpot game in the first special drawing 2 lottery after the time saving state is set, time saving effect A is won. It may be configured to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be explained with reference to FIG. 434. FIG. 434 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 434, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the symbol) can be set. Since the normal state is set to a low probability state of normal symbols, it is difficult to win on a common symbol, and even if you win on a common symbol, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a is short and the second entry is difficult. This results in a game state in which it is difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball into the ball opening 640. Therefore, a game in which a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game and a first special symbol lottery is executed is mainly played.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed in which the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/50. When a small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, one of the three small winning types (small winning AA, AB, AC) is set. In this control example, the opening operation execution timing of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is varied depending on the set small winning type, and thereby the winning of the ball in the specific area (V winning opening 1650) is controlled. They differ in their ease of use.

Specifically, when small win AA or small win AB is set as the small win type, if you normally play a game in which a ball enters the V winning device 650 during the small win game, you will receive a high prize. The opening operation timing of the V winning device 650 is stipulated so that the ball can be won into a specific area (V winning opening 1650) with probability, and when a small winning AC is set, it is possible to enter a small winning game during a small winning game. The opening operation timing of the V winning device 650 is defined so that even if a game in which a ball is won into the V winning device 650 is normally performed, hardly any balls will enter the V winning hole 1650.

In addition, in this control example, no matter which type of small win is set, the opening operation contents of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to be the same, and only the start timing of the opening operation is changed. are configured to differ. With this configuration, the player can determine which small win type the small win game corresponds to based on the contents of the opening operation of the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, no matter which small win type is set in the small win game, the player is always expected to win the ball into a specific area (V winning hole 1650) while playing the game. can be made to do so.

The selection ratio of the small winning types that are set when a small winning is won in the special drawing 1 lottery is set at different proportions, with the proportion of small winning AA being set at 2% and the proportion of small winning AB being set being 53. %, and the percentage of small hit AC set is 45%. In other words, in about 55% of the cases where a small win is won, a small win game (advantageous small win game) that allows a ball to enter the V winning slot 1650 with a high probability is executed during the small win game, and approximately At 45%, a small winning game (disadvantageous small winning game) in which hardly any balls can enter the V winning hole 1650 during the small winning game is executed. In this way, this control example is configured such that the rate at which advantageous small winning games are executed is higher than the rate at which disadvantageous small winning games are executed. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where an advantageous small winning game is not executed even once and a disadvantageous small winning game is executed consecutively, thereby reducing the player's ability to play the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

In this control example, the type of jackpot game to be executed when a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) is defined for each set small winning type. A jackpot AA is defined as a jackpot type for executing a jackpot game in which the game round is 7 rounds and a second time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the small win AB is After the end of the small winning game, a jackpot AB is defined as a jackpot type for executing a jackpot game in which the game round is 3 rounds and the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the small winning AC is a jackpot type. A jackpot AC is defined as a jackpot type for executing a jackpot game in which the number of game rounds is two rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, if it is not possible to make the ball enter the specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game, the jackpot game will be executed regardless of which small winning type is set. The normal state continues without any problems.

As mentioned above, in the small winning AC, the opening operation timing of the V winning device 650 is defined so that the ball cannot enter the specific area (V winning hole 1650) when the game is played normally. Therefore, if a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during a small winning game corresponding to small winning AC, the ball will be identified during a small winning game corresponding to another small winning type. A jackpot game is executed that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the ball enters the area (V winning hole 1650). In other words, if a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) due to an illegal act during a small winning game corresponding to a small winning AC, a penalty can be imposed on the player. ing. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts during the small winning game.

In addition, as described above, since the small winning games corresponding to any small winning type have the same opening operation contents of the V winning device 650, small winning games in which a penalty is imposed on the player It is possible to identify small winning games other than the above, and to make it difficult for players to illegally enter a ball into a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game.

In addition, in this control example, even if a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during a disadvantageous small winning game, instead of configuring the jackpot game to be executable, the disadvantageous small winning game is executed. Although the configuration is such that a penalty is imposed on a jackpot game executed based on the result, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole 1650) during a disadvantageous small winning game, , it may be configured such that jackpot games are not executed.

Next, the contents of the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 434, in this control example, a first time saving state and a second time saving state can be set as the time saving states. Here, the difference between the first time saving state and the second time saving state will be explained. The first time saving state and the second time saving state are both time saving states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, and the winning probability for special symbol drawings and the winning probability for normal symbol drawings are set. are the same. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing at which the time saving state ends (transferring to the normal state), and in the first time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, the timing of the second special symbol variation is The time saving state is configured to end at the start timing, and in the second time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the second special symbol variation. It is configured as follows.

In other words, in the second time saving state, when the same time saving end condition (second special symbol fluctuation once) is satisfied, the time saving state is set longer by the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation. This can be said to be a time-saving situation that is advantageous for players.

Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can enter the second ball entry port 640 during one normal symbol game is one, and the second special symbol fluctuation is Since it is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied when it is executed once, when the first time saving state is set, the second special symbol's pending memory (special pattern 2 pending) is acquired. It becomes easier to end the time-saving state without any problems. On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues even during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation, so the state in which the second special symbol's reservation memory (special symbol 2 reservation) is acquired This makes it easier to end the time saving state. That is, even from the point of view of the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving state ends, the second time saving state can be said to be a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

In addition, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (first normal state), the percentage of small winnings (small winning AA) for which the second time saving state can be set is selected is 2%. , the percentage of small wins (small wins AB) for which the first time saving state can be set is selected is 53%. In other words, the configuration is such that it is easier to shift from the normal state to the first time saving state than to the second time saving state.

Although details will be described later, if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set at a rate of 55% is selected. It is configured as follows. In other words, the configuration is such that in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, for a player who is playing a game in the normal state, the game states (normal state, first time saving state) with different transition ratios to the second time saving state that are most advantageous to the player are gradually introduced. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. Further, when the game state shifts to the second time-saving state more easily than the normal state, it becomes difficult to stop the game, so it is possible to easily improve the performance of the game.

In the first time saving state, a game is executed in which a ball passes through the through gate 67 in a left-handed game, a normal symbol lottery is executed, and a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a normal symbol winning game. . Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/1.25. During this first time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol lottery being executed once, and special symbol fluctuations are made to indicate the result of the second special symbol lottery in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end at the start timing of (second special symbol variation). This makes it easier for the time saving state to end without being able to obtain the special symbol 2 hold, so that after the time saving state is set, the game state becomes such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed only once. Further, during this first time saving state, a time saving effect A mode is set in which time saving effect A is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if a small hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state (first normal state). On the other hand, if a small win is won, one of small win AD, small win AE, and small win AF is set as the small win type. The small win AD stipulates the jackpot AA, which is the same jackpot type as the small win AA mentioned above, and the small win AE includes three game rounds after the small win game ends, and after the jackpot game ends. Jackpot AD, which is a jackpot type for executing a jackpot game in which the second time saving state is set, is defined, and in small win AF, after the end of the small win game, there are two game rounds, and the jackpot game ends. A jackpot AC, which is a jackpot type for executing a jackpot game in which a normal state is set later, is defined.

During the time saving state, the selection percentage of the small winning types that are set when a small winning is won in the special drawing 2 lottery is set at different proportions, with the small winning AD being set at 25%, and the small winning AE being set. The configuration is such that the proportion of small winning AC is set at 30%, and the proportion of small winning AC is set at 45%. In other words, in about 55% of the cases where a small win is won, a small win game (advantageous small win game) that allows a ball to enter the V winning slot 1650 with a high probability is executed during the small win game, and approximately At 45%, a small winning game (disadvantageous small winning game) in which hardly any balls can enter the V winning hole 1650 during the small winning game is executed. In this way, this control example is configured such that the rate at which advantageous small winning games are executed is higher than the rate at which disadvantageous small winning games are executed. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where an advantageous small winning game is not executed even once and a disadvantageous small winning game is executed consecutively, thereby reducing the player's ability to play the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

When a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set is selected at a rate of 55%. . In other words, the configuration is such that in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, for a player who is playing a game in the normal state, the game states (normal state, first time saving state) with different transition ratios to the second time saving state that are most advantageous to the player are gradually introduced. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. Further, when the game state shifts to the second time-saving state more easily than the normal state, it becomes difficult to stop the game, so it is possible to easily improve the performance of the game.

In addition, the percentage of jackpot games in which the round game is 9 rounds (R) will be higher when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery than when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is composed of In other words, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the round game. Note that, similar to the game in the normal state described above, if the ball cannot be won into the specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed.

In this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state, regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery The time saving state is configured to end at the start timing of . Therefore, even if the result of the first second special symbol lottery is a loss or a small hit, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation), so the special symbol According to the execution status of the normal symbol lottery during the 2 fluctuations and the execution status of the regular symbol lottery, the result of the second special symbol lottery will not be determined in advance by the player, and the player will be able to It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to win a small hit.

Note that, without being limited to this, the timing at which the time saving state ends may be varied depending on the result of the first second special symbol lottery, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the special symbol variation ends. The configuration may be such that the time saving state is terminated at the appropriate timing. With this configuration, the player can have the pleasure of determining the result of the second special symbol lottery in advance according to the execution status of the regular symbol lottery during the special symbol 2 variation and the execution status of the regular symbol lottery game. It can be provided to players.

In addition, in the case where the timing for ending the time saving state is changed depending on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in which the time saving end condition is met, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure, the time saving state will be entered at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the time saving state may be terminated at the start timing of the special symbol variation. With this configuration, only when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the special symbol 2 reservation, so the player can receive a small prize in the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to add a game in which the player aims to win a prize. In other words, in this case, it is possible for the player to win a small hit in the first second special symbol lottery, and also to win a small win AF that does not shift to the second time saving state based on the small win win. The game result is the most unfavorable, and then the second special symbol lottery of the first time is a winning result, the second special symbol lottery of the first time is a small hit win, and based on that small win winning, the second special symbol lottery is the most unfavorable game result. As a result of the game where you win the small win AE that moves to the time saving state, you win the small win in the second special symbol lottery of the first time, and it is a small win that moves to the second time saving state based on the small win winning. Then, the game results are advantageous to the player in the order of the game results in which the small win AD is won, in which a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds than the small win AE is executed.

In this way, when a player wins a small hit in a special symbol lottery, depending on the type of small win that is set, the player may be more advantageous or disadvantageous than if the player did not win the small hit (missing the winning). By providing a case where the following is true, and a case where the following occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in this case, if you lose in the special symbol lottery and win, "one more time" will be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a notification mode indicating that it is possible to obtain special symbol 2 pending. It is preferable to display the text and the text "Please let the ball enter the second ball entry port 640 during the variable performance." Thereby, it is possible for the player to easily understand that he has won the lottery result (lost) for extending the time period as a result of the special symbol lottery.

In other words, if you win in the special symbol lottery and the time-saving state ends later than in other lottery results, then you can say that you won in the time-saving extension lottery. . In addition, in this control example, the timing for ending the time saving state is configured to differ depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit or a loss, but the timing is not limited to this. The timing for ending the time saving state may be different depending on the type of small win set in the case of winning or the determined fluctuation pattern, or the timing of ending the time saving state may be different depending on the type of small win set in the case of winning. It may be configured such that the timing at which the time saving state ends is delayed only in the case of a losing win.

Then, if you win the small win AA in the first normal state (2% of the small win win), or if you win the small win AD or AE in the first time saving state (55% of the small win win), , After the end of the jackpot game executed by letting the ball enter the specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game, the second time saving state is set. In this second time saving state, a time saving effect B mode is set in which time saving effect B is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

During the second time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the first second special symbol lottery is executed for the first time saving state described above, and the second special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end at the stop timing. In other words, since it is possible to shorten the time during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation in which the time-saving end condition is met, it becomes possible to obtain special pattern 2 reservation during that fluctuation period, and obtain special pattern 2 reservation. It is possible to easily end the time saving state in the state where the time saving state is completed. Therefore, the second time saving state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

Note that the details of the transition of the game state based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state are the same as those in the first time saving state described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Then, when the second time saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol fluctuation for which the time saving end condition is satisfied is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired, the above-mentioned first time saving state In the same way as at the end of the process, the process shifts to the first normal state.

On the other hand, in the case where the second special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition has been met is stopped and the special symbol 2 hold is obtained, the second special symbol lottery is performed with the normal state set as the gaming state. A transition is made to the second normal state in which the process is executed. In this second normal state, a last chance mode in which a last chance effect is executed is set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (1/1.25) as in the time saving state to win a small win. In this control example, the selection ratio of the small win type in the normal state is different from the selection ratio in the time saving state, with the ratio of small win AD set to 40% and the ratio of small win AE set to 40%. 15%, and the proportion where small hit AF is set is 45%. In other words, in about 55% of the cases where a small win is won, a small win game (advantageous small win game) that allows a ball to enter the V winning slot 1650 with a high probability is executed during the small win game, and approximately The difference is that at 45%, a small winning game (disadvantageous small winning game) in which almost no ball enters the V winning opening 1650 during the small winning game is executed, but a small winning game where a 9 round jackpot game is executed. It is configured so that the percentage of winning ADs being selected is high.

With this configuration, it is possible to create a gaming state where the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Become. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time saving state with the special map 2 reservation obtained, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time saving state and the second time saving state. can.

In addition, in this control example, the selection ratio of the small winning type in which the advantageous small winning game is executed is set to be the same (55%) in the second special symbol drawing in the normal state and the second special symbol drawing in the time saving state. However, the selection ratio is not limited to this, and the selection ratio may be different. For example, the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is more advantageous when winning a small win than the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state. It is preferable to configure the system so that the small winning type is easily selected. Specifically, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, the proportion of small win AD selected is 80%, and the proportion of small win AE selected is 20%. However, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, the advantageous small win game is more likely to be executed than when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state. Also good. As a result, it is possible to further increase the advantage of ending the time saving state with special drawing 2 pending, making it easier to increase the difference in the advantageous degree between the first time saving state and the second time saving state. be able to.

<About the electrical configuration of the 11th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 435 to 445. The pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example described above in that it has a partial configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a voice lamp. The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the control device 113 has been changed, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 435, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 435(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 435(a), the ROM 202 of this control example is different from the ROM 202 of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 333(a)), in place of the first random number 5 table 202ea. The random number 11 table 202pa is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee, the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202pe is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202ee, the small winning type selection 11 table 202pg is replaced with the small winning type selection 5 table 202eg, and the small winning scenario 5 table 202ei is replaced with the small winning scenario 5 table 202ei. The difference is that the win scenario 11 table pi is provided, the time saving grant table 202ph is newly added, and the first win type selection 5 table 202eb is deleted, but the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In this 11th control example, unlike the above-mentioned 6th control example, the structure is such that there is no jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, so the data table related to jackpot winning (first winning type selection 5 table 202ea) is deleted. However, when the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to be able to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery as in the sixth control example described above, the data table (first What is necessary is to add the winning type selection 5 table 202ea).

The first random number 11 table 202pa is created by deleting the specified value that is determined to be a big win from the first random number 5 table 202ea (see FIG. 334(a)) described above, and the specified value that is determined to be a small win. They differ in that they are different, and are otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 436, the contents defined in the first random number 11 table 202pa will be explained. FIG. 436(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 11 table 202pa. As shown in FIG. 436(a), the first random number 11 table 202pa is the special symbol 1 random number 11 table 202pa1, which is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol It has a special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202pa2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery (special symbol 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 436(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 11 table 202pa1 will be explained. FIG. 436(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 11 table 202pa1. As shown in FIG. 436(b), a "small win" is defined when the value of the first win random number counter C1 is "0 to 19". That is, in this eleventh control example, the probability of winning a small hit without winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 1/50.

Next, with reference to FIG. 436(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202pa2 will be explained. FIG. 436(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202pa2. As shown in FIG. 436(c), a "small win" is defined when the value of the first win random number counter C1 is "0 to 799". That is, in this eleventh control example, the probability of winning a small hit without winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 1/1.25.

In other words, in this sixth control example, it is configured such that only the presence or absence of a small hit is determined in the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing without a jackpot winning, and furthermore, the small winning probability is The special drawing number 2 lottery is structured so that the price is higher. As mentioned above, in this eleventh control example, since the configuration is such that a small winning win can become an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, the special drawing 2 lottery is a special feature that makes it easier to execute the jackpot game than the special drawing 1 drawing. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in this 11th control example, as mentioned above, it is configured so that the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery do not win the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery The jackpot probability may be set by lottery. In addition, in this control example, the type and number of determination values that are determined to be a small win are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, but the invention is not limited to this, and a small win can be won depending on the gaming state. It may be configured to set a high probability state where the probability is high (high probability state of special symbols) and a low probability state where the probability is low (low probability state of special symbols).

The fluctuation pattern 11 table 202pe is a data table that is referred to when selecting a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and contains the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the special symbol type, and the special symbol lottery ( It is configured so that various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery results of the special drawing lottery and the set gaming state. Note that the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 11 table 202pe is the same as the variation pattern 5 table 202ee (see FIG. 339) used in the fifth control example described above, so the characteristic of the variation pattern 11 table 202pe is Continue explaining with a focus on the content.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 11 table 202pe will be explained with reference to FIG. 439(a). FIG. 439(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 11 table 202pe. As shown in FIG. 439(a), the variation pattern 11 table 202pe is the normal variation pattern 11 table 202pe1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the normal variation pattern 11 table 202pe1 that is referenced when the gaming state is the time saving state. It has a time-saving variation pattern 11 table 202pe2, and the special symbol variation pattern is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the special symbol variation pattern.

The small winning type selection 11 table 202pg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery. This small win type selection 11 table 202pg is different from the small win type selection 5 table 202eg (see FIG. 337) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment in that the contents of the specified small win types are changed. , otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, the small winning type selection 11 table 202pg will be explained with reference to FIG. 437. FIG. 437(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 11 table 202pg. As shown in FIG. 437(a), the small winning type selection 11 table 202pg includes the special figure 1 small winning type selection 11 table 202pg1, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the first special symbol. , special figure 2 small winning type selection 11 table 202pg2, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the second special symbol, are set respectively.

FIG. 437(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small winning type selection 11 table 202pg1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, the three types of small hit AA, small hit AB, and small hit AC described above are set to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is either “0 or 1”, the small win type is “Small win AA (9R time saving 1 time jackpot when passing V)” becomes. That is, the value of "0, 1" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "2 to 54", the small win type is "small win AB (3R time saving one time jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "2 to 54" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is any one of "55 to 99", the small win type is "small win AC (2R no time saving jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "55 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, each small winning type is set with the type of a jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 1650 in the small winning game. In the case of small win AA, a 9R time-saving one-time jackpot is set, and after the small win A is executed, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 9R open state is executed, and then a 1-time time saving state is set. It is configured such that the time saving game (the period until the first second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of a small hit AB, a 3R time-saving one-time jackpot is set, and after execution of the small win AB, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 3R open state is executed, and then a time-saving state is performed. It is configured such that one time-saving game (period until the first second special symbol variation is started) is set. In addition, in the case of a small win AC, a 2R jackpot with no time saving is set, and after the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set. In this way, the small win AA is the most advantageous small win type for the player because it has the largest number of rounds executed in the jackpot game and is given a longer time-saving state.

In this control example, a plurality of ending conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and the above-mentioned one time saving state indicates the time saving state that is likely to be established. Details of each end condition will be described later using the time saving grant table 202ph (see FIG. 438).

FIG. 437(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning type selection 11 table 202bpg. As the small winning type of the second special symbol, the three types of small winning AD, small winning AE, and small winning AF mentioned above are selected depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the value of the small winning type counter C5. It is set. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state and the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is one of "0 to 24", the small winning type is "small winning". AD (When passing V, 9R time reduction 1 time jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 24" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "25 to 54", the small win type is "small win AE (3R time saving one time jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "25 to 54" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "55 to 99", the small win type is "small win AF (2R no time saving jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "55 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

In addition, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state and the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is one of "0 to 39", the small winning type is "small winning AD (V 9R time saving 1 time jackpot when passing)". That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "40 to 54", the small win type is "small win AE (3R time saving one time jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 54" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "55 to 99", the small win type is "small win AF (2R no time saving jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "55 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

In this way, the small win type for the second special symbol is a small win type in which a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set when a prize is won in the V winning hole 1650 than the small win type for the first special symbol. is selected at a high rate. As a result, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, and the probability of being judged as a small hit is also set higher than the first special symbol lottery. It is possible to easily execute a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set again by determining a win and placing a prize in the V winning hole 1650. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game while continuing the time-saving state, and it is possible to further increase the value of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, a small winning type in which a time-saving state is set that is more advantageous to the player is selected in the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state than in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. The ratio of With this configuration, even when the time saving state ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Further, the added value can be further increased when the time saving state is ended in a state where the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained.

The time saving granting table 202ph is a data table in which the end conditions of the time saving state to be set at the end of the jackpot game are defined in advance, and each end condition is defined corresponding to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the small win. This is what is being done. This time-saving granting table 202ph is a data table that is referred to when setting multiple time-saving termination conditions for ending the time-saving state, different for each jackpot type. ), and a different number of time saving times (time saving end conditions) is set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents defined in the time saving grant table 202ph will be explained with reference to FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving grant table 202ph. In this control example, there are jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AD) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and jackpot types (jackpot AC) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set). As shown in FIG. 438, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In this control example, a first time-saving end condition is established based on the total number of first special symbol fluctuations and a second special symbol fluctuation, and a second time-saving end condition is established based on the number of second special symbol fluctuations. , and an end timing specifying condition that specifies the timing to end the time saving state (timing for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied) can be set.

As shown in FIG. 438, the time saving granting table 202ph defines values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a plurality of time saving end conditions, and the value to be set as the first time saving end condition is the time saving middle counter. 203g, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea, and the content set as the end timing specific condition is set in the specific flag 203pa.

Specifically, it is specified that the time saving medium counter 203g (first time saving end condition) is set to "10" for all jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AD) for which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. has been done. This value of "10" is specified to be a larger value than the upper limit number of special drawing 1 reservations "4". Therefore, even if the time saving state is set with the upper limit number of special symbol 1 reservations stored, and all the special symbol 1 reservations are exhausted before the second special symbol variation is executed, the time reduction state will not be activated. It never ends. In addition, if the act of only executing the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated when the number of first special symbol fluctuations reaches 10 times, so it is normal. It is possible to prevent a game other than the above from being played continuously. In addition, in this control example, the same value is set as the first time saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different values may be set. It may also be configured to set.

Next, set the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea (second time saving end condition) to "1" for all jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AD) for which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. stipulated. Then, the specific flag 203pa (end timing specific condition) is set to ON only when the small winning is in the normal state and the jackpot type is jackpot AB, and is set to OFF otherwise. stipulated.

If the specific flag 203pa is set to ON, the timing to determine whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and if it is set to OFF, the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is met is the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation. It is configured such that the timing for determining whether or not it is established is the timing at which the special symbol fluctuation stops. In other words, only the time saving state set after jackpot AB is executed in the normal state is configured such that a disadvantageous time saving state is set in which the time saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special symbol variation.

In addition, in this control example, only the time-saving end conditions (first time-saving end condition, second time-saving end condition) that are satisfied based on the number of special symbol fluctuations are set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a time-saving termination condition that is established based on the number of small winnings can also be set. In this case, a counter may be provided to count the number of wins of each small winning type, and the counter value may be defined in the time saving grant table 203ph as the time saving end condition.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot AC, the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, so the jackpot AC of the time saving granting table 11 202ph is set for the various counters mentioned above. There is no specified value. In this way, by changing the end conditions of the time-saving state that is set after the end of the jackpot game for each type of jackpot won, even if it is announced in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, the specific Since the time saving content can be made difficult to grasp, the player can play the game with a heightened desire to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In addition, in this control example, the time saving state is configured to end when a jackpot game is executed in addition to the time saving end conditions set using the time saving grant 11 table 202ph. The time-saving ending conditions that are satisfied based on the start of the jackpot game are omitted from the time-saving granting 11 table 202ph because they do not differ depending on the jackpot type that is set. Regarding the time saving end condition), the configuration may also be such that values are defined in the time saving grant 11 table 202ph.

Further, in this control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition and second time saving ending condition is used as the plurality of time saving ending conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time saving ending conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition is established when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), or when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). You may also set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a small win is won and the number of times the V winning device 650 is activated reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

Furthermore, a time-saving termination condition may be set that is not based on the number of changes of the special symbol or the lottery result, but is established based on another factor. A time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the number of activations) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry hole (for example, general winning hole 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). The configuration may be such that a time-saving termination condition or the like that is satisfied is set in advance.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set for terminating the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the time-saving state is configured to end when any of the time-saving termination conditions is set. This makes it difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will last, so it is possible to prevent monotonous games from being played.

Furthermore, the time-saving termination condition may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. In this case, a fulfillment number determining means for determining the number of time-saving termination conditions that have been met; a condition attainment determining means for determining whether the number of satisfaction determined by the fulfillment number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two); It is preferable to provide a configuration in which the time saving state is ended (the normal state is set) when the condition reaching determination means determines that the number of conditions satisfied has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the first time-saving termination condition that is satisfied is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a criterion for determining whether the condition has been reached is varied based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means. A means for varying the number of discrimination criteria may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end, depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is initially met, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, there is also a predetermined period measuring means that measures a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 10 times), and the measurement results of the predetermined period measuring means. If the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, the time saving state is not terminated until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time saving termination condition is satisfied. A time-saving end delaying means may be provided to delay the time-saving end, or an end-condition invalidating means may be provided to invalidate the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time-saving end conditions are met, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition. ) may not be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set, and it is also possible to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, when using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fulfillment of multiple time saving ending conditions as described above, the multiple time saving ending conditions may be set to the priority time saving ending conditions (for example, if the number of changes in the special symbol is Set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 100) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 3), and then set a priority time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 3. It is preferable that the time-saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are met, and the time-saving state is terminated when only a plurality of non-priority time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. By providing the priority time-saving termination condition in this way, it is possible to prevent excessive time-saving conditions from being provided to the player.

Next, the contents of the normal variation pattern 11 table 202pe1 included in the variation pattern 11 table 202pe will be explained with reference to FIG. 439(b). FIG. 439(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 11 table 202pe1. As shown in FIG. 439(b), the variation pattern 11 table 202pe includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in this eleventh control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is played in which the special symbol 1 lottery is mainly executed, and the second special symbol ( The pattern in which the special drawing 2) lottery is executed is a pattern in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in accordance with the special drawing 2 pending (maximum 1 piece) stored on hold at the end of the time saving state.

The variation pattern 11 table 202pe shows that, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) variation executed during the normal state, a variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 2 lottery executed for the first time of special symbol variation is special. It is configured to have a fluctuating pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is a special symbol 2 variation, and if the lottery result of that special symbol 2 variation is "miss", the variation time is 30 seconds. The stipulated fluctuation pattern "missing A" is selected regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and in the case of a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern "small hit A" with a stipulated fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. ” is selected regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In addition, if the number of special symbol fluctuations after the normal state is set is the second or later, the fluctuation of 15 seconds will occur regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2 fluctuation and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. A variation pattern "short variation" with a specified time is selected.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a 30 second special fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed for the first time of special symbol fluctuation, so the time saving state (second time saving state) As a variable performance to show the result of the second special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 pending obtained during the time saving state) that is executed after the end of the 30-second special performance (last chance performance) can be easily executed.

In addition, in this control example, the maximum memory number (upper limit value) of special drawing 2 reservation is configured to be one, but this is not limited to this, and the upper limit value of special drawing 2 reservation is two or more. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the technical concept of the sixth control example described above (regardless of the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations or the lottery result, until the small winning game is executed or the 2) Applying the technical philosophy that defines the fluctuation pattern of each number of fluctuations so that the period until the special symbol fluctuation ends is a certain period, and when the state transitions to the normal state, the acquired special symbol 2 will be held The winning information included in the winning information may be determined in advance, and a dedicated performance (last chance performance) for 30 seconds may be executed in a performance mode according to the determination result (presence or absence of a small win).

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 11 table 222pe2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, will be explained. FIG. 439(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 11 table 222pe2.

In the eleventh control example, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which is likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player compared to the special drawing 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 425, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a easily shifts to the guiding state (projecting state) in which the ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640, so the first special symbol lottery The game board 13 is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, which triggers the execution of the special drawing 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state becomes the special figure 1 lottery executed based on the special figure 1 reservation already acquired at the end timing of the jackpot game where the time saving state is set.

Specifically, in a state where a small win is won while the normal state is set, and a time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the small winning winning (time saving initial setting state), the first Since no game is being played in which the ball easily enters the 2-ball entry hole 640, special pattern 2 reservation has not been obtained, and if there is special pattern 1 reservation at that time, special pattern 1 lottery is executed. will be done.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating time) of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the period until the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long period of fluctuation (for example, 60 seconds) is used. Once set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game cannot be smoothly played during the time saving state.

Further, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the first special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation), special symbol 2 reservation will be obtained. In this case, for example, in a state where the first time saving state is set as the time saving state, the timing at which the second special symbol fluctuation using the acquired special symbol 2 hold is executed is during the regular symbol game ( If the electric accessory 640a is in the guidance state), even if the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the second special symbol variation, the second ball entrance 640 Even though the first time saving state has been set, there is a possibility that the second special symbol lottery will be executed after the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. The problem is that it gets expensive.

Therefore, in this 11th control example, the ultra-short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state, and the electric accessory is Before 640a is changed to the induction state, it is configured such that all the special figure 1 variations corresponding to the already acquired special figure 1 reservation at the time of transition to the time saving state are completed. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation during the time saving state is 1 second, and the period from the start of the normal figure winning game during the time saving state until the electric accessory 640a shifts to the guiding state (opening period) is configured so that it is 1 second, and during that 1 second, the special figure 1 variation corresponding to the special figure 1 hold that is stored up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) is all completed. A variation pattern (variation time 0.2 seconds) is defined.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set during the normal pattern variation (when a game per normal pattern is executed immediately after transitioning to the time saving state), the normal pattern variation will not be executed. Even if the time-saving state is set in a state where the time-saving state is not set, the characteristics that have already been acquired at the time of transition to the time-saving state are It is possible to complete all the special symbol 1 fluctuations corresponding to the FIG. 1 reservation.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the timing at which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 is during the special chart 1 fluctuation, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. Based on this, the second special symbol lottery can be executed immediately. In this control example, as described above, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a is such that only one ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one game per normal figure, and the Since the game content (termination condition of the game per normal symbol) is stipulated, the second special symbol lottery is immediately executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a new special drawing 2 reservation.

Specifically, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and the lottery result is "lost", the fluctuation pattern "super" with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds is specified. "Short hit A" is selected regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and in the case of a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern "Win A" with a stipulated fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected as the acquired fluctuation type. It is selected regardless of the value of counter CS1. Here, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery that is executed during the time saving state, the variation pattern of 30 seconds ("Win A ”) is selected.

With this configuration, even if you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 drawing during the time saving state, the same effect as when you win a small winning in the special drawing 2 drawing can be performed, so the game It is possible to make the person think that he or she has won a small prize in the special drawing 2 lottery.

As described above, in this eleventh control example, the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are the time saving end conditions that are satisfied when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the first special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured such that a time-saving end condition is set which is satisfied when the total value of the number of times the lottery has been performed and the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed reaches 10 times. In other words, if you win a small hit during the special pattern 1 fluctuation corresponding to the special pattern 1 hold that you have already acquired at the time of transition to the time saving state, the time saving state will not end and the special pattern fluctuation will last for 30 seconds (special pattern 1 fluctuation). will be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to reliably obtain the special figure 2 reservation before the special figure 1 fluctuation ends, it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the jackpot game based on the small winning winning in the special figure 1 lottery. can do.

In other words, even if the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on a small win won in the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state (when the small win AC is set), Since the second special symbol lottery can be made easier to execute after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. .

In addition, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is stipulated as 1/50, which is the same in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and furthermore, if the first special symbol lottery is executed 10 times during the time-saving state. In this case, the time saving state is configured to end without executing the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of executing only the first special symbol lottery without executing the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 (second special symbol) and the lottery result is "lost", the fluctuation pattern "missing A" with a prescribed fluctuation time of 30 seconds is acquired. In the case of "Small hit AD, AE", the fluctuation pattern "Win A" with a specified fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained. is in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation pattern "Win B" with a prescribed fluctuation time of 20 seconds is selected when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 198". It is specified to be selected in certain cases. In addition, in the case of "Small hit AF", the fluctuation pattern "Win A" with a stipulated fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". The variation pattern "Win B" in which a variation time of 20 seconds is defined is specified to be selected when the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "100 to 198".

In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, the 30-second variation pattern is basically selected, and the variation performance (time-saving A performance or time-saving A production) corresponding to the 30-second variation pattern is basically selected. B) is configured to be executed. In addition, the configuration is such that a 20-second variation pattern is selected in some cases when a small win is won. As described above, the rate at which the 20 second variation pattern is selected is varied depending on the type of small win. Specifically, "Small win AF", which is a small win type where disadvantageous small win game is performed, takes 20 seconds longer than "Small win AD and AE", which is small win type where advantageous small win game is performed. The configuration is such that the variation pattern of is easily selected.

With this configuration, by executing a variable effect corresponding to the 20-second variation pattern, the player is notified that he or she has won a small hit, and which type of small win he or she has won. It is possible to perform a performance that stirs up people. In this control example, the 20 second fluctuation pattern is supported because the small win type in which the disadvantageous small win game is executed is more likely to select the 20 second fluctuation pattern than the small win type in which the advantageous small win game is executed. As the variable performance, a performance mode indicating that the time-saving end is imminent (for example, a performance mode in which the character 851 (see FIG. 430(a)) runs away from the enemy) is set (not shown).

Note that, unlike this control example, if the 20 second fluctuation pattern is made more difficult to select for the small winning type in which the disadvantageous small winning game is executed than in the small winning type in which the advantageous small winning game is executed, It is sufficient to set an effect mode that indicates that there is a high possibility that an advantageous small winning game will be executed.

The small win scenario 11 table 202pi is a data table that defines the operation scenario of each device during the small win game, and is referred to when the small win game is executed. The small win scenario 11 table 202pi in this control example differs from the small win scenario table 202ab in the A1 embodiment described above in that the type of solenoid that issues an operation instruction and the instruction timing are different. The update processing details and other stipulations for updating are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

FIG. 440(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the small win scenario 11 table 202pi. As shown in FIG. 440(a), win scenarios are defined corresponding to each small win type. Regarding the small winning types AA, AB, and AD, the winning scenarios referred to during the small winning game are the same, and only the contents of the jackpot scenario executed after the small winning game are different. On the other hand, small win AC, in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning hole 1650 during a small win game (difficult to obtain an opportunity to execute a jackpot game), has a winning scenario (win scenario d) that is different from other small win types. It stipulates that it be referenced.

First, with reference to FIG. 440(b), the contents of the winning scenario a referred to in the first half period of the small winning game corresponding to the small winning types AA, AB, and AD will be explained. FIG. 440(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the winning scenario a. Note that the contents of the counter value for updating the scenario are the same as the small hit scenario table 202ab in the A1 embodiment described above, so the explanation will be based on the elapsed time (S) here.

As shown in FIG. 440(b), when the small winning game starts, an opening period of 0.1 seconds, a round period of 1.2 seconds, and an interval period of 3.7 seconds are defined. At the start of the opening period, the storage solenoid is turned on to place the storage valve 660a in the storage state, and when four seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning game, the storage solenoid is turned off. In other words, the storage valve 660a continues to be in the storage state during the round period. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the V winning hole 1650 during the round period.

Then, as in the A1 embodiment described above, at the end of the winning first half period, it is determined whether a ball is stored in the storage valve 660a, and based on the determination result, it is referred to in the winning second half period. It is configured so that the types of winning scenarios are different. Here, the contents of the winning scenario b that is referred to when it is determined that a ball is stored (stayed) in the storage valve 660a will be explained with reference to FIG. 441(a).

FIG. 441(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the winning scenario b. Note that the contents of the counter value for updating the scenario are the same as the small hit scenario table 202ab in the A1 embodiment described above, so the explanation will be based on the elapsed time (S) here.

In the winning scenario b, a V validity period of 2 seconds is set, and the winning scenario is specified to end when 5 seconds have elapsed. As a result, the ball enters the V winning hole 1650 within 2 seconds after the storage valve 660a is released, thereby providing an opportunity to execute a jackpot game. In addition, during the 3-second grace period from the end of the V validity period to the end of the small winning game, there is a notification effect to notify you of the result of whether or not you have won the jackpot game by playing the small winning game. , is used during the period for executing the game guidance performance for executing the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the winning scenario c that is referred to when it is determined that the ball is not stored (stayed) in the storage valve 660a will be explained with reference to FIG. 441(b).

FIG. 441(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the winning scenario c. Note that the contents of the counter value for updating the scenario are the same as the small hit scenario table 202ab in the A1 embodiment described above, so the explanation will be based on the elapsed time (S) here.

The winning scenario c is formed with a shorter period (2 seconds) than the winning scenario b described above. In other words, if the ball is not stored (stayed) in the storage valve 660a, a jackpot game will not be executed due to the current small win game, so there is no need to set the V validity period, and This is because there is no need to perform a performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game has been obtained by a small win game. Thereby, the execution period of the small winning game can be shortened, and the next special symbol lottery result can be restarted quickly.

Next, the contents of the winning scenario d will be explained with reference to FIG. 442. This winning scenario d is a winning scenario for the small winning AC in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning hole 1650 during the small winning game (difficult to obtain an opportunity to execute the jackpot game), and is for the entire period during the small winning game. Scenarios corresponding to the above are defined. This win scenario d differs from the above-described win scenario a only in that the set period of the V validity period is different, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 442, in the winning scenario d, the V validity period is not set at the timing when the ball reaches the V winning hole 1650 (timing after the storage valve 660a is released), so the normal game cannot be played. As long as the game is executed, the jackpot game will not be executed. On the other hand, the contents of the opening operation of the V winning hole 1650 are the same as in the winning scenario a described above. Therefore, it is possible to visually make it difficult for the player to understand which type of small win type the small win game is being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 443(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 443(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example has a series effect flag 223eb, The difference is that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec has been deleted. The other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 435(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 435(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 435(b), in this eleventh control example, the specific flag 203pa and winning state storage area 223pb are stored in the RAM 203 (see FIG. 333(b)) in the sixth control example described above. They differ in the additions, but are otherwise the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific flag 203pa is a flag for indicating that the timing to end the time saving state is the start timing of the special symbol variation, and is used when setting a gaming state in which the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation. It is set to on (see C1281 in FIG. 449). Then, it is referenced when starting a special symbol variation or stopping a special symbol variation during a time saving state, and updates the time saving state (determining whether to end the time saving state) at a timing according to the setting situation. Processing is executed. Then, when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied (when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea or the value of the time saving medium counter 203g becomes 0), it is set to OFF.

By providing this specific flag 203pa, even if the same time-saving ending condition (for example, one special figure 2 variation) is set, the timing for determining whether or not the time-saving ending condition is satisfied can be made different. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be varied. In addition, in this control example, the process for ending the time saving state is executed immediately after it is determined that the time saving ending condition is satisfied, and the execution timing of the process for determining whether the time saving ending condition is satisfied is varied. Accordingly, the timing for ending the time saving state is configured to be different; however, the timing of execution of the process for determining whether the time saving ending condition is satisfied and the process for terminating the time saving state are not limited to this. The execution timing of and may be configured to be different.

The gaming state storage area 223pb at the time of winning is a storage area for temporarily storing the gaming state at the time when a small hit is won. (See C2301 in FIG. 446). Then, it is read out after the end of the jackpot game (see C1281 in FIG. 449), and the time saving end condition and the specific flag 203pa are set in accordance with the gaming state indicated by the read information (see C1282 in FIG. 449).

Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 443(a). FIG. 443(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 443(a), the ROM 222 in this control example selects a variable pattern in place of the variable pattern selection 5 table 222ea in the ROM 222 in the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 341(a)). The difference is that 11 tables 222pa are provided. Note that here, the differences from the above-described variable pattern selection 5 table 222ea will be mainly explained, and detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 11 table 222pa will be explained with reference to FIG. 444. FIG. 444(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variable pattern selection 11 table 222pa, and FIG. 444(b) is the time saving final variable pattern selection 11 table included in the variable pattern selection 11 table 222pa. 222pa3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in 222pa3.

As shown in FIG. 444(a), the variation pattern selection 11 table 222pa has three variation pattern selection tables associated with the gaming state and variation situation, and specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, A normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 that is referred to in a certain case, a time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 that is referenced when the time saving state is in the time saving state, and a time saving final variation pattern referenced when it is the final variation of the time saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 11 table 222pa3.

The normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 and the time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 are based on the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table explained in each control example or each embodiment described above. is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected, and its details are Further explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving final variation pattern selection 11 table 222pa3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time-saving state, that is, when selecting the performance mode of the variation effect for the special symbol variation when the time-saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. The data table is configured such that different fluctuation patterns (performance modes) are selected based on the symbol type of the fluctuation, the lottery result, and the timing at which the time saving state ends (start or stop). are doing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 444(b), when the symbol type of the time-saving final variation is special figure 1, that is, when the symbol type of the time-saving final variation is special figure 1, that is, the "special figure variation" which is one of the common time-saving termination conditions among the time-saving termination conditions. If the special symbol variation when the "number of times 10 times" is established is the special symbol 1 variation, the timing at which the time saving state ends will be "at the time of stop", and regardless of the lottery result of the variation, the "special symbol" variation will be selected as the variation pattern. 1 is selected.

Next, if the symbol type of the time-saving final variation is special drawing 2, the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the variation is "win", and the timing at which the time-saving state ends is "at the start", that is, the first 1 If the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the special figure 2 variation in the time saving state, "time saving final A" is selected as the variation pattern, and if the time saving state ends at "stop time", That is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the special figure 2 variation in the second time saving state, "time saving final C" is selected as the variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the symbol type of the time-saving final variation is special drawing 2, the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the variation is "lost", and the timing at which the time-saving state ends is "at the start", that is, the first If the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the special figure 2 variation in the time saving state, "time saving final B" is selected as the variation pattern, and if the timing at which the time saving state ends is "at stop", i.e. When the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the special figure 2 variation in the second time saving state, "time saving final D" is selected as the variation pattern.

<About the control process of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 to 450. In this 11th control example, with respect to the above-mentioned 6th control example, instead of special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 344), special symbol variation processing 11 (see FIG. 445) is performed, special symbol variation start processing 5 ( Instead of the special symbol fluctuation start processing 11 (see Fig. 446), the time saving update processing 11 (see Fig. 448) is replaced with the time saving update processing (see Fig. 346), and the jackpot control processing 5 (see Fig. The difference is that instead of the small win control process 11 (see FIG. 449) and the small win control process 5 (see FIG. 358), the small win control process 11 (see FIG. 450) is executed. Other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this fifth control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to the fifth control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the eleventh control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 445, the special symbol variation process 11 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 11 (C104). This special symbol variation process 11 (C104) is different from the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344), and includes the contents of the control process to be executed when starting the special symbol variation, and the stop display of the special symbol variation. The difference is that the content of the control processing executed in this case has been partially changed, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 11 (C104) is executed, first, the same processes C201 to C212 as the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) are executed. When the process of C207 or C212 is finished, next, special symbol variation start process 11 is executed (C2213), and this process ends. The contents of the special symbol variation start process 11 (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 446.

In addition, in the process of C202, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the same process of C214 and C215 as the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) is executed, and then the time saving Update processing 11 is executed (C2221). When the process of C2221 is finished, the processes of C222, C223, and C225 which are the same as the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) are executed, and this process ends. The contents of the time saving update process 11 (C2221) will be described later with reference to FIG. 448.

Next, special symbol variation start processing 11 (C2213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 446. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 11 (C2213). This special symbol variation start process 11 (C2213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 11 (see FIG. 445), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of This is a process to determine the fluctuation pattern to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process 11 (C2213), first, the first symbol stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) Each value of the winning random number counter C1, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is obtained (C232).

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set to the special symbol 1 random number 11 table 202pa1 (Fig. 436 (b))). As mentioned above, 20 random numbers from "0 to 19" are set as the small winnings of the first special symbol, and the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these small winnings are set. When the random numbers match, it is determined that it is a small hit with a special symbol. Similarly, when the special symbol fluctuation executed in this process is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is set to the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202pa2 (FIG. 436(c) )). As mentioned above, 800 random numbers from "0 to 799" are set as the random numbers for small wins for the second special symbol, and the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 and these small wins are set. When the random numbers match, it is determined that it is a small hit with a special symbol.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different numbers of determination values for determining a small hit, but may be the same number. Further, in this control example, a determination value that is determined to be a jackpot is not defined, but similarly to the sixth control example described above, a determination value that is determined to be a jackpot may be defined.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different numbers of determination values for determining a small hit. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied depending on the type of special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make the player play the game.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained by the process of C232 is a small win (C237), and if it is determined that it is a small win (C237: Yes), the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 345) is performed. (see C213), executes the same processes as C238 to C240, then stores information indicating the current gaming state in the winning gaming state storage area 203pa (C2301), and issues a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined this time. is set (C243), the start time saving update process is executed (C2302), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C237, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (C237: No), the processes of C241 and C242, which are the same as the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process (see C213 in FIG. 345), are executed, and then , the process moves to C243. After executing the above-described processes C243 and C2302, this process ends.

The start time time saving update process (C2302) executed in the process of C2302 updates the time saving state (updates the values of various counters indicating the time saving state) when the time saving state is updated at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation. ) is executed.

Next, the contents of the start time saving update process (C2302) will be explained with reference to FIG. 447. FIG. 447 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start time saving update process (C2302). In this start time saving update process (C2302), when the first time saving state is set, that is, when the specific flag 203pa is set to on, processing for updating the time saving state is executed. When the second time saving state is set, that is, when the specific flag 203pa is not set to ON, the start time saving update process (C2302) is skipped. Thereby, the time saving state can be updated at the start timing of the special symbol variation only when the time saving state is a specific time saving state.

When the start time saving update process (C2302) is started, it is first determined whether the specific flag 203pa is set to on (C2351), and it is determined whether the specific flag 203pa is not set to on, that is, the current state is normal, or If it is determined that the second time saving state is in effect (C2351: No), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, the specific flag 203pa is set to on. That is, when it is determined that the first time saving state is in progress, it is determined whether the current special symbol variation is the second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) (C2352), and it is determined that it is the special symbol 2 variation. If so (C2352: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is subtracted by 1 (C2353), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea after the subtraction is 0 (C2354).

In the process of C2354, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is not 0, that is, the time saving end condition is not satisfied due to the current special figure 2 variation (C2354: No), the process of C2355 is executed. Move to. In addition, in the process of C2352, if it is determined that the special symbol variation to be executed this time is not the special symbol 2 variation, that is, it is the first special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation) (C2352: No), C2353, The process of C2354 is skipped and the process moves to C2355.

In the process of C2355, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time-saving counter 203g is executed, and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (C2356), and it is determined that it is not 0. If (C2356: No), the time-saving termination condition is not satisfied, so the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is 0 in the process of C2354 (C2354: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 in the process of C2356. (C2356: Yes) means that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the current start time saving update process, so the process moves to process C2357 which is a process for ending the time saving state.

In the process of C2357, the values of various counters indicating the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea, time saving medium counter 203g) are all reset to 0 (C2357), the specific flag 203pa is set to OFF (C2358), and the game The state is set to the normal state (C2359), a state command indicating the normal state at the start indicating that the time saving state has ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation is set (C2360), and this processing is ended.

Next, time saving update processing 11 (C2221) will be explained with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process 11 (C2221). This time-saving update process 11 (C2221) is performed when the specific flag 203pa is set to ON in contrast to the time-saving update process of the sixth control example described above (see C221 in FIG. 346), that is, when the special symbol fluctuation starts. The difference is that when updating the time saving state at the timing, a process for skipping the time saving state update executed by the time saving update process 11 (process 2221 of C237) is added, and the other processing contents are the same. be. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the time-saving update process 11 (C2221), it is determined whether the specific flag 203pa is set to on (C2251), and if it is determined that the specific flag 203pa is set to on (C2251: Yes), this process continues. end. Thereby, in a state where the first time saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being updated at both the special symbol fluctuation start timing and stop timing. On the other hand, in the process of C2251, if it is determined that the specific flag 203pa is not set to on (C2251: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251 ). The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols. If the value of the short time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state with normal symbols. In addition, in this eleventh control example, it is configured such that two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two game states can be set: normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). It is composed of That is, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, a time saving state is sometimes used as a term indicating a high probability state of normal symbols, and a normal state is sometimes used as a term indicating a low probability state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C251: No), the process ends as it is because the time saving state has not been set. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (C252), and the next Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C253). If the current special figure change is a change in special figure 2 (C253: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of special figure 2 change count counter 203ea (C254), and set the remaining time short number command that indicates the values of various counters. (C255), and the process moves to C256.

In the process of C255, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter 203g and the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is set. The remaining time shortening number command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113 as part of the status command indicating the gaming status by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357). Ru. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined in command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) that a status command (remaining time shortening number of times command) has been received (C3212 in FIG. 360), the command included in the received command The information is extracted and the current gaming state (remaining time shortening number) is stored in the state storage area 223ea. Thereby, it is possible to predict (determine) the remaining period of the time-saving state currently set by the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to set an effect mode according to the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In this control example, each time the time saving update process 11 (see C2221 in FIG. 448) is executed, the main controller 110 is configured to output a remaining time saving number command to indicate the remaining time saving number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a time-saving end condition command to indicate the time-saving end condition set at the time when the time-saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The time saving end condition is extracted from the time saving end condition command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and then a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure fluctuation is output from the main control device 110 side. It may be configured such that the number of times is accumulated and it is determined based on the accumulated value whether or not the time saving termination condition is satisfied. With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if it is determined that the current special figure variation is not a variation of the special figure 2 (C253: No), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 or not (C256). If the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (C256: Yes), this means that the time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions) are satisfied, so it is determined whether the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea for this purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process moves to C2252.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is 0 or not (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is 0 (C258: Yes), it means that the time-saving end condition (corresponding time-saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the common time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the time-saving counter 203g for determining the time is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process moves to C2252. On the other hand, in the process of C258, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is not 0 (C258: No), this process is ended as is.

In the process of C2252, the specific flag 203pa is set to OFF (C2252), then the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this processing is executed. finish.

As explained above, the time saving update process 11 (C2221 in FIG. 448) is configured to be able to determine the fulfillment status of a plurality of time saving ending conditions that can be satisfied based on the number of changes in the special symbol among the time saving ending conditions. , when any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the values of parameters for establishing other time-saving termination conditions are also reset. This makes it possible to unify the state after the time saving state ends, regardless of which parameter value the time saving end condition is established based on.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, as the time-saving end condition, a common time-saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time-saving state set based on which jackpot type (a first end condition that is satisfied when winning the jackpot, A second ending condition that is met when the number of changes in the special symbol (cumulative total of special symbols 1 and 2) reaches 10 times, and a third end condition that is met when the number of variations in the second special symbol reaches 1 time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as explained in the sixth control example above, there is a corresponding time-saving ending condition in which different time-saving ending conditions are set corresponding to the type of jackpot. (For example, conditions that are established when the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times may be set differently depending on the jackpot type (small win type)) may be provided.

Furthermore, as explained in the sixth control example above, a time-saving termination condition may be set that is satisfied based on something other than the number of special symbol changes, for example, when the number of small winnings reaches a predetermined number, , a small win termination condition may be set that is satisfied when the number of times a specific small win type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times. In this case, the small hit termination condition may be set as a common time-saving termination condition, or may be set as a corresponding time-saving termination condition. In addition, an end lottery means is provided to determine whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is a lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends, so it is possible to make the player play the game in the time saving state while giving the player a feeling of excitement. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a special symbol lottery result indicates a specific failure) is satisfied during the time-saving state, various parameters related to the time-saving end condition are set for a predetermined period of time. It may be configured so that it is not updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has passed after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30). It may be configured such that various parameters related to time-saving termination conditions are not updated. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably set a period during which the time-saving state continues, allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, a determining means is provided that can determine that the ball did not enter the specific area (V winning hole 650a) even though a small winning game was executed, and the determining means allows the ball to enter the V winning hole 650a. It may be configured such that a time-saving forced termination condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the player has not won a prize is set as a common time-saving termination condition. With this configuration, the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won is determined, and the determination result is a small winning type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball is placed in a specific area within the V winning hole 650a). If it is determined that the game is a jackpot game that would be disadvantageous to the player if it passes (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds, or a jackpot game where a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not firing a ball during a small winning game and aiming to win the next small winning.

In this case, for example, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, if a small win game (small win AC, etc.) that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the specific area (V winning hole 650a) is executed. There is a high probability that the time-saving state ends after the small winning game ends, but if the first special symbol lottery is a loss, it is possible to continue the time-saving state. In other words, depending on the set time-saving termination conditions, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player is more advantageous when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a miss than when the result is a small hit. can.

As explained above, the time saving update process 11 (C2221 in FIG. 448) is configured to be able to determine the fulfillment status of a plurality of time saving ending conditions that can be satisfied based on the number of changes in the special symbol among the time saving ending conditions. , when any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the values of parameters for establishing other time-saving termination conditions are also reset. This makes it possible to unify the state after the time saving state ends, regardless of which parameter value the time saving end condition is established based on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, the jackpot control process 11 (C1084) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 11 (C1084). This jackpot control process 11 (C1084) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and the variable winning device This is a process for opening or closing 65 specific winning openings 65a. In addition, in the jackpot control process 11 (C1084) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example, the same control process as the jackpot control process 5 (see C1004 in FIG. 358) in the sixth control example described above is executed. There are places where it is done. Therefore, detailed explanations of the contents explained in jackpot control processing 5 (see C1004 in FIG. 358), modified examples, and additional examples will be omitted, but the explanations in each control example or each embodiment described above will be omitted. Of course, this also applies to the content of the above.

In the jackpot control process 11 (C1084), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201: Yes), an opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot flag 203i is set on, and the jackpot start flag 203h is set off (C1203). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (C1204).

In the process of C1204, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is off (C1204: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is the start of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning a prize opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is in an open state), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is ended.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this eleventh control example, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during the plural jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that the jackpot has been won), it is determined whether the continuous condition is satisfied, and If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode that shows the updated results.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that successive jackpot games are one jackpot game, so it is possible to make the player think that consecutive jackpot games are one jackpot game. It is possible to show the maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation for the size of the benefit (number of prize balls) provided by one jackpot game.

In this control example, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied, and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the process for displaying the number may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side, for example, as a continuous condition for displaying the cumulative round number, it may be executed after the end of the jackpot game. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when a jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure variations (for example, 5 special figure 2 variations), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main controller 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if a continuous condition is met when a jackpot game is executed, the value of the cumulative round number counter will be set to the cumulative number of rounds of the previous jackpot game. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. The cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player simply by

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games. If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen is displayed continuously (the period until 10 seconds have passed after the jackpot game ends) For example, conditions that hold true (when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 lottery), or a jackpot game is executed during a period in which a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may also be configured to set a condition that is satisfied when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (cumulative round number) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (single round number) are displayed. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing conditions for the specific winning opening are satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state). ) (C1209), and then ends this process. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period). (C1210). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period) (C1210: Yes), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

Note that if it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and the system is configured so that it will not be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the ending effect (the start timing of the ending period) (C1210: No), the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the ending period). It is determined whether or not (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending performance (end timing of the ending period) (C1212: Yes), the game state stored in the winning game state storage area 223a is read out (C1281), and the process of C1281 is performed. Based on the gaming state read out and the jackpot type, the time saving granting table 202ph is referred to, and the corresponding time saving end conditions are set in the time saving medium counter 203g and the special symbol 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea, and the specific flag 203pa is set. (C1282).

Then, a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is set (C1214), an end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the small hit control process 11 (C1085) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process 11 (C1085). This small hit control process 11 (C1085) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and is used to set commands to cause the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small win, and to set the V winning prize. This process controls the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the opening 650a and the storage solenoid 209c that variably operates the storage valve 660a (see FIG. 426).

In the small winning control process 11 (C1085), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small win scenario set in the process of C291 of the small win start setting process 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) indicates the start of a small win game. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (C1302), the small winning medium flag 203k is set on (C1303), and the small winning operation is performed. The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning medium flag 203k is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small winning flag 203k is off (C1305: No), this means that the current small winning game is not in progress, and thus the process ends. If it is determined in the process of C1305 that the small winning flag 203k is on (C1305: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: Yes), the small winning medium flag 203k is set to OFF (C1307), and the V flag 203n is set to ON. (C1309), and then if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set on (C1309: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to 0 (C1381). As described above, in this eleventh control example, the time saving medium counter 203g is set only when the ball passes through the specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game, that is, only when the jackpot game is executed. The configuration is such that the value is reset to "0". In other words, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V winning hole 1650) during the small winning game, the time saving state can continue. Thereby, during the time saving state, it is possible to allow the player to execute a game aiming at a big winning game based on a small winning game multiple times.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is off (C1309: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (C1309: Yes), then the process of C1381 described above is executed, and then the jackpot start corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310 ), sets the V flag 203n to OFF (C1311), and then ends this process.

In addition, in the small win control process 11 described above with reference to FIG. The timing to open or close the mouth 1650 and the timing to vary the storage valve 660a are defined, and there is a process to determine whether the timing has arrived, and a small win when it is determined that each timing has arrived. It is configured so that operation instructions to each driving means (solenoid, etc.) are executed according to the contents specified in the scenario.

In addition, in this control example, all small winning games are set as 1 round games, so unlike the jackpot scenario in which operation control of the jackpot game is executed, processing for setting commands related to the number of rounds, and interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the jackpot scenario used in the above-mentioned jackpot game may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the small winning scenario is configured to be set during the period in which the small winning game is executed, but for example, after the small winning game ends, the small winning scenario is set until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A small win scenario may be set for the period between. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passing valid period until one second has passed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that spans different gaming states using one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning hole 650a in a small winning game, a jackpot game corresponding to a preset jackpot type corresponding to the small winning is executed. Although configured, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning hole 650a.

In addition, in this control example, even if a game ball is detected by the V winning hole 650a in a small winning game, predetermined small winning game ending conditions (elapse of a predetermined time, specific to the V winning hole 1650) Although the configuration is such that the small winning game continues until the number of balls entered) is satisfied, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that when it is detected that a ball has entered the ball, that is, when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied, the small win game is ended and the jackpot game is immediately started. This makes it possible to shorten the period from the start of the small winning game to the start of the big winning game, making it possible to provide efficient games.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 451 to 453. In this eleventh control example, in the sixth control example described above, instead of winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361), winning information command processing 11 (see FIG. The difference is that the variable effect setting process 11 (see FIG. 452) is executed instead of (see FIG. 452), but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this eleventh control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applicable to the eleventh control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the eleventh control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 451, winning information command processing 5 (C3202) will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 11 (C13202). This winning information command processing 11 (C13202) is executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A process to be executed for storing information included in the received winning information command in a corresponding area (retention storage area corresponding to the winning information command) of the winning information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 Execute.

The information included in the winning information command includes information regarding the judgment result, information regarding the stop type, information regarding the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) to which this winning information corresponds. Although this information targets the winning balls, other information may be included, for example, winning information regarding balls that have already won prizes (for which winning information commands have been received in the past) may be included.

When the winning information command processing 11 (C13202) is executed, first, the information (preread information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3401), and then the time saving information provided in the RAM 223 is stored. It is determined whether the final change flag 223ed is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process moves to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3404 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is on (C3404: Yes), check whether the winning information received this time is the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2). If it is determined that it is not special drawing 2 winning information (C13401: No), the process moves to C3406. If it is determined that it is special drawing 2 winning information (C13401: Yes), it means that a new special drawing 2 reservation was acquired during the time saving final change, so the stock completion performance of the presentation mode corresponding to the received winning information is performed. is determined (C13402), the time saving final flag 223ed is set to OFF (C13403), and the process moves to C3406.

In the process of C3406, other production modes related to winning information are set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set production mode is set (C3407), and then this process is ended.

Next, the contents of the variable effect setting process 11 (C14004) will be explained with reference to FIG. 452. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 11 (C14004). This variable effect setting process 11 (C14004) is executed in place of the above-described variable effect setting process (see C4004 in FIG. 370), and is a variable display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. 5 (see FIG. 369), a process for setting the variation presentation mode of the special symbol is executed.

In the variable performance setting process 11 (C14004), first, information indicating the gaming state stored in the state storage area 223ea is read (C4102), and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (a time-saving state) (C4103: No), a time-saving effect setting process 11 is executed (C14104), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C4111), and it is determined that the current gaming state is a winning fluctuation. If so, execute the winning variation effect setting process (C4112) and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of C4111, if it is determined that there is no winning variation (C4111: No), this process is directly ended.

It should be noted that among the above-mentioned processes, the processes having the same content as the variable effect setting process (see C4004 in FIG. 370) are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453, the contents of the time-saving effect setting process 11 (C14104) executed in the variable effect setting process 11 (see C14004 in FIG. 452) will be explained. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving performance setting process 11 (C14104). In this time-saving performance setting process 11 (C14104), a process for determining the performance mode of the fluctuation performance in the final variation in the time-saving state is executed.

When the time-saving effect setting process 11 (C14104) is executed, it is first determined whether the current change is the final time-saving change (C14301), and if it is determined that it is the final change (C14301: Yes), the time-saving effect is determined. The final variation flag 223ed is set to ON (C4303), and then the production mode is set with reference to the time-saving final variation pattern selection 11 table 222pa3 (C14302), and this processing is ended. Further, in the process of C14301, if it is determined that it is not the time saving final variation (C14301: No), this process is directly ended.

<Modification of the eleventh control example>
Next, a modification of the eleventh control example will be explained. This modified example combines the technical idea of the above-mentioned eleventh control example, that is, the technical idea of changing the timing of ending the time-saving state, with the technical idea of the sixth control example, that is, when winning a small hit as a time-saving end condition. This is an addition of time-saving termination conditions that are satisfied. In other words, in this modification, multiple time-saving termination conditions (a time-saving termination condition that is established based on the number of special symbol changes and a time-saving termination condition that is established based on a small hit win) are satisfied with one special symbol change. The timing at which the time saving state ends in the special symbol variation is varied depending on the established time saving end condition. In other words, the timing at which the time-saving state ends is made different depending on the combination of the gaming state (gaming state at the time of winning) at the time of winning a small hit (starting the jackpot game) and the established time-saving ending condition (achieved short-term ending condition). It consists of

With this configuration, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of time-saving ending conditions that can be established simultaneously (that can be established in one special symbol lottery (variation)), the game can be played according to the established time-saving ending conditions. Since the degree of advantage of the benefits granted to players can be varied, it is fun for players to predict which time-saving ending conditions will be met, and the time-saving ending conditions will be satisfied in which the most advantageous benefits will be granted. It is possible to make the player play the game while making the player look forward to it.

Here, the settings of the time-saving termination conditions in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving provision 11 table 223qh in which the time saving end conditions in this modification are defined.

In this modification, a time saving end condition that is established based on a small winning win is added to the time saving granting table 223ph of the eleventh control example described above, and a time saving that is set after the jackpot game of jackpot AB ends. The difference is that the content of the termination condition has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted. Further, the content of the control process for ending the time saving state when the time saving ending condition is satisfied based on the small winning win is the same as the sixth control example described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 454, the time-saving grant 11 table 223qh defines the time-saving end conditions that are met when a small win is won as the time-saving grant content, and the time-saving state ends after the jackpot game ends based on the small win winning in the normal state. When set, a value of "10 times", which is the same as the value of the time saving counter 203g, is defined. In other words, when transitioning from the normal state to the time saving state, the time saving state is configured so that it cannot end based on a small winning win.

Then, when the time saving state is looped (if the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game based on a small winning win during the time saving state), the time saving state can end based on the small winning winning. The number of times is specified. Specifically, the number of times is defined as "twice" for "jackpot AA, jackpot AD" and "once" for "jackpot AB".

In other words, after the jackpot game of "Jackpot AA, Jackpot AD" is executed based on the small win win during the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again, if the number of small wins reaches 2 times. In the case where the time saving state is set so that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends, and after the jackpot game of "Jackpot AB" is executed based on the small win winning during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again. In this case, when the number of small wins reaches one, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends.

Furthermore, in this modification, after the jackpot game of "Jackpot AA, Jackpot AD" is executed based on the small winning in the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again, the special figure 2 variation number After "1" is set in the counter 203ea and the jackpot game of "Jackpot AB" is executed based on the small win during the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again, the special figure 2 variation number The configuration is such that "2" is set in the counter 203ea.

Therefore, after the jackpot game of "Jackpot AA, Jackpot AD" is executed based on the small win during the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again, if the special figure 2 variation is executed once. The time saving state ends when the fluctuation stops, or when the small winning game based on the second small winning win ends.

On the other hand, if the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game of "Jackpot AB" is executed based on the small winning during the time saving state, the special symbol change corresponding to the first small winning will be changed. The time saving state ends when the fluctuation starts or when the second special symbol fluctuation stops.

By configuring in this way, when a time saving state is set, it is possible to provide a case in which it is more advantageous for the player to win a small hit, and a case in which it is more advantageous to the player to win a small win.

As explained above, in this modified example, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the first gaming state (for example, normal state), the first time saving end condition (time saving that is satisfied by winning a specified number of small wins) It is more advantageous for the player if the second time-saving end condition (time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol changes a specified number of times) is satisfied, and the game state at the time of winning is changed to the second game state (for example, If the game is in a time-saving state), it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player if the second time-saving end condition is satisfied than if the first time-saving end condition is satisfied.

In other words, even if the same time-saving ending condition, ie, the time-saving state, is set, the time-saving ending condition, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of time-saving ending conditions with different degrees of advantage, the advantages and disadvantages of each time-saving ending condition are not absolutely determined, so it does not matter which time-saving ending condition is satisfied. However, the player can be made to expect that advantageous benefits will be given to the player.

In this case, the first effect is executed to notify the player of information indicating the content of either the gaming state at the time of winning or the established time-saving termination condition in an easy-to-understand manner, and information indicating the content of the other is executed. , it is preferable to perform a second performance that is more difficult to understand for the player than the first performance. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the degree of advantage of the currently awarded award based on the first performance and the second performance.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, a twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 455 to 460. This twelfth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above in that the content of the special symbol variation pattern is different, and the variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 They are different in that the contents of the display effects (presentation modes) are different.

In the above-mentioned eleventh control example, in the final time saving variation of the special symbol, there are two cases: ending the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and ending the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. It was composed of In this case, it was possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends, but for example, the timing at which the time saving state ends may be different depending on the established time saving end condition. In this case, when the time saving end condition 1 is satisfied, the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the other time saving end conditions are satisfied, the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation (stop If the time saving state is configured to end at the timing), the time saving state will be terminated based on the variation performance executed in response to the special symbol variation and the status of the regular symbol lottery (whether or not there is a game per regular symbol). There has been a problem in that the player is unable to determine whether the time-saving termination condition has been met.

On the other hand, in this twelfth control example, as a special symbol variation, the total period of the variation time of the special symbol variation and the time during which the special symbol is continuously stopped and displayed (determined period) is the same. Special symbol fluctuations having different lengths of fluctuation time are provided, and the same fluctuation performance is executed for a total period (or a specific period shorter than the total period).

More specifically, for a total period of 30 seconds, the fluctuating performance period is 28 seconds, the fixed display period is 2 seconds, and as a special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds. The special symbol variation is configured to be executed, including at least a very short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds and a confirmation period of 2 seconds, and a normal variation with a variation time of 28 seconds and a confirmation period of 2 seconds. Then, when a time saving end condition (number end condition) that is satisfied when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times is satisfied, the time saving state is configured to end at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation, When a time-saving end condition (small-hit end condition) that is satisfied when the number of small winning wins reaches a predetermined number of times is satisfied, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of special symbol variation.

By configuring in this way, when a variation effect is executed for a total period of 30 seconds in a special symbol variation where the number end condition is met, if a super short variation is executed, the variation effect will not be started. If the time saving state ends 0.2 seconds after the change and the normal variation is executed, the time saving state ends 28 seconds after the start of the variation effect. In other words, even if the same time saving end condition is met, it is possible to provide cases where the time saving state ends immediately after the start of the variable performance and cases where the time saving state ends just before the end of the variable performance. .

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the current time saving end condition is, based on the progress of the variable performance and the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, when a super-short fluctuation is executed, the time-saving state ends at the same timing as when the time-saving end condition is satisfied due to a small winning win, that is, the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation performance, so the fluctuation performance starts. A player who immediately realizes that the time-saving state has ended can be made to play a game while expecting a small win.

Furthermore, similar to the eleventh control example described above, in the present twelfth control example, it is better to end the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation than at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, or at the timing immediately after the start. Since it is easier to end the time saving state while the special drawing 2 reservation is acquired than when the time saving state ends, it is easier to end the time saving state when the number end condition is met than when the ultra short variation is executed. Also, when the normal variation is executed, it becomes an advantageous variation that makes it easier to end the time saving state while the special drawing 2 reservation is acquired. That is, the degree of advantage of the player at the end of the time saving state can be varied depending on the variation pattern (length of variation time) of the special symbol variation executed when the number of times end condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (small win variation) that is executed when a small hit is won. . In order to suggest to the player whether or not he or she has won the small hit, we target the ultra-short fluctuation when the number end condition is met and the special symbol fluctuation when the small win end condition is met. The winning suggestion performance is configured to be executable as a variable performance. In other words, when the time saving state ends immediately after the start of the variable performance, the small hit suggestion performance is commonly executed. On the other hand, if the normal variation is executed when the number of end conditions are met, there will be an end effect indicating that the time-saving state will end, and an acquisition effect that will encourage you to save up to the upper limit of special drawing 2 reservations within the variable effect period. The present invention is configured to execute a time-saving end effect that includes at least , and as a variable effect.

With this configuration, in some cases when the number end condition is met, it is possible to perform a performance that makes the player think that the small win end condition has been met (small win suggestion performance). , it is possible to match the progress of the performance when the small win suggestion performance is executed with the end timing of the time saving state, so when the small win suggestion performance is executed, the number end condition is set for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the small win termination condition has been established or whether the small winning termination condition has been established.

In addition, in this 13th control example, the end timing of the time saving state when the number end condition is satisfied as the time saving end condition is unified with the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation, so the control when the number end condition is satisfied Processing can be simplified. Note that without being limited to the content of this control example, for example, the timing at which the time saving state ends may be varied depending on the fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation when the number end condition is satisfied, and the number end condition is satisfied. When the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed in the case of a special symbol variation is a specific pattern, the time saving state may be ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and a small hit suggestion performance may be executed. Even in the case of this configuration, the time saving state can be ended in the same flow when the number end condition is satisfied as the time saving end condition and when the small winning end condition is satisfied.

<About the production content in the 12th control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 455 to 457, description will be given of the performance content executed in the short time final variation as a characteristic performance content among the various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example. do. In this control example, the 30-second variation effect is executed regardless of the lottery result of the time saving final variation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 445(a), a balloon 891a with the word "chance" attached indicates that the current lottery result is a small win, and a balloon 891a indicates that the current lottery result is a loss. A balloon 891b with the word "END" attached to it is displayed, and the effect of notifying the player of the current lottery result by leaving any one balloon as a result of the effect (small win suggestion effect); As shown in 457(b), a production that notifies you that the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a loss and encourages you to obtain special symbol 2 pending before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (time-saving end production) ) and are configured to be executable.

The above-mentioned small hit suggestion effect is a part of the case where a small hit is won in the time saving final variation, or a part of the case where a loss winning is made in the time saving final variation (an ultra short variation (0.2 seconds) is set as the losing variation pattern). This is the performance that is performed in the following cases.

FIG. 455(a) is a schematic diagram showing the start screen of the small hit suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 455(a), the main display area Dm displays a balloon 891a with the word "chance" attached to it, indicating that the current lottery result is a small win, and a balloon 891a that indicates that the current lottery result is a loss. A balloon 891b with the word "END" attached thereto is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, a message "Which balloon will remain?" is displayed as a guide display to indicate the content of the small hit suggestion performance. ' will be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the lottery result will be announced using the remaining balloons.

In addition, since FIG. 455(a) is the display screen immediately after the small hit suggestion effect has started, the small display area Dm2 has a display mode (in the figure, a downward arrow) indicating that the special figure 2 is changing. ) is displayed.

If the small hit suggestion effect being executed this time is a pattern that corresponds to a miss variation, the special symbol variation will stop 0.2 seconds after the start of the small hit suggestion effect and move to a 29.8 second confirmation period. , the display screen shown in FIG. 455(b) is displayed. FIG. 455(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display contents displayed in the small hit suggestion performance during the confirmation period of the loss fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 455(b), the effect is executed in an effect mode in which the balloons 891a and 891b move in the vertical direction, and the characters "Doki Doki" to encourage the effect are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this small hit suggestion production, in the case of a winning variation, the period immediately shifts to the confirmation period, and in the case of a small winning variation, the special symbol variation period passes, so the third part that is displayed in response to the special symbol variation. The display mode of the symbols has been changed, and instead of the small display area Dm1, the display mode is more difficult for the player to identify than the normal display mode of the third symbol (see the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in FIG. 455(a)). The third symbol is displayed using the small display area Dm2z instead of the small display area Dm1z and the small display area Dm2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discern the fluctuation status of the special symbols during the small hit suggestion presentation.

On the other hand, if the currently executed small win suggestion performance is a pattern corresponding to small win fluctuations, the display screen shown in FIG. 456(a) is displayed. FIG. 456(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the small win suggestion performance during the fluctuation period of the small win fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 456(a), an effect is executed in which the balloons 891a and 891b move vertically, and an arrow 892 comes flying as a display mode to burst the balloons. executed. In addition, the words "may be a chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to encourage the performance.

In FIG. 456(a), the small display area Dm2z is displayed blinking in a manner indicating that the special figure 2 is currently changing. In this way, by displaying the third symbol in a display mode that is difficult for the player to identify than the normal display mode of the third symbol (see small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in FIG. 455(a)), small winnings can be achieved. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discern the fluctuation status of special symbols during a suggestive presentation.

In addition, in this control example, since the third symbol is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, as described above, the display mode of the third symbol can be changed during the small hit suggestion performance. This makes it difficult for the player to discern the fluctuation status of the special symbols during the small hit suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this; The third symbol is not displayed on the screen, but is configured to be displayed using a predetermined area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED disposed on the game board 13). You may do so.

If the small hit suggestion performance currently being executed is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of winnings, the display format shown in FIG. The balloon 891a with the letters attached bursts, only the balloon 891b remains, and a performance result is announced indicating that the current lottery result (the lottery result for the time-saving final variation) is a loss. Note that when the performance result is displayed, the third symbol is displayed using the normal third symbol display mode (small display areas Dm1, Dm2). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the time saving final variation has ended.

On the other hand, if the currently executed small win suggestion performance is a pattern corresponding to small win fluctuations, the presentation result of the suggestion performance will be the display mode shown in FIG. The balloon 891a with the characters ``END'' remains, and the balloon 891b with the characters ``END'', which indicates that the lottery result is a loss, has burst. A performance result indicating that the result) is a small hit is notified. Note that when the performance result is displayed, the third symbol is displayed using the normal third symbol display mode (small display areas Dm1, Dm2). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the time saving final variation has ended.

Next, the content of the time-saving end effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 457(b). FIG. 457(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the time-saving end effect. As mentioned above, the time-saving end effect is executed when the lottery result of the final time-saving variation is a winner and a variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds (confirmed time is 2 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern. It's a performance.

In this control example, if you win a small hit in the final time saving variation, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and if you lose and win, the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. It is configured to do so. Therefore, if a deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 28 seconds is selected, it will be possible to obtain special symbol 2 reservation during that variation period, and after transitioning to the normal state, the second special symbol lottery will be executed. can do.

Therefore, when the time saving end effect is executed, the text "XX seconds left until time saving end" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the display mode 895 corresponding to the remaining fluctuation period of the final time saving change is displayed. A countdown will be displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Stock up by hitting left" are displayed as a guide display mode to encourage the player to acquire the special drawing 2 reservation. Further, a small display area Dm7 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and informs the player of whether or not the special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired (whether there is stock or not).

If the special figure 2 hold is obtained during the time-saving end effect, the stock character is The display mode is determined and displayed in the small display area Dm7. Then, the words "stock complete" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 458 and FIG. 459, the correspondence between the variation pattern of the time saving final variation and the performance content in the twelfth control example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents when the small hit suggestion effect is executed will be explained. Figure 458 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern that is selected when the time saving final fluctuation is a small winning win, and Figure 458 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern that is selected when the time saving final fluctuation is a winning winning. 458(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern of the losing fluctuation A (ultra short fluctuation) that can be selected, and FIG. 458(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the small hit suggestion effect executed in the short time final fluctuation. .

As shown in FIG. 458(a), when a small win is won with the time saving final variation, a variation pattern is set for a total of 30 seconds, with a variation time of 28 seconds and a confirmation time of 2 seconds. Then, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special symbol variation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 458(b), if the short-time final fluctuation wins and the losing fluctuation A (ultra-short fluctuation) is set, the fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds and the confirmation time is 29.8 seconds. A variation pattern for a total of 30 seconds is set. Then, the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation (after 0.2 seconds). The variation time of this ultra-short variation, 0.2 seconds, is shorter than the variation time (1 second) of the normal symbol variation during the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the time-saving final variation wins the small hit. The actual end timing of the time-saving state is different depending on whether it is a winner or a winner (although it differs by 0.2 seconds), but since the normal symbol lottery is executed independently of the special symbol lottery, It is not possible (or difficult for the player to do so) to determine the error in the end timing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 458(c), a small hit suggestion effect for 28 seconds and a confirmation effect for 2 seconds are executed in correspondence with the 30 second variation pattern. By configuring this way, it is possible to perform the small hit suggestion performance in a state where it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether he or she has won the small hit due to the time-saving final variation or not. The performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in some cases where a winner is won in the time-saving final fluctuation, by setting the fluctuation time short and making it difficult to obtain special drawing 2 reservation, the time-saving state ends with the special drawing 2 reservation obtained. It is possible to prevent players from being provided with an excessive amount of information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents when the time-saving end effect is executed will be explained. FIG. 459(a) is a diagram showing the content of the variation pattern of the losing variation B (normal variation) that can be selected when the time saving final variation is a winning result, and FIG. It is a figure showing the contents of the time-saving end effect executed.

As shown in Fig. 459(a), if a winning result is won with the short time final variation and the losing variation B (normal variation) is set, the variation time is 28 seconds and the confirmation time is 2 seconds, making a total variation of 30 seconds. A pattern is set. Then, the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation (28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Then, as shown in FIG. 459(b), a time-saving end effect of 28 seconds and a final effect of 2 seconds are executed in correspondence with the 30-second variation pattern. In the time-saving end effect, as shown in FIG. 457(b), an end effect to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and an acquisition effect to encourage the player to acquire the special drawing 2 hold are executed. .

<13th control example>
Next, a thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 465. This thirteenth control example is different from the eleventh control example described above in that the control content for ending the time saving state is different, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the eleventh control example described above, the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit and the small winning type (jackpot type), so that the timing at which the time saving state is ended is varied. It was composed of By configuring this way, even if the winning type is the same, the end timing of the time saving state can be changed depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and it is possible for the player to know how long the time saving state will last. This has the effect of making it difficult to understand what is being done.

However, it is necessary to execute the process of determining whether the time saving end condition is met (processing of updating the time saving situation) at various timings (for example, special symbol fluctuation start timing, special symbol stop display timing, etc.) Therefore, there was a problem in that the processing load for updating the time saving status increased. In addition, when the information for identifying the type of time saving state (setting status of the specific flag 203pa) is displaced due to noise etc., processing for updating the time saving state multiple times for one special symbol change is performed. There was a possibility that it would be executed.

On the other hand, in this thirteenth control example, the timing at which the process for updating the time saving situation is executed is fixed at the start timing of the special symbol variation. Then, the time saving end information indicating the timing to end the time saving state is set according to the gaming state and the small winning type (jackpot type) at the time of winning the small hit, and when the timing indicated by the time saving end information arrives, the time saving end information is set. is configured to terminate. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the process for updating the time saving situation from being executed multiple times in response to one special symbol change. In addition, when the timing to end the time saving state arrives, it is only necessary to execute the common process to end the time saving state, so it is possible to use various timings (for example, after a predetermined period has passed after the special symbol fluctuation starts). timing, the start timing and stop timing of normal symbol fluctuations that are executed and controlled independently of special symbol fluctuations, the start timing and stop timing of winning games, the timing of V winning, and the timing of V winning not being confirmed. Even if it is specified that the time-saving state is to be ended at a certain timing), the processing load can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration of the main controller in the 13th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 460(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 460(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 460(a), in the thirteenth control example, the time saving grant table 202ph is replaced with the time saving grant table 202ph for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh control example described above (see FIG. The difference is that a table 202rh is provided, and the rest is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Like the above-mentioned time saving grant table 202ph, the time saving grant table 202rh is referred to for setting the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game, and it is a table that is referred to for setting the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the small win and the executed jackpot game. Time-saving termination conditions are defined based on the jackpot type (small win type). Furthermore, information indicating the timing to end the time saving state is defined.

Here, the detailed contents of the time saving grant 13 table 202rh will be explained with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving grant 13 table 202rh. As shown in FIG. 461, in this control example, similarly to the eleventh control example described above, there are two jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AD) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. (The normal state is set) jackpot type (jackpot AC), and as shown in FIG. stipulated. Note that detailed explanation of the same contents as the above-mentioned time saving grant table 202ph will be omitted.

Specifically, it is specified that the time saving medium counter 203g (first time saving end condition) is set to "10" for all jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AD) for which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. has been done. This value of "10" is specified to be a larger value than the upper limit number of special drawing 1 reservations "4". Therefore, even if the time saving state is set with the upper limit number of special symbol 1 reservations stored, and all the special symbol 1 reservations are exhausted before the second special symbol variation is executed, the time reduction state will not be activated. It never ends. In addition, if the act of only executing the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated when the number of first special symbol fluctuations reaches 10 times, so it is normal. It is possible to prevent a game other than the above from being played continuously. In addition, in this control example, the same value is set as the first time saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different values may be set. It may also be configured to set.

Next, as the value of the special chart 2 variation counter 203ea for setting the second time-saving end condition, for jackpot AA, "5" is set for normal winning, and "3" is set for time-saving winning. is stipulated, and for jackpot AB, "1" is stipulated regardless of whether it is a regular winning or short-time winning, and for jackpot AD, "5" is stipulated for a regular winning, and a "5" is stipulated for a short-time winning. "1" is specified. In other words, if a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot AA is executed during the normal state (2% of cases where a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery and a jackpot game is executed), and when the special drawing 2 is executed during the normal state, When a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot AD, which is a jackpot type that is set only when winning a small win in a lottery, is executed, the time saving is more advantageous to the player than when other jackpot games are executed. The configuration is such that a state (a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to satisfy) is set.

In this way, by making it possible to set time-saving states in which the time-saving ending conditions are different in the ease with which the time-saving ending conditions are satisfied, the player can play the game while having the expectation that a time-saving state in which it is difficult to satisfy the time-saving ending conditions will be set. can be made to do so. Next, the jackpot AA during the time saving normal mode, that is, the jackpot AA based on the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the saving time state (mainly the special drawing 1 drawing corresponding to the reserved special drawing 1 obtained when the saving time state was set). Even when a jackpot game is executed, a highly advantageous time-saving state is set. Thereby, in the state in which the time saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to obtain as many special symbols 1 pending as possible.

Furthermore, in this control example, the end timing (end timing) of the time saving state is defined in the time saving grant 13 table 202rh, and for jackpot AA, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, "when stopped (special symbol For jackpot AB, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, "at the start (at the start of special symbol fluctuation)" is, and for jackpot AB, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state In some cases, "when stopped" is specified. Furthermore, for the jackpot AD, "stop" is defined when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, and "random" is defined when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state.

Here, if the end timing "Random" is selected, a process is executed to randomly set one of the multiple end timings that can be set for the jackpot type, and that process The time saving state is configured to end at the timing determined in . With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 460(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be explained. FIG. 460(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 460(b), in the thirteenth control example, the specific flag 203pa is deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 435), and the end timing is The difference is that a storage area 203ra and a completed flag 203rb are added, but the rest is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The end timing storage area 203ra is a storage area for temporarily storing the end timing of the time saving state, and stores the end timing specified by referring to the time saving award 13 table 202ra at the end of the jackpot game. be done. During the time-saving state, the stored information is referenced in a process that is periodically executed after the time-saving state termination conditions are met in order to determine whether the current timing is to end the time-saving state. be done.

The completion flag 203rb is a flag for indicating that the time-saving termination condition has been satisfied, and is set to ON when it is determined that the time-saving termination condition has been satisfied. By setting this completion flag 203rb to ON, it is suppressed that the determination as to whether the time saving end condition is satisfied is repeatedly executed during a period in which the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state has not ended. can do. Further, in a state where the time-saving termination condition is not satisfied, it is possible to suppress execution of a process for determining whether the timing to end the time-saving state has arrived.

<About the control process of the main controller in the 13th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 462 to 465, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. As mentioned above, this 13th control example is different from the 11th control example described above in that the control content for terminating the time saving state is different, and the control corresponding to this difference is This example differs from the eleventh control example described above in that the example contents are different. Since everything else is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the start time saving update process 13 (C2352) will be explained with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start time saving update process 13 (C2352). This start time saving update process 13 (C2352) is performed when the time saving end condition is satisfied (when any value of various counters becomes 0) for the start time saving update process (see C2302 in FIG. 447) described above. The difference is that the processing contents executed in the case) are different, and the update conditions of various counters are different, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the start time saving update process 13 (C2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the completion flag 203rb is set on, that is, whether the time saving end condition is already satisfied (C2391). If it is determined that the completion flag 203rb is set to on (S2391: Yes), there is no need to execute the time-saving update process any longer, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the completed flag 203rb is not on (off) (C2391: No), then the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, that is, the time saving state is currently in progress. (C2392), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is greater than or equal to 1 (C2392: Yes), the same processes from C2352 to C2356 as the start time saving update process (see C2302) are performed. If it is determined that the value of any of the counters (special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea, time saving medium counter 203g) has become 0 (C2354: Yes, or C2356: Yes), the process is completed. The flag 203rb is set on (C2393), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this control example, regardless of the type of time saving state, at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the process of updating each element for establishing the time saving end condition is executed, and the time saving end condition is established. Even if the condition is satisfied, the time saving state is not terminated, and only the process of storing that the time saving end condition has been satisfied (the process of setting the completed flag 203rb to ON) is executed. With this configuration, the time saving state can be easily ended by simply determining whether the time saving end condition is met at a timing when the time saving state can be ended. Even if three or more are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this 13th control example, like the 11th control example described above, only the element based on the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is specified as an element for establishing the time-saving end condition, so the timing of 1 (special All time-saving update processes can be executed at the start timing of symbol fluctuations), but for example, if an element that is not based on special symbol fluctuations (lottery) is provided as a time-saving end condition, each element can be executed in updateable processing. The configuration may be such that when the time-saving update process is executed and the time-saving end condition is satisfied in any process, the completed flag 203rb is set to on. Thereby, even if the time-saving end condition is satisfied in a different time-saving update process, it is possible to make it difficult for another time-saving update process to be executed unnecessarily.

In addition, in this 13th control example, as shown in FIG. 461, the timing for ending the time saving state is specified to be any timing within one special symbol fluctuation period. In order to ensure that the time saving state ends at a specific timing, the time saving update process (processing that updates the elements for establishing the time saving end condition) is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation. There is. In other words, if the time saving update process is executed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation, and if the start timing of the special symbol variation is specified as the end timing of the time saving state, the time saving state will continue until the start timing of the next variation. It will continue. Therefore, as in this control example, when the end timing of the time saving state is different within one special symbol variation period, the start timing of the special symbol variation or before the start timing of the special symbol variation. That is, it is preferable to execute the time-saving update process at the timing when the new special symbol variation start condition is established (timing before executing the special symbol lottery).

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and for example, the end timing of the time saving state may be set so as to span multiple special symbol fluctuations. , The stop timing of the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition is met may be settable, or the timing may be set 60 seconds after the time-saving end condition is met. It may be stipulated. In this case, it is possible to make the special symbol variation that satisfies the time-saving end condition different from the special symbol variation that ends the time-saving state, making it difficult for players to understand when the time-saving state ends. can be done.

In particular, if the time saving state is configured to end when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the time saving end condition is met, the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed and the special symbol variation to be executed next. Depending on the variation time, whether or not the time saving state ends within the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is satisfied is varied, so it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. can. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the remaining time from when the time saving end condition is met until the time saving state ends. This allows players to play innovative games while giving them a sense of crisis.

Next, with reference to FIG. 463, the contents of the jackpot control process 13 (C1094) will be explained. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 13 (C1094). This jackpot control process 13 (C1094) is a control that is executed at the end timing of the jackpot game (the end timing of the ending effect) in contrast to the jackpot control process 11 (see C1084 in FIG. 449) in the eleventh control example described above. They are different in that the processing contents are different, but otherwise are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 463, when the jackpot control process 13 (C1094) is executed, the same processes C1201 to C1212 as the above-described jackpot control process 11 (see C1084 in FIG. 449) are executed. Then, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending performance (end timing of the ending period), that is, the end timing of the jackpot game (C1212; Yes), then the winning game state storage area 223a (C1281), refers to the time saving award 13 table 202rh, determines the time saving end condition based on the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning, and sets the corresponding value to the time saving grant 13 table 202rh. The counter 203g and the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea are set to the values (C1291).

After that, the end timing corresponding to the time saving state set this time is determined by referring to the time saving grant 13 table 202rh, information for indicating the end timing is stored in the end timing storage area 203rb (C1292), and jackpot control processing is performed. 11 (see C1084 in FIG. 449), the same processes as C1214 and C1215 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464, the main processing 13 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 13. This main process 13 is different from the main process of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example described above (see FIG. 357), in that it periodically (every 4 milliseconds) executes a time saving end process (C1051) for ending the time saving state. ) is different in that it is configured to be executed, but other than that they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the time saving termination process (C1051) will be explained with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving termination process (C1051). This time-saving end process (C1051) is a process for ending the time-saving state, and is performed when the time-saving end condition is satisfied and it is determined that it is the timing to end the time-saving state. , processing for ending the time saving state (transferring to another gaming state) is executed. In this way, this control example is configured to separately execute the process of determining whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied (time-saving update determination process) and the process of terminating the time-saving state (time-saving termination process). ing. Thereby, even if the time saving update determination process is configured to be executed at a specific timing, the time saving state can be ended at various timings.

When the time-saving termination process (C1051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the completed flag 203rb is set on, that is, whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied (C2401). If it is determined that the completion flag 203rb is not set to ON, that is, the time saving termination condition is not satisfied (C2401: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the completed flag 203rb is set to on (the time-saving termination condition is satisfied) (C2401: Yes), the information stored in the termination timing storage area 203rb is read (C2402), It is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the time saving state (C2403).

In the process of C2403, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time saving state (C2403: No), this process is ended as is, and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the time saving state (C2403: Yes), the time saving state is ended. Each counter value (the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea, the value of the time saving counter 203g) which is an element for establishing the condition is reset to 0 (C2404), and the gaming state is set to the normal state (C2405). , sets a status command indicating the normal state (C2406), sets the completed flag 203rb to OFF (C2407), and ends this process. Note that in the process of C2406, a status command is set that includes information indicating at what timing the time saving status ends. With this configuration, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113, which has received the state command, to grasp at what timing (at the start, at the time of stopping) of the special symbol fluctuation the time saving state has ended. It becomes possible.

As explained above, in the thirteenth control example, the timing at which the process for updating the time saving situation is executed is fixed at the start timing of the special symbol variation. Then, the time saving end information indicating the timing to end the time saving state is set according to the gaming state and the small winning type (jackpot type) at the time of winning the small hit, and when the timing indicated by the time saving end information arrives, the time saving end information is set. is configured to terminate. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the process for updating the time saving situation from being executed multiple times in response to one special symbol change. In addition, when the timing to end the time saving state arrives, it is only necessary to execute the common process to end the time saving state, so it is possible to use various timings (for example, after a predetermined period has passed after the special symbol fluctuation starts). timing, the start timing and stop timing of normal symbol fluctuations that are executed and controlled independently of special symbol fluctuations, the start timing and stop timing of winning games, the timing of V winning, and the timing of V winning not being confirmed. Even if it is specified that the time-saving state is to be ended at a certain timing), the processing load can be reduced.

<About display modification examples>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 466 and 467, a modification of the display contents displayed during the time saving state in the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example described above, when the time saving state is set, one of the time saving ending conditions is set as a time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed "once". As shown in FIGS. 430 and 431, the small display area Dm20 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the display area where the display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving effects is displayed) ) was configured so that the word "last" was displayed. Further, the system was configured not to display information indicating the number of remaining time reductions (remaining period of time reduction state).

On the other hand, in this display modification example, unlike the eleventh control example described above, one of the time-saving end conditions is a case where the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed multiple times (for example, "four times"). A display example of the display screen when a time-saving termination condition is set that satisfies the following will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 466, a flow will be described when a time saving type is set in which the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is satisfied. FIG. 466 is a diagram explaining the flow when ending the time saving state at the start of special symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 466, the time saving state changes to the normal state at the fluctuation start timing when the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (fourth time in FIG. 466 (a-2)). transition to. In this case, the number of special symbol variations completed during the time saving state is "3" excluding the final time saving variation (4th time), so the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicates the short remaining time. When displaying the display mode, the number of times it is shown that the time saving state has ended at the stop timing of variation 3 is displayed. In other words, during the period of "Fluctuation 1" of the special pattern fluctuation, the number of remaining time reductions is "3", and during the period of "Variation 2" of the special pattern fluctuation, the number of remaining time reductions is "2"; During the period "3", the number of remaining time reductions "1 (last)" will be displayed. Then, at the timing when "variation 3" ends (at the timing when "variation 4" starts), a display mode (for example, "end") indicating that there is no short period remaining is displayed. In this way, when ending the time saving state at the start timing of a special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is met, the remaining time is aimed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is met. By configuring the game so that the number of time reductions is displayed as a subtraction, it is possible to display the remaining number of time reductions without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

For example, if the special symbol variation before the special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition is satisfied is a small hit that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition, that is, the special symbol for which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. If a small winning game period is set between the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation and the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation for which the time saving end condition is met, the time saving period will be set during that small winning game period. It is preferable to display the words "time reduction extension" indicating that the period has been extended in addition to the display mode indicating the remaining number of time reductions. As a result, "end" is not displayed as a short period of remaining time, and an effect display that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be executed until the special symbol variation that satisfies the time-saving end condition actually starts. can.

On the other hand, when indicating the number of time-saving effects to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving effects are executed during the variation period of "Fluctuation 4" as in the 11th control example described above. is the final number, so as shown in FIG. 466(a-4), one more number of times than the remaining time shortening number is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the remaining number of times (remaining number of chances) that the performance indicating the result of the special symbol lottery performed during the time saving state will be performed.

As explained above, when the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is satisfied, the remaining time count is set to indicate to the player the timing when the time saving state actually ends. Since the remaining number of executions of the time-saving effect to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is different, by displaying both information to the player, the game contents can be explained in detail to the player. Although it is possible to notify the players, the information to be notified is complicated, and there is a risk that players will be confused about the game.

Therefore, it is preferable to display only the remaining number of executions without displaying the number of remaining time reductions. With this configuration, it is possible to easily draw attention to the time-saving effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 without worrying about the timing at which the time-saving state ends.

Further, the configuration may be such that only the remaining number of time reductions is displayed without displaying the number of remaining executions. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which an advantageous game during the time saving state, specifically, a game in which a normal symbol lottery is executed becomes an advantageous game advantageous to the player. In this case, a time-saving effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 with content according to the number of remaining times, and a special symbol variation (actual It is preferable to configure the variation effect corresponding to the time saving final variation) to be executed as a special variation effect. With this configuration, the time-saving effect is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of remaining time-saving times, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. In addition, as for the above-mentioned special variation effect, for example, if the special drawing lottery result of the time saving final variation is a loss (game result disadvantageous to the player), a display mode indicating that the time saving state has ended (time saving ending) While displaying the special variation effect that ends the time saving final variation, and if the special drawing result of the time saving final variation is a win (game result advantageous to the player), the time saving ending will be displayed. It is preferable to perform a special variation performance of a performance mode (resurrection performance) indicating a winning performance so as to interrupt the performance.

Furthermore, in the pattern shown in FIG. 466, when both the remaining time shortening number and the remaining execution number are displayed, each number of times is The display mode may be configured to be updated at the same time, or the display mode for each count may be updated at the same time at the timing when none of the counts are updated (timings in FIGS. 466(B) and (D)). It's okay. Furthermore, when displaying both the remaining time reduction count and the remaining execution count, the display format for each count is updated and displayed at different timings using any of the timings specified in (A) to (D) above. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the remaining time shortening count and the remaining play count are actually updated, so that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the actual game situation.

In addition, in this modification, one time-saving effect is executed in response to one special symbol change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as in the sixth control example described above, The first time-saving effect may be configured to be executed over a plurality of special symbol variation periods. In this case, the configuration is configured to update and display the remaining execution count with the same value as the remaining time saving count and at the same timing, and the time saving effect ( The time-saving effect executed at the timing shown in FIG. 466(A)) may be configured to be executed during the period until the next special symbol variation (“variation 4”) is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, when the remaining number of executions is updated and displayed with a value (number of times) corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions, the time reduction effect can be used up to the lottery result of the final time reduction variation without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be notified. In addition, as for the method of setting the production mode of the time-saving production in this case, the various technical ideas explained in the above-mentioned sixth to tenth control examples are applied, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 467, a description will be given of the flow when a time saving type is set in which the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied. FIG. 467 is a diagram illustrating the flow when ending the time saving state when the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

As shown in Fig. 467, when the time saving state is ended when the special symbol fluctuation stops, unlike the pattern explained with reference to Fig. 466, the remaining time saving number and the remaining execution number (remaining chance number) are updated. Since the timing and update contents can be synchronized, the number of remaining time reductions can be displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the eleventh control example described above, depending on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the timing at which the time saving state ends is the special symbol fluctuation start timing (see FIG. 466), and the special symbol fluctuation stop timing is the timing (see FIG. 467). , and the time-saving effect was configured to be executed in different presentation modes corresponding to each case. With this configuration, a game that is easy to understand for the player is provided. However, in the time-saving effect executed in the eleventh control example, the player can easily grasp the type of the current time-saving state immediately after the time-saving effect starts, so the time-saving effect set for the player is There is a problem in that it is not possible to provide the fun of predicting the type of state.

In order to solve this problem, immediately after the time saving state is set, a common time saving effect is executed regardless of the time saving type, and a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving effect (for example, Fig. 466(B) ) or the timing of FIG. 467(B)), it is preferable to perform a time-saving performance (dedicated time-saving performance) in a performance mode according to the actually set time-saving type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of time-saving state that has been set.

Further, the timing of shifting from the common time saving performance to the dedicated time saving performance may be determined not based on the elapsed time but on the remaining period. In this case, the dedicated time saving performance is preferably executed when the remaining period of the time saving performance (remaining period of the special symbol variation) reaches the minimum required period to execute the dedicated time saving performance. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which various special symbol fluctuation periods are set, it is possible to fix the performance period of a dedicated time-saving performance (a performance in which the performance result is displayed) that is likely to interest players. can.

Furthermore, as a condition for transitioning from the common time saving performance to the dedicated time saving performance, the game result during the common time saving performance period, for example, based on the result of the player operating the frame button 22, is not based on the elapsed time or remaining time. A condition that is established or a condition that is established when the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times may be used.

Furthermore, in the above-described display modification example, various techniques are used regarding the update content and update timing of the display mode of the remaining time shortening count and the remaining execution count (remaining chance count) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although the idea has been explained, based on the above-mentioned technical idea, the update content and update timing of the display mode of special symbol reservation may be set as appropriate on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, if displaying an increase or decrease in the actual number of reserved special symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode that is contrary to the above-mentioned technical philosophy, the actual increase or decrease in the number of reserved special symbols Instead, a pseudo special pattern pending display performance that increases or decreases in accordance with the timing when the remaining number of executions (remaining number of chances) is updated is emphasized to the player rather than the display mode that shows the actual increase or decrease in the number of special symbols pending. It is best to configure the configuration so that With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player without causing any inconsistency with respect to each of the plurality of display elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

<About the second modification of the eleventh control example>
Next, a second modification of the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 468 and 469.

In the above-mentioned eleventh control example, as explained with reference to FIGS. 430(b) and 431(b), the information indicating the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is based on the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 reservations ( (refer to FIG. 431(b)), and the character used for the display mode of special drawing 2 pending is used for the variation effect of the variation. It was configured as follows (see Figure 432).

With this configuration, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed at a timing before the special symbol lottery is executed (from when the special symbol reservation is acquired until the special symbol lottery is executed). period) and a variable performance using the timing after the special symbol lottery is executed (the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery results are stopped and displayed (confirmed display)). It was possible to provide the players with a long-term performance for one special symbol lottery.

However, the above-mentioned advance production cannot be executed unless the period during which the special figure reservation is acquired (special figure reservation period) continues for a predetermined period, and there is a problem that the production effect cannot be effectively enhanced. Ta. Furthermore, since the performance mode of the fluctuating performance is related to the performance mode of the pre-production performance, if the fluctuating performance is executed without the pre-production performance, it is possible to easily understand the performance format of the variable performance. However, there was a risk that the performance effect would be reduced.

On the other hand, in this second modified example, when it is determined that it is difficult to perform the preliminary performance, a part of the performance that is executed as the preliminary performance is executed as a variable performance. By configuring this, even if the advance selection is not executed, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 468, the content of the effect executed when it is difficult to execute the advance effect will be explained. FIG. 468 is a diagram showing the flow of performance when the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

As shown in FIG. 468(a), when the second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the period for executing the preliminary effect is Since it is not possible to ensure this, the pseudo hold performance is configured to be executed using the 8 second period (A) after the special symbol variation (30 seconds), and then the 20 second period (A). B) is used to execute a variable effect. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to secure a period for performing the preliminary performance, by executing the pseudo-holding performance, a series of performances can be executed as if the preliminary performance had been executed. be able to.

Here, the display contents of the pseudo hold effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 469(a). FIG. 469(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the time point (A) in FIG. 468. As shown in FIG. 469(a), in the pseudo hold performance, a performance similar to the preliminary performance (see FIG. 430(b)) is executed. Note that here, only the contents different from the preliminary presentation (see FIG. 430(b)) will be explained, and the same contents will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 469(a), in the small display area Dm2, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in progress is displayed, and then the small An effect is executed in which a pseudo-hold display mode is displayed in the display area Dm27. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 469(b), a performance similar to the fluctuating performance described above with reference to FIG. 431(b) is performed, and thereafter, the fluctuating performance described above with reference to FIG. 432 is performed.

That is, the performance executed across multiple variations in the eleventh control example described above is executed within one special symbol variation period. With this configuration, when it is determined that it is difficult to perform the preliminary performance, a part of the performance corresponding to the preliminary performance is executed as a variable performance. With this configuration, even if the advance selection is not performed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance.

In addition, in this modification, the number of reserved special drawings is hidden, and the pseudo-holding display used in the pseudo-holding effect (the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm27 in FIGS. 469(a) and (b)) By configuring the system to display , and increasing/decreasing the number of pseudo-pending displays within one special symbol fluctuation period, the player is made to think that the fluctuation performance is being executed multiple times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the actual number of reserved special drawings may be configured to be displayed separately. In other words, it may be configured to notify the player that the above-described sequence of effects is being executed within one special symbol variation period. Further, in the eleventh control example described above, the preliminary performance (suspended performance) is executed as a display performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol display device 81, it may be configured such that a performance mode of a preliminary performance is set and a special performance including at least a part of the set performance mode is executed instead of the pseudo-suspension performance. Specifically, when outputting a special sound as a preliminary effect when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a special effect in which the special sound is output during the special symbol variation period may be executed. , when the LED arranged on the game board 13 is to be lit in a special manner as a preliminary effect when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the LED is lit in a special manner during the special symbol fluctuation period. It may be configured to perform special effects such as In addition, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 469, the pseudo-hold effect is executed after the start of the special symbol variation, but if it is difficult to execute the preliminary effect, It is sufficient if it is possible to execute a pseudo-holding effect (special effect), for example, a pseudo-holding effect that extends from the stage before the start of the special symbol variation, straddles the start timing of the special symbol variation, and ends during the special symbol variation period. (Special effects) may be configured to be executed.

<Fourteenth control example>
Next, the fourteenth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 470 to 485. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth to tenth control examples (including each modification example) described above has a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) and a time saving state (a special symbol low probability state) as a gaming state. A low probability state of a symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) are configured to be settable at least, and a game with a common symbol that is executed during the time saving state (a win that is executed when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery). The electric accessory 640a is opened by the player (game), and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry opening (winning opening) 640.

Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640 is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (as a result) By configuring the system so that a lottery (lottery in which a jackpot game is more likely to be executed) is executed, a gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed (a time-saving state) is a game state in which it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery (a normal The game was configured so that the game state was more advantageous to the player than the game state.

In addition, by setting a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery as a time-saving termination condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving condition advantageous to the player can be made permanent (the jackpot game is The system is structured so that the game does not continue (until the game is executed), and the player who plays the game during the time-saving state is motivated to play the game in order to execute the jackpot game within the period in which the time-saving state is set. Met.

However, in each of the control examples described above, for example, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, the reservation memory (special symbol 1 pending) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is acquired, A state in which the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has not been acquired (special symbol 2 pending), specifically, a time-saving jackpot won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In a state where the time-saving state is set based on the completion of the jackpot game, an event may occur in which the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed immediately after the time-saving state is set. Ta.

In this case, by executing the first special symbol lottery, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery, during the time saving state, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. There has been a problem in that the number of players decreases, resulting in a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the control example described above, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery than when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, Since the configuration is such that the time saving state is easily set after the jackpot game ends, when the jackpot game is executed based on the first special symbol lottery executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the jackpot There is a problem in that a situation where the time saving state is not set after the end of the game is likely to occur, which significantly reduces the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in this 14th control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to execute the special symbol lottery (variation) at the timing when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and after the end of the jackpot game. The configuration is such that the timing of the Specifically, the time saving state is set based on the end of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends (after setting the time saving state), a special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed after a predetermined period (wait time) has elapsed. It is configured so that

By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving jackpot game is executed in a situation where the special symbol 2 reservation is not acquired, the time-saving jackpot game is executed before the special symbol lottery (variation) during the time-saving state is executed. It becomes possible to obtain special symbol 2 reservation by executing a regular symbol winning game (a winning game executed when a winning symbol is won in the regular symbol lottery) during the wait time (during a time saving state). Therefore, the above-mentioned problem that may occur when the first special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the time saving state is set can be solved.

Furthermore, in this 14th control example, it is configured such that it can be determined whether or not to set the above-mentioned wait time depending on the acquisition status of special drawing 2 reservation, so that it can be determined whether or not to set the above-mentioned wait time. When the time saving state is set, that is, when the first special symbol lottery is not executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the wait time is not set. As a result, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed (or unlikely) during the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery can be executed as soon as possible after the end of the jackpot game, which is highly efficient for the player. can provide games.

In addition, in this 14th control example, when the upper limit number (4 pieces) of special drawing 2 reservations is acquired during the wait time, the wait time is configured to end (shorten) regardless of the remaining period of the wait time. ing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the waiting time from continuing for a longer time than necessary, providing the player with an inefficient game, and reducing the player's desire to play.

First, with reference to FIG. 470, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 470 is a front view of the game board 13 in this fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 470, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the A1 embodiment described above (see FIG. 227) in that the variable display unit 80 is The game area formed on the left side (left side game area) is also provided with a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 that is a trigger for drawing a normal symbol (second symbol), and is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The V-winning slot 600a, the V-winning door 600, and the flow path through which the ball that enters the V-winning slot 600a flows down are removed from the gaming area (right side gaming area) where the ball enters the V-winning slot 600a. The difference is that a variable winning device 65 and a V winning device 650, which are opened when a jackpot or small winning is won, are arranged downstream of the right side gaming area. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example is approximately the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 315). For convenience, the same content will be repeatedly explained using the same reference numerals. It should be noted that the parts explained in the above-mentioned sixth control example and omitted in the present fourteenth control example, and the parts explained in the present fourteenth control example and explained in the above-mentioned sixth control example are omitted. Any control example can be applied to the locations where

First, the configuration of the left side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment A1. As described above, in the fourteenth control example, the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left side game area (left side of the variable display unit 80). Thereby, even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down into the left side game area, the lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is executed. A detailed explanation will be omitted since it is the same as the sixth control example described above, but in this control example, while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, In addition, when winning a specific common symbol, a common symbol game is executed in which the ball can be easily entered into the second winning hole 640.

In this way, by providing a period (state) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second prize opening 640 during the normal state, it is possible to use the special drawing 2 lottery without having to shift the gaming state to the time-saving state. It is possible to provide the player with a game feature, that is, a game feature that allows the player to execute a jackpot game based on a small win win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing a game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the gameplay using the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, there is a game that aims to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is executed based on a ball entering the first prize opening 64, and a game that aims for a jackpot when a ball enters the through gate 67. Since the game aiming at a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the passing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed at the same time, the interest of the game in the normal state can be improved.

In addition, in this 14th control example, in a part of the case where a normal symbol is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a normal state, a common symbol that allows the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 easily. Although the configuration is such that a game (long opening winning game) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the long opening winning game is not executed when the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game with enthusiasm while expecting that a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) will be set in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640. can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 470, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be described. In this 14th control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is more likely to be executed (the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for the special symbol 2 lottery) Since it becomes easier for the ball to win a prize), a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right side game area where the second winning hole 640 is arranged is performed.

In this 14th control example, a through gate 67, a second winning hole 640 (electric accessory 640a), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right side game area, and a lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is provided. A game in which a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn, and a game in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) can be executed as a right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the ball launch direction (left side game area direction, right side game area direction) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game, and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the direction in which the ball is launched in a complicated manner, and to play the game comfortably. In addition, in this fourteenth control example, when a gaming state (time saving state, small winning gaming state, jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player is set than when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Since the configuration is such that the player is forced to play the right-handed game, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

Note that, as described above, in the present fourteenth control example, a right-handed game is executed in a situation where a game advantageous to the player is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, Like the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 11 control example (see FIG. 425), a left-handed game and a right-handed game are executed in a state where a game advantageous to the player is being executed. It may be configured. Furthermore, in this case, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to display a guidance notification mode for guiding the player on the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) to be executed. It is best to configure it like this.

With this configuration, it is possible to have the player change the playing method frequently, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and reducing the player's desire to play. In addition, since the player has to watch the guidance information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in order to check the gaming method suitable for the current gaming situation, the player can concentrate on the game. You can make the player play the game by playing the game.

In addition, if the gaming method that is appropriate for the current gaming situation is different from the gaming method that the player is actually playing, we will emphasize more than usual the gaming method that the player should carry out. It is preferable to display an emphasized guidance notification mode for guidance on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to play the game using an inappropriate gaming method and giving the player an extremely disadvantageous game result.

In this case, as a method for determining the game method that the player is actually playing, for example, if it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the left side game area, a left-handed game is executed. This method determines that a right-handed game is being executed when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area. A method may be used in which it is physically detected whether the flow is flowing down the area and the method of playing is determined based on the detection result, or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the player may be used. A method may be used in which the game method is determined by detecting a change in electrical resistance and determining the direction in which the ball is launched based on the detection result.

In addition, the above-mentioned emphasized guidance notification mode is displayed when the gaming method suitable for the current gaming situation and the gaming method that the player is actually playing are different for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). It is best to configure it so that With this configuration, when the game method is switched immediately after the guidance notification mode is displayed, the ball falling period ( For example, even if a falling ball is detected in an inappropriate gaming area during the 3 seconds), the emphasized guidance notification mode will not be displayed, so the emphasized guidance notification mode will not be displayed for players who are playing the game properly. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused. In addition, players who immediately switch their gaming method after the emphasized guidance notification mode is displayed are more likely to play disadvantageous games than players who immediately switch their gaming method after the guidance notification mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display contents of the guidance notification mode.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed, and is a V winning device that can be changed between an open state where a ball can be won in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state where it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650b. This V-winning door 650b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the V-winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball cannot be fired by a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, there is a specific area (V area) not shown inside the V winning hole 650a, and the ball that won the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game ends). When the player passes through a specific area (V area), the player acquires the right to execute the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends.

Note that the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a common technique well known in the art, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. As shown in the figure, a plurality of channels through which balls can pass may be provided in the V winning device 650, and only the balls that have passed through a specific channel can pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the downward direction of the balls flowing down inside the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, or a distribution member that is operated in advance according to a predetermined rule after the start of a jackpot game. A sorting member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule, or a sorting member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after a certain number of rounds of jackpot games have been started, and the games are sorted by the sorting member. It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area).

Furthermore, there are multiple types of small winning games that are executed when a small winning is won, such as a small winning game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. It may be configured such that the type of small winning to be executed and the type of small winning in which a small winning game is executed in which the ball does not easily pass through a specific area (V area) can be set. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed depending on the type of small winning won, and when playing a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area), the V winning opening 650a is The configuration is such that an opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for balls to enter is set, and balls are distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the right timing. In addition, as a small winning game executed based on a small winning winning, a small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and not the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a jackpot game, and has a winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a. have. This winning door 65b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball fired in the right-handed game is The upper surface of the winning door 65b is configured such that it flows down toward the out port 66 direction.

<About the production content in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the fourteenth control example will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this fourteenth control example differs greatly from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example described above in that it is configured to be able to set a wait time after the end of the jackpot game, and this wait time The content of the characteristic effect executed in the fourteenth control example is that the effect related to the setting of is executed.

Here, we will explain wait time. In this 14th control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a wait time of 15 seconds can be set from the timing when the time saving state is set, and when the wait time is set, The special symbol lottery (variation) is configured to start after the wait time ends. In other words, when the time saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to set a period during which only the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery in a high probability state of normal symbols) can be executed without executing the special symbol lottery. It consists of

With this configuration, the time-saving state is configured to be easier to execute than the normal state.In the state where the opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery has been acquired (the state where the special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired) It is possible to facilitate the execution of special symbol lottery during a time saving state.

In this 14th control example, during the ending period of the jackpot game, there is a notification effect to notify that a wait time will be set after the jackpot game ends, and a notification effect to notify the player that the wait time is in progress. It is configured to be able to perform the charge time performance. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance executed to make the game more advantageous during the time saving state, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

First, with reference to FIG. 471, the contents of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 471(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in the ending effect when the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. 471(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in the ending effect when the wait time is FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display content displayed in an ending effect when is not set.

The main contents of the jackpot game performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) executed during the jackpot game are the same as in each control example described above, and in this figure, the pachinko game in this 14th control example is We will mainly explain the characteristic contents of the performance executed by the machine 10, but the contents omitted in this figure and the parts shown in the figure but omitted from detailed explanation are as described above. The contents described in each control example shall be applied as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 471(a), when the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game, the wait time is set in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as an ending effect. The text "Charge time has entered" is displayed as a notification mode to notify the player, and a remaining time notification mode to notify the wait time period (remaining time of charge time) is displayed in the display area Dm51. Is displayed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 471(a), "15 seconds" is displayed in the display area Dm51 to inform the player that a wait time of 15 seconds is set. The detailed contents will be explained with reference to FIG. 472, but the display mode displayed in this display area Dm51 is that while the wait time is set, the value (number of seconds) is displayed as being subtracted as time elapses. It is configured so that In other words, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm51 is a notification means for notifying the length of the currently set wait time until the wait time is set, and after the wait time is set, It serves as a notification means for notifying the remaining time.

Note that, without being limited to this, the length of the wait time set this time is displayed continuously until the wait time ends, and separately, the remaining wait time is displayed as a countdown (subtraction display) according to the elapsed time. ). With this configuration, even during a period in which a wait time is set, it is possible to easily understand the length of the currently set wait time. Furthermore, instead of the remaining time of the wait time, the display may be configured to display the elapsed time in a manner that allows the player to grasp the elapsed time.For example, the elapsed time of the wait time and the remaining time of the wait time may be displayed. By displaying a display format that can be grasped by the person, the player can determine the game play during the remaining wait time based on the current gaming situation during the wait time (acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending) and the elapsed time of the wait time. It is possible to make it easier for the player to make predictions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 471(a), the sub-display area Ds displays a message " ``Gather your friends during charge time'' is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand the contents of the performance executed during the charge time performance before the charge time performance is executed, so that the player can understand the content of the performance during the charge time performance. It is possible to prevent a charge time performance from proceeding in a state where the charge time performance is not performed and a performance that is difficult for a player to understand.

In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 471(a), a comment is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode for guiding the player in advance about the content of the game to be executed after the wait time (charge time) is set. However, the guidance mode is not limited to this, and for example, the player can see the position where the winning hole (second winning hole 640) into which the ball enters is located during the charge time. It is configured to display an image (for example, a simplified image showing an area including at least the second winning hole 640 on the game board 13) to help the player visually understand the game, or to display images fired in a right-handed game. It may be configured to display a moving image that simply shows the process of the ball entering the second winning hole 640 using animation.

Furthermore, in this case, the configuration is such that the player is informed in advance not only of the content of the game to be actually executed during the wait time, but also of the performance mode of the charge time performance that is variable based on the content of the executed game. In this case, in the case of this control example, each time a ball enters the second prize opening 640 and a special figure 2 reservation is acquired, fellow characters will gather in correspondence with the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations ( It is preferable to configure the system so that the player is informed in advance of the performance mode (increased). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know in advance not only the game to be performed during the wait time, but also the contents of the charge time performance that will be performed during the wait time, so that the player can understand. It is possible to perform an easy performance and enhance the performance effect.

On the other hand, if the wait time is not set after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. As a guidance mode, the words "Enter time saving mode" are displayed in the main display area Dm.

Here, in this 14th control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired at the timing when the ending period of the jackpot game is set, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired, the jackpot is determined. The wait time is set after the end of the game, and if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is obtained, the wait time is not set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, similarly to the sixth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to be able to execute a lottery that is more advantageous to the player.

In other words, in this fourteenth control example, it is determined whether the jackpot game ends in a state where an opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player has been established, and whether or not the opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery is established. If it is established, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and if the trigger for the execution of the second special symbol lottery is not established, the trigger for the execution of the second special symbol lottery is established. The period (wait time) is configured to be set before the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state arrives in a state where the execution opportunity of the second special symbol lottery has not been established (a state where the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired), and the game It is possible to suppress the execution of the first special symbol lottery which is disadvantageous to the player during the time saving state, and also to prevent the execution opportunity of the second special symbol lottery from being executed (when the special symbol 2 reservation is obtained). In this state), it is possible to prevent the start timing of the special symbol lottery from being delayed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a suitable game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, the presence or absence of a wait time is determined according to the establishment of the trigger for the execution of the second special symbol lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special symbol lottery The length of the wait time to be set may be changed depending on the establishment of the execution trigger. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the closer the number of reserved special drawings 2 that have been acquired is to the upper limit number, the easier the set wait time is to be shortened. As a result, if the number of reserved special figures 2 that has been acquired is small (for example, 1 piece), the number of reserved special figures 2 that has been acquired can be easily set to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the wait time, and the number of reserved special figures 2 that has been acquired is If the number is large (for example, 3 pieces), even though the number of reserved special drawings 2 is set to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the wait time, an unnecessarily long wait time is set and gaming efficiency decreases. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that a wait time of a certain period is always set regardless of the establishment of the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery. In this case, an event may occur that reduces gaming efficiency, but the processing for setting wait times and the processing for executing performances that correspond to wait times of different lengths (charge time performances) can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of various presentation data used when performing presentations, so the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, by simplifying the processing and reducing the amount of data, the production effect can be enhanced by increasing the production data for executing other productions or by complicating the processing for executing the production. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 472, the content of the charge time performance executed during the wait time will be explained. FIG. 472(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the start screen of the charge time performance, and FIG. 472(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the end screen of the charge time performance. Of the various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIGS. 472(a) and 472(b), the display modes explained in each control example above are are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, among the various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 explained in each control example described above, some are omitted in each figure showing the display screen of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The display mode can be applied as appropriate based on the technical idea in each control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), when the charge time effect is executed, the words "Charge time in progress" are displayed in the main display area Dm to indicate that the wait time is set, and the sub In the display area Ds, a comment such as ``Put the ball in the electric chew and gather your friends'' is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the content of the game and the content of the performance during the charge time performance.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an image for visually guiding the player to the second winning hole 640 (electronic chew) which is the winning hole into which the ball should enter is displayed in the display area Dm53. . In addition, "Friend Stock" is displayed in the display area Dm52 as a display mode for the player to grasp the number of friends gathered as a result of the charge time effect, and the first stock area Dm52a, the second stock area Dm52b, A third stock area Dm52c and a fourth stock area Dm52d are formed.

The state shown in FIG. 472(a) is a state in which 1 second has elapsed since the 15-second wait time was set, and the display area Dm51 for indicating the remaining time of the charge time effect (remaining time of the wait time) is displayed. , "14 seconds" is displayed to indicate that the remaining time of the charge time effect (remaining time of wait time) is 14 seconds, and no special drawing 2 reservation has been obtained. Therefore, images for showing companions are not displayed in any of the first stock area Dm52a to fourth stock area Dm52d.

The first stock area Dm52a to the fourth stock area Dm52d are configured so that images imitating fellow characters are displayed in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations obtained, and one special figure 2 reservation is displayed. When acquired, an image imitating a fellow character is displayed in the first stock area Dm52a, and when the second special map 2 reservation is acquired, an image imitating a fellow character is displayed in the second stock area Dm52b. When the image is displayed and the third special figure 2 reservation is acquired, an image imitating the fellow character is displayed in the third stock area Dm52c, and when the fourth special figure 2 reservation is acquired ( When the number of reserved special drawings 2 reaches the upper limit number), an image imitating a fellow character is displayed in the fourth stock area Dm52d.

In this way, by displaying an image imitating a fellow character in each stock area in correspondence with the number of special figure 2 reserves acquired, the player can know the number of special figure 2 reserves acquired during the charge time performance. Can be easily understood.

In addition, in the present fourteenth control example, when an image imitating a fellow character is displayed in the fourth stock area Dm52d during the charge time performance, that is, when the number of reserved special drawings 2 reaches the upper limit, the charge time The configuration is such that the charge time effect ends (ends the wait time) regardless of the remaining time of the effect (remaining time of wait time), and in this case, as shown in FIG. 472(b), the charge time effect ends. A shortened performance (all members gathering performance) is performed.

The state shown in FIG. 472(b) is a state in which 13 seconds have passed since the 15-second wait time was set, and the display area Dm51 for indicating the remaining time of the charge time effect (remaining time of the wait time) is displayed. , "2 seconds" is displayed to indicate that the remaining time of the charge time effect (remaining time of wait time) is 2 seconds, and the state is that 4 special drawings 2 reservations have been obtained. , images imitating fellow characters are displayed in all stock areas from the first stock area Dm52a to the fourth stock area Dm52d.

Specifically, an image imitating a turtle is displayed in the first stock area Dm52a, an image imitating an elephant is displayed in the second stock area Dm52b, and an image imitating a snake is displayed in the third stock area Dm52c. An image imitating a lion is displayed in the fourth stock area Dm52d. Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, the words "All members assemble" are displayed as a guide to indicate that the number of reserved special symbols 2 has reached the upper limit, and the charge time effect has ended and the special symbol lottery is executed. The characters ``Enter Time Saving Mode'' are displayed as a guidance mode to inform the player that the game is about to start. Then, a character 851 imitating a rabbit is displayed in a display mode (V sign) to congratulate that the number of reserved special drawings 2 has reached the upper limit.

In this way, by executing the shortening performance (all members gathering performance) of the charge time performance, the time that is satisfied when a predetermined period of time (15 seconds) has elapsed as the termination condition for ending the wait time. Even if the special ending condition, which is satisfied when the number of reserved special drawings 2 reaches the upper limit, is not an elapsed end condition, and the wait time ends without waiting for the elapse of a certain period of time, the wait time To finish a charge time performance executed corresponding to a set period without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this 14th control example, the type of companion character displayed during the charge time performance is determined based on the pre-read result for the acquired special map 2 reservation. . Specifically, it includes the pre-reading result (pre-discrimination result) obtained in the pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 349) executed in the start-up winning process 5 (see FIG. 348) described in the sixth control example described above. The winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, and the character type is determined based on the pre-reading result included in the received winning information command.

For example, the selection ratio of a plurality of character types is configured to be different depending on the pre-reading result (pre-discrimination result), and the first character type (e.g., lion) is selected more than the second character type (e.g., turtle). , it is preferable to configure the system so that it is more likely to be selected when the pre-read result indicates a jackpot win. With this configuration, by understanding the types of characters gathered during the charge time performance, it is possible to predict the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery to be executed after the charge time ends during the charge time. Therefore, the performance effect during charge time can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the type of character corresponding to a plurality of special figures 2 pending may be determined using the pre-reading result for the winning information corresponding to one special figure 2 pending, for example, the first special figure 2 pending. If the pre-reading result for the winning information corresponding to 2 hold (special figure 2 hold that is used first when the 2nd special symbol lottery is executed) is a result indicating a jackpot win, the special figure 2 hold (1 piece It is preferable to configure the system to determine not only the special figure 2 hold of the eye (eye special figure 2 hold) but also the type of character corresponding to the later acquired special figure 2 hold (2nd to 4th special figure 2 hold). In this case, it is best to configure the structure so that the expectation of winning a jackpot is indicated to the player based on the rules of the four characters that have gathered together.For example, the rule that all the characters that have gathered are mammals, or the rules that appear in famous stories. It would be good to define this rule. By configuring this way, even if a type is determined (displayed) with a low jackpot expectation for the character alone, the player expects that some kind of regularity will occur between the character and the character that will be displayed later. This allows the production effect to be enhanced over a long period of time.

As mentioned above, when suggesting the expectation of winning a jackpot based on the law of a plurality of displayed characters, a law that can be established at the time when a predetermined number (for example, two) of characters are displayed (gathered) is used. It is preferable to provide a notification (suggestion) means that can notify (suggest) to the player the gender and the type of character required to establish the law. This allows the player to easily understand the rules that are effective in the performance.

Furthermore, if the pre-reading result for the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation acquired later is a result indicating a jackpot win, the type of character corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 reservation, that is, the stock area The type of character displayed on the Dm 52 may be configured to be changeable.

In addition, in this 14th control example, in order to inform the player of the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations in an easy-to-understand manner, one character is displayed for each acquired special figure 2 reservation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of 1 may be changed depending on the number of special drawings 2 reserved. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display mode of 1 to be varied based not only on the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, but also on the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the acquired special figures 2 pending.

With this configuration, by grasping the variable situation of the display mode 1, it is possible to predict the number of reserved special drawings 2 that have been acquired and the look-ahead result in a composite manner. By visually checking the number of balls that entered the mouth 640, it is possible to determine whether the variable status of the display mode in 1 was executed based on the acquisition of the special map 2 reservation or based on the look-ahead result. It becomes possible to understand the Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of performance depending on the player. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the same display mode can be displayed as the display mode after the variable even if any variable opportunity (special drawing 2 reservation acquisition, pre-reading result) is established. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the variable opportunity that has been established.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be explained. FIG. 473 is a timing chart schematically showing the game flow regarding the game state set after the jackpot winning and after the jackpot game ends, among the game flows in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example.

When the normal state is set, the player plays a left-handed game, wins a ball into the first winning hole 64, and executes the first special symbol lottery. As described above with reference to FIG. 470, if a left-handed game is executed with the normal state set, the second special symbol reserved ball (special symbol 2 reserved) cannot be obtained ( It is structured in such a way that it becomes difficult. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the jackpot game will be executed without acquiring the second special symbol's reserved ball (special symbol 2 reserved). . In addition, the player who plays the game in the normal state tries to acquire more reserved balls of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) in order to execute more special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery). It is common to continue playing the left-handed game until the number of special symbols 1 reserved reaches the upper limit (4 pieces).

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the state in which the jackpot game is completed has acquired special symbol 1 pending, and It becomes easy to get into a state where special drawing 2 reservation is not acquired. Therefore, when the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state, that is, the state in which it is easy to obtain the special figure 2 reservation is a gaming state that continues until a predetermined condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied, the special figure 2 reservations are obtained, and before the 2nd special symbol lottery based on the acquired special symbol 2 reservations is executed, the first special symbol lottery based on the already acquired special symbol 1 reservation will be executed. .

In this 14th control example, the time saving termination condition for ending the time saving state is the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the total number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed). ) reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times), so if the first special symbol lottery is executed after the time saving state is set, the time saving state will be changed accordingly. The number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed during the game decreases, and a time saving state is set for the player (a benefit that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery) There was a problem that it could not be given enough.

Furthermore, in this fourteenth control example, similarly to the sixth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won). The content of the game is advantageous to the player), so if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state and a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is established. Nevertheless, there is a problem in that a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, and the player's desire to play decreases. In addition, in this 14th control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the probability of winning a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery are set to be the same, so as described above, during the time saving state, There is a problem in that a player who wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is made to think that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, further reducing his desire to play.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example is configured so that a small hit is won in some of the lottery results that do not result in a big hit in the special symbol lottery, and the game is executed based on this small win. A specific area (V gate) is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened and operated during a small winning game, and by letting a ball enter (pass through) this specific area during a small winning game, a small winning prize can be won. The winning game is followed by the jackpot game. And, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be a small winning game in which the ball can pass through (win) a specific area (V gate) provided in the V winning device 650 than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the probability of execution (probability of winning an advantageous small win) is high.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed while the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, even though the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. The first special symbol lottery in which it is difficult to win an advantageous small hit will be executed. In other words, since the possibility of a jackpot game being executed during the time-saving state set for a specific period becomes low, the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced by executing the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. There was a problem.

In addition, when the above-mentioned problem is set, that is, when the time saving state is set, various problems occur due to the first special symbol lottery being executed before the second special symbol lottery is executed. In order to suppress this, every time the first special symbol lottery is executed, an action is taken to stop the left-handed game so as not to acquire a new special symbol 1 reservation, and in that case, the operation of the game decreases. There was a risk that a new problem would arise.

On the other hand, in the present fourteenth control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a grace period (wait time) is provided before the special symbol lottery is executed, and the grace period (wait time) is set. ), it is configured such that it is possible to play a right-handed game and obtain the special figure 2 hold. With this configuration, even if you win a jackpot with the special symbol 1 pending in the normal state and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol lottery will be executed. Since it is possible to obtain the special figure 2 reservation by the right-handed game beforehand, it is possible to suitably provide an advantageous game to the player during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 473, the special symbol lottery is not executed while the jackpot game is being executed, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is set and the wait time is Set. A detailed explanation will be given later, but whether or not to set a wait time is configured to be determined depending on the acquisition status of special figure 2 reservations at the start timing of the ending period, and at the start of the ending period. The configuration is such that a wait time is set when a predetermined number (one) of 2 pending items has been acquired.

When the wait time is set, a 15 second charge time effect (see FIG. 471) is executed in correspondence with the wait time. Then, when the wait time ends, execution of the special symbol lottery is permitted and the special symbol lottery is started. On the other hand, if a predetermined number (1 piece) of special figure 2 reservations has been acquired at the start timing of the ending period of the jackpot game, the wait time will not be set, and after the jackpot game ends (the time saving state is set). (Immediately after), execution of the special symbol lottery is permitted.

The presentation mode of the ending effect (ED effect) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on whether or not a wait time is set. If the performance mode (see Fig. 471 (a)) indicating that the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game (charge time performance is executed) is set, and the wait time is not set, a special A performance mode (see FIG. 471(b)) indicating that a symbol lottery is to be executed is set.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, before the special symbol lottery is executed, the game state in which it is possible to obtain the special symbol 2 reservation is determined. Since it is possible to inform the player in advance whether or not the waiting time is set, it is possible to smoothly execute the game during the wait time.

In this fourteenth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a wait time depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is on hold at the start timing of the ending period of the jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the system to determine whether or not to set a wait time based on the number of reserved special drawings 2 at a specific timing during a jackpot game, it is possible to ensure that a wait time is set (not set). Players can be notified in advance.

Note that the timing for determining whether or not to set the wait time is not limited to the timing shown in the fourteenth control example (starting timing of the ending period of the jackpot game), and may be any other timing. For example, whether or not to set a wait time can be determined based on the start timing of a jackpot game, the timing when the progress of a jackpot game satisfies a specific condition (for example, the end of the 5th round), the end timing of the ending period of a jackpot game, etc. Also good. In addition, it may be decided whether or not to set the wait time before the jackpot game is executed. In this case, if it is determined that the jackpot game ends with the special drawing 2 pending ( For example, it may be decided not to set the wait time in a state in which the special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the jackpot fluctuation is executed.

Furthermore, in the present fourteenth control example, the wait time is not set when one special figure 2 pending is acquired after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, if it is determined that the first special symbol lottery to be executed after the end of the jackpot game will be the second special symbol lottery instead of the first special symbol lottery, the wait time is not set. There is. With this configuration, in a situation where the first special symbol lottery is not (hardly) executed immediately after setting the time saving state, that is, in a situation where the special symbol 2 reservation has already been obtained, the second special symbol lottery is executed. can be executed smoothly.

In addition, in this 14th control example, the wait time is not set when one special figure 2 reservation is acquired, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if two or more special symbols 2 reservations are acquired, the wait time is not set. The configuration may be such that the wait time is not set when a predetermined number of items have been acquired. In other words, in a state where only one special symbol 2 pending has been acquired, depending on the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol lottery to be executed, a new Since there are cases where it is not possible to acquire a new special pattern 2 reservation, the waiting time setting condition is that the execution period during which the second special symbol lottery is being executed is a sufficient period (time saving) to acquire a new special symbol 2 reservation. It is better to configure the wait time so that the wait time is not set when the special drawing 2 pending is a predetermined number of 2 or more pieces so that the waiting time is sufficiently longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery executed during the state. . Thereby, when the wait time is not set, it is possible to easily prevent the special symbol 2 reservation from being exhausted and the first special symbol lottery being executed thereafter.

In addition, instead of determining whether to set the wait time depending on whether or not there is a special figure 2 hold (number of special figure 2 hold) that has been obtained, the second special is executed in response to the acquired special figure 2 hold. It may be configured to determine whether or not to set a wait time depending on the length of the variation time of the symbol lottery (variation). In this case, the winning information (pre-reading information ) based on the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to each special symbol 2 reservation, and based on the analysis result, a sufficient period (time saving) to acquire a new special symbol 2 reservation. It is preferable that the wait time is set to a time (sufficiently longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery executed during the state).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 477. In this fourteenth control example, in contrast to the sixth control example described above, a partial configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has, and a partial configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has. The difference is that some configurations have been changed, but the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same configurations will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(a). FIG. 474(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 474(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example has a standby general figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202sa, which is different from the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example described above. The difference is that ``is added, otherwise they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The waiting normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202sa is used to select normal symbol lottery (variable ) is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern, and is configured such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the obtained value of the second variation type counter CS2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 475, the contents of the waiting regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202sa will be explained. FIG. 475 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the standby regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202sa. As shown in FIG. 475, the waiting normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202sa has a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second, regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the general figure short fluctuation is selected.

In other words, the normal symbol lottery executed during the wait time is configured such that a variable time of 1 second is always set. With this configuration, by continuously playing the right-handed game during the wait time set for 15 seconds, it is possible to easily obtain the upper limit (4 pieces) of special symbols 2 pending.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as shown in FIG. 475, regardless of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation pattern is the regular symbol short with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Although the configuration is such that a variation is selected, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be configured in which a variation pattern with a different variation time can be selected as a variation pattern to be selected, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second may be selected. In addition to the basic variation pattern, a short variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the basic variation pattern and a long variation pattern with a longer variation time than the basic variation pattern may be provided.

In this way, by providing a variation pattern in which variation times of different lengths are set, it is possible to vary the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed within a specific period (during wait time), so it is possible for players to Therefore, it is possible to provide a new game feature of determining whether or not it is possible to obtain the upper limit number of special symbols 2 pending during the wait time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 474(b), the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example sets the standby flag 203sa and the standby timer to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example described above. The difference is that 03sb is added, and the rest is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The waiting flag 203sa is a flag to indicate that the wait time is currently in progress, and is set to ON when the wait time is set. The standby flag 203sa is referred to in various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when determining whether to execute a control process executed during a wait time.

Specifically, the flag setting status is determined in the standby process (see S1081 in FIG. 483) executed in the main process 14 (see FIG. 480) that is executed every 4 milliseconds (12101 in FIG. 483), If it is determined that it is set to on (S12101 in FIG. 483: Yes), the value of standby timer 03sb is updated, control processing according to the updated value of standby timer 03sb is executed, and the timer is turned on. If it is determined that it has not been set (S12101 in FIG. 483: No), execution of the above-described process is omitted. By providing a flag to indicate whether or not the current wait time is in progress, it becomes possible to easily determine the current status in various control processes simply by determining the setting status of the flag. .

As described above, the waiting flag 203sa is set to ON during the period when the wait time is set, so when the wait time is set at the end timing of the jackpot game (S12012 in FIG. 482: Yes) ), it is set to ON (C12014 in FIG. 482), and it is set to OFF when the wait time period has elapsed (C12107 in FIG. 483).

The waiting timer 203sb is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the wait time, and when the wait time is set at the end timing of the jackpot game (S12012 in FIG. 482: Yes), the wait time is set. A value indicating the length of the period (a value corresponding to 15 seconds) is set (S12013 in FIG. 482). Then, the value set in the standby process (see S1081 in FIG. 483) executed in the main process 14 (see FIG. 480) that is executed every 4 milliseconds is updated (subtracted) (S12102 in FIG. 483). , is referenced when determining the end timing of the wait time (S12103 in FIG. 483).

In addition, in this control example, if a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the wait time, the value of the waiting timer 203sb is decremented to 0 without waiting for the set period of the wait time to elapse. The configuration is such that the wait time ends without waiting for the wait time. Specifically, the configuration is such that when the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the wait time reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the end condition is satisfied and the wait time ends. In this manner, when the wait time end condition is satisfied, the value of the waiting timer 203sb is cleared to 0 regardless of the current value (S12106 in FIG. 483).

Next, with reference to FIG. 476, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 476(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 476(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example described above. The difference is that a selection table 222sa is added, and the rest is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The character selection table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when selecting a display mode type to indicate the acquisition status of the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) during the time saving state, and includes: Different character types (display mode types) are displayed in correspondence with the winning information of the corresponding special figure 2 hold (pre-read result of judgment of validity), the number of acquired special figure 2 hold, and the value of the acquired production counter 223f. specified to be selected.

The display mode using the character type (display mode type) selected with reference to this character selection table 222sa is displayed in the first stock area Dm52a to fourth stock area Dm52d of the stock area Dm52 displayed during the charge time performance. Is displayed. With this configuration, the characters displayed in the stock areas Dm52a to Dm52d can be used to display not only the number of reserved special symbols 2 obtained but also the results of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved special symbols 2 obtained in advance. Players can make predictions.

Therefore, during the charge time presentation, it is possible to provide the player not only with the pleasure of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, but also with the pleasure of predicting the game to be executed in the future, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the detailed contents of the character selection table 222sa will be explained with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character selection table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 477, the character selection table 222sa includes four types of characters, the corresponding pre-determination result of special figure 2 reservation (pre-reading result of validity judgment), the number of special figure 2 reservation, and the value of the production counter 223f. It is defined in relation to

Specifically, when the winning information is "Jackpot", regardless of the number of reserved special drawings 2, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", "Lion" as the character type, “Zou” is defined as a character type in the range “90 to 98”. In addition, if the winning information is "Small win" and the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "1 to 3", if the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 69", the "turtle" is " "Elephant" is defined in the range "70-89" and "lion" is defined in the range "90-98" as character types. On the other hand, when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4", "snake" is in the range of "0 to 39", "turtle" is in the range of "40 to 69", and "turtle" is in the range of "40 to 69", and " "Lion" is defined in the range "70-89" and "elephant" is defined in the range "90-98" as character types.

Furthermore, if the winning information is "lost" and the special figure 2 pending number is "1, 2", the "turtle" is in the range of "0 to 39" and "40" is the value of the obtained production counter 223f. ``Snake'' is defined as a character type in the range of ``89'' and ``lion'' is defined as a range of ``90 to 98.'' On the other hand, when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "3, 4", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "snake" in the range "0-39" and "turtle" in the range "40-89". , "lion" is defined as a character type in the range "90 to 98".

As described above, in the fourteenth control example, the selection ratio of character types to be selected is varied based on the preliminary determination result included in the winning information. Specifically, when the preliminary determination result is a "jackpot", that is, when the preliminary determination result is most advantageous to the player, "lion" is most likely to be selected, followed by "elephant". "snake" and "turtle" are not selected. Therefore, when the display mode corresponding to the character type of "lion" or "elephant" is displayed in the stock area Dm52a, the player may be informed that the preliminary determination result indicates that the player has acquired the special drawing 2 reservation with a jackpot. can be predicted.

In addition, the selection rate for the above-mentioned "lion" and "elephant" character types is set lower than when the preliminary determination result is a "jackpot", but the selection rate is lower than when the preliminary determination result is a "jackpot". It is also specified that it can be selected when the result is a disadvantageous "small win" or when the preliminary determination result is a "miss" which is more disadvantageous (most disadvantageous) than a "small win". In other words, the configuration is such that it can be selected no matter what the preliminary determination result is. With this configuration, the display mode corresponding to the character type of "lion" or "elephant" may always be displayed, so the display mode of "lion" or "elephant" may be displayed in the stock area Dm52a. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to a situation in which the display is not displayed for a long time.

Next, the character types selected when the preliminary determination result is a "small hit" or a "miss" will be explained. As shown in FIG. 477, when the preliminary determination result is a "small hit" or a "miss", the selection ratio of various character types is made different depending on the number of reserved special figures 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to arouse interest not only in what type of character is displayed in the stock area Dm52a, but also in what position in the stock area Dm52a and what type of character is displayed. The performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as explained with reference to FIG. 477, for 1 special figure 2 pending, the character type is selected based on the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 pending. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the character type may be configured to be selectable based on winning information corresponding to other special drawing 2 reservations, for example, corresponding to already acquired special drawing 2 reservations. The character type to be selected is different depending on whether the winning information includes a “big win” or “small win” (advantageous preliminary determination result) as a preliminary determination result or not. The selection ratio of character types may be different.

Furthermore, if the pre-reading result of winning information corresponding to this special drawing 2 reservation is an advantageous pre-judgment result, and the pre-reading result of winning information corresponding to another special drawing 2 holding has an advantageous pre-judgment result. That is, in the case where there are two or more preliminary determination results that are advantageous to the player, if there are not two or more advantageous preliminary determination results, a specific character type that is not selected (hard to be selected) (e.g. , panda) may be specified in a selectable manner. In this way, by configuring the player to be able to predict a plurality of preliminary determination results using one character type, until the last character is displayed in the stock area Dm52a (the fourth Until the character type corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is selected), it is possible to perform a performance that does not make the player bored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 476(b), the contents stipulated in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be explained. FIG. 476(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 476(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example is charged with respect to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example described above. The difference is that a mid-time flag 223sa and a charge time counter 223sb are added, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The charge time flag 223sa is a flag to indicate that a charge time performance is being executed, and is a flag used in the command determination process 14 (see C13113 in FIG. 484) for determining various commands output from the main controller 110. ) is set to on (C13304 in FIG. 486) when it is determined that a standby start command has been received (C13301 in FIG. 486: Yes) in the standby-related command processing executed in (see C13202 in FIG. 486). . If it is determined that the standby end command has been received (C13307 in FIG. 486: Yes), it is set to off (C13308 in FIG. 486).

The setting status of this charge time flag 223sa is referred to when a normal symbol winning related command indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won is received (C3581 in FIG. 487), and the charge time flag 223sa is set to on. If it is determined that a command related to winning a common map has been received in the state where the character is playing (C3581: Yes), that is, if the winning of a common map is won during the charge time performance, a special message will be sent to encourage friend stock (gathering fellow characters). A display command for executing the effect is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the setting status of the charging time flag 223sa is also referred to in other processes. It is also referred to when determining whether or not. In this case, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state based on the information stored in the state storage area 223ea where the currently set gaming state is stored, and then the charging time flag 223sa is set. By determining the setting situation, it is determined whether the current time is a charge time performance or a normal time-saving game. Then, based on the determination result, the performance mode of various performances (for example, variable performance and demonstration performance) to be executed in the pachinko machine 10 is determined. Thereby, when the same gaming state is set, it is possible to execute a performance that corresponds to a more detailed gaming situation, so that it is possible to perform a performance that is easy to understand for the player.

The charge time counter 223sb is a counter for measuring the elapsed time of the charge time performance, and when the charge time performance is executed, a value corresponding to the performance period is set, and the main counter is periodically executed. In the effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 162) of the process (see FIG. 162), it is updated (subtracted) periodically (every 1 millisecond). This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the elapsed time of the charge time effect (the elapsed time of the wait time) without receiving a dedicated command from the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of commands output from the main control device 110.

When the charge time effect ends, the set value is cleared when a standby end command is received from the main controller 110. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the value of this charge time counter 223sb is configured to be referenced in various processes executed to execute the charge time effect. It is referred to when determining the performance mode of the normal symbol winning performance that is executed when a winning is won in the variable performance or the normal symbol lottery.

In addition, in the present fourteenth control example, by updating the value of the charge time counter 223sb, it is possible to measure the same timing as the timing at which the standby end command output from the main controller 110 is received. However, when it is decided to actually end the charge time effect, it is configured to be executed based on a standby end command output from the main controller 110. Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the value of the charge time counter 223sb, the charge time effect can be ended at an appropriate timing based on the command output from the main controller 110.

<About the control processing content in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 478 to 487, the content of control processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be explained. In this 14th control example, in contrast to the above-mentioned 6th control example, some of the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 and the contents of the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 are explained. The difference is that some parts and parts have been changed, but other than that they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 478 to 483, the content of the control process executed by the main control device 110 MPU 201 in the fourteenth control example will be described. In this 14th control example, with respect to the above-mentioned 6th control example, special symbol variation processing 14 (see C10004 in FIG. 478) is performed instead of special symbol variation processing 5 (see C104 in FIG. 344), and normal symbol variation processing 5 (see C106 in Fig. 350), normal symbol fluctuation processing 14 (see C10006 in Fig. 479), main processing 14 (see Fig. 480) in place of the main processing (see Fig. 357), and jackpot control processing 5 (see Fig. 480). The difference is that jackpot control processing 14 (see C11004 in FIG. 481) is executed instead of C1004 in FIG. 358), but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 478, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing 14 (C10004) will be explained. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 14 (C10004). As shown in FIG. 478, in the special symbol variation process 14 (C10004), when the standby flag 203sa is set to on for the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see C104 in FIG. 344), that is, If the current wait time is in progress, the process (C202 to C225) for executing the special symbol lottery (variation) is skipped, and the new special symbol lottery (variation) is configured so that it is not executed. There is a difference.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see C104 in FIG. 344) is started, it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (C201), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (C201: No). Next, it is determined whether the standby flag 203sa is set to on (C281). Then, in the process of C281, if it is determined that the standby flag 203sa is set to on (C281: Yes), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C281, if it is determined that the standby flag 203sa is not set to on (C281: No), then the process of C202 to C225, which is the same as the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see C104 in FIG. 344), is performed. Execute the process and end this process. With this configuration, execution of a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be prohibited (suppressed) during the period in which the wait time is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 479, the processing contents of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (C10006) will be explained. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (C10006). This normal symbol variation processing 14 (C10006) is a special variation in the state where the waiting flag 203sa is set to on (during wait time), in contrast to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation processing 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350). The difference is that a control process for determining the fluctuation time by referring to a pattern table is added, but the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the normal symbol variation process 14 (C10006) is executed, the same processes C601 to C615 as the above-described normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) are executed. In the process of C615, if it is determined that the current time is being shortened (time saving state) (C615: Yes), then it is determined whether the standby flag 203sa is set to on (C681), and it is turned on. If set, that is, if it is determined that the wait time is in progress (C681: Yes), set the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) using the waiting normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202sa. , the process moves to C623.

On the other hand, in the process of C681, if it is determined that the standby flag 203sa is not set to on, that is, if it is determined that the current time is not in the wait time but in a time saving state, the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation processing 5 ( The process in C617, which is the same as in C106 in FIG. 350, is executed, and then the process proceeds to C623.

In other words, in this control example, when the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, different fluctuation pattern selection tables are used during the wait time and other times. It is configured such that the variation time of the symbol can be determined. More specifically, in the time saving state, the configuration is such that it is easier to set a short variable time during the wait time than in other cases. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to efficiently acquire the special symbol 2 hold during the wait time, and also to allow the player to frequently play the game with the regular symbol during the time saving state after the wait time has elapsed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is unnecessarily entered into the second ball entrance 640 due to the execution of the ball.

In other words, when a wait time is set that prohibits the execution of special symbol drawings, the wait time can be increased by quickly securing the special symbol 2 hold up to the upper limit by executing the regular symbol variation with a short variation time. Since the time can be ended quickly, the player can efficiently play the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, even after the wait time has elapsed, if a regular pattern variation is executed with the same variation time as during the waiting time, the second ball entrance 640 will be entered in a state where the upper limit number of special pattern 2 reservations has been acquired. Situations in which a ball wins frequently occur, and for example, during a small winning game, it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the V winning device 650 (because the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640). If the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, it may become difficult for the player to reach the V winning device 650, which is located below the second ball entry port 640. The problem that an excessive number of prize balls are awarded is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present 14th control example, in the short time state after the wait time has elapsed, the normal figure variation is more likely to be executed with a longer variation time than during the wait time, so the above-mentioned It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 479, the normal symbol variation process 14 (C10006) is the same process (C616 to C623) as the normal symbol variation process 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) except for the control processing content described above. is executed and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the main processing 14 will be explained with reference to FIG. 480. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 14. As shown in FIG. 480, main processing 14 replaces jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) as processing executed every 4 milliseconds with respect to the main processing of the sixth control example described above (see FIG. 357). The difference is that the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) is executed and a new standby process (C1081) is added, but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) executed in the main process 14 (see FIG. 480) of the 14th control example will be explained. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of jackpot control processing 14 (C11004). As shown in FIG. 481, the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process 5 (see C1004) in the processing contents executed at the start timing of the ending period and the end timing of the ending period. They are different in that they are

Specifically, when the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) is executed, first, the same processes C1201 to C1210 as the jackpot control process 5 (see C1004 in FIG. 358) are executed. Then, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (C1210: Yes), the value (N2) of the special chart 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (C12001), and the acquired value (N2) It is determined whether is 0, that is, whether special drawing 2 reservation has not been acquired (C12002). Then, the obtained value (N2) is 0. In other words, if it is determined that the special drawing 2 hold has not been acquired at the start timing of the ending period of the jackpot game (C12002: Yes), the setting conditions for setting the wait time after the jackpot game ends are satisfied. Therefore, a charge time ending command for announcing a charge time performance to be performed during the wait time is set as the performance mode of the ending performance to be performed during the ending period (S12004), and this processing is ended. .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command for charge time set in the process of C12004, it displays a display mode (Fig. 471(a)) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of C12002, the obtained value (N2) is not 0. That is, if it is determined that the special drawing 2 hold is obtained at the start timing of the ending period of the jackpot game (C12002: No), the setting conditions for setting the wait time after the jackpot game ends are satisfied. Since it is not, a normal effect command is set (C12003) and this processing is ended. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal ending command set in the process of C12003, it notifies the player in advance that no charge time will be set after the end of the jackpot game (a normal time-saving game will be executed) as an ending effect. A display mode for doing so (see FIG. 471(b)) is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in advance (during the jackpot game) of the game content after the jackpot game ends, so that the player is not allowed to play a game corresponding to the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends. It can be made easier.

In the process of C1210, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (C1210: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the ending period (C1212), and if it is the end timing of the ending period. If it is determined (C1212: Yes), the same processes as C1213 to C1215 are executed as the jackpot control process 5 (see C1004 in FIG. 358), and then the standby setting process is executed (C12005), and this process ends. .

Next, the contents of the standby setting process (C12005) will be explained with reference to FIG. 482. FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the contents of the standby setting process (C12005). This standby setting process (C12005) is a control process executed at the end timing of the ending period of the jackpot game, and is a process for setting a wait time.

As shown in FIG. 482, when the standby setting process (C12005) is executed, first, the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e is acquired (C12011), and the acquired value (N2) is 0. It is determined whether there is, that is, whether special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired (C12012). Here, if it is determined that the obtained value (N2) is 0 (C12012: Yes), a value corresponding to the wait time period of 15 seconds is set in the standby timer 203sb (C12013), and the wait time is The standby flag 203sa is set to ON to indicate that it has been set, a wait start command including information indicating the wait time (wait time period) is set (C12015), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C12012, if it is determined that the value (N2) obtained in the process of C12011 is not 0 (is 1 or more) (C12012: No), the values of C12013 to C12015 for setting the wait time are determined. Skip the process and end this process.

As explained above, in this 14th control example, the number of special figure 2 reservations at the end timing of the jackpot game is determined, and the wait time is set when it is determined that the special figure 2 reservations have not been acquired. It consists of Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the wait time is set even though the special symbol 2 hold is obtained, and the execution start timing of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state is delayed. .

Further, in this control example, the number of reserved special drawings 2 is determined at the timing when the ending period of the jackpot game starts, and a command based on the determination result is output. That is, the configuration is such that information related to whether or not to set a wait time can be outputted to the audio lamp control device 113 before the timing at which it is actually determined whether or not to set a wait time. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a wait time is set before actually determining whether or not to set a wait time, and the performance based on the determination result is actually performed. This can be executed before it is determined whether or not to set a wait time.

In addition, in this 14th control example, in the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) described above with reference to FIG. 481, it is configured to set different ending commands depending on the number of special drawings 2 pending at the start timing of the ending period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a command indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 at the start timing of the ending period may be set. In addition, based on the content of the number of reserved balls command that is set when the number of reserved special figures 2 increases or decreases, the number of reserved special figures 2 is always managed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is always managed during the jackpot game. 2. Determine the number of reservations, predict whether or not a wait time will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the determination result, and determine the performance mode of the jackpot performance to be executed during the jackpot game based on the prediction result. It may be configured such that the determination is made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483, the contents of the standby process (C1081) executed in the main process 14 (see FIG. 480) will be explained. FIG. 483 is a flowchart showing the contents of the standby process (C1081). In this waiting process (C1081), an update process regarding the set wait time is executed.

When the standby process (C1081) is executed, first. It is determined whether the standby flag 203sa is set to on (C12101), and if it is determined that it is set to on (C12101: Yes), the value of the standby timer 203sb is updated (C12102), and then, It is determined whether the updated value of the waiting timer 203sb is 0, that is, whether the time (15 seconds) set as the wait time has elapsed (C12103).

If it is determined in the process of C12103 that the value of the waiting timer 203sb is not 0 (C12103: No), the wait time has not elapsed, so next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved ball number counter 203e ( It is determined whether N2) is 4, that is, whether the upper limit number of special map 2 reservations has been acquired (C12104), and it is determined that the value (N2) of the special map 2 reservation ball number counter 203e is 4. If (C12104: Yes), the wait time end condition is satisfied and the wait time is forcibly ended before the wait time elapses (15 seconds have elapsed), and a wait shortening command is set ( C12105), resets the value of the standby timer 203sb (C12106), sets the standby flag 203sa to off (C12107), sets a standby end command to indicate that the wait time has ended (C12108), and Finish the process.

In addition, in the process of C12103, if it is determined that the value of the waiting timer 203sb is 0 (C12103: Yes), this means that the wait time has elapsed (15 seconds have elapsed). The process of C12108 is executed and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C12104, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 4 (C12104: No), the wait time has not elapsed and the special figure 2 reserved Since the upper limit number of wait times has not been acquired, that is, the condition for ending the wait time has not been met, the process ends immediately. In addition, in the process of C12101, if it is determined that the standby flag 203sa is not set to on (C12101: No), this process ends as it is because no wait time has been set.

As explained above, in this 14th control example, the end conditions for ending the set wait time are based on the time end condition that is satisfied based on the passage of time and the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired. The conditions for ending the number of reservations that are satisfied are defined in advance. With this configuration, there will be a period in which the special symbol lottery is not executed while the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit, that is, a period in which the player cannot have a gaming purpose. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this 14th control example, a command can be set to indicate which end condition is satisfied to end the set wait time (time end condition, pending number end condition). ing. In other words, if the pending number end condition is met, it is confirmed that the game that should be executed during the wait time (the game that obtains the maximum number of special drawing 2 pending) has been completed, and the time end condition is satisfied. In this case, there is a high possibility that the game that should be executed during the wait time (the game that obtains the maximum number of special drawing 2 reservations) cannot be completed.

Therefore, by outputting a command to indicate the satisfied termination condition, the performance mode that indicates the result of the charge time performance (performance performed during wait time) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the game played during the wait time was appropriate.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 483, the wait time end condition is a time end condition that is established based on the passage of time, and a reservation that is established based on the acquired number of special drawing 2 reservations. Although several end conditions are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only a time end condition may be provided. With this configuration, when the wait time is set, the period from the end of the jackpot game until the next special symbol lottery is executed is always constant regardless of the number of special symbols 2 pending. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a specific effect that is executed for a certain period of time.

In addition, it may be configured to provide a composite ending condition that combines the number of special drawings 2 reserved and the elapsed time. For example, in a state where one special drawing 2 holding is acquired, 15 seconds is set as the time ending condition. , Even if the configuration is configured such that 10 seconds is determined as the time end condition in a state where 2 special map 2 reservations are acquired, and 8 seconds is determined as the time end condition in a state where 3 special map 2 reservations are acquired. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different time end conditions according to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, so it is possible to make it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservations up to the upper limit number. Furthermore, as mentioned above, by configuring the compound end condition such that the greater the number of special drawing 2 reservations that have been acquired, the shorter the time is set as the time end condition, the minimum number of special drawing 2 reservations can be obtained. At the same time, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation up to the upper limit number.

In addition, in this control example, it is determined whether or not to set the wait time depending on the acquisition status of special drawing 2 reservations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the number of special drawings 2 reservations, jackpot games It may be configured such that a wait time is always set after the completion of the process. With this configuration, the processing for setting the wait time can be simplified.

Further, it may be determined whether or not to set the wait time according to the amount of benefits (amount of prize balls) given to the player instead of the number of reserved special drawings 2. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that a wait time is set when the amount of benefits given to the player exceeds a predetermined amount within a certain period of time. In other words, if the amount of benefits given to the player exceeds a predetermined amount in a certain period, by setting a wait time that restricts the execution of the special symbol lottery, more benefits will be given to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a jackpot is won again immediately after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, during the wait time, the game by the player is not completely stopped, but only the special symbol drawing is regulated, so for example, the normal symbol drawing is executed in the same way as in the normal time saving state. It happens. Therefore, if the player continues to play the game while the wait time is set, the lottery for a common symbol and the game for a common symbol similar to the normal time saving state will be executed.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game during the wait time without greatly reducing the number of balls that the player has, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable playing the game than when the game is completely stopped. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 484 to 487, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described. This fourteenth control example differs from the sixth control example described above in that command determination processing 14 (see C13113 in FIG. 484) is executed instead of command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360), Other than that, the same processing is executed. Note that for the content of the same control processing, refer to the sixth control example described above, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination processing 14 (C13113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 484. FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination processing 14 (C13113). As shown in FIG. 484, in command determination processing 14 (C13113), if it is determined that a winning command has been received (C3210: Yes) in response to command determination processing 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360), a winning related command In place of process 5 (C3211), win-related command process 14 (C3281) is executed, and a process for determining whether a standby-related command has been received is newly executed (C13201), and a standby-related command is received. The difference is that a process (C13202) for executing a standby-related command process when it is determined that the process has been executed (C13201: Yes) is added. The other processes executed are the same, and the same process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 485, the contents of winning status determination processing 14 (C13402) will be explained. FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning status determination processing 14 (C13402). This winning status determination process 14 (C13402) is executed in the winning information command process 5 (C3202) that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process 14 (see C13113 in FIG. 484) that a winning information command has been received. This is a process that is executed in place of the winning situation determination process (see C3402 in FIG. 362) that is executed in the sixth control example described above.

In this winning situation determination process 14 (C13402), a process is executed to determine the symbol type included in the received winning information command and to execute a performance according to the gaming state in correspondence with the determined symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 485, when the winning status determination process 14 (C13402) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to a regular symbol winning (normal symbol winning) (C3451). ), if it is determined that it is a common drawing prize (C3451: Yes), the same processes as C3452 to C3457 are executed as the above-described winning situation determination process (see C3402 in FIG. 362), and the process moves to C3458.

In addition, in the process of C3453, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), then it is determined whether the gaming state is the time saving state (C3481), and it is determined that it is the time saving state. If so (C3481: Yes), the character type of the character (see FIG. 472(b)) to be displayed in the stock area Dm52 (see FIG. 472(b)) is determined with reference to the character selection table 222sa (C3482). , sets a display command to indicate the determined character (C3483), and proceeds to the process of C3458. On the other hand, in the process of C3481, if it is determined that the time saving state is not present (C3481: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of C3458.

After the process of C3458, the same processes (C3458 to C3461) as the winning status determination process of the sixth control example described above (see C3402 in FIG. 362) are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, the character type to be displayed in the stock area Dm52 is determined based on the winning of the common drawing. Since the display mode corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending is displayed in the stock area Dm52, in this control example, the display mode corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending is determined by the winning of the regular drawing. It is composed of With this configuration, the display mode of special drawing 2 pending is based on the pre-reading result, which creates a novel gaming experience in which the player is motivated to win a common drawing (passing Tama to the through gate 67). can be provided to players.

Note that the configuration for determining the character type displayed in the stock area Dm52 is not limited to the configuration of this control example. For example, in the winning situation determination process 14 (see C13402 in FIG. FIG. 2 Executes the process of determining whether or not a winning information command corresponding to a winning prize has been received, and if it is determined that a winning information command corresponding to a special drawing 2 winning prize has been received, the character selection table 222sa is referred to, and this time The character type may be determined based on the information included in the received winning information command and the number of reserved special drawings 2.

With this configuration, at the timing when the number of special figures 2 pending increases, the display mode corresponding to the increased number of special figures 2 pending can be changed to the character type based on the pre-reading result, so it is possible to create an effect that is easy for players to understand. can be provided.

Next, the processing contents of the standby-related command processing (C13202) will be explained with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of standby-related command processing (C13202). In this standby-related command processing (C13202), it is determined that various commands related to wait time settings have been output from the main controller 110, and a charge time performance is executed during the wait time according to the received command type. Processing for determining the aspect is executed.

When the standby-related command processing (C13202) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a standby start command (C13301), and if it is determined that it is a standby start command (C13301: Yes), The wait time, that is, the currently set wait time period (number of seconds) is extracted from the received command, and a value corresponding to the extracted number of seconds is set in the charge time counter 223sb (C13302).

Although not shown, the value set in the charge time counter 223sb in the process of C13302 is periodically set (every 1 millisecond) in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 162), like other counters. It is updated in the effect update process that is executed. Then, it is referred to in order to vary the performance content of the charge time performance executed during the wait time according to the value of the charge time counter 223sb (according to the passage of time).

In this way, in this control example, the command indicating that a wait time has been set (standby start command) includes information indicating the currently set wait time period (number of seconds), and wait-related commands are Based on the reception, the elapsed time (remaining time) of the wait time is managed on the audio lamp control device 113 side. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the elapsed time (remaining time) of the wait time without periodically outputting information regarding the elapsed time (remaining time) of the wait time from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 486, the explanation continues. After completing the process in C13302, a display command for indicating the charge time is set (C13303), the charge time flag 223sa is set on (C13304), and this process is ended. By setting the charge time flag 223sa to ON in the process of C13304, it is possible to determine whether the charge time performance is currently being performed (wait time).

On the other hand, in the process of C13301, if it is determined that the standby start command has not been received (C13301: No), then it is determined whether the standby shortening command has been received (C13305), and if the waiting shortening command has been received. If it is determined (C13305: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the gathering of all members (C13306), and the process moves to C13307. By the display command set in the process of C13306, the wait time is displayed with the display mode (see 472 (b)) to congratulate the acquisition of the maximum number of special map 2 reservations during the wait time. It can be terminated.

With this configuration, even if the wait time suddenly ends while there is still time left in the wait time, the player is notified that the player has completed the game that was to be executed during the wait time. This makes it possible to clearly notify that the wait time has been forcibly terminated (reduced).

In the process of C13305, if it is determined that the standby shortening command has not been received (C13305: No), or if the process of C13306 is finished, then it is determined whether the standby end command has been received (C13307). If it is determined that the standby end command has been received (C13307: Yes), processing is executed to end the charge time performance. Specifically, the charge time flag 223sa is set to off (C13308), the value of the charge time counter 223sb is cleared (C13309), a display command is set to indicate the end of charge time (C13310), and the main Finish the process. Also, if it is determined in the process of C13307 that the standby end command has not been received (C13307: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, the contents of the win-related command processing 14 (C3281) will be explained with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of win-related command processing 14 (C3281). In this win-related command processing 14 (C3281), instead of the win-related command processing 5 (see C3211 in FIG. 364) executed in the sixth control example described above, it is executed when a win-related command is received. The difference is that the processing contents are different, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 487, when win-related command processing 14 (C3281) is executed, first, the processing of C3501 to C3505, which is the same as the above-mentioned win-related command processing 5 (see C3211 in FIG. 364), is executed, and C3505 If it is determined in the process that a command related to a common map has been received (C3505: Yes), it is determined whether the charging time flag 223sa is on (C3581). That is, in the process of C3581, it is determined whether or not the normal figure is hit during the wait time.

If it is determined in the process of C3581 that it is set to on (C3581: Yes), the display mode for notifying the player that it is a chance to obtain special drawing 2 reservation is for displaying to encourage buddy stock. The command is set (C3582), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the charging time flag 223sa is not set to ON (C3581: No), a display command corresponding to the current gaming situation is set (C3506), and the process is immediately terminated.

As mentioned above, during the wait time, execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited (regulated), so this is a period in which the special symbol 2 reservation is exhausted. Therefore, this is a period in which it is easier to obtain special symbol 2 reservations up to the upper limit number than the period in which the special symbol lottery is being executed. In this way, during a period in which it is easy for the player to acquire up to the upper limit number of Tokuzu 2 reservations, when a situation in which it is possible to obtain 2 Tokuzu 2 reservations (normal map hit) occurs, a display prompting the player to acquire 2 Tokuzu 2 reservations is displayed. By displaying the mode (see FIG. 472(a)), it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<15th control example>
Next, a fifteenth control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 488 to 506. In the 14th control example described above, when starting the execution of the special symbol lottery, the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball) and the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) are In a gaming machine that preferentially executes the second special symbol lottery when the execution conditions for the special symbol lottery are satisfied in a state where the holding ball of the second special symbol ( If there is no special pattern 2 pending), you can set a wait time for 15 seconds during which special symbol variations are not executed (a time-saving gaming state in which special symbol variations are not executed), and set a period during which it is easy to obtain special pattern 2 pending. It was composed of

That is, when a winning result (big hit or small hit) is won in the first special symbol or second special symbol lottery, after the end of the jackpot game, the game state is a time saving state (special symbol low probability state, The high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and before the special symbol lottery starts again, it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol, and if it is determined that there is no reserved ball, A wait time (a time-saving game state in which special symbol variations are not executed) is set for 15 seconds in which the special symbol lottery is not executed, and a period is provided for the player to accumulate reserved balls for the second special symbol.

During the wait time (a time-saving state in which the execution of special symbol variations is prohibited), when executing the normal symbol lottery, the variation pattern is set to the dedicated variation type setting means (waiting normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202sa). ) was used to configure the settings. In other words, the normal pattern variations that are referred to when the gaming state is normal (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or time-saving state after the wait time ends (time-saving state where execution of special symbol variations is allowed) Unlike the pattern selection table, by referring to the standby normal pattern variation pattern selection table dedicated to waiting time and determining the variation pattern of normal pattern lottery, it can be set during normal state or time shortened state after waiting time. A short variation time is set that is shorter than the normal symbol variation time (short variation), and compared to the case where the normal state or the time-saving state after the wait time is set, the player can hold the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The structure was designed to make it easier to save money (withholding). However, during the wait time, a normal pattern variation with a short variation time is always set, so if the player plays the game so that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, Because the player can easily obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the player's expectation of acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not change every time, and there is a fear that the game during the wait time becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, in the present fifteenth control example, a time saving state in which it is easy to store reserved balls with special symbols and a time saving state in which it is difficult to store reserved balls with special symbols can be set. Specifically, when executing the normal symbol lottery during the wait time, similar to the 14th control example, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table dedicated to the wait time is used to select the variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery. is determined, but the difference is that multiple types of fluctuation patterns are provided as normal symbol fluctuation patterns. Three types of fluctuation patterns are set for the normal symbol fluctuation pattern exclusive to the wait time: a time when it is easy for the player to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol, a time when it is possible to store, and a time when the player cannot store the reserved balls. ing.

With this configuration, even in the same time-saving game state, it is possible to set a time-saving game state in which it is easy to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol and a time-saving game state in which it is difficult to accumulate, and the player can Since the game can be executed while paying attention to whether the state is a time-saving game state in which it is easy to obtain the reservation of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game state from becoming monotonous.

In addition to this, in the present fifteenth control example, as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops once or the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops four times, the time-saving game state is terminated. They differ in that they set the end of .

With this configuration, if the second special symbol cannot be reserved during the wait time, the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed immediately after the wait time ends. By stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first variation, the time-saving game state ends without executing the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player, resulting in a disadvantageous result for the player. Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol during the time-saving gaming state can provide a new gaming experience that is extremely disadvantageous to the player. In addition, since the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed immediately after the wait time ends, it is possible to encourage players to more actively participate in the wait time performance, creating a more tense wait time performance. can be provided.

In addition, in this 15th control example, as mentioned above, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the wait time (during the time-saving game state), the time-saving game state where it is easy to accumulate reserved balls for the special symbol, and the special symbol Although it is configured so that it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state in which it is difficult to accumulate reserved balls, the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state in which it is easy to win a lottery with a normal symbol and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to win a lottery with a normal symbol is set. It may be configured so that this is possible. This can prevent the time-saving game from becoming monotonous.

Further, a time saving state in which the electric accessory 640a is open for a long period of time and a time saving state in which the electric accessory 640a is open for a short period may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a time-saving game state in which it is easy to store reserved balls with special symbols, and a time-saving game state in which it is difficult to store reserved balls with special symbols, which solves the problem that time-saving games become monotonous. It can be solved.

In addition, by configuring the system so that different wait time periods (for example, 15 seconds and 5 seconds) can be set based on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to create a time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to accumulate reserved balls for special symbols, and for special symbols to It may be configured such that it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state in which it is difficult to accumulate reserved balls.

In addition, by changing the variation time of the special symbols executed during the time-saving gaming state without setting a wait time period, we have created a time-saving gaming state where it is easier to accumulate reserved balls for special symbols, and a time-saving gaming state where it is easier to accumulate reserved balls for special symbols. It may be configured such that a time-saving gaming state can be set. Further, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbols during the time-saving game may be determined based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbols.

Furthermore, in this control example, as described above, as a period for the player to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot game, the wait time (time saving game state) in which the special symbol is not changed for a certain period of time is ), but the execution period of the wait time (time-saving gaming state) in which changes in special symbols are not executed for a certain period is not limited to after the end of the jackpot game, but the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player during the time-saving gaming state It may be executed before the fluctuation of .

For example, after the end of a jackpot game, when two second special symbols are stored and one first special symbol is stored, and the special symbols start changing. , The fluctuation starts preferentially from the fluctuation of the second special symbol, but the wait time is executed before the stored hold of the second special symbol is all exhausted and the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the period during which the wait time starts may be randomly set during a jackpot game or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the time-saving game while keeping the player interested in when the wait time will be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game from becoming monotonous.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 488, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 488 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. In the present 15th control example, in contrast to the 14th control example described above, an opening/closing lid 64a and a right first prize opening 64r are provided in the right side game area (the game area where the ball fired in the right-handed game can flow down). They differ in some respects.

As shown in FIG. 488, in the game board 13 of the fifteenth control example, an opening/closing lid 64a and a right first prize opening 64r are provided in the right side game area. And, by right-handed game, the game ball flowing down the right side game area is configured so that it can win the right first prize opening 64r. Similar to the first winning hole 64, the right first winning hole 64r is used to draw a first special symbol when a game ball enters the right first winning hole 64r. Specifically, when a ball enters the right first winning port 64r, the first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first winning port switch (not shown) is turned on. A jackpot lottery is then performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Furthermore, the right first prize opening 64r serves as a prize ball opening from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters.

Furthermore, the right first prize opening 64r is accompanied by an opening/closing lid 64a. This opening/closing lid 64a is a lid member that can be changed between an open position that allows a ball to enter the right first winning port 64r and a closed position that prohibits a ball from entering the right first winning port 64r. , While the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, it is constantly driven while switching between an open position and a closed position.

In other words, the opening/closing lid 64a serves as a regulating means for regulating the winning of the ball to the right first winning opening 64r. As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth control example, when a left-handed game in which the ball falls down the left side area of the game board 13 is executed, the ball enters the first winning hole 64. When playing a right-handed game, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the right first prize opening 64r, so no matter which game method is used, the first special It is configured to be able to establish an opportunity to execute a symbol lottery.

Here, when a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by a left-handed game (a game in which a ball enters the first ball entry port 64) is executed, when 250 balls are fired, While the configuration is such that about 15 balls enter the first ball entry port 64, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by a right-handed game (to the right first entry port 64r). When a game in which a ball enters the ball) is executed, about 5 balls are configured to enter the right first prize opening 64r when 250 balls are launched. .

In other words, when playing a game whose purpose is to execute the first special symbol lottery, a left-handed game that can efficiently establish an opportunity to execute the first special symbol lottery is an advantageous game for the player. It is configured so that Further, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery is set to the second The first special symbol is shorter than the special symbol, and in the normal state, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the electric accessory 640a is often in the closed state, and the second prize opening 640 is Since it is difficult to enter a game ball, a game aiming at executing a lottery using the first special symbol is more advantageous for the player than a game aiming at executing a lottery using the second special symbol.

Therefore, during the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to execute a left-handed game in which the game ball enters the first winning hole 64. Then, when a jackpot or small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a right-handed game in which the game ball enters the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 provided on the right side area of the gaming area. is executed, and the gaming state shifts to a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).

In this control example, the time saving state ends when the variation of the first special symbol stops once or the variation of the second special symbol stops four times, and the state shifts to the normal state. There is. Further, when the second special symbol is not reserved at the end of the jackpot game, a wait time is set for 15 seconds in which the lottery of the special symbol is not executed. Therefore, the player executes a right-handed game in order to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640 in order to obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

However, when the jackpot game starts, if there is no reserved ball in the first special symbol, the right-handed game will be executed until the end of the time-saving game state, so the reservation of the first special symbol will not be accumulated, Wait time or shift to time-saving games. In other words, in order to prevent the time-saving game from ending due to a single stop of fluctuation of the first special symbol, there is a risk that the gameplay of aiming to accumulate a large number of reserves of the second special symbol during the wait time may be impaired. was there.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, the right first winning hole 64r is provided in the right side area of the game board 13, in which the reservation of the first special symbol is stored when the ball enters. By providing the right first prize opening 64r in the right side area of the game board 13 in this way, even if a jackpot game is started and the player executes a right-handed game without the reservation of the first special symbol being stored, , Since the game ball is configured so that one ball enters the right first prize opening 64r during a jackpot game, the first special symbol is not stored and the game shifts to wait time or a time-saving game. The game can be executed without impairing the game property of aiming at accumulating a large number of second special symbols.

In this control example, the first right electric accessory 64a is configured to be driven at all times, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be provided in which a through gate is provided. In addition, it is not limited to the first right electric accessory 64a, but may be configured so that the game balls flowing down the right-handed channel are distributed to the right first prize opening 64r at a ratio of one ball to every number of balls by the distribution means. .

<About the production content of the 15th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 489 to 492, the characteristic presentation contents among the various presentations executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be explained. In this 15th control example, it is configured so that different lengths of variation time can be set as the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation executed during the wait time, and according to the set variation time, It is configured such that the number of normal symbol drawings to be executed is variable.

Specifically, during the wait time that is set for a certain period (15 seconds), a long variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds or more (for example, a variation pattern with a 16 second variation) is set as a variation pattern of normal symbol variation. In this case, the wait time ends without the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery being displayed even once, and it is no longer possible to obtain special symbol 2 pending during the wait time. On the other hand, if a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as a variation pattern of normal symbol variation, it becomes possible to execute the normal symbol lottery multiple times during the wait time, and as a result, It is possible to execute the game per regular figure a plurality of times, and it is configured so that a large number of special figure 2 reservations can be obtained.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set a wait time for a certain period, the degree of acquisition of special drawing 2 pending during the wait time can be varied, so the wait time is set. It is possible to make the players interested in the game content (normal symbol lottery) during the wait time.

In this control example, the performance mode of the performance performed during the wait time (charge time performance) is determined according to the game content (normal symbol lottery) performed during the wait time. By understanding the content of the charge time performance, the player can predict the result of the regular symbol lottery (set variation pattern and lottery result) executed during the wait time. .

Furthermore, in this control example, the charge time effect executed during the wait time is configured to continue to be executed even after the wait time has elapsed, and the charge time effect allows the special figure 2 to be held during the wait time. The acquisition status, the acquisition status of the special symbol 2 pending during the time saving state after the wait time has elapsed, and the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving state ends (the second special symbol drawing using the special symbol 2 pending obtained during the time saving state) The player is configured to be able to inform the player of the results of the special symbol lottery through a series of performances. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, various game contents to be executed based on the setting of the time saving state can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 489(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game. Among the various display modes displayed on the display screen, the display modes explained in each of the control examples described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 489(a), when the charge time effect is started, an effect in which a character 821 imitating a rabbit and a character 822 imitating a turtle compete is executed in the main display area Dm. The display screen shown in FIG. 489(a) shows the state immediately after the wait time is set, and "15 seconds remaining" is displayed in the display area Dm51 as a value indicating the remaining time of the wait time. There is. Then, as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player on the gaming method to be executed, the characters "Right-handed hit" are displayed in the display area Dm4, and the game area where the ball should fall is displayed in the display area Dm52. An image showing the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area near where the second winning hole 640 is arranged) is displayed.

In this way, by using a guidance notification mode that combines a notification mode using text and a notification mode using images, it is possible to notify the player of the gaming method to be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. . In addition, although FIG. 489(a) shows only the guidance notification mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the guidance notification mode, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be executed by voice. The player may be informed of the game method to be played, or the notification mode may be such that the player is encouraged to fire the ball toward the vicinity of the second prize opening 640 using light emitting means (LED etc.) provided on the game board 13. May be used.

In the sub-display area Ds, a comment such as "Charge time is in progress!! Collect the capsules before the rabbit" is displayed as a display mode for explaining the content of the charge time performance to the player. In this way, by notifying the player in advance of the content of the performance that will be executed from now on, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

Here, an overview of the performance executed during the charge time performance will be explained. When the charge time performance is executed, the character 822 imitating a turtle starts moving in response to the normal symbol lottery (variation), and the character 821 imitating a rabbit starts moving in response to the first special symbol lottery (variation). An effect that moves (starts) in response to is executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 489(a), the character 821 does not move (start) during the wait time (a period in which the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited), so the character 821 is displayed as dozing. displayed in the following manner.

Then, the character 822 that moved (started) before the character 821 starts moving at a moving speed corresponding to the set variation time of the normal symbol lottery (variation), and the result of the normal symbol lottery that is being executed When a game to win a regular pattern is executed based on the fact that is a winning win, and a special pattern 2 reservation is obtained during the game to win a general pattern, a display mode ( An effect to obtain a capsule (see capsule 823a in FIG. 489(b)) is executed.

After that, when the wait time ends, an effect of opening the capsule acquired by the character 822 is performed in correspondence with the execution of the second special symbol lottery, and the display mode for showing the result of the executed second special symbol lottery is changed to the capsule. The effect that appears from 823a is executed (see FIG. 490(b)). On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 hold cannot be obtained during the wait time, that is, if the first special symbol lottery (variation) is executed after the wait time has elapsed, the character 822 may obtain the capsule 823a before the character 822 obtains the capsule 823a. At this point, the character 821 starts moving and an effect of chasing the character 822 is executed (see FIG. 491(b)). Then, an effect in which the character 821 catches up with the character 822 is performed in accordance with the timing at which the first special symbol lottery (variation) is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the time saving state ends) (see FIG. 492(a)). At that point, if the character 822 has acquired the capsule 823, at the end of the time saving state, a second special symbol lottery using the acquired special symbol 2 hold (a second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state) An effect of opening a capsule is executed in response to the execution of the special symbol lottery (see FIG. 492(b)).

Since the display screen shown in FIG. 489(a) is in wait time, the display area Dm1 where the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. In the displayed display area Dm2, a special aspect "-" is displayed to indicate that the execution of the special symbol lottery (variation) is currently prohibited. In this way, by displaying the special aspect, the situation where the special symbol lottery (variation) is not executed can be changed to simply that the execution conditions for the special symbol lottery (variation) are not satisfied (the special symbol reservation has not been obtained). ) situation, the execution of the special symbol lottery (variation) is prohibited, or the special symbol lottery (variation) being executed is synchronized with the third symbol due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the administrator to understand whether the player or the administrator is playing the game.

Furthermore, in the display area Dm1a for indicating the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 pending) of the first special symbol obtained, "2" is displayed to indicate that two special figure 1 pending balls have been obtained. The characters are displayed, and the display area Dm2a for indicating the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) of the second special symbol obtained indicates that the situation is such that no special figure 2 reserved balls have been acquired. The character "0" is displayed to indicate the value.

In other words, in the situation shown in Figure 489, if the wait time elapses (ends) without acquiring special symbol 2 reservation, the first special symbol lottery, which is executed with no priority over the second special symbol lottery, This is executed, and the time saving state ends after the first special symbol lottery ends. Therefore, the player who is faced with the situation shown in FIG. 489 plays the game enthusiastically in an attempt to obtain the special figure 2 hold during the wait time, and at the same time, the player does not want the special figure 2 hold based on the performance content of the charge time performance to be executed. The charge time effect will be watched closely to predict whether the game situation is such that it is easy to obtain the charge. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 489(b), a description will be given of the effect screen of the charge time effect that is displayed at the time when the special figure 2 hold is acquired during the wait time. FIG. 489(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a normal symbol variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is executed.

As shown in FIG. 489(b), the character 822 is configured to have a different display mode depending on the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation being executed. On the display screen, a display mode with a fast movement speed is displayed as a display mode indicating that a variation pattern with a short variation time (3 seconds) is set as a variation pattern of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the display mode of the character 822 according to the length of the variation time of the normal symbol variation being executed, the wait time can be adjusted by understanding the display mode of the character 822 displayed on the display screen. It becomes possible for the player to predict whether or not a winning game will be executed during the game, or the period until the game winning a winning symbol will be executed.

Further, in this control example, the shorter the variation time of the normal symbol variation being executed, the faster the display mode in which the moving speed of the character 822 is set is set. The further away the character 822 is from the starting point (see FIG. 489(a)), that is, the further away from the character 821 who is dozing at the starting point (see FIG. 489(a)), the more special map 2 reservation is acquired. It is configured so that a performance that can notify the player of what is easy to do is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 489(b), the capsule 823a is displayed on the display screen as the character 822 moves. Then, a normal symbol winning game is executed based on the fact that the normal symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win, and a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the common symbol winning game. By doing so, when the special drawing 2 reservation is acquired, the display screen shown in FIG. 489(b), that is, the effect in which the character 822 acquires the capsule 823a is executed.

By executing such an effect, it is possible to predict the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation being executed according to the display mode (moving speed) of the character 822, and furthermore, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation being executed can be predicted. Since it is possible to display the capsule 823a on the display screen before the fluctuation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a game with a winning pattern will be executed soon. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 490(a), the display screen displayed at the end of the wait time (charge time) will be described. FIG. 490(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the end of the wait time. As shown in FIG. 490(a), when the charge time (wait time) ends, "0 seconds" is displayed in the display area Dm51 to indicate that the remaining time of the wait time is 0 seconds, and the wait time The characters "TOTAL4GET" are displayed in the display area HR1 as a result notification mode for notifying the number of reserved special drawings 2 acquired during the game. In other words, the diagram shown in FIG. 490(a) shows an example where four special symbols 2 are reserved during the wait time, and the character 822 is displayed in four capsules 823a to 823a in the main display area Dm. A display mode indicating that 823d has been obtained is displayed, and the character "4" indicating that the current number of reserved special symbols 2 is 4 is displayed in the display area 2a.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a message "Charge time is over!! Capsule opening time has entered!!" is displayed as a guidance form to inform the player that the wait time has ended and the special symbol lottery (variation) will be executed. Comments will be displayed.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 490(a), when the wait time has elapsed and execution of the special symbol lottery is permitted, the second special symbol lottery is executed, and on the display screen, the character 822 is displayed at the charge time. An effect of opening the capsule 823 acquired during the wait time is executed (see FIG. 490(b)).

Here, an example of the display screen that is displayed when the wait time has elapsed while the special figure 2 reservation is acquired will be explained with reference to FIG. 490(b). FIG. 490(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the second special symbol variation is executed for the second time after the wait time has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 490(b), in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 822 attempts to open the capsule 823 in response to the start of the second special symbol fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation stops. An effect in which the ticket 824 appears from within the capsule 823 is performed at a predetermined time (3 seconds) before the display. Thereafter, an effect is performed in which the contents of the ticket 824 are displayed in synchronization with the timing at which the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

In other words, if the wait time elapses while the special symbol 2 hold is acquired, the second special symbol variation is executed as a special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, so the capsule 823 ( A performance using a special figure 2 (capsule simulating a hold) is performed. In this way, by executing the effect using the capsule 823 displayed on the display screen, the player can easily understand that a game using the special drawing 2 hold obtained during the wait time is being executed. I can do it.

In addition, this 15th control example is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing when the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is stopped and displayed, so it is of course possible to end the special symbol variation period in which the time saving state is not satisfied. In addition, the special symbol variation time in which the time saving state is established also becomes the time saving state. Since this time-saving state is also a period in which new special drawing 2 reservations can be obtained, if a new special drawing 2 reservation is acquired, a new special drawing 2 reservation can be obtained as shown in FIG. 490(b). An effect is performed in which a capsule 823e corresponding to the hold is dropped from above.

In this way, not only the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the wait time, but also the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time-saving state after the wait time has passed (the time-saving state in which execution of special symbol fluctuations is allowed), By notifying using 823, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the total number of special drawing 2 reservations acquired during the time saving state.

The diagram shown in FIG. 490(b) shows that the wait time has ended with four special symbols 2 reserved, and the second special symbol variation is being executed for the second time after the wait time has elapsed. The figure shows a state in which the capsule 823a corresponding to the first second special symbol lottery after the wait time has elapsed has already been released (indicated as "completed" in the figure), and the second special symbol lottery An effect using the capsule 823b corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is being executed. Capsules 823c and 823d corresponding to the remainder of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the wait time, and capsule 823e corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 reservation are displayed.

In other words, the user has three unopened capsules 823. Since this unopened capsule 823 corresponds to the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation number, "3" is displayed in the display area Dm2a as a display mode indicating the number of special figure 2 reservations. In addition, in this control example, the time saving state continues until the second special symbol variation is executed four times (until the fourth second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), so during that time, the new special symbol 2 This is the period during which you can obtain a hold. Therefore, the comment "Capsule opening time is in progress! Additional chance until four capsules are opened" is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is the period in which a new special drawing 2 reservation (capsule 823) can be obtained, making it easier for the player to continue playing right-handed games. can. In addition, since the period until the end of the time-saving state is announced in accordance with the performance being executed, players can simply grasp the progress status of the performance displayed on the display screen and enter the time-saving state (capsule). You can understand the period during which you can earn the money. Furthermore, by displaying used (opened) capsules, the player can easily grasp the period (total number of opened capsules) until the end of the time saving state.

Next, the content of the effect executed when the normal symbol variation executed during the wait time is a long variation (16 seconds) will be explained. FIG. 491(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a long variation (16 seconds) normal symbol variation is executed during the wait time. In this figure, the differences from the above-mentioned FIG. 489(b), that is, the differences in the performance contents with respect to the difference in the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation executed during the wait time will be mainly explained.

As described above, when the normal symbol variation is executed during the wait time, an effect in which the character 822 corresponding to the normal symbol variation moves (starts) is started, but as shown in FIG. 491(a), the character 822 is displayed in a display mode in which the movement speed is slower than the display mode when a short time (3 seconds) is set as the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 489(b)). In other words, an effect is executed in which the distance between the character 821 and the character 821 that moves (starts) in response to the first special symbol variation is not far away. Since the wait time (15 seconds) elapses before the normal symbol fluctuation for which the fluctuation time of 16 seconds is set stops and is displayed, the character 822 does not acquire the capsule 823 (special symbol 2 pending). An effect in which the character 821 moves (starts) is executed without acquiring the character 821. At this point, it is not possible to obtain special symbol 2 pending during the wait time, and the first special symbol lottery is executed after the wait time has elapsed. ” is displayed.

Here, in this control example, since the time saving state is configured to end when the first special symbol variation is executed once (stopped and displayed), after the wait time has elapsed, the first special When a symbol variation is executed, the period until the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed becomes a time-saving state. In other words, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed during the time saving state.

However, since it is possible to obtain special symbol 2 pending during the execution period of the first special symbol variation, as shown in Figure 491(b), the period until the first special symbol variation in progress is stopped and displayed. At this point, an effect is performed to encourage the player to obtain the special map 2 reservation. Specifically, a performance is performed in which the character 821 catches up with the character 822 in accordance with the stop display timing of the first special symbol variation, and a performance is performed in which the character 822 aims to acquire the capsule 823a before the character 822 catches up.

In this control example, different variation times can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, with the shortest variation time being 1 second and the longest variation time being 30 seconds. It is configured so that In other words, the configuration is such that the number of special symbols 2 reserved that can be obtained during the first special symbol variation period can be varied depending on the variation time set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. are doing. The display mode of the character 821 that is moved in response to the first special symbol variation is also configured to vary depending on the set variation time.

With this configuration, when the effect in which the character 821 chases the character 822 vigorously is executed on the display screen as shown in FIG. In a state in which a short variable time is set as the time, that is, in a state in which the remaining period of the period in which special drawing 2 reservation can be obtained is short, and an effect is executed in which the character 821 chases the character 822 with a weak momentum, , visually informs the player that a long variation time is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed, that is, the remaining period of the period in which the special symbol 2 reservation can be acquired is long. It is possible to provide information in an easy-to-understand manner.

The diagram shown in FIG. 491 shows a state in which one special symbol 2 hold is acquired during the execution of the first special symbol variation in the time saving state, and the character 822 acquires the capsule 823a, and the display area Dm2a is , "1" is displayed indicating that the number of reserved special drawings 2 is one. In addition, a display mode indicating that the first special symbol is currently changing is displayed in the display area Dm1. In addition, in order to notify the player that the wait time has elapsed and the execution of the special symbol lottery is permitted (normal state), a second special symbol is placed on the second special symbol for which the special symbol lottery is not being executed. In the display area Dm2 where the corresponding third symbols are displayed, combinations of third symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the past are displayed. In this way, by changing the display mode of the third symbol according to whether the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited or allowed, rather than whether or not the special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to determine the current state. It is possible to notify the user in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the first special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 492(a), a display screen in which the character 821 has caught up with the character 822 is displayed, indicating that the time saving state has ended. As a mode of indicating this, the words "Capsule release time has entered" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. This capsule opening time is an effect that corresponds to the second special symbol lottery during the normal state using the special symbol 2 hold obtained during the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 492(a), since the time saving state has ended with the special drawing 2 reservation (capsule) acquired, the player is notified that the capsule opening time will be executed, but for example, If it is not possible to obtain special pattern 2 pending during the wait time, and it is also not possible to obtain special pattern 2 pending during the first special symbol variation, the time saving state ends in the first special symbol variation. After the stop display, in order to return to the normal game (a game that executes the first special symbol lottery in the normal state), the end screen of the charge time effect is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 492(a), and the sub display area A guidance mode of "Please hit left-handed" is displayed on Ds.

Next, the performance contents after the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is stopped and displayed will be explained with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when the time saving state ends and the second special symbol lottery using the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state is executed during the normal state. This is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 492(b), even if the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, if there is an acquired special map 2 pending (capsule 823 remains on the display screen) In this case), an effect (capsule opening time) is executed to execute the second special symbol lottery using the remaining special symbol 2 reservation. During this capsule opening time, the normal state is set as the gaming state and it is difficult to obtain a new special drawing 2 pending, so this is to show the acquisition of the special drawing 2 pending that was displayed during the time saving state. The notification mode (see FIG. 491(b)) is not displayed. Then, an effect in which the character 822 opens the capsule 823 is executed. Note that the content of the effect of opening the capsule 823 is the same as the effect executed during the time saving state, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, during the capsule opening time, it is difficult to obtain a new special drawing 2 hold, and there is no need to notify the player of the period until the time saving state ends like during the time saving state, so it is not necessary to inform the player of the period until the time saving state ends. The completed capsule 823 (see FIG. 490(b)) is not displayed, and only the unopened capsule 823 is displayed in order to indicate only the remaining number of times the second special symbol lottery can be performed. . With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many chances there are left to execute the second special symbol lottery.

<About the electrical configuration of the 15th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 493 to 497, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example has a partial configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 changed from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example described above. They differ in some respects and are the same in other respects. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 493. FIG. 493 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the ROM 202 of this control example has the first win type selection table 5 table 202eb instead of the first winning type selection table 202eb, unlike the ROM 202 of the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 474(a)). Winning random number 15 table 202ta, variation pattern 15 table 202tb instead of variation pattern 5 table 202ee, small winning type selection 15 table 202tc instead of small winning type selection 5 table 202eg, waiting normal figure variation pattern selection table 202sa The difference is that a standby ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection 15 table 202td is provided instead of , and other than that, the present invention is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning type selection 15 table 202ta will be explained with reference to FIG. 494(a). FIG. 494(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 15 table 202ta. As shown in FIG. 494(a), the first winning type selection 15 table 202ta includes the special pattern 1 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta1, which is referred to when winning a jackpot in the special pattern 1 drawing, and the special pattern 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 15 table 202tb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 494(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 15 table 202tb1 will be explained. FIG. 494(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta1. The pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, three types from jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is set to "0", "jackpot AA (15R time saving 4 jackpots)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "jackpot AB" is specified in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time-saving four-time jackpot)" is defined, and a "jackpot AC (4R time-saving four-time jackpot)" is defined in the range of "16 to 99."

In other words, in a normal state in which a left-handed game is played and the special drawing 1 lottery is executed, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the jackpot game ends. There is. The time-saving end condition is set such that the special symbol variation is always executed four times.

The number of round games to be executed as a jackpot game is defined to have a different value depending on the jackpot type, and jackpot AA is "15R", jackpot AB is "7R", and jackpot AC is "4R" round game. is specified to be executed. The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so jackpot AA is most advantageous to the player in terms of jackpot games executed. Next, jackpot AB becomes the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta2 will be explained. FIG. 494(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta2. The pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot type is defined as "Jackpot AD (15R time saving 4 jackpot)", and the value is in the range of "20 to 69". "Jackpot AE (12R time-saving 4-time jackpot)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and "Jackpot AF (7R time-saving 4-time jackpot)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta2 is similar to the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 15 table 202ta1, and the rounds executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type. The number of games is varied, and it is specified that a round game is executed with a jackpot AD of "15R", a jackpot AE of "12R", and a jackpot AF of "7R". The greater the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of jackpot games executed. Next, jackpot AE becomes the most advantageous jackpot, and jackpot AF becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot.

As described above, in this control example, when any jackpot type is won, the time-saving gaming state is set, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped once, or the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped four times. A condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is set in the event that this occurs. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand the gaming method of the wait time performance and the time saving game performance.

The variation pattern 15 table 202tb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( It is configured so that various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery results of the special drawing lottery and the set gaming state.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 15 table 202tb will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(a). FIG. 495(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 15 table 202tb. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the variation pattern 15 table 202tb is the normal variation pattern 15 table 202tb1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the normal variation pattern 15 table 202tb1 that is referenced when the gaming state is the time saving state. The game machine has a time-saving variation pattern 15 table 202tb2, and the special symbol variation pattern is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the special symbol variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 495(b), the contents of the normal variation pattern 15 table 202tb1 included in the variation pattern 15 table 202tb will be explained. FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 15 table 202tb1. As shown in FIG. 495(b), the variation pattern 15 table 202tb defines different variation patterns depending on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1. There is.

As described above, in the present fifteenth control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game in which the special symbol 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed, and the second special symbol ( The pattern in which the special figure 2) lottery is executed is a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed according to the special figure 2 reservations (maximum 4 pieces) that are held and stored at the end of the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 495(a), the variable pattern 15 table 202tb includes a normal variable pattern 15 table 202tb1 used in the normal gaming state and a time saving variable pattern table used in the time saving gaming state. 202tb2 are set respectively.

FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern 15 table 202tb1. The normal fluctuation pattern 15 table 202tb1 includes various fluctuation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, such as short loss (7 seconds), loss (30 seconds), and super reach (30 seconds to 60 seconds). seconds) and win A (30 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set determination value.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short error (7 seconds) is selected, and when it is "140 to 179", error (30 seconds) is selected. , and "180 to 198", the respective determination values are set so that each type of super reach (60 seconds) is selected.

Various types of super reach (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are set as fluctuation patterns selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), and the obtained fluctuation type A corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparing the value of the counter CS1 with the set determination value. Here, the player is notified of a jackpot by displaying the third symbol in a row at the same time when the fluctuation is stopped (symbol matching jackpot).

If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, a variation pattern "loss A" in which a variation time of 30 seconds is defined is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Further, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a win, the variation pattern "Win A" in which a variation time of 30 seconds is defined is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 15 table 222tb2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, will be explained. FIG. 495 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 15 table 222tb2.

In this fifteenth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player compared to the special drawing 1 drawing, is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. In addition, as described above, in this control example, it is set that the variation of the first special symbol stops once, or that the variation of the second special symbol stops four times, as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state. There is. Therefore, when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the variation that ends the time-saving gaming state is selected.

The time-saving variation pattern 15 table 222tb2 has short variation (1 second) and medium variation as variation patterns that are selected regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit) or a loss. (15 seconds) and long fluctuation (30 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set determination value.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 18", short fluctuation (1 second) is selected, and when it is "19 to 159", medium fluctuation (15 seconds) is selected. The determination values are set such that when the value is "160 to 198", the long variation (30 seconds) is selected.

As described above, in this control example, the time-saving game state is configured to end when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops once or when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops four times. Further, the lottery result for the second special symbol is configured to be more likely to be an advantageous result for the player than the lottery result for the first special symbol. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to obtain more reservations of the second special symbol while the first special symbol is varied by referring to the time saving variation pattern 15 table 202tb2.

In this control example, as mentioned above, the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time-saving gaming state has three types of variation: short variation (1 second), medium variation (15 seconds), and long variation (30 seconds). A pattern is set. If a long variation (30 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the longest variation time of the first special symbol during the time-saving gaming state is set, so the second It is easy to memorize reserved balls with special symbols, and this is the most advantageous variation pattern for the player. Next, the medium fluctuation (15 seconds) becomes a fluctuation pattern advantageous to the player. If the short fluctuation (1 second) is set, it is difficult to memorize the held ball of the second special symbol, so the short fluctuation (1 second) becomes the most disadvantageous fluctuation pattern for the player. There is.

In this way, by configuring the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time-saving gaming state so that multiple types can be set, the player can avoid the situation where the wait time ends and the variation of the first special symbol starts. Even if the second special symbol is changed, the ease with which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be obtained can be varied depending on which fluctuation pattern is set.

On the other hand, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 (second special symbol) and the lottery result is "lost", the fluctuation pattern "missing A" with a prescribed fluctuation time of 30 seconds is acquired. is selected regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern "Win A" with a specified variation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. Selected regardless of value.

Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "Small hit AD, AE", the fluctuation pattern "Win A" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is stipulated, and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0". -149'' and the variation pattern "Win B" with a 20-second variation time is selected when the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 198". specified to be selected.

In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, the 30-second variation pattern is basically selected, and the variation performance (time-saving A performance or time-saving A production) corresponding to the 30-second variation pattern is basically selected. B) is configured to be executed. In addition, the configuration is such that a 20-second variation pattern is selected in some cases when a small win is won.

The small winning type selection 15 table 202tc is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery. This small win type selection 15 table 202tc is different from the small win type selection 5 table 202eg (see FIG. 337) of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment in that the contents of the specified small win types are changed. , otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, the small winning type selection 15 table 202tc will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 15 table 202tc. As shown in FIG. 496(a), the small winning type selection 15 table 202tc includes the special figure 1 small winning type selection 15 table 202tc1, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the first special symbol. , special figure 2 small winning type selection 15 table 202tc2, which is a data table for determining the type of small winning game for the second special symbol, are respectively set.

FIG. 496(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small winning type selection 15 table 202tc1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, the three types of small hit AA, small hit AB, and small hit AC described above are set to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 39", the small win type is "Small win AA (4 R time shortened 4 times jackpot when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "40 to 49", the small win type is "small win AB (7R time saving 4 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, the value of "40 to 54" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 99", the small win type is "small win AC (2R time saving 4 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "50 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, each small winning type is set with the type of a jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a in the small winning game. In the case of small win AA, a 4R time-saving four-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of small win A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 4R open state is executed, and then a 4-time time saving state is set. It is configured such that the time saving game (the period until the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the first time and the period until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the fourth time) is set. In addition, in the case of a small hit AB, a 7R time-saving four-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AB, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and then a time-saving state is performed. It is configured so that four time-saving games (the period until the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed at the first time and the period until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed at the fourth time) are set. There is. In addition, in the case of small hit AC, 2R time saving 4 jackpots are set, and after the jackpot game, 4 time saving games (until the first special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed) as a time saving state. period and the period until the fourth second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed) are set. In this way, the small win AB is the most advantageous small win type to the player because it has the largest number of rounds executed in the jackpot game and is given a longer time-saving state. Next, the small win AA becomes the small win type that is advantageous to the player, and the small win AC becomes the small win type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

FIG. 496(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning type selection 15 table 202tc2. As the small winning type of the second special symbol, the two types of small winning AD and small winning AE described above are set to be selected depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the value of the small winning type counter C5. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state and the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is one of "0 to 9", the small winning type is "small winning". AD (15R time reduction 4 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "0 to 9" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is any one of "10 to 99", the small win type is "small win AE (4R time saving 4 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "10 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

In addition, if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state and the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is one of "0 to 39", the small winning type is "small winning AD (V When passing, 15R time reduction 4 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "40 to 99", the small win type is "small win AE (7R time saving 4 times jackpot when passing V)".

In this way, for the small winning type for the second special symbol, the number of rounds in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is greater when a prize is won in the V winning hole 650a than for the small winning type for the first special symbol. It is set. Further, the probability of winning a small hit is set higher for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the value of drawing with the second special symbol.

The waiting normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection 15 table 202td is a table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the lottery of normal symbols during the wait time. The standby normal figure variation pattern selection 15 table 202td is different from the standby normal figure variation pattern selection table 202sa (see FIG. 475) in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that a plurality of types of variation patterns are provided. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 497, the standby regular pattern variation pattern selection 15 table 202td will be described. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the standby regular pattern variation pattern selection 15 table 202td. The standby normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 15 table 202td shows normal pattern short fluctuation A (3 seconds), normal pattern short fluctuation B ( 5 seconds) and normal figure middle fluctuation A (16 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 with the set judgment value. Ru.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 199", "regular pattern short fluctuation A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified. selected. If the obtained value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "200 to 899", "regular figure short fluctuation B" with a prescribed fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. . In addition, if the value of the second variation type counter CS2 that is being acquired is within the range of "900 to 999", "general figure middle variation A" with a prescribed variation time of 16 seconds is selected. .

In this control example, the time-saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot game as in the 14th control example described above, but if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored, the special symbol fluctuation starts. A wait time is set to delay the second special symbol by 15 seconds, and the player is configured to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol during the wait time period.

In this control example, as described above, a plurality of types of normal figure fluctuation patterns are set during the wait time period. Since 3 seconds is specified for the "Public Pattern Short Variation A", it is possible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol most efficiently during the 15 second wait period, and it is the most advantageous pattern for the player. This is a variation pattern type. Next, since the "Full pattern short variation B" is stipulated for 5 seconds, it is harder to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol than the "Full pattern short variation A" during the 15 second wait time period, but it is 16 seconds. It is easier to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol than the "regular pattern middle variation A" where is set. Therefore, the "regular pattern short fluctuation B" is the second most advantageous regular pattern fluctuation pattern type after the "regular pattern short fluctuation A". Further, the "normal pattern middle variation A" has a variation time of 16 seconds. Therefore, if "regular pattern middle variation A" is set during the 15 second wait time period, the variation time exceeding the 15 second wait time period will be set, so the second special symbol will be suspended during the wait time period. can't save up. Therefore, the "normal pattern middle variation A" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

With this configuration, even in the same time-saving game state, it is possible to set a time-saving game state in which it is easy to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol and a time-saving game state in which it is difficult to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol. , it is possible to prevent the wait time performance (time-saving game) from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this control example, one type of waiting normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202td is provided that is referred to during wait time, but the table is not limited to this, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202td that is referenced during wait time (during time-saving games) is provided. A plurality of types of figure variation pattern selection tables may be provided, and the common figure variation pattern selection table to be referred to may be switched based on the type of jackpot won.

Further, in this control example, although not shown, the setting of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed when the lottery of normal symbols is won, is determined based on the game state at the time of opening the electric accessory 640a. . In other words, even if the normal symbol variation starts during the time-saving gaming state, if the gaming state is in the normal state when the normal symbol variation that started during the time-saving gaming state stops, the electric winning combination that was set during the normal state The opening time of the object 640a is set. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game that matches the game state.

The setting of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is determined based on the gaming state when the electric accessory 640a is opened after winning a normal symbol lottery, but is not limited to this. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a may be determined based on the gaming state at the time when the normal symbols start changing. With this configuration, even if the game state is in the normal game state when the variation of the normal symbols started during the time-saving game state is stopped, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a during the time-saving game state is set, so the game The player can have an unexpected chance to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 during the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the time-saving game state ends, the player can play the game while expecting that the electric accessory 640a will be released, so that the normal game state can be resumed from just before the end of the time-saving game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game until immediately after the start of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the fluctuation of the normal symbols that started to fluctuate during the time-saving game state stops during the normal state and the electric accessory 640a is released, the electric accessory 640a is released to the player. The second ball entry port 640 may be configured to notify that the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry port 640. With this configuration, the player can play a game by letting the game ball enter the second ball entry port 640 in the normal state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 493(b). FIG. 493 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 493, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the 15th control example is different from the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 474(b)) in terms of the number of special symbol 1 fluctuations. The difference is that a counter 203ta is added. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 variation number counter 203ta is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the first special symbol during time saving, and is set to a value of 1 when the time saving state is set (see Figure 503: C12052). ). Then, when the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted (see Figure 500: C2592), and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends (see Figure 500: C259). . In other words, the special symbol 1 variation number counter 203ea is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time-saving state, and when the variation of the first special symbol stops once during the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving state ends. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 498, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 498, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example has a charge time end flag 223ta added to the RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 476(b)). They differ in some respects. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The charge time end flag 223ta is a flag for indicating that the wait time period has ended, and is set to ON when it is determined that the wait time end condition is satisfied and a standby end command has been received from the main controller 110. (See Figure 505: C13351). Then, it is referred to in the variation pattern command processing 15 (see FIG. 506: C13204), and after the charge time end flag 223ta is set to OFF, the first variation in the time-saving gaming state after the end of the wait time is the variation of the first special symbol. If it is a variation of the first special symbol, a display command is set to indicate a time saving final variation.

<About the control process of the main controller 110 in the 15th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 449 to 503. In this 15th control example, with respect to the 14th control example described above, instead of the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 478), the special symbol variation process 15 (see FIG. 499) is performed, and the time saving update process (see FIG. 346) is performed. ) instead of the time-saving update process 15 (see Figure 500), instead of the time-saving update process (see Figure 346), the time-saving update process 11 (see Figure 448), and the normal symbol fluctuation process 14 (see Figure 479). Instead, the normal symbol variation process 15 (see Figure 501) is replaced with the V passing process 5 (see Figure 354), and the V passing process 15 (see Figure 502) is replaced with the jackpot control process 14 (see Figure 481). The difference is that jackpot control processing 15 (see FIG. 503) is executed, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 15th control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 15th control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the fifteenth control example.

First, special symbol variation processing 15 (C10504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 499. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 152 (C10504). This special symbol variation processing 15 (C10504) is different from the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 478) in that it resets the value of the special symbol 1 variation counter 203ta when a jackpot is won, and saves time. The difference is that the content of the process for updating the game status has been partially changed, but other than that they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 15 (C10504) is executed, first, the same processes C201 to C219 and C281 as the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 478) are executed. When the process of C219 is finished, next, the values of the time saving counter 203g and the special figure 1 variation counter 203ta are set to 0 (C2951), the process of C225 described above is executed, and this process ends. do.

In addition, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C216: No), the time saving update process 15 is executed (C2952), and the same as the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 478) is executed. The processes of C222 and C223 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, time saving update processing 15 (C2952) will be explained with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C2952). This time-saving update process 15 (C2952) is different from the above-mentioned time-saving update process (C221: see FIG. 346) in that the end condition of the time-saving game is changed from the stoppage of fluctuation of the second special symbol to the stoppage of fluctuation of the first special symbol. They differ in some respects and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the time saving update process 15 (C2952), first, the same processes from C251 to C252 as the time saving update process (C221: see Figure 346) are executed, and then the special symbol fluctuation executed this time is the variation of the first special symbol. (C2951). If it is determined that the special symbol variation executed this time is a variation of the first special symbol (C2951: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 variation counter 203ta is subtracted by 1 (C2952), and the process of C255 described above is performed. to move to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special symbol variation is not a variation of the first special symbol (that is, a variation of the second special symbol) (C2591: No), the processing of C2592 and C255 are performed. This is skipped and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C256, as described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 or not, that is, whether the current special symbol variation is the final variation of the time saving (C256). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C256: Yes), the special figure 1 variation counter 203ta is reset to 0 (C2593), the above-mentioned processes of C260 to C261 are executed, and the main Finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (C256: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 203ta is 0 or not. If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 203ta is 0 (C2594: Yes), the above-mentioned processes of C259 to C261 are executed and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 203ta is not 0 (C2594: No), this process is ended as is.

As explained above, the time saving update process 15 (C2952) of this control example is updated so as to end the time saving gaming state when the special symbols stop changing. With this configuration, even if the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, which is one of the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state, the second special symbol will not change until the first special symbol stops fluctuating. It can be set as a period during which a reserved ball of a symbol can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, normal symbol variation processing 15 (C10056) will be explained. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 15 (C10056). This normal symbol variation process 15 (C10056) is different from the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process 14 (C10056: see Figure 478) in that it adds a process to set a command corresponding to the variation time of the selected normal symbol. Different, otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol variation processing 15 (C10056), first, the processing of C601 to C615 is executed, and when it is determined that the time is being shortened in the processing of C615 (C615: Yes), the processing of C681 is executed. In the process of C681, if it is determined that the standby flag 203sa is on (C681: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation time is set using the waiting normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 15 table 202td (C682). Then, a command corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation time set in the process of C682 is set (C691), the process of C623 is executed, and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, a plurality of types of variation times of the normal symbols selected during the wait time are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a time saving in which it is easy to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol and a time saving in which it is difficult to accumulate, without setting different wait time periods.

Next, referring to FIG. 502, V passing processing 15 (C10009) will be explained. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing V passing processing 15 (C10009). This V passing process 15 (C10009) starts a jackpot that is set when a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a during a small hit, in contrast to the above-mentioned V passing process 5 (C109: see FIG. 502). The difference is that the object to be reset is changed from the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea to the special figure 1 variation number counter 203ta before doing so, and other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In V passing process 15 (C10009), first, the same process as the process in C601 to C606 of V passing process 5 (C109: see FIG. 502) is executed, and then the value of special figure 1 variation number counter 203ta is set to 0. (C10601). Then, the process of C608 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 503, jackpot control processing 15 (C11054) will be explained. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 15 (C11054). This jackpot control process 15 (C11054) is different from the above-described jackpot control process 14 (C11004) in that the setting of the gaming state after the jackpot game is different, and other than that is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control processing 15 (C11054), first, the processing of C1201 to C1210, C1212, C12001 to C12004 of the jackpot control processing 14 (C11004) is executed. Then, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 4 (C12051), and then the special figure 1 variation number counter The value of 203ta is set to 1 (C12052). Then, the processes C1214 to C1215 and C12005 described above are executed, and the present process ends.

In this control example, as described above, when any jackpot type is won, the time-saving gaming state is set, and the first special symbol changes once, or the second special symbol changes four times. The configuration is such that when the game stops, the conditions for ending the time-saving game state are met. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game and the conditions for ending the time-saving game state may be set to be different based on the winning jackpot type.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 15th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 506. In the present 15th control example, for the 14th control example (sixth control example) described above, instead of the winning situation determination process (see FIG. 362), the winning status determination process (see FIG. 504) is executed using the standby-related command. (see FIG. 486), standby-related command processing 15 (see FIG. 505) is executed, and instead of variable pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 363), variable pattern command processing 15 (see FIG. 506) is executed. are different, and otherwise are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. Furthermore, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 15th control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applicable to the 15th control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the fifteenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 504, winning status determination processing 15 (C13452) will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of winning status determination processing 15 (C13452). Winning status determination processing 15 (C13452) is a process for setting a different performance mode based on the winning information of the normal symbol received during the time-saving gaming state, in contrast to the winning status determination processing 5 (see FIG. 362) described above. They differ in the points they add. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the winning status determination process 15 (C13452), first, the same process as the process in C3451 to C3453 of the winning status determining process 5 (see FIG. 362) described above is executed, and in the process of C3453, it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state. If it is determined that (C3453: No), it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (C3481). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (C3481: Yes), a command for displaying the capsule corresponding to the received winning information is set (C3491), and the process moves to C3458. On the other hand, in the process of C3481, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (C3481: No), the process of C3491 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C3458.

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, standby-related command processing 15 (C13252) will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of standby-related command processing 15 (C13252). Wait-related command processing 15 (C13252) differs from the above-described wait-related command processing (see FIG. 484) in that it adds processing for setting a flag on to indicate that the wait time has ended. Since the other points are the same, the details will be omitted.

In standby-related command processing 15 (C13252), first, the same processing as C13301 to C13308 of standby-related command processing 15 (C13252) described above is executed, and then the charge time end flag 223ta is set to on (C13351). , this process ends.

By setting the charge time end flag 223ta on here, when the next special symbol variation is started, it can be determined whether it is the first variation after the wait time ends.

Next, variable pattern command processing 15 (C13204) will be described with reference to FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of variable pattern command processing 15 (C13204). Variation pattern command processing 15 (C13204) is different from variation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 363) described above to perform an effect when the first special symbol variation after the end of the wait time is the variation of the first special symbol. The difference is that processing for setting and processing for setting effects during wait time based on the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command are added. Since the other points are the same, the details will be omitted.

In the variable pattern command processing 15 (C13204), first, the processing of C3301 to C3303 is executed, and then it is determined whether the charge time end flag 223ta is on (C3391). If it is determined that the charge time end flag 223ta is not on (C3391: No), it is not the first special symbol change after the wait time ends, so the processes of C3392 to C3394 are skipped and the process moves to C3304. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the charge time end flag 223ta is on (C3391: Yes), the charge time end flag 223ta is set off (C3392) and the process moves to C3393.

Next, it is determined whether the variation executed this time is a variation of the first special symbol (C3395). That is, it is determined whether the first special symbol variation after the wait time ends is a variation of the first special symbol. If it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is the variation of the first special symbol (C3393: Yes), a display command indicating the time saving final variation is set (C3394). If a command indicating the time saving final variation is set here, the display screen when the variation of the first special symbol starts during the time saving game shown in FIG. 491(b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the process of C3393, if it is determined that the variation executed this time is not a variation of the first special symbol (C3393: No), the process of C3394 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3304.

Then, the same processes as those in C3304 to C3306 of the above-described fluctuation pattern command process 5 (C3204: see FIG. 363) are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the charge time flag 223sa is on. (C3395). That is, it is determined whether or not the current wait time period is in progress. If it is determined that the charging time flag 223sa is not on, that is, the current time is not in the wait time period (C3395: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the charge time flag 223sa is on, that is, if it is determined that the current wait time period is in progress (C3395: Yes), the remaining charge time is equal to the normal charge time received from the main controller 110 this time. It is determined whether the remaining time is longer than the normal symbol fluctuation time extracted from the symbol fluctuation pattern command (C3396). If it is determined that the remaining charge time is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be executed this time (C3396: Yes), a command for displaying the high expectation of obtaining capsules is set (C3397) and this process is executed. finish. When the command for displaying the high expectation of acquiring capsules is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect indicating that it is easy to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol during the wait time as shown in FIG. 489(b). will be displayed at

On the other hand, in the process of C3396, if it is determined that the remaining time of the charge time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be executed this time (C3396: No), a command for displaying a low expectation of obtaining a capsule is set. (C3397), this process ends. When the command for displaying the low expectation of obtaining a capsule is set, an effect indicating that it is difficult to obtain the reserved balls of the second special symbol during the wait time as shown in FIG. 491(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. will be displayed at

As explained above, in this 15th control example, the time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation is configured to be subdivided into a plurality of states in which the ease of obtaining the special drawing 2 reservation is made different. are doing. Specifically, during the time saving state, a first period in which the execution of the special symbol lottery is allowed and a second period in which the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited are configured to be settable, and the period is longer than the first period. The second period is structured so that it is easier to obtain special drawing 2 reservations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set periods in which the ease of acquiring the special drawing 2 reservation is different in the same time-saving state, so that the game during the time-saving state becomes monotonous and the game becomes boring early. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<About the issue where excessive balls are awarded in a short period of time>
As mentioned above, after a jackpot game is over, a time saving state (or probability variable state) is set, and when a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed, the probability of a winning game being executed is high. In a machine, if the gaming state changes after the jackpot ends, and then wins the jackpot again while the gaming state has changed (so-called consecutive winnings), the player is given an excessive amount of balls in a short period of time. There was a risk.

On the other hand, in the present fifteenth control example, after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a wait time period in which the variation of the special symbol for which the game state is set is not executed for a certain period of time. Then, at the end of the jackpot game, calculate the ball payout rate (number of game balls paid out ÷ number of game balls hit out) within a predetermined period (for example, within one hour), and It is preferable to configure the wait time period to be set differently based on the ball payout rate. For example, at the end of a jackpot, if it is determined that the ball payout rate within the calculated period exceeds a predetermined upper limit, the wait time period to be set will be set longer than the period normally set. Set. Therefore, during the wait time, the special symbols are not changed, so the ball payout rate does not increase during the wait time.

In this way, by varying the length of the wait time based on the ball output rate within the period, it is possible to prevent excessive balls from being awarded to the player in a short period of time. Note that if it is determined that the payout rate within the period is lower than a predetermined value, the wait time period may be set short. With this configuration, it is possible to draw more special symbols, thereby improving the ball payout rate.

Additionally, if the ball payout rate within the period exceeds a predetermined value, by setting a wait time period, it is possible to prevent players from being given too many balls in a short period of time. However, there is a problem in that the player is unable to participate in the game during the wait time period and loses his or her desire to play.

On the other hand, in this control example, the special symbol lottery is not executed during the wait time, but the normal symbol lottery is configured to be executed. Furthermore, during the wait time, it is a time-saving gaming state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), so the lottery of normal symbols is likely to be executed. Therefore, if the ball payout rate during the period exceeds a predetermined value, the special symbol lottery will not be executed because the wait time period is set long, but the regular symbol lottery can be executed, so the second You can accumulate reserved balls with special designs.

Further, in this control example, as described above, the time-saving gaming state is configured to end when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops once or when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops four times. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from being given too many balls in a short period of time, even if a long wait time period has been executed, the held ball of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is Since a sufficient amount of time can be secured, the player can continue playing the game without losing his or her desire to play.

In addition, when configured in this way, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the wait time for ball output rate adjustment is provided, and the regular symbol fluctuation pattern table is dedicated to the wait time for ball output rate adjustment. It is a good idea to decide on a fluctuation pattern. Further, it is preferable to perform a special performance based on the determined variation pattern of the normal symbols. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the wait time performance from becoming monotonous.

In addition, if the payout rate during the period is less than a predetermined value, the wait time period is configured to be shortened, but in this control example, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped once, Alternatively, the time-saving gaming state is configured to end when the second special symbol stops changing four times. Therefore, when a short wait time is set, the wait time period ends without being able to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the time-saving gaming state ends immediately, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. There is a risk that the situation will become a game situation.

Therefore, when the ball payout rate is below a predetermined value and no reserved balls with special symbols that are advantageous to the player are stored, a short wait time period and a special symbol that is advantageous to the player are activated. It is preferable to configure the setting so that it can be set by adding up the time during which reserved balls can be stored. With this configuration, even if the ball output rate is below a predetermined value, it is possible to secure time to accumulate reserved balls with special symbols that are advantageous to the player, and it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent a game situation from occurring.

Note that the wait time setting period may be any period that can prevent players from receiving excessive amounts of balls in a short period of time; for example, it may be set before the start of a jackpot game. .

As explained above, by calculating the ball payout rate and setting the wait time (the period during which special symbol fluctuations are not executed during the time-saving gaming state) to vary based on the calculated ball payout rate, It becomes possible to adjust the short-term ball payout rate, and it is possible to prevent players from being given too many balls in a short period of time.

<16th control example>
Next, the contents of the 16th control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 507 to 529. In the 14th control example and the 15th control example described above, it was possible to determine whether or not to set a wait time depending on the condition (obtainment status of special map 2 reservation). When setting a wait time, a specific length (15 seconds) of wait time is set.

On the other hand, in this 16th control example, the length of the wait time can be varied depending on the conditions that can be established between winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery and ending the jackpot game. It is composed of In other words, by varying the length of the wait time, it is possible to set a time saving state in which it is easy to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation and a time saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the wait time set by the current jackpot win.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, after the special symbol indicating the jackpot win is stopped and displayed, the ball passes through a specific area (operation opening) provided on the game board 13. The game board 13 is provided with a plurality of operating ports (two) for starting the jackpot game. The length of the wait time to be set (whether or not the wait time is set) is determined depending on the type of operating port through which the ball passes after winning the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to have a possibility that a long wait time will be set even if a jackpot of any jackpot type is won. Compared to the case where the length of the wait time is determined, the player can play the game while expecting a long wait time to be set.

Further, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 507, when a player plays a game in which a ball passes through an operating port, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to select the operating port through which the ball passes. are doing. In other words, in the ball flow path (ball path) until the fired ball passes through any of the actuation ports, to any of the actuation ports (to the flow path where any of the actuation ports is installed) A distributing means for distributing the balls is provided, and is configured to be driven and controlled so that the channel into which the balls are distributed is switched periodically (every 2 seconds).

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, a delay means is provided on the route of the shot ball until it reaches the above-mentioned distribution means to make the falling time of the ball indefinite. In other words, when you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, you need to start the jackpot game by passing the ball through the operating port, but the ball that is fired to pass through the operating port must first be processed by the delay means. By passing through the ball, the falling time becomes indefinite, and the ball that has passed through the delay means reaches the distribution means where the distribution destination changes periodically. Then, the ball is distributed to one of the plurality of operating ports, depending on the distribution status of the distributing device at the timing when the ball reaches the distributing device.

The delay means provided in this 16th control example has an error in the time required for the ball to pass through the delay means (passage time) of at least 2 seconds (longer than the time it takes for the distribution state of the distribution means to switch). It is configured so that.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to select which operating port the ball, which is launched into the game area on the game board 13 in order to pass through the operating port, will pass through. Furthermore, in this 16th control example, a plurality of detection means (proximity sensors, etc.) are arranged on the path from when the ball is fired until it passes through one of the operating ports, and the plurality of detection means are used to By detecting the ball by the ball, the falling situation (passing situation) of the ball can be determined, and a performance (charge time acquisition challenge performance) based on the determination result can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible for a player who has executed a game in which a ball passes through the operating port to understand the flow of the ball (passing situation) in an easy-to-understand manner through the performance content of the charge time acquisition challenge performance. .

First, with reference to FIG. 507, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be described. The configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example described above in that the position of the first symbol display device 37 is different, and that the game board 13 is The difference is that the structure of the right side area, that is, the right-handed hitting area where the ball shot in a right-handed game flows down, is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be explained in detail. The right side area of the sixteenth control example is partitioned in the left-right direction by the partition wall 685, and is divided into a first area on the left side of the partition wall 685 and a second area on the right side of the partition wall 685. The first area is formed as an area where the ball can flow down toward the through gate 67, the second winning opening 640, the V winning device 650, and the variable winning device 65, which are arranged below the right side area. There is.

On the other hand, the second area is provided with a rotating croon 681, a left operating winning opening A691, and a right operating winning opening B692, and the lower part of the second area is a through gate 67, a second winning opening 640, and a V winning device. 650, it is formed so as to face below the right side area where the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged.

In other words, the first area is formed for the same purpose as the right side area of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example described above, and the second area is formed for the same purpose as the right side area of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example, and the second area is formed to move the ball to a plurality of actuating holes (left actuating winning hole A691, right actuating winning hole A691, right actuating winning hole B692) is formed as a region for passing to any of the operating ports. The upper end of the partition wall 685 for partitioning the right side area into a first area and a second area is located at the top of the right side area, and partitions the flow path width of the right side area at a ratio of about 3:1 (partition ) arranged so that Then, the ball fired by a right-handed game with increased firing strength (a right-handed game in which the ball passes along the trajectory of arrow A in FIG. 507) flows into the second area along the outer rail 62, and from there A ball fired in a right-handed game with a weak firing strength (a right-handed game in which the ball passes along the trajectory of arrow B in FIG. 507) flows into the first flow path.

In this 16th control example, as described above, the frontage of the second region (the opening formed by the upper end of the partition wall 685 and the outer rail 62) is 15 mm, and the frontage of the first region (the opening formed by the upper end of the partition wall 685) is 15 mm. The opening formed by the variable display unit 80 and the variable display unit 80 is formed to have a diameter of 40 mm, and most of the balls fired beyond the variable display unit 80 flow down the first channel. There is. Therefore, during the execution of a jackpot game or a small winning game, or in a right-handed game during a time-saving state, the right-handed game can be performed without causing discomfort to the player.

Also, the time required for the ball to flow down (pass) the first area is approximately 2 seconds, while the time required for the ball to flow down (pass) the second area (an irregular period of 5 seconds or more). Therefore, when a ball flows into the second area during execution of a right-handed game, the timing at which the ball passes through the second area is uncertain. Therefore, for example, in a state where the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is open due to a jackpot game, or when a V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650 is open due to a small winning game, the flow down the first area. This makes it easier to create a situation in which the ball that has flown down the second area and the ball that has flown down the second area can successively enter each winning hole, compared to the case where the ball has flown down only the first area.

Therefore, even if a small amount of balls flow into the second area during a right-handed game, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 508, but the second area is provided with a rotating croon 681 which is a delay means. This rotary croon 681 is formed into a mortar shape with an inner circumferential surface serving as a spherical flow path, and two discharge holes are provided on the inner circumferential surface. The two discharge holes each communicate with a ball flow path for causing the ball to flow down to the operating port. A distribution member 682 is provided in the middle region of each flow path, and the ball is configured to be distributed to the downstream side of any ball flow path depending on the distribution status of the distribution member 682. And, the left operating prize opening A691 is arranged at the position where the ball passing down the ball channel on the partition wall 685 side passes, and the right operating winning opening B692 is arranged at the position where the ball passing down the other ball channel passes. .

The left operation winning hole A691 and the right operation winning hole B692 are each made of a gate member through which a ball can pass, and the ball that has passed through either operation winning hole is discharged toward the lower part of the right side area.

In this 16th control example, after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through the left-acting winning hole A691 or the right-acting winning hole B692. In other words, in this control example, unlike the above-mentioned control examples, the trigger for executing a jackpot game is that after a special symbol indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed in a special symbol lottery, a ball hits a specific area (operating prize opening). There is an opportunity for execution that is established when the passage passes.

With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily decide the timing to execute the jackpot game, and therefore can temporarily take a break from the game after winning the jackpot.

In addition, when executing a jackpot game via a small win game, if the execution trigger similar to each control example described above is established, that is, if the execution trigger is established in the V winning a prize opening 650a that is opened during the small win game. A jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing through the designated specific area (V gate).

Here, the configuration of the second area will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 508 to 510. First, with reference to FIG. 508, detailed contents of various configurations provided in the second area will be explained. FIG. 508 is an enlarged view of the second area formed in the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example.

The second area is a gaming area formed by an opening formed between the outer rail 62 and the partition wall 685, and the discharge portions of the left operating winning opening A691 and the right operating winning opening B692. In other words, the ball that has flowed in from the opening of the second area is configured so that it finally passes through either the left operating winning port A691 or the right operating winning opening B692 and is discharged to the outside of the second area. .

In both of the two operating winning holes (left operating winning hole A691, right operating winning hole B692), the jackpot game is executed after the special symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is stopped and displayed. The entry (passing) of a ball is determined to be valid only during the jackpot standby state, which is the period up to this point. In the jackpot standby state, if a ball passes through the left activation prize opening A691, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type will be executed, and no wait time will be set after the jackpot game ends (a wait time of 0 seconds will be set). ) When the game is executed and the ball passes through the right operating prize opening B692, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type is executed, and a game in which a wait time of 10 seconds is set after the jackpot game is finished is executed.

In other words, a longer wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game when the ball passes through the right-acting winning hole B692 than when the ball passes through the left-acting winning hole A691, so the time-saving state is set. The right operating winning hole B692 is more advantageous to the player than the left operating winning hole A691 in terms of making it difficult for the first special symbol lottery to be executed in the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed.

As mentioned above, in the present 16th control example, it is possible to vary the advantageous degree of the benefit given after the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of the activated prize opening through which the ball passed in the jackpot standby state. There is. With this configuration, the game result can be greatly different depending on the type of operating winning hole through which the ball has passed, so that the player can be interested in the falling (passing) situation of the ball. I can do it.

In addition, in this 16th control example, the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds and the game state set after the jackpot game) are determined based on the jackpot type that is set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win. Although it is configured to be determined, it is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the jackpot game may be configured to be changeable depending on the type of the operating winning hole through which the ball passed in the jackpot standby state.

In this case, different jackpot game contents (advantageous jackpot game, unfavorable jackpot game) and different game contents after the end of the jackpot game (advantageous benefits after the end of the jackpot game, disadvantageous benefits after the end of the jackpot game) are combined to stipulate 4. Two activated winning holes are provided, and the content of the jackpot game and the game content after the jackpot game (benefits given after the jackpot game ends) are set according to the type of the activated winning hole through which the ball passes. It is best to configure it as follows. With this configuration, the game result can be greatly different depending on the type of operating winning hole through which the ball passes, thereby making the player more interested in the falling (passage) situation of the ball. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 508, the balls that have entered the second region are guided by a guiding member 684 to a rotating croon 681 that is a delay means. This guide member 684 is a member for suppressing the ball that has flowed into the second region from flowing forcefully into the rotating clone 681 and guiding the ball to a specific region of the rotating clone 681. It is made of a low-repulsion cushioning material to suppress the downward momentum (flowing speed), and is formed to protrude from the outside of the game area so as to block a part of the upper part of the rotating croon 681.

The balls that collided with the guiding member 684 flow down the upper surface (curved portion) of the guiding member 684 toward one end of the rotating croon 681 (the left end in FIG. 508), and are discharged toward the rotating croon 681. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding forcefully with the rotating croon 681 and damaging the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681.

The rotating croon 681 is a member formed in a mortar shape so that the inner peripheral surface becomes a ball flow path, and has two discharge holes (normal hole, SP hole) for discharging the balls near the bottom surface. has been done. The ball that has flown down the guiding member 684 reaches the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 and rolls on the inner circumferential surface in a circular manner. As the rolling speed of the ball decreases, the ball rolls in an arc shape toward the bottom surface on the inner peripheral surface, and finally flows into either the normal hole 681a or the SP hole 681b. It consists of

The ball flowing out from the guiding member 684 has a significantly lower flowing speed than when it flows into the second region, but the flowing speed at the time when it flows into the second region and the position where it abuts the guiding member 684 Errors occur in the rolling speed when it comes into contact with the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 depending on the time during which the guide member 684 flows down the upper surface of the guide member 684 and the like. Further, an error also occurs in the position where the rotating croon 681 contacts the inner circumferential surface. Therefore, an error also occurs in the time required from rolling on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 until passing through any discharge hole.

Therefore, when a ball is launched toward the second area, it is difficult for the player to predict the period required for the ball to be ejected to the downstream side of the rotating croon 681 in the second area. can.

Further, a guiding member 684 faces above the opening of the rotating croon 681, so that the balls flowing into the second region do not roll on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 and are not discharged from the discharge hole. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the balls flowing into the second region can easily roll on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 in an arc shape. In addition, the balls flowing into the second region collide with the vicinity of the discharge holes with great force, causing scratches on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681, and due to the scratches, the balls flow into only one of the discharge holes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the device is closed. Further, since the guiding member 684 is configured to cover the upper surface of the rotating croon 681, for example, a special jig may be entered through the opening of the second region to guide the ball onto the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that restrict the direction of movement. In addition, it is possible to prevent dust that has entered the game area on the game board 13 from accumulating on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating crew 681.

In this 16th control example, depending on which of the two discharge holes (normal hole 681a, SP hole 681b) provided in the rotating croon 681 the ball has flowed into, the following game content (a bonus will be given after the end of the jackpot game) The contents of the benefits are different. Although detailed explanation will be given later, when the ball flows into the SP hole 681b than when it flows into the normal hole 681a, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to pass through to the right-hand operation prize opening B692, which is advantageous to the player. It is composed of

With this configuration, in a situation where the ball is rolling on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681, the player can determine the ejection timing at which the ball is ejected from the rotating croon 681 and the ejection hole from which the ball is ejected. You can make people interested in the types of and.

A normal hole 681a provided in the rotating croon 681 is configured to communicate with a first normal route flow path 683a, and the ball that has passed through the normal hole 681a flows down the first normal route flow path 683a. A distribution member 682 for distributing the balls into a plurality of channels is provided downstream of the first normal route channel 683a. This distributing member 682 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft portion, and is tilted to the right side (every 2 seconds) according to the elapsed time (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 508). ) and a rotational position tilted to the left (see the position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 508).

When the distribution member 682 is in the rotational position tilted to the right, the first normal route flow path 683a and the second normal route flow path 683b are in communication with each other, and the flow flows down the first normal route flow path 683a. The distributed balls are allowed to flow down to the normal route second flow path 683b by the distribution member 682. In other words, when the distribution member 682 is tilted to the right, the SP route second flow path 683d formed on the lower right side of the distribution member 682 is blocked, so the normal route first flow path 683a The ball that has flowed down becomes easier to flow down into the normal route second flow path 683b than the SP route second flow path 683d.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 682 is in the rotational position tilted to the left, the first normal route flow path 683a and the second SP route flow path 683d are in communication with each other, and the first normal route flow path 683a is in communication with the second SP flow path 683d. The balls that have flowed down can flow down to the SP route second flow path 683d by the distribution member 682. In other words, when the distribution member 682 is tilted to the left, the second normal route flow path 683b formed at the lower left of the distribution member 682 is blocked, so the first normal route flow path 683a is blocked. The ball that has flowed down becomes easier to flow down into the SP route second flow path 683d than the normal route first flow path 683a.

A left operating prize opening A691 is provided on the downstream side of the normal route second channel 683b, and the ball that flows down the normal route second channel 683b is sure to pass through the left operating winning port A691. It consists of On the other hand, on the downstream side of the SP route second flow path 683d, a right action winning port B692 is arranged, and the ball that flows down the SP route second flow path 683d always passes through the right action winning port B692. It is configured as follows.

Further, the SP hole 681b provided in the rotating croon 681 is configured to communicate with the SP route first flow path 683c, and the ball that has passed through the SP hole 681b flows down the SP route first flow path 683c. . The downstream side of the first SP route flow path 683c is configured to communicate with the above-mentioned second SP route flow path 683d. The first SP route flow path 683c and the second SP route flow path 683d are configured to always maintain communication regardless of the rotational status of the distribution member 682. In other words, the ball discharged from the SP hole 681b always flows down the ball flow path in the order of the SP route first flow path 683c and the SP route second flow path 683d, and finally passes through the right operating prize opening B692. It is configured as follows.

Among the configurations of the second region described above with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508, at least the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681, the rotational situation of the distribution member 682, and the formation in the second region Each ball flow path is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player. With this configuration, when a ball flows into the second area in a right-handed game, the player can grasp the falling situation of the ball and the rotation situation of the distribution member 682, and You can enjoy watching the actual falling situation of the ball to see which operating prize opening the ball will finally pass through.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, when the ball discharged from the normal hole 681a reaches the left operation winning port A691, the normal flow path (normal route first flow path 683a, normal route second flow path) through which the ball flows down The SP flow path (SP route) in which the ball flows down when the ball discharged from the SP hole 681b reaches the right operating prize opening B692 is longer than the flow period in which the ball flows down the flow path formed by the path 683b. The flow path (formed by the first flow path 683c and the SP route second flow path 683d) is configured to be longer than the period during which the ball flows down.

Specifically, the time required for a ball to flow down the SP channel is 3 seconds, whereas the time required for a ball to flow down the SP channel is 6 seconds. In other words, after the ball is ejected from the SP hole 681b, the subsequent ball is ejected from the normal hole 681a, and before the ball ejected from the SP hole 681b first passes through the right-hand operation winning port B692, the subsequent ball is ejected from the normal hole 681a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball ejected from the hole 681a passes through the left operating prize opening A691. Therefore, a privilege is given to a player who visually confirms that the ball interlocking with the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 has been ejected from the SP hole 681b when the ball passes through the right-acting prize opening B692. Since this can be reliably provided, it is possible to make the player more interested in the behavior of the ball rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681.

Furthermore, by using the above-described configuration, even if a ball is ejected from the normal hole 681a first, the subsequent ball can be ejected immediately (for example, within 2 seconds) after the ball is ejected from the normal hole 681a. When the ball is ejected from the SP hole 681b, it is possible for the ball ejected from the SP hole 681b to reach the operating prize opening earlier than the ball ejected from the normal hole 681a first. Therefore, even after the ball flows into the normal hole 681a which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to keep the player interested.

As shown in FIG. 508, both the normal route first flow path 683a and the SP route first flow path 683c are configured to be arranged directly below from the discharge hole formed in the rotation croon 681. There is. Then, the distribution member 682 is prevented from intruding into the area on the right side (the right side from the perspective of FIG. 508) of the lower end of the partition wall that partitions the first normal route flow path 683a and the first SP route flow path 683c. It consists of

More specifically, the shaft portion of the distribution member 682 is on the left side in the vertical direction (see FIG. 508 In other words, in the vertical direction, the distributing member 682 is configured to be aligned with the vicinity of the center of the opening that becomes the outlet of the first flow path 683a of the normal route, and the distribution member 682 is rotated around its axis. It is configured to move.

With this configuration, no matter which state the distribution member 682 is tilted to, the balls flowing down the normal route first channel 683a can be smoothly distributed. Moreover, since the rotational state of the distribution member 682 does not affect the balls flowing down the SP route first channel 683c, the balls discharged from the SP hole 681b can be smoothly flowed down.

Furthermore, in the present 16th control example, in order to detect the flow situation of the ball flowing down within the second area and execute a performance based on the detection result, a detection is applied to each flow path formed within the second area. A means (passage sensor) is installed. Here, the passage sensors provided in each flow path will be explained with reference to FIG. 508.

First, a first passage sensor 680s1 is provided near the opening of the second region. This first passage sensor 680s1 is configured as a proximity sensor that can detect the passage of an object without coming into contact with the object. It consists of an inductive proximity sensor that detects magnetic loss due to overcurrent. In this way, by configuring the proximity sensor to be able to detect the passing of the ball, the ball can be detected without reducing the momentum of the ball launched into the game area on the game board 13.

In this 16th control example, a plurality of sensors are provided as detection means for detecting the passage of a ball in the second area, but the same sensor (detection inductive proximity sensor) is used in all of them. Therefore, further explanation will be omitted.

Note that a proximity sensor other than the detection inductive proximity sensor described above may be used, for example, a capacitance proximity sensor that can detect a change in capacitance that occurs between the detection mode and the sensor may be used. . Furthermore, a sensor may be provided that can detect the passage of the ball by coming into contact with the detection object (ball).

Next, a second passage sensor 680s2 is provided in the first flow path 683a of the normal route. This second passage sensor 680s2 can detect a ball that has flowed down the first flow path 683a of the normal route, that is, a ball that has flowed into the normal hole 681a of the rotating croon 681 and flowed down the first flow path 683a of the normal route. . Further, a third passage sensor 680s3 is provided in the SP route first flow path 683c. This second passage sensor 680s3 can detect a ball that has flown down the SP route first flow path 683c, that is, a ball that has flowed into the SP hole 681b of the rotating croon 681 and flowed down the SP route first flow path 683c. .

Further, a fourth passage sensor 680s4 is provided in the second passage 683b of the normal route, and a fifth passage sensor 680s5 is provided in the second passage 683d of the SP route, which detect when a ball flows down the respective passages. be able to.

In this way, by providing each passage sensor as a detection means capable of detecting the passage (flowing down) of a ball for each flow path provided in the second area, the detection result (detection order) of each passage sensor is Accordingly, it is possible to specify the path of the ball flowing down within the second region. In this 16th control example, based on the specified falling path of the ball, the player is asked whether the ball that has flowed into the second area passes through the left action winning hole A691 or the right action winning hole B692. It is configured such that the performance mode of the performance for making predictions (charge time acquisition challenge performance) can be determined.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the charge time acquisition challenge performance in a performance mode that corresponds to the actual falling path of the ball, so it is useful for players who want to quickly grasp which operating port the ball will pass through. On the other hand, it is possible to make the performance performed more interesting.

The detailed content of the charge time acquisition challenge performance will be described later with reference to FIGS. 511 to 514.

In addition, in the present 16th control example, passage sensors 680s1 to 680s5 provided in each flow path in the second area are used to create an effect (charge time acquisition Although the above-mentioned passing sensors 680s1 to 680s5 may be used for other purposes, for example, the detection results of each passing sensor 680s1 to 680s5 are accumulated and the second area To determine the number of balls remaining in the second area, or to determine if a situation has occurred in which a ball that has entered the second area is not ejected from the second area even after a predetermined period of time has passed (so-called ball jam). You may also use

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, between the right operating winning hole B692 and the left operating winning opening A691, the ball that entered the second area did not enter any of the operating winning holes. In this case, an outlet (not shown) is provided for discharging the ball to the outside of the second area. By providing this outlet, it is possible to prevent (suppress) problems such as ball clogging inside the second region.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 509 and 510, a description will be given of the spherical flow of the spheres flowing down in the second area until the spheres that reach the rotating croon 681 flow down to each flow path. do. FIG. 509(a) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the ball discharged from the normal hole 681a of the rotating croon 681 flows down toward the left operating prize opening A691, and FIG. 509(b) is , is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the ball discharged from the normal hole 681a of the rotating croon 681 flows down toward the right operation prize opening B692. In FIG. 509(a), the ball flows into the normal hole 681a of the rotating croon 681, and then flows down through the normal route first flow path 683a and the normal route second flow path 683b, flowing down toward the left operating prize opening A691. This shows the ball flow when

As shown in FIG. 509(a), the ball that has reached the rotating croon 681 rolls in a circle on the upper part of the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681, and as the rolling speed decreases, the rolling direction gradually changes. It rolls toward the bottom of the inner peripheral surface. Then, it flows into either of the two discharge holes (normal hole 681a, SP hole 681b) provided near the base of the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681. Here, the time it takes for the ball rolling on the inner circumferential surface to reach the vicinity of the discharge hole depends on the velocity of the ball when it reaches the rotating croon 681 and the position at which it contacts the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681. There will be a time difference. In addition, if the diameter of the discharge hole is 15 mm and a ball with a diameter of 11 mm rolls toward the center of the discharge hole, it will flow directly into the discharge hole, but it will flow downward toward the discharge hole. If the flowing direction of the ball is other than the center of the discharge hole, the ball will not flow into the discharge hole, but will pass over the discharge hole and continue rolling on the inner circumferential surface, causing rotation. Depending on the direction of flow of the balls flowing down the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681, a time difference occurs in the time it takes for the balls rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681 to flow into the discharge hole.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a time difference between the time it takes for the ball to reach the rotating croon 681 and flow into the discharge hole, so it is possible to determine at what timing the ball launched by the player toward the second area rotates. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the clone 681 will be discharged. Furthermore, in the present 16th control example, when a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second region, the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681 is configured so that the plurality of balls roll simultaneously. By colliding the balls with each other on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681, the rolling direction and rolling speed of the balls can be made more irregular, and the player can fire the balls toward the second area. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the ball will be ejected from the rotating croon 681.

As shown in FIG. 509(a), the balls discharged from the normal hole 681a flow down the normal route first channel 683a, and when they reach the distribution member 682, the distribution member 682 tilts to the right. If so, the ball passes through the left side surface of the distribution member 682 that is tilted to the right, and flows down toward the normal route second flow path 683b. Then, it passes through the left operating prize opening A691 (see FIG. 508) and is discharged from the second area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 509(b), the balls discharged from the normal hole 681a flow down the normal route first channel 683a, and when they reach the distribution member 682, the distribution member 682 tilts to the left. If so, the ball passes through the right side surface of the distribution member 682 that is tilted to the left, and flows down toward the SP route second flow path 683d. Then, it passes through the right operation winning port B692 (see FIG. 508) and is discharged from the second area.

As mentioned above, the distribution member 682 is configured to switch the distribution state every 2 seconds, so depending on the timing at which the ball is ejected from the normal hole 681a of the rotating croon 681, the ball will be placed in the left operating prize opening A691. Since it is determined whether the ball passes through or through the right-acting prize opening B692, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the ball is ejected from the rotating croon 681. Furthermore, since the period during which the ball rolls on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681 is configured to be irregular, even if the player determines the timing at which the ball reaches the rotating croon 681 (the timing of the ball's arrival at the rotating croon 681 is Even if the player decides the firing timing), the timing at which the ball is ejected from the rotating croon 681 cannot be controlled.

In addition, in this 16th control example, a rotating croon 681 is provided as a delay means for delaying (differentiating) the falling period of the ball flowing down the second area, and the time required for passing through the rotating croon 681 is The configuration is such that the delay can be at least longer than the period (2 seconds) during which the tilting direction of the distribution member 682 is switched. Therefore, no matter what timing the ball reaches the rotating croon 681, it is configured so that the ball can pass through any operating winning port. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of purely visualizing the rolling state of the ball in the rotating croon 681 without worrying about the timing of the ball's launch.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, a description will be given of the flow of a ball when the ball is ejected from the SP hole 681b of the rotating crew 681. FIG. 510 is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the ball discharged from the SP hole 681b of the rotating croon 681 flows down toward the right operation prize opening B692. As shown in FIG. 510, the balls discharged from the SP hole 681b flow down the SP route first flow path 683c, and regardless of the tilting status of the distribution member 682, they flow into the SP route second flow path 683d. Pass through the right operating winning opening B692 (see Figure 508).

In this way, depending on the tilting situation of the distribution member 682, the ball ejected from the normal hole 681a may pass through the left operation winning hole A691 or the right operation winning hole B692, so While the player is made to play the game while expecting that the game to be executed later will be an advantageous game for the player, the ball ejected from the SP hole 681b passes through the right-acting prize opening B692. Since it is certain that the ball will be ejected from the rotating croon 681, the player is made to predict that the ball will pass through the operating winning port (right operating winning port B692) that is advantageous to the player with a high probability. be able to. Therefore, depending on which of the two discharge holes provided in the rotating croon 681 the ball flows into, it is possible to provide the player with different playability, so it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets boring. can.

In addition, in this 16th control example, only a discharge hole is provided for the rotating croon 681 through which the ball will eventually pass through any operating prize opening, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating croon 681 A specific discharge port may be provided to allow the balls discharged from the ball 681 to be discharged from the second area without passing through any operational winning ports. With this configuration, the ball flows into the specific discharge port, so that the player can experience the situation where the ball is rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the rotating croon 681 multiple times while waiting for a single jackpot. You can experience it.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, the probability that a ball rolling on the inner circumferential surface of the rotating croon 681 will flow into the normal hole 681a and the probability that it will flow into the SP hole 681b are configured to be approximately the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that balls can more easily flow into one of the discharge holes than the other, or the probability of the balls flowing into each discharge hole can be adjusted. It's okay.

In addition, in this 16th control example, no matter what timing the ball reaches the rotating croon 681, the degree of expectation that the ball will pass through the right operating prize opening B692, which is advantageous to the player, remains unchanged. By doing so, the player is configured to be able to play the game with peace of mind while waiting for a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the ball reaches the rotating croon 681 is the first timing. It may be configured such that it is easier to flow into the SP hole 681b that is advantageous to the player when there is a second timing different from the first timing than when it is a second timing that is different from the first timing. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to make the ball reach the rotating croon 681 at the first timing.

As explained above, in this 16th control example, the rotating croon 681 is used as the configuration of the delay means, but any configuration that can make the flow time of the balls flowing down the second area different may be used. Alternatively, other configurations may be used; for example, a plurality of ball flow paths may be provided through which the balls flowing into the second region reach the distribution member 682, and the ball flow path may be adjusted according to the ball flow path through which the balls actually flow down. It is also possible to configure the ball flow down time from when it flows into the second region to when it reaches the distribution member 682 to be different, or to use a plurality of regulating members for regulating the flow of the balls in one ball flow path. A ball flow path mechanism is provided in which each regulating member independently executes variable control that changes the regulating member between a permissible state in which the ball is allowed to flow down and a regulating state in which the ball is regulated. The time required for the balls to flow down the channel may be configured to be random.

<About the production content in the 16th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 511 to 514, the contents of characteristic performances among the various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be explained. In the 14th control example described above, the jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, whereas in the present 16th control example, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. (When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (combination) that indicates a jackpot win), a jackpot standby state is set, and during the jackpot standby state, the operating winning openings (left operating winning opening A691, right operating winning opening B692) The difference is that a jackpot game can be executed by passing the ball through the holes.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 14th control example, it is configured such that it is possible to determine whether the special figure 2 hold is acquired at the end timing of the jackpot game, and to set a wait time when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold is not acquired. On the other hand, in this 16th control example, it is decided whether or not to set a wait time after the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of the activated prize opening through which the ball passed during the jackpot standby state. It consists of

In other words, this 16th control example is configured to be able to execute a game in which it is determined whether or not to set a wait time using the period from winning a jackpot to starting a jackpot game (period in a jackpot standby state). I am. This control example differs greatly from the 14th control example described above in that a performance (charge time acquisition challenge performance) for notifying the player of the game result in the jackpot standby state in an easy-to-understand manner is executed.

Here, the charge time acquisition challenge effect using the activated prize opening in the present 16th control example will be explained. In this 16th control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases and the game state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving state") in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 640 is entered (hereinafter referred to as the "time saving state"), and at the same time the weight A special period called time may be set.

The wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the conditions for executing the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 64) are met, the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game. This is a special period in which variable display does not start.

Details will be described later, but in this 16th control example, the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is terminated, and the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is terminated. ), that is, the condition for ending the time saving state is based on the jackpot ending condition that is established based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state. A termination condition for the number of times that is satisfied is set.

The above-mentioned number end conditions include a first number end condition that is established only based on the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a second number end condition that is established only based on the number of times that the second special symbol lottery is executed. , a third number end condition that is established based on the total number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and specifically, a time saving state. When the number of first special symbol drawings executed during the period reaches 5 (when the 5th first special symbol variation is started), the first number end condition is met, and the first special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state. When the number of second special symbol drawings becomes one (when the first second special symbol fluctuation is started), the second number end condition is satisfied, and the first special drawn during the time saving state When the total number of executions of the symbol lottery and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery reaches five, the third number of times end condition is satisfied.

Here, the above-mentioned jackpot ending condition is the timing when the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation executed based on the special symbol lottery, that is, the timing when the special symbol variation stops. The time-saving ending condition that can be satisfied, and the number-of-time ending condition, is a time-saving ending condition that can be satisfied at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation. By changing the cases in which the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation and the case in which the time saving state ends at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation, depending on the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied, it is possible to improve the player's experience. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to understand when the time saving state ends.

In addition, the technical idea of terminating the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation and the technical idea of making the time saving state different depending on the type of the established time saving ending condition is described in the above-mentioned 11th control example to 13th control example. The technical concept described above will be applied as appropriate, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted in this control example.

Here, in this 16th control example, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable display of the first special symbol starts, but if the variable display of the special symbol is already in progress or during a jackpot game Therefore, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 when the variable display of special symbols is stopped, the number of winnings is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 when the special symbol fluctuation display is already in progress or when the special symbol fluctuation display is stopped because a jackpot game is in progress, the second special The variable display of symbols is not started, and the number of winnings is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of pending symbols is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. Although the maximum number of times each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be held is four times, it is not limited to this, for example, it may be two times at most, or eight times at most.

When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the reservation for the first winning hole 64 (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol reservation ball") or the reservation for the second winning hole 640 (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol reservation ball") If a "second special symbol reserved ball" exists, the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given priority over the reserved ball of the first special symbol, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Fluctuation display starts. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed when there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol. That is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to be displayed variably at the same time.

As described above, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, if the wait time is not given (that is, the wait time is set to 0 seconds) and the game ball enters the second starting hole 640, if the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, 2. Since the variable display of special symbols starts, the time saving state ends at that point. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, there are four reserved balls with the first special symbol, and before the game ball enters the second prize opening 640, a variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the reserved balls with the first special symbol is displayed. is executed four times and a game ball newly enters the first prize opening 64, and the fifth variable display of the first special symbol is started, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 0. Become. In other words, if no wait time is given, the second special symbol can be drawn only once at most.

On the other hand, when wait time is given, the variable display will not start even if there is a reserved ball with the first special symbol, and even if the game ball enters the second starting hole 640, the second special symbol will not be displayed. Since the variable display does not start, the time saving state does not end during the wait time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the second winning hole will be opened multiple times during the wait time. For example, if a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 four times, the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol will be four times. Since the number of draws is reserved, the second special symbol can be drawn four times, which is more advantageous to the player than if no wait time was given.

Furthermore, it is possible to vary the number of times the second winning hole 640 is opened during the wait time by the wait time grant time and the variation time of the normal symbols. For example, if the wait time is short (for example, 5 seconds) and the normal symbol fluctuation time is long (for example, 6 seconds), there is a possibility that the fluctuation of the normal symbol does not end during the wait time, and the second winning hole 640 It is also possible that it will not be released. On the other hand, if the wait time is long (for example, 10 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short (for example, 2 seconds), there is a high possibility that the second winning hole 640 will be opened multiple times during the wait time. , it becomes possible to obtain more reserved balls of the second special symbol than when the wait time is short and the variation time of the normal symbol is long.

In this way, in this control example, the winning opportunity to the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state is changed depending on whether the waiting time is given, the waiting time giving time, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. This can improve the interest of the game.

Note that the conditions for ending the time saving state are not limited to the conditions provided in this control example; for example, when the fluctuating display of the special symbol is completed once (in other words, the special symbol that is being fluctuated is stopped) ). In this case, if the variation time of the second special symbol is long (for example, 10 seconds) and the variation time of the normal symbol is short (for example, 2 seconds), a state in which no charge time is given (that is, a charge time is Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started in 0 seconds), the time-saving game state continues for 10 seconds, so the possibility that the second prize opening 640 will be opened multiple times increases. With this configuration, in addition to the wait time grant time and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the second special symbol also increases the chance of winning in the second prize opening during the time-saving gaming state. This makes it possible to change the game and further improve the interest of the game.

Next, a charge time acquisition challenge effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be explained. As described above, when the wait time is given, it becomes possible to obtain a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol, so the player expects the wait time to be given. In this control example, it is determined whether the wait time is given or not depending on whether the game ball enters the left-acting winning hole A691 (see Figure 507) or the right-acting winning hole B692 (see Figure 507). The structure is determined by the following. Therefore, at the time when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the ball has not passed through the operating prize opening (in the jackpot waiting state), it is certain that the jackpot game will be executed, but wait time will be given. It has not been decided whether or not this will be done, but if the game ball fired by the player in the charge time acquisition challenge effect executed during the jackpot game enters the right-hand operation winning slot B692, the player will be given wait time. be done. In this way, by configuring the wait time to be set according to the type of the operating winning hole where the game ball won (passed through) rather than the type of the jackpot symbol, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the game ball that has flowed into the second area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through three passing sensors before it enters any of the operation winning holes. In the charge time acquisition challenge performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, a performance screen corresponding to the passage sensor through which the game ball has passed is displayed. For example, the game ball that has passed through the third passage sensor 680s3 (see Figure 507) has a high possibility of winning the right-acting winning hole B692, so if the game ball has passed through the third passage sensor 680s3, the wait time is When the display mode (see "Scroll" shown in FIG. 513(b)) indicating that the expected degree of award is high is displayed and the winning is confirmed in the right-acting winning opening B692, the passing sensor is confirmed. A display mode indicating the period of the wait time to be given (see the "scroll" in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed shown in FIG. 514(a)) is displayed.

In this way, by associating the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage sensor through which the game ball has passed, wait time can be given even to players who are not paying attention to the movement of the game ball. You can entertain whether or not you like it. Below, we will use diagrams to explain in detail the contents of the performance (charge time acquisition challenge performance) that is executed during the jackpot standby state that is set between winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and before the jackpot game is executed. Explain.

FIG. 511 is an effect screen when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In the display area Dm1, a display mode indicating that the special symbol has been won as a jackpot is displayed. The words "Challenge to acquire charge time!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the words "Right hit" are displayed in the display area Dm4, encouraging the player to fire the game ball into the right area of the board. There is. Then, in the display area HR32, a display prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the rotating croon 681 (see FIG. 507) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that in this control example, the gaming method is displayed on the effect screen as shown in FIG. 511, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to perform an animation effect and encourage the player to shoot the game ball by providing audio guidance or lighting up an LED installed on the board.

FIG. 512(a) is an effect screen that is displayed when the game ball passes the first passage sensor 680s1 (see FIG. 507) in the charge time acquisition challenge effect. In this control example, when the player fires a game ball toward the rotating croon 681 during the charge time acquisition challenge presentation, the game ball always passes through the first passage sensor 680s1. Therefore, until the game ball that has passed through the first passing sensor 680s1 passes through the second passing sensor 680s2 (see Fig. 507) or the third passing sensor 680s3 (see Fig. 507), the common effect screen is shown in Fig. 512(a). The production screen will be displayed. In this embodiment, an effect indicating that the rabbit character has discovered a treasure box is displayed, suggesting that some effect will be performed depending on the contents of the treasure box. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance. In this embodiment, the characters "What's in the treasure box?" are displayed on the HR 32, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display such as ``If a ticket comes out of the treasure box, you are in a pinch, if a scroll comes out, you have a chance'' may be displayed to suggest that the degree of expectation of being given charge time changes depending on the contents of the treasure box. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a treasure chest, and may be, for example, an effect in which a door appears or an effect in which another character is displayed.

FIG. 512(b) is an effect screen displayed when the game ball that has passed the first passing sensor 680s1 passes the second passing sensor 680s2. As described above, in this control example, the game ball that has passed through the second passage sensor 680s2 is configured to enter the left-operated winning opening A691 (see FIG. 507) with a high probability. If a ball enters the left activation prize opening A691, the wait time is set to 0 seconds (wait time is not set), so a "ticket" indicating that the expectation level of charge time grant is low will be found in the treasure box. Appear. In addition, even if it passes through the second passing sensor 680s2, there is a possibility that a prize will be won in the right operating prize opening B692 (see FIG. 507) depending on the tilting situation of the distribution member 682 (see FIG. 508), so the game The configuration is such that the player does not know what is written on the "ticket" until the ball passes the fourth passage sensor 680s4 (see Figure 507) or the fifth passage sensor 680s5 (see Figure 507). ing.

Thereafter, when the game ball that has passed through the second passing sensor 680s2 passes through the fourth passing sensor 680s4 (see FIG. 507), the effect screen shown in FIG. 513(a) is displayed. When the game ball passes the fourth passage sensor 680s4, it will definitely win in the left-actuated prize opening A691, so it is certain that the player will not be given any wait time. Therefore, a "ticket" with "+0 seconds" written on it is displayed, and "Unfortunately...charge 0" is displayed in the display area HR31, thereby making the player aware that the wait time was not given. be able to.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has passed through the second passing sensor 680s2 passes through the fifth passing sensor 680s5 (see FIG. 507), an effect screen shown in FIG. 513(b) is displayed. When the game ball passes through the fifth passage sensor 680s5, it will definitely win the right-acting prize opening B692, so it is confirmed that the player will be given a wait time of 10 seconds. Therefore, a "ticket" with "+10 seconds" written on it is displayed, and "You did it! Charge +10 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR31, thereby informing the player that a wait time of 10 seconds has been granted. It becomes possible to make it recognized. In this way, there is still a possibility that wait time will be given depending on the contents of the "ticket", so even if a "ticket" with a low expectation of giving wait time is displayed, wait time will not be given to the player. You can make them look forward to it until the end.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a "ticket" with "+0 seconds" written on it is displayed at the time of passing the second passage sensor 680s2. In this case, when the game ball passes the fifth passage sensor 680s5, wait time will be given, so for example, a second "ticket" will appear from the treasure box and "+10 seconds" will be displayed. (hereinafter referred to as "resurrection effect") may be displayed. With this configuration, even if a display mode indicating that no wait time is given is displayed, the player can be made to expect that there may be a revival performance.

FIG. 514(a) is an effect screen displayed when the game ball that has passed the first passing sensor 680s1 passes the third passing sensor 680s3 (see FIG. 507). The game ball that has passed through the third passing sensor 680s3 will win a prize in the right-acting winning opening B692 with a high probability. If a prize is won in the right operating winning slot B692, a wait time of 10 seconds is given. Therefore, a "scroll" that indicates that there is a high expectation of being granted wait time will appear from inside the treasure chest.

After that, when the game ball that has passed through the third passing sensor 680s3 passes through the fifth passing sensor 680s5, the "scroll" is opened and the words "+10 seconds" are displayed as shown in FIG. 514(b). By doing so, the player can recognize that a 10 second wait time has been given. In addition, when the game ball that has passed through the third passing sensor 680s3 passes through the fourth passing sensor 680s4, the "scroll" is opened and the characters "+0 seconds" are displayed indicating that no charge time was given. (not shown). In this way, by displaying effects corresponding to the sensors that the game ball has passed in stages, it is possible to convey correct game information to the player, and also charge players who are not paying attention to the movement of the game ball. You can enjoy whether or not time will be given.

Note that in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation of charge time provision is indicated by displaying the "ticket" or "scroll" corresponding to the sensor that has passed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when passing through the second passing sensor 680s2, a "blue ticket" is displayed, and when passing through the third passing sensor 680s3, a "red ticket" is displayed.The expectation level changes depending on the color. It is also possible to add . With this configuration, for example, the game ball that has passed the first passing sensor 680s1 can pass through three or more passing sensors (corresponding to the second passing sensor 680s2 and the third passing sensor 680s3 in this control example). When configured to install a ticket, there is no need to perform a control process to display a display format different from that of a "ticket" or "scroll," and it is possible to handle this by simply changing the color of the "ticket." , it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the charge time acquisition challenge performance. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 executes an animation effect and makes a notification sound and lights up the LEDs installed on the board to notify that the game ball has passed the passing sensor or that it has won a prize in the activated prize opening. A configuration may also be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the left-operating winning port A691, no charge time is given (charge time is set to 0 seconds), and if a prize is won in the right-acting winning port B692, a wait time is given. (the charge time is set for 10 seconds), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball enters the left-operated winning slot A691, a lottery is executed in which the charge time is set to 0 seconds with a 60% probability, the charge time is set to 5 seconds with a 30% probability, and 10 seconds with a 10% probability. It may also be a configuration. In other words, when a ball passes through a specific operating prize opening, a predetermined lottery (charge time lottery) may be executed, and the wait time period may be determined based on the lottery result.

In this case, for example, when the game ball passes the fourth passage sensor 680s4, a "ticket" with "+0 seconds" written on it is displayed, and the charge time based on the game ball winning the left activation prize opening A691 is displayed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a revival effect is executed when the lottery ends. Alternatively, at the time when the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole A691, a display format prompting the player to operate the button is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the player operates the button, the determined waiting time length (seconds) is displayed. You may perform an effect in which a number) is displayed. In this way, by configuring the wait time ratios set for each operating winning opening to be different, it is possible to create an expectation that waiting time will be awarded no matter which operating winning opening wins. Become.

In addition, in the present 16th control example, the performance mode of the charge time acquisition challenge performance is configured to be determined based on the detection results of a plurality of passing sensors provided in the second area, but instead of this, For example, a distribution means configured to be able to measure the elapsed time after one passing sensor (for example, a first sensor) detects the passage of a ball, and distributes the balls that have passed the first sensor to a plurality of channels. is provided so that the balls can be distributed to the first channel and the second channel by the distributing means. A second sensor capable of detecting a ball flowing down the first flow path and a third sensor capable of detecting a ball flowing down the second flow path are connected to each other at an arrival time after the first sensor passes the ball. may be provided in different positions.

More specifically, the distributing means is provided so that the time it takes for the ball that passes the first sensor to reach the distributing means is 1 second, and the ball that reaches the distributing means is directed to one of the channels. The configuration is such that the time required for the balls to be sorted by the sorting means is 0.5 seconds, and the time it takes for the balls sorted by the sorting means to flow down the first flow path and reach the first sensor is 10 seconds. A first sensor is provided in the first flow path, and an operating prize opening is provided at a position through which the balls flowing down the first channel can pass, through which benefits advantageous to the player (for example, a wait time of 10 seconds) are provided, and the prizes are distributed by a distribution means. A second sensor is provided so that the time it takes for the ball to flow down the second flow path and reach the second sensor is 2 seconds, and the player is placed in a position where the ball flowing down the second flow path can pass. It may also be configured to provide an activated prize opening that provides a disadvantageous benefit (for example, a wait time of 0.5 seconds).

With this configuration, if the third sensor does not detect a ball when 3 seconds have passed since the first sensor detected the ball, the ball will pass through the first flow path. It becomes possible to determine that there is a high possibility that water is flowing down. Therefore, since it is possible to identify the type of channel in which the ball is flowing down based on the ball's flowing time (time elapsed since the first sensor detected the ball), the presentation mode of the charge time acquisition challenge effect can be varied according to the elapsed time, and the performance effect of the charge time acquisition challenge performance can be enhanced.

In this case, a sensor (first sensor) for detecting that the ball has flowed down a channel that is likely to provide advantageous benefits to the player among the plurality of channels through which the ball can flow down. The sensor is configured so that it takes longer to detect that the ball has flowed down the channel (the second sensor), which is likely to give disadvantageous benefits to the player. Then even better. With this configuration, the longer it takes for the sensor to detect the ball, the easier it is to identify a situation in which an advantageous benefit is likely to be given to the player. It is now possible to change the performance mode to show a performance result that is advantageous to the player according to the elapsed time, and it is possible to change the performance mode to show a performance result that is advantageous to the player according to the elapsed time. It is possible to make it easier to entertain while holding it.

<About the electrical configuration of the 16th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 515 to 520. In this 16th control example, in contrast to the 14th control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that some parts have been changed, and the rest are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 515(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 515(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 515(a), in this 16th control example, in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 474(a)), instead of the first random number 5 table 202ea, 1 random number 16 table 202va per win, 1st win type selection 16 table 202ec instead of 1st win type selection 5 table 202eb, and small win type selection 16 table 202vg instead of small win type selection 5 table 202eg. The difference is that a new time saving 16 table 202vh is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. In addition, in each configuration with the same reference numeral, the points that are changed using well-known general techniques to match the differences in the other configurations mentioned above will be changed as appropriate. Since the content is the same including the points, the explanation is omitted.

The first random number 16 table 202va is different from the first random number 5 table 202ea (see FIG. 334) described above in that the prescribed value for determining a small win is different, and the rest is the same. . Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 516, the contents defined in the first random number 16 table 202va will be explained. FIG. 516(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first 16 random number table 202va. As shown in FIG. 516(a), the first random number 16 table 202va is the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202va1, which is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol It has a special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202va2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery (special symbol 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 516(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202va1 will be explained. FIG. 516(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202va1. As shown in FIG. 516(b), a "big win" is defined when the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 3", and the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to a "small win" is It is configured so that it does not exist. That is, in this 16th control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is 0 (not winning).

Next, with reference to FIG. 516(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202va2 will be explained. FIG. 516(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202va2. As shown in FIG. 516(c), a "big win" is defined in the range of "0 to 3" for the value of the first random number counter C1, and a "small win" is defined in the range of "10 to 342." That is, in this 16th control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is about 1/3.

That is, in this 16th control example, the same jackpot probability is set for the special pattern 1 lottery and the special pattern 2 lottery, and the small winning probability is configured to be higher in the special pattern 2 lottery than in the special pattern 1 lottery. are doing. As mentioned above, in this 16th control example, since the configuration is such that a small winning win can become an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, the special drawing 2 lottery is a special feature that makes it easier to execute the jackpot game than the special drawing 1 drawing. This is a drawing lottery, that is, a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as mentioned above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing, but this is not limited to this, and the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a low probability state (high probability state of special symbols) and a low probability state (low probability state of special symbols).

The 1st winning type selection 16 table 202vb is different from the above-mentioned 1st winning type selection 5 table 202b (see FIG. 335(a)) in that the jackpot type that is set when winning a jackpot is different. Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202vb will be explained with reference to FIG. 517(a). FIG. 517(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202vb. As shown in FIG. 517(a), the first winning type selection 16 table 202vb includes the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb1, which is referred to when winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing, and the special drawing 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 517(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb1 will be explained. FIG. 517(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb1. The pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, three types from jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is set to "0", "jackpot AA (15R (round) jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "jackpot AB" is specified in the range of "1 to 15". (7R (round) jackpot)" is defined, and a "jackpot AC (7R (round) jackpot)" is defined in the range of "16 to 99."

Next, with reference to FIG. 517(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb2 will be explained. FIG. 517(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202vb2. The pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot type is defined as "jackpot AD (15 (round) jackpot)", and the value is in the range of "20 to 69". "Jackpot AE (12R (round) jackpot)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and "jackpot AF (7R (round) jackpot)" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In this 16th control example, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, different time-saving ending conditions (conditions for ending the time-saving state) are provided depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. This is different from the 14th control example described above in that no time-saving termination conditions are defined for each jackpot type. Note that the time-saving termination conditions attached to the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game are determined with reference to the time-saving grant 16 table 202vh, which will be described later, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The small winning type selection 16 table 202vg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery. This small win type selection 16 table 202vg is different from the small win type selection 5 table 202eg (see FIG. 337) of the 14th control example described above in that the contents of the specified small win types are changed. , otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted. In addition, in this 16th control example, since it is configured so that a small hit will not be won in the first special symbol lottery, this data table will be referred to based on the second special symbol lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 518, the small winning type selection 16 table 202vg will be explained. FIG. 518(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 16 table 202vg, and FIG. FIG.

In this 16th control example, there is no small win in the first special symbol lottery, so as shown in FIG. 518(a), the small win type selection 16 table 202vg includes Only the special figure 2 small winning type selection 16 table 202vg2 that is referred to in the event of winning is defined.

As shown in FIG. 518(b), the special drawing 2 small winning type selection 16 table 202vg2 is different from the above-mentioned special drawing 2 small winning type selection 5 table 202eg2 (see FIG. 337(c)) when passing V. The difference is that the content of the jackpot type given to the jackpot type, more specifically, the time-saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is not defined, and the other points are the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this 16th control example, although it is configured so that a small hit cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, it is configured so that a small win can be won in the first special symbol lottery, similar to the above-mentioned 14th control example. You may do so. In this case, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the percentage of small win types that are difficult to pass V (V cannot pass) will be selected is higher than when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. By configuring the system so that the probability of winning a small winning is lower than the probability of winning a small winning in the second special symbol drawing, a jackpot can be generated based on winning a small winning in the first special symbol drawing. It is preferable to configure the game so that the probability that a jackpot game will be executed based on winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability that the game will be executed.

With this configuration, even though the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on a small win won by the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, even in a normal state where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, players can be made to expect to play a jackpot game based on a small win win, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

The time saving grant 16 table 202vh is a data table in which the end conditions of the time saving state to be set at the end of the jackpot game are defined in advance, and each end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is defined. This time-saving provision 16 table 202vh is a data table that is referred to when setting multiple time-saving termination conditions for ending the time-saving state, different for each jackpot type, and is used when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game The number of time saving times (time saving end conditions) is set depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, in this 16th control example, when a jackpot game is executed based on the result of a special symbol lottery executed during a time-saving state (when a jackpot is won), the time-saving end condition is also satisfied, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. By setting the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), benefits other than the jackpot game (for example, awarded by hitting the ball into the second ball opening 640) during the jackpot game. The system is configured to prevent players from being awarded excessive bonuses, such as prize balls, etc.

The time-saving end condition that is established based on the execution of this jackpot game is a time-saving end condition that is always specified regardless of the jackpot type, so it is not specified in the time-saving grant 16 table 202vh, but all It may be configured to stipulate the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions for the jackpot type, or, for example, it may be configured such that the time-saving state continues even during the execution of the jackpot game only when a specific jackpot type is set. The configuration may be such that the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied based on the execution of the game is not defined. Thereby, depending on the set jackpot type, it is possible to provide a case where the gaming state during the jackpot game is a normal state and a case where it is a time saving state.

Further, in this control example, the time saving state having the time saving end conditions determined with reference to the time saving granting table 202vh is configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, The time saving state may be configured to be settable when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied during a jackpot game. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery is not executed during the jackpot game, so by setting the time saving state during the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state. It is possible to carry out the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state before the time is reached.

In other words, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) during a partial period during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery (a lottery advantageous to the player) which is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, as a setting condition for setting the time saving state during a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is satisfied when the number of rounds of the jackpot game reaches 10 rounds, that is, a setting condition that is satisfied when the round game of 10 rounds or more is executed. It is preferable that the time saving state is set only during the jackpot game. Thereby, in addition to the benefit of paying out a large number of prize balls based on the round game for a jackpot game with a large number of round games, it is also possible to provide the player with the privilege of setting a time-saving state during the jackpot game.

In addition, there are also setting conditions that are established when the number of prize balls paid out during a jackpot game reaches a specific number, and the number of times the time saving state and jackpot game are repeated without going through the normal state. A setting condition may be provided that is satisfied when (number of consecutive attempts) reaches a predetermined number of times.

Here, the contents defined in the time saving grant 16 table 202vh will be explained with reference to FIG. 519. FIG. 519 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving grant 16 table 202vh. As shown in FIG. 519, the time-saving grant table 202vh has a common time-saving ending condition in accordance with the jackpot type, regardless of the gaming state when a jackpot game is executed, in contrast to the time-saving grant table 202ph (FIG. 438) described above. , the provisional content related to the specific flag 203pa, that is, the provisional content for differentiating the timing of ending the time saving state, is eliminated, and the time saving ending conditions are specified according to each jackpot type. The difference is that the specific content has been changed.

As shown in FIG. 519, in this control example, the first time saving end condition is established based on the total number of first special symbol fluctuations and the second special symbol fluctuation, and the first time saving end condition is established based on the number of second special symbol fluctuations. The second time-saving end condition can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 519, the time saving grant 16 table 202vh defines values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a plurality of time saving end conditions, and the value set as the first time saving end condition mentioned above is set during time saving. The value set in the counter 203g and set as the second time saving end condition is configured to be set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea.

Specifically, among the jackpot types for which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state is set for all jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AC) that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is specified that the counter 203g (first time saving end condition) is set to "5". This value of "5" is specified to be a larger value than the upper limit number "4" of special drawing 1 reservation. Therefore, even if the time saving state is set while the upper limit number of special symbol 1 reservations is stored, and all the special symbol 1 reservations are consumed before the second special symbol variation is executed, the time reduction state will not be activated. It never ends.

In addition, if the act of only executing the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated when the number of first special symbol fluctuations reaches 5 times, so it is normal. It is possible to prevent a game other than the above from being played continuously. In addition, in this control example, the same value is set as the first time saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different values may be set. It may also be configured to set.

Next, among the jackpot types for which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, some of the jackpot types (jackpot AA, AB, AC) that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot AA, AC) For the remaining jackpot types (jackpot AB), the special chart 2 variation counter 203ea (second time saving end condition) is set to "1". It stipulates that "2" be set for the time-saving termination condition).

In other words, when jackpot AA or jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, the second time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing when the first special symbol 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the time saving state ends. It is composed of Here, since the specific configuration and technical idea are the same as the above-mentioned 14th control example, the explanation thereof will be omitted, but in this 16th control example, the electric accessory 640a is When opening the ball, it is configured so that one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in one game per normal figure.

In other words, in the state where the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state is one time, and the time saving state ends without acquiring the special pattern 2 reservation. become.

Here, in this 16th control example, similarly to the 14th control example described above, the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and from the time the time saving state is set until the first special symbol lottery is executed. The configuration allows a grace period (wait time) to be set. With this configuration, if a wait time is set, it will be possible to obtain special map 2 reservations during that wait time, so the maximum number of special map 2 reservations (4) can be obtained. In this state, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In this case, the type of special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the second special symbol lottery, and the time saving state ends at the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery, but the time saving state ends. Since three special symbol 2 reservations have been acquired at this point, the second special symbol lottery can be executed three times after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery will actually be executed four times.

On the other hand, if the wait time is not set after the end of the jackpot game, as mentioned above, the second special symbol lottery will be executed without acquiring the special symbol 2 hold, so the time saving state will not be set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the second special symbol lottery is actually executed once.

As explained above, in this 16th control example, a large difference is made in the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed when the time saving state is set, depending on whether or not the wait time is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player very interested in whether or not a wait time is set.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, since the length of the wait time (whether or not the wait time is set) is determined according to the type of the operating winning hole through which the ball passed during the jackpot standby state, It is possible to make the player interested in which operating prize opening the ball passes through during the jackpot standby state, that is, the falling situation of the ball during the jackpot standby state.

In addition, in this 16th control example, since the player is configured not to be able to select the type of operating port through which the ball passes during the jackpot standby state, depending on the falling situation of the ball during the jackpot standby state, It can make people interested. In addition, the charge time acquisition challenge performance is executed by changing the performance mode depending on the falling situation of the ball during the jackpot standby state, and the probability that the ball enters any operating prize slot is determined by the charge time acquisition challenge performance. The player is configured to be able to be informed whether the ball is high or not before the ball passes through the operating prize opening. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect for players who try to quickly grasp whether or not a wait time is set.

As shown in FIG. 519, when the jackpot AB is set, "2" is set to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea for indicating the second time saving end condition. That is, when the jackpot AB is set, the second time-saving end condition is established at the start timing of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state.

That is, jackpot AB and jackpot AC are jackpot types in which the content of the jackpot game to be executed (number of rounds) is the same, but the content of the set time-saving termination condition is different. If this jackpot AB is set, the time-saving state will continue until the end of the first 2nd special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 fluctuation period), so even if no wait time is set. Even in this case, it is possible to provide an opportunity to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the special figure 2 fluctuation period. With this configuration, even if a performance result indicating that no wait time is set (a short time is set) is displayed as a performance result of the charge time acquisition challenge performance, the FIG. 2 Since the possibility of obtaining a hold can be left open, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing significantly.

In addition, for players who are disappointed that they cannot obtain the special drawing 2 reservation during the time-saving state, it is possible to provide a surprising game experience in an advantageous direction, and improve the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, in this 16th control example, a jackpot type with different time-saving ending conditions is provided for the jackpot type in which a round game of 7 rounds (R) is executed, but this is not limited to this, and other jackpot types are provided. A jackpot type having different time-saving termination conditions may be provided for the jackpot type in which a round game is executed.

In this case, as in this 16th control example, there is a jackpot type in which a time-saving end condition is defined that makes it difficult to obtain special drawing 2 reservation during a time-saving state, and a time-saving end condition that makes it possible to obtain special drawing 2 reservation during a time-saving state. It is preferable to provide a jackpot type in which a jackpot game is defined and a jackpot type in which a jackpot game is executed with the same jackpot game content. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the time-saving ending conditions set depending on the content of the jackpot game, and the time-saving ending conditions set until the special symbol drawing during the time-saving state is actually executed. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the time-saving ending conditions to be advantageous to the player. In addition, as a jackpot type in which a time-saving end condition is specified that makes it difficult to obtain special drawing 2 pending during a time-saving state, a jackpot type may be specified so that a jackpot game with a different number of rounds from other jackpot types is executed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the time-saving ending condition that is set is the time-saving ending condition that is advantageous to the player, depending on the content of the jackpot game (number of round games) executed during the jackpot game. It is now possible to know in advance that the game result during the jackpot waiting state is a game result that is disadvantageous to the player (a game result for which no wait time is set), and the time saving state is used for players whose desire to play has decreased. Since it is possible to quickly understand that a time-saving ending condition (time-saving ending condition advantageous to the player) is set in which it is easy to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation, the player's desire to play can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 519, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol drawing, or when a jackpot game ends based on a small winning game, the time saving state is shorter than when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing. The contents of the time-saving grant 16 table 202vh are defined so that the time-saving end conditions that make it easy to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation are set in the table.Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot AD or jackpot AE, the small In any case where V is passed during the winning game, it is specified that the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to "10" and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is set to "5".

In other words, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol lottery up to five times during the time saving state, and furthermore, the special symbol lottery 2 It is possible to end the time saving state while the hold is acquired.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example, the time saving state is set based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery rather than the time saving state is set based on the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In this case, it is easier to increase the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed. With this configuration, for players who are playing games in the normal state, not only games that aim to shift the gaming state to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state, but also special symbol lottery. It is possible to make the player more interested in the type of game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 519, when the time saving state is set based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, the same time saving end condition is set for all. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the time-saving state is set based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving ending conditions may have different degrees of advantage to the player. The contents of the time-saving grant 16 table 202vh may be defined so as to be set according to the type of jackpot, for example, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when a small jackpot is won. In other words, it is preferable to set a time-saving ending condition that is more advantageous to the player in the case of winning with a lower probability of winning. This makes it possible to make the benefit given to the player in the event of a low-probability win advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, we provide multiple jackpot types that can be set when a small hit is won, and for some of them, the same time-saving ending conditions as when winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, that is, other second special symbol lottery. A time-saving ending condition may be defined that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving ending condition that is set when the time-saving state is set based on the lottery result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive benefits are continuously provided to a player who has transitioned to a gaming state (time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed. Can be suppressed.

In the present 16th control example, as shown in FIG. 519, the same time-saving end condition can always be set regardless of the game state when the jackpot game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the time saving grant table used in the control example described above, different time saving ending conditions may be defined depending on the gaming state, or different time saving ending conditions may be defined depending on the number of consecutive jackpot games. Also good. With this configuration, it is possible to set different time-saving termination conditions according to various gaming conditions, so it is possible to provide players with more complex gameplay, and the game It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Next, returning to FIG. 515(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 515(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 515(b), the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the 16th control example has input data to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 474(b)). The difference is that a ball standby flag 203va, an operating winning opening type storage area 203vb, a distribution state storage area 203vc, a distribution state timer 203vd, and a special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ve are added.

The ball entry standby flag 203va indicates whether or not the game is in a jackpot game standby state in which the start of the jackpot game is waited until a game ball enters the operating winning hole (left operating winning hole A691, right operating winning hole B692). This is a flag to indicate. If this ball entry standby flag 203va is on, it means that the game is in a waiting state for a jackpot game, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a waiting state for a jackpot game. This entry standby flag 203va is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has elapsed (see C10221 in FIG. 521). In addition, the ball entry standby flag 203va is set to OFF when a game ball enters the operating winning opening (left operating winning opening A691, right operating winning opening B692) during the jackpot game waiting state (FIG. 526 (See C15016). While this ball entry standby flag 203va is on, balls entering the operating winning holes (left operating winning opening A691, right operating winning opening B692) are treated as valid (when a ball entering is detected, a jackpot game is started). ).

The activated winning hole type storage area 203vb is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the type of activated winning hole through which the ball passed during the jackpot game standby state. This activated winning hole type storage area 203vb stores information indicating the type of activated winning hole through which the ball first passed during the jackpot game standby state. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the stored information is read out, and a wait time for a period is set based on the read result.

The information stored in this operation winning opening type storage area 203vb is configured to be output as a command to the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the voice lamp control device 113 receiving this command, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress or not. It may also be configured such that the performance mode of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot can be determined. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 can suggest the length of the wait time (whether it is set or not) as a jackpot performance while knowing the length of the wait time that will be set after the end of the jackpot game. You can perform a performance to do so. In this case, as in this 16th control example, a charge time acquisition challenge effect is used to notify which operating prize opening the ball has won (information on the set wait time) during the jackpot standby state. Alternatively, the performance result of the charge time acquisition challenge performance may be configured to be announced during the jackpot game rather than before the start of the jackpot game.

The distribution state storage area 203vc is a storage area in which data indicating the orientation (tilting status) of the distribution member 682 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203vc, the distribution member 682 is tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right operating prize opening B692). This means that if "01H" is stored, the distribution member 682 is in a state tilted to the right side (a state in which game balls can enter the left operating prize opening A691). It means there is. The data in the distribution state storage area 203vc is updated to data corresponding to the changed arrangement each time the arrangement of the allocation member 682 is changed in the jackpot game standby state (see C15006 and C15008 in FIG. 526). Note that the initial arrangement of the distribution member 682 is in a state where it is tilted to the left. In accordance with this, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203vc also becomes "00H". In the jackpot game standby state, each time the data in the distribution state storage area 203vc is updated, a command (distribution state command) is set. Based on this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution member 682 has been changed, and the display form of the standby state effect is updated to the display form corresponding to the changed arrangement.

The distribution state timer 203vd is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 682 is switched. The timer value of the distribution state timer 203vd is reset to "0" each time the state of the distribution member 682 is switched in the jackpot game standby state, and each time the jackpot start process (see FIG. 526) to be described later is executed. It is added by 1 (S15002 in FIG. 526). That is, it is updated at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the main process. Then, when the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the distribution member 682 is switched (see C15005 and C15007 in FIG. 526).

The special figure 2 variation number counter 203ve is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ea is referred to when determining whether to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality. In addition, since the specific content is the same as that of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example described above, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 520 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 520, in this 16th control example, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 476(b)) is The difference is that a state rendering flag 223va is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The ball entry standby state production flag 223va is a flag for indicating that the current state is a jackpot game standby state, and is a flag for indicating that the ball entry standby state is currently in a jackpot game standby state. This is set to ON when it is determined that a ball standby state command has been received, and is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. Then, when receiving the detection signal output from each passing sensor 680s1 to 680s5 described with reference to FIG. The setting status of is referenced. In this 16th control example, when the ball entry standby state production flag 223va is set to ON, that is, when any of the passage sensors 680s1 to 680s5 detects the passage of a ball during the jackpot game standby state, It is configured to switch the performance mode of the charge time acquisition challenge performance, and even if each passing sensor 680s1 to 680s5 detects a ball when the ball entry standby state performance flag 223va is not set to on, the performance mode of the charge time acquisition challenge performance is changed. The configuration is such that there is no need to switch the performance mode of the performance.

In other words, the ball entry standby state performance flag 223va is a flag for indicating that the current state is in the jackpot game standby state, and also indicates the performance mode of the performance currently being executed (the charge time executed during the jackpot game standby state). This is a flag for specifying a period in which the performance mode of the acquisition challenge performance is switched based on the detection signal output from each passing sensor 680s1 to 680s5.

<About the control process of the main controller 110 in the 16th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 521 to 528. In this 16th control example, with respect to the 14th control example described above, instead of special symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 478), special symbol variation processing 16 (see FIG. 521) is performed, special symbol variation start processing 5 ( 345), special symbol fluctuation start processing 16 (see Fig. 522), time saving update processing 16 (see Fig. 524) instead of time saving update processing (see Fig. 346), main processing 14 (see Fig. 480). ) instead of main processing 16 (see Fig. 525), jackpot control processing 16 (see Fig. 527) instead of jackpot control processing 14 (see Fig. 481), and small winning processing (see Fig. 523). , jackpot start processing (see FIG. 526) are added, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 16th control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applicable to this 16th control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the present 16th control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 521, special symbol variation processing 16 (C10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 16 (C10104). This special symbol variation processing 16 (C10104) is different from the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 14 (C10004: see FIG. 478) in that when a jackpot is won, the left operating prize opening A691 or the right operating winning opening B692 is The difference is that the process to set the start of the jackpot until the game ball enters the ball is added, and the process to update the status of the time-saving game when the special symbol starts changing is changed, but other than that are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 16 (C10504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in a jackpot or in a waiting ball entry state (C10201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress or the ball is in a standby state (C10201: Yes), the start of variation of the special symbol is not set, so the process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of C10201, if it is determined that the game is not in a jackpot or waiting state (C10201: No), the process moves to the process of C281 described above. Next, the process of C202 described above is executed, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (C202: No), the processes of C204 to C212 are executed. After executing the process of C207 or C212, next, special symbol variation start process 16 (C10202) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the special symbol fluctuation start process 16 (C10202) will be described later with reference to FIG. , is different in that it is executed when the special symbol starts changing.

On the other hand, in the process of C202, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (C202: Yes), the process of C214 to C217 is executed, and then the time saving medium counter 203g and the special symbol 2 variation number counter 203ea The value of is set to 0 (C10220). Next, the ball entry standby flag 203va is set on (C10221). By setting the ball entry standby flag 203va to ON here, the start of the jackpot is not set until the game ball enters the left action winning hole A691 or the right action winning hole B692. Next, a ball entry standby state command indicating a ball entry standby state is set (C10222), the process of C225 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, the special symbol variation start process 16 (C10201), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 16 (C10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 16 (C10201). This special symbol variation start process 16 (C10201) is different from the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process 5 (C213: see FIG. 345) in that it executes the time saving update process 16 (C10242) for updating the time saving gaming state. There is a difference.

In the special symbol variation start processing 16 (C10201), first, the first symbol stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) The respective values of the winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are obtained (C10231). Next, the special symbol lottery results are determined based on the first random number table (special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202va1, special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202va2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is acquired (C10232), and the process moves to C10233.

Specifically, if the special symbol fluctuation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is changed to the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202va1 (figure 1). 516(b))) are compared one by one with the four random numbers set. As mentioned above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers for the first special symbol that will result in a jackpot, and the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these random numbers that will result in a jackpot are set. When the numbers match, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, a random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress bias in jackpots.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol is configured not to win a small hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a type of special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit depending on the type of the special symbol, and a type of special symbol that does not win a small prize, and a special symbol that wins a small prize. Players can be motivated to play games in order to have the lottery executed.

In addition, in this control example, the jackpot of the special symbol corresponds to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1, and the jackpot of the special symbol corresponds to the value within the other range (10 to 342) according to the type of the special symbol. However, in other configurations, for example, the first special symbol may be set to a part of the range that results in a jackpot (for example, 0 to 2), and the second special symbol may be set to a small hit. It may be set as a winning range.

Furthermore, in this control example, the special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, miss) is configured to be performed using the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 16 table 202va. As another configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, the first random number table may be used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or not. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a jackpot, the second random number table is used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a small win or not. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of special symbols using multiple random number tables in this way, the lottery results of the special symbols can be set more randomly, and fraudulent acts that manipulate the lottery results of the special symbols can be suppressed. .

In this control example, when performing a special symbol lottery, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, the values of multiple random number counters and the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number 16 table 202va. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot based on the value of the first random number counter, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not is determined based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 522, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C10233, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of C10232 is a special symbol jackpot (C10233). If it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (C10233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 16 table 202vb corresponding to the type of special symbol corresponding to the current special symbol lottery ( C10234), sets the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type (C10235), determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C10236), and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time. A corresponding fluctuation pattern command is set (C10241), and then time saving update processing 16 (C10242) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of the time saving update process 16 (C10242) will be described later with reference to FIG. 524.

On the other hand, in the process of C10233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C10233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (C10237), and it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined that (C10237: Yes), the small winning process (C10240) is executed, the processes of C10241 and C10242 mentioned above are executed, and this process is ended.

In addition, in the process of C10237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (C10237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss, the result will be a loss corresponding to the type of special symbol. Set the display mode for the time (C10238), determine the fluctuation pattern at the time of miss based on the number of held pitches (C10239), set the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern for the time determined this time (C10241), Time-saving update processing 16 (C10242) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 523, the small winning process (C10240) which is one process in the special symbol variation start process 16 (C10201) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing the small winning process (C10240). In this small hit processing (C10240), the fluctuation pattern and display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 are determined based on the acquired values of the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1. Execute the process to determine.

In the small winning process (C10240), first, the current small winning type is obtained based on the small winning type selection 16 table (see FIG. 518) (C10251). Next, the display mode at the time of small winning corresponding to the obtained small winning type is set (C10252), the small winning fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 (C10253), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 524, the time saving update process 16 (C10242) which is one process in the special symbol variation start process 16 (C10201) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process 16 (C10242). This time-saving update process 16 (C10242) is different from the above-mentioned time-saving update process (C221: see Figure 346) in that it is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, and that the end conditions for the time-saving state are different. .

In the time saving update process 16 (C10242), first, it is determined whether the special symbol type of the special symbol variation to be executed this time is a variation of the second special symbol (C10281). If it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is a variation of the second special symbol (C10281: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 203ve is subtracted by 1 (C10282), and then the subtracted special symbol is It is determined whether the value of the variation counter 203ve in FIG. 2 is 0 (C10283). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ve is not 0 (C10283: No), the process moves to C10284.

On the other hand, in the process of C10281, if it is determined that the variation executed this time is not a variation of the second special symbol (that is, a variation of the first special symbol), the value of the special symbol 2 variation number counter ve is Since there is no need to subtract, the processes of C10282 to C10283 are skipped and the process moves to C10284.

In the process of C10284, the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (C10284). Next, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C10285). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the time-saving counter 203g is not 0 (C10285: No), the time-saving end condition is not satisfied, so the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C10283, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ve is 0 (C10283: Yes), or in the process of C10285, it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0. If (C10285: Yes), the process moves to C10286. In C10286, the values of each counter of the time saving counter 203g and the special figure 2 variation counter 203ve are reset to 0 (C10286). Next, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C10287), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C10288), and this processing is ended.

Next, the contents of main processing 16 will be explained with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 16. As shown in FIG. 525, main processing 16 replaces jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) as processing executed every 4 milliseconds with respect to the main processing of the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 480). The difference is that the jackpot control process 16 (C11104) is executed and a new jackpot start process (C1091) is added, but the rest is the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the jackpot start process (C1091) will be described. This jackpot start process (C1091) monitors the ball entering the operating winning opening (left operating winning opening A691, right operating winning opening B692), and when the ball entering the operating winning opening is detected, the operating winning opening This is a process for setting the wait time period corresponding to the type.

In the jackpot start processing (C1091), first, if it is determined in the processing of C15001 that the ball entry waiting flag 203va is on (that is, the jackpot waiting state is in progress) (C115001: Yes), then the distribution state timer 1 is added to the value of 203va (C15002), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (C15003). In the process of C15003, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203va after addition is 500 or more (C15003: Yes), it means that the timing has come to switch the state of the distribution member 682, so the distribution is not performed. Each of the processes C15004 to C15010 for switching the state of the member 682 is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203vc is "00H" (the distribution member 682 is tilted to the left) (C15004). In the process of C15004, if it is determined that "00H" is stored (C15004: Yes), the sorting member 682 is changed from being tilted to the left to being tilted to the right (C15005), and the sorting state is changed. "01H" is stored in the storage area 203vc (C15006), and the process moves to C15009.

On the other hand, in the process of C15004, if it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203vc is "01H" (C15007: No), the distribution member 682 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. The state is changed (C15007), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203vc (C15008), and the process moves to C15009.

In the process C15009 executed after the process C15006 or C15008, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution member 682 after switching is set (C15009), and the value of the distribution state timer 203va is reset to 0 ( C15010), the process moves to C15011.

On the other hand, in the process of C15003, if it is determined that the value of the updated distribution state timer 203va is less than 500 (C15003: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 682. Therefore, each process from C15004 to C15010 is skipped and the process moves to C15010. In the process of C15010, it is determined whether the ball entering the right operating winning opening B692 is detected (C15011), and if it is determined that the entering ball is detected (C15011: Yes), the processing is performed for the operating winning opening type storage area 203vb. Then, data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds is stored as data corresponding to the right operating winning hole B692 (C15012), and the process moves to C15012. Thereby, after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to refer to the operating winning hole type storage area 203vb and set 10 seconds as the wait time period (time-saving game state in which special symbol variations are not executed).

On the other hand, in the process of C15011, if it is determined that the ball entering the right-acting winning hole B692 is not detected (C15011: No), then it is determined whether the ball entering the left-acting winning hole A691 is detected. (C15013). In the process of C15013, if it is determined that the ball entering the left operating winning hole A691 is detected (C15013: No), the weight is stored as data corresponding to the left operating winning hole A691 in the operating winning hole type storage area 203vb. A time of 0 seconds is stored (C15104), and the process moves to C15013. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the operation winning hole type storage area 203vb is referred to and the wait time period (time-saving game state in which special symbol variations are not executed) is not set. The time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbols begin to change. Therefore, the ball entering the left-operated winning hole A691 will have a disadvantageous result for the player.

On the other hand, in the process of C15103, if it is determined that the ball entering the left operating winning hole A691 is not detected (C15013: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot waiting state, so the main Finish the process.

When the process of C15012 or C15014 is completed, next, the start of the jackpot is set, the jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON (C15015), and the waiting ball entry flag 203va is set to OFF (C15016). Next, the distribution state timer 203va is reset to 0 (C15017), and this processing is ended. In the process of C15017, by resetting the distribution state timer 203va at the end of the jackpot waiting state, it is possible to start updating the timer value from the state where the distribution state timer 203va was reset in the next jackpot waiting state. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 527, the jackpot control process 16 (C11104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 16 (C11104). This jackpot control process 16 (C11104) adds a process to the above-mentioned jackpot control process 5 (C1004: see Figure 358) to set a wait time based on the jackpot type won at the end of the jackpot. They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot control procedure 16 (C11104), the same processing as C1201 to C1211 of the above-mentioned jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) is executed, and in the processing of C1212, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect, ( C1212: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is determined with reference to the time saving grant 16 table 202vh, and is set in the time saving medium counter 203g and the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ve, respectively (C12054). Next, processes C1214 to C1215 are executed. Then, the standby setting process 16 is executed (C12055), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the standby setting process 16 (C12055) will be described later with reference to FIG. 528.

Next, with reference to FIG. 528, the standby setting process 16 (C12055), which is one process in the jackpot control process 16 (C11104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 16 (C11104). This standby setting process 16 (C12055)) is different from the above-mentioned standby setting process (C12005: see FIG. 482) in that the winning openings (left operating winning opening A691, right operating winning opening B692) are entered while waiting for a jackpot. The difference is that the wait time period is set based on the method.

In the standby setting process 16 (C12055), first, reading of data stored in the operating winning a prize opening type storage area 203vb is executed (C12081). The data in the operating winning opening type storage area 203vb is stored in the processing of C15012 or C15014 of the jackpot start process (C1091: see Figure 526) for operating openings (left operating winning opening A691, right operating The wait time period is set based on the winning hole B692).

Next, in the process of C12081, it is determined whether the data stored in the activated winning opening type storage area 203vb is data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds (C12082). If it is determined that the data stored in the operating winning opening type storage area 203vb is data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds (C12082: Yes), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the waiting timer 203sb ( C12083). If the data in the operating winning hole type storage area 203vb read in the process of C12081 is data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds, a jackpot will start if a ball enters the right operating winning hole B692 during the waiting period for the jackpot. This is data set in the process of C15012 of the process (C1091: see FIG. 526).

Next, a standby flag to indicate that it is a wait time period is set on (C12084), a status command indicating a standby state is set (C12085), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C12082, if it is determined that the data stored in the activated winning opening type storage area 203vb is not data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds (C12082: No), the activated winning opening read out in the process of C12081 If the data in the mouth type storage area 203vb is not data indicating a wait time of 10 seconds, if a ball enters the left operating winning hole A691 during the waiting period for a jackpot, jackpot start processing (C1091: see Figure 526) This is data set in the process of C15014.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 529. This 16th control example differs from the 14th control example described above in that jackpot related command processing 16 (C13502: see Figure 529) is executed instead of jackpot related command processing (C3502: see Figure 365). However, everything else is the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as those explained in each control example and each embodiment described above, the contents explained in each control example and each embodiment described above are omitted. It is applicable. In addition, the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 16th control example, and the technical ideas explained in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are naturally applied to this 16th control example. Naturally, the modified examples and additional examples are also applied to the present 16th control example.

Referring to FIG. 529, jackpot related command processing 16 (C13502) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of jackpot related command processing 16 (C13502). Jackpot-related command processing 16 (C13502) is executed when a ball entry standby state command and a distribution state command are received from the main controller 110 in response to the above-mentioned jackpot-related command processing (C3502: see FIG. 365). The difference is that additional processing is required. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot related command processing 16 (C13502), first, it is determined whether or not a ball entry standby state command has been received from the main controller 110 (C13601). If it is determined that a ball entering standby state command has been received (C13602: Yes), a waiting state command for ball entering display is set (C13602), the process of C3608 described above is executed, and this process ends. This ball entry standby state command is a command that is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (C10222: see Figure 521). , a command for displaying the charge time acquisition challenge effect illustrated with reference to FIG. 511 is set in the display control device 114.

On the other hand, in the process of C13601, if it is determined that the waiting state command has not been received (C13601: No), the process is the same as the process of C3601 to C3607 of the above-mentioned jackpot related command process (C3502: see Figure 365). Execute the process. In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), it is determined whether the distribution state command has been received from the main control device 110 (C13603). A display command for indicating the distribution status command is set (C13604), the process of C3608 described above is executed, and this process ends. This distribution state command is a command that is set when the distribution member 682 is tilted (C15009: see FIG. 526), and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the distribution state command from the main control device 110, In the charge time acquisition challenge performance illustrated with reference to FIG. 511, a display command is set based on the tilted state of the distribution member 682 for the display mode of the distribution member 682 displayed in the display area HR32. On the other hand, in the process of C13603, if it is determined that the distribution status command has not been received (C13603: No), the process of C3608 described above is executed and this process ends.

In the 16th control example described above, by providing the rotating croon 681 as the delay means (variable means), the timing at which the balls reach the distribution member 682 (distribution means) can be varied. Therefore, the system is configured to make it difficult for the player to predict which operational winning opening the ball will pass through, but the technical idea of the 16th control example described above is applied to other configurations. For example, the player may be configured to be able to select (select easily) whether to pass the ball to the left operating winning port A691 or to the right operating winning port B692. It's okay.

Specifically, for the game board 13 (see FIG. 507) of the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example, the configuration of the rotating croon 681 as a delay means is eliminated, and the switching operation of the distribution member 682 is changed. , change from a 2 second period to a 10 second period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to pass the ball to an arbitrary operation winning hole while visually observing the tilting situation of the distribution member 682. With this configuration, a player who wants to finish the game quickly will select the left-operated winning hole A691, which has a short wait time, and a player who wants to play the game for a long time will select the right-operated winning hole, which has a long wait time. The ball can be passed through by selecting the operation winning hole B692.

In addition, in this case, when the ball passes through the left-operated prize opening A691, it is disadvantageous in terms of the overall game because it becomes difficult to execute the game during the time saving state, so, for example, the jackpot game It is preferable to configure the game content so that it is more advantageous than when the ball passes through the right-acting winning hole B692. In other words, for players who want to end the game quickly, instead of ending the time-saving game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game early (making it difficult to execute the next jackpot game), the player who wants to finish the game quickly can save more time in the current jackpot game. It is preferable to provide a bonus so that the advantage of the entire game is made uniform regardless of which operating winning opening the ball passes through.

<About the modification of the 16th control example>
Next, a modification of the above-described 16th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 530 and 531. The above-mentioned 16th control example, like the above-mentioned 14th control example, was configured to set the wait time after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, as described above with reference to FIG. 473, after the jackpot performance performed during the jackpot game ends (after the ED performance ends), the charge time performance corresponding to the wait time is executed. was.

On the other hand, the modification of the 16th control example is different in that the performance content is changed so that the wait time is set during the jackpot game. More specifically, after all the round games in the jackpot game are finished, a wait time is set, and the ending performance of the jackpot game is executed just before the wait time ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to include a charge time effect to indicate that a wait time has been set in the jackpot effect executed during a jackpot game, and to notify the player of the jackpot. This can make the player think that the time saving state has been set during the game. Therefore, it is possible to provide an innovative game feature in which the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the execution period of the jackpot performance.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the jackpot performance is executed using the period until the end of the wait time as in this modification, the special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state will start immediately after the jackpot performance ends. Therefore, compared to a case where the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot performance, it can be made to appear that the special symbol lottery is being executed smoothly. By configuring in this way, for example, if the wait time is set in a state where special symbol 2 reservation has already been obtained, the special symbol lottery is prohibited by setting the wait time in which execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the time efficiency of a lottery is reduced.

<17th control example>
Next, a seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 532 to 538. In this 17th control example, compared to the 14th control example described above, the length of the wait time that can be set is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. They are different in that they are

In the above-mentioned 14th control example, it is determined whether or not the special drawing 2 reservation has been acquired at a predetermined timing immediately before the end of the jackpot game (starting timing of the ending period), and when it is determined that the special drawing 2 reservation has not been acquired, By setting a wait time of a certain period (15 seconds) and making it difficult for the first special symbol lottery to be executed immediately after the time saving state is set, it is preferable for the player to play during the time saving state. It was to be carried out by

On the other hand, the present seventeenth control example is different in that the waiting time setting period is configured to be different based on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when a jackpot type with a long wait time is set, the same effect as the 14th control example described above can be achieved, but for a short time (for example, 0 seconds or 5 seconds). If a jackpot type is set in which a waiting time of The configuration is such that a wait time of length is not set.

With this configuration, a period (wait time) during which it is easy to obtain special symbol 2 pending is set for the player before the special symbol lottery is executed in the time-saving state, and A game that aims to make the game play smoothly during the time saving state, and a game that aims to obtain as many special symbols 2 pending before the special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state. The offer can be switched depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<About the production content in the 17th control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533, the content of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the seventeenth control example will be explained. As mentioned above, in this 17th control example, different lengths of wait time are defined depending on the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the setting conditions for setting the wait time at the end of the jackpot game are satisfied. The system is configured such that a wait time of a predetermined length corresponding to the jackpot type is set when the jackpot is won.

In the seventeenth control example configured in this way, during the jackpot game, a performance (charge time acquisition challenge performance) for notifying the player of the length of wait time that can be set is executed. This is significantly different from the fourteenth control example described above. The content of the charge time acquisition challenge performance will be explained in detail below. Of the various effects executed in this 17th control example, the effects that are common to the effects executed in the 14th control example described above, and the common elements (display mode) used in the effects to be executed are as follows: , the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 532(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charge time acquisition challenge effect executed during the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 532(a), when the jackpot game in progress reaches a predetermined execution timing (sixth round), a charge time acquisition challenge effect is started. This charge time acquisition challenge performance is a performance for notifying the player of the length of the wait time that can be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Then, as the charge time acquisition challenge performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 532(b), the treasure box 1802 is used to notify the charge time acquisition result and the number of seconds if the charge time has been acquired. is executed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 532(b), a ticket 1803 is displayed as a mode to notify the player that a charge time (wait time) will be set after the end of the jackpot game. , characters "+10 seconds" are displayed to indicate that a charge time (wait time) of 10 seconds is set.

In other words, when a ticket 1803 appears from the treasure box 1802, it is notified that a charge time (wait time) is set, and the contents of the charge time (wait time) are notified based on the contents written in the ticket 1803. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the details of the benefits to be given to the player can be notified to the player in stages, so that the player can be kept interested in the performance. Various methods may be used to notify the player of the details of the benefits granted to the player in stages. For example, the front side of the ticket 1803 (the first visible side) may be You can display the characters ``Charge Time GET'' and write the number of seconds for the charge time on the back side of the ticket 1803 (the side that is difficult to see at first), and then perform an effect in which the ticket 1803 gradually turns over. The back side of the ticket 1803 indicating the number of seconds is displayed, and the characters ``Charge Time GET'' or ``Unfortunate'' are displayed on the front side, and the back side of the ticket 1803 is first visually checked by the player, and the front side is gradually changed. An effect that allows the player to visually confirm the displayed content may be executed.

Furthermore, unlike the present control example, it may be configured to notify all the details of the benefits given to the player at once.

On the other hand, if the wait time is not set after the end of the jackpot game, an effect is performed in which the ticket 1803 does not appear from the treasure box 1802, as shown in FIG. 533(a). Then, when the charge time is set, an effect that causes the characters to gather is executed in the same way as in the fourteenth control example described above. Note that the performance during the charge time, that is, the performance executed in response to the game in which the special figure 2 reservation is obtained during the wait time, is the same as the above-mentioned 14th control example, so the explanation thereof will be omitted. .

As explained above, in this 17th control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a wait time and the length of the wait time to be set, depending on the type of jackpot. Using the jackpot performance, it is possible to perform a performance related to the setting of wait time. Therefore, the period in which the performance related to the setting of the wait time can be executed is longer than in the fourteenth control example described above, so that it is possible to easily execute the performance that will interest the player.

In addition, in this 17th control example, the performance related to the setting of the wait time is configured to be executed using the jackpot game period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be executed during the jackpot fluctuation period of the special symbol. It may also be executed using the period of the variable performance. In this case, in addition to the effect of making the performance period longer, it is also possible to execute a variable performance that combines the presence or absence of a jackpot win and the presence or absence of a wait time setting, which allows for a more diverse range of performances. The game becomes executable and the interest of the game can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration in the 17th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 534 and 535. The pachinko machine 10 in this seventeenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above by changing part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and part of the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. They differ in that they are the same, but are otherwise the same. Descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 534(a). FIG. 534(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 534(a), the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example is different from the 14th control example described above in that a standby time selection table 202wa is added, and the rest is the same. It is. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The waiting time selection table 202wa is a data table that is referred to when determining the waiting time (wait time) set after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the jackpot type set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Different lengths of waiting time (wait time) are defined.

Here, the detailed contents of the waiting time selection table 202wa will be explained with reference to FIG. 535. FIG. 535 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the waiting time selection table 202wa. As shown in FIG. 535, the waiting time selection table 202wa defines the waiting time in correspondence with the jackpot type. Specifically, the waiting time "30 seconds" is specified for the jackpot type "Jackpot AA". , "Jackpot AB" has a waiting time of "5 seconds," "Jackpot AC" has a waiting time of "0 seconds," and "Jackpot AD to AF" has a waiting time of "15 seconds."

With this configuration, the length of the waiting time can be set in accordance with the set jackpot type, so the length of the waiting time (wait time) can be set within a predetermined range as a gaming experience including the length of the waiting time. This makes it easier for players to play suitable games within the game. In other words, as in the above-mentioned 16th control example, the gameplay in which whether or not a wait time is set is determined by the behavior of the ball can provide advantageous benefits to the player for every jackpot. However, there is a risk that some players may lose their desire to play because there is a possibility that players will not be given benefits for all jackpots, but as in this 17th control example, By configuring the system so that the benefits granted according to the set type of jackpot are predefined, it is possible to avoid situations where excessive benefits are given to players or excessive benefits are not given. It can be made difficult.

In addition, in this 17th control example, an example was shown in which a specific waiting time is prescribed for the jackpot type, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the cumulative waiting time set for past jackpots may be set. If the result satisfies a predetermined condition, it may be configured such that a specific waiting time can be forcibly set; for example, if a jackpot with a short waiting time or no waiting time is set is executed five times in a row. The configuration may be such that a long waiting time (30 seconds) is more likely to be set for the next jackpot, or conversely, a jackpot with a long waiting time (30 seconds) set for three consecutive jackpots. When executed, the next jackpot may have a short waiting time, or may be configured so that a jackpot with no waiting time set is more likely to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for a player to be given too many benefits or not to be given too many benefits.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 534(b). FIG. 534(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 534(b), the RAM 223 in the 17th control example is different from the RAM 223 in the 14th control example described above in that a standby time storage area 223wa is added, and the rest is the same. . The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The waiting time storage area 223wa is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the waiting time determined based on the jackpot winning, and is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the waiting time determined based on the jackpot winning, and the waiting time determined by referring to the waiting time selection table 202wa. Information indicating the length of is stored, and the stored information is read when setting the waiting time. Then, a waiting time of a length corresponding to the read information is set.

Note that in this control example, while the information indicating the waiting time determined with reference to the waiting time selection table 202wa is stored in the waiting time storage area 223wa, the stored information is not changed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, for information indicating the waiting time determined with reference to the waiting time selection table 202wa, the waiting time is set only when a specific condition is satisfied during a jackpot game. It may be configured such that information indicating time subtraction or addition can be added. With this configuration, the length of the waiting time that is actually set can be made different from the length of the waiting time determined by referring to the waiting time selection table 202wa, so that it is possible for the player to It is possible to provide a surprising game to the player.

<About the control processing content of the main controller 110 in the 17th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 536 to 538, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described. This 17th control example differs from the 14th control example described above in that it executes processing for setting wait times of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot, and that the wait time is set at the end of the jackpot game. The difference is that the processing contents are different.

First, with reference to FIG. 536, the processing contents of jackpot control processing 17 (C11074) will be explained. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of jackpot control processing 17 (C11074). As shown in FIG. 536, this jackpot control process 17 (C11074) is a process for determining the length of the wait time at the start of a jackpot game, in contrast to the jackpot control process 14 (C11004) of the 14th control example described above. The difference is that (standby time determination process (C20001)) is executed, and that standby setting process 17 (C20003) is executed instead of the standby setting process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 537, the processing contents of the waiting time determination processing (C20001) will be explained. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the waiting time determination processing (C20001). In this waiting time determination process (C20001), a process for determining the length of the waiting time (wait time) set after the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the waiting time determination process (C20001) is executed, first, the waiting time is determined by referring to the current jackpot type and the waiting time selection table 202wa (C20101). Then, information indicating the length of the determined waiting time is stored in the waiting time storage area 223wa (C20102), a waiting time command indicating the length of the determined waiting time is set (C20103), and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, the processing contents of standby time setting processing 17 (C20003) will be explained. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of standby time setting processing 17 (C20003). This waiting time setting process 17 (C20003) is executed at the timing of the end of the jackpot game, and the process of actually setting the waiting time (wait time) is executed.

When the standby time setting process 17 (C20003) is executed, first, the value (information) stored in the standby time storage area 223wa is obtained (C20201), and whether the obtained value is larger than 0 (as the standby time (C20202), and if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (C20202: No), that is, the jackpot type set this time is jackpot AC and the wait time is determined. If the time is determined to be 0 seconds (see FIG. 535), no wait time is set, so the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C20202 that the value is greater than 0 (a number of seconds greater than 0 seconds has been determined as the standby time) (C20202: Yes), it corresponds to the value acquired in the standby timer 203sb. (C20203), sets the standby flag 203sa to on (C12014), sets a standby start command including information indicating the standby time (C12015), and sets the value stored in the standby time storage area 223wa. is cleared (C20204), and this processing ends.

As mentioned above, in this 17th control example, unlike the 14th control example described above, the length (number of seconds) of the waiting time (wait time) is determined at the start timing of the jackpot game, and the length (number of seconds) of the wait time is determined at the start timing of the jackpot game. It is configured to execute processing for setting a waiting time (wait time). In other words, a grace period is provided between when the length (number of seconds) of the wait time (wait time) is determined and when it is set. When the length (number of seconds) of the waiting time (wait time) is determined, a command indicating the determined number of seconds is set and can be output to the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to easily perform an effect to suggest the length (number of seconds) of a waiting time (wait time) to be set later.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when the length (number of seconds) of the waiting time (wait time) is actually determined, a command indicating the determined number of seconds is set. Without limitation, for example, a command including information indicating the number of seconds of waiting time corresponding to the jackpot type set at the time of winning a jackpot with the special symbol center line can be set and output to the audio lamp control device 113. You may do so. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the player of information regarding the waiting time using a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation.

As explained above, this 17th control profit is different in that the waiting time setting period is configured to differ based on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. There is. In other words, when a jackpot type with a long wait time is set, the same effect as the 14th control example described above can be achieved, but for a short time (for example, 0 seconds or 5 seconds). If a jackpot type is set in which a waiting time of The configuration is such that a wait time of length is not set.

With this configuration, a period (wait time) during which it is easy to obtain special symbol 2 pending is set for the player before the special symbol lottery is executed in the time-saving state, and A game that aims to make the game play smoothly during the time saving state, and a game that aims to obtain a large number of special symbol 2 reservations before the special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state. The offer can be switched depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, using the 14th control example to the 17th control example, the timing at which a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state and the special symbol lottery during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) We have explained a technique that allows the wait time (period for prohibiting the execution of the special symbol lottery) to be set after the end of the jackpot game in order to make the timing different from the timing when the execution of the special symbol lottery is permitted.

By setting the wait time in this way, it is possible to execute a game in which the lottery right of the special symbol type (second special symbol) that is more likely to be executed during the time saving state is acquired during the wait time. In this case, it is possible to efficiently execute a lottery of a special symbol type (second special symbol) that is more likely to be executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in each of the control examples described above, an example is shown in which the wait time is set after the end of the jackpot game, but the timing to set the wait time is not limited to after the end of the jackpot game, for example, during the jackpot game or during the small win. It may be during the game. In addition, if a predetermined condition is satisfied after the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state (for example, a condition in which the opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery is lost and the first special symbol lottery is executed The configuration may also be such that the wait time can be set when the following is true. Even when configured in this way, the above-mentioned control example solves the problem of efficiently executing the lottery of the special symbol type (second special symbol) that is more likely to be executed during the time saving state during the time saving state. can do.

In addition, the wait time shown in each of the control examples above is a period in which special symbol lottery execution is prohibited, and normal symbol lottery execution is permitted, so it simply means that all of the player's games are prohibited. Unlike the case where a prohibited period (gaming suspension period) is set, the player can be allowed to continue playing some games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the setting of the wait time.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the wait time is used as a period for acquiring a lottery opportunity for a special symbol type (second special symbol) that is likely to be executed during the time saving state. In other words, since the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited during the wait time, the acquired lottery opportunity (special symbol pending) is not used. Therefore, compared to the time-saving state that allows the execution of special symbol drawings, the time-saving state that prohibits the execution of special symbol drawings is better because the acquired lottery rights (special pattern reservation) are not used (exploited). , it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to acquire a large number of lottery rights (special drawing reservations).

<About the concept of wait time>
Next, the concept of wait time explained in the 14th control example to the 17th control example described above will be explained. The above-mentioned wait time is a period during which the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited while the execution of the normal symbol lottery is permitted. Therefore, for example, as in each of the control examples described above, by setting the wait time in a state where the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, a special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to easily acquire the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special symbol reservation) by executing only the regular symbol lottery without having to play the regular symbol lottery.

Note that the pattern for setting the wait time of the concept described above may be other than the pattern described in each control example described above (for example, after the end of a jackpot game), for example, it may be during a jackpot game or a small win game, or it may be used during a pachinko machine It may also be done immediately after the power of 10 is turned on.

Furthermore, the game state in which the wait time is set is specified as the time saving state in each of the control examples described above, but is not limited to the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). ) may be set in the period in which the wait time is set. In addition, as in the first control example described above, variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and potential states (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are set. The wait time may be set in the period during which the wait time is set.

In addition, the wait time may be set after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, or the wait time may be set before the jackpot game is started.

In the 14th to 17th control examples described above, the conditions for ending the wait time are an ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a game result during the wait time is a predetermined game result. (The upper limit number of special map 2 reservations is acquired). However, other end conditions may also be provided. A forced termination means may be provided for forcibly ending the wait time based on the operation of the operation means.

Furthermore, in the 14th control example to the 17th control example described above, a period in which the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited while allowing the execution of the normal symbol lottery can be set as the wait time. For example, for multiple games that can be executed overlappingly, if it is a period in which execution of one game is allowed and execution of other games is prohibited, it falls under the concept of wait time described in each control example above. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in duplicate (so-called simultaneous variation specification), it is possible to allow execution of one of the special symbol lottery, A period during which execution of the other special symbol lottery is prohibited may be set as a wait time. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different gaming characteristics to the player depending on a period in which a wait time is set and a period in which a wait time is not set. In addition, the types of games that are regulated during wait time are not limited to games that involve some kind of lottery, but also include games that are executed based on the detection of passing of a ball (such as paying out prize balls or winning prizes). The present invention may also be applied to a game performed based on an operation by a player (such as opening an object) or a game performed based on a player's operation.

In addition, conventionally, a predetermined period (confirmation period) is provided between the stop display of a special symbol variation and the start of the next special symbol variation, and the result of the first special symbol variation is continued during the confirmation period. There is a game system that informs the player of the result of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner by stopping and displaying the result. This confirmation period is also included in the concept of wait time, but in the 14th to 17th control examples mentioned above, it is after the end of the jackpot game and before the start of the first special symbol change. It is configured so that the wait time can be set. That is, unlike the fixed period of special symbol fluctuations used conventionally, the difference is that the wait time is configured to be set before the start of the special symbol fluctuations.

<About the utility value of different wait times>
The wait time (the period in which the execution of the special symbol lottery is prohibited while allowing the execution of the normal symbol lottery) explained in the 14th control example to the 17th control example described above is the period in which the execution right of the special symbol lottery (special symbol reservation is prohibited). ) may be used for purposes other than making it easier to obtain.

For example, if the game result per unit time is excessively advantageous to the player, a wait time is set so that no more advantageous game results are provided to the player in a short period of time. It's okay.

Specifically, the ball output rate within a predetermined period (for example, within one hour) is calculated (number of game balls paid out ÷ number of game balls fired), and the ball output rate within the calculated period. It is preferable to configure the wait time period to be set differently based on the above.For example, at the end of a jackpot, if it is determined that the ball payout rate within the calculated period exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, It is better to configure the wait time period to be set longer. With this configuration, it is possible to set a long period during which the special symbol lottery is not executed, so the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, which increases the ball payout rate in a short period of time. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in order to suppress the increase in the ball payout rate in a short period of time, it is possible to use a process that stops all games for a predetermined period (game stop process), but in this case, all games During the period when the game is stopped, the player cannot play any game, which causes a problem that the player's desire to play decreases.

On the other hand, in this control example, the special symbol lottery is not executed during the wait time, but the normal symbol lottery is configured to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to continue playing games aimed at winning the regular symbol lottery and acquiring lottery rights (special symbol reservation) for the special symbol lottery, so when executing the process of stopping all games. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play compared to the above.

In this case, even if the same game state is set, the game content of the normal symbol lottery executed during the wait time (the winning probability and the winning game content executed at the time of winning) It is preferable to configure the game so that it is more advantageous to the player than the game content of the normal symbol lottery executed outside of the wait time. With this configuration, by setting the wait time, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a normal symbol lottery is executed, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play. be able to.

Furthermore, a game using a predetermined benefit acquired during the wait time (for example, special map 2 pending) is more popular with the player than a game using a predetermined benefit acquired other than during the wait time (for example, special map 2 pending). It may be configured to be an advantageous game.

In addition, if the game result per unit time is excessively disadvantageous to the player, the wait time for the predetermined period that is normally set can be changed to a wait time shorter than the predetermined period. The number of times of special symbol lottery that can be executed per time may be configured to be increased more than usual. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed based on the special symbol lottery within a unit time, so it is possible to provide a time-efficient game to the player. .

In addition, if the game result per unit time is excessively disadvantageous to the player, the game contents of the normal symbol lottery executed during the wait time (the winning probability, the winning game executed at the time of winning, etc.) It is preferable that the game contents) be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the game contents of the normal symbol lottery executed outside of the wait time. With this configuration, by setting the wait time, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a normal symbol lottery is executed, so that a player whose game result is excessively disadvantageous can be To increase the desire to play.

Furthermore, a game using a predetermined benefit acquired during the wait time (for example, special map 2 pending) is more popular with the player than a game using a predetermined benefit acquired other than during the wait time (for example, special map 2 pending). It may be configured to be an advantageous game.

You can also set the wait time for a long time (for example, 10 hours) and end the wait time when a specific end condition (for example, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of reserved special drawings reaches the upper limit) is met. By configuring the system so that the wait time can be set when the normal state is set as the gaming state during the initialization state of the pachinko machine 10 or after the end of a jackpot game, the wait time can be set. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to execute a game in which the player aims to finish the game.

In this case, in a normal state, a game is executed in which the player aims to win a regular symbol by drawing a regular symbol, and ends the wait time by acquiring a special symbol reservation during the winning of a regular symbol. Further, it is possible to create a novel gaming experience in which players aim for a jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the special symbol reservation.

If the pachinko machine 10 has the above-mentioned gameplay, a plurality of special features can be played in one game per regular symbol as a game per regular symbol executed based on the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery executed during the normal state. There are two types of normal patterns that can be acquired (per advantageous general pattern), one normal pattern that can only obtain one special pattern reservation (per normal normal pattern), and one normal pattern that can obtain a special pattern reservation (per normal normal pattern). It is preferable to configure the system to be able to execute the normal pattern winning (unfavorable normal pattern winning) in which it is difficult to obtain even one special pattern reservation in the per-figure game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described gameplay, the wait time can be ended when the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, and the number of reserved special drawings does not decrease during the waiting time. , the wait time can be ended by accumulating game results. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 has secured three special symbols on hold, the wait time can be ended by acquiring one more special symbol on hold, so the player is not allowed to continue playing. can be made easier to perform.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example to the seventeenth control example described above, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be able to set at least the high probability state of the symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is activated by the normal pattern winning game (the winning game performed when the normal pattern lottery is won) executed during the time saving state. is configured so that the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 when the ball is opened, and further, when the ball enters the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640. By configuring so that the second special symbol lottery that can be executed based on the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (a lottery that makes it easier to execute a jackpot game as a result), It was configured so that the gaming state (time saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute. The techniques and technical ideas of each of the control examples described above may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having other configurations. For example, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the As a configuration in which the game (special symbol lottery) can be executed, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be able to set at least the state), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by a normal pattern winning game (a winning game performed when a winning pattern is won in the normal pattern lottery) executed during the variable probability state, and the electric accessory 640a is opened. The structure is configured so that the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640, and furthermore, the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640 is configured to have an executable second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640. By configuring the 2nd special symbol lottery to be a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the 1st special symbol lottery (a lottery in which a probability change state is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game), the 2nd special symbol lottery can be executed. Even when applied to a pachinko machine 10 configured such that a gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed (variable probability state) is more advantageous to the player than a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery (normal state). good.

In addition, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, a game disadvantageous to the player (special symbol lottery) can be executed, and the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, normal symbol lottery). A low probability state) and a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) are configured to be able to be set at least, and a regular symbol winning game (a win in the regular symbol lottery) that is executed during the variable probability state is configured. The electric accessory 640a is opened by the winning game (which is executed when a winning game is won) and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640, and furthermore, the second ball entrance If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery that can be executed based on the ball entering the opening (winning opening) 640, the jackpot game to be executed is more likely than if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. By configuring it so that it is easier to acquire the right to set a variable probability state (the right to set a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game due to the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game), the second special symbol This is applied to a pachinko machine 10 configured such that a gaming state in which a lottery is easily executed (variable probability state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute a second special symbol lottery (normal state). It's okay.

<Summary of other examples>
In the above-described eleventh control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and the time is saved in a state where the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired. The configuration is such that a game more advantageous to the player is executed when the state is ended. On the other hand, it may be configured such that when the time saving state ends, it is more advantageous for the player if the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired than if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. For example, it may be configured such that the second special symbol lottery is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

With this configuration, the first time saving state in the sixth control example described above can be a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second time saving state.

In addition, in the above-described eleventh control example, the pachinko machine 10 that can set the normal state and the time saving state as the gaming state is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, A high probability state) or a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) may be configured to be settable.

For example, even if the technical ideas described in each of the control examples described above are applied to a pachinko machine 10 with a so-called simultaneous variation specification that can execute a first special symbol variation and a second special symbol variation in parallel. good. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 having the following playability may be configured using the technical idea of varying the timing of ending the time saving state, which is the technical idea shown in the eleventh control example described above.

<Example of application to pachinko machine 10 with simultaneous fluctuation specifications>
In the pachinko machine 10 that can execute the first special symbol variation indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol variation indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery in parallel, the normal state (the (low probability state, low probability state for normal symbols), short time state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) , at least settable, in which the time saving state is the first game state in which the variation time is more likely to be determined to be shorter for the first special symbol variation than for the second special symbol variation, and the probability variation state is the first special symbol variation. The second special symbol variation is configured to be a second game state in which a longer variation time is more likely to be determined than the second special symbol variation. That is, the special symbol type in which special symbol variation is likely to be executed can be changed depending on the set gaming state.

Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, by firing the ball in a specific game method (for example, a right-handed game), the execution trigger of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol The game board 13 is configured so that the triggers for executing the lottery can be established at the same time.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the timing at which the high probability state of normal symbols ends is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, if a probability variable state is set after winning a jackpot in the normal state, the time saving state is ended at the start of the predetermined number of fluctuations of the second special symbol fluctuation, in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, and a jackpot is achieved in the time saving state. When a variable probability state is set after winning, the time saving state is configured to end (shift to a potential state) at the end of a predetermined number of fluctuations of the second special symbol fluctuation, in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set. do. By configuring in this way, the game contents can be greatly different when a variable probability state is set.

In this case, it is preferable to define the potential state as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state. Furthermore, the timing of ending the time saving state may be varied based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times, that is, the second special symbol lottery (time saving final lottery) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, For example, if the lottery result of the time-saving final lottery is a winning result, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol change, and if the lottery result of the time-saving final lottery is a small win win, the small winning game It is preferable to configure the time saving state to end at the end timing of .

<About examples of performance response in case of power outage for each control example>
Next, among the various performances executed in each of the control examples described above, the main control device 110 performs different game controls (special pattern fluctuation game, regular pattern fluctuation game, small winning game, jackpot game) during multiple periods. The following describes the control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of a period effect (a series of effects, a final variable effect) that is executed over a period of time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main controller 110 is the same even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information is configured to be able to be temporarily retained (backed up), the control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223) is changed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. It is configured so that it will be deleted if the

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the above-mentioned period effect is being executed based on the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (power cutoff state). ), when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power restoration), it becomes impossible to read out what period of performance was being executed immediately before the power outage state. There was a problem in that it was not possible to restart the period performance.

Therefore, in this example, a return command indicating the gaming status at the time of power restoration is configured to be set in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 356) (set after C910 in FIG. 356), The commands at the time of return include the presence or absence of special pattern fluctuations, the presence or absence of regular pattern fluctuations, the current gaming state, the presence or absence of jackpot games, the presence or absence of small winning games, the presence or absence of right-hand hit notification, and the remaining period until the gaming state changes. It is configured to set a command including each piece of information, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned recovery command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is changed to a state in which a period effect can be executed (power outage). It is configured to be able to execute a determination process (a pre-power outage performance determination process) for determining whether the current state is a state in which there is a possibility that a period performance may have been executed immediately before.

In the pre-power-out performance determination process, if it is determined that the current period performance cannot be executed (for example, during a jackpot game), the performance according to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. If it is determined in the pre-power outage performance determination process that the current state is such that a period performance can be executed, a process is performed to restart the period performance based on a command output from the main control device 110 later. The preparation processing state is set so that a comment indicating that the performance is being prepared is displayed to the player indicating that the performance may be restarted.

Then, while the preparation processing state is set, the main controller 110 sends a command including information on the type of small win indicating a small win (a long open winning game) in which a series of effects are executed as a win related command. When it is determined that the small winning game has been output, the period performance is restarted from the start of the small winning game. With this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform period effects that span multiple periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, regular figure variable game, small winning game, jackpot game) are performed. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (a series of performances, a final variable performance), it is possible to prevent all performances during that period from being discarded.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the execution conditions for a new effect (period effect) are met while the preparation processing state is set, a restriction means is provided that restricts the execution of the new effect (period effect). are doing. In other words, the process of resuming the performance (period performance) that was being executed before the power outage is configured to be executed with priority over the process of executing a new performance (period performance) after the power is restored. With this configuration, it is possible to give priority to execution of performances (period performances) that have already been provided (partially provided) to players, so it is possible to provide performances that do not make players feel uncomfortable. . In addition, when the performance mode of the production (period production) that is being executed before the power outage is combined with the production mode of a production (period production) that has been newly set regardless of that production (period production), the game It is possible to reliably prevent performance results that are advantageous to the user.

In addition, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, each time various commands are received from the main controller 110, there is a possibility that a performance (period performance) was executed immediately before the power was cut off. The system is configured to repeatedly execute a determination process to determine whether or not there is a power outage, and based on the determination result, if it is determined that the stage immediately before the power outage is a state in which the performance (period performance) cannot be performed, It is configured to erase comments indicating to the player that the performance (period performance) may be resumed during production preparation, and to execute normal control processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main controller 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after the power is restored), the A display format that determines that a performance (period performance) that may have been running before the power outage cannot be restarted, and indicates to the player that the performance (period performance) that may have been running before the power outage cannot be resumed (for example, , ``The contents of the performance before the power outage are all invalidated'') are displayed, and the normal control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if it is not possible to restart the production (period production) that was being executed before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that the performance could not be restarted, for example. , before the power outage, a mission performance such as ``If 3 reach occurs within 10 rotations, it's a jackpot!'' was executed, and after the power was restored, ``3 reach ” and confuses the player. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, during a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which a mission performance can be set (the number of special map fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)), the mission performance may overlap with the performance result. It may be configured such that the presentation mode is not set. Specifically, in games where a mission can be set to achieve a specific reach mode (for example, a reach of "3", "5", or "7") as a mission effect, a predetermined reach after power restoration is performed. During the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is configured so that it is not set, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It is better to configure it so that it can be set. With this configuration, the performance can be executed within the limited range even within a predetermined period after the power is restored. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, a specific reach mode can be set, so a mission performance (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power is cut off. Even if a "reach of 3" happens to occur within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the lottery result will be a win, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

As explained above, in each of the control examples described above, the player wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery and plays a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) as an opportunity to execute a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. is executed (first opportunity), and a special symbol is drawn to win a small win, and during the small win game, the game ball is moved to a specific area (V winning device 650 which is opened during the small win game (Fig. A gaming machine that has two triggers: a trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in the V area (see 315); However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the trigger for executing a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery and execute a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game). The techniques of each of the control examples described above may be applied to a gaming machine having only a trigger (first trigger).

In addition, in each of the control examples described above, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a high probability state of the special symbol that increases the winning probability of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. A probability state, a high probability state of normal symbols) and a potential state (a high probability state of special symbols, a low probability state of normal symbols) may be configured to be settable.

When a specific gaming state (potential state) is set as the gaming state, it is easier to execute a specific special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 drawing) than when other gaming states are set. Figure 2: Make it easier for the ball to enter the starting slot that triggers the lottery. Or shorten the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 lottery), and make small winning games based on small winnings of the special drawing 2 drawing more frequent. The game to be played may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, it is possible to make the player play a game in which he can win many prize balls, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As explained above, in the fifth to tenth control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 having multiple jackpot execution opportunities for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol The first jackpot execution trigger is triggered by winning the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol (special pattern 1), and the small winning is won by the drawing of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), and the trigger is executed based on the small winning winning. A second jackpot execution opportunity is triggered by winning a ball in the V winning hole 650a (see FIG. 315), which is opened to a small winning game. In addition, as a special pattern variation execution trigger for executing the special symbol lottery, there is a first special pattern variation execution trigger that is triggered by placing a ball in the first winning hole 64 and a ball passing through the through gate 67. A ball is drawn into the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 315), which is opened by a game with a winning symbol, which is executed when a winning symbol is won in the lottery. It has a second special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning a prize. Then, the jackpot game is executed through various game processes depending on the establishment of each jackpot execution opportunity and each special symbol variation execution opportunity. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play a jackpot game through various gaming processes, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the fifth control example described above, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (the winning of a ball to the second prize opening 640 that triggers the execution of the special drawing 2 lottery), the first game If a transition condition for transitioning to another gaming state (normal state) in which it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the current gaming state is met, an acquisition guide notification is executed to allow the player to acquire a specific lottery right during one gaming state. However, by configuring the system to make it easier to execute a specific lottery after transitioning to another gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm until the end of one gaming state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during a jackpot game than in a gaming state that is set after the jackpot game ends, acquisition guidance notification may be provided during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that a specific lottery is more likely to be executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Furthermore, the ease of winning a particular lottery right may be varied by varying the ease with which a ball enters a winning hole (starting prize hole) that constitutes a specific lottery right, or by changing the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right. By varying the length of the set period, the ease with which a particular lottery right can be acquired during the gaming state may be varied.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one gaming state and another gaming state, but the benefits given to players are different. Any system may be used as long as it can vary the degree of play and change the game content in other game states based on the benefits acquired during one game state. For example, it is possible to store (remain) balls in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (retention member) is provided, and the configuration is such that balls can be stored in the storage member more easily when one game state is set than when another game state is set. In other game states, playing the game with the balls stored in the storage member is more advantageous for the player than playing the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Also good.

In each of the control examples described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 was used as an example of various effects to be executed. Any display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by voice, or various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10 may be used to alert the player. It is also possible to use a light emitting effect to notify the user.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, we use a notification effect that makes sure the player understands the content, and a suggestion effect that allows the player to subtly inform the player of the content. Suggestive effects may be executed instead of the above, or notification effects may be executed instead of suggestive effects.

In each of the control examples described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 was used as an example of various effects to be executed. Any display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by voice, or various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10 may be used to alert the player. It is also possible to use a light emitting effect to notify the user.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, we use a notification effect that makes sure the player understands the content, and a suggestion effect that allows the player to subtly inform the player of the content. Suggestive effects may be executed instead of the above, or notification effects may be executed instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, a pachinko machine 10 is used in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (jackpot probability) is set to two types: high and low (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) that can set one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is set. The main control device 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to configure the jackpot probability to be set for each setting value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest when the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to vary according to the setting value, or the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be changed depending on the setting value. It may be configured such that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state is varied according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the above-mentioned setting values, not only the jackpot probability but also the selection ratio of each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small win, the selection ratio of special symbol fluctuation patterns, etc. The fluctuation time may be made different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set is provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention to the setting value.

Further, the configuration is configured to set a setting command to indicate the set setting value, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the type of jackpot (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) output from the main controller 110 may be used. When the command is received, the currently set setting value may be determined from the contents of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration in which the above-mentioned setting values can be set, each setting value is Various parameters may be defined, and if a specific gaming state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value is set, and a predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value, one special symbol is drawn. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, or that the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (a bonus given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) This concept includes that the contents of the small winning game, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game) are advantageous to the player.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are unified according to the type of special symbol, but the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are not limited to this. may be changed. This makes it possible to provide more complex gameplay, and has the effect of suppressing early boredom with the game.

Furthermore, the variable probability state may be designed to continue until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery may be executed in which the state shifts to the normal gaming state each time the special symbol changes, and the lottery may be performed. It may be configured such that the game changes from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state by winning the game. In this case, as a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player and a variable probability state that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the variable probability state ends may be different, or the lottery probability of transition from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state may be different. You may also do so.

In addition, we set multiple time-saving ending conditions that are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, and among the multiple time-saving ending conditions, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of fluctuations, the time-saving end condition is set. When the end condition is met, that is, when the variable number end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small hit is won by drawing a special symbol, that is, when the winning number end condition is met. The configuration may be such that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of winnings is met, the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is met. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the completion of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol due to the time saving termination condition that is satisfied, the range that is the sum of the variation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small winning game is executed You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving termination condition that is met, even during a small winning game in which a small amount of benefits are given to the player, the electric accessory 640a can be activated to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game more advantageous for the player.

In addition, we have set up multiple types of small winnings with different periods in which small winning games are executed, and even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, the game will be played according to the type of small winning for which the conditions for ending the number of winnings have been met. It is a good idea to make the benefits given to different people different. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving termination condition.

In addition, in this case, even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, there are cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game starts, and cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game ends. It is best to configure the system so that there is a mixture of This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there is a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the small win has been won. Although a configuration is used in which the process of determining and the process of determining are executed separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of special symbols is centrally managed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied is used. You may use the structure which sets the timing which ends a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although a case has been described in which data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of balls into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the control examples described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of a game state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of a normal game state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. It is also possible to have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations may be used. It may also be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or whether it has been operated by the player touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the control examples described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each of the control examples described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 was used as an example of various effects to be executed. Any display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by voice, or various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10 may be used to alert the player. It is also possible to use a light emitting effect to notify the user.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, we use a notification effect that makes sure the player understands the content, and a suggestion effect that allows the player to subtly inform the player of the content. Suggestive effects may be executed instead of the above, or notification effects may be executed instead of suggestive effects.

In each of the control examples described above, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 was used as an example of various effects to be executed. Any display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by voice, or various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10 may be used to alert the player. It is also possible to use a light emitting effect to notify the user.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the control examples described above, we use a notification effect that makes sure the player understands the content, and a suggestion effect that allows the player to subtly inform the player of the content. Suggestive effects may be executed instead of the above, or notification effects may be executed instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, a pachinko machine 10 is used in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (jackpot probability) is set to two types: high and low (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) that can set one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is set. The main control device 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to configure the jackpot probability to be set for each setting value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest when the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to vary according to the setting value, or the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be changed depending on the setting value. It may be configured such that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state is varied according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the above-mentioned setting values, not only the jackpot probability but also the selection ratio of each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small win, the selection ratio of special symbol fluctuation patterns, etc. The fluctuation time may be made different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set is provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention to the setting value.

Further, the configuration is configured to set a setting command to indicate the set setting value, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the type of jackpot (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the variation time) output from the main controller 110 may be used. When the command is received, the currently set setting value may be determined from the contents of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration in which the above-mentioned setting values can be set, each setting value is Various parameters may be defined, and if a specific gaming state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value is set, and a predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value, one special symbol is drawn. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, or that the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (a bonus given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) This concept includes that the contents of the small winning game, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game) are advantageous to the player.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are unified according to the type of special symbol, but the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are not limited to this. may be changed. This makes it possible to provide more complex gameplay, and has the effect of suppressing early boredom with the game.

Furthermore, the variable probability state may be designed to continue until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery may be executed in which the state shifts to the normal gaming state each time the special symbol changes, and the lottery may be performed. It may be configured such that the game changes from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state by winning the game. In this case, as a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player and a variable probability state that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference may be made in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the variable probability state ends, or the lottery probability of transition from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state may be different. You may also do so.

In addition, we set multiple time-saving ending conditions that are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, and among the multiple time-saving ending conditions, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of fluctuations, the time-saving end condition is set. When the end condition is met, that is, when the variable number end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small hit is won by drawing a special symbol, that is, when the winning number end condition is met. The configuration may be such that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of winnings is met, the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is met. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the completion of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol due to the time saving termination condition that is satisfied, the range that is the sum of the variation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small winning game is executed You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving termination condition that is met, even during a small winning game in which a small amount of benefits are given to the player, the electric accessory 640a can be activated to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game more advantageous for the player.

In addition, we have set up multiple types of small winnings with different periods in which small winning games are executed, and even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, the game will be played according to the type of small winning for which the conditions for ending the number of winnings have been met. It is a good idea to make the benefits given to different people different. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving termination condition.

In addition, in this case, even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, there are cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game starts, and cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game ends. It is best to configure the system so that there is a mixture of This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there is a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the small win has been won. Although a configuration is used in which the process of determining and the process of determining are executed separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of special symbols is centrally managed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied is used. You may use the structure which sets the timing which ends a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although a case has been described in which data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of balls into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the control examples described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of a game state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of a normal game state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. You may also have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations may be used. It may also be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or whether it has been operated by the player touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the control examples described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In the first control example described above, the determining means for determining whether the player is operating the operating means within the first operation validity period is such that if it is determined that the player is operating the operating means, the player A first determining means (for example, displaying a button image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a manner indicating that the button is being pressed) is set to notify that the operating means is being operated. (discrimination performed during the entire operation validity period), and when it is determined that the operating means is being operated, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the performance mode (for example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG). It has a second determination means that is executed (a determination that is executed only at a specific timing within the operation validity period). In other words, the technical idea is to set multiple valid operation periods overlappingly. This technical idea is not limited to that used in the first control example described above, and for example, within the first operational validity period in which the first discrimination means described above is executed, the second discrimination means described above There is no need to set a valid period for the second operation during which the second operation is executed, and the configuration may be such that at least a portion thereof overlaps.

Alternatively, one second operation valid period among a plurality of types of second operation valid periods may be set for one first operation valid period. As a result, when the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period are set to overlap, the player can predict at which timing in the first operation valid period the second operation valid period is set. It can provide you with fun.

In the first control example described above, when the period in which the probability change state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations is 100 times), the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is shorter than before. The technical idea is to increase the time efficiency of games (special symbol lottery) by making it easier to select the time, but this technical idea is not limited to the content of the first control example. It may be applied in a state where a game state other than the state is set. In addition, in order to increase the time efficiency of the game (special symbol lottery), it may be configured such that a short variable time is more likely to be selected only during the period from when a specific game state is set until a predetermined period has elapsed. good. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (for example, winning a small hit), the period may be set such that a short variable time is likely to be selected.

In addition, the special symbol variation that is executed when the variation time of the special symbol variation that is executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state) continues without the time saving state ending. The variation pattern scenario and the variation pattern table may be configured so that the variation time is likely to be the same as the variation time. With this configuration, instead of notifying the player that the time saving state has ended immediately after the time saving state has ended, it is possible to notify the player that a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the gaming state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state. In other words, the player can be made aware that the time saving state has ended based on the fact that a variable time variation pattern that cannot be selected if the time saving state continues has been selected.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition for the time saving state is satisfied. In this case, for example, during the period of the maximum number of reserved special drawings 2 (4 pieces) acquired at the end of the time saving state, the command is executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state). It is preferable to define the contents of the variation pattern scenario and the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is likely to be the same as the variation time of the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state continues without ending.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned configuration, as long as the variation pattern with the same variation time as during the time saving state continues to be selected, even after the gaming state shifts to the normal state, the production executed during the time saving state It is better to configure them so that they perform the same effect. This allows the player to play the game during the time reduction period for a longer period than in the actual time reduction state.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, either the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, but the jackpot type for which the normal state is set is not limited to this. It may be provided. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state or a variable-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, short-time state) after the end of the jackpot game is set. ) is set, the same variable time is easily selected at least until the period when the time saving state can end, and the player is informed of the gaming state by the variable time of the special symbol variation to be executed. is suppressed from being understood.

Then, when a specific performance result is announced (when the lucky points reach 100P) in a performance executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol (lucky point addition performance), the current gaming state changes with certainty. It was configured to execute an effect (invincible zone (FIG. 129(a))) that notifies the player of the current state. The performance content of the lucky point addition performance is determined each time a special symbol lottery is executed, and the timing at which a specific performance result is notified is configured to be indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the variable probability state will be notified, and to allow the player to continue playing while expecting that the variable probability state has been set. It is something that can be made to perform.

However, if a high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game, the same variable time will be more likely to be selected at least until the period when the time saving state can end. Because of this configuration, even if a variable state is notified quickly (even if an invincible zone is set), it is necessary to set a performance period for executing the battle performance. Therefore, in the first control example described above, the configuration is configured to provide a sense of security to the player by informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that there will be no defeat in the battle performance during the invincible zone. There is a possibility that the battle performance performed during the invincible zone becomes a useless battle performance, and the player's desire to play the game decreases.

In order to solve this problem, for example, after the invincibility zone is set, if the variable time (60 seconds) for which the battle effect is executed is determined, the variable time will be changed to 5 seconds. Or, it is configured to repeatedly execute a performance with a 10-second performance period, and is configured to be able to execute a pseudo fluctuation performance that makes it appear as if multiple special symbol fluctuations are being performed with one special symbol fluctuation. That's good. More specifically, it may be configured to execute a performance that is performed during a shortened zone performance.

In the first control example described above, by configuring so that the execution of new additional effects is prohibited during the execution period of the additional effects (see FIGS. 121 and 122) executed during the jackpot game, multiple effects can be prevented. The technical idea is to prevent the player from being provided with an effect that is difficult to understand as a whole due to being executed repeatedly, but this technical idea can also be applied to other situations. For example, if a determining means is provided that can determine the number (type) of effects being executed, and the number (type) of effects being executed repeatedly satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, three), It may be configured to prohibit execution of new effects. In other words, the present invention is not limited to the technique of prohibiting execution of a new specific effect during a period when a specific effect is being executed. In addition, the conditions for prohibiting the execution of new effects include not only the number (type) of effects that are executed overlappingly, but also the content of the effects that are currently being executed and the conditions that are satisfied when new effects are executed. For example, a condition may be used that is established based on the content of the performance. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing multiple types of performances in which information regarding specific elements (for example, jackpot game content) is provided to the player, If there is, if the currently executed production is an advantageous production with a high degree of advantage for a specific element, it will be executed if the contents of the newly executed production are determined to have a lower degree of advantage than the currently executed production. It may be configured to prohibit.

In addition, in the first control example described above, the execution of new additional effects is prohibited during the performance execution period for the effect executed during the jackpot game, but except during the jackpot game. The same technical idea may be applied to the production performed during the period, for example, the same technical idea may be applied to the special symbol variation period to indicate the result of the first special symbol lottery. Alternatively, the same technical idea may be applied to a look-ahead performance period that is executed across a plurality of special symbol variation periods. In this case, even if the execution conditions for a new look-ahead performance are met during the look-ahead performance period, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a new look-ahead performance, so the look-ahead performance may be executed redundantly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult for a player to determine which pre-read performance suggests which special symbol lottery result.

In the second control example described above, when the execution condition for a new additional effect is satisfied during a period in which the execution of a new additional effect is prohibited, the establishment status (content) is stored, and the new additional effect is executed. By configuring the system to variably determine the performance mode of the additional performance based on the memorized establishment status (content) when it becomes possible to execute the new performance, execution of the new performance is prohibited. Even during the period, the technical idea is to have players play the game enthusiastically in order to satisfy the performance execution conditions, but this technical idea can also be used for other effects, such as pre-reading. During the performance, a new look-ahead performance execution condition (for example, a condition that can be satisfied when a ball enters the first ball entry port 63 or the second ball entry port 640 and a special symbol reservation is newly acquired) is established. By doing so, it may be configured to vary the performance mode of the performance that is executed after the pre-read performance that is being executed ends.

In addition, in the second control example described above, the degree of advantage to the player in the performance to be executed later is determined according to the number of execution conditions for the new additional performance that are satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited. Specifically, during the period in which the execution of new additional effects is prohibited, if the number of new additional effects that satisfy the execution condition reaches a predetermined number, the most advantageous Although the configuration is such that it is easy to execute a performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution conditions for a new additional performance are met, a predetermined lottery is held, and if you win the lottery, the most advantageous It may be configured so that the effect becomes easier to execute.

Next, technical ideas related to the techniques described in each of the control examples described above will be explained.

The pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above executes a lottery that has at least two or more lottery results (for example, a win, a loss), and when the lottery has a specific lottery result (for example, a win), the game The system is configured so that benefits (for example, winning games) that are advantageous to players are provided. As the type of lottery to be executed, a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol) lottery or a normal symbol lottery can be executed. The above-mentioned lottery has the technical idea of a determining means for determining the obtained value (random value) and the technical idea of a determining means for determining which lottery result is obtained.

Here, the technical idea of the discriminating means includes, in addition to the above-mentioned contents, for example, when setting various presentation modes set by the audio lamp control device 113, one presentation mode is selected from among a plurality of presentation modes. The technical concept of the determining means also includes a configuration for determining information referred to for determination (various random values, setting status of various flags, information on various storage areas, etc.). In addition, the technical idea of the determination means is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery result is determined based on the acquired value, as described above, but, for example, the technical idea of the determination means is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery result is determined based on the acquired value. In other words, any configuration that can determine a game result that is advantageous to the player when some condition is met is sufficient, and a configuration that only determines a specific determination result is also a technology of the determination means. Included in thought.

In addition, benefits that are advantageous to the player include, of course, those that provide the player with a gaming situation in which it is easy to win prize balls, such as a winning game that is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained. , conditions for setting a situation where a specific lottery result is likely to occur (for example, a high probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols), or conditions for establishing a lottery execution condition (for example, It also includes those that provide a game situation (which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640 is attached). Furthermore, by making it easier to understand the current gaming situation through various presentation modes set by various control processes executed by the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to allow the player to proceed with the game advantageously. For example, the various performance modes mentioned above are also included in the concept of benefits. In addition, in terms of a concept different from the gaming objective of winning prize balls, various performance modes with low probabilities are set (easier to be set) by various control processes of the audio lamp control device 113. , Providing the player with effects that cannot normally be seen (hard to see) also falls under the category of advantageous benefits.

Note that in this case, if the bonus is more advantageous to the player when the bonus is given than when the bonus is not given, it is considered an advantageous benefit. In other words, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple types of benefits (for example, a first benefit and a second benefit), no matter which benefit is granted, the performance will be lower than when no benefit is granted. Therefore, all benefits are benefits that are advantageous to the player if they have elements that are advantageous to the player. In addition, if there are elements that can be compared relatively to the first benefit and the second benefit, and if there are elements that are compared with different degrees of advantage to the player, then one benefit may be better than the other. The concept is that the benefits of the other party are advantageous. Furthermore, each of the first benefit and the second benefit is composed of a plurality of elements (for example, a first element and a second element), and the first benefit has a higher degree of advantage than the second benefit regarding the first element. If the second benefit is configured so that the second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit, one benefit is defined as one that is more advantageous for each element. It is also possible to define only the benefits that are more advantageous for all the elements as advantageous benefits.

The technical concept for "be advantageous" mentioned above is not limited to the type of benefit, but is applicable to all expressions of "advantageous" and "disadvantageous" used in each of the control examples described above. For example, the degree of advantage may be defined based on the above definition for each of the multiple gaming states (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, potential state) after the jackpot game ends, or the degree of advantage may be defined based on the above definition. The degree of advantage may be defined for each lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery, and the normal symbol lottery) based on the above definition.

Each of the above-mentioned control examples includes a structure in which special symbols and normal symbols are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and second symbol display device 84 in order to show the lottery results, and a third symbol in correspondence with the variable display. Some devices use a structure in which the third symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 81, and the various symbols displayed in a variable manner correspond to identification information for indicating the lottery result. In addition, the identification information may be configured so that the player can identify whether the variable display is being executed or not, and the lottery results. ) Information that is configured so that a player can identify whether a variable display is being executed or not and the lottery result by a combination of locations also corresponds to identification information.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a plurality (for example, three) of symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, nine types of third symbols imitating the numbers "1" to "9") are provided. A configuration is used in which identification information is displayed variably by changing the location displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in each symbol row (symbol variation display), but this identification information The variable display indicates the period until the result of the executed lottery is notified to the player, and unlike the configuration of each control example described above, for example, the identification information of 1 is always displayed. By changing its display position, it can be used to indicate to the player that the lottery results are still being announced, or to repeatedly display and hide (turn on and off) the identification information of 1. By doing so, it may be configured to indicate to the player that it is still the period until the lottery results are announced. In other words, by setting a dynamic display mode that is different from a state in which identification information is displayed in a static state, it is possible to notify the player that the period until the lottery results are announced. Good.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the display effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are related to the contents of the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 (the contents of the effects executed by the effect execution means). However, other than "display" using components other than the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and various decorative accessories) The effects (audio effect, lighting effect, movable effect) in the form of are also executed in the same way. Therefore, the performances executed by the performance execution means include at least display performances, audio performances, lighting performances, and movable performances.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. You can. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, slot machines are well-known machines in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol active line determined, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Furthermore, the configurations of each of the embodiments and each control example described above may be configured to be implemented in whole or in part in combination.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<The point at which the ball passing through the route configuring means blinds the passing means>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass, and the path forming means includes a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means; It is characterized by comprising a displaceable means that can be placed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the first game ball on the near side of the first game ball flowing down the path forming means on the upstream side of the passing means. Game machine AA1.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and in which the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302. There is a machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the decorative board 302 makes it difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is necessary to confirm whether the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and to continue or stop shooting the game ball. It was not possible to accommodate the game mode of playing, and there was a possibility that players would feel dissatisfied. That is, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the portions related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

Note that the form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is movable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

In the gaming machine AA1, the gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means Compared to the case where other decorative members are prepared as a decorative member, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine AA2, gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the route configuring means is provided with a longitudinal direction path formed with a longitudinal width length that allows the second gaming ball to be placed on the front side of the first gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AA2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the game machine AA3, the forward and backward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path constituting means at a firing interval set in the firing device. A game machine AA4 characterized in that the game ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine AA3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path forming means with the firing interval unchanged, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball by the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

In gaming machine AA3 or AA4, gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AA3 or AA4, the forward and backward direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed means, so that the first game ball It is possible to easily cause a situation where the ball is hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfolding can be improved.

In gaming machine AA5, gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the front-side component is disposed in line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed.

According to the game machine AA6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine AA5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is thought that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the better the blindfold effect can be, but if the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight, When the game balls are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the route configuring means includes a front-rear direction route formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction path thereof. A gaming machine AA7 comprising: a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the game machine AA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AA2 to AA6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left and right path, so that the player cannot see the passed means. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left or right, but also when the passing means is viewed with a line of sight that is shifted left or right and looks like a peek. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the means to be passed, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This effect is significantly produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with walls. That is, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by a wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, making it easy to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen.

In any of gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second flow route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine AA8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine AA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the gaming ball flows down the route forming means, regardless of whether or not the passing means passes. , it is possible to improve attention to the game balls flowing down the route forming means.

Note that the first aspect and the second aspect are not limited at all. For example, the downward direction of the balls may be different, or the detection sensors through which the balls pass may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8 is provided with a branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, and the above-mentioned The game machine AA9 is characterized in that the route configuring means is constructed such that the game balls whose falling paths are divided by the branching means are arranged so that the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the game machine AA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AA1 to AA8, the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game balls that reach the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the flow pattern corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game balls.

In the gaming machine AA9, the route forming means includes a protruding part that protrudes toward the flowing game balls, and the protruding part acts on the branching of the game balls in the branching means. Machine AA10.

According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AA9, the protruding portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that the structure is simpler than, for example, when the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body. can improve the durability of

In the gaming machine AA10, the protruding part includes a first protruding part extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding part extending in a direction different from the first protruding part, and the first protruding part A gaming machine AA11 characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion is different from the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion.

According to the gaming machine AA11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA10, the effects of the first protruding portion on the gaming ball and the influence of the second protruding portion on the gaming ball are determined depending on the manner in which the gaming ball flows down. can be made different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first protruding portion and second protruding portion, it is possible to produce an effect of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the downward flow mode of the game ball.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of the ball passing through the path configuring means to the passing means>
A route configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the route configuring means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuring means to pass, and the route configuring means is configured to have a higher speed than the passing means. A gaming machine AB1 comprising a predetermined part constituting an upstream side, the predetermined part being arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passing means and configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB1, since the game ball that has flown down the predetermined part placed on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of attention to the game ball can be improved; This can be associated with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flown down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means, so that it is possible to improve the point that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball that has attracted attention.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means. be able to.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

Note that the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed on the display device side that easily catches players' attention, it may be placed on the prize opening side or the starting opening side, it may be placed on the front side (near side) that is easy for players to see, or it may be placed on the front side (front side) that is easy for players to see. The stage side (mainly the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball is temporarily held) is a place where the ball tends to attract attention as a place where the probability of ball landing is significantly high, and the side where the game ball is temporarily held is directly connected to winning the jackpot. The V prize opening side, the ball rental device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the area where the game ball that strayed from the ball entry opening flows down (the area where players are frustrated and follow it with their eyes), The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, a less conspicuous side may be intentionally formed to make it relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine AB1, the route configuring means includes a second predetermined part that makes the game ball that enters the route configuring means less noticeable than when the ball enters the route, and the predetermined part has a larger area than the second predetermined part. Gaming machine AB2 is characterized by being placed on a conspicuous side.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, before the game ball that enters the path forming means flows down the predetermined part, the attention force is lowered in the second predetermined part, so that the game ball can flow down the predetermined part. It is possible to highlight the attention of the game ball when playing.

In gaming machine AB1 or AB2, gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the predetermined section includes sections in which the falling speed of the gaming ball is different.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AB1 or AB2, it is possible to improve the effect of attracting the player's gaze compared to the case where there is no difference in the falling speed of the game balls.

The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the second flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine AB4.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AB3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that enters the path forming means reaches the predetermined part.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, the gaming machine AB5 is characterized in that the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AB1 to AB4, a section where the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction differs, regardless of the magnitude of the actual falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball at any predetermined location when viewed in a predetermined direction, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and diverted from other parts. .

Note that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line disposed on a plane orthogonal to the front-back direction when viewed from the front may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component, or the case of displacement on a straight line and the case of displacement on a straight line that has a front-back component, The difference may be in the case where the displacement is curved or meandering, or it may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5 is provided with an introducing means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path forming means, and the predetermined part is disposed outside the introducing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine AB6.

According to the gaming machine AB6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5, visibility of the introducing means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introduction means and improve the attention of the game ball, which has a high possibility of passing through the passing means.

Any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine AB7.

According to the game machine AB7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AB1 to AB6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game ball is directed toward the passing means. Since an avoidance means is provided to avoid this, it is possible to both secure the size of the game area and ensure the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means.

Note that the manner in which the game ball falls under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow downward while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the position in front of the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position. It's fine, and anything else is fine.

In the gaming machine AB7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and the accepting state changing means is , a gaming machine AB8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

According to the gaming machine AB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB7, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down as if bridging after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. I can do it.

The gaming machine AB7 or AB8 is provided with a dividing means disposed above the passing means in a front view and partitioning a gaming area, and the partitioning means is configured to allow the game ball to flow down the left and right outer sides. Characteristic gaming machine AB9.

According to the gaming machine AB9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AB7 or AB8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be improved. It can be made easier to secure.

Note that the mode of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes a falling surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entry hole forming means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the partition means may be a means whose shape (appearance) is fixed or a means whose shape (appearance) is variable.

In the gaming machine AB9, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the flowing game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and A gaming machine AB10 characterized in that a portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide game balls to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the gaming machine AB10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AB9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on the left-right axis is assumed as the acceptance state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. . A game ball that reaches the special prize opening just before the opening/closing plate is about to close is often caught between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and is moved in the forming direction of the edge ( It skids in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate.

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate, so if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is placed above the means to be passed, There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it becomes necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate. become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AB10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball after skidding from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10 is characterized in that the game balls flowing down the route configuring means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the route configuring means are configured to flow down in a similar manner. A gaming machine AB11.

According to the gaming machine AB11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, a game ball that may flow down the route configuring means and pass through the passing means, and a game ball that may flow down the front side of the route configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish between game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route configuring means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the game balls flowing down near the route configuring means whether the game ball can easily enter the route configuring means or when it cannot easily enter the route configuring means.

A gaming machine AB12, which is one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, further comprising a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the gaming machine AB12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the front side of the ball flowing down a predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the length of the route to the V entrance in a space-saving manner>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; and a first state in which a game ball can flow down to the passing means. a state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state; A game machine AC1, characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball to flow downward toward the passing means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution section 75 configured to be movable from side to side is disposed in the falling path of a game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 12, and the distribution section 75 is configured to be movable from side to side. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the direction of flow (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is essential that the allocating section 75 operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winnings in the specific area 73 and the ball being bitten by the allocating section 75, and some players may There were cases where the player felt unsure of the behavior of the portion 75 and was unable to continue playing the game with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second grand prize opening 12 to a position near the left and right center of the gaming area (near the first grand prize opening 10), the second grand prize opening 12 can be A long flow path length up to the distribution section 75 can be ensured. It is thought that this makes it possible to reduce the possibility of winning a prize in the specific area 73 by mistake.

On the other hand, if this means is implemented, it will be necessary to ensure visibility of the falling path of the game ball over a wide range from the second big prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and within this range there will be no freedom in designing the gaming area. degree is limited. That is, in order to avoid erroneous winnings in the specific area 73, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area is restricted over a wide range.

In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding incorrectly entering game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AC1, since the route configuring means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the route configuring means in front view is shortened to save space, the route configuring means can be inserted into the route configuring means. It is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route configuring means. Wrong winnings can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for a short period of time to switch whether or not a ball can enter the constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a hurry. Thereby, it is possible to avoid entering the game ball by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be adopted in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed on the downstream path, or a mode may be provided in which a predetermined downstream path is provided in which the game ball flows down a downstream path having a front-back component.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is faster than the downstream path toward the back side. A gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that it is configured to increase the acceleration of the game machine AC2.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine AC1, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the player is allowed to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and among the predetermined downstream paths, the downstream path toward the front side is better than the downstream path that flows down while maintaining the front and back position. A gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the falling game ball is increased.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the player can visually see the gaming balls flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined downstream path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means is provided with a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the predetermined downstream path is such that the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine AC4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through the gaming machine AC4.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the game ball is placed in the front position, the visibility of the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the area near the means to be passed.

A gaming machine AC5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine AC4.

According to the gaming machine AC5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, it is possible to hide at least a portion of the game balls on the back side by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side than the game balls on the back side, the view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined downstream path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so it is possible to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen. It becomes possible.

Gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the vertical width required for arranging path configuration means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, compared to the case where a folded path is formed, there is no need to reduce the thickness of the channel wall, so the strength of the flow path can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-rear passage section extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the horizontal width of the route configuring means can be suppressed, so that the pair of route configuring means can be configured with bilateral symmetry and a suppressed lateral width. I can do it.

A gaming machine AC8, in any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, wherein the passing means is arranged diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving section of the path forming means.

According to the game machine AC8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AC1 to AC7, it is possible to easily fit the passing means and the ball receiving part of the route configuring means in the field of view of the player who views from the front side. .

In any of gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the route configuring means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to accept game balls, and a means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to accept game balls. a second receiving means in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means; Machine AC9.

According to the gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and furthermore, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the second receiving means receives the game balls, attention to the game balls can be improved.

Note that the manner in which game balls are accepted is not limited in any way. For example, game balls may be received only in the first receiving means, game balls may be received only in the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means receives game balls only. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be accepted by the means may also be used. Further, the frequency of balls entering each receiving means may be different, or the ball entering position may be different.

In the gaming machine AC9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game balls are accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the game balls are accepted by only one of the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A game machine AC10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is accepted by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine AC10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the falling game balls, or the benefits related to the game obtained by the falling game balls (paying out prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state becoming variable after the jackpot ends, etc.) The game state may change to the normal state (falling down, etc.).

A gaming machine AC11 in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, wherein the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

According to the game machine AC11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine AC9 or AC10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly fired from the left or right side.

In any of the gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the flowing game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game balls cannot be accepted; The gaming machine AC12 is characterized in that the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change.

According to the game machine AC12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is changed. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

In the gaming machine AC12, the gaming machine AC13 is characterized in that the state change mode of the acceptance state changing means is configured in a plurality of types.

According to the game machine AC13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine AC12, even when the game balls are fired in a certain firing manner, the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is improved. can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted based on the state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that moves parallel to the direction of the ball's flow>
a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passage means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route configuring means, and the state switching means is configured such that the direction of the displacement that occurs in the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without involving the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downward direction of the game ball, the state of the game ball in the state where the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means is By causing a displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling manner of the game ball to change. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when a game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top of it, the ball will move in the forward direction of rolling rotation relative to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the left with the game ball on top of it, the rolling rotation can be controlled against the game ball. Since a load is applied to rotate the game ball in the opposite direction, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Furthermore, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having a component not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a change in the falling pattern of the game ball to occur in a complex and irregular manner.

Due to these influences on the falling state of the game ball, the falling state of the ball riding on the state switching means can be varied in various ways during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball becomes bored. You can concentrate on playing the game without worrying about it.

Moreover, the arrangement relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be such that it rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged such that it opposes the game ball in the downstream direction and collides with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

Gaming machine XA2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XA1, the gaming ball can be caused to rotate by changing the state of the state switching means.

A gaming machine XA3 in the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, wherein the state switching means includes changing means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

According to the game machine XA3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine XA1 or XA2, the load applied from the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load applied to the state switching means can be reduced. .

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that causes the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
a route forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means; A state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended to the front, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. Therefore, I will not provide any guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the falling of the game ball (such as a frame part). There is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Since no members are required, the number of required components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the downward direction of the game ball in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set horizontally with respect to a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after the state switching means starts guiding. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guiding action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide part may be disposed on a movable member included in the state switching means, or the guide part may be disposed on a non-movable part around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide part by the movement of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state where it is easy to approach or come into contact with it.

When the guide part is disposed on a movable member, the design must take into consideration not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game balls, rather than providing a wall with a planar shape perpendicular to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

In the gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction. .

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state switching means will malfunction due to the load applied from the guided gaming balls.

In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the route configuring means includes a pair of left and right routes, and the state switching means includes a pair of guide parts each capable of receiving a game ball from the pair of left and right routes, In the gaming machine XB3, the first direction and the second direction are configured laterally symmetrically.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, it is possible to complicate the path along which the gaming ball flows. In addition, since the first direction and the second direction are configured to be symmetrical in the pair of guide parts, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide parts receives from the game ball is made symmetrical in the left and right directions. be able to.

This makes it easier to uniformize the arrangement of the state switching means depending on the load that the guide section receives from the game balls, for example, when game balls are entered in a substantially equal number on a pair of left and right paths.

The gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that the state switching means includes a projecting portion formed to project in a direction intersecting the third direction.

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with other members can be reduced by the overhanging portion, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

The gaming machine XB3 or XB4 is provided with abutting means configured to be able to come into contact with the state switching means in an introduced state or a non-introduced state, and by contacting with the abutting means, the left and right direction of the state switching means is changed. A gaming machine XB5 characterized in that the displacement can be corrected.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, since the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or right direction, the displacement of the state switching means that tends to be disordered can be reduced by contact. It can be restored in an orderly manner by the action of means.

<Sequence of separation, reversal, combination, and rotation>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined manner of displacement, the first displacement A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotating base 214 rotates and displaces, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacing means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable as the displacement means is displaced, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so that attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together, and a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement member that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, with only the first displacement as the displacement based on the gathering part, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the gathering part is the shortest or longest, and the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced. The first displacement member and the second displacement member may appear stationary, which may reduce the production effect, but by mixing the second displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can also be caused at the terminal end. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visible by the third displacement, the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement can be noticeably different. can be set.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixation is reduced. The displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed by taking these into consideration.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission through gears, mechanical displacement would occur if shape deformation was not taken into consideration, but if the load associated with fixing is taken into account, elastic changes in the member due to that load will become apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the side that is visually recognized, it is possible to set the strength of the fixing on the side that is visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly combined to make it easy to see as an integral part, and the other surface is loosely combined to make it easy to see in a state where relative displacement is easy. I can do it.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of attraction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different depending on the fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. can.

Note that the manner in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape or may utilize the attraction force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed to use, for example, fixing screws, screws, or the like as the metal parts that are attracted to the magnet.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, it is displaced in the forward direction in a first displacement manner, and in the reverse direction in the first displacement manner. A game machine D5 that is configured to be displaced in a second displacement manner different from the displacement manner, and the second displacement manner is configured such that after being displaced in a predetermined manner, the game machine is displaced in the first displacement manner.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is set before the first displacement mode. Since the displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the attention paid to the displacement means at the time of retreat, thereby relatively increasing the attention paid to the displacement means displaced at the production position.

With conventional machines, the manner of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the presentation position (the position in front of the liquid crystal display area) and producing the effect, before retracting to the retraction position (position outside the liquid crystal display area). Had to rotate again multiple times in the opposite direction. In this case, there was a possibility that it would become a problem that the line of sight would tend to focus on the member that is retreating from the presentation position.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Moreover, the displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the displacement unit, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the surface to be viewed is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. You can change it by changing it.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light as a unit. It can be changed with .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Features gaming machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structures during displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. Note that various types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or it may be a numerical value related to a change in the operational manner when the operational manner changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished, if the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the two are indistinguishable from each other.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player. It is possible to maintain high expectations of the player for the occurrence of this event.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means with multiple visible surfaces>
The displacement means includes a first visible surface and a second visible surface that are configured to be visible, and the displacement means is arranged so that the first visible surface is easily visible, and the first visible surface is in a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state where the first visible surface is easily visible and a state where the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of a player who wants to look at the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of changing the arrangement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured such that the open part side is easily recognized.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the displacement means is disposed at the edge of the opening, the displacement means is closer to the back side than when it is disposed at the center of the opening. .

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is arranged at the center of the opening, the displacing means can be largely seen on the front side, and the displacing means can be placed on the edge of the opening. When the displacement means is arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another group are configured to be difficult to see when the surface is visible.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, by applying different characters and figures to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, the displacement means A first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set that are not intended to be visually recognized are configured so that different characters and figures can be visually recognized by a player who visually recognizes them. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement means from becoming unsightly in appearance.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface. When characters or figures indicating a high expectation of a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a jackpot is displayed through the displacement means, regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means retreats from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display indicating the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained by the displacement means, so that the player who has taken his/her line of sight away from the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue displaying a display regarding the expectation of a jackpot.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation), the first visible surface displayed to the player side. and the set of second visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

Note that there is no limitation on the manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be connectable and separable so that they can be combined and separated. It may be made difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be made difficult to recognize by making the part relatively dark by setting the brightness and darkness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the form of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is operated facing the back side so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in a state in which some of these parts and other parts are visible at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and that the switching operation is performed with the displacement means disposed at the center of the opening part. Game machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and it is possible to improve attention to the switching action.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the first visible surface and the other portion faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the entire first visible surface is made invisible, so that the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible aspects can be made difficult to recognize.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 includes a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to cover the second displacement means as well as the second displacement means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface to be difficult to see by the second displacement means, the performance position of the displacement means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement means is displaced. A game machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface that is visible when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game The surface that is easy to visually recognize can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the person's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be disposed close to the displacement means, in the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means. A gaming machine E11 is located apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9 or E10, there are two states in which the auxiliary means is disposed close to the displacement means so that they can be seen together, and a state where the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately seen. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player.

Note that the form of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to switch between a state where the auxiliary means is visible integrally with the displacement means and a state where it is visible separately from the displacement means. .

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between making the displacement means and the auxiliary means visible integrally or separately, so that variations in the visible mode depending on the number of members are possible. can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same time differs between sections>
A displacing means configured to be displaceable, a disposing means in which a first portion is disposed on the displacing means, and a supporting means for supporting a second portion of the displacing means, the supporting means A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion during displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotary accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see official bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted, there is a possibility that a malfunction will occur in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotary accessory 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in displacement.

That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. I can do it. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

Note that the form of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported in a manner in which displacement is limited by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected and supported by a second movable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range that supports the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second section is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacing means is constant, the displacing speed of the disposing means can be varied, and the supporting means Since it is configured to allow a change in the displacement direction of the second portion, the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine F3 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, wherein the support means includes a restriction section that limits displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the side with larger displacement toward the side with smaller displacement, it is possible to easily stop the second portion at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

Note that the aspect of the load required for displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or pushed.

Note that the form of the restricting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to set an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be a mode in which the direction of displacement of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that a relative displacement amount of is smaller than a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section in which the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means is small at a mid-displacement position of the displacing means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily seen together, and as a result, the displacement means and the arrangement means can be seen together. You can increase the number of easy positions.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arrangement means on the supporting means side Since it is possible to change the displacement speed of the disposing means, it is possible to create an action performance in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is made variable by simple drive control (uniform speed drive) of the driving means.

A gaming machine F6, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to track the displacement trajectory of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion, and the displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the displacement locus of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part due to the displacement of the first part allows the second part to be moved even when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the part 2 can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a supported means displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

Note that the mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arrangement means on a predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced, or the arrangement means may be displaced at a position away from the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced (e.g. , a sliding displacement mode on a predetermined plane) may be a different displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis).

Note that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a change in posture, or it may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section in which it can be reciprocated in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first part. Game machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F8, while the first part is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to that of the displacing means with the arrangement means in between. This can give the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion reaches the end of displacement. Since the player can understand that the game has been reached, it is possible to configure the final stage of the performance operation by the displacement means in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11 is configured such that an electrical wiring is inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, and the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part. arranging means, the arranging means comprising an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with a surrounding portion formed therearound; The gaming machine F12 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines F1 to F11, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from coming into contact with the surrounding parts.

The arrangement means may be configured as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second part is composed of a plurality of members, or as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second part is arranged with another member. It may also be configured as a means for preventing a separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Features A group> (performance stock)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information of a determining means capable of determining that the performance execution means executes a performance; a regulating means capable of regulating the execution of a new performance; and a control means capable of regulating the execution of a new performance, and a a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the execution of the performance determined by the determining means during a period in which execution of the performance is regulated; and information stored in the storage means when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it has a performance control means capable of causing the performance execution means to execute a performance corresponding to the performance.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to suggest the lottery result, a preview performance that suggests the lottery result in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is announced (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, if multiple suggestive effects are executed overlappingly, a preview effect that is difficult for the player to understand will be executed, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. There was a need to improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, since the execution of the performance determined by the determining means is stored in the storage means even during the period when the execution of the performance is regulated by the regulation means, the execution of the performance is regulated by the regulation means. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of a decrease in the number of times the performance is executed, and improving the interest of the game.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the regulating means regulates execution of the performance according to a period in which a specific performance is being executed by the performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, once a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, a new performance is not executed, so that the player does not know that the specific performance has been executed. This has the effect of making it easy to notify.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information determined by the determination means, a storage means in which information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination performed by the determination means. a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on information previously stored in the storage means; A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform performances.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, execution of a new performance is regulated during a period in which a specific performance is being executed based on the determination result by the advance determination means, so that the player is not informed of the determination result. This has the effect of being able to inform people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 has a variable ball entry means that can be changed to an open state in which a game ball can enter when the bonus game is executed, and the determining means includes: A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine execution of an effect based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, an effect is executed based on the fact that the ball enters the variable ball entry means, so that the player's desire to enter the variable ball entry means is stimulated. The effect is that it can be increased.

<Feature B group> (performance history control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information of a determining means capable of determining a performance to be performed; and a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the performance determined by the determining means as history information, the determining means comprising: A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine the performance based on the history information.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to hint at the lottery result, it has been proposed that the performance is enhanced by making it possible to perform multiple types of preview performances that suggest the lottery result in advance before the lottery result is announced. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). However, if the same content suggestion effect is executed continuously, the preview effect is difficult for the player to understand and the effect of the effect decreases. There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the performance is determined based on the historical information, it is possible to prevent bias in the performance performed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it has a mode display means that can cause the display means to display a mode for showing a performance corresponding to at least a part of the history information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, there is an effect that the player can identify the history of the performances that have been executed, and can easily predict the performances that are likely to be executed next.

A gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, is configured such that when the history information becomes specific historical information, a specific performance can be executed by the performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is executed when specific history information is obtained, so that the user can be interested in the type of effect to be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine B4, which is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, and includes a regulating means for regulating the execution of a new performance during a period in which the performance is being executed by the performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, execution of new effects is restricted during the period in which the effects are being executed, thereby preventing excessive execution of effects. It has the effect of suppressing

<Feature C group> (performance content management)
A gaming machine comprising a first control means capable of controlling a game, and a second control means capable of controlling a game based on a control signal from the first control means. The first control means includes a first counter means capable of updating a first counter based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second control means outputs an output based on the satisfaction of the first condition. a second counter means that is capable of updating a second counter based on the establishment of a second condition that is satisfied when a first control signal that is possible is received; and a second counter means that is capable of updating a second counter based on a counter value of the second counter means. a display means for displaying information; an identification means capable of identifying numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means; and when an identification result by the identification means is a specific identification result, the first counter A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it has updating means capable of updating information displayed on the display means based on a counter value of the means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to suggest the lottery result, a performance has been proposed that provides information indicating the lottery result to the player in stages (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). . However, if there is a difference in the stage information managed between the control means for setting the performance contents and the control means for displaying the performance results, an unintended performance may be executed and the player There was a problem that the desire to play decreased. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the information displayed based on the second counter value becomes a state corresponding to a specific identification result, the information is updated based on the counter value of the first counter means. Even if there is a discrepancy between the counter values counted by the counter means and the second counter means, the information displayed on the display means can be corrected to the value counted by the first counter means. .

In the gaming machine C1, when the information is updated based on the specific identification result, the counter value of the second counter means is updated to correspond to the counter value of the first counter means. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, even if a discrepancy occurs between the counter values of the first counter means and the second counter means, it can be corrected so that they are synchronized.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the information displayed based on the counter value of the second counter means is configured such that information corresponding to the counter value determined with the value of the counter value as the upper limit can be displayed, The second control means includes a number information determining means capable of determining number information to be added to the information displayed on the display means based on a predetermined lottery, and a number information determining means determined by the number information determining means. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it has a variable means capable of changing information corresponding to a value obtained by adding the number of times information.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the information is changed by making it difficult to understand the actual counter value of the second counter means, thereby increasing the interest of the gaming machine. It has the effect of improving.

<Feature D group> (Check period is set within the valid operation period)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation means, a validity period setting means that can set a validity period; a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period within the validity period set by the validity period setting means; and an operation determining means capable of determining whether the operating means is operated within the specific period. A gaming machine D1, wherein the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute a performance based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the operation has been performed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it is proposed that a notice performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine D1, the period for determining the operation of the operating means can be limited to a specific period, and the control load can be reduced.

A gaming machine D2 in the gaming machine D1, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set a plurality of specific periods.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of specific periods are set, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to operate the game, and it is possible to suppress problems in which the performance is not executed. be.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D2, wherein the specific period setting means sets a plurality of intervals for setting the specific period in a first period.

According to the gaming machine D3, by setting specific periods at equal intervals, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the performance by operating the operating means at equal intervals after the performance has been performed, and the game This has the effect of providing games that are easy for players to understand.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the minimum period in which the player can operate the operating means twice and shorter than the minimum period in which the player can operate the operating means three times. Game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D3, by maintaining and operating the operating means, multiple performances are facilitated, and the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a period equal to or shorter than the first period. There is an effect that the effect can be maintained even when the operation is released and the state of operation is maintained again.

<Feature E group> (point number control)
In a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a notification means capable of notifying specific information when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, numerical information is provided as the performance. a display means capable of displaying information, a determining means capable of determining numerical information to be displayed on the display means, and a display means capable of displaying information corresponding to the total of the numerical information displayed on the display means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it has a total information display means that can display the total value, and a restriction means that can restrict that the total value becomes predetermined information.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, it has been proposed that a preview performance is executed in which the performance value is variably displayed multiple times and information regarding the lottery result is announced based on the final displayed performance value (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 Publication No.). However, in the process of changing the performance value, there was a problem in that a specific value (for example, "77", which reminded the player of a win) was displayed, giving the player a misunderstanding. . There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the regulating means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the player from being informed of the predetermined information, and the information to be notified to the player can be prevented. This has the effect of limiting the

In the gaming machine E1, the determining means is configured to be able to determine a plurality of numerical information, and the gaming machine determines whether the combination of the plurality of numerical information determined by the determining means is a specific combination. It has a combination discriminating means that can discriminate, and when a specific combination is determined by the combination discriminating means, the regulating means sums up the determined plurality of numerical information to obtain the predetermined information. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine whether the

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the control load can be reduced by limiting the regulation means to determine whether to regulate when numerical information of a specific combination is determined. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 is characterized by having a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when specific information is displayed on the display means by the total information display means. Game machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, specific information is displayed on the display means, so that expectations can be set for the numerical information displayed. It has the effect of increasing people's interest.

<Feature F group> (Special fluctuation period control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period in which a target is displayed; and a bonus game advantageous to a player is executed when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means that allows the dynamic display period to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means to be determined from a predetermined dynamic display period when a specific condition is satisfied. a first information providing means capable of providing first information to a player when the predetermined dynamic display period is determined; and the first information. a first information type determining means capable of determining the type of the first information given by the giving means, and when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first information becomes information advantageous to the player. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. In addition, there are some games that can suggest the lottery result to the player by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the symbols indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). In such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to execute a process of determining the content of the performance to be performed from among a plurality of types for the determined variable time, which has the problem of reducing the interest in the game. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine F1, when a specific condition is met, the first information is assigned in response to the dynamic display of the identification information. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not one piece of information satisfies a predetermined condition, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine F1 has a setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state when the bonus game is executed, and the second gaming state The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the first information is configured to satisfy a predetermined condition when the first information is set.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, since the first information satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can identify that the second gaming state is set, which improves the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the determination control means causes the dynamic display period determining means to determine the predetermined dynamic display period until an end condition is satisfied. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, it becomes possible to determine a predetermined dynamic display period continuously until the termination condition is satisfied, and the opportunity to receive the first information is short-term. There is an effect that a large amount can be applied in between.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a plurality of dynamic display modes are set corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the first information providing means A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the first information is provided when a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to a predetermined dynamic display period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first information is given by executing a specific dynamic display mode, so that the specific dynamic display mode is executed. This has the effect of making the player look forward to playing the game, and suppressing the problem of early boredom with the game.

<Characteristic Group G> (Short fluctuations over a predetermined number of times)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period in which a target is displayed; and a bonus game advantageous to a player is executed when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. a first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means; , a second dynamic display period group configured to facilitate determination of a shorter dynamic display period than the first dynamic display period group, and a dynamic display period storage means in which at least is set; In this case, a counting means capable of counting information corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying means, and a first count value of the period during which counting is performed by the counting means. In the above case, the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that it has a determination control means capable of causing the dynamic display period to be determined from the second dynamic display period group. .

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. In addition, there are some games that can suggest the lottery result to the player by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the symbols indicating the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). Such conventional gaming machines are configured to execute various effects depending on the length of the variable time, so the structure is configured to enhance the effect of the effect by determining the variable time to be longer than a predetermined time. It had been. However, if a period of no winnings continues for a long time, the number of winning draws per unit period will decrease each time a long variable time is determined, and the player's desire to play will decrease, causing him to stop playing early. The problem was that I got bored with it. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine G1, by counting the first count value or more by the counting means, it is possible to easily determine a short dynamic display period, thereby increasing the gaming efficiency and making it variable for players who play games for a long period of time. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine G1, when the bonus game is executed, a setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and a setting means that allows a game ball to enter. variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state and a second state in which entering the game ball is more difficult than the first state, and when the second game state is set by the setting means; , a setting means capable of setting the variable ball entry means to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than when the first game state is set, and the counting means A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that counting is started based on the second gaming state being set.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the variable entry means is switched to increase the gaming efficiency after the period during which it is easy for balls to enter the device exceeds a certain period, so that excessive player This has the effect of preventing the situation from becoming advantageous.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the second gaming state is set, it is possible to set a high probability that the discrimination result is determined by the discrimination means as the specific discrimination result, and the counting means The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, when the second gaming state is set and the high probability is not set, counting ends based on the first count value being reached.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect exerted on the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming efficiency is highly variable when a high probability is set, so the period during which the bonus game is executed after the first count value is It has the effect of being able to be shortened.

a decision control means capable of controlling the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means to be determined from a predetermined dynamic display period when a specific condition is met; When a dynamic display period is determined, it is possible to determine a first information providing means capable of providing first information to a player and a type of the first information provided by the first information providing means. a first information type determining means, the first information being configured to be information advantageous to the player when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine G1.

<Characteristics H group> (Derived from performance stock)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information of A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it has a regulating means capable of regulating, and a period determining means capable of determining a regulating period for regulating the execution of the new performance by the regulating means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to suggest the lottery result, a preview performance that suggests the lottery result in advance has been proposed before the lottery result is announced (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, if multiple suggestive effects are executed overlappingly, a preview effect that is difficult for the player to understand will be executed, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. There was a need to improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the period during which the execution of the performance is regulated by the regulating means can be varied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the execution of the performance is regulated. It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

<Features I group> (performance history control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information of the player is displayed; , a determining means capable of determining the first performance to be performed by the performance executing means, and a benefit advantageous to the player is provided based on the order of the first performance determined by the determining means. A game machine B1 characterized in that it has a privilege granting means that can provide a benefit.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to hint at the lottery result, it has been proposed that the performance is enhanced by making it possible to perform multiple types of preview performances that suggest the lottery result in advance before the lottery result is announced. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). However, if the same content suggestion effect is executed continuously, the preview effect is difficult for the player to understand and the effect of the effect decreases. There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the benefits given can be made different depending on the order of the performances to be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in the process of the performances to be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristics J group> (Derived from performance content management)
and a second control means capable of controlling the game based on a control signal from the first control means. It has a first counter means that is capable of updating a first counter, and a period determination means that is capable of determining the remaining period of the first period, and the second control means is based on the establishment of the first condition. a second counter means capable of updating a second counter based on the establishment of a second condition that is satisfied when a first control signal capable of being outputted is received; and a counter of the second counter means; a display means for displaying information based on a value; an identification means capable of identifying numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means; and when the identification result by the identification means is a specific identification result, A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has a determining means capable of determining an update mode of information displayed on the display means based on a determination result by the period determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, as a performance to suggest the lottery result, a performance has been proposed that provides information indicating the lottery result to the player in stages (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). . However, if there is a difference in the stage information managed between the control means for setting the performance contents and the control means for displaying the performance results, an unintended performance may be executed and the player There was a problem in that the player's desire to play decreased. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine J1, since the information is updated based on the remaining period of the first period, even if a discrepancy occurs between the counter values counted by the first counter means and the second counter means, the display means This has the effect that the information displayed on the screen can be appropriately corrected within the remaining period.

<Feature K group> (Derivation of check period setting within operation valid period)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation means, a validity period setting means that can set a validity period; Operation content notification means for indicating the operation content of the operation means within the validity period set by the validity period setting means, and capable of determining whether the operation means has been operated within the specific period. an operation determination means, and the operation content notification means is capable of reporting operation content different from the operation content currently being notified when the first condition is satisfied with the validity period set. A gaming machine K1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it is proposed that a notice performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the operation content notified by the operation content notification means can be changed midway through, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player and improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Feature L group> (Derivation of point number control)
In a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a notification means capable of notifying specific information when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, numerical information is provided as the performance. a display means capable of displaying information, a determining means capable of determining numerical information to be displayed on the display means, and a display means capable of displaying information corresponding to the total of the numerical information displayed on the display means. a total information display means capable of displaying the numerical information determined by the determination means, and a regulating means capable of regulating execution of an effect that displays the numerical information determined by the determination means when a first condition is satisfied A gaming machine L1 characterized in that it has.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, it has been proposed that a preview performance is executed in which the performance value is variably displayed multiple times and information regarding the lottery result is announced based on the final displayed performance value (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 Publication No.). However, in the process of changing the performance value, there was a problem in that a specific value (for example, "77", which reminded the player of a win) was displayed, giving the player a misunderstanding. . There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the regulating means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being reported to the player, and the information to be notified to the player. This has the effect of limiting the

<Characteristics M group> (Measures for determining when a small hit is confirmed)
A firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. a determining means capable of executing a determination in the case of a case, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a stop of the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is entered during a period in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. A specific ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a specific area where a game ball that enters the specific ball entry means can enter, and a benefit advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. a benefit granting means to grant, a benefit type determining means to determine the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means, and the benefit determined by the benefit type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. a notification means for notifying notification information that allows the player to identify the type of the notification; A gaming machine M1 comprising means for making it difficult for a ball to enter the ball means.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols etc., the lottery result is notified in a predetermined notification mode so as to maintain the fairness of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, a winning game is further executed, and the game that is set after that is executed. In a configuration in which the state is determined by the type of winning game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the winning type gives a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and If a game method is used in which the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter the game, there is a risk that the disadvantage to the game parlor side will increase.

This gaming machine M1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine M1, if a player attempts to avoid being granted a specific benefit type by checking the notification information indicating the benefit type determined by the benefit type determining means, the player may avoid being granted a specific benefit type. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific ball entry means, so there is an effect that disadvantages on the gaming parlor side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode from among different dynamic display modes that are a combination of pseudo-stop modes in which the identification information is displayed dynamically and then temporarily stopped. A game machine M2 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the game machine M2, the temporary stop due to the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to know the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific bonus game is executed, the game ball is transferred to the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of suppressing the execution of a gaming method that avoids letting a ball enter the ball.

A gaming machine M3, which is the gaming machine M1 or M2, further comprising variable control means for varying the rate of balls entering the specific area depending on the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the probability of a ball entering a specific area can be varied depending on the type of bonus game to be executed, so the probability of a ball entering a specific area can be varied. This has the effect that it can be easily controlled.

<Characteristics N group> (Direct performance part 2)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance spanning a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result until the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having the following.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, only performances including winning games are performed, and there is a problem that the games become monotonous and the players quickly get bored with the games.

This gaming machine N1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only can the identification information indicate a specific determination result, but also the presentation can make players expect whether the ball will land in a specific area, which has the effect of suppressing the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine N1, the gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes one performance based on the type of bonus game given from a plurality of performances.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the performance execution means switches to and executes a specific performance when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter a specific area, it can be switched to a specific effect, so it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. This has the effect of informing the public.

<Characteristics P group> (A delay device is installed on the top of the V attacker to prevent slow hitting)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and a bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In the game, a specific ball entering means into which a game ball can enter during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specification into which the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter. an area, a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means; , notification means for notifying information regarding the type of benefit determined by the benefit type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it has an adjusting means for reducing the amount of falling game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols etc., the lottery result is notified in a predetermined notification mode to maintain the fairness of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, a winning game is further executed, and the game that is set after that is executed. In a configuration in which the state is determined by the type of winning game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the winning type gives a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and If a game method is used in which the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter the game, there is a risk that the disadvantage to the game parlor side will increase.

This gaming machine P1 has been developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of falling balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is introduced into the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of making it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine P1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third part capable of allowing a game ball to flow down. a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down; A gaming machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 divides the ball into a specific channel in which it is possible for the ball to enter the means and a channel in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific entering means at a predetermined ratio.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls that are guided to the specific ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third part capable of allowing a game ball to flow down. and a second flow path in which it is difficult for the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means is configured to move the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it has a rolling means that can be moved to discharge a game ball into a channel that guides the game ball to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the adjusting means causes the gaming balls that have flowed down the second channel for a predetermined period of time or longer to roll, so that even if the player stops shooting the gaming balls, This also has the effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, during the period from when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means becomes able to enter the ball, the second flow path is A gaming machine P4 characterized in that the period is shorter than the period from when a game ball is launched to when it passes through the adjusting means and reaches the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, in order to cause the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball, This has the effect of regulating a game method that does not allow balls to enter the specified ball entry means in the bonus game.

<Characteristics Q Group> (Countermeasures against Choro Hit 2)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and a bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In the game, a specific ball entering means into which a game ball can enter during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specification into which the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter. an area, a benefit granting means for granting an advantageous benefit to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means; , an adjusting means for reducing the amount of falling game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period to a position where the game balls can be guided to the specific ball entering means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter a specific ball entrance or a specific area, which may increase the disadvantage to the gaming parlor side. was there.

This gaming machine Q1 has been developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of falling balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is introduced into the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of making it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine Q1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third base unit capable of allowing a game ball to flow downward. a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down; A gaming machine Q2, characterized in that the game machine Q2 is characterized in that it distributes at a predetermined ratio into a specific channel through which the ball can enter the means and a channel through which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls that are guided to the specific ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third base unit capable of allowing a game ball to flow downward. and a second flow path in which it is difficult for the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means is configured to move the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3, characterized in that it has a rolling means that can be moved to discharge a game ball into a channel that guides the game ball to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the adjusting means causes the gaming balls that have flowed down the second channel for a predetermined period of time or more to roll, so that even if the player stops shooting the gaming balls, This also has the effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, during the period from when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means becomes able to enter the ball, the second flow path is A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the period is shorter than the period from when a game ball is launched to when it passes through the adjusting means and reaches the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, in order to cause the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball, This has the effect of regulating a game method that does not allow balls to enter the specified ball entry means in the bonus game.

<Characteristics R group> (Production until passing V in small hits and direct hits)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance spanning a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result until the ball enters the specific ball entry means. , and the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect that suggests changing the game ball launching method in stages before the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A game machine R1 characterized in that it is a game machine.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, only performances including winning games are performed, and there is a problem that the games become monotonous and the players quickly get bored with the games.

This gaming machine N1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only can the identification information indicate a specific determination result, but also the presentation can make players expect whether the ball will land in a specific area, which has the effect of suppressing the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine R1, the gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes one performance based on the type of bonus game given from a plurality of performances.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that a variety of performances can be performed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the performance execution means switches to and executes a specific performance when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed. A gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter a specific area, it can be switched to a specific effect, so it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. This has the effect of informing the public.

<Characteristic S group> (2 types of control switching between small hit and symbol hit)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area, a first state in which it is possible to guide the game ball to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. a switching means for switching, and when the first bonus game is executed, the switching means sets first switching information for switching the guide route; when the second bonus game is executed, the first switching information is set; A gaming machine S1 characterized in that it has a setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. When a game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game can be set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, and during the winning game, a specific ball entrance or a specific It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus such as a winning game is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-9795).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games.

This gaming machine P1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guiding route can be switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player how to guide the player to a different specific area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect.

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that the gaming machine S1 is switched to the first state by switching the guiding path based on the second switching information.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine S1, the guide path is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so in the second bonus game, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into a specific area, Even if it is a second privilege game, the player can be made to think that the second privilege is awarded by entering the specific area.

A gaming machine S3 in the gaming machine S1 or S2, wherein a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guidance state of the guideway can be changed in a variety of ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types with small hit and pattern hit 2)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball entered by the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area, a first state in which it is possible to guide the game ball to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. a switching means for switching, and when the first bonus game is executed, the switching means sets first switching information for switching the guide route; when the second bonus game is executed, the first switching information is set; A gaming machine T1 comprising: setting means for setting second switching information for switching the guideway to a first state.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. When a game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game can be set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, and during the winning game, a specific ball entrance or a specific It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus such as a winning game is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-9795).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games.

This gaming machine P1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guiding route can be switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player how to guide the player to a different specific area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In the game machine T1, the game ball is guided to the specific area by different guide paths in a case where the game machine T1 is switched to the first state based on the second switching information and a case where it is switched to the first state based on the first switch information. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that the following is induced.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, since the player is guided to a specific area by different guidance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the first switching information is set with a plurality of different pieces of information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guiding state of the guiding route can be switched in various ways.

<Feature group U> (Set the performance mode based on the length of the period from special 2 winning to special 2 change)
A first determination means that performs the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; an acquisition means that acquires the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to an upper limit of the number of determinations; a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination means for performing the first determination. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the means or second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time. In the gaming machine, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect based on the period effect, and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. and a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode in the period performance executed by the period performance execution means based on the determination result of the period determination means. Gaming machine U1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a device that has a plurality of starting ports and is configured to perform a different lottery depending on the starting port into which the game ball enters. Then, there is a system that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of game balls into each starting hole (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball enters the starting port of the other while a winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into one starting port, By preventing a new lottery from being executed until the lottery ends, it is possible to prevent players from excessively performing the lottery.

However, during the period from the time a game ball enters one of the starting ports until the lottery (suggestive performance) based on the entered ball is executed, the game ball enters the other starting port. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning lottery to be executed, for example, after a game ball enters the starting slot, a suggestive effect to show the lottery result of the winning lottery to be executed based on the ball entering is executed. If it takes a long time to reach the player, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestion effect is being executed based on which ball entry, which reduces the effect of the suggestion effect and reduces the player's desire to play. there were. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the performance of the period effect is executed by the period effect execution means based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information is different, it is possible to execute a period effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts is long.

The gaming machine U1 includes a remaining period determining means for determining a residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means determines the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the period is determined based on.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the period determining means displays the second identification information after a predetermined start condition is established based on the residual display period of the first identification information being executed. Since it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of is started, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period performance in accordance with the actual game content, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, and the period determination means determines whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information for which a start condition is met is determined.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period is determined by the period from when the acquired information is acquired until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information. Since the discrimination is made by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period performance in accordance with the actual game content, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect execution means includes at least a period from when the acquisition means acquires the acquired information until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information starts. A game machine U4 characterized in that the period performance is executed during a performance period.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U3, as a performance period in which the period performance is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the dynamic performance of the second identification information based on the acquired information is Since the period until the display starts can be set, it is possible to set a performance mode that corresponds to the actual gaming situation in a period that corresponds to the actual gaming situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means that can execute a specific game in which the acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is met, and the period determination means is configured to perform The period from when the specific game is executed until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is determined, and the period effect execution means is configured to determine the period from when the specific game is executed until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started, and the period effect execution means is configured to determine the period after the predetermined execution condition is established. A gaming machine U5, characterized in that the period performance is executed during a performance period including a period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set a performance mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the period performance can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution unit, dynamic display determining means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed; and the dynamic display determining unit. a second period determining means for determining a second period different from the period determining means when it is determined that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed; The means determines a period from when the acquired information is acquired to when dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized by:

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at a timing when the period determination means can perform the determination, the second identification information is displayed at a timing different from that timing. It is possible to cause the period determination means to perform the determination. Therefore, since the period from when the predetermined start condition is met to when the dynamic display of the second identification information starts can be determined at multiple timings, it is possible to execute a period effect that matches the actual game content. This has the effect of making it easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period performance execution means executes, as the period performance, a first period performance executed in a predetermined first period, and a second period performance executed after the first period. A gaming machine U7 that executes at least a second period performance executed in the period performance, and wherein the performance mode setting means sets a performance mode of the second period performance.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U1 to U6, a common first period performance can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determination means, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. This has the effect that a period effect can be executed without giving any additional time.

In the gaming machine U7, the performance mode setting means sets a part of the performance mode of the first period performance as the performance mode of the second period performance when the determination result by the period determination means is a specific determination result. A game machine U8 characterized in that it sets the following.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U7, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the performance mode of the first period performance can be set as the performance mode of the second period performance, it is possible to determine whether the first period performance is being performed for the player or whether the second period performance is being performed. It can make it difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the second period is determined to be long by the period determining means, the period effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<Characteristic group V> (When the predetermined conditions are met, execute the general figure long opening suggestion effect)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state, and a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. A determining means that performs a determination when a determining condition is satisfied based on the fact that the ball has been hit, and a privilege granting means that can award a benefit to a player when the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a determining means for executing a determination when a determining condition is satisfied, and a dynamic displaying means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination based on the determining condition, effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the performance execution means is configured to satisfy a predetermined performance condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, an effect is executed to indicate that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when a player wins in the second lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting port. There are things that make it easier. In addition, some games are configured to perform a suggestion effect to suggest the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, since the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that it will be easier to enter the game ball into the starting hole. This made it possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, a presentation mode in which the player stops firing the game ball by executing the suggestion presentation and restarts the game based on the presentation result of the suggestion presentation is a presentation mode in which there is a high possibility of winning. In this case, the game is stopped until the suggested effect is finished, and the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member moves, or when the suggested effect is in a presentation mode that is likely to be incorrect. , the game will be played until the suggestion effect ends, and from the time the game ball enters one starting hole until the winning/losing lottery (suggestion effect) based on that ball entry is executed, the game will be played to the other starting hole. For example, after a game ball enters the starting hole, the lottery result of a win/fail lottery that is performed based on the ball entering the starting hole differs depending on the situation. If it takes a long time to execute the suggestion effect to indicate the pitch, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which pitch the suggestion effect is based on, and the effect of the suggestion effect decreases. , there was a problem that the desire to play decreased. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined performance condition is established, it is possible to notify that a specific game will be executed by the specific game execution means in the performance executed by the performance execution means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to satisfy the performance conditions, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, the types of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means include a first type corresponding to a first specific game that is advantageous to the player, and a second type that is disadvantageous than the first specific game. 2, the game type setting means is capable of setting a second type corresponding to a specific game, and the effect execution means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. Game machine V2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the performance execution means executes the performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the performance condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying specific identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination executed by the determining means. display means, and the condition determination means determines that the performance condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Game machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, an information holding means capable of holding execution information indicating that the judgment has been performed by the judgment means, and determining whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a validity condition. and a valid condition determining means, wherein the condition determining means determines that the performance condition is satisfied even when the valid condition determining means determines that the valid condition is satisfied. Game machine V4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be satisfied as long as the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if a game in which the specific identification information is displayed dynamically is played, but a timing occurs where the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, it is possible to cause the performance execution means to execute the performance. . Therefore, it is possible to stably perform performances for players who are actively playing the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In either the gaming machine V3 or V4, an acquisition means capable of acquiring acquired information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means; , the determining means is configured to make the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determining condition is satisfied, and the condition determining means is configured to perform the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means. executes a first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and executes a second condition determination based on the determination performed by the determination means, and the effect execution means: A gaming machine that executes the performance when it is determined that the performance condition is satisfied as a result of the first condition determination or as a result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3 or V4, the condition discriminating means can determine whether or not the performance condition is met at multiple timings, so that it can be used by players who are actively playing the game. This has the effect of making it possible to stably execute performances and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the performance execution means is capable of executing a timing notification performance that notifies the timing at which the variable ball entry means enters the first state as the performance. Machine V6.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine V1 or V5, the performance executed by the performance execution means determines not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entry means enters the first state. Since the player is informed, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the performance by the performance execution means is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the performance execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-timing notification performance of notifying a timing different from a timing at which the variable ball entry means enters the first state when the performance condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V6, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the performance condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is notified, so a game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without establishing the performance condition is played. This has the effect of allowing players to play games that are disadvantageous to them.

A gaming machine V8, which is any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, wherein the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the production condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the judgment condition is easier to satisfy than the performance condition, so the player plays the game more enthusiastically in order to satisfy the performance condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group W> (Information of winning a small win during time saving with a higher probability than the allocation ratio during time saving)
an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means; a determining means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in a storage means; and executing a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determining means is a first determining result; A gaming machine comprising a bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second determination result is different from the first determination result, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; and the acquired information stored in the storage means. a preliminary determination means that performs preliminary determination before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and a suggestive effect for indicating that the first bonus game or the second bonus game is to be executed during the first game state. and a performance execution means that can be executed in the first game state, and the game state setting means sets the first game state to is to set a different second game state, and the effect execution means is configured to perform the above-mentioned performance execution means based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information, in which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine W1 is characterized in that it is capable of performing suggestive effects.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, there is a system that is configured to be able to execute a plurality of bonus games with different degrees of advantage, to be configured to be able to set a plurality of gaming states, and to vary the selection ratio of bonus games depending on the set gaming state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of gaming, the percentage of game states that are advantageous to the player (for example, time-saving states and variable probability states) that are set after the end of a jackpot game (the so-called continuation rate) has been reduced. (For example, 65% or less) is set to suppress the gambling nature of the game.

In such gaming machines, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a jackpot or a small win) while an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state may be changed again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem in that it is difficult to create expectations for the winning notification performance during an advantageous gaming state, and the desire to play is reduced. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine W1, the first bonus game or the second bonus game that is more advantageous than the first bonus game is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the suggestive performance executed during the first gaming state. This suggests that. Then, since the suggestive performance can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the bonus game is performed during the first game state. This can make it easier to suggest things. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, the performance execution means is configured to determine whether the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the obtained information in which the determination is performed after the predetermined termination condition is satisfied is a predetermined result of the second determination. A gaming machine W1 characterized in that it is easier to execute the suggestion effect when the pre-article discrimination result is obtained than when the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the preliminary determination result corresponding to the acquired information, which is determined after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the first gaming state, indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestion performance by the performance execution means is more likely to be executed than in the case where the first determination result is indicated. As a result, when a suggestive effect is executed during the first gaming state, in addition to the determination result of the discriminating means executed during the first gaming state, the discriminating means executed after the second gaming state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion performance is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second bonus game is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 includes a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio at which the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result and a ratio at which the result is the second determination result, the ratio setting means , the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make the second determination result more likely to occur during the second gaming state than during the first gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second bonus game is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the performance execution means sets the performance period to be a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information on which the preliminary determination has been performed by the preliminary determination means is executed. A gaming machine W4 is characterized in that it is capable of executing suggestive effects.

According to W4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestive effect is executed using the period until the judgment corresponding to the obtained information determined in advance is executed as the effect period. It has the effect of increasing the

<Characteristics
an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means; A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the obtained information stored in a storage means, and a privilege game that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. A game comprising an execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquired information, a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and stores information in the storage means. A storage number determining means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored; and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on a determination result of the storage number determining means in a state where the first gaming state is set. and a notification execution device capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting device, and the notification mode setting device includes at least the memory at a specific timing of the first gaming state. A gaming machine X1 characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a system that is configured to be able to execute a plurality of bonus games with different degrees of advantage, to be configured to be able to set a plurality of gaming states, and to vary the selection ratio of bonus games depending on the set gaming state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in such a gaming machine, a specific starting opening is provided that makes it easier for the ball to enter when a specific gaming state is set than when other gaming states are set, and the gaming machine is inserted into the specific starting opening. When a lottery is executed based on a ball entering the ball, a bonus game with a higher degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another starting hole, and furthermore, There is a system in which a predetermined number of lottery rights, which are executed based on the entry of game balls into the starting slot, can be reserved and stored. In a gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, it is possible for a player to efficiently execute a lottery that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific starting slot. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, once the end conditions of a specific gaming state are met, it becomes difficult to draw a lottery based on the game ball entering the specific starting slot. There was a problem in that players' motivation to play decreased. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, the mode of notification executed by the notification execution means can be set according to the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game for varying the number of stored pieces of acquired information so that various types of notification operations are executed by the notification execution means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine X1, the notification execution means executes an acquisition suggestion notification suggesting that the acquisition information be acquired during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is configured to execute an acquisition suggestion notification that suggests acquiring the acquisition information during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is configured to execute the acquisition suggestion notification that suggests acquiring the acquisition information during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means A gaming machine X2, wherein a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set when it is determined that the number of acquired information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number during a specific period in the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide games that are easy to understand for players. Further, if the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during a specific period in the first gaming state is greater than a predetermined number, for example, if the upper limit number of acquired information is stored in the storage means, acquisition is suggested. Since the system can be configured so that the notification is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the notification executed by the notification execution means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a determination number measuring means for measuring the number of determinations performed by the determining means in a state where the first gaming state is set, and a determination result based on the measurement result by the determination number measuring means. , a transition condition determining means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means is configured to perform a notification execution from the time when the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specific period of time.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is forced to play a game to obtain the acquired information within a limited period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game until the last period in which the first gaming state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification execution means is configured to set at least a first period and a second period set after the first period. , the notification effect is executed during the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period. and a second period performance execution means for executing the second period performance in the performance mode set by the period performance mode setting means. Features gaming machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X3, the performance mode of the second period performance is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification performance is executed. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of acquired information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set, and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the time the first period ends. and an increase number determining means capable of determining the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period, based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period, and the period presentation mode setting means is configured to determine the increase number. A gaming machine X5 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine By adjusting the number of acquired information stored during the first period by the player, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the second period performance by varying the number of acquired information stored during the first period. . Therefore, since different effects can be executed depending on the game content played by the player, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine X4 or X5 includes a preliminary determination means for determining the acquired information stored in the storage means before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period performance mode setting means A gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make the viewers more interested in the second period.

In the gaming machine If the determination result is the specific determination result, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means is notified based on the acquired information that is the specific determination result. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine The performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine A game machine X8 characterized in that it is a machine for setting.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination resulted in a particular determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group Y> (Set multiple time-saving termination conditions and grant different benefits depending on the established time-saving termination conditions)
a discriminating means that performs discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is met; and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. , a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the determination by the determination means is easy to be performed, and a second game state in which the determination is more difficult to be performed than the first game state. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on at least a predetermined transition condition being satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and A transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as conditions, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means being satisfied. and a benefit granting means capable of granting a predetermined benefit that is advantageous to the player based on the first transition condition. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second benefit different from the first benefit is provided when a transition condition is met.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when a player wins in the second lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting port. There are things that make it easier. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in the above gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, the fluctuation period of the second lottery is set shorter than when another gaming state is set. The second lottery is configured to be executed more often during the set period.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set during a specific gaming state is constant, there is a problem that the game during the specific gaming state becomes monotonous and the player's desire to play decreases. there were. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which it is easy to obtain acquisition information is set, the timing varies depending on the transition condition that is satisfied among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Benefits can be given. Therefore, even though the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the first gaming state to end without receiving any benefits, so it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from occurring for the player. This has the effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for setting the settings, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets a condition to be satisfied based on the number of determinations performed by the determining means reaching a predetermined number of times when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the gaming machine Y2 is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of determinations performed by the determining means during the period in which the first gaming state is set, so that the player is not subjected to excessive stress. This has the effect of suppressing the granting of benefits.

In the game machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state, and a predetermined execution. and a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and the determining means is configured to cause the variable ball entry means to The determination is performed based on the entry of a game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is easier to execute than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in the state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the benefit granting means grants, as the first benefit granted when the first transition condition is satisfied, a gaming state in which the specific game is more easily executed than the first gaming state. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by:

In the gaming machine Y4, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a determining condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination executed by the determining means. , dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined execution condition is such that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. The dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period to be shorter when the first benefit is provided than when the first benefit is not provided. A gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that it makes it easy to set a target display period.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means determines that the determination result of the determination means executed when the first gaming state is set is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6 characterized in that a condition that is satisfied based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number of times is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state in accordance with the determination result of the determining means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the first gaming state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic SA group> (The timing of ending the time saving state is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot)
a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means; and the result of the discrimination is a specific discrimination result. a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed in a display mode to indicate that In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means, when an end condition is satisfied in a state where a particular gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets a game state different from the particular gaming state. A state can be set, and the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a setting means capable of executing a setting for varying the timing at which the other gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Game machine SA0.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability after executing a bonus game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the advantageous gaming states end at the same timing, so that the gaming tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine SA0, since the timing at which a specific gaming state ends can be varied, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the period during which a specific gaming state will continue, and the gaming becomes monotonous. It has the effect of being able to suppress things.

The gaming machine SA0 has an updating means capable of updating information for setting the specific gaming state to another gaming state, and the setting means updates the information. Gaming machine SA1 is characterized in that the trigger for updating is variable.

According to the gaming machine SA1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine SA0, even if the content of the information updated by the updating means is the same, the timing at which a specific gaming state is ended can be made different. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to predict the period during which a specific gaming state will continue, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine SA1 includes a gaming state determining means capable of determining the gaming state at the time when the result of the determination by the determining means becomes the specific determination result, and the specific condition is determined by the determination by the gaming state determining means. Gaming machine SA2 is characterized in that it can be established based on the result.

According to the gaming machine SA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SA1, the timing at which a specific gaming state is ended can be varied depending on the gaming state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained, so that it is possible for the player to On the other hand, it is possible to make the player interested in the set game state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In gaming machine SA2, gaming machine SA3 is characterized in that the updating means can update the information based on at least the number of determinations performed by the determining means during the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine SA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SA1 or SA2, it is determined whether or not to end a specific gaming state based on the number of determinations made by the determining means executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a specific gaming state from continuing excessively.

In the gaming machine SA3, the setting means is configured to set the setting means at any timing within a period from when the determination means executes the determination until the identification information for indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine SA4 characterized in that the setting can be executed so that the information is updated by the updating means.

According to the gaming machine SA4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SA3, the timing for ending a specific gaming state is variable within the period in which identification information 1 is dynamically displayed. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the determining means from performing a new determination in a state where the conditions for terminating the process are satisfied.

In the gaming machine SA4, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting at least a first gaming state and the specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the plurality of different gaming states. If the determination result of the gaming state determining means is the first gaming state, the setting means sets the When the information is set to be updated and the determination result of the gaming state determining means is the specific gaming state, from when the identification state is dynamically displayed until the identification information is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine SA5 is characterized in that the information is updated during a period of time.

According to the gaming machine SA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SA4, when a specific determination result is obtained in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the period during which the specific gaming state continues can be extended. This has the effect that the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic SB group> (You can set a time saving that is easy to obtain special drawing reservations and a time saving that is difficult to obtain)
A ball entering means in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a variable means, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored, and the storage means; Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on stored information; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means; When the identification information dynamically displayed by the objective display means is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the determination is a specific determination result, it is possible to execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player. a bonus game execution means; a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a specific game state in which the ball landing means is likely to be changed to the first state by the variable means; In the gaming machine, the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state in which the period during which the state is changed to the first state is likely to be longer, and the state is changed to the first state from the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine SB1 is characterized in that at least a second specific gaming state having a short variable period is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state in which the player becomes advantageous after executing a bonus game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when an advantageous gaming state is established, a variable member is provided to make it easier to enter the game ball into the starting port. There is a method that makes it easier to execute a lottery for winning or losing games than when no advantageous gaming state is set. Further, by providing a means that can store up to a predetermined number of rights to execute a winning/failure lottery, the advantageous gaming state is ended with a predetermined number of rights to execute a winning/failure lottery acquired during the advantageous gaming state being secured. As a result, there are some games in which a minimum amount of benefits (the right to execute a lottery) can be granted to players who are playing in an advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine described above has the problem that the above-mentioned minimum benefits are given each time an advantageous gaming state is set, so that the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine SB1, the ease with which a game ball enters the ball entering means during a specific gaming state can be varied depending on the type of a specific gaming state that is set. This has the effect that it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not a specific gaming state is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine SB1, the gaming state setting means sets another gaming state when an end condition is satisfied in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the ending condition is set by the above-mentioned entry. A game machine SB2 characterized in that it can be established based on a game ball entering the ball means.

According to the gaming machine SB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SB1, even if the second specific gaming state is set, at least one ball is played until the specific gaming state ends. It becomes possible to cause the ball to enter the ball entry means. Therefore, even though a specific gaming state has been set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific gaming state ends without the game ball entering the ball entering means. There is.

The gaming machine SB2 includes: a determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means; When the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the result of the determination is a specific determination result, the variable means is set to a predetermined variable pattern. a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game varying from the second state to the first state; and a game ball entering the ball entering means while the specific game executing means is executing the specific game. A gaming machine SB3 characterized in that it has an ending means capable of ending the specific game based on the ball being hit.

According to the gaming machine SB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SB2, it is possible to end a specific game in which the variable means can be changed to the first state based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a large number of game balls from entering the ball entering means during a specific game.

In the gaming machine SB3, the ending means ends the specific game when one game ball enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine SB4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine SB3, the number of game balls entering the ball entering means can be set to the minimum unit in one specific game, so that a large amount of This has the effect of suppressing the game ball from entering the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine SB4, the gaming state setting means causes the dynamic display of the identification information to stop displaying after the determination by the determining means is performed when the termination condition is satisfied during the second specific gaming state. The other gaming state can be set at any timing until the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display period of the second identification information is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information. Game machine SB5.

According to the gaming machine SB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SB4, in the second specific gaming state, the specific game ends based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the determining means A determination is made based on Since the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the determination result is set shorter than the dynamic display period of the second identification information required until the next specific game is executed, the information is stored in the storage means. It is possible to easily end a specific game state without being stored. Therefore, when a specific gaming state is set, it is easy to determine whether information is stored in the storage means at the end of the specific gaming state, depending on the type of the specific gaming state that is set. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic SC group> (Execute pre-reading effect even if it is a special drawing that starts changing immediately)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, an information acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means, and information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored. A storage means, a determination means capable of performing a determination based on information stored in the storage means, and a display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. It is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the determination is a specific determination result. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game such as a discriminating means; and a pre-effect execution means capable of executing a pre-effect based on the result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means at least before the discrimination based on the information to be subjected to the pre-discrimination is executed. , the gaming machine has a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance including a specific mode that is at least a part of the performance mode of the preliminary performance in a period different from the preliminary performance. A gaming machine SC0 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, the right to execute a winning lottery for a game is configured to be able to be stored in a predetermined number at an upper limit, and a pre-reading process is executed for determining the result of the winning lottery in advance on the reserved execution right, A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process during a period until a winning lottery corresponding to the execution right is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-011085). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, if the execution right is always reserved and stored, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by pre-reading presentation, but if the game continues in a situation where the execution right is not reserved and stored. If there is a pre-reading effect, the pre-read effect is not executed, which causes a problem that a monotonous effect is likely to be executed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine SC0, a specific performance including a specific aspect included in the preliminary performance can be executed in a period different from the preliminary performance, so even if a situation arises that makes it difficult to execute the preliminary performance. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress the presentation effect from deteriorating and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine SC0, the specific performance executing means is capable of executing the specific performance in an execution period that includes at least a period after the determination by the determining means is performed.

According to the gaming machine SC1, since it is possible to execute a specific performance including a specific mode using the period after the determination by the discriminating means is performed, the game machine does not know at what timing the performance including the specific mode is executed. This has the effect of making it difficult for people to understand and enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine SC1, the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance if a waiting period from the acquisition of the information to the execution of the determination based on the acquired information is within a predetermined period. A gaming machine SC2 is characterized in that it is possible.

According to the gaming machine SC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine SC1, even in a situation where the waiting period is short, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to suppress the performance effect from decreasing. There is.

In the gaming machine SC2, the gaming machine SC3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is capable of executing the specific performance when the waiting period is shorter than the performance period of the preliminary performance.

According to the gaming machine SC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SC2, a specific performance is executed when the performance period for the preliminary performance cannot be secured, so the performance effect is reduced by not performing the preliminary performance. This has the effect of preventing you from doing it.

In any of the gaming machines SC1 to SC3, the discrimination means can execute the discrimination at least when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, and the specific performance execution means stores the information in the storage means. is not stored and the identification information is not dynamically displayed, the specific performance can be executed based on the information acquisition means acquiring the information. Machine SC4.

According to the gaming machine SC4, in a situation where the determination based on the acquired information is immediately executed, it is confirmed that when new information is acquired, that is, it is not possible to secure a period for executing the preliminary performance. Since it is possible to execute a specific performance in the state, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines SC1 to SC4 has a storage number information display means capable of displaying storage number information corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means, and the advance performance execution means As a first preliminary effect, it is possible to perform an effect that changes the display mode of the memory number information to a specific mode, and the specific effect execution means uses the memory number information displayed by the memory number information display means. The gaming machine SC5 is characterized in that the specific performance can be executed without any trouble.

According to the gaming machine SC5, since it is possible to execute a specific performance including a specific mode using information other than the memory number information, when the specific performance is executed after the determination by the discrimination means is performed, the player does not feel uncomfortable. This has the effect of being able to suppress the possibility of giving.

In any of the gaming machines SC1 to SC5, the result of the determination corresponding to the identification information being dynamically displayed during a production period that includes at least a part of the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. and a dynamic display effect execution means capable of executing a dynamic display effect for displaying the specific mode, and the dynamic display effect execution means executes the dynamic display effect in a display mode including a related mode related to the specific mode. A gaming machine SC6 is characterized in that it is possible.

According to the gaming machine SC6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines SC1 to SC5, it is possible to execute both a performance including a specific aspect and a performance including a related aspect even in a situation where the preliminary performance cannot be performed. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

<Characteristic SD group> (Different time saving end timing within one variable period)
a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means; and the result of the discrimination is a specific discrimination result. a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed in a display mode to indicate that In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means, when an end condition is satisfied in a state where a particular gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets a game state different from the particular gaming state. The gaming machine can set the specific gaming state to end at different timings within a period from when the determining means executes the determination until the game ends based on the determination. A gaming machine SD0 characterized by having an executable setting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability after executing a bonus game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the advantageous gaming states end at the same timing, so that the gaming tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine SD0, since the timing at which a specific gaming state ends can be made different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which a specific gaming state will continue, and the gaming becomes monotonous. It has the effect of being able to suppress things.

The gaming machine SD0 has an updating means capable of updating information for setting the specific gaming state to another gaming state, and the setting means updates the information. A gaming machine SD1 is characterized in that the trigger for updating can be varied.

According to the gaming machine SD1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine SD0, even if the content of the information updated by the updating means is the same, the timing at which a specific gaming state ends can be made different. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to predict the period during which a specific gaming state will continue, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine SD1 includes a gaming state determining means capable of determining the gaming state at the time when the result of the determination by the determining means becomes the specific determination result, and the setting means is configured to determine the gaming state by the determining means. A gaming machine SD2 is characterized in that different timings can be set based on the results.

According to the gaming machine SD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SD1, the timing at which a specific gaming state is ended can be varied depending on the gaming state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained, so that it is possible for the player to On the other hand, it is possible to make the player interested in the set game state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine SD2, the setting means selects one timing from among a plurality of timings including at least a first timing that is advantageous to the player and a second timing that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first timing. A gaming machine SD3 is characterized in that it is possible to set.

According to the gaming machine SD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SD2, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the timing set by the setting means, so at what timing a specific gaming state ends. This has the effect of making the player more interested in the game and increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic SE group> (It is possible to set time savings that are easy to obtain special drawing reservations and time savings that are difficult to obtain)
A ball entering means in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a variable means; an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means; a storage means in which information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored; Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on stored information; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means; When the identification information dynamically displayed by the objective display means is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the determination is a specific determination result, it is possible to execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player. a bonus game execution means; a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a specific game state in which the ball landing means is likely to be changed to the first state by the variable means; In the gaming machine, the specific gaming state includes a first state in which it is easier to store the information in the storage means, and a first state in which it is more difficult to store the information in the storage means than in the first specific gaming state. A gaming machine SE1 characterized in that at least a second state is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state in which the player becomes advantageous after executing a bonus game with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when an advantageous gaming state is established, a variable member is provided to make it easier to enter the game ball into the starting port. There is a method that makes it easier to execute a lottery for winning or losing games than when no advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, by providing a means that can store up to a predetermined number of rights to execute the winning/failure lottery, the advantageous gaming state is ended with a predetermined number of rights to execute the winning/failure drawing acquired during the advantageous gaming state secured. As a result, there are some games in which a minimum amount of benefits (the right to execute a lottery) can be granted to players who are playing in an advantageous gaming state. The above-described gaming machine has the problem that the above-mentioned minimum benefits are given each time an advantageous gaming state is set, so that the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine SE1, the ease with which information is stored in the storage means during a specific gaming state can be changed depending on the type of the specific gaming state that is set. This has the effect that it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether the gaming state is set and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine SE1, the gaming state setting means sets another gaming state when an ending condition is satisfied in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the ending condition is set based on the entry. A gaming machine SE2 characterized in that it can be established based on a game ball entering the ball means.

According to the gaming machine SE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SE1, even if the second state is set, at least one game ball can be entered until the end of a specific gaming state. It becomes possible to make the ball enter the means. Therefore, even though a specific gaming state has been set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific gaming state ends without the game ball entering the ball entering means. There is.

The gaming machine SE2 includes: a determining means capable of executing a predetermined determination; a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means; When the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the result of the determination is a specific determination result, the variable means is set to a predetermined variable pattern. a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game varying from the second state to the first state; and a game ball entering the ball entering means while the specific game executing means is executing the specific game. A gaming machine SE3 characterized in that it has an ending means capable of ending the specific game based on the fact that the ball has been hit.

According to the gaming machine SE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine SE2, it is possible to terminate a specific game in which the variable means can be changed to the first state based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a large number of game balls from entering the ball entering means during a specific game.

<Characteristic SF group> (There are cases in which it is better for the special drawing lottery result to be a loss during time saving, and cases in which it is better to be a small hit.)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means; When the identification information dynamically displayed by the objective display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is provided. One game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least an executable bonus game execution means, a first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A gaming machine having a game state setting means, further comprising a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game different from the bonus game based on a specific condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game; The game state setting means is configured such that after the specific game ends, a predetermined end condition is satisfied in a state where at least a first setting that allows the second game state to be set and the second game state are set. a second setting in which the first gaming state can be set based on the second gaming state, and as the second gaming state, the determination result of the determining means executed during the second gaming state is the specific determination. A first state in which a case other than the result is more advantageous to the player than a case where the specific discrimination result is the specific discrimination result, and a first state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine SF1 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second state that is more disadvantageous than the case where the game machine SF1 is set.

According to the gaming machine SF1, the degree of advantage to the player can be changed by the combination of the determination result by the determining means executed during the second gaming state and the set type of the second gaming state. Therefore, it has the effect of raising expectations among players.

<Characteristics ZA group> (set wait time after jackpot game ends)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. When the identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed while the information is stored, the movement of the identification information for indicating the new discrimination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. dynamic display standby means capable of starting a display of a target, and when the bonus game ends with the information stored in the storage means, a specific period longer than the predetermined period has elapsed; A gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that it has a specific dynamic display standby means that can later start dynamic display of identification information for indicating a new determination result.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZA1, after a bonus game is executed, the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a new determination result is started after a specific period longer than the normal predetermined period has elapsed, so that the game cannot be played. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the bonus game will be continued again, and there is an effect that the problem of monotonous play can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the acquisition means acquires first information as the information when a first acquisition condition is satisfied, and acquires the second information when a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is satisfied. If the first information and the second information are stored in the storage means, the discrimination means prioritizes discrimination based on the second information. The gaming machine ZA2 according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine ZA2 is executed by

According to the gaming machine AZ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AZ1, the second information can be easily stored during a specific period even if the second information is not stored when the bonus game ends. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination based on the first information from being performed.

Gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines ZA1 and ZA2, the gaming machine ZA3 has a setting means that can set the probability that the second acquisition condition will be met after the bonus game ends to be higher than that in the normal gaming state.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines ZA1 and ZA2, the second information can be easily stored and the first information can be determined by the time a specific period elapses after the bonus game ends. It has the effect of suppressing

A game characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3 has variable means that can vary and set the specific period based on predetermined conditions when the bonus game ends. Machine ZA4.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the specific period can be varied based on predetermined conditions, so that the problem of the player getting tired of the game early can be suppressed. There is.

<Features ZB group> (wait time period can be switched)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. When the identification information for indicating a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed while the information is stored, the movement of the identification information for indicating the new discrimination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. dynamic display standby means that can start displaying a target; and when the bonus game ends with the information stored in the storage means, new identification information is added after a first period has elapsed; switching means capable of switching at least between a first state in which the dynamic display of the new identification information is started and a second state in which the dynamic display of the new identification information is started after a second period different from the first period has elapsed; A gaming machine ZB1 characterized by having the following.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZB1, since the timing at which the identification information is dynamically displayed is varied between the first state and the second state, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful that the bonus game will continue again. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the game becomes monotonous. In the gaming machine ZB1, the acquisition means acquires first information as the information when a first acquisition condition is satisfied, and acquires second information when a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is satisfied. If the first information and the second information are stored in the storage means, the discrimination means prioritizes discrimination based on the second information. The gaming machine ZB2 according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine ZB2 is executed by

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1, the second information can be easily stored during a specific period even if the second information is not stored when the bonus game ends. , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination based on the first information from being performed.

Gaming machine ZB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines ZB1 and ZB2, the gaming machine ZB3 has a setting means that can set the probability that the second acquisition condition will be met after the bonus game ends to be higher than that in the normal gaming state.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines ZB1 and ZB2, the second information can be easily stored and the first information can be determined by the time a specific period has elapsed after the end of the bonus game. It has the effect of suppressing

<Characteristic ZC group> (Short wait time)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. A state setting means capable of setting a first state in which information can be obtained and a second state in which it is more difficult to obtain the information than the first state, and the first state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine ZC1 characterized in that it has a restriction means capable of restricting the execution of the determination by the determination means for a specific period in the state.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

Then, the winning/failure lottery of the game was executed, however, there was a problem that the game became monotonous because the timing at which the fluctuation of the symbols started was constant.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZC1, after a bonus game is executed, dynamic display of identification information for indicating a new determination result is started after a specific period longer than the normal predetermined period has elapsed, so that the game cannot be played. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the bonus game will be continued again, and there is an effect that the problem of monotonous play can be suppressed.

A gaming machine ZC2, in the gaming machine ZC1, further comprising a canceling means that can cancel the restriction imposed by the restricting means before the specified period elapses.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects provided by the ZC1, the state where the discrimination by the discrimination means is restricted can be canceled by the release means before the specific period elapses, so that the restriction by the restriction means is eliminated. Even if the determination is executed, the determination by the determination means can be performed at an early stage. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to a prolonged period in which the determination by the determination means is not performed.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the storage means is capable of storing the information up to a predetermined number, and the canceling means releases the limit when the information stored in the storage means reaches the predetermined number. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being unlockable.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the restrictions are canceled by storing the upper limit number of information in the storage means, the player is forced to play a game that is restricted by the restriction means for an unnecessarily long time, and the player This has the effect of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play. Furthermore, by storing a predetermined number of information in the storage means, it is possible to cancel the restrictions imposed by the restriction means, so that the effect is that the player can be forced to play the game in order to have the restrictions imposed by the restriction means removed. There is.

<Characteristic ZD group> (Determine the gaming state with the Yakuren gate)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, the game ball can pass through. The first game information can be set based on a first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a game ball passing through the first specific area, and the second specific area. A game information setting means capable of setting second game information different from the first game information based on the passage of a game ball through a specific area, and a type of game information corresponding to the game information set by the game information setting means. A gaming machine ZD1 characterized in that it has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZD1, different gaming states are set depending on the specific area through which the game ball passes, so that it is possible to arouse interest in the specific area through which the game ball passes.

In the game machine ZD1, when the identification information for indicating a determination result other than the specific determination result is stopped and displayed while the information is stored in the storage means, the new determination is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. dynamic display standby means capable of starting a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a result; A first state in which dynamic display of new identification information is started after one period has elapsed; and a second state in which dynamic display of new identification information is started after a second period different from the first period has elapsed. A gaming machine ZD2 characterized in that it has a state setting means that can set a state corresponding to a gaming state set by the gaming state setting means.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZD1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the timing at which the identification information starts after the end of the bonus game is varied depending on the gaming state, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be varied.

In the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the acquisition means acquires the first information as the information when a first acquisition condition is satisfied, and acquires the second information when a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is satisfied. information can be acquired as the information, and when the first information and the second information are stored in the storage means, the determination means performs the determination based on the second information. Game machine ZD3 is characterized in that it is executed with priority.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is an effect that it is difficult to make a determination based on the first information after the bonus game ends.

<Characteristic ZE group> (during wait time)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. When the bonus game ends while the information is stored, after a specific period has elapsed, specifying that a specific game can be executed to start dynamic display of identification information to show a new discrimination result. A gaming machine ZE1 characterized in that it has a game execution means and a notification means capable of notifying that the specific game is to be executed by the specific game execution means.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZE1, the notification means can notify that a specific game will be executed, which can vary the timing at which the dynamic display of identification information starts after the end of the bonus game. Even if the identification information is not dynamically displayed immediately after the end of the game, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the acquisition means acquires first information as the information when a first acquisition condition is satisfied, and acquires the second information when a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is satisfied. If the first information and the second information are stored in the storage means, the discrimination means prioritizes discrimination based on the second information. The gaming machine ZE2 according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine ZE2 is executed by:

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the bonus game ends, the second information can be easily stored during a specific period even if the second information is not stored, and it is possible to suppress the determination based on the first information from being performed. There is an effect.

In the gaming machines ZE1 and ZE2, the gaming machine ZE3 is characterized in that it has a setting means that can set the probability that the second acquisition condition will be satisfied after the bonus game ends to be higher than in the normal gaming state.

According to gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines ZE1 and ZE2, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the bonus game ends, the second information can be easily stored until a specific period has elapsed, and the first information can be prevented from being discriminated.

A game characterized in that any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3 has variable means that can vary and set the specific period based on predetermined conditions when the bonus game ends. Machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the specific period is varied based on predetermined conditions, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game early.

<Features ZF group> (Production during wait time during jackpot game)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. When the bonus game ends while the information is stored, after a specific period has elapsed, specifying that a specific game can be executed to start dynamic display of identification information to show a new discrimination result. The specific game execution means includes a game execution means and a bonus performance execution means capable of executing a bonus performance executed at least during a period in which the bonus game is being executed, and the specific game execution means is configured to execute the bonus performance by the bonus performance execution means. A gaming machine ZF1 characterized in that the specific game can be executed during a period in which a bonus presentation is being executed.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZF1, it is possible to execute a bonus performance even during a period in which a specific game is being executed in which the timing at which the dynamic display of identification information is started can be varied, so that the identification information can be displayed at different times. This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in a situation where dynamic display is not performed.

A gaming machine ZF2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZF1, execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means is prohibited while the bonus game is being executed.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZF1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the determination means does not perform the determination while the bonus game is being executed, the player cannot tell whether he is currently playing the bonus game or the specific game during the period when the bonus performance is being executed. This has the effect of making it more difficult.

In the gaming machine ZF2, a firing means capable of firing a game ball toward a gaming area, an adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball fired by the firing means according to a player's operation, and the firing means a first area in which a game ball fired with a first firing intensity can flow down, and a second area in which a game ball fired by the firing means with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can flow down. 2 areas, and the gaming machine performs a game in which game balls are fired toward the second area both during the period when the bonus game is being executed and during the period when the specific game is being executed. A gaming machine ZF3 characterized in that it is configured to allow the player to play the game.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZF2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since it is possible to have the player perform the same game during the bonus game and during the specific game, it is possible to make the player play the same game during the bonus game and during the specific game, so during the period when the bonus performance is being executed, it is possible to determine whether the player is currently playing the bonus game or is currently playing the specific game. This has the effect of making it difficult for players to understand.

<Characteristic ZG group> (Random operation gate)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, the game ball can flow down. a first channel; a distributing means capable of distributing the balls flowing down the first channel to either a second channel or a third channel; a variable means that can vary the time required for the game balls to reach the sorting means; a first specific area through which the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path can pass; The first game information can be set based on a second specific area different from the first specific area through which the game ball can pass, and the fact that the game ball has passed through the first specific area, and the second specific area A game information setting means capable of setting second game information different from the first game information based on the passage of a game ball through a region, and a type of game corresponding to the game information set by the game information setting means. A game machine ZG1 characterized in that it has a game state setting means that can set a state.

Traditionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and a pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined period of time to notify the lottery results. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and when a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a fluctuating display of symbols to indicate the next lottery result is started. A configuration has been proposed in which, if the lottery result is a win, after a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed, a new lottery is executed and a symbol to show the lottery result is dynamically displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a problem in that the timing at which the symbols started changing was constant, making the game monotonous. The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine ZD1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to select the specific area through which the game ball passes, so there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the specific area through which the game ball passes.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the bonus game based on the game ball passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. ZG2.

According to gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine ZG1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the game ball passes through the first specific area or the second specific area, it is possible to set the gaming state and execute the bonus game in combination. It has the effect of being able to have

In the gaming machine ZG2, the gaming machine ZG3 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means can set a gaming state that is set after the end of the bonus game.

According to gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine ZG2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the bonus game, the game contents at different points in time are combined and determined by the game ball passing through the first specific area or the second specific area. This has the effect of arousing interest in the specific area that the vehicle passes through.

<Issue caused by varying the timing of ending the time saving state>
When ending the time saving state at the start timing of a special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition, the remaining time count to indicate to the player the timing when the time saving state actually ends and the number of times the time saving state is executed during the time saving state are determined. Since the number of remaining executions of the time-saving effect to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery is different, by displaying both information to the player, it is possible to inform the player of the game content in detail. However, the information reported is complicated, and there is a risk that players may be confused about the game.

Therefore, it is preferable to display only the remaining number of executions without displaying the number of remaining time reductions. With this configuration, it is possible to easily draw attention to the time-saving effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 without worrying about the timing at which the time-saving state ends.

Further, the configuration may be such that only the remaining number of time reductions is displayed without displaying the number of remaining executions. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which an advantageous game during the time saving state, specifically, a game in which a normal symbol lottery is executed becomes an advantageous game advantageous to the player. In this case, a time-saving effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 with content according to the number of remaining times, and a special symbol variation (actual It is preferable to configure the variation effect corresponding to the time saving final variation) to be executed as a special variation effect. With this configuration, the time-saving effect is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of remaining time-saving times, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. In addition, as for the above-mentioned special variation effect, for example, if the special drawing lottery result of the time saving final variation is a loss (game result disadvantageous to the player), a display mode indicating that the time saving state has ended (time saving ending) While displaying the special variation effect that ends the time saving final variation, and if the special drawing result of the time saving final variation is a win (game result advantageous to the player), the time saving ending will be displayed. It is preferable to perform a special variation performance of a performance mode (resurrection performance) indicating a winning performance so as to interrupt the performance.

In addition, if the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be switched between the special symbol fluctuation start timing and the special symbol fluctuation stop timing according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, different production modes corresponding to each can be created. Although it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand by executing a time-saving performance with Therefore, there is a problem in that it is not possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of time saving state that has been set.

In order to solve this problem, immediately after the time saving state is set, a common time saving effect is executed regardless of the time saving type, and a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the time saving effect (for example, Fig. 466(B) ) or the timing of FIG. 467(B)), it is preferable to perform a time-saving performance (dedicated time-saving performance) in a performance mode according to the actually set time-saving type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of time-saving state that has been set.

Further, the timing of shifting from the common time saving performance to the dedicated time saving performance may be determined not based on the elapsed time but on the remaining period. In this case, the dedicated time saving performance is preferably executed when the remaining period of the time saving performance (remaining period of the special symbol variation) reaches the minimum required period to execute the dedicated time saving performance. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which various special symbol fluctuation periods are set, it is possible to fix the performance period of a dedicated time-saving performance (a performance in which the performance result is displayed) that is likely to interest players. can.

Furthermore, as a condition for transitioning from the common time saving performance to the dedicated time saving performance, the game result during the common time saving performance period, for example, based on the result of the player operating the frame button 22, is not based on the elapsed time or remaining time. A condition that is established or a condition that is established when the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times may be used.

Furthermore, in the above-described display modification example, various techniques are used regarding the update content and update timing of the display mode of the remaining time shortening count and the remaining execution count (remaining chance count) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although the idea has been explained, based on the above-mentioned technical idea, the update content and update timing of the display mode of special symbol reservation may be set as appropriate on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, if displaying an increase or decrease in the actual number of reserved special symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode that is contrary to the above-mentioned technical philosophy, the actual increase or decrease in the number of reserved special symbols Instead, a pseudo special pattern pending display performance that increases or decreases in accordance with the timing when the remaining number of executions (remaining number of chances) is updated is emphasized to the player rather than the display mode that shows the actual increase or decrease in the number of special symbols pending. It is best to configure the configuration so that With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player without causing any inconsistency with respect to each of the plurality of display elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

<About issues when switching between right-handed and left-handed games>
There is a gaming machine that switches a gaming method advantageous to a player from one gaming method (for example, a left-handed game) to another gaming method (for example, a right-handed game) when a specific condition is met. According to such a gaming machine, the player can play different games by switching the gaming method, so the player can play the games without getting bored. However, if the configuration is configured to notify the player after a gaming method that is advantageous to the player has been switched, a time lag may occur because the player must grasp the notification content before switching the gaming method. There was a problem with this.

In order to solve this problem, for example, when switching the advantageous gaming method from one gaming method (for example, left-handed game) to another gaming method (for example, right-handed game), a predetermined period of time is required before switching. A transition period (for example, 3 seconds) is provided, that is, a period in which the degree of advantage does not change no matter which gaming method is used. Specifically, as in the win scenario b shown in FIG. 441(a) in the eleventh control example described above, after a game period in which a ball can be won into the V winning opening 1650 in a small winning game has elapsed (ending period), the structure is configured to provide a transition period. Then, during the transition period, a notification effect is executed to notify that the gaming method will be switched. Thereby, before the advantageous gaming method actually switches, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous gaming method will be switched.

The technical idea used for the winning scenario b shown in FIG. 441(a) in the eleventh control example described above is to set a transition period in a state where it is determined that a jackpot game (right-handed game) will actually be executed. However, the idea is not limited to this, for example, the detection sensor 650s detects a ball stored in the storage valve 660a (see FIG. 427) in the V winning device 650, and the ball enters the V winning opening. 1650 is provided, and when it is determined that there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the V winning slot 1650, the game method is changed before the ball actually enters the V winning slot 1650. It may be configured to perform a suggestion effect to suggest switching. As a result, compared to the case where the above-mentioned notification effect is executed after it is confirmed that the gaming method will be switched, it is possible to wait until the gaming method is actually switched (until the jackpot game is executed) after it is confirmed that the gaming method will be switched. ) can be shortened, and smooth gaming can be provided.

Unlike the contents of the small winning game used in the eleventh control example described above, when a small winning game of a specific small winning type is executed, a variable ball entry means (which is opened during the small winning game) is used. For example, in a gaming machine configured such that when a ball enters the V-winning device 650), the ball almost enters a specific area (V-winning port 1650) after a predetermined period (there is a high possibility of winning). may be configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect at the time when the ball enters the variable ball entry means during a small winning game, or may be configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect when the ball enters the variable ball entry means during a small winning game. It may be configured such that the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the ball cannot be pitched.

In addition, in the example described above, since the gaming method is switched in response to a winning game, by setting a transition period in advance during the winning game, the advantageous gaming method can be set for the player before the advantageous gaming method actually switches. It was possible to make it known that the game method will be changed.

Next, we will explain the problem when the game method changes regardless of the winning game. In the 11th control example described above, there is a technique of ending the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, or ending the time saving state at the stop timing, and a technique of ending the time saving state at a specific timing during the special symbol fluctuation period. The technical philosophy is described. In the eleventh control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the same gaming method (left-handed game) is the advantageous gaming method for the game during the time saving state and the game in the normal state set after the end of the time saving state. (See Figure 425).

Therefore, no matter at what timing during the special symbol fluctuation period the time-saving state ends, there is no need to execute a notification effect to inform the player to switch the gaming method, so it is not necessary to perform a notification effect to inform the player to switch the gaming method. In addition, since there is no need to provide the above-mentioned transition period, it is possible to smoothly play the game without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Further, since there is no need to execute a notification effect for switching the gaming method, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the gaming state has changed.

However, in some conventional gaming machines, the advantageous gaming method changes when the time-saving state ends, such as right-handed gaming during the time-saving state and left-handed gaming during the normal state. If the technical idea of the eleventh control example described above is applied to such a conventional gaming machine, for example, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending and the advantageous gaming method to switch at the start timing of the special symbol variation. The notification performance (for example, an announcement sound or display asking you to return to left-handed batting) is executed, making it difficult to tell on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at what timing the gaming state has changed. When executing a time-saving effect (for example, refer to the technical concept described in FIGS. 455 and 456 of the 12th control example and the display modification examples (FIGS. 466 and 467) of the 11th control example), the effect is significantly There was a problem that the effectiveness decreased.

In order to solve such problems, for example, it is preferable to determine the content of the time-saving effect that is being executed, and to vary the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the determination result. Specifically, when a time-saving effect is being executed that makes it easier to understand when the time-saving state has ended, rather than when a time-saving effect is being executed that makes it difficult to understand when the time-saving state has ended. In this case, it is better to configure the system so that the notification effect can be varied so that the player can easily understand the contents of the notification. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the performance content in the entire pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In this case, as a method to make it difficult for the player to understand the content of the notification, the system may be configured to prohibit the execution of the notification effect, or may output an announcement sound at a volume that the player cannot hear. Alternatively, the notification performance may be displayed in a display format that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

On the other hand, as a technical concept to ensure that players understand that the gaming method changes at various timings of special symbol variations, for example, special symbol variations that confirm the end of the time saving state (time saving final variation) ) It is better to perform the notification effect in advance in accordance with the stop timing of the previous special symbol variation. In this case, for example, when executing the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, a means is provided to determine whether the current special symbol variation is one before the time saving final variation, and the current special symbol variation is It is preferable to configure the system so that when it is determined that it is one time before the final change in time saving, a fixed time longer than usual is set, and to execute the notification effect using the fixed time. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the notification performance from being executed during the special symbol variation period.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification effect may be configured to be executed after the fact at the stop display timing of the final time saving variation, regardless of the timing of the final time saving variation at which the time saving state ends. In this case, a means is provided to determine whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a time-saving final fluctuation, and if it is determined that the current special symbol fluctuation is a time-saving final fluctuation, a longer confirmation time than usual is set. It is preferable to configure the system so that the determined time is used to execute the notification effect. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the notification performance from being executed during the special symbol variation period.

<Technical philosophy for increasing/decreasing the number of reserved special maps that have been acquired at the end of the time saving state>
Technology that reduces the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired at the end of the time-saving state by making it difficult to start a game with regular symbols during the time-saving state by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time-saving state thought. In this technical idea, since it is possible to reduce the number of games per regular symbol that are executed during the time-saving game, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired at the end of the time-saving state as a result. In addition, if the remaining period of the time-saving state satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the number of remaining changes equals the upper limit of the number of special drawings on hold), by shortening the fluctuation time of special drawing fluctuations, you can already obtain It may be configured such that the reserved special drawings that have already been reserved are used up in a short period of time to end the time saving state.

A technology that reduces the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired at the end of the time-saving state by making it difficult to start a game with a common symbol during the time-saving state by lengthening the fluctuation time of the regular symbol fluctuation executed during the time-saving state. thought. In this technical idea, since it is possible to reduce the number of games per regular symbol that are executed during the time-saving game, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired at the end of the time-saving state as a result. In addition, if the remaining period of the time saving state satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the number of remaining variations equals the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings), by increasing the fluctuation time of the general drawing fluctuation, you can already obtain It may be configured to make it easier to end the time saving state in a state where the reserved special symbols have been used up.

A technical concept that ends the time-saving state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation. In this technical concept, the time saving state can be ended immediately after the acquired special drawing reservations are used up, so it is possible to make it difficult to end the time saving state in a state where the special drawing reservations have reached the upper limit number. In this case, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, when a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are satisfied in the time-saving final variation, the timing at which the time-saving state is terminated may be made different. For example, if you win a small hit in the final time saving variation, the time saving state will continue until the small winning game ends, and if you lose and win, the time saving state will end at the start timing of the final time saving variation. Also good.

By ending the time saving state at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation in the final time saving variation and lengthening the confirmation time after the stop display, the game that was executed during the time saving state continues after the time saving state ends. A technical idea that makes it difficult to occur. In this technical concept, a long confirmation time is set between the end of the time saving state and the start of the next special symbol change, specifically, a time longer than the playing period of the regular symbol game. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which a game with regular symbols executed during the time saving state continues until after the special symbol variation is executed after the time saving state ends, and a new special symbol reservation can be acquired during the normal state. I can do it.

A technical concept for forcibly ending the game that is being executed with a winning pattern at the end timing of the time saving state. In this technical concept, since it is possible to forcibly prohibit a game with a common symbol that was executed during the time saving state from continuing until the end of the time saving state, a game with a common symbol that was executed during the time saving state can be forcibly prohibited from continuing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which a new special symbol reservation can be acquired during the normal state, which continues until after the execution of the special symbol variation after the end of the time saving state.

By combining the above-mentioned technical ideas, a composite technical idea increases or decreases the number of executions of special pattern variations using special pattern reservation in the normal state after the end of the time saving state. For example, it is possible to set a short confirmation time (1 second) and a long confirmation time (10 seconds) as the confirmation time set for the time saving final variation, and furthermore, it is possible to set a short confirmation time (1 second) and a long confirmation time (10 seconds), and furthermore, it is possible to forcibly play a game per normal figure. It is configured to be able to set whether to terminate or not to terminate. Then, the length of the symbol confirmation time and the ending method of the game per regular symbol are determined according to the special symbol lottery result (symbol type) of the short time final variation and the symbol type of the regular symbol won per regular symbol. Thereby, at the time when the time saving state ends and transitions to the normal state, it is possible to vary the possibility that the game per normal symbol that was executed during the time saving state will be executed.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means is provided for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium, and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766).
However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on information, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. A bonus game that allows a player to execute a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. execution means, and when the bonus game ends with the information stored in the storage means, identification information for indicating a new determination result after a specific period has elapsed. a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game that starts a dynamic display; and a bonus performance execution means capable of executing a bonus performance executed at least during a period in which the bonus game is being executed; The specific game execution means is capable of executing the specific game during the period in which the bonus presentation is being executed by the bonus presentation execution means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means is prohibited while the bonus game is being executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, which includes a firing means capable of firing a game ball toward a gaming area, and a player's ability to control the firing intensity of the game ball fired by the firing means. an adjusting means that can be adjusted according to the operation; a first region in which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity by the firing means can flow down; and a second region that is different from the first firing intensity by the firing means. a second area in which game balls fired with a firing intensity of The player is configured to play a game in which a game ball is fired toward a second area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a game machine based on the information stored in the storage means. A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a display execution means; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a new determination result after a specific period has elapsed when the bonus game ends while the information is stored in the storage means. The specific game execution means has a specific game execution means that can execute a specific game to be started, and a bonus performance execution means that can execute a bonus performance that is executed at least during a period in which the bonus game is being executed. The specific game can be executed during the period in which the bonus performance is being executed by the bonus performance execution means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, while the bonus game is being executed, execution of the determination by the determination means is prohibited.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a firing means capable of firing a game ball toward a gaming area, an adjusting means capable of adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball fired by the firing means according to the player's operation, and a first a first region in which a game ball fired with a firing intensity of , the gaming machine is configured to cause a player to play a game in which a game ball is fired toward the second area both during a period when the bonus game is being executed and during a period when the specific game is being executed. It is composed of
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)

Claims (1)

an acquisition means capable of acquiring information;
a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means;
a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
Dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
an advantageous state setting means capable of setting an advantageous state in which advantageous benefits can be granted to the player based on the display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means; In gaming machines that
The dynamic display execution means is configured to perform, when identification information for indicating a predetermined determination result different from the specific determination result is stopped and displayed at least in a state where the information is stored in the storage means; configured to dynamically display the identification information to show the new discrimination result after a predetermined period of time has elapsed;
The gaming machine is
As a specific period from the end of the advantageous state in which the information is stored in the storage means until the new identification information is dynamically displayed, a first period and a second period different from the first period are defined. information regarding the state of the game that is set based on the specific determination result, regardless of the number of the information stored in the storage means. is configured to be decidable in response to
A period longer than at least the predetermined period can be determined as the second period,
A correspondence mode corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means is configured to be notified at least during the specific period,
The amount of the benefit acquired by the player in the predetermined advantageous state in which the player can obtain a predetermined amount of the benefit may be the predetermined amount or an amount smaller than the predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized in that the same period is determined as the specific period.

Images